Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review/Test

go-math-grade-4-chapter-10-two-dimensional-figures-review-test-answer-key

Want to test your level of preparation and subject knowledge? Then, Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review/Test is the best option. Just download the 4th grade Go Math ch 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review/Test solution key pdf for free from this page & practice well. Students will find a detailed explanation for all the questions in Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review/Test. So, practice the problems from Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures & improve your math skills.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review/Test

By preparing the number of questions from Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review/Test helps you score well in the exams. With the help of Review Test questions, You can test your knowledge and enhance your skills. Follow the questions and verify your answers in Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review/Test. Simply hit on the available links and download the answers.

Review/Test – Page No. 411

Choose the best term from the box to complete the sentence. 
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 1

Question 1.
A ____________ is a quadrilateral with exactly one pair of parallel sides.
________

Answer: Trapezoid
A Trapezoid is a quadrilateral with exactly one pair of parallel sides.

Question 2.
A shape has _____________ if it can be folded about a line so that its two parts match exactly.
________

Answer: Line Symmetry
A shape has Line Symmetry if it can be folded about a line so that its two parts match exactly.

Question 3.
A ____________ has one endpoint and continues without end in one direction.
________

Answer: Ray
A Ray has one endpoint and continues without end in one direction.

Tell if the blue line appears to be a line of symmetry.
Write yes or no.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 2
_____

Answer: Yes

Explanation:
The line of symmetry divides a shape into two parts that are the same size and shape.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 3
_____

Answer: No

Explanation:
The line of symmetry divides a shape into two parts that are not of the same size and shape.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 4
_____

Answer: Yes

Explanation:
The line of symmetry divides a shape into two parts that are the same size and shape.

Use Figure A for 7–9.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 5

Question 7.
Name a pair of perpendicular lines.
Type below:
________

Answer: \(\overleftrightarrow { AB } \) and \(\overleftrightarrow { BF } \)

Explanation:
The pair of perpendicular lines in the above figure is \(\overleftrightarrow { AB } \) and \(\overleftrightarrow { BF } \)

Question 8.
Name a pair of intersecting lines that are not perpendicular.
Type below:
________

Answer: \(\overleftrightarrow { AG } \) and \(\overleftrightarrow { GD } \)

Explanation:
The pair of intersecting lines that are not perpendicular lines in the above figure is \(\overleftrightarrow { AG } \) and \(\overleftrightarrow { GD } \).

Question 9.
Classify ∠AGD. Write acute, right, or obtuse.
________

Answer: Acute

Explanation:
The angle ∠AGD is less than 90° thus the figure is an acute angle.

Review/Test – Page No. 412

Fill in the bubble completely to show your answer.

Question 10.
Which describes the shape?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 6
Options:
a. zero lines of symmetry
b. 1 line of symmetry
c. 2 lines of symmetry
d. more than 2 lines of symmetry

Answer: 1 line of symmetry

Explanation:
The trapezoid has only a vertical line of symmetry.
Thus the above shape is a trapezoid and it has one line of symmetry.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 11.

Which figure does not have two pairs of parallel sides?
Options:
a. parallelogram
b. trapezoid
c. rhombus
d. square

Answer: parallelogram

Explanation:
The parallelogram has no lines of symmetry.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 12.
How many right angles can be in an obtuse triangle?
Options:
a. 0
b. 1
c. 2
d. 3

Answer: 1

Explanation:
An obtuse triangle is a triangle with one obtuse angle greater than 90°.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 13.
Which is the correct label for a right angle in the figure?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 7
Options:
a. ∠XYZ
b. ∠XYW
c. ∠ZXY
d. ∠ZYX

Answer: ∠ZXY

Explanation:
The right angle is at point X. So, the correct label for a right angle in the figure is ∠ZXY.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 14.
Which of the following letters of the alphabet has line symmetry?
Options:
a. S
b. F
c. H
d. N

Answer: H

Explanation:
The line of symmetry divides a shape H into two parts that are the same size and shape.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Review/Test – Page No. 413

Fill in the bubble completely to show your answer.

Question 15.
Which statement is true?
Options:
a. A trapezoid can never have a right angle.
b. A parallelogram can never have a right angle.
c. A rhombus is a type of trapezoid.
d. A square is a type of parallelogram.

Answer: A square is a type of parallelogram.
Square – A parallelogram with four sides of equal length and angles of equal size.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 16.
Which lines appear parallel?
Options:
a. Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 8
b. Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 9
c. Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 10
d. Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 11

Answer: Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 9

Explanation:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 8
It has 2 intersecting lines so the lines are not parallel.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 9
The lines are not intersecting. So the lines are parallel.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 17.
Norris drew the pattern below.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 12
Which is the missing figure in the pattern?
Options:
a. Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 13
b. Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 14
c. Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 15
d. Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 16

Answer:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 13

Explanation:
By seeing the above pattern we can guess the missing figure.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Review/Test – Page No. 414

Describe a pattern. Write a rule using numbers to find the number of squares in any figure in the pattern.

Question 18.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 17
Type below:
________

Answer: 2, 4, 6, 8

Question 19.
Classify the figure as many ways as possible. Write quadrilateral, trapezoid, parallelogram, rhombus, rectangle, or square.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 18
________

Answer: Parallelogram
The above figure is a parallelogram.

Question 20.
Evie’s birthday is the 18th day of May. Since May is the 5th month, Evie wrote the date like this:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 19
A. Evie says all the numbers she wrote have line symmetry. Is she correct? Explain your thinking.
Type below:
________

Answer: No
All the numbers that Evie wrote are not symmetrical because 5 will not be divided into equal parts and shapes.

Question 20.
B. Choose one of the numbers Evie wrote. Using a straightedge, draw a line of symmetry.
Type below:
________

Answer: 8
Go math Grade 4 Key Chapter 10 Review Test Img_2

Question 20.
C. Using the same format as Evie, write a date for which all the numbers have line symmetry.
Type below:
________

Answer:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 10 Review Test Img_1
The above figure has line symmetry for all the numbers.

Conclusion:

We hope the data given here is helpful for all 4th Grade Students. For more questions, you can also refer to the Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures. Moreover, check the homework practice FL Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures and Practice well to score good grades in the standard test & exams.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers is the most important learning guide to learn the subject properly. It is a quick preparation & practice purpose material for students and educators. So, We have provided the solutions for all the questions with a brief explanation in this Go Math HMH Grade 4 Chapter 4 Answer Key. All these solutions are prepared by the Math Experts. Students and parents are suggested to Download Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers pdf from here for free.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers

Avail all detailed solutions to the questions via Go Math Answer Key of grade 4 chapter 4 and aid while doing homework and also while preparing for the exams. Just tap on the respective lesson link from chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers and solve the questions. Along with the exercise and homework problems, we have also listed the answers for the mid-chapter checkpoint and review test in the Go Math Grade 4 Solution Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers.

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 1

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 2

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 3

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 4

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 5

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 6

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 7

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 8

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 9

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 10

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 11

Mid Chapter Checkpoint

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 12

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 13

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 14

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 15

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 16

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 17

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 18

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 19

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 20

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 21

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 22

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 23

Chapter 4 – Review/Test

Common Core – Page No. 201

Estimate Quotients Using Multiples

Find two numbers the quotient is between. Then estimate the quotient.

Question 1.
175 ÷ 6
Think: 6 × 20 = 120 and 6 × 30 = 180. So, 175 ÷ 6 is between 20 and 30. Since 175 is closer to 180 than to 120, the quotient is about 30.
between 20 and 30
about 30

Answer: About 30

Explanation:
6 × 20 = 120 and 6 × 30 = 180. 175 is between 120 and 180. 175 ÷ 6 is closest to 20 and 30. So, 175 ÷ 6 is between 20 and 30. So, 175 ÷ 6 will be about 30.

Question 2.
53 ÷ 3
between ______ and
about ______

Answer: About 18

Explanation:
17 × 3= 51 and 18 × 3 = 54. 53 is between 51 and 54. 53 ÷ 3 is closest to 17 and 18. So, 53 ÷ 3 is between 17 and 18. So, 53 ÷ 3 will be about 18.

Question 3.
75 ÷ 4
between ______ and
about ______

Answer: About 19

Explanation:
18 × 4= 72 and 19 × 4= 76. 75 is between 72 and 76. 75 ÷ 4 is closest to 18 and 19. So, 75÷ 4 is between 18 and 19. So, 75 ÷ 4 will be about 19.

Question 4.
215 ÷ 9
between ______ and
about ______

Answer: About 24

Explanation:
23 × 9= 207 and 24 × 9 = 216. 24 is between 207 and 216. 215 ÷ 9 is closest to 23 and 24. So, 215 ÷ 9 is between 23 and 24. So, 215 ÷ 9 will be about 24.

Question 5.
284 ÷ 5
between ______ and
about ______

Answer: About 57

Explanation:
56 × 5 = 280 and 57 × 5 = 285. 284 is between 280 and 285. 284 ÷ 5 is closest to 56 and 57. So, 284 ÷ 5 is between 56 and 57. So, 175 ÷ 6 will be about 57.

Question 6.
191 ÷ 3
between ______ and
about ______

Answer: About 64

Explanation:
63 × 3 = 189 and 64 × 3 = 192. 191 is between 189 and 192. 191 ÷ 3 is closest to 63 and 64. So, 191 ÷ 3 is between 63 and 64. So, 175 ÷ 6 will be about 64.

Question 7.
100 ÷ 7
between ______ and
about ______

Answer: About 14

Explanation:
14 × 7 = 98 and 15 × 7 = 105. 100 is between 98 and 105. 100 ÷ 7 is closest to 14 and 15. So, 100 ÷ 7 is between 14 and 15. So, 100 ÷ 7 will be about 14.

Question 8.
438 ÷ 7
between ______ and
about ______

Answer: About 63

Explanation:
63 × 7 = 441 and 62 × 7 = 434. 438 is between 434 and 441. 438 ÷ 7 is closest to 62 and 63. So, 438 ÷ 7 is between 62 and 63. So, 438 ÷ 7 will be about 63.

Question 9.
103 ÷ 8
between ______ and
about ______

Answer: About 13

Explanation:
13 × 8 = 104 and 12 ×8 = 96. 103 is between 96 and 104. 103 ÷ 8 is closest to 12 and 13. So, 103 ÷ 8 is between 12 and 13. So, 103 ÷ 8 will be about 13.

Question 10.
255 ÷ 9
between ______ and
about ______

Answer: About 28

Explanation:
28 × 9 = 252 and 29 × 9 = 261. 255 is between 252 and 261. 255 ÷ 9 is closest to 28 and 29. So, 255 ÷ 9 is between 28 and 29. So, 255 ÷ 9 will be about 28.

Problem Solving

Question 11.
Joy collected 287 aluminum cans in 6 hours. About how many cans did she collect per hour?
about ______ cans

Answer: About 48 cans

Explanation:
47 × 6 = 282 and 48 × 6 = 288. 287 is between 282 and 288. 287 ÷ 6 is closest to 47 and 48. So, 287 ÷ 6 is between 47 and 48. So, 287 ÷6 will be about 48.

Question 12.
Paul sold 162 cups of lemonade in 5 hours. About how many cups of lemonade did he sell each hour?
about ______ cups

Answer: About 32 cups of lemonade he sold in each hour

Explanation:
32 × 5 = 160 and 33 × 5 = 165. 162 is between 160 and 165. 162 ÷ 5 is closest to 32 and 33. So, 162 ÷ 5 is between 32 and 33. So, 162 ÷ 5 will be about 32.

Common Core – Page No. 202

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Abby did 121 sit-ups in 8 minutes. Which is the best estimate of the number of sit-ups she did in 1 minute?
Options:
a. about 12
b. about 15
c. about 16
d. about 20

Answer: b. About 15

Explanation:
15 × 8 = 120 and 16 × 8 = 128. 121 is between 120 and 128. 121 ÷ 8 is closest to 120 and 128. So, 121 ÷ 8 is between 15 and 16. So, 121 ÷ 8 will be about 15.

Question 2.
The Garibaldi family drove 400 miles in 7 hours. Which is the best estimate of the number of miles they drove in 1 hour?
Options:
a. about 40 miles
b. about 57 miles
c. about 60 miles
d. about 70 miles

Answer: b. About 57 miles

Explanation:
57 × 7 = 399 and 58 × 7 = 406. 400 is between 399 and 406. 400 ÷ 7 is closest to 57 and 58. So, 400 ÷ 7 is between 57 and 58. So, 400 ÷ 7 will be about 57.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Twelve boys collected 16 aluminium cans each. Fifteen girls collected 14 aluminium cans each. How many more cans did the girls collect than the boys?
Options:
a. 8
b. 12
c. 14
d. 18

Answer: 18

Explanation:
Number of aluminium cans boys had= 12× 16=192
Number of aluminium cans girls had = 15× 14=210
Girls collected more cans compared to boys,
Number of more cans collected by girls= 210-192=18

Question 4.
George bought 30 packs of football cards. There were 14 cards in each pack. How many cards did George buy?
Options:
a. 170
b. 320
c. 420
d. 520

Answer: c. 420

Explanation:
Number of packs of football cards= 30
Number of cards in each pack= 14
Total number of cards George bought=30×14=420

Question 5.
Sarah made a necklace using 5 times as many blue beads as white beads. She used a total of 30 beads. How many blue beads did Sarah use?
Options:
a. 5
b. 6
c. 24
d. 25

Answer: d. 25

Explanation:
Let the number of white beads be x while the number of blue beads are 5x.
Total number of beads in the necklace=30 beads
According to the problem,
5x+x=30
6x=30
x=30/6=5
Therefore the number of blue beads in the necklace are 5x= 5×5=25

Question 6.
This year, Ms. Webster flew 145,000 miles on business. Last year, she flew 83,125 miles on business. How many more miles did Ms. Webster fly on business this year?
Options:
a. 61,125 miles
b. 61,875 miles
c. 61,985 miles
d. 62,125 miles

Answer: b. 61,875 miles

Explanation:
Number of miles Ms Webster flew in this year= 145,000 miles
Number of miles Ms Webster flew in the last year=83,125 miles
Number of more miles travelled by Ms Webster =145,000-83,125=61,875

Page No. 205

Use counters to find the quotient and remainder.

Question 1.
10 ÷ 3
_____ R ______

Answer: Quotient: 3 Remainder: 1

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 10 counters to represent the 10 dominoes. Then draw 3 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 3 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of groups of counters formed = quotient of 10 ÷ 3
D. Number of circles equally filled are 3, therefore, the quotient is 3

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 1

For 10 ÷ 3, the quotient is 3 and the remainder is 1, or 3 r1.

Question 2.
28 ÷ 5
_____ R ______

Answer: Quotient: 5 Remainder: 3

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 28 counters to represent the 28 dominoes. Then draw 5 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 5 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of groups of  counters formed = quotient of  28÷ 5

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 3

For 28 ÷ 5, the quotient is 5 and the remainder is 3, or 5 r3.

Question 3.
15 ÷ 6
_____ R ______

Answer: Quotient:2 Remainder:3

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 15 counters to represent the 15 dominoes. Then draw 6 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 6 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled= quotient of 28 ÷ 6

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 3

For 28 ÷ 6, the quotient is 2 and the remainder is 3, or 2 r3.

Question 4.
11 ÷ 3
_____ R ______

Answer:Quotient:3 Remainder:2

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 11 counters to represent the 3 dominoes. Then draw 3 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 3 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of  circles filled = quotient of 11 ÷ 3

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 2

For 11 ÷ 3, the quotient is 3 and the remainder is 2, or 3 r2.

Question 5.
29 ÷ 4
_____ R ______

Answer: Quotient:7  Remainder:1

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 29 counters to represent the 29 dominoes. Then draw 4 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 4 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled = quotient of 29 ÷ 4

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 1

For 29 ÷ 3, the quotient is 7 and the remainder is 1, or 7 r1.

Question 6.
34 ÷ 5
_____ R ______

Answer:Quotient: 6 Remainder: 4

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 34 counters to represent the 34 dominoes. Then draw 5 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 5 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled = quotient of 34 ÷ 5

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 4

For 34 ÷ 5, the quotient is 6 and the remainder is 4, or 6 r4.

Question 7.
25 ÷ 3
_____ R ______

Answer:Quotient: 8 Remainder: 1

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 25  counters to represent the 25 dominoes. Then draw 3 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 3 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled= quotient of  25 ÷ 3

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 1

For 25 ÷ 3, the quotient is 8 and the remainder is 1, or 8 r1.

Question 8.
7)\(\overline { 20 } \)
_____ R ______

Answer: Quotient:2 Remainder:6

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 20 counters to represent the 20 dominoes. Then draw 7 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 7 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled= quotient of 7 qw20

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 1

Divide. Draw a quick picture to help.

Question 9.
4)\(\overline { 35 } \)
_____ R ______

Answer: Quotient: 8 Remainder:3

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 35 counters to represent the 35 dominoes. Then draw 4 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 4 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled= quotient of \(\overline { 35 } \)=8

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 3

Question 10.
23 ÷ 8
_____ R ______

Answer: Quotient: 2 Remainder: 7

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 23 counters to represent the 23 dominoes. Then draw 8 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 8 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled= quotient of 23 ÷ 8 = 2

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 7

Question 11.
Explain how you use a quick picture to find the quotient and remainder.
Type below:
_________

Answer: Quick pictures can be used to find the quotient and the remainder visually and accurately.

Explanation:
Example: 39÷ 5.
Use 39 counters.
Share the counters equally among 5 groups. The number of counters left over is the remainder.
For 39 ÷ 5, the quotient is 7 and the remainder is 2, or 7 r2.
When a number cannot be divided evenly, the amount left over is called the remainder.

Question 12.
Alyson has 46 beads to make bracelets. Each bracelet has 5 beads. How many more beads does Alyson need so that all the beads she has are used? Explain.
_____ more beads

Answer: 4 beads

Explanation:
Number of beads Alyson has= 46
Number of beads each bracelet needs=5
The number of bracelets which can be made = 46÷5

Since, the remainder is one we can say that one bead is leftover after making 9 bracelets.
Therefore, 4 beads should be added to 1 so that all the beads are used up.

Question 13.
For 13a–13d, choose Yes or No to tell whether the division expression has a remainder.
a. 36 ÷ 9
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: ii. no

Explanation:

Question 13.
b. 23 ÷ 3
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: i. yes

Explanation:

Question 13.
c. 82 ÷ 9
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: i. yes

Explanation:

Question 13.
d. 28 ÷ 7
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: ii. no

Explanation:

Page No. 206

Question 14.
Macy, Kayley, Maddie, and Rachel collected 13 marbles. They want to share the marbles equally. How many marbles will each of the 4 girls get? How many marbles will be left over?
Oscar used a model to solve this problem. He says his model represents 4)\(\overline { 13 } \). What is his error?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 1
Look at the way Oscar solved this problem. Find and describe his error.
_________________________________________________________
Draw a correct model and solve the problem.
So, each of the 4 girls will get _______ marbles and _______ marble will be left over.
Type below:
_________

Answer: Quotient: 3 Remainder: 1

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 13 counters to represent the 13 dominoes. Then draw 4 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 4 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled= quotient of 13 ÷ 4 = 3

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 1
Therefore each girl will get 3 marbles.

Common Core – Page No. 207

Remainders

Use counters to find the quotient and remainder.

Question 1.
13 ÷ 4
3 r1

Answer: 3 r1

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 13 counters to represent the 13 dominoes. Then draw 4 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 4 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 13 ÷ 4
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 4 counters, therefore, the quotient is 3

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 1

For 13 ÷ 4, the quotient is 3 and the remainder is 1, or 3 r1.

Question 2.
24 ÷ 7
_____ R ______

Answer: 3 r3

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 24 counters to represent the 24 dominoes. Then draw 7 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 7 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 24 ÷ 7
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 3 counters, therefore, the quotient is 3

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 3

For 24 ÷ 7, the quotient is 3 and the remainder is 3, or 3 r3.

Question 3.
39 ÷ 5
_____ R ______

Answer: 7 r4

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 39 counters to represent the 39dominoes. Then draw 5 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 5 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient 39 ÷ 5
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 7 counters, therefore, the quotient is 7

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 4

For 39 ÷ 5, the quotient is 7 and the remainder is 4, or 7 r4.

Question 4.
36 ÷ 8
_____ R ______

Answer: 4 r4

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 36 counters to represent the 36 dominoes. Then draw 8 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 8 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 36 ÷ 8
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 4 counters, therefore, the quotient is 4

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 4

For 36 ÷ 8, the quotient is 4 and the remainder is 4, or 4 r4.

Question 5.
6)\(\overline { 27 } \)
_____ R ______

Answer: 4 r3

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 27 counters to represent the 27 dominoes. Then draw 6 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 6 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 27 ÷6
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 4 counters, therefore, the quotient is 4

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 3

For 27 ÷ 6, the quotient is 4 and the remainder is 3, or 4 r3.

Question 6.
25 ÷ 9
_____ R ______

Answer: 2 r7

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 25 counters to represent the 25 dominoes. Then draw 9 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 9 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 25 ÷ 9
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 2 counters, therefore, the quotient is 2

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 7

For 25 ÷ 7, the quotient is 2 and the remainder is 7, or 2 r7.

Question 7.
3)\(\overline { 17 } \)
_____ R ______

Answer: 5 r2

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 17 counters to represent the 17 dominoes. Then draw 3 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 3 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 17 ÷ 3
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 5 counters, therefore, the quotient is 5

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 2

For 17 ÷ 3, the quotient is 5 and the remainder is 2, or 5 r2.

Question 8.
26 ÷ 4
_____ R ______

Answer: 6 r2

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 26 counters to represent the 26 dominoes. Then draw 4 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 4 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 26 ÷ 4
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 6 counters, therefore, the quotient is 6

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 2

For 26 ÷ 4, the quotient is 6 and the remainder is 2, or 6 r2.

Divide. Draw a quick picture to help.

Question 9.
14 ÷ 3
_____ R ______

Answer: Quotient: 4 Remainder: 2

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 14 counters to represent the 14 dominoes. Then draw 3 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 3 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled= quotient of 14 ÷ 3 = 4

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 2

Question 10.
5)\(\overline { 29 } \)
_____ R ______

Answer: Quotient: 5 Remainder: 4

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 29 counters to represent the 29 dominoes. Then draw 5 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 5 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled= quotient of 29 ÷ 5 = 5

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 4

Problem Solving

Question 11.
What is the quotient and remainder in the division problem modeled below?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 2
_____ R ______

Answer: quotient:6  remainder2

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 20 counters to represent the 20 dominoes. Then draw 3 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 3  groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 20 ÷ 3
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 6 counters, therefore, the quotient is 6

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 2

For 20 ÷ 3, the quotient is 6 and the remainder is 2, or 6 r2.

Question 12.
Mark drew the following model and said it represented the problem 21 ÷ 4. Is Mark’s model correct? If so, what is the quotient and remainder? If not, what is the correct quotient and remainder?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 3
_____ ; _____ r

Answer: 4 r5

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 21 counters to represent the 21 dominoes. Then draw 4 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 4 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 21 ÷ 4
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 4 counters, therefore, the quotient is 4

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 5

For 21 ÷ 4, the quotient is 4 and the remainder is 5, or 4 r5.

Common Core – Page No. 208

Lesson Check

Question 1.
What is the quotient and remainder for 32 ÷ 6?
Options:
a. 4 r3
b. 5 r1
c. 5 r2
d. 6 r1

Answer: c. 5 r2

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 32 counters to represent the 32 dominoes. Then draw 6 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 5 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 32 ÷ 6
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 5 counters, therefore, the quotient is 5

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 2

For 32 ÷ 6, the quotient is 5 and the remainder is 2, or 5 r2.

Question 2.
What is the remainder in the division problem modeled below?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 4
Options:
a. 8
b. 4
c. 3
d. 1

Answer: c. 3

Explanation:
When a number cannot be divided evenly, the amount left over is called the remainder.
The number of counters that are left  = remainder = 3

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Each kit to build a castle contains 235 parts. How many parts are in 4 of the kits?
Options:
a. 1,020
b. 940
c. 920
d. 840

Answer: b. 940

Explanation:
Number of parts used to build a castle in each kit=235 parts
Number of kits= 4
Total number of parts in 4 of the kits= 235 x 4=940 parts

Question 4.
In 2010, the population of Alaska was about 710,200. What is this number written in word form?
Options:
a. seven hundred ten thousand, two
b. seven hundred twelve thousand
c. seventy-one thousand, two
d. seven hundred ten thousand, two hundred

Answer: d. seven hundred ten thousand, two hundred

Explanation:
The ones and tens place of the number are zeroes, so the next place which is hundreds is considered and the value is 7 so, it can be written as seven hundred and in the thousands period it can be written as seven hundred ten thousand.

Question 5.
At the theater, one section of seats has 8 rows with 12 seats in each row. In the center of the first 3 rows are 4 broken seats that cannot be used. How many seats can be used in the section?
Options:
a. 84
b. 88
c. 92
d. 96

Answer: c. 92

Explanation:
Number of rows at the theatre = 8
Number of seats each row= 12
Number of seats broken and that cannot be used to sit= 4
Total number of seats that can be used= 12 x 8-4=96-4=92

Question 6.
What partial products are shown by the model below?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 5
Options:
a. 300, 24
b. 300, 600, 40, 60
c. 300, 60, 40, 24
d. 300, 180, 40, 24

Answer: d. 300, 180, 40, 24

Explanation:
The whole rectangle is divided into four small rectangles the areas of these rectangles are:

Area of yellow rectangle= 30 x 10=300
Area of green rectangle= 4 x 10 = 40
Area of pink rectangle= 6 x 30= 180
Area of blue rectangle= 4 x 6= 24

Common Core – Page No. 211

Question 1.
Olivia baked 53 mini-loaves of banana bread to be sliced for snacks at a craft fair. She will place an equal number of loaves in 6 different locations. How many loaves will be at each location?
a. Divide to find the quotient and remainder.
□ r □
6)\(\overline { 53 } \)
_____ R ______

Answer: Quotient: 8 Remainder: 5

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 53 counters to represent the 53 dominoes. Then draw 6 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 6  groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 53 ÷ 6
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 8 counters, therefore, the quotient is 8

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 5

Therefore, there will be 8 loaves at each location.

Question 1.
b. Decide how to use the quotient and remainder to answer the question.
Type below:
____________

Answer:

The quotient is used to determine the number of loaves at each location, while the remainder gives us the information about the number of loaves left after placing in different locations.

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 53 counters to represent the 53 dominoes. Then draw 6 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 6  groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 53 ÷ 6
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 8 counters, therefore, the quotient is 8

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 5
Therefore, there will be 8 mini loaves at each location.

Interpret the remainder to solve.

Question 2.
What if Olivia wants to put only whole loaves at each location? How many loaves will be at each location?
_______ whole loaves

Answer: Since there are 8 mini loaves at each location. Then there will be 4 whole loaves.

Explanation:
Olivia baked 53 mini-loaves of banana bread

Question 3.
Ed carves 22 small wooden animals to sell at the craft fair. He displays them in rows with 4 animals in a row. How many animals will not be in equal rows?
_______ animals

Answer: 2

Explanation:
Total number of small wooden animals=22
Number of animals in each row=4
Number of rows= 22÷4 =5
The total number of animals in the rows= 5 x 4=20
Number of animals which are not in a row= 22-20=2

Interpret the remainder to solve.

Question 4.
Myra has a 17-foot roll of crepe paper to make 8 streamers to decorate for a party. How long will each streamer be if she cuts the roll into equal pieces?
Type below:
____________

Answer: 2 foot

Explanation:
Length of the crepe paper = 17 foot
Number of streamers in the party=8
Length of each part if they are cut into equal pieces = 17 ÷ 8

Question 5.
Juan has a piano recital next month. Last week he practiced for 8 hours in the morning and 7 hours in the afternoon. Each practice session is 2 hours long. How many full practice sessions did Juan complete?
_______ full practice sessions

Answer: 7 full practice sessions

Explanation:
Number of hours he practiced in the morning= 8 hours
Each practice session is 2 hours long
Number of full practice sessions attended by Juan in the morning= 8÷2=4
Number of hours he practiced in the afternoon= 7 hours
Number of full practice sessions attended by Juan in the evening= 7÷2=3

Question 6.
A total of 25 students sign up to be hosts on Parent’s Night. Teams of 3 students greet parents. How many students cannot be on a team? Explain.
_______ student

Answer: 1 student

Explanation:
Total number of students= 25
Number of students in each group = 3
The number of students who cannot be in the group= remainder obtained when 25÷3= 1

Page No. 212

Use the picture for 7–9.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 6

Question 7.
Teresa is making sock puppets just like the one in the picture. If she has 53 buttons, how many puppets can she make?
_______ sock puppets

Answer: 17 sock puppets

Explanation:
Total number of buttons Teresa has=53
Number of buttons each puppet needs= 3
Number of sock puppets made= Quotient of 53÷3=17 sock puppets

Question 8.
Write a question about Teresa and the sock puppets for which the answer is 3. Explain the answer.
Type below:
____________

Answer: How many buttons did Teresa use for one sock puppet?

Explanation:
Total number of sock puppets made= 17
Number of buttons used for making 17 sock puppets = 52
then,
Number of buttons used for one sock puppet= Quotient of 52÷17= 3 buttons

Question 9.
Interpret a Result How many more buttons will Teresa need if she wants to make 18 puppets? Explain.
_______ buttons

Answer: 1 button

Explanation:
After preparing 17 puppets there was 2 buttons leftover then on the addition of 1 button gives 3 buttons which can be used to prepare another puppet.

Question 10.
A total of 56 students signed up to play in a flag football league. If each team has 10 students, how many more students will need to sign up so all of the students can be on a team?
_______ students

Answer: 4 students

Explanation:
Total number of students in the football league= 56
Number of students in each group= 10
then,
Number of groups= Quotient of 56÷10=5 groups
Remainder= 6
By the addition of 4 students, the group of 6 gets completed by 10
Therefore, 4 students should be added so that all students can be on a team.

Question 11.
A teacher plans for groups of her students to eat lunch at tables. She has 34 students in her class. Each group will have 7 students. How many tables will she need? Explain how to use the quotient and remainder to answer the question.
_______ tables

Answer: She needs 3 tables

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 34 counters to represent the 34 dominoes. Then draw 7 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 7 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 34 ÷ 7
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 4 counters, therefore, the quotient is 4

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 6
The quotient is used to indicate the number of groups
Therefore, there will be 4 tables.
While the remainder is used to determine the number of students in the incomplete group.

Common Core – Page No. 213

Interpret the Remainder

Interpret the remainder to solve.

Question 1.
Hakeem has 100 tomato plants. He wants to plant them in rows of 8. How many full rows will he have?
Think: 100 ÷ 8 is 12 with a remainder of 4. The question asks “how many full rows,” so use only the quotient.
12 full rows

Answer: 12 full rows

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 100 counters to represent the 100 dominoes. Then draw 8 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 8 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 100 ÷ 8
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 12 counters, therefore, the quotient is 12
Therefore, the tomatoes placed in full rows are 12

Question 2.
A teacher has 27 students in her class. She asks the students to form as many groups of 4 as possible. How many students will not be in a group?
_______ students

Answer: 3 students will not be the group

Explanation:
Total number of students in the class= 27
Number of students who make a group=4
Number of groups that can be made =Quotient of 27÷ 4=6
Number of students who do not come under a group= Remainder of 27÷ 4=3

Question 3.
A sporting goods company can ship 6 footballs in each carton. How many cartons are needed to ship 75 footballs?
_______ cartons

Answer: 12 full cartons and 0.5 or 1/2 carton to ship all the 75 footballs

Explanation:
Total number of footballs that should be shipped= 75
Number of footballs placed in each carton = 6
Number of cartons required=Quotient of 75÷ 6=12


Since each carton carries 6 balls, half carton contains 3 balls because 6÷3=2, therefore, each half of the carton contains 3 balls.

Question 4.
A carpenter has a board that is 10 feet long. He wants to make 6 table legs that are all the same length. What is the longest each leg can be?
_______ foot

Answer: The length of the longest leg=4 foot-long

Explanation:
According to the question,
Length of the board the carpenter has= 10 foot long
Number of table legs that are to be made = 6
Length of the 6 table legs are equal
then,
Length of each table leg= Quotient of 10÷6=1 foot
Length of the longest table leg= Remainder of 10÷6= 4 foot.

Question 5.
Allie wants to arrange her flower garden in 8 equal rows. She buys 60 plants. What is the greatest number of plants she can put in each row?
_______ plants

Answer: 7

Explanation:
Total number of plants Allie bought= 60
Number of rows= 8
Number of plants in each row= Quotient of 60÷8=7

Problem Solving

Question 6.
Joanna has 70 beads. She uses 8 beads for each bracelet. She makes as many bracelets as possible. How many beads will Joanna have left over?
_______ beads

Answer: 6 beads

Explanation:
Total number of beads Joanna has= 70 beads
Number beads used for each bracelet= 8 beads
Number of bracelets made with these beads= Quotient of 70÷8= 7 bracelets
then,
The number of beads leftover= Remainder of 70÷8= 6 beads

Question 7.
A teacher wants to give 3 markers to each of her 25 students. Markers come in packages of 8. How many packages of markers will the teacher need?
_______ packages

Answer: 10 packages

Explanation:
Total number of students= 25
Number of markers each student got= 3
Total number of markers the teacher needs to distribute= 25 x 3= 75
Number of markers in each package= 8
Number of packages the teacher required= Quotient of 75÷8=9
While the remainder= 3
Therefore the total number packages=10

Common Core – Page No. 214

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Marcus sorts his 85 baseball cards into stacks of 9 cards each. How many stacks of 9 cards can Marcus make?
Options:
a. 4
b. 8
c. 9
d. 10

Answer: d. 10

Explanation:
Total number of baseball cards=85
Number of cards in each stack=9
Number of stacks sorted= Quotient of 85÷9=9
While the remainder=4
So the total number of stacks required= 10

Question 2.
A minivan can hold up to 7 people. How many minivans are needed to take 45 people to a basketball game?
Options:
a. 3
b. 5
c. 6
d. 7

Answer: d. 7

Explanation:
A minivan can hold up to 7 people.
Total number of people who want to hire the minivan= 45 people
Number of minivans required= Quotient of 45÷7= 6 vans
While the remainder is 3.
Total number of minivans required to take the people to the baseball game= 7 minivans

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Mrs. Wilkerson cut some oranges into 20 equal pieces to be shared by 6 friends. How many pieces did each person get and how many pieces were left over?
Options:
a. 2 pieces with 4 pieces leftover
b. 3 pieces with 2 pieces leftover
c. 3 pieces with 4 pieces leftover
d. 4 pieces with 2 pieces leftover

Answer: b. 3 pieces with 2 pieces leftover

Explanation:
Total number of orange pieces= 20
Number of friends= 6
Number of pieces each friend got= Quotient of 20÷6= 3 pieces
Number of pieces leftover= Remainder of 20÷6= 2 pieces

Question 4.
A school bought 32 new desks. Each desk cost $24. Which is the best estimate of how much the school spent on the new desks?
Options:
a. $500
b. $750
c. $1,000
d. $1,200

Answer: b. $750

Explanation:
Total number of desks= 32
Cost of each desk= $24
Total cost spent on the desks= 32 x 24=$768

So the estimated value can be $768

Question 5.
Kris has a box of 8 crayons. Sylvia’s box has 6 times as many crayons as Kris’s box. How many crayons are in Sylvia’s box?
Options:
a. 48
b. 42
c. 36
d. 4

Answer: 48 crayons

Explanation:
Number of crayons in Kris box=8
Number of crayons in Sylvia’s box= 6 times as many crayons as Kris’s box= 6 x 8=48

Question 6.
Yesterday, 1,743 people visited the fair. Today, there are 576 more people at the fair than yesterday. How many people are at the fair today?
Options:
a. 1,167
b. 2,219
c. 2,319
d. 2,367

Answer: c. 2,319

Explanation:
Number of people in the fair yesterday= 1,743
Number of more people at the fair than yesterday= 576
Total number of people in the fair today=2,319

Page No. 216

Question 1.
Divide. 2,800 ÷ 7
What basic fact can you use? ___________
2,800 = 28 ___________
28 hundreds ÷ 7 = ___________
2,800 ÷ 7 = ___________
Type below:
___________

Answer: 400

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 28 ÷ 7
STEP 2 Use place value. 2,800 = 28 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 28 hundreds ÷ 4 = 4 hundreds
2,800 ÷ 7 = 400

Question 2.
Divide. 280 ÷ 7
What basic fact can you use? ___________
280 = 28 ___________
28 tens ÷ _____ = 4 ___________
280 ÷ 7 = _____
Type below:
___________

Answer: 40

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 28 ÷ 7
STEP 2 Use place value. 280 = 28 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 28 tens ÷ 4 = 4 tens
280 ÷ 7 = 40

Use basic facts and place value to find the quotient.

Question 3.
360 ÷ 6 = ______

Answer: 60

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 36 ÷ 6
STEP 2 Use place value. 360 = 36 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 36 tens ÷6 = 6 tens
360 ÷ 6 = 60

Question 4.
2,000 ÷ 5 = ______

Answer: 400

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 20 ÷ 5
STEP 2 Use place value. 2,000 = 20 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 20 hundreds ÷ 5 = 4 hundreds
2,000 ÷ 5 = 400

Question 5.
4,500 ÷ 9 = ______

Answer: 500

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 45 ÷ 9
STEP 2 Use place value. 4,500 = 45 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 45 hundreds ÷ 9 = 5 hundreds
4,500 ÷ 9 = 500

Question 6.
560 ÷ 8 = ______

Answer: 70

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 56 ÷ 8
STEP 2 Use place value. 560 = 56 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 56 tens ÷ 8 = 7 tens
560 ÷ 8 = 70

Question 7.
6,400 ÷ 8 = ______

Answer: 800

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 64 ÷ 8
STEP 2 Use place value. 6,400 =64 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 64 hundreds ÷ 8 = 8 hundreds
6,400 ÷ 8 = 800

Question 8.
3,500 ÷ 7 = ______

Answer:

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 35 ÷ 7
STEP 2 Use place value. 3,500 = 35 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 35 hundreds ÷ 7 = 5 hundreds
3,500 ÷ 7 = 500

Use Patterns Algebra Find the unknown number.

Question 9.
420 ÷ ______ = 60

Answer: 7

Explanation:
To find the divisor (the missing number) divide 420 with 60

Therefore the quotient of 420 ÷ 60= The missing number=7

Question 10.
______ ÷ 4 = 30

Answer: 120

Explanation:
To find the dividend (the missing number) we must multiply the divisor and the quotient.
Therefore the dividend is 30 x 4=120.

Question 11.
810 ÷ ______ = 90

Answer: 9

Explanation:
To find the divisor (the missing number) divide 810 with 90

Therefore the quotient of 810 ÷ 90= The missing number=9

Question 12.
Divide 400 ÷ 40. Explain how patterns and place value can help.
______

Answer: 10

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 40 ÷ 4
STEP 2 Use place value. 400 = 40 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 40 tens ÷ 4 = 1 tens
400 ÷ 40 = 10

Question 13.
Eileen collected 98 empty cans to recycle, and Carl collected 82 cans. They packed an equal number of cans into each of three boxes to take to the recycling center.
How many cans were in each box?
______ cans

Answer: 60 cans

Explanation:
Total number of cans = 98+82=180 cans
Number of boxes= 3
Number of cans in each box= 180 ÷3=60 cans

Question 14.
It costs a baker $18 to make a small cake. He sells 8 small cakes for $240. How much more is the selling price of each cake than the cost?
$ ______

Answer: $96

Explanation:
Cost of each cake= $18
Number of cakes baked= 8
The actual cost of the cakes = $18 x $8=$144
The selling price of the cakes=$240
Amount gained on the cakes= $240-$144=$96

Page No. 217

Question 15.
Jamal put 600 pennies into 6 equal rolls. How many pennies were in each roll?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 7
______ pennies

Answer: 100 pennies

Explanation:
Total number of pennies= 600
Number of rolls= 6
The number of pennies= Quotient of 600 ÷ 6=100

Question 16.
Sela has 6 times as many coins now as she had 4 months ago. If Sela has 240 coins now, how many coins did she have 4 months ago?
______ coins

Answer: 60 coins

Explanation:
Let the number of coins four months ago be x coins.
According to the question,
Number of coins Sela has at present = 4x
4x=240
x= 240 ÷ 4=60
Therefore the number of coins Sela has=60

Question 17.
Chip collected 2,090 dimes. Sue collected 1,910 dimes. They divided all their dimes into 8 equal stacks. How many dimes are in each stack?
______ dimes

Answer:

Explanation:
Number of dimes Chip collected= 2,090
Number of dimes Sue collected= 1,910
Total number of dimes= 2,090+1,910= 4100
Number of stacks= 8
Number of dimes in each stack = Quotient of 4100 ÷8=512

Question 18.
Communicate Mr. Roberts sees a rare 1937 penny. The cost of the penny is $210. If he saves $3 each week, will Mr. Roberts have enough money to buy the penny in one year? Explain.
______

Answer: No Mr. Roberts cannot buy the penny in one year.

Explanation:
Amount saved in each week= $3
Number of weeks in a year= 52
The total amount saved= 52 x 3=$156
Cost of the penny=$210
Therefore Mr. Roberts cannot buy the penny in one year.

Question 19.
Mrs. Fletcher bought 5 coins for $32 each. Later, she sold all the coins for $300. How much more did Mrs. Fletcher receive for each coin than she paid? Explain.
$ ______

Answer:$60

Explanation:
Number of coins=5
Cost of each coin = $32
Total cost of the coins= $32 x 5=$160
She sold the coins for $300
Cost of each coin= $300 ÷ 5= $60

Page No. 218

Question 20.
Which quotients are equal to 20? Mark all that apply.
Options:
a. 600 ÷ 2
b. 1,200 ÷ 6
c. 180 ÷ 9
d. 140 ÷ 7
e. 500 ÷ 5

Answer: c. 180 ÷ 9
d. 140 ÷ 7

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 180 counters to represent the 180 dominoes. Then draw 9 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 9 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 180 ÷ 9
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 20 counters, therefore, the quotient is 20

Quotient:
A. Use 140 counters to represent the 140 dominoes. Then draw 7 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 7 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 140 ÷ 7
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 20 counters, therefore, the quotient is 20

Insect Flight

True flight is shared only by insects, bats, and birds. Flight in insects varies from the clumsy flight of some beetles to the acrobatic moves of dragonflies.
The wings of insects are not moved by muscles attached to the wings. Muscles in the middle part of the body, or thorax, move the wings. The thorax changes shape as the wings move.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 8

Question 21.
About how many times does a damselfly’s wings beat in 1 minute?
______ times

Answer: 900

Explanation:
Total number of wingbeats of Damselfly in 3 minutes= 2,700
Number of wingbeats of Damselfly in 1 minute= 2,700 ÷3=900

Question 22.
About how many times do a scorpion fly’s wings beat in 6 minutes?
______ times

Answer: 10,000

Explanation:
Total number of wingbeats of scorpionfly in 3 minutes=5,000
Number of parts of time-intervals in 6 minutes = 6÷3=2
Number of wingbeats of scorpionfly in 6 minutes= 5,000 x 2 = 10,000

Question 23.
In one minute, about how many more times do a damselfly’s wings beat than a large white butterfly’s wings?
______ more times

Answer: 200

Explanation:
Total number of wingbeats of Damselfly in 3 minutes= 2,700
Number of wingbeats of Damselfly in 1 minute= 2,700 ÷3=900

Total number of wingbeats of large white butterfly in 3 minutes= 2,100
Number of wingbeats of large white butterfly in 1 minute= 2,100 ÷3=700

Number of more times the damselfly’s wings beat than a large white butterfly=900-700=200

Question 24.
What’s the Question? The answer is about 2,300 times.
Type below:
___________

Answer: About how many times do an Aeschind dragonfly’s wings beat in 1 minute?

Explanation:
Total number of wingbeats of Aeschind dragonfly’s in 3 minutes= 6,900
Number of wingbeats of Aeschind dragonfly’s in 1 minute= 6,900 ÷3=2,300

Common Core – Page No. 219

Divide Tens, Hundreds, and Thousands

Use basic facts and place value to find the quotient.

Question 1.
3,600 ÷ 4 = 900
Think: 3,600 is 36 hundreds.
Use the basic fact 36 ÷ 4 = 9.
So, 36 hundreds ÷ 4 = 9 hundreds, or 900.

Answer: 900

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 36 ÷ 4
STEP 2 Use place value. 3,600 = 36 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 36 hundered ÷ 4 = 9 hundreds
3,600 ÷ 4 = 900

Question 2.
240 ÷ 6 = ______

Answer: 40

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 24 ÷ 6
STEP 2 Use place value. 240 = 24 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 24 tens ÷ 6 = 4 tens
240 ÷ 6 = 40

Question 3.
5,400 ÷ 9 = ______

Answer: 600

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 54 ÷ 9
STEP 2 Use place value. 5,400 = 54 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 54 hundreds ÷ 9 = 6 hundreds
5,400 ÷ 9 = 600

Question 4.
300 ÷ 5 = ______

Answer: 60

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 30 ÷ 5
STEP 2 Use place value. 300 = 30 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 30 tens ÷ 5 = 60 tens
300 ÷ 5 = 60

Question 5.
4,800 ÷ 6 = ______

Answer: 800

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 48 ÷ 6
STEP 2 Use place value. 4,800 = 48 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 48 hundreds ÷ 6 = 80 hundreds
4,800 ÷ 6 = 800

Question 6.
420 ÷ 7 = ______

Answer: 60

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 42 ÷ 7
STEP 2 Use place value. 420 = 42 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 42 tens ÷ 7 = 60 tens
420 ÷ 7 = 60

Question 7.
150 ÷ 3 = ______

Answer: 50

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 15 ÷ 3
STEP 2 Use place value. 150 = 15 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 15 tens ÷ 3 = 5 tens
150 ÷ 3 = 50

Question 8.
6,300 ÷ 7 = ______

Answer: 900

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 63 ÷ 7
STEP 2 Use place value. 6,300 = 63 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 63 hundreds ÷ 7 = 9 hundreds
6,300 ÷ 7 = 900

Question 9.
1,200 ÷ 4 = ______

Answer: 300

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 12 ÷ 4
STEP 2 Use place value. 1,200 = 12 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 12 hundreds ÷ 4 = 3 hundreds
1,200 ÷ 4 = 300

Question 10.
360 ÷ 6 = ______

Answer: 60

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 36 ÷ 6
STEP 2 Use place value. 360 = 36 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 36 tens ÷ 6 = 6 tens
360 ÷ 6 = 60

Find the quotient.

Question 11.
28 ÷ 4 = ______
280 ÷ 4 = ______
2,800 ÷ 4 = ______

Answer: 7, 70, 700

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 28 counters to represent the 28 dominoes. Then draw 4 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 4 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 28 ÷ 4
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 7 counters, therefore, the quotient is 7

STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 28 ÷ 4
STEP 2 Use place value. 280 = 28 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 28 tens ÷ 4 = 7 tens
280 ÷ 4 = 70

STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 28 ÷ 4
STEP 2 Use place value. 2,800 = 28 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 28 hundreds ÷ 4 = 7 hundreds
2,800 ÷ 4 = 700

Question 12.
18 ÷ 3 = ______
180 ÷ 3 = ______
1,800 ÷ 3 = ______

Answer: 6, 60, 600

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 18 counters to represent the 18 dominoes. Then draw 3 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 3 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 18 ÷ 3
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 6 counters, therefore, the quotient is 6

STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 18 ÷ 3
STEP 2 Use place value. 180 = 18 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 18 tens ÷ 3 = 6 tens
180 ÷ 6 = 60

STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 18 ÷ 3
STEP 2 Use place value. 1,800 = 18 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 18 hundreds ÷ 3 = 6 hundreds
1,800 ÷ 3 = 600

Question 13.
45 ÷ 9 = ______
450 ÷ 9 = ______
4,500 ÷ 9 = ______

Answer: 5, 50, 500

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 45 counters to represent the 45 dominoes. Then draw 9 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 9 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 45 ÷ 9
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 5 counters, therefore, the quotient is 5

STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 45 ÷ 9
STEP 2 Use place value. 450 = 45 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 45 tens ÷ 9 = 5 tens
450 ÷ 9 = 50

STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 45 ÷ 9
STEP 2 Use place value. 4,500 = 45 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 45 hundreds ÷ 9 = 5 hundreds
4,500 ÷ 9 = 500

Problem Solving

Question 14.
At an assembly, 180 students sit in 9 equal rows. How many students sit in each row?
______ students

Answer: 20

Explanation:
Total number of students= 180
Number of rows= 9
Number of students in each row= 180 ÷9=20

Question 15.
Hilary can read 560 words in 7 minutes. How many words can Hilary read in 1 minute?
______ words

Answer: 80

Explanation:
Total number of words Hilary can read in 7 minutes = 560
Number of words Hilary can read in 1 minute= 560 ÷ 7= 80

Question 16.
A company produces 7,200 gallons of bottled water each day. The company puts 8 one-gallon bottles in each carton. How many cartons are needed to hold all the one-gallon bottles produced in one day?
______ cartons

Answer: 900

Explanation:
Total number of gallons bottled in each day= 7,200
Number of gallons bottled in each carton= 8
Number of cartons used= 7,200 ÷ 8= 900

Question 17.
An airplane flew 2,400 miles in 4 hours. If the plane flew the same number of miles each hour, how many miles did it fly in 1 hour?
______ miles

Answer: 600

Explanation:
Total number of miles flew in 4 hours= 2,400
Number of miles flew in 1 hour= 2,400÷4=600

Common Core – Page No. 220

Lesson Check

Question 1.
A baseball player hits a ball 360 feet to the outfield. It takes the ball 4 seconds to travel this distance. How many feet does the ball travel in 1 second?
Options:
a. 9 feet
b. 40 feet
c. 90 feet
d. 900 feet

Answer: c. 90 feet

Explanation:
The height to which the player hits a ball=360 feet
Height to which the ball travels in 1 second= 360÷4= 90 feet

Question 2.
Sebastian rides his bike 2,000 meters in 5 minutes. How many meters does he bike in 1 minute?
Options:
a. 4 meters
b. 40 meters
c. 50 meters
d. 400 meters

Answer: d. 400 meters

Explanation:
Total number of meters travelled in 5 minutes= 2,000
Number of meters travelled in 1 minute= 2,000÷5= 400

Spiral Review

Question 3.
A full container of juice holds 63 ounces. How many 7-ounce servings of juice are in a full container?
Options:
a. 1
b. 8
c. 9
d. 10

Answer: c. 9

Explanation:
A full container of juice holds= 63 ounces
Quantity of servings of juice in one glass=7 ounce
Number of servings of the juice are= 63÷7=9

Question 4.
Paolo pays $244 for 5 identical calculators. Which is the best estimate of how much Paolo pays for one calculator?
Options:
a. $40
b. $50
c. $60
d. $245

Answer: b. $50

Explanation:
Amount Paolo pays for the identical calculators = $244
Number of identical calculators=5
The best estimated value of each identical calculator=$244 ÷ 5is approximately $50

Question 5.
A football team paid $28 per jersey. They bought 16 jerseys. How much money did the team spend on jerseys?
Options:
a. $44
b. $196
c. $408
d. $448

Answer: d. $448

Explanation:
Cost of each jersey=$28
Number of jerseys= 16
Total cost of the jerseys= $28 x 16= $448

Question 6.
Suzanne bought 50 apples at the apple orchard. She bought 4 times as many red apples as green apples. How many more red apples than green apples did Suzanne buy?
Options:
a. 10
b. 25
c. 30
d. 40

Answer: d. 40

Explanation:
Let the number of green apples be x and the number of red apples be 4x
4x + x = 50
x = 50  ÷ 5= 10
Number of red balls = 4x = 4 x 10 = 40

Page No. 222

Question 1.
Estimate. 1,718 ÷ 4
Think: What number close to 1,718 is easy to divide by 4?
______ is close to 1,718. What basic fact can you use?
______ ÷ 4
______ is close to 1,718. What basic fact can you use?
______ ÷ 4
Choose 1,600 because
__________________________________.
16 ÷ 4 = ______
1,600 ÷ ______ = ______
1,718 ÷ 4 is about ______
Type below:
_________

Answer:

Explanation:
What number close to 1,718 is easy to divide by 4?
1,600 is close to 1,718. What basic fact can you use?
1,600 ÷ 4
Choose 1,600 because it is close to 1,718 and can easily be divided by 4.
16 ÷ 4 = 4
1,600 ÷ 4 = 400
1,600 ÷ 4 is about 400

Use compatible numbers to estimate the quotient.

Question 2.
455 ÷ 9
______

Answer: 50

Explanation:
What number close to 455 is easy to divide by 9?
450 is close to 455. What basic fact can you use?
450 ÷ 9
Choose 450 because it is close to 455 and can easily be divided by 9.
45 ÷ 9 = 5
450 ÷ 9 = 50
455 ÷ 9 is about 50

Question 3.
1,509 ÷ 3
______

Answer: 500

Explanation:
What number close to 1,509 is easy to divide by 3?
1,500 is close to 1,509. What basic fact can you use?
1,500 ÷ 3
Choose 1,500 because it is close to 1,509 and can easily be divided by 3.
15 ÷ 3 = 5
1,500 ÷ 3 = 500
1,509 ÷ 3 is about 500

Question 4.
176 ÷ 8
______

Answer:

Explanation:
What number close to 176 is easy to divide by 8?
160 is close to 176. What basic fact can you use?
160 ÷ 8
Choose 160 because it is close to 176 and can easily be divided by 8.
16 ÷ 8 = 2
160 ÷ 8 = 20
176 ÷ 8 is about 20

Question 5.
2,795 ÷ 7
______

Answer:  400

Explanation:
What number close to 2,795 is easy to divide by 7?
2,800 is close to 2,795. What basic fact can you use?
2,800 ÷ 7
Choose 2,800 because it is close to 2,795 and can easily be divided by 7.
28 ÷ 7 = 4
2,800 ÷ 7 = 400
2,795 ÷ 7 is about 400

Use compatible numbers to find two estimates that the quotient is between.

Question 6.
5,321 ÷ 6
______ and ______

Answer: 900

Explanation:
What number close to 5,321 is easy to divide by 6?
5,400 is close to 5,321. What basic fact can you use?
5,400 ÷ 6
Choose 5,400 because it is close to 5,321 and can easily be divided by 6.
54 ÷ 6 = 9
5,400 ÷ 6 = 900
5,321 ÷ 6 is about 900

Question 7.
1,765 ÷ 6
______ and ______

Answer: 300

Explanation:
What number close to 1,765 is easy to divide by 6?
1,800 is close to 1,765. What basic fact can you use?
1,800 ÷ 6
Choose 1,800 because it is close to 1,765 and can easily be divided by 6.
18 ÷ 6 = 3
1,800 ÷ 6 = 300
1,765 ÷ 6 is about 300

Question 8.
1,189 ÷ 3
______ and ______

Answer: 400

Explanation:
What number close to 1,189 is easy to divide by 3?
1,200 is close to 1,189. What basic fact can you use?
1,200 ÷ 3
Choose 1,200 because it is close to 1,189 and can easily be divided by 3.
12 ÷ 3 = 4
1,200 ÷ 3 = 400
1,189 ÷ 3 is about 400

Question 9.
2,110 ÷ 4
______ and ______

Answer: 500

Explanation:
What number close to 2,110 is easy to divide by 4?
2,000 is close to 2,110. What basic fact can you use?
2,000 ÷ 4
Choose 2,000 because it is close to 2,110 and can easily be divided by 4.
20 ÷ 4 = 5
2,000 ÷ 4 = 500
2,110 ÷ 4 is about 500

Reason Abstractly Algebra Estimate to compare. Write <, >, or =.

Question 10.
613 ÷ 3 ______ 581 ÷ 2

Answer: 613 ÷ 3 < 581 ÷ 2

Explanation:
What number close to 613 is easy to divide by 3?
600 is close to 613. What basic fact can you use?
600 ÷ 3
Choose 600 because it is close to 613 and can easily be divided by 3.
6 ÷ 3 = 2
600 ÷ 3 = 200
613 ÷ 3 is about 200

What number close to 581 is easy to divide by 2?
580 is close to 581. What basic fact can you use?
580 ÷ 2
Choose 580 because it is close to 581 and can easily be divided by 2.
58 ÷ 2 = 29
580 ÷ 2 = 290
581 ÷ 2 is about 290

Question 11.
364 ÷ 4 ______ 117 ÷ 6

Answer: 364 ÷ 4 >  117 ÷ 6

Explanation:
What number close to 364 is easy to divide by 4?
360 is close to 364. What basic fact can you use?
360 ÷ 4
Choose 360 because it is close to 364 and can easily be divided by 4.
36 ÷ 4 = 9
360 ÷ 4 = 90
364 ÷ 4 is about 90

What number close to 117 is easy to divide by 6?
120 is close to 117. What basic fact can you use?
120 ÷ 6
Choose 120 because it is close to 117 and can easily be divided by 6.
12 ÷ 6 = 2
120 ÷ 6 = 20
117 ÷ 6 is about 20

Question 12.
2,718 ÷ 8 ______ 963 ÷ 2

Answer: 2,718 ÷ 8 < 963 ÷ 2

Explanation:
What number close to 2,718 is easy to divide by 8?
2,400 is close to 2,718. What basic fact can you use?
2,400 ÷ 8
Choose 2,400 because it is close to 2,718 and can easily be divided by 8.
24 ÷ 8 = 3
2,400 ÷ 8 = 300
2,718 ÷ 8 is about 300

What number close to 963 is easy to divide by 2?
960 is close to 963. What basic fact can you use?
960 ÷ 2
Choose 960 because it is close to 963 and can easily be divided by 2.
96 ÷ 2 = 48
960 ÷ 2 = 480
963 ÷ 2 is about 480

Question 13.
If Cade shoots 275 free throw baskets in 2 hours, about how many can he shoot in 5 hours?
about ______ free throw baskets

Answer: 688 free throw baskets

Explanation:
Number of free-throw baskets in 2 hours= 275
Number of free-throw baskets in 1 hour = 275÷2=137.5
Number of free-throw baskets in 5 hours= 137.5 x 5= 687.5 =rounding to nearest whole number 688 free throw baskets ( approx)

Question 14.
A carpenter has 166 doorknobs in his workshop. Of those doorknobs, 98 are round and the rest are square. If he wants to place 7 square doorknobs in each bin, about how many bins would he need?
about ______ bins

Answer: 10

Explanation:
The total number of doorknobs in a workshop= 166
Number of round doorknobs in a workshop= 98
Number of square doorknobs in a workshop=166-98=68
Number of square doorknobs in each bin= 7
Number of bins= 68÷7= 9.7= rounding to nearest whole number 10 bins (approx)

Page No. 223

Use the table for 15–17.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 9

Question 15.
About how many times does a chicken’s heart beat in 1 minute?
about ______ times

Answer: 275

Explanation:
Number of times the chicken’s heartbeats in 5 minutes= 1,375
Number of times the chicken’s heartbeats in 1 minute= 1,375÷ 5= 275

Question 16.
About how many times does a cow’s heart beat in 2 minutes?
about ______ times

Answer: 130

Explanation:
Number of times the cow’s heartbeats in 5 minutes= 325
Number of times the cow’s heartbeats in 1 minute= 325÷5=65
Number of times the cow’s heartbeats in 2 minutes= 65 x 2=130

Question 17.
Use Reasoning About how many times faster does a cow’s heart beat than a whale’s?
about ______ times

Answer: nearly 11 times

Explanation:
Number of times the cow’s heartbeats in 5 minutes= 325
Number of times the cow’s heartbeats in 1 minute= 325÷5=65

Number of times the whale’s heartbeats in 5 minutes= 31
Number of times the whale’s heartbeats in 1 minute= 31÷5=6.2= rounding to nearest whole number 6 (approx)

Number of more times the cow’s heartbeats compared to whale’s=65÷6=10.8 times=rounding to a nearest whole number 11(approx)

Question 18.
Martha had 154 stamps and her sister had 248 stamps. They combined their collections and put the stamps in an album. If they want to put 8 stamps on each page, about how many pages would they need?
about ______ times

Answer: 50.25 pages

Explanation:
Number of stamps Martha has= 154
Number of stamps Martha’s sister has= 248
The total number of stamps they have= 154+248=402
Number of stamps on each page= 8
Number of pages= 402÷8= 50.25 pages= 51 (approx)

Question 19.
Jamie and his two brothers divided a package of 125 toy cars equally. About how many cars did each of them receive?
about ______ times

Answer: 41.67

Explanation:
Number of toys Jamie has= 125 toy cars
Number of toys Jamie and his two brothers divide= 125÷3= 41.67

Question 20.
Harold and his brother collected 2,019 cans over a 1-year period. Each boy collected the same number of cans. About how many cans did each boy collect? Explain how you found your answer.
about ______ times

Answer: 1,010

Explanation:
Number of cans Harold and his brother collected = 2,019 cans
Number of cans each boy collected = 2,019÷2= 1,009.5 cans = 1,010 cans(approx)

Page No. 224

Question 21.
Cause and Effect
The reading skill cause and effect can help you understand how one detail in a problem is related to another detail.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 10
Chet wants to buy a new bike that costs $276. Chet mows his neighbor’s lawn for $15 each week. Since Chet does not have money saved, he needs to decide which layaway plan he can afford to buy the new bike.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 11
Which plan should Chet choose?
3-month layaway:
$276 ÷ 3
Estimate.
$270 ÷ 3 ______
6-month layaway:
$276 ÷ 6
Estimate.
$300 ÷ 6 _____
Chet earns $15 each week. Since there are usually 4 weeks in a month, multiply to see which payment he can afford.
$15 × 4 = _______
So, Chet can afford the ______ layaway plan.
Type below:
___________

Answer: Chet can afford the 3-months layaway plan.

Explanation:
What number close to $276  is easy to divide by 3?
$270 is close to $276. What basic fact can you use?
$270 ÷ 3
Choose 270 because it is close to 276 and can easily be divided by 3.
27 ÷ 3 = 9
270 ÷ 3 = 90
$276 ÷ 3 is about 90

Use estimation to solve.

Question 21.
Sofia wants to buy a new bike that costs $214. Sofia helps her grandmother with chores each week for $18. Estimate to find which layaway plan Sofia should choose and why.
Type below:
___________

Answer: 3 months

Explanation:
What number close to $214  is easy to divide by 3?
$215 is close to $214. What basic fact can you use?
$215 ÷ 3
Choose 215 because it is close to 214 and can easily be divided by 3.
215 ÷ 3 = 71.6=72 (approx)
$214 ÷ 3 is about 72

Question 22.
Describe a situation when you have used cause and effect to help you solve a math problem.
Type below:
___________

Answer: To buy a bike

Explanation:
3-month layaway:
$276 ÷ 3
Estimate.
$270 ÷ 3 ______
6-month layaway:
$276 ÷ 6
Estimate.
$300 ÷ 6 _____
Chet earns $15 each week. Since there are usually 4 weeks in a month, multiply to see which payment he can afford.
$15 × 4 = _______
So, Chet can afford the ______ layaway plan.

The above is a profit gaining plan to buy a bike.

Common Core – Page No. 224

Estimate Quotients Using Compatible Numbers

Use compatible numbers to estimate the quotient.

Question 1.
389 ÷ 4
400 ÷ 4 = 100

Answer: 100

Explanation:
What number close to 389 is easy to divide by 4?
400 is close to 389. What basic fact can you use?
400 ÷ 4
Choose 400 because it is close to 389 and can easily be divided by 4.
40 ÷ 4 = 10
400 ÷ 4 = 100
389 ÷ 4 is about 100

Question 2.
358 ÷ 3
_____ ÷ 3 = _____

Answer: 120

Explanation:
What number close to358 is easy to divide by 3?
360 is close to 358. What basic fact can you use?
360 ÷ 3
Choose 360 because it is close to 358 and can easily be divided by 3.
36 ÷3 = 12
360 ÷ 3 =120
358 ÷ 3 is about 120

Question 3.
784 ÷ 8
_____ ÷ 8 = _____

Answer: 100

Explanation:
What number close to 784 is easy to divide by 8?
800 is close to 784. What basic fact can you use?
800 ÷ 8
Choose 800 because it is close to 784 and can easily be divided by 8.
80 ÷ 8 = 10
800 ÷ 8 = 100
784 ÷ 8 is about 100

Question 4.
179 ÷ 9
_____ ÷ 9 = _____

Answer: 20

Explanation:
What number close to 179 is easy to divide by 9?
180 is close to 179. What basic fact can you use?
180 ÷ 9
Choose 180 because it is close to 179 and can easily be divided by 9.
18 ÷ 9 = 2
180 ÷ 9 = 20
179 ÷ 9 is about 20

Question 5.
315 ÷ 8
_____ ÷ 8 = _____

Answer: 40

Explanation:
What number close to 315 is easy to divide by 8?
320 is close to 315. What basic fact can you use?
320 ÷ 8
Choose 320 because it is close to 315 and can easily be divided by 8.
32 ÷ 8 = 4
320 ÷ 8 =40
315 ÷ 8 is about 40

Question 6.
2,116 ÷ 7
_____ ÷ 7 = _____

Answer: 300

Explanation:
What number close to 2,116 is easy to divide by 7?
2,100 is close to 2,116. What basic fact can you use?
2,100 ÷ 7
Choose 2,100 because it is close to 2,116 and can easily be divided by 7.
21 ÷ 7= 3
2,100 ÷ 7 = 300
2,116 ÷ 7 is about 300

Question 7.
4,156 ÷ 7
_____ ÷ 7 = _____

Answer: 600

Explanation:
What number close to 4,156 is easy to divide by 7?
4,200 is close to 4,156. What basic fact can you use?
4,200 ÷7
Choose 4,200 because it is close to 4,156 and can easily be divided by 7.
42 ÷ 7 = 6
4,200 ÷ 7 = 600
4,156 ÷ 7 is about 600

Question 8.
474 ÷ 9
_____ ÷ 9 = _____

Answer: 50

Explanation:
What number close to 474 is easy to divide by 9?
450 is close to 474. What basic fact can you use?
450 ÷ 9
Choose 450 because it is close to 474 and can easily be divided by 9.
45 ÷ 9 = 5
450 ÷ 9 = 50
474 ÷ 9 is about 50

Use compatible numbers to find two estimates that the quotient is between.

Question 9.
1,624 ÷ 3
_____ ÷ 3 = _____
_____ ÷ 3 = _____

Answer: The quotient is between 500 and 600

Explanation:
What number close to 1,624 is easy to divide by 3?
1,500 is close to 1,624. What basic fact can you use?
1,500 ÷ 3
Choose 1,500 because it is close to 1,624 and can easily be divided by 3.
15 ÷ 3 = 5
1,500 ÷ 3 = 500
1,624 ÷ 3 is about 500

What number close to 1,624 is easy to divide by 3?
1,800 is close to 1,624. What basic fact can you use?
1,800 ÷ 3
Choose 1,800 because it is close to 1,624 and can easily be divided by 3.
18 ÷ 3 = 6
1,800 ÷ 3 = 600
1,624 ÷ 3 is about 600

Question 10.
2,593 ÷ 6
_____ ÷ 6 = _____
_____ ÷ 6 = _____

Answer: The quotient is between 400 and 500

Explanation:
What number close to 2,593 is easy to divide by 6?
2,400 is close to 2,593. What basic fact can you use?
2,400 ÷ 6
Choose 2,400 because it is close to 2,593 and can easily be divided by 6.
24 ÷ 6 = 4
2,400 ÷ 6 = 400
2,593 ÷ 6 is about 400

What number close to 2,593 is easy to divide by 6?
3,000 is close to 2,593. What basic fact can you use?
3000 ÷ 6
Choose 3,000 because it is close to 2,593 and can easily be divided by 6.
30 ÷ 6 = 5
3,000 ÷ 6 = 500
2,593 ÷ 6 is about 500

Question 11.
1,045 ÷ 2
_____ ÷ 2 = _____
_____ ÷ 2 = _____

Answer: The quotient is between 520 and 525

Explanation:
What number close to 1,045 is easy to divide by 2?
1,040 is close to 1,045. What basic fact can you use?
1,040 ÷ 2
Choose 1,040 because it is close to 1,045 and can easily be divided by 2.
1,04 ÷ 2 = 52
1,040 ÷ 2 = 520
1,045 ÷ 2 is about 520

What number close to 1,045 is easy to divide by 2?
1,050 is close to 1,045. What basic fact can you use?
1,050 ÷ 2
Choose 1,050 because it is close to 1,045 and can easily be divided by 2.
1,050 ÷ 2 = 525
1,045 ÷ 2 is about 525

Question 12.
1,754 ÷ 9
_____ ÷ 9 = _____
_____ ÷ 9 = _____

Answer: The quotient is between 195 and 200

Explanation:
What number close to 1,754 is easy to divide by 9?
1,755 is close to 1,754. What basic fact can you use?
1,755 ÷ 9
Choose 1,755 because it is close to 1,754 and can easily be divided by 9.
1,755 ÷ 9 = 195
1,754 ÷ 9 is about 195

What number close to 1,754 is easy to divide by 9?
1,800 is close to 1,754. What basic fact can you use?
1,800 ÷ 9
Choose 1,800 because it is close to 1,754 and can easily be divided by 9.
18 ÷ 9 = 2
1,800 ÷ 9 = 200
1,754 ÷ 9 is about 200

Question 13.
2,363 ÷ 8
_____ ÷ 8 = _____
_____ ÷ 8 = _____

Answer: The quotient is between 295 and 300

Explanation:
What number close to 2,363 is easy to divide by 8?
2,360 is close to 2,363. What basic fact can you use?
2,360 ÷ 8
Choose 2,360 because it is close to 2,363 and can easily be divided by 8.
2,360 ÷ 8 = 295
2,363 ÷ 8 is about 295

What number close to 2,363 is easy to divide by 8?
2,400 is close to 2,363. What basic fact can you use?
2,400 ÷ 8
Choose 2,400 because it is close to 2,363 and can easily be divided by 8.
24 ÷ 8 = 3
2,400 ÷ 8= 300
2,363 ÷ 8 is about 300

Question 14.
1,649 ÷ 5
_____ ÷ 5 = _____
_____ ÷ 5 = _____

Answer: The quotient is between 329 and 330

Explanation:
What number close to 1,649 is easy to divide by 5?
1,645 is close to 1,649. What basic fact can you use?
1,645 ÷ 5
Choose 1,645 because it is close to 1,649 and can easily be divided by 5.
1,645 ÷ 5 = 329
1,649 ÷ 5 is about 329

What number close to 1,650 is easy to divide by 5?
1,650 is close to 1,649. What basic fact can you use?
1,650 ÷ 5
Choose 1,650 because it is close to 1,649 and can easily be divided by 5.
1,650 ÷ 5 = 330
1,649 ÷ 5 is about 330

Question 15.
5,535 ÷ 7
_____ ÷ 7 = _____
_____ ÷ 7 = _____

Answer: The quotient is between 790 and 791

Explanation:
What number close to 5,535 is easy to divide by 7?
5,530 is close to 5,535. What basic fact can you use?
5,530 ÷ 7
Choose 5,530 because it is close to 5,535 and can easily be divided by 7.
553 ÷ 7 = 79
5,530 ÷ 7 = 790
5,535 ÷ 7 is about 790

What number close to 5,535 is easy to divide by 7?
5,537 is close to 5,535. What basic fact can you use?
5,537 ÷ 7
Choose 5,537 because it is close to 5,535 and can easily be divided by 7.
553 ÷ 7 = 79
5,537 ÷ 7 = 791
5,535 ÷ 7 is about 791

Question 16.
3,640 ÷ 6
_____ ÷ 6 = _____
_____ ÷ 6 = _____

Answer: The quotient is between 606 and 607

Explanation:
What number close to 3,640 is easy to divide by 6?
3,636 is close to 3,640. What basic fact can you use?
3,636 ÷ 6
Choose 3,636 because it is close to 3,640 and can easily be divided by 6.
36 ÷ 6 = 6
3,636 ÷ 6 = 606
3,640 ÷ 6 is about 606

What number close to 3,640 is easy to divide by 6?
3,642 is close to 3,640. What basic fact can you use?
3,642 ÷ 6
Choose 3,642 because it is close to 3,640 and can easily be divided by 6.
3,642 ÷ 6 = 607
3,640 ÷ 6 is about 607

Problem Solving

Question 17.
A CD store sold 3,467 CDs in 7 days. About the same number of CDs were sold each day. About how many CDs did the store sell each day?
about _____ CDs

Answer: 495(approx)

Explanation:
Total number of CDs in the store= 3,467
Number of days= 7
Number of CDs sold on one day= 3,467 ÷ 7=495(approx)

Question 18.
Marcus has 731 books. He puts about the same number of books on each of 9 shelves in his a bookcase. About how many books are on each shelf?
about _____ books

Answer: 81 books(approx)

Explanation:
Total number of books Marcus has= 731
Number of shelves= 9
Number of books on each shelf= 731÷9= 81 (approx)

Common Core – Page No. 226

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Jamal is planting seeds for a garden nursery. He plants 9 seeds in each container. If Jamal has 296 seeds to plant, about how many containers will he use?
Options:
a. about 20
b. about 30
c. about 200
d. about 300

Answer: b. about 30

Explanation:
Total number of seeds Jamal has= 296
Number of seeds placed in each container= 9
Number of containers Jamal used= 296÷9= 32.8=33 (approx)
Therefore, the number of containers used is about 30

Question 2.
Winona purchased a set of vintage beads. There are 2,140 beads in the set. If she uses the beads to make bracelets that have 7 beads each, about how many bracelets can she make?
Options:
a. about 30
b. about 140
c. about 300
d. about 14,000

Answer: c. about 300

Explanation:
Total number of beads Winona has= 2,140
Number of beads in each bracelet= 7
Number of bracelets made= 2,140÷7=305.7=306(approx)
Therefore, the number of bracelets made are about 30

Spiral Review

Question 3.
A train traveled 360 miles in 6 hours. How many miles per hour did the train travel?
Options:
a. 60 miles per hour
b. 66 miles per hour
c. 70 miles per hour
d. 600 miles per hour

Answer: a. 60 miles per hour

Explanation:
Total number of miles travelled by the train= 360
Time taken by the train to cover 360 miles= 6 hours
Number of miles travelled in each hour= 360÷6=60 miles

Question 4.
An orchard has 12 rows of pear trees. Each row has 15 pear trees. How many pear trees are there in the orchard?
Options:
a. 170
b. 180
c. 185
d. 190

Answer: b. 180

Explanation:
Number of rows of pear trees in an orchard= 12
Number of pear trees in each row=15
Total number of pear trees in the orchard= 12 x 15=180

Question 5.
Megan rounded 366,458 to 370,000. To which place did Megan round the number?
Options:
a. hundred thousand
b. ten thousand
c. thousands
d. hundreds

Answer: b. ten thousand

Explanation:
The given number is 366,458, the ten thousand place digit has 6 which while rounding off should be changed to the next consecutive number and the digits in the other places should be written as zeroes.

Question 6.
Mr. Jessup, an airline pilot, flies 1,350 miles a day. How many miles will he fly in 8 days?
Options:
a. 1,358 miles
b. 8,400 miles
c. 10,800 miles
d. 13,508 miles

Answer: c. 10,800 miles

Explanation:
Number of miles flew by Mr.Jessup in one day= 1,350 miles
Number of days=8
Total number of miles flew by Mr.Jessup in 8 days= 1,350 x 8= 10,800 miles

Page No. 229

Model the division on the grid.

Question 1.
26 ÷ 2 = (□ ÷ 2) + (□ ÷ 2)
= □ + □
= □
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 12
Type below:
_________

Answer: 26 ÷ 2 = (20 ÷ 2) + (6 ÷ 2)
= 10 + 3
= 13

Explanation:
A. Outline a rectangle on a grid to model 26 ÷ 2. Shade columns of 2 until you have 26 squares.
How many groups of 2 can you make?
B. Think of 26 as 20 + 6. Break apart the model into two rectangles to show (20 + 6 ) ÷ 2. Label and shade the smaller rectangles. Use two different colours.
C. Each rectangle models a division.
26 ÷ 2 = (20÷ 2 ) + (6÷ 2)
= 10+ 3
= 13

Question 2.
45 ÷ 3 = (□ ÷ 3) + (□ ÷ 3)
= □ + □
= □
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 13
Type below:
_________

Answer: 45 ÷ 3 = (15 ÷ 3) + (30 ÷ 3)
= 5 + 10
= 15

Explanation:
A. Outline a rectangle on a grid to model 45 ÷ 3.
Shade columns of 3 until you have 45 squares.
How many groups of 3 can you make? _
B. Think of 45 as 15 + 30. Break apart the model into two rectangles to show (15 + 30 ) ÷ 3. Label and shade the smaller rectangles. Use two different colours.
C. Each rectangle models a division.
45 ÷ 3 = (15÷ 3 ) + (30÷ 3 )
= 5 + 10
= 15

Find the quotient.

Question 3.
82 ÷ 2 = (□ ÷ 2) + (□ ÷ 2)
= □ + □
= □
______

Answer: 82 ÷ 2 = (80 ÷ 2) + ( 2÷ 2)
= 40 + 1
= 41

Explanation:
A. Outline a rectangle on a grid to model 82 ÷ 2. Shade columns of 2 until you have 80 squares.
How many groups of 2 can you make?
B. Think of 82 as 80 + 2. Break apart the model into two rectangles to show (80 + 2 ) ÷ 2. Label and shade the smaller rectangles. Use two different colors.
C. Each rectangle models a division.
82 ÷ 2 = (80 ÷ 2 ) + (2÷ 2)
= 40 + 1
= 41

Question 4.
208 ÷ 4 = (□ ÷ 4) + (□ ÷ 4)
= □ + □
= □
______

Answer: 208 ÷ 4 = (200 ÷ 4) + (8 ÷ 4)
= 50 + 4
= 54

Explanation:
A. Outline another model to show 208 ÷ 4.
How many groups of 4 can you make?
B. Think of 208 as 200 + 8. Break apart the model, label, and shade to show two divisions.
208 ÷ 4 = (200 ÷ 4 ) + (8 ÷ 4 )
= 50 + 4
= 54

Use base-ten blocks to model the quotient.
Then record the quotient.

Question 5.
88 ÷ 4 = ______

Answer: 22

Explanation:

A. Outline another model to show 88 ÷ 4.
How many groups of 4 can you make?
B. Think of 88 as 80 + 8. Break apart the model, label, and shade to show two divisions.
88 ÷ 4 = (80 ÷ 4 ) + (8 ÷ 4 )
= 40 + 4
= 44

Question 6.
36 ÷ 3 = ______

Answer: 12

Explanation:

A. Outline a rectangle on a grid to model 36 ÷ 3.
Shade columns of 3 until you have 36 squares.
How many groups of 3 can you make? _
B. Think of 36 as 6 + 30. Break apart the model into two rectangles to show (6 + 30 ) ÷ 3. Label and shade the smaller rectangles. Use two different colours.
C. Each rectangle models a division.
36 ÷ 3 = (30÷ 3 ) + (6÷ 3 )
= 10 + 2
= 12

Question 7.
186 ÷ 6 = ______

Answer: 31

Explanation:

A. Outline a rectangle on a grid to model 186 ÷ 6.
Shade columns of 18 until you have 180 squares.
How many groups of 6 can you make? _
B. Think of 186 as 6 + 180. Break apart the model into two rectangles to show (6 + 180 ) ÷ 6. Label and shade the smaller rectangles. Use two different colours.
C. Each rectangle models a division.
186 ÷ 6 = (180÷ 6 ) + (6÷ 6 )
= 30 + 1
= 31

Question 8.
Explain how you can model finding quotients using the Distributive Property.
Type below:
_________

Answer: We can use the Distributive Property to break apart numbers to
make them easier to divide.

Explanation:
50
The Distributive Property of division says that dividing a sum by
a number is the same as dividing each addend by the number
and then adding the quotients.

Question 9.
Justin earned $50 mowing lawns and $34 washing cars. He wants to divide his money into 3 equal accounts. How much will he put in each account? Explain.
$ ______

Answer: $28

Explanation:
The amount earned by Justin on mowing lawns=$50
The amount earned by Justin on washing cars=$34
Total amount earned=$50 + $34= $84
Number of parts into which he wanted to divide the amount he earned= 3
The amount put in each account= $84 ÷ 3 = $28

Page No. 230

Question 10.
Christelle went to a gift shop. The shop sells candles in a variety of sizes and colors. The picture shows a display of candles. Write a problem that can be solved using the picture.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 14
Pose a problem.      Solve your problem

Answer:
Question: How many candles are there in the gift shop?

Explanation:
Count the number of candles in the rows and columns and then multiply them, by this we can find out the total number of candles in the gift shop.

Describe how you could change the problem by changing the number of rows of candles. Then solve the problem.
Type below:
_________

Answer: There will be no change in the solution by changing the number of rows of candles.

Explanation:
By changing the number of rows of candles the number of columns increase but there will be no change in the total number of candles.

Question 11.
For 11a–11d, choose Yes or No to indicate if the expression shows a way to break apart the dividend to find the quotient 147 ÷ 7.
a. (135 ÷ 7) + (10 ÷ 7)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: ii. no

Explanation:
Because 137+10 is not equal to 147

Question 11.
b. (147 ÷ 3) + (147 ÷ 4)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: ii. no

Explanation:
Because according to the distributive property we need to divide the dividend into two parts, but not the divisor.

Question 11.
c. (140 ÷ 7) + (7 ÷ 7)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: i. yes

Explanation:
147 ÷ 7
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 147
STEP2 We can break the number 147 into 140 + 7
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (140 ÷ 7) + (7 ÷ 7)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 20 +1= 21

Question 11.
d. (70 ÷ 7) + (77 ÷ 7)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: i. yes

Explanation:
147 ÷ 7
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 147
STEP2 We can break the number 147 into 70 + 77
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (70 ÷ 7) + (77 ÷ 7)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 10 +11= 21

Common Core – Page No. 231

Division and the Distributive Property

Find the quotient.

Question 1.
54 ÷ 3 = (30 ÷ 3) + (24 ÷ 3)
= 10 + 8
= 18
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 15

Answer: 18

Explanation:
54 ÷ 3
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 54
STEP2 We can break the number 54 into 30 + 24
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (30 ÷ 3) + (24÷ 3)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 10 +8= 18

Question 2.
81 ÷ 3 = ______

Answer: 27

Explanation:
81 ÷ 3
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 81
STEP2 We can break the number 81 into 21 + 60
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (60 ÷ 3) + (21 ÷ 3)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 20 +7= 27

Question 3.
232 ÷ 4 = ______

Answer: 58

Explanation:
232 ÷ 4
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 232
STEP2 We can break the number 232 into 200 + 32
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (200 ÷ 4) + (32 ÷ 4)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 50 +8= 58

Question 4.
305 ÷ 5 = ______

Answer: 61

Explanation:
305 ÷ 5
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 305
STEP2 We can break the number 305 into 300 + 5
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (300 ÷ 5) + (5 ÷ 5)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 60 +1= 61

Question 5.
246 ÷ 6 = ______

Answer: 41

Explanation:
246 ÷ 6
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 246
STEP2 We can break the number 246 into 240 + 6
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (240 ÷ 6) + (6 ÷ 6)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 40 +1= 41

Question 6.
69 ÷ 3 = ______

Answer: 23

Explanation:
69 ÷ 3
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 69
STEP2 We can break the number 69 into 60 + 9
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (60 ÷ 3) + (9 ÷ 3)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 20 +3= 23

Question 7.
477 ÷ 9 = ______

Answer: 53

Explanation:
477 ÷ 9
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 477
STEP2 We can break the number 477 into 450 + 27
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (450 ÷ 9) + (27 ÷ 9)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 50 +3= 53

Question 8.
224 ÷ 7 = ______

Answer: 32

Explanation:
224 ÷ 7
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 224
STEP2 We can break the number 224 into 210 + 14
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (210 ÷ 7) + (14 ÷ 7)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 30 +2= 32

Question 9.
72 ÷ 4 = ______

Answer: 18

Explanation:
72 ÷ 4
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 72
STEP2 We can break the number 72 into 40 + 32
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (40 ÷ 4) + (32 ÷ 4)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 10 +8= 18

Question 10.
315 ÷ 3 = ______

Answer: 105

Explanation:
315 ÷ 3
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 315
STEP2 We can break the number 315 into 300 + 15
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (300 ÷ 3) + (15 ÷3)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 100 +5= 105

Problem Solving

Question 11.
Cecily picked 219 apples. She divided the apples equally into 3 baskets. How many apples are in each basket?
______ apples

Answer: 73 apples

Explanation:
The total number of apples Cecily picked= 219 apples
Number of parts into which she wanted to divide the apples= 3
Number of apples in each part = Quotient of 147 ÷ 7
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 219
STEP2 We can break the number 219 into 210 + 9
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (210 ÷ 3) + (9 ÷ 3)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 70 +3= 73

Question 12.
Jordan has 260 basketball cards. He divides them into 4 equal groups. How many cards are in each group?
______ cards

Answer: 65 cards

Explanation:
The total number of basketball cards Jordan has= 260 basketball cards
Number of parts into which he wanted to divide the cards= 4
Number of apples in each part = Quotient of 260 ÷ 4
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 260
STEP2 We can break the number 260 into 240 + 20
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (240 ÷ 4) + (20 ÷ 4)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 60 +5= 65

Question 13.
The Wilsons drove 324 miles in 6 hours. If they drove the same number of miles each hour, how many miles did they drive in 1 hour?
______ miles

Answer: 54 miles

Explanation:
The total number of miles drove by Wilson= 324 miles
Number of hours he drove = 6
Number of miles drove in each hour = Quotient of 324 ÷ 6
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 324
STEP2 We can break the number 324 into 300 + 24
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (300 ÷ 6) + (24 ÷ 6)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 50 +4= 54

Question 14.
Phil has 189 stamps to put into his stamp album. He puts the same number of stamps on each of 9 pages. How many stamps does Phil put on each page?
______ stamps

Answer: 21 stamps

Explanation:
The total number of stamps Phil has= 189 stamps
Number of pages= 9
Number of stamps put on each page  = Quotient of 189 ÷ 9
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 189
STEP2 We can break the number 189 into 180 + 9
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (180 ÷ 9) + (9 ÷ 9)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 20 +1= 21

Common Core – Page No. 232

Lesson Check

Question 1.
A landscaping company planted 176 trees in 8 equal rows in the new park. How many trees did the company plant in each row?
Options:
a. 18
b. 20
c. 22
d. 24

Answer: c. 22

Explanation:
The total number of trees in the landscaping= 176 trees
Number of rows= 8
Number of trees in each row = Quotient of 176 ÷ 8
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 176
STEP2 We can break the number 176 into 160 + 16
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (160 ÷ 8) + (16 ÷ 8)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 20 +2= 22

Question 2.
Arnold can do 65 pushups in 5 minutes. How many pushups can he do in 1 minute?
Options:
a. 11
b. 13
c. 15
d. 17

Answer: b. 13

Explanation:
The total number of pushups done by Arnold = 65
Number of minutes spent on pushups= 5
Number of pushups done in each minute = Quotient of 65 ÷ 5
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 65
STEP2 We can break the number 65 into 60 + 5
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (60 ÷ 5) + (5 ÷ 5)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 12 +1= 13

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Last Saturday, there were 1,486 people at the Cineplex. There were about the same number of people in each of the 6 theaters. Which is the best estimate of the number of people in each theater?
Options:
a. between 20 and 30
b. between 80 and 90
c. between 100 and 200
d. between 200 and 300

Answer: d. between 200 and 300

Explanation:
Total number of people at the Cineplex= 1,486 people
Number of theatres =  6
Number of people at each theatre= estimate of the number of people 1,486 ÷ 6

What number close to 1,486 is easy to divide by 6?
1,488 is close to 1,486. What basic fact can you use?
1,488 ÷ 6
Choose 1,488 because it is close to 1,486 and can easily be divided by 6.
1,488 ÷ 6 = 248
1,486 ÷ 6 is about 248

What number close to 1,486 is easy to divide by 6?
1,482 is close to 1,486 . What basic fact can you use?
1,482 ÷ 6
Choose 1,482 because it is close to 1,486 and can easily be divided by 6.
1,482 ÷ 6 = 247
1,486 ÷ 6 is about 247

Question 4.
Nancy walked 50 minutes each day for 4 days last week. Gillian walked 35 minutes each day for 6 days last week. Which statement is true?
Options:
a. Gillian walked 10 minutes more than Nancy.
b. Gillian walked 20 minutes more than Nancy.
c. Nancy walked 10 minutes more than Gillian.
d. Nancy walked 15 minutes more than Gillian.

Answer: d. Nancy walked 15 minutes more than Gillian.

Explanation:
Time walked by Nancy= 50 minutes
Time walked by Gillian= 35 minutes
Nancy walked more time compared to Gillian
50-35=15 minutes
Therefore,  Nancy walked 15 minutes more than Gillian.

Question 5.
Three boys share 28 toy cars equally. Which best describes how the cars are shared?
Options:
a. Each gets 3 cars with 1 left over.
b. Each gets 8 cars with 2 left over.
c. Each gets 9 cars with 1 left over.
d. Each gets 10 cars with 2 left over.

Answer: c. Each gets 9 cars with 1 left over.

Explanation:
Total number of toys three boys have= 28
Number of toys each boy got= 28 ÷3=9.33
Therefore we can say that each gets 9 cars with 1 leftover.

Question 6.
An airplane flies at a speed of 474 miles per hour. How many miles does the plane fly in 5 hours?
Options:
a. 2,070 miles
b. 2,140 miles
c. 2,370 miles
d. 2,730 miles

Answer: c. 2,370 miles

Explanation:
Number of miles flew by aeroplane in one hour= 474
Number of hours the aeroplane flew= 5 hours
Total number of miles flew in 5 hours= 474 x 5=  2,370 miles

Page No. 233

Choose the best term from the box to complete the sentence.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 16

Question 1.
A number that is the product of a number and a counting number is called a _____________.
___________

Answer: Multiple

Explanation:
3 x 4 = 12
In which 4 is a multiple and also 4 is a counting number

Question 2.
Numbers that are easy to compute mentally are called _____________.
___________

Answer: Compatible numbers

Explanation:
Compatible numbers are pairs of numbers that are easy to add, subtract, multiply, or divide mentally. When using estimation to approximate a calculation, replace actual numbers with compatible numbers.

Question 3.
When a number cannot be divided evenly, the amount left over is called the _____________.
___________

Answer: Remainder

Explanation:
When we divide 10 with 3 there will be 1 remaining, which is called remainder.

Divide. Draw a quick picture to help.

Question 4.
26 ÷ 3
_____ R _____

Answer: Quotient: 8 Remainder: 2

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 26 counters to represent the 26 dominoes. Then draw 3 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 8 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled= quotient of 26 ÷ 3 = 8

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 2

Question 5.
19 ÷ 4
_____ R _____

Answer: Quotient: 4 Remainder: 3

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 19 counters to represent the 19 dominoes. Then draw 4 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 4 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled= quotient of 19 ÷ 4 = 4

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 3

Use basic facts and place value to find the quotient.

Question 6.
810 ÷ 9 = _____

Answer: 90

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 81 ÷ 9
STEP 2 Use place value. 810 = 81 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 81 tens ÷ 9 = 9 tens
810 ÷ 9 = 90

Question 7.
210 ÷ 7 = _____

Answer: 30

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 21 ÷ 7
STEP 2 Use place value. 210 = 21 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 21 tens ÷ 7 = 3 tens
210 ÷ 7 = 30

Question 8.
3,000 ÷ 6 = _____

Answer: 500

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 30 ÷ 6
STEP 2 Use place value. 3,000 = 30 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 30 hundreds ÷ 6 = 5 hundreds
3,000 ÷ 6 = 500

Use compatible numbers to estimate the quotient.

Question 9.
635 ÷ 9
about _____

Answer: 70

Explanation:
What number close to 635 is easy to divide by 9?
630 is close to 635. What basic fact can you use?
630 ÷ 9
Choose 630 because it is close to 635 and can easily be divided by 9.
63 ÷ 9 = 7
630 ÷ 9 = 70
635 ÷ 9 is about 70

Question 10.
412 ÷ 5
about _____

Answer: 82

Explanation:
What number close to 412 is easy to divide by 5?
410 is close to 412. What basic fact can you use?
410 ÷ 5
Choose 410 because it is close to 412 and can easily be divided by 5.
410 ÷ 5 = 82
412 ÷ 5 is about 82

Question 11.
490 ÷ 8
about _____

Answer: 60

Explanation:
What number close to 490 is easy to divide by 8?
480 is close to 490. What basic fact can you use?
480 ÷ 8
Choose 480 because it is close to 490 and can easily be divided by 8.
48 ÷ 8 = 6
480 ÷ 8 = 60
490 ÷ 8 is about 60

Use grid paper or base-ten blocks to model the quotient.
Then record the quotient.

Question 12.
63 ÷ 3 = _____

Answer: 21

Explanation:

A. Outline another model to show 63 ÷ 3.
How many groups of 3 can you make?
B. Think of 63 as 60 + 3. Break apart the model, label, and shade to show two divisions.
63 ÷ 3 = (60 ÷ 3 ) + (3 ÷ 3 )
= 20 + 1
= 21

Question 13.
85 ÷ 5 = _____

Answer: 17

Explanation:

A. Outline another model to show 85 ÷ 5.
How many groups of 5 can you make?
B. Think of 85 as 80 + 5. Break apart the model, label, and shade to show two divisions.
85 ÷ 5 = (80 ÷ 5 ) + (5 ÷ 5)
= 16 + 1
= 17

Question 14.
168 ÷ 8 = _____

Answer:21

Explanation:

A. Outline another model to show 168 ÷ 8.
How many groups of 8 can you make?
B. Think of 168 as 160 + 8. Break apart the model, label, and shade to show two divisions.
168 ÷ 8 = (160 ÷ 8 ) + (8 ÷ 8 )
= 20 + 1
= 21

Page No. 234

Question 15.
Ana has 296 coins in her coin collection. She put the same number of coins in each of 7 jars. About how many coins are in each jar?
about _____ coins

Answer: 42

Explanation:
The total number of coins Ana has= 296 coins
Number of Jars= 7
Number of coins in each Jar= 296 ÷ 7 = 42 coins

Question 16.
Which two estimates is the quotient 345 ÷ 8 between?
_____ and _____

Answer: The quotient is between 42 and 43

Explanation:

What number close to 345 is easy to divide by 8?
336 is close to 1,624. What basic fact can you use?
336 ÷ 8
Choose 336  because it is close to 345 and can easily be divided by 8.
336 ÷ 8 = 42
345 ÷ 8 is about 42

What number close to 345 is easy to divide by 8?
344 is close to 345. What basic fact can you use?
344 ÷ 8
Choose 344 because it is close to 345 and can easily be divided by 8.
344 ÷ 8 = 43
345 ÷ 8 is about 43

Question 17.
A total of 8,644 people went to the football game. Of those people, 5,100 sat on the home side and the rest sat on the visitor’s side. If the people sitting on the visitor’s side filled 8 equal-sized sections, about how many people sat in each of the sections?
about _____ people

Answer: 443

Explanation:
Total number of people in the football game= 8,644
Number of people who sat on the homeside= 5,100
Number of people who sat on the visitor’s side= 3,544
Number of equal-sized sections= 8
Number of people who sat in each of the sections= 3,544 ÷ 8= 443

Question 18.
There are 4 students on a team for a relay race. How many teams can be made from 27 students?
_____ teams

Answer: 7

Explanation:
The total number of students= 27
Number of students in each team= 4
Number of teams = 27 ÷ 4= 6.75 = 7 (approx)

Question 19.
Eight teams of high school students helped clean up trash in the community. Afterwards, they shared 23 pizzas equally. How many pizzas did each team get?
_____ \(\frac{ □ }{ □ }\)

Answer: 3

Explanation:
Total number of pizzas= 23
Number of teams= 8
Number of pizzas each team got= 23 ÷ 8=2.8=3(approx)

Page No. 237

Use repeated subtraction to divide.

Question 1.
84 ÷ 7
_____

Answer: 12

Explanation:
A. Begin with 84 counters. Subtract 7 counters.
B. Subtract 7 counters from 84 and repeat the processes until the remainder cannot be subtracted from the divisor.
C. Record the number of counters left and the number of times you subtracted.
D. The number of times you subtracted is the quotient is 12.

Question 2.
60 ÷ 4
_____

Answer: 15

Explanation:
A. Begin with 60 counters. Subtract 4 counters.
B. Subtract 4 counters from 60 and repeat the processes until the remainder cannot be subtracted from the divisor.
C. Record the number of counters left and the number of times you subtracted.
D. The number of times you subtracted is the quotient is 15.

Question 3.
91 ÷ 8
_____ R _____

Answer: 11.3=11(approx)

Explanation:
A. Begin with 91 counters. Subtract 8 counters.
B. Subtract 8 counters from 91 and repeat the processes until the remainder cannot be subtracted from the divisor.
C. Record the number of counters left and the number of times you subtracted.
D. The number of times you subtracted is the quotient is 11

Draw a number line to divide.

Question 4.
65 ÷ 5 = _____

Answer: 13

Explanation:
A. Begin with 65 counters. Subtract 5 counters.
B. Subtract 5 counters from 65 and repeat the processes until the remainder cannot be subtracted from the divisor.
C. Record the number of counters left and the number of times you subtracted.
D. The number of times you subtracted is the quotient is 13

Question 5.
Use Appropriate Tools Can you divide 32 by 3 evenly? Use the number line to explain your answer.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 17
Type below:
__________

Answer: 11 (approx)

Explanation:
How many equal groups of 3 did you subtract?
So, 32 ÷ 3 = 10.8=11(approx).

Question 6.
John has $40 to spend at the yard sale. He buys 6 books for $2 each. He would like to spend the rest of his money on model cars for his collection. If the cars cost $7 each, how many can he buy? Explain.
_____ cars

Answer: 4 cars

Explanation:
Total amount John spent at the yard sale= $40
Number of books= 6
Cost of each book= $2
Cost of 6 books= 6 x $2 = $12
Amount left after John bought 6 books= $40 – $12 = $28
Cost of each car= $7
Number of cars bought = $28 ÷ $7 = $4

Page No. 238

Question 7.
A new playground will be 108 feet long. Builders need to allow 9 feet of space for each piece of climbing equipment. They want to put as many climbers along the length of the playground as possible. How many climbers can they place?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 18
a. What are you asked to find?
Type below:
__________

Answer: 12

Explanation:
A. Begin with 108 counters. Subtract 9 counters.
B. Subtract 9 counters from 108 and repeat the processes until the remainder cannot be subtracted from the divisor.
C. Record the number of counters left and the number of times you subtracted.
D. The number of times you subtracted is the quotient is 12.

Question 7.
b. How can you use repeated subtraction to solve the problem?
Type below:
__________

Answer: Repeated subtraction is a method to solve and find the quotient.

Explanation:
Example:
A. Begin with 65 counters. Subtract 5 counters.
B. Subtract 5 counters from 65 and repeat the processes until the remainder cannot be subtracted from the divisor.
C. Record the number of counters left and the number of times you subtracted.
D. The number of times you subtracted is the quotient is 13

Question 7.
c. Tell why you might use multiples of the divisor to solve the problem.
Type below:
__________

Answer: The multiple which divides 108 is 12

Explanation:
The number 108 has multiples which divide 108 evenly,
1 x 108 =108
2 x 54   =108
3 x 36   =108
4 x 27   =108
6 x 18   =108
9 x  12  =108
12 x 9   =108
18 x 6   =108
27 x 4   =108
36 x 3   =108
54 x 2   =108
108 x 1   =108
Multiples which divide 108 are 1,2,3,4,5,6,9,12,18,27,36,54,108.

Question 7.
d. Show steps to solve the problem.
Type below:
__________

Answer: 108 ÷ 9 =12

Explanation:
A. Begin with 108 counters. Subtract 9 counters.
B. Subtract 9 counters from 108 and repeat the processes until the remainder cannot be subtracted from the divisor.
C. Record the number of counters left and the number of times you subtracted.
D. The number of times you subtracted is the quotient is 12

Question 7.
e. Complete the sentences.
There are _______ equal parts of the playground, each _______ feet long.
So, _______ climbers can fit along the length of the playground.
Type below:
__________

Answer: There are ___108____ equal parts of the playground, each __09_____ feet long. So, __12_____ climbers can fit along the length of the playground.

Explanation:
A new playground will be 108 feet long.
Builders need to allow 9 feet of space for each piece of climbing equipment.
Number of climbers that can fit along the length of the playground= 108 ÷ 9 =12

Question 8.
Which model matches each expression?
Write the letter on the line next to the model.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 19
Type below:
__________

Answer: 240 ÷ 80 expression resembles the second model while 240 ÷ 60 expression resembles the first model.

Explanation:
240 ÷ 80
A. Draw a number line with 80 as each interval.
B. Draw up to 240 and count the intervals, it gives the quotient.
C. The quotient is 3
240 ÷ 60
A. Draw a number line with 60 as each interval.
B. Draw up to 240 and count the intervals, it gives the quotient.
C. The quotient is 4

Common Core – Page No. 239

Divide Using Repeated Subtraction
Use repeated subtraction to divide.

Question 1.
42 ÷ 3 = 14
3)\(\overline { 42 } \)
-30 ← 10 × 3 | 10
——-
12
-12 ← 4 × 3 | +4
——-    ———–
0             14

Answer: 14

Explanation:
A. Begin with 42 counters. Subtract 3 counters.
B. Subtract 3 counters from 42 and repeat the processes until the remainder cannot be subtracted from the divisor.
C. Record the number of counters left and the number of times you subtracted.
D. The number of times you subtracted is the quotient is 14

Question 2.
72 ÷ 4 = _____

Answer: 18

Explanation:
A. Begin with 72 counters. Subtract 4 counters.
B. Subtract 4 counters from 72 and repeat the processes until the remainder cannot be subtracted from the divisor.
C. Record the number of counters left and the number of times you subtracted.
D. The number of times you subtracted is the quotient is 18

Question 3.
93 ÷ 3 = _____

Answer: 31

Explanation:
A. Begin with 93 counters. Subtract 3 counters.
B. Subtract 3 counters from 93 and repeat the processes until the remainder cannot be subtracted from the divisor.
C. Record the number of counters left and the number of times you subtracted.
D. The number of times you subtracted is the quotient is 31

Question 4.
35 ÷ 4 = _____ r _____

Answer: 8r3

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 35 counters to represent the 35 dominoes. Then draw 4 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 4 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 35 ÷ 4
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 4 counters, therefore, the quotient is 8

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 3

For 35 ÷ 4, the quotient is 8 and the remainder is 3, or 8 r3.

Question 5.
93 ÷ 10 = _____ r _____

Answer: 9r3

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 93 counters to represent the 93 dominoes. Then draw 10 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 10 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 93 ÷ 10
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 10 counters, therefore, the quotient is 9

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 3

For 93 ÷ 10, the quotient is 9 and the remainder is 3, or 9 r3.

Question 6.
86 ÷ 9 = _____ r _____

Answer: 9r5

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 86 counters to represent the 86 dominoes. Then draw 9 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 9 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 86 ÷ 9
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 9 counters, therefore, the quotient is 9

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 5

For 86 ÷ 9, the quotient is 9 and the remainder is 5, or 9 r5.

Draw a number line to divide.

Question 7.
70 ÷ 5 = _____

Answer: 14

Explanation:
A. Draw a number line with 5 as each interval.
B. Draw up to 70 and count the intervals, it gives the quotient.
C. The quotient is 14

Problem Solving

Question 8.
Gretchen has 48 small shells. She uses 2 shells to make one pair of earrings. How many pairs of earrings can she make?
_____ pairs

Answer: 24 pairs

Explanation:
Total number of small shells= 48
Number of shells used to make one pair of earrings = 2
Number of pair of earrings made = 48 ÷ 2 =24

Question 9.
James wants to purchase a telescope for $54. If he saves $3 per week, in how many weeks will he have saved enough to purchase the telescope?
_____ weeks

Answer: $18

Explanation:
Cost of the telescope=$54
Amount saved each week = $3
Number of weeks he has to save the money to purchase the telescope = $54 ÷ $3 = $18

Common Core – Page No. 240

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Randall collects postcards that his friends send him when they travel. He can put 6 cards on one scrapbook page. How many pages does Randall need to fit 42 postcards?
Options:
a. 3
b. 4
c. 6
d. 7

Answer: d. 7

Explanation:
Total number of postcards Randall has = 42 postcards
Number of postcards on one scrapbook page = 6 cards
Number of pages needed to fit the postcards = 42 ÷ 6=7

Question 2.
Ari stocks shelves at a grocery store. He puts 35 cans of juice on each shelf. The shelf has 4 equal rows and another row with only 3 cans. How many cans are in each of the equal rows?
Options:
a. 6
b. 7
c. 8
d. 9

Answer: c. 8

Explanation:
Total number of cans of juice on each shelf = 35
Number of rows = 4
Number of cans on the other shelf = 3
Number of cans placed on the first shelf = 35 – 3 = 32
Number of juice cans in the first row = 32 ÷ 4 = 8 cans

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Fiona sorted her CDs into separate bins. She placed 4 CDs in each bin. If she has 160 CDs, how many bins did she fill?
Options:
a. 4
b. 16
c. 40
d. 156

Answer: c. 40

Explanation:
Total number of CD’s in Fiona has = 160 CD’s
Number of CD’s placed in each bin = 4
Number of bins required to place the CD’s = 160 ÷ 4 = 40

Question 4.
Eamon is arranging 39 books on 3 shelves. If he puts the same number of books on each shelf, how many books will there be on each shelf?
Options:
a. 11
b. 12
c. 13
d. 14

Answer: c. 13

Explanation:
Total number of books Eamon has = 39 books
Number of shelves = 3
Number of books in each shelf = 39 ÷ 3 = 13

Question 5.
A newborn boa constrictor measures 18 inches long. An adult boa constrictor measures 9 times the length of the newborn plus 2 inches. How long is the adult?
Options:
a. 142 inches
b. 162 inches
c. 164 inches
d. 172 inches

Answer: c. 164 inches

Explanation:
Length of newborn boa constrictor = 18 inches
Length of an adult boa constrictor = 9 x Length of newborn boa constrictor = 9 x 18 = 162
Total length of an adult boa constrictor = 162 + 2 = 164 inches

Question 6.
Madison has 6 rolls of coins. Each roll has 20 coins. How many coins does Madison have in all?
Options:
a. 110
b. 120
c. 125
d. 130

Answer: b. 120

Explanation:
Number of rolls of coins = 6
Number of coins in each roll = 20
Total number of coins Madison has = 20 x 6 = 120

Page No. 243

Question 1.
Lacrosse is played on a field 330 ft long. How many yards long is a lacrosse field? (3 feet = 1 yard)
Divide. Use partial quotients.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 20
So, the lacrosse field is _____ yards long.
______ yards

Answer: 37 yards (approx)

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor. For example, you know that you can make at least 100 ft which is long 33 yards.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 3.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 3 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 110 ft =  110 ÷ 3 = 36.6 yards = 37 yards (approx).

Divide. Use partial quotients.

Question 2.
3)\(\overline { 225 } \)
____

Answer: 75

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 50 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 3.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 3 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 50 x 3 = 150 : 225 – 150 = 75
3 x 25 = 75 : 75 – 75 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 75 ( 50 + 25)

Divide. Use rectangular models to record the partial quotients.

Question 3.
428 ÷ 4 =
____

Answer: 107

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 50 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 4.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 4 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 50 x 4 = 200 : 428 – 200 = 228
4 x 50 = 200 : 228 – 200 = 28
7 x 4 = 28 : 28 – 28 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 107 ( 50 + 50 + 7)
The rectangle models are given below :

Divide. Use partial quotients.

Question 4.
7)\(\overline { 224 } \)
____

Answer: 32

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 30 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 7.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 7 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 30 x 7 = 210 : 224 – 210 = 14
7 x 2 = 14 : 14 – 14 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 32 ( 30 + 2)

Question 5.
7)\(\overline { 259 } \)
____

Answer: 37

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 30 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 7.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 7 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 30 x 7 = 210 : 225 – 210 = 49
7 x 7 = 49 : 49 – 49 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 37 ( 30 + 7)

Question 6.
8)\(\overline { 864 } \)
____

Answer: 108

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 8.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 8 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 8 = 800 : 864 – 800 = 64
8 x 8 = 64 : 64 – 64 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 108 ( 100 + 8)

Question 7.
6)\(\overline { 738 } \)
____

Answer: 123

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 6.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 6 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 6 = 600 : 738 – 600 = 138
6 x 23 = 138 : 138 – 138 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 123 ( 100 + 23)

Divide. Use rectangular models to record the partial quotients.

Question 8.
328 ÷ 2 =
____

Answer: 164

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 2.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 2 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 2 = 200 : 328 – 200 = 128
2 x 64 = 128 : 128 – 128 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 164 ( 100 + 64)
The rectangle models are given below :

Question 9.
475 ÷ 5 =
____

Answer: 95

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 90 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 5.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 5 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 90 x 5 = 450 : 475 – 450 = 25
5 x 5 = 25 : 25 – 25 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 95 (90 + 5)
The rectangle models are given below :

Question 10.
219 ÷ 3 =
____

Answer: 73

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 70 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 3.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 3 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 70 x 3 = 210 : 219 – 210 = 9
3 x 3 = 9 : 9 – 9 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 73 ( 70 + 3)
The rectangle models are given below :

Question 11.
488 ÷ 4 =
____

Answer: 122

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 4.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 4 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 4 = 400 : 488 – 400 = 88
4 x 22 = 88 : 88 – 88 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 122 ( 100 + 22)
The rectangle models are given below :

Question 12.
Use Reasoning What is the least number you can divide by 5 to get a three-digit quotient? Explain how you found your answer.
____

Answer: The quotient can be a three-digit number or a two-digit number.

Explanation:
Example:

475 ÷ 5 =
____

Answer: 95

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 90 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 5.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 5 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 90 x 5 = 450 : 475 – 450 = 25
5 x 5 = 25 : 25 – 25 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 95 (90 + 5)

Page No. 244

Use the table for 13–15.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 21

Question 13.
Rob wants to put 8 baseball cards on each page in an album. How many pages will he fill?
____ pages

Answer: 31 pages

Explanation:
Total number of baseball cards = 248
Number of cards in each page = 8
Number of pages required = 248 ÷ 8 = 31 pages

Question 14.
Rob filled 5 plastic boxes with hockey cards. There were the same number of cards in each box. How many cards did he put in each box? How many cards were left over?
Type below:
___________

Answer: There where 12 hockey cards in each box, number of cards leftover = 4

Explanation:
Total number of hockey cards = 64
Number of boxes = 5
Number of cards in each box = 64 ÷ 5 = 12.8 that is exactly 60 cards can be fit in 5 boxes and 12 in each box
Number of cards leftover = 64 – 60 = 4

Question 15.
Rob filled 3 fewer plastic boxes with football cards than basketball cards. He filled 9 boxes with basketball cards. How many boxes did he fill with football cards? How many football cards were in each box?
____ boxes ____ cards

Answer: 6 boxes and 16 cards in each box

Explanation:
Number of basketball cards= 189
Number of boxes in which the basketball cards were kept= 9 boxes
Number of football cards= 96
Number of boxes in which the football cards were kept =  number of boxes in which the basketball cards were kept – 3 =
9-3=6boxes
Number of football cards in each box = 96 ÷ 6 =16 cards

Question 16.
Marshall can buy 5 T-shirts for $60. If each shirt costs the same amount, what is the cost of 4 T-shirts?
$ ____

Answer: $48

Explanation:
Number of T-shirts = 5
Cost of 5 T-shirts = $60
Cost of each T- shirt = $60 ÷ 5 = $12
Cost of 4 T-shirts = 12 x 4 = $48

Question 17.
Use partial quotients. Fill in the blanks.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 22
Type below:
___________

Answer: 97

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 80 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 5.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 5 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 80 x 5 = 400 : 485 – 400 = 85
5 x 17 = 85 : 85 – 85 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 97 ( 80 + 17)

Common Core – Page No. 245

Divide Using Partial Quotients
Divide. Use partial quotients.

Question 1.
8)\(\overline { 184 } \)
-80 ← 10 × 8 10
——-
104
-80 ← 10 × 8 + 10
——-
-24
-24 ← 3 × 8 + 3
——– ——–
0 23

Answer: 23

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 10 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 8.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 10 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 10 x 8 = 80 : 184 – 80 = 104
10 x 8 = 80 : 104 – 80 = 24 : 3 x 8 = 24 : 24 – 24 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 23 ( 10 + 10 + 3)

Question 2.
6)\(\overline { 258 } \)
_____

Answer: 43

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 40 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 6.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 3 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 40 x 6 = 240 : 258 – 240 = 18
3 x 6 = 18 : 18 – 18 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 43 ( 40 + 3)

Question 3.
5)\(\overline { 630 } \)
_____

Answer: 126

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 5.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 20 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 5 = 500 : 630 – 500 = 130
5 x 20 = 100 : 130 – 100 = 30 : 5 x 6 = 30 : 30 – 30 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 126 ( 100 + 20 + 6)

Divide. Use rectangular models to record the partial quotients.

Question 4.
246 ÷ 3 = _____

Answer: 82

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 80 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 3.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 80 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 80 x 3 = 240 : 246 – 240 = 6
3 x 2 = 6 : 6 – 6 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 82 ( 80 + 2)
The rectangle models are given below :

Question 5.
126 ÷ 2 = _____

Answer: 63

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 60 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple,2.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 60 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 60 x 2 = 120 : 126 – 120 = 6
2 x 3 = 6 : 6 – 6 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 63 ( 60 +3)
The rectangle models are given below :

Question 6.
605 ÷ 5 = _____

Answer: 121

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 5.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 20 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 5 = 500 : 605 – 500 = 105
5 x 20 = 100 : 105 – 100 = 5 : 5 x 1 = 5 : 5 – 5 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 121 ( 100 + 20 + 1)
The rectangle models are given below :

Divide. Use either way to record the partial quotients.

Question 7.
492 ÷ 3 = _____

Answer: 164

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 3.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 50 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 3 = 300 : 492 – 300 = 192
50 x 3 = 150 : 192 – 150 = 42 : 3 x 14 = 42 : 42 – 42 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 164  ( 100 + 50 + 14)

Question 8.
224 ÷ 7 = _____

Answer: 32

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 30 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 7.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 30 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 30 x 7 = 210 : 224 – 210 = 14
7 x 2 = 14 : 14 – 14 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 32 ( 30 + 2)

Question 9.
692 ÷ 4 = _____

Answer: 173

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 4.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 100 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 4 = 400 : 692 – 400 = 392
4 x 50 = 200 : 392 – 200 = 192 : 4 x 48 = 192 : 192 – 192 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 198 ( 100 + 50 + 48)

Problem Solving

Question 10.
Allison took 112 photos on vacation. She wants to put them in a photo album that holds 4 photos on each page. How many pages can she fill?
_____ pages

Answer: 28

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 20 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 4.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 20 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 20 x 4 = 80 : 112 – 80 = 32
4 x 8 = 32 : 32 – 32 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 28 ( 20 + 8)

Question 11.
Hector saved $726 in 6 months. He saved the same amount each month. How much did Hector save each month?
$ _____

Answer: $121

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 6.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 100 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 6 = 600 : 726 – 600 = 126
6 x 20 = 120 : 126 – 120 = 6 : 6 x 1 = 6 : 6 – 6 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 121 ( 100 + 20 +1)

Common Core – Page No. 246

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Annaka used partial quotients to divide 145 ÷ 5. Which shows a possible sum of partial quotients?
Options:
a. 50 + 50 + 45
b. 100 + 40 + 5
c. 10 + 10 + 9
d. 10 + 4 + 5

Answer: c. 10 + 10 + 9

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 4.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 10 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 10 x 5 = 50 : 145 – 50 = 95
5 x 10 = 50 : 95 – 50 = 45 : 5 x 9 = 45 : 45 – 45 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 29 ( 10 + 10 +9)

Question 2.
Mel used partial quotients to find the quotient 378 ÷ 3. Which might show the partial quotients that Mel found?
Options:
a. 100, 10, 10, 9
b. 100, 10, 10, 6
c. 100, 30, 30, 6
d. 300, 70, 8

Answer: b. 100, 10, 10, 6

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 3.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 10 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 3 = 300 : 378 – 300 = 78
10 x 3 =30 : 78 – 30 = 48 : 3 x 16 = 48 : 48 – 48 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 126 ( 100 + 10 +10 + 6)

Spiral Review

Question 3.
What are the partial products of 42 × 5?
Options:
a. 9 and 7
b. 20 and 10
c. 200 and 7
d. 200 and 10

Answer: d. 200 and 10

Explanation:
STEP1
42 x 5
Start by multiplying the digit five with the units digit 2 = 5 x 2 =10
Multiply the digit 5 with 4 in the tens place = 4 x 5 = 20
Since 4 is in the tens place when we multiply 4 and 5 we must place it in the hundreds place by assuming units digit to be zero.
Therefore, the partial product of 42 x 5 = 200

Question 4.
Mr. Watson buys 4 gallons of paint that cost $34 per gallon. How much does Mr. Watson spend on paint?
Options:
a. $38
b. $126
c. $136
d. $1,216

Answer: c. $136

Explanation:
Cost of each gallon of paint = $34
Number of gallons = 4
The total cost of the gallons = $ 34 x 4 = $136

Question 5.
Use the area model to find the product 28 × 32.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 23
Options:
a. 840
b. 856
c. 880
d. 896

Answer: d. 896

Explanation:
The whole rectangle is divided into four small rectangles the areas of these rectangles are:

Area of yellow rectangle= 30 x 20=600
Area of green rectangle= 2 x 20 = 40
Area of pink rectangle= 8 x 30= 240
Area of blue rectangle= 2 x 8= 16
Product of 32 and 28 = Area of yellow rectangle + Area of green rectangle + Area of pink rectangle + Area of the blue rectangle = 600+40+240+16 =  896

Question 6.
An adult male lion eats about 108 pounds of meat per week. About how much meat does an adult male lion eat in one day?
Options:
a. about 14 pounds
b. about 15 pounds
c. about 16 pounds
d. about 17 pounds

Answer: b. about 15 pounds

Explanation:
Mass of meat an adult lion eats in one week = 108
Number of days in a week = 7
Mass of meat ate by the lion in one day = 108 ÷ 7 = 15.4 pounds = about 15 pounds

Page No. 249

Divide. Use base-ten blocks.

Question 1.
48 ÷ 3
_____

Answer: 16

Explanation:
A. Draw 3 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 48. Show 48 as 4 tens and 8 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 3 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 3 groups.
D. There are 1 ten(s) and 6 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 16.

Question 2.
84 ÷ 4
_____

Answer: 21

Explanation:
A. Draw 4 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 84. Show 84 as 8 tens and 4 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 4 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 4 groups.
D. There are 2 ten(s) and 1 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 21.

Question 3.
72 ÷ 5
_____ R _____

Answer: 14 (approx) with 2 as remainder.

Explanation:
A. Draw 5 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 72. Show 72 as 7 tens and 2 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 5 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 5 groups.
D. There are 1 ten(s) and 4 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 14.

Question 4.
Divide. Draw a quick picture. Record the steps.
84 ÷ 3
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 24
_____

Answer: 28

Explanation:
STEPS:
A. Draw 3 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 84. Show 84 as 8 tens and 4 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 3 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 3 groups.
D. There are 2 ten(s) and 8 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 28.

Question 5.
Explain why you did not need to regroup in Exercise 2.
Type below:
___________

Answer: We did not regroup in exercise two because we used the method of counters in which we placed the counters one after the other in the circles and concluded with number of counters in each group and the number of counters left over.

Explanation:
Example: 28 ÷ 3(in the form of exercise 2)
A. Use 28 counters to represent the 28 dominoes. Then draw 3 circles to represent the 3 players.
B. Share the counters equally among the 3 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Find the number of counters in each group and the number of counters left over. Record your answer. 9 counters in each group and 3 counters are leftover.

Example: 84 ÷ 3

A. Draw 3 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 84. Show 84 as 8 tens and 4 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 3 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 3 groups.
D. There are 2 ten(s) and 8 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 28.

Question 6.
Mindy is preparing fruit boxes for gifts. She divides 36 apples evenly into 6 boxes. Then she divided 54 bananas evenly into the same 6 boxes. How many pieces of fruit are in each of Mindy’s boxes?
_____ pieces of fruit

Answer: 6+9=15 pieces of fruits are in each box of Mindy’s

Explanation:
Total number of apples = 36
Number of boxes in which the apples were kept = 6
Number of apple pieces in each box = 36 ÷ 6 = 6
Total number of bananas = 54
Number of boxes in which the bananas were kept = 6
Number of banana pieces in each box = 54 ÷ 6 = 9
Total number of fruit pieces in each box = 9 + 6 = 15

Question 7.
Ami needs to divide these base-ten blocks into 4 equal groups.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 25
Describe a model that would show how many are in each group.
Type below:
___________

Answer: 14

Explanation:
A. Draw 4 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 56. Show 56 as 5 tens and 6 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 4 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 4 groups.
D. There are 1 ten(s) and 4 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 14.

Page No. 250

Sense or Nonsense?

Question 8.
Angela and Zach drew quick pictures to find 68 ÷ 4. Whose quick picture makes sense? Whose quick picture is nonsense? Explain your reasoning.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 26
Type below:
___________

Answer: Zach’s quick picture is correct while Angela’s is not correct.

Explanation:
A. Draw 4 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 68. Show 68 as 6 tens and 8 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 4 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 4 groups.
D. There are 1 ten(s) and 7 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 17.
Hence Zach’s statement and the quick picture are correct.

Question 9.
Analyze What did Angela forget to do after she shared the tens equally among the 4 groups?
Type below:
___________

Answer: Angela forgot to regroup the leftover tens into ones. Share the ones equally among the 4 groups.

Explanation:
Since there are 6 tens and 4 circles only 4 tens can be placed in them while the other 2 tens are leftover which must be converted into 20 ones.

Common Core – Page No. 251

Model Division with Regrouping

Divide. Use base-ten blocks.
Question 1.
63 ÷ 4 = 15 r3
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 27

Answer: 15 r 3

Explanation:
A. Draw 4 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 63. Show 63 as 6 tens and 3 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 4 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 4 groups.
D. There are 1 ten(s) and 5 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 15.
E. After grouping, there are 3 blocks which weren’t grouped. So, the remainder is 3

Question 2.
83 ÷ 3
_____ R _____

Answer: 27 r 2

Explanation:
A. Draw 3 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 83. Show 83 as 8 tens and 3 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 3 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 3 groups.
D. There are 2 ten(s) and 7 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 27.
E. After grouping, there are 2 blocks which weren’t grouped. So, the remainder is 2

Divide. Draw quick pictures. Record the steps.

Question 3.
85 ÷ 5
_____

Answer: 17

Explanation:
A. Draw 5 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 85. Show 85 as 8 tens and 5 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 5 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 5 groups.
D. There are 1 ten(s) and 7 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 17.

Question 4.
97 ÷ 4
_____ R _____

Answer: 24 r 1

Explanation:
A. Draw 4 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 97. Show 97 as 9 tens and 7 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 4 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 4 groups.
D. There are 2 ten(s) and 4 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 24.
E. After grouping, there is 1 block which wasn’t grouped. So, the remainder is 1

Problem Solving

Question 5.
Tamara sold 92 cold drinks during her 2-hour shift at a festival food stand. If she sold the same number of drinks each hour, how many cold drinks did she sell each hour?
_____ cold drinks

Answer: 46 cold drinks

Explanation:
Total number of cold drinks Tamara sold = 92
The time in which she sold the drinks = 2 hours
Number of drinks she sold in each hour = 92 ÷ 2 = 46

Question 6.
In 3 days Donald earned $42 running errands. He earned the same amount each day. How much did Donald earn from running errands each day?
$ _____

Answer: $14

Explanation:
Total amount earned by Donald = $42
Number of days = 3
Amount earned on each day = $42 ÷ 3 = $14

Common Core – Page No. 252

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Gail bought 80 buttons to put on the shirts she makes. She uses 5 buttons for each shirt. How many shirts can Gail make with the buttons she bought?
Options:
a. 14
b. 16
c. 17
d. 18

Answer: b. 16

Explanation:
Total number of buttons = 80
Number of buttons used for each shirt = 5
Number of shirts she can make = 80 ÷ 5 =16

Question 2.
Marty counted how many breaths he took in 3 minutes. In that time, he took 51 breaths. He took the same number of breaths each minute. How many breaths did Marty take in one minute?
Options:
a. 15
b. 16
c. 17
d. 19

Answer: c. 17

Explanation:
Total number of breaths Marty counted = 51
Time in which the breath was counted = 3 minutes
Number of breaths in one minute = 51 ÷ 3 = 17

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Kate is solving brain teasers. She solved 6 brain teasers in 72 minutes. How long did she spend on each brain teaser?
Options:
a. 12 minutes
b. 14 minutes
c. 18 minutes
d. 22 minutes

Answer: a. 12 minutes

Explanation:
Number of brain teasers solved = 6
Number of minutes spent on brain teasers = 72 minutes
Number of minutes spent on each problem = 72 ÷ 6 =12 minutes

Question 4.
Jenny works at a package delivery store. She puts mailing stickers on packages. Each package needs 5 stickers. How many stickers will Jenny use if she is mailing 105 packages?
Options:
a. 725
b. 625
c. 525
d. 21

Answer: c. 525

Explanation:
Number of packages = 105
Number of stickers on each package = 5
Total number of stickers on the packages = 105 x 5 = 525

Question 5.
The Puzzle Company packs standardsized puzzles into boxes that hold 8 puzzles. How many boxes would it take to pack up 192 standard-sized puzzles?
Options:
a. 12
b. 16
c. 22
d. 24

Answer: d. 24

Explanation:
Total number of puzzles = 192
Number of puzzles in each box = 8
Number of boxes used = 192 ÷ 8 = 24 boxes

Question 6.
Mt. Whitney in California is 14,494 feet tall. Mt. McKinley in Alaska is 5,826 feet taller than Mt. Whitney. How tall is Mt. McKinley?
Options:
a. 21,310 feet
b. 20,320 feet
c. 20,230 feet
d. 19,310 feet

Answer: b. 20,320 feet

Explanation:
Height of Mt. Whitney in California = 14,494 feet
Height of Mt. McKinley in Alaska is 5,826 feet taller than Mt. Whitney.
Therefore the height of Mt. McKinley in Alaska = 14,494 feet + 5,826 feet  =  20,320 feet

Page No. 255

Question 1.
There are 452 pictures of dogs in 4 equal groups. How many pictures are in each group? Explain how you can use place value to place the first digit in the quotient.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 28
______ pictures

Answer: 113

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 452. 400 hundred can be shared among 4 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 1 ten to share among 4 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 45 ÷ 4
Multiply. 4 × 11 = 44
Subtract. 45  − 44 = 1 tens
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Regroup 1 ten as 10 ones.
Now there are 12 ones to share among 4 groups.
Divide. 12 ones ÷ 4
Multiply. 4×3 ones
Subtract. 12 ones − 12 ones = 0

So, the quotient is 113

Divide.

Question 2.
4)\(\overline { 166 } \)
______ R ______

Answer: 41

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 166. 1 hundred cannot be shared among 4 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 1 ten to share among 4 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the tens place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 166 ÷ 4
Multiply. 4 × 40 = 160
Subtract. 166 − 160 = 6
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 6 ones to share among 4 groups.
Divide. 6 ones ÷ 4
Multiply. 4×1 ones
Subtract. 6 ones − 4 ones = 2

So, the quotient is 41 and remainder is 2

Question 3.
5)\(\overline { 775 } \)
______

Answer: 155

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 775. 700 hundred can be shared among 5 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 70 ten to share among 5 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 700 ÷ 5
Multiply. 5 × 140 = 700
Subtract. 700  − 700 = 0
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 70 tens to share among 5 groups.
Divide. 70 tens  ÷ 5
Multiply. 5×14
Subtract. 75 − 70 tens = 5 ones
Multiply 5 x 1 = 5
Subtract 5 ÷ 5 = 0

So, the quotient is 155 (140 + 14 + 1)

Question 4.
4)\(\overline { 284 } \)
______

Answer: 71

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 284. 200 hundred can be shared among 4 groups
without regrouping.
Now there are 20 tens to share among 4 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the tens place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 200 ÷ 4
Multiply. 4 × 50 = 200
Subtract. 20  − 20 = 0 tens
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 80 tens to share among 4 groups.
Divide. 80 tens ÷ 4
Multiply. 4×20 = 80
Subtract. 80 tens − 80 tens = 0 ones
There are 4 ones
Multiply 4 x 1 = 4
Subtract 4-4 =0

So, the quotient is 71 (50+20+1)

Question 5.
5)\(\overline { 394 } \)
______ R ______

Answer: 78

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 394. 300 hundred can be shared among 5 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 30 ten to share among 5 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the tens place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 300 ÷ 5
Multiply. 5 × 60 = 300
Subtract. 300  − 300 = 0 tens
STEP 3 Divide the tens.
Now there are 9 tens to share among 5 groups.
Divide. 9 tens ÷ 5
Multiply. 5×18 tens
Subtract. 90 tens − 90 tens = 0 ones
There are 4 ones
4 is the remainder.
So, the quotient is 78(60+18)

Question 6.
3)\(\overline { 465 } \)
______

Answer: 155

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 465. 400 hundred can be shared among 3 groups
without regrouping.
Now there are 40 tens to share among 3 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 400 ÷ 3
Multiply. 3 × 130  = 390
Subtract. 400  − 390 = 1 tens
STEP 3 Divide the tens.
Now there are 7 tens and 5 ones to share among 3 groups.
Divide. 75  ÷ 3
Multiply. 3 × 25 = 75
Subtract. 75 tens − 75 tens = 0

So, the quotient is 155 ( 130+ 25)

Question 7.
8)\(\overline { 272 } \)
______

Answer: 34

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 272. 200 hundred can be shared among 8 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 27 tens and 2 ones to share among 8 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the tens place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 270 ÷ 8
Multiply. 8 × 30 = 240
Subtract. 270  − 240 = 3 tens
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Regroup 3 tens as 30 ones.
Now there are 30 + 2 = 32 ones to share among 8 groups.
Divide. 32 ones ÷ 8
Multiply. 8×4 ones
Subtract. 32 ones − 32 ones = 0

So, the quotient is 34 (30 + 4)

Practice: Copy and Solve Divide.

Question 8.
516 ÷ 2 = ______

Answer: 258

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 516. 500 hundred can be shared among 2 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 50 tens and 16 ones to share among 2 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 500 ÷ 2
Multiply. 2 × 250 = 500
Subtract. 516  − 500 = 16 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 16 ones to share among 2 groups.
Divide. 16 ones ÷ 2
Multiply. 2×8 ones
Subtract. 16 ones − 16 ones = 0

So, the quotient is 258 (250 + 8)

Question 9.
516 ÷ 3 = ______

Answer: 172

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 516. 500 hundred can be shared among 3 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 50 tens and 16 ones to share among 3 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 500 ÷ 3
Multiply. 3 × 160 = 480
Subtract. 516  − 480 = 36 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 36 ones to share among 3 groups.
Divide. 36 ones ÷ 3
Multiply. 3×12 ones
Subtract. 36 ones − 36 ones = 0

So, the quotient is 172 (160 + 12)

Question 10.
516 ÷ 4 = ______

Answer: 129

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 516. 500 hundred can be shared among 4 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 50 tens and 16 ones to share among 4 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 500 ÷ 4
Multiply. 4 × 125 = 500
Subtract. 516  − 500 = 16 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 16 ones to share among 4 groups.
Divide. 16 ones ÷ 4
Multiply. 4×4 ones
Subtract. 16 ones − 16 ones = 0

So, the quotient is 129 (125 + 4)

Question 11.
516 ÷ 5 = ______ R ______

Answer: 103 R 1

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 516. 500 hundred can be shared among 5 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 50 tens and 16 ones to share among 5 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 500 ÷ 5
Multiply. 5 × 100 = 500
Subtract. 516  − 500 = 16 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 16 ones to share among 5 groups.
Divide. 16 ones ÷ 5
Multiply. 5×3 ones
Subtract. 16 ones − 15 ones = 1 one

So, the quotient is 103 (100 + 3) and the remainder is 1

Question 12.
Look back at your answers to Exercises 8–11. What happens to the quotient when the divisor increases? Explain.
The quotient ______

Answer: The quotient gets decreased when we increase the divisor.

Explanation:

Example:

516 ÷ 4 = ______

Answer: 129

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 516. 500 hundred can be shared among 4 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 50 tens and 16 ones to share among 4 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 500 ÷ 4
Multiply. 4 × 125 = 500
Subtract. 516  − 500 = 16 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 16 ones to share among 4 groups.
Divide. 16 ones ÷ 4
Multiply. 4×4 ones
Subtract. 16 ones − 16 ones = 0

So, the quotient is 129 (125 + 4)

516 ÷ 5 = ______ R ______

Answer: 103 R 1

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 516. 500 hundred can be shared among 5 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 50 tens and 16 ones to share among 5 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 500 ÷ 5
Multiply. 5 × 100 = 500
Subtract. 516  − 500 = 16 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 16 ones to share among 5 groups.
Divide. 16 ones ÷ 5
Multiply. 5×3 ones
Subtract. 16 ones − 15 ones = 1 one

So, the quotient is 103 (100 + 3) and the remainder is 1

Question 13.
Reggie has 192 pictures of animals. He wants to keep half and then divide the rest equally among three friends. How many pictures will each friend get?
______ pictures

Answer: 32

Explanation:
Total number of animal pictures = 192
Number of animal pictures he kept with him = 192 ÷ 2 = 96
Number of pictures each of his friends got = 96 ÷ 3 = 32 pictures

Question 14.
There are 146 students, 5 teachers, and 8 chaperones going to the theater. To reserve their seats, they need to reserve entire rows. Each row has 8 seats. How many rows must they reserve?
______ rows

Answer: 20 rows

Explanation:
Total people who went to the theatre = 146 + 5 + 8 = 159
Number of seats in each row = 8
Number of rows which must be reserved for the students = 159 ÷ 8 =19.8 = 20 (approx)

Page No. 256

Question 15.
Nan wants to put 234 pictures in an album with a blue cover. How many full pages will she have in her album?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 29
a. What do you need to find?
Type below:
_________

Answer: How many full pages will she have in her album?
We can find number of pictures in blue pages?
We can find number of pictures in green pages?
We can find number of pictures in red pages?

Explanation:

Question 15.
b. How will you use division to find the number of full pages?
Type below:
_________

Answer: Since the total number of pictures and the number of colour pages are given we can divide the total number of pictures are the number of pages to find the number of full pages.

Explanation:
Total number of pictures =234
Number of pictures per page = 4 + 6+ 8 = 18
Number of full pages  = 234 ÷ 18 =13

Question 15.
c. Show the steps you will use to solve the problem.
Type below:
_________

Answer: 13

Explanation:
Total number of pictures =234
Number of pictures per page = 4 + 6+ 8 = 18
Number of full pages  = 234 ÷ 18 =13

Question 15.
d. Complete the following sentences.
Nan has _______ pictures.
She wants to put the pictures in an album with pages that each hold _______ pictures.
She will have an album with _______ full pages and _______ pictures on another page.
Type below:
_________

Answer: 234 pictures, 18 pictures, 13 full pages, 0 pictures on another page

Explanation:
Total number of pictures =234
Number of pictures per page = 4 + 6+ 8 = 18
Number of full pages  = 234 ÷ 18 =13 full pages

Since the remainder is 0 the number of pictures on another page = 0

Question 16.
Mr. Parsons bought 293 apples to make pies for his shop. Six apples are needed for each pie. If Mr. Parsons makes the greatest number of apple pies possible, how many apples will be left?
_____ pies _____ apples left over.

Answer: 48 pies and 5 apples are leftover

Explanation:
Total number of apples= 293
Number of apples that make a pie = 6
Number of pies = Quotient of 293 ÷ 6 = 48
Number of apples leftover = 5

Question 17.
Carol needs to divide 320 stickers equally among 4 classes. In which place is the first digit of the quotient? Choose the word that completes the sentence.
The first digit of the quotient is in the Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 30 place.
_________

Answer: tens

Explanation:
Total number of stickers = 320
Number of classes = 4
Number of stickers in each class = Quotient of 320 ÷ 4 = 80
The first digit of quotient is in the tens place.

Common Core – Page No. 257

Place the First Digit

Divide.

Question 1.
62
——-
3)\(\overline { 186 } \)
-18
——-
06
-6
——-
0

Answer: 62

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 186. 180 hundred can be shared among 3 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 18 tens and 6 ones to share among 3 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the tens place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 180 ÷ 3
Multiply. 3 × 60 = 180
Subtract. 186  − 180 = 6 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 6 ones to share among 3 groups.
Divide. 6 ones ÷ 3
Multiply. 2×3 ones
Subtract. 6 ones − 2 ones =0 one

So, the quotient is 62 (60 + 2) and the remainder is 0

Question 2.
4)\(\overline { 298 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer:

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 298. 280 hundred can be shared among 4 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 28 tens and 18 ones to share among 4 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 280 ÷ 4
Multiply. 4 × 70 = 280
Subtract. 280  − 280 = 0 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 18 ones to share among 4 groups.
Divide. 18 ones ÷ 4
Multiply. 4×4 ones
Subtract. 18 ones − 16 ones = 2 ones

So, the quotient is 74 (70 + 4) and the remainder is 2

Question 3.
3)\(\overline { 461 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 153

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 461. 450 hundred can be shared among 3 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 45 tens and 11 ones to share among 3 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 450 ÷ 3
Multiply. 3 × 150 = 450
Subtract. 450  − 450 = 0 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 11 ones to share among 3 groups.
Divide. 11 ones ÷ 3
Multiply. 3×3 ones
Subtract. 11 ones − 9 ones = 2 ones

So, the quotient is 153 (150 + 3) and the remainder is 2

Question 4.
9)\(\overline { 315 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 35

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 315. 310 hundred can be shared among 9 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 31 tens and 5 ones to share among 9 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide.310 ÷ 9
Multiply. 9 × 30 = 270
Subtract. 310  − 270 = 40 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 40 + 5 = 45 ones to share among 9 groups.
Divide. 45 ones ÷ 9
Multiply. 5×9 ones
Subtract. 45 ones − 45 ones = 0 ones

So, the quotient is 35 (30 + 5) and the remainder is 0

Question 5.
2)\(\overline { 766 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 383

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 766. 760 hundred can be shared among 2 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 76 tens and 6 ones to share among 2 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 760 ÷ 2
Multiply. 2 × 380 = 760
Subtract. 760  − 760 = 0 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 6 ones to share among 2 groups.
Divide. 6 ones ÷ 2
Multiply. 2×3 ones
Subtract. 6 ones − 6 ones = 0 ones

So, the quotient is 383 (380 + 3) and the remainder is 0

Question 6.
4)\(\overline { 604 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 151

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 604. 600 hundred can be shared among 4 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 60 tens and 4 ones to share among 4 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 600 ÷ 4
Multiply. 4 × 150 = 600
Subtract. 600  − 600 = 0 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 4 ones to share among 4 groups.
Divide. 4 ones ÷ 4
Multiply. 4×1 ones
Subtract. 4 ones − 4 ones = 0 ones

So, the quotient is 151 (150 + 1) and the remainder is 0

Question 7.
6)\(\overline { 796 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 132

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 796. 790 hundred can be shared among 6 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 79 tens and 6 ones to share among 6 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 790 ÷ 6
Multiply. 6 × 131 = 786
Subtract. 790  − 786 = 4 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 4 + 6 = 10 ones to share among 6 groups.
Divide. 10 ones ÷ 6
Multiply. 6×1 ones
Subtract. 10 ones − 6 ones = 4 ones

So, the quotient is 132 (131 + 1) and the remainder is 4

Question 8.
5)\(\overline { 449 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 89

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 449. 440 hundred can be shared among 5 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 44 tens and 9 ones to share among 5 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 440 ÷ 5
Multiply. 5 × 88 = 440
Subtract. 440  − 440 = 0 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 9 ones to share among 5 groups.
Divide. 9 ones ÷ 5
Multiply. 5×1 ones
Subtract. 9 ones − 5 ones = 4 ones

So, the quotient is 89 (88 + 1) and the remainder is 4

Question 9.
6)\(\overline { 756 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 126

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 756. 750 hundred can be shared among 6 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 75 tens and 6 ones to share among 6 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 750 ÷ 6
Multiply. 6 × 125 = 750
Subtract. 750  − 750 = 0 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 6 ones to share among 6 groups.
Divide. 6 ones ÷ 6
Multiply. 6×1 ones
Subtract. 6 ones − 6 ones =  0 ones

So, the quotient is 126 (125 + 1) and the remainder is 0

Question 10.
7)\(\overline { 521 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 74

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 521. 520 hundred can be shared among 7 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 52 tens and 1 one to share among 7 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 520 ÷ 7
Multiply. 7 × 74 = 518
Subtract. 520  − 518 = 2 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 2 + 1 = 3 ones to share among 7 groups.
Divide. 3 ones ÷ 7 (not possible)

So, the quotient is 74  and the remainder is 3

Question 11.
5)\(\overline { 675 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 135

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 675. 670 hundred can be shared among 5 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 67 tens and 5 ones to share among 5 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 670 ÷ 5
Multiply. 5 × 134 = 670
Subtract. 670  − 670 = 0 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 5 ones to share among 5 groups.
Divide. 5 ones ÷ 5
Multiply. 5×1 ones
Subtract. 5 ones − 5 ones = 0 ones

So, the quotient is 135 (134 + 1) and the remainder is 0

Question 12.
8)\(\overline { 933 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 116

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 933. 930 hundred can be shared among 8 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 93 tens and 3 ones to share among 8 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 930 ÷ 8
Multiply. 8 × 116 = 928
Subtract. 930  − 928 = 2 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 2 + 3 = 5 ones to share among 8 groups.
Divide. 5 ones ÷ 8 (not possible)

So, the quotient is 116 (100 + 3) and the remainder is 5

Problem Solving

Question 13.
There are 132 projects in the science fair. If 8 projects can fit in a row, how many full rows of projects can be made? How many projects are in the row that is not full?
_____ full rows
_____ projects in the non-full row

Answer: 16 full rows and 4 projects in the non-full row

Explanation:
Total number of projects = 132
Number of projects placed in full row = 8
Number of rows having full projects =Quotient of  132 ÷ 8 = 16
Number of projects in the non-full row = Remainder of 132 ÷ 8 = 4

Question 14.
There are 798 calories in six 10-ounce bottles of apple juice. How many calories are there in one 10-ounce bottle of apple juice?
_____ R _____ calories in one 10-ounce bottles of juice

Answer: 133 calories

Explanation:
Number of calories in 6 bottles of apple juice = 798
Number of calories in each bottle = 798 ÷6 = 133 calories

Common Core – Page No. 258

Lesson Check

Question 1.
To divide 572 ÷ 4, Stanley estimated to place the first digit of the quotient. In which place is the first digit of the quotient?
Options:
a. ones
b. tens
c. hundreds
d. thousands

Answer: c. hundreds

Explanation:
The quotient of  572÷ 4 is 143
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 572. 560 hundred can be shared among 4 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 1 ten to share among 4 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.

Question 2.
Onetta biked 325 miles in 5 days. If she biked the same number of miles each day, how far did she bike each day?
Options:
a. 1,625 miles
b. 320 miles
c. 65 miles
d. 61 miles

Answer: c. 65 miles

Explanation:
Total number of miles biked = 325 miles
Number of days biked = 5
Number of miles biked on each day = Quotient of 325 ÷ 5 = 65

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Mort makes beaded necklaces that he sells for $32 each. About how much will Mort make if he sells 36 necklaces at the local art fair?
Options:
a. $120
b. $900
c. $1,200
d. $1,600

Answer: c. $1,200

Explanation:
Cost of each beaded necklace = $32
Number of necklaces = 36
The total cost of the necklaces = $32 x 36 = $1,200 (approx)

Question 4.
Which is the best estimate of 54 × 68?
Options:
a. 4,200
b. 3,500
c. 3,000
d. 350

Answer: b. 3,500

Explanation:

Taking the terms nearest to the 54 x 68 as 54 x 65 = 3510 = 3500 (approx)

Question 5.
Ms. Eisner pays $888 for 6 nights in a hotel. How much does Ms. Eisner pay per night?
Options:
a. $5,328
b. $882
c. $148
d. $114

Answer: c. $148

Explanation:
Total pays of Ms Eisner in a hotel = $888
Number of nights = 6
Amount Ms Eisner pay per night = $888 ÷ 6 = $148

Question 6.
Which division problem does the model show?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 31
Options:
a. 42 ÷ 3
b. 44 ÷3
c. 51 ÷ 3
d. 54 ÷ 3

Answer: d. 54 ÷ 3

Explanation:
Number of counters in each model = 18
Number of models = 3
Total number of counters = 18 x 3 = 54
Therefore the model displays = 54 ÷ 3

Page No. 261

Question 1.
Ollie used 852 beads to make 4 bracelets. He put the same number of beads on each bracelet. How many beads does each bracelet have? Check your answer.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 32
Divide             Check
2
4)\(\overline { 852 } \)
So, each bracelet has _____ beads.
_____ beads

Answer: 213

Explanation:
Total number of beads =852
Number of bracelets = 4
Number of beads in each bracelet = 852 ÷ 4 = 213

Divide and check.

Question 2.
2)\(\overline { 394 } \)
_____

Answer: 197

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit.  The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 3 Divide the tens.
STEP 4 Divide the ones.

Question 3.
2)\(\overline { 803 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 401 R 1

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit.  The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 3 Divide the tens.
STEP 4 Divide the ones.

Question 4.
3)\(\overline { 3,448 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 1149 R 1

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the thousands in 3,448. 3 thousand can be shared among 3 groups without regrouping. The first digit of the quotient will be in the thousands place.
STEP 2 Divide the thousands.
STEP 3 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 4 Divide the tens.
STEP 5 Divide the ones.

Question 5.
2)\(\overline { 816 } \)
_____

Answer: 408

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit.  The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 3 Divide the tens.
STEP 4 Divide the ones.

Question 6.
4)\(\overline { 709 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 177 R 1

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit.  The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 3 Divide the tens.
STEP 4 Divide the ones.

Question 7.
3)\(\overline { 267 } \)
_____

Answer: 89

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit.  The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 3 Divide the tens.
STEP 4 Divide the ones.

Question 8.
The flower shop received a shipment of 248 pink roses and 256 red roses. The shop owner uses 6 roses to make one arrangement. How many arrangements can the shop owner make if he uses all the roses?
_____ arrangement

Answer: 84 arrangements

Explanation:
Number of pink roses = 248
Number of red roses = 256
Total number of roses = 504
Number of roses in each arrangement = 6
Number of arrangements = 504 ÷ 6 = 84

Page No. 262

Use the table for 9–11.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 33

Question 9.
Four teachers bought 10 origami books and 100 packs of origami paper for their classrooms. They will share the cost of the items equally. How much should each teacher pay?
_____ $

Answer: $210

Explanation:
Number of origami books = 10
Cost of each origami book = $24
Total cost of origami books = $24 x 10 = $240
Number of origami papers = 100
Cost of each origami book = $6
Total cost of origami books = $6 x 100 = $600
Total cost of items = $240 + $600 = $840
Number of teachers = 4
Cost earned by each teacher = $840 ÷ 4 = $210

Question 10.
Communicate Six students shared equally the cost of 18 of one of the items in the chart. Each student paid $24. What item did they buy? Explain how you found your answer.
__________

Answer: The students bought origami kit.

Explanation:
Number of students = 6
Number of items they bought = 18
Amount each student paid = $24
The total amount paid = $24 x 6 =$144
The item they bought can be found by knowing the cost of the item:
Cost of the item=
The total amount paid ÷ Number of items =  144 ÷ 18 = $8
Therefore the item is origami kit.

Question 11.
Ms Alvarez has $1,482 to spend on origami paper. How many packs can she buy?
_____ packs

Answer: 247

Explanation:
Cost of origami paper = $6
Amount Ms Alvarez was supposed to spend on origami paper = $1,482
Number of packs bought = $1,482 ÷ $6 = 247

Question 12.
Evan made origami cranes with red, blue, and yellow paper. The number of cranes in each color is the same. If there are 342 cranes, how many of them are blue or yellow?
_____ blue, or yellow

Answer: 114

Explanation:
Evan made origami cranes with red, blue, and yellow paper.
The number of cranes in each colour is the same.
Total number of cranes = 342
Number of cranes of each colour = 342 ÷ 3 = 114
Therefore there are 114 cranes of blue and yellow.

Question 13.
On Monday 336 fourth graders went on a field trip to a local park. The teachers divided the students into 8 groups.
Use a basic fact. Estimate the number of students in each group. Show your work.
_____ about

Answer: 42

Explanation:
Total number who went to the field trip = 336
Number of groups into which they were divided = 8 groups
Number of students in each group = 336 ÷ 8 = 42 students

Common Core – Page No. 263

Divide by 1-Digit Numbers

Divide and check.

Question 1.
318
2)\(\overline { 636 } \) 318
-6       × 2
——   ——-
03    636
-2
——
16
-16
——-
0

Answer: 318

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit.  The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 3 Divide the tens.
STEP 4 Divide the ones.

Question 2.
4)\(\overline { 631 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer:

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit.  The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 3 Divide the tens.
STEP 4 Divide the ones.

Question 3.
8)\(\overline { 906 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer:

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit.  The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 3 Divide the tens.
STEP 4 Divide the ones.

Question 4.
6)\(\overline { 6,739 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer:

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the thousands in 6,739. 6 thousand can be shared among 6 groups without regrouping. The first digit of the quotient will be in the thousands place.
STEP 2 Divide the thousands.
STEP 3 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 4 Divide the tens.
STEP 5 Divide the ones.

Question 5.
4)\(\overline { 2,328 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer:

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the thousands in 2,328. 2 thousand can be shared among 4 groups without regrouping. The first digit of the quotient will be in the thousands place.
STEP 2 Divide the thousands.
STEP 3 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 4 Divide the tens.
STEP 5 Divide the ones.

Question 6.
5)\(\overline { 7,549 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer:

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the thousands in 7,549. 7 thousand can be shared among 5 groups without regrouping. The first digit of the quotient will be in the thousands place.
STEP 2 Divide the thousands.
STEP 3 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 4 Divide the tens.
STEP 5 Divide the ones.

Problem Solving

Use the table for 7 and 8.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 34

Question 7.
The Briggs rented a car for 5 weeks. What was the cost of their rental car per week?
$ _____

Answer: $197

Explanation:
Cost of the car of Briggs = $985
Number of weeks = 5
Cost of rent per week = $985 ÷ 5 =$ 197

Question 8.
The Lees rented a car for 4 weeks. The Santos rented a car for 2 weeks. Whose weekly rental cost was lower? Explain.
The rental cost of _____

Answer: Weekly rental cost was lower for Lees compared to Santos

Explanation:
Cost of the car of Lees = $632
Number of weeks = 4
Cost of rent per week = $632 ÷ 4 =$ 158

Cost of the car of Santos = $328
Number of weeks = 2
Cost of rent per week = $328 ÷ 2 =$ 164
Therefore weekly rental cost was lower for Lees compared to Santos.

Common Core – Page No. 264

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Which expression can be used to check
the quotient 646 ÷ 3?
Options:
a. (251 × 3) + 1
b. (215 × 3) + 2
c. (215 × 3) + 1
d. 646 × 3

Answer: c. (215 × 3) + 1

Explanation:
Multiply 215 x 3 = 645
Then add 1 to 645
Then the dividend is 645 + 1 = 646

Question 2.
There are 8 volunteers at the telethon. The goal for the evening is to raise $952. If each volunteer raises the same amount, what is the minimum amount each needs to raise to meet the goal?
Options:
a. $7,616
b. $944
c. $119
d. $106

Answer: a. $7,616

Explanation:
Number of volunteers = 8
Amount raised by each volunteer = $952
Total amount raised = $952 x 8 = $7,616

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Which product is shown by the model?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 35
Options:
a. 5 × 15 = 75
b. 5 × 16 = 80
c. 5 × 17 = 75
d. 5 × 17 = 85

Answer: d. 5 × 17 = 85

Explanation:
By counting the number of counters we can give the expression.
Number of counters in one row = 17
Number of rows = 5
Therefore the expression = 5 × 17 = 85

Question 4.
The computer lab at a high school ordered 26 packages of CDs. There were 50 CDs in each package. How many CDs did the computer lab order?
Options:
a. 1,330
b. 1,300
c. 1,030
d. 130

Answer: b. 1,300

Explanation:
Number of packages = 26
Number of CDs in each pack = 50
Total number of CDs the computer lab ordered = 26 x 50 = 1,300

Question 5.
Which of the following division problems has a quotient with the first digit in the hundreds place?
Options:
a. 892 ÷ 9
b. 644 ÷ 8
c. 429 ÷ 5
d. 306 ÷ 2

Answer: d. 306 ÷ 2

Explanation:
Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 306. 300 hundred can be shared among 2 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 30 tens and 6 ones to share among 2 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.

Question 6.
Sharon has 64 ounces of juice. She is going to use the juice to fill as many 6-ounce glasses as possible. She will drink the leftover juice. How much juice will Sharon drink?
Options:
a. 4 ounces
b. 6 ounces
c. 10 ounces
d. 12 ounces

Answer: a. 4 ounces

Explanation:
The total quantity of juice = 64 ounces
Quantity of juice she filled = 6 ounces
Quantity of juice she drank = Remainder of 64 ÷  6 = 4

Page No. 267

Question 1.
A firehouse pantry has 52 cans of vegetables and 74 cans of soup. Each shelf holds 9 cans. What is the least number of shelves needed for all the cans?
First, draw a bar model for the total number of cans.
Next, add to find the total number of cans.
Then, draw a bar model to show the number of shelves needed.
Finally, divide to find the number of shelves needed.
So, _______ shelves are needed to hold all of the cans.
_______ shelves

Answer: 14

Explanation:
Number of vegetable cans = 52

Number of soup cans = 74


Total number of cans = 74 +52 = 126
126 ÷ 9 = 14

So, 14 shelves are needed to hold all of the cans.

Question 2.
What if 18 cans fit on a shelf? What is the least number of shelves needed? Describe how your answer would be different.
_______ shelves

Answer: 7 shelves

Explanation:
Total number of cans = 126
Number of cans which can fit in one shelf = 18
Number of shelves required to place all the cans = 126 ÷ 18 = 7 shelves

Question 3.
Julio’s dad bought 10 dozen potatoes. The potatoes were equally divided into 6 bags. How many potatoes are in each bag?
_______ potatoes

Answer: 20 potatoes

Explanation:
Total number of potatoes = 10 dozens x 12 = 120
Number of bags = 6
Number of potatoes in each bag = 120 ÷ 6 = 20

Question 4.
At the garden shop, each small tree costs $125 and each large tree costs $225. How much will 3 small trees and 1 large tree cost?
$ _______

Answer: $600

Explanation:
Number of small trees = 3
Cost of each small tree = $125
Total cost of the small trees = $125 x 3 = $375
Number of large trees = 1
Cost of each large tree = $225
Total cost of the plants = $375 + $225 = $600

Page No. 268

Question 5.
Ms Johnson bought 6 bags of balloons. Each bag has 25 balloons. She fills all the balloons and puts 5 balloons in each bunch. How many bunches can she make?
_______ bunches

Answer: 30

Explanation:
Number of bags = 6
Number of ballons in each bag = 25
Total number of ballons = 25 x 6 = 150
Number of ballons in each bunch = 5
Number of bunches = Total number of ballons ÷ Number of ballons in each bunch = 150 ÷ 5 = 30

Question 6.
An adult’s dinner costs $8. A family of 2 adults and 2 children pays $26 for their dinners. How much does a child’s dinner cost? Explain.
$ _______

Answer: $10

Explanation:
Number of adults = 2
Number of children = 2
Cost of dinner of an adult = $8
The total cost of dinner of the adults = $8 x 2 = $16
Total amount paid = $26
Amount spent on children dinner = $26 – $16 = $10
Cost of dinner for the diner = $10 ÷ 2 = $5

Question 7.
Communicate Use the table at the right. Maria bought 80 ounces of apples. She needs 10 apples to make a pie. How many apples will be left over? Explain.
_______ apples

Answer: 6

Explanation:
Given the average weight of the apples = 5 ounces
Mass of apples Maria bought = 80 ounces
Number of apples =  Mass of apples Maria bought ÷ average weight of the apples = 80 ÷ 5 = 16
Number of apples which make a pie = 10
Number of apples leftover = 16 – 10 = 6

Question 8.
Taylor has 16 tacks. She buys 2 packages of 36 tacks each. How many garage sale posters can she put up if she uses 4 tacks for each poster?
_______ posters

Answer: 18

Explanation:
Number of packages = 2
Number of posters in each package = 36
Total number of tacks = 36 x 2 = 72
Number of tacks for each poster = 4
Number of garage sale posters = 72 ÷ 4 = 18

Question 9.
Ryan bought 8 dozen bandages for the track team first-aid kit. The bandages were divided equally into 4 boxes. How many bandages are in each box?
_______ bandages

Answer: 24

Explanation:
Number of bandages bought for the track team first-aid kit = 8 dozens x 12 = 96
Number of boxes = 4
Number of bandages in each box = 96 ÷ 4 = 24

Common Core – Page No. 269

Problem Solving Multistep Division Problems

Solve. Draw a diagram to help you.

Question 1.
There are 3 trays of eggs. Each tray holds 30 eggs. How many people can be served if each person eats 2 eggs?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 36
Think: What do I need to find? How can I draw a diagram to help?
45 people can be served

Answer: 45 people can be served.

Explanation:
Drawbar models to visualize the information given.

First, draw the model and compare to find the number of eggs they had.
Then we must model and divide to find how many eggs are served to each person.

Question 2.
There are 8 pencils in a package. How many packages will be needed for 28 children if each child gets 4 pencils?
________ packages

Answer: 14 packages

Explanation:
Number of pencils in each package = 8

Number of children = 28

Number of pencils each child needs = 4
Total number of pencils = 28 x 4 =112
Number of packages = 112 ÷ 8 = 14

Question 3.
There are 3 boxes of tangerines. Each box has 93 tangerines. The tangerines will be divided equally among 9 classrooms. How many tangerines will each classroom get?
________ tangerines

Answer:31

Explanation:
Number of boxes = 3
Number of tangerines in each box = 93
Total number of tangerines = 93 x 3 = 279

Number of classrooms = 9
Number of tangerines in each classroom = 279 ÷ 9 = 31

Question 4.
Misty has 84 photos from her vacation and 48 photos from a class outing. She wants to put all the photos in an album with 4 photos on each page. How many pages does she need?
______ pages

Answer: 33

Explanation:
Number of photos from her vacation = 84

Number of photos from her class outing = 48

Total number of photos = 84 + 48 = 132
Number of photos in each page = 4
Number of pages required = 132 ÷ 4 = 33

Common Core – Page No. 270

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Gavin buys 89 blue pansies and 86 yellow pansies. He will plant the flowers in 5 rows with an equal number of plants in each row. How many plants will be in each row?
Options:
a. 875
b. 175
c. 35
d. 3

Answer: c. 35

Explanation:
Number of blue pansies = 89
Number of yellow pansies = 86
Total number of pansies = 89 + 86 = 175
Number of rows = 5
Number of plants in each row = 175 ÷ 5 = 35

Question 2.
A pet store receives 7 boxes of cat food. Each box has 48 cans. The store wants to store the cans in equal stacks of 8 cans. How many stacks can be formed?
Options:
a. 8
b. 42
c. 56
d. 336

Answer: b. 42

Explanation:
Number of boxes of cat food = 7
Number of cans in a box = 48
Total number of cans = 48 x 7 = 336
Number of cans in each stack = 8
Number of stacks = 336 ÷ 8 = 42

Spiral Review

Question 3.
What product does the model show?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 37
Options:
a. 284
b. 304
c. 340
d. 364

Answer: d. 364

Explanation:
Length = 20 +6 = 26
Breadth = 10 + 4 = 14
Area of the rectangle = 26 x 14 = 364

Question 4.
Mr. Hatch bought 4 round-trip airplane tickets for $417 each. He also paid $50 in baggage fees. How much did Mr. Hatch spend?
Options:
a. $467
b. $1,698
c. $1,718
d. $16,478

Answer: c. $1,718

Explanation:
Cost of each ticket of the airplane = $417
Cost baggage fees = $50
Number of trips of the airplane = 5
Cost of the trips = $417 x 5 = $1,668
The total cost of the trip = $1,668 + $50 = $1,718

Question 5.
Mae read 976 pages in 8 weeks. She read the same number of pages each week. How many pages did she read each week?
Options:
a. 109
b. 120
c. 122
d. 984

Answer: c. 122

Explanation:
Total number of pages = 976
Number of weeks = 8
Number of pages Mae read in each week = 976 ÷ 8 = 122

Question 6.
Yolanda and her 3 brothers shared a box of 156 toy dinosaurs. About how many dinosaurs did each child get?
Options:
a. 40
b. 50
c. 60
d. 80

Answer: b. 50

Explanation:
Total number of  toy dinosaurs = 156
Number of brothers = 3
Number of toy dinosaurs each brother got = 156 ÷ 3 = 50

Page No. 271

Question 1.
There are 9 showings of a film about endangered species at the science museum. A total of 459 people saw the film. The same number of people were at each showing. About how many people were at each showing? Select the numbers the quotient is between.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 38
Options:
A. 40
B. 50
C. 60
D. 70
E. 80

Answer: B. 50 C. 60 The quotient is between 50 and 60

Explanation:
Number of people at the showings = 459
Number of showings of a film = 9
Number of people at each showing = Quotient of 459 ÷ 9 = 51

Question 2.
Between which two numbers is the quotient of 87 ÷ 5? Write the numbers in the boxes.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 39
The quotient is between _____ and _____.

Answer: The quotient is between 15 and 20.

Explanation:

Therefore the quotient is 17 and the remainder is 2.

Question 3.
Look at the model. What division does it show?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 40
_____ ÷ _____ = _____ r _____

Answer: 19 ÷ 3 = 6 r 1

Explanation:
Count the total number of counters =Dividend = 19
Number of circles = Divisor = 3
After the distribution of the counters,
The quotient is 6 because in each circle there are 6 counters
The leftover counter is the remainder = 1

For 4a–4d, choose Yes or No to tell whether the division sentence has a remainder.

Question 4.
a. 28 ÷ 4
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: ii. no

Explanation:

Therefore the quotient is 7 and the remainder is 0

Question 4.
b. 35 ÷ 2
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: i. yes

Explanation:

Therefore the quotient is 17 and the remainder is 1

Question 4.
c. 40 ÷ 9
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: i. yes

Explanation:

Therefore the quotient is 4 and the remainder is 4

Question 4.
d. 45 ÷ 5
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: ii. no

Explanation:

Therefore the quotient is 5 and the remainder is 0

Page No. 272

Question 5.
A park guide plans the swan boat rides for 40 people. Each boat can carry 6 people at a time. What is the best way to interpret the remainder in this situation so that everyone gets a ride?
Type below:
____________

Answer: 4 people are leftover after the boat takes 6 people at a time for a ride, therefore, these four people go on the ride in the next round.

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 40 counters to represent the 40 people. Then draw 6 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 6 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 40 ÷ 6
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 6 counters, therefore, the quotient is 6
Therefore, the quotient is 6 and the remainder is 4
It means that the boat takes 7 rounds in which 6 are filled with 6 people while 4 people are leftover they take the last ride.

Question 6.
Nolan divides his 88 toy cars into boxes. Each box holds 9 cars. How many boxes does Nolan need to store all of his cars?
______ boxes

Answer: 10

Explanation:
Total number of toys Nolan has = 88
Number of cars placed in each box  = 9
Number of boxes = 88 ÷ 9 = 9.7 = 10 (approx)
We take approximate value because all the toys must be fit in the box.

A group of 140 tourists are going on a tour. The tour guide rents 15 vans. Each van holds 9 tourists.

Question 7.
Part A
Write a division problem that can be used to find the number of vans needed to carry the tourists. Then solve.
Type below:
____________

Answer: 140 divided by 9 gives the number of vans  needed to carry the tourists

Explanation:

Total number of tourists = 140
Number of students who fit in each van = 9
Number of vans = Quotient of 150 ÷ 9 = 15
The leftover of tourists = Remainder =5
Can be placed in a different van or can be adjusted in the 15 vans.

Question 7.
Part B
What does the remainder mean in the context of the problem?
Type below:
____________

Answer: The leftover of tourists = Remainder =5

Explanation:
The leftover of tourists= Remainder =5
Can be placed in a different van or can be adjusted in the 15 vans.

Question 7.
Part C
How can you use your answer to determine if the tour guide rented enough vans? Explain.
Type below:
____________

Answer: The number of vans would be correct if they were 16 instead of 15

Explanation:
Then the answer can be determined as all the 140  tourists have enjoyed their trip to the fullest and traveled comfortably without any hassle and bustle.

Question 8.
Solve.
3,200 ÷ 8 = ______

Answer: 400

Explanation:

Therefore we can say that the quotient is 400 while the remainder is 0

Page No. 273

Question 9.
Which quotients are equal to 300? Mark all that apply.
Options:
a. 1,200 ÷ 4
b. 180 ÷ 9
c. 2,400 ÷ 8
d. 2,100 ÷ 7
e. 90 ÷ 3
f. 3,000 ÷ 3

Answer: a. 1,200 ÷ 4, c. 2,400 ÷ 8, d. 2,100 ÷ 7

Explanation:

1,200 ÷ 4

Therefore the quotient is 300 and the remainder is 0.

2,400 ÷ 8

Therefore the quotient is 300 and the remainder is 0.

2,100 ÷ 7


Therefore the quotient is 300 and the remainder is 0.

Question 10.
Margo estimated 188 ÷ 5 to be between 30 and 40. Which basic facts did she use to help her estimate? Mark all that apply.
Options:
a. 10 ÷ 5
b. 15 ÷ 5
c. 20 ÷ 5
d. 25 ÷ 5

Answer: b. 15 ÷ 5 c. 20 ÷ 5

Explanation:
188 ÷ 5
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 15 ÷ 5
STEP 2 Use place value. 150 = 15 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 15 tens ÷ 5 = 3 tens
150 ÷ 3 = 30

STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 20 ÷ 5
STEP 2 Use place value. 200 = 20 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 20 tens ÷ 5 = 4 tens
200 ÷ 5 = 40

Therefore we can say that the quotient is between 30 to 40

Question 11.
Mathias and his brother divided 2,029 marbles equally. About how many marbles did each of them receive?
About _________

Answer: about 1,014 marbles each one recieved

Explanation:
Total number of marbles = 2,029
Number of people = 2
Number of marbles each one received = 2,029 ÷ 2 = 1,014

For 12a–12d, choose Yes or No to show how to use the Distributive Property to break apart the dividend to find the quotient 132 ÷ 6.

Question 12.
a. (115 ÷ 6) + (17 ÷ 6)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: ii. no

Explanation:
According to the question, the nearest estimates are 115 and 17 but these are not divisible by 6.

Question 12.
b. (100 ÷ 6) + (32 ÷ 6)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: ii. no

Explanation:
According to the question, the nearest estimates are 100 and 32 but these are not divisible by 6.

Question 12.
c. (90 ÷ 6) + (42 ÷ 6)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: i. yes

Explanation:
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 132
STEP2 We can break the number 132 into 90 + 42
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (90 ÷ 6) + (42 ÷ 6)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 15 +7= 22

Question 12
d. (72 ÷ 6) + (60 ÷ 6)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: i. yes

Explanation:
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 132
STEP2 We can break the number 132 into 72 + 60
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (72 ÷ 6) + (60 ÷ 6)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 12 +10= 22

Question 13.
There are 60 people waiting for a river raft ride. Each raft holds 15 people. Silvia used the work below to find the number of rafts needed. Explain how Silvia’s work can be used to find the number of rafts needed.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 41
Type below:
_________

Answer: 4

Explanation:
Total number of people = 60
Number of people each river raft can hold = 15
Number of rafts needed to give a ride to all the people = 60 ÷ 15 = 4

Page No. 274

A travelling circus brings along everything it needs for a show in big trucks.

Question 14.
Part A
The circus sets up chairs in rows with 9 seats in each row. How many rows will need to be set up if 513 people are expected to attend the show?
______ rows

Answer: 57

Explanation:
The total number of people = 513
Number of seats in each row = 9
Number of rows = 513 ÷ 9 = 57

Question 14.
Part B
Can the rows be divided into a number of equal sections? Explain how you found your answer.
Type below:
_________

Answer: Yes, the rows can be divided into equal sections. 57 ÷ 3 = 19

Explanation:
We can divide 57 using the divisor as 3, then the quotient is 19 and the remainder is 0.

Question 14.
Part C
Circus horses eat about 250 pounds of horse food per week. About how many pounds of food does a circus horse eat each day? Explain.
About ______ pounds

Answer: About 35 pounds

Explanation:
Mass of food the horses ate in one week = 250 pounds
Number of days in a week =7
Mass of food the horses ate per day = Quotient of 250 ÷  7 = about 35

Question 15.
Hilda wants to save 825 digital photographs in an online album. Each folder of the album can save 6 photographs. She uses division to find out how may full folders she will have. In what place is the first digit of the quotient?
_________

Answer: Hundreds place

Explanation:
Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 825. 800 hundred can be shared among 6 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 80 tens and 25 ones to share among 6 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.

Page No. 275

Question 16.
Which model matches each expression? Write the letter in the box next to the model.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 42
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 43

Answer: 1st picture – 150 ÷ 30
2nd picture – 160 ÷ 40
3rd picture – 150 ÷ 50
4th picture – 160 ÷ 80

Explanation:
150 ÷ 30

160 ÷ 40

150 ÷ 50

160 ÷ 80

Question 17.
Popcorn was donated for the school fair by 3 different popcorn vendors. They donated a total of 636 bags of popcorn. Each vendor donated the same number of bags. How many bags of popcorn did each vendor donate?
______ bags

Question 18.
Use partial quotients. Fill in the blanks.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 44

Answer: 212

Explanation:
Total number of popcorn bags = 636
Number of popcorn vendors = 3
Number of popcorn bags donated by each vendor = 636 ÷ 3 = 212

Therefore the number of bags donated by each vendor = 212

Page No. 276

Question 19.
Zack needs to divide these base-ten blocks into 3 equal groups.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 45
Draw or describe a model to show how many are in each group.
Type below:
________

Answer: 16

Explanation:
Total number of counters = 48
Number of groups they are supposed to be divided = 3
Then, 48 ÷ 3

Therefore the quotient is 16 and the remainder is 0.

Question 20.
Jim needs to divide 750 coupon books equally among 9 stores. In which place is the first digit of the quotient? Choose the word that makes the sentence true.
The first digit of the quotient is in the Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 46 place.
________

Answer: tens place

Explanation:
Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 750. 720 hundred can be shared among 9 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 72 tens and 30 ones to share among 9 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the tens place.

Question 21.
Ursula bought 9 dozen rolls of first aid tape for the health office. The rolls were divided equally into 4 boxes. How many rolls are in each box?
_____ rolls

Answer: 27 rolls

Explanation:
Number of rolls = 9 dozen x 12 = 108
Number of boxes = 4
Number of rolls in each box = Quotient of 108 ÷ 4 = 27 rolls

Question 22.
There are 112 seats in the school auditorium. There are 7 seats in each row. There are 70 people seated, filling up full rows of seats. How many rows are empty?
_____ empty rows

Answer: 6 rows are empty

Explanation:
Total number of seats = 112
Number of seats in each row = 7
Number of rows = 112÷7 = 16

Number of people seated = 70
Number of rows fully occupied by the people = 70 ÷ 7 = 10
Number of empty rows = 16 – 10 = 6

Page No. 280

Question 1.
Use the arrays to name the factors of 12.
a. Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 47
_____ × _____ = 12

Answer: 6 x 2 = 12

Explanation:
There are a total of 12 counters in the given figure.
So, we can see that 6 + 6 = 12 from the above figure.
Hence we can write as 6 x 2 = 12

Question 1.
b. Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 48
_____ × _____ = 12

Question 1.

Answer: 4 x 3 = 12

Explanation:
The number of columns and rows are 4 and 3 respectively.
So we can calculate the multiplication by 4 x 3 = 12

c. Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 49
_____ × _____ = 12

Answer: 6 x 2 = 12

Explanation:
The number of columns and rows are 4 and 3 respectively.
So we can calculate the multiplication by 4 x 3 = 12.

Use tiles to find all the factors of the product. Record the arrays and write the factors shown.

Question 2.
5: __________
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 3.
20: __________
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 4.
25: __________
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Page No. 281

Practice: Copy and Solve Use tiles to find all the factors of the product. Record the arrays on grid paper and write the factors shown.

Question 5.
9: ______________
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 6.
21: ______________
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 7.
17: ______________
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 8.
18: ______________
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Use the diagram for 9–10.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 50

Question 9.
Pablo is using 36 tiles to make a patio. Can he arrange the tiles in another way and show the same factors? Draw a quick picture and explain.
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 10.
How many different rectangular arrays can Pablo make with all 36 tiles, so none of the arrays show the same factors?
________ rectangular arrays

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 11.
If 6 is a factor of a number, what other numbers must be factors of the number?
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 12.
Jean spent $16 on new T-shirts. If each shirt cost the same whole-dollar amount, how many could she have bought?
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Page No. 282

Question 13.
Carmen has 18 connecting cubes. She wants to model a house shaped like a rectangle. If the model has a height of one connecting cube, how many different ways can Carmen model the house using all 18 connecting cubes?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 51
a. What do you need to know?
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 13.
b. How is finding the number of ways to model a rectangular house related to finding factor pairs?
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 13.
c. Why is finding the factor pairs only the first step in solving the problem?
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 13.
d. Show the steps you used to solve the problem.
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 13.
Complete the sentences. Factor pairs for 18 are ___________________ .
There are ______ different ways Carmen can arrange the cubes to model the house.
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 14.
Sarah was organizing vocabulary words using index cards. She arranged 40 index cards in the shape of a rectangle on a poster. For 14a–14e, choose Yes or No to tell whether a possible arrangement of cards is shown.
a. 4 rows of 10 cards
i. yes
ii. no

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 14.
b. 6 rows of 8 cards
i. yes
ii. no

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 14.
c. 20 rows of 2 cards
i. yes
ii. no

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 14.
d. 40 rows of 1 card
i. yes
ii. no

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 14.
e. 35 rows of 5 cards
i. yes
ii. no

Answer:

Explanation:

Conclusion:

I think the answers provided in the Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers are beneficial for all the students of 4th grade. Our aim is to help the students to become masters in maths. So, Refer to our HMH Go Math 4th Grade Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers and secure good marks in the exams.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units

go-math-grade-4-chapter-12-relative-sizes-of-measurement-units-answer-key

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Pdf download links are provided here for free od cost.  Do refer to them during the preparation time and learn the concepts easily. All the students who are hunting for the Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units can download them here. So, take the help of these available pdf links and download Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 pdf to understand & learn the concepts of Relative Sizes of Measurement Units in a simplistic manner.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units

Go through the below-provided links and get the Go Math Grade 4 Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Answer Key for better preparation and score good marks in the exams. The provided solutions to all the questions asked from Relative Sizes of Measurement Units concepts will help you in real-time calculations also. Hence, utilize these lesson-wise links and solve each and every concept related questions covered in this chapter.

Lesson 1:

Lesson 2:

Common Core

Lesson 3:

Common Core

Lesson 4:

Common Core

Lesson 5:

Common Core

Mid Chapter Checkpoint

Lesson 6:

Common Core

Lesson 7:

Common Core

Lesson 8:

Common Core

Lesson 9: Problem Solving • Elapsed Time

Common Core

Chapter 12: Page No. 699

Chapter 12: Page No. 700

Lesson 10:

Lesson 11: Algebra • Patterns in Measurement Units

Common Core

Chapter 12: Review/Test

Common Core – New – Page No. 645

Measurement Benchmarks

Use benchmarks to choose the customary unit you would use to measure each.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 1

Question 1.
height of a computer
foot

Question 2.
weight of a table
________

Answer: Pound

The customary unit to measure the weight of the table is Pound.

Question 3.
length of a semi-truck
________

Answer: Yard

The unit to measure the length of a semi-truck is the yard.

Question 4.
the amount of liquid a bathtub holds
________

Answer: Gallon

The customary unit to measure the amount of liquid a bathtub holds is Gallon.

Use benchmarks to choose the metric unit you would use to measure each.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 2

Question 5.
mass of a grasshopper
________

Answer: Gram

The metric unit to measure the mass of a grasshopper is the gram.

Question 6.
the amount of liquid a water bottle holds
________

Answer: Liter

The metric unit to measure the amount of liquid a water bottle holds is Liter.

Question 7.
length of a soccer field
________

Answer: Meter

The metric unit to measure the length of a soccer field is meter.

Question 8.
length of a pencil
________

Answer: Centimeter

The metric unit to measure the length of a pencil is Centimeter.

Circle the better estimate.

Question 9.
mass of a chicken egg
a. 50 grams
b. 50 kilograms

Answer: 50 grams

The better estimate to measure the mass of a chicken egg is 50 grams.

Question 10.
length of a car
a. 12 miles
b. 12 feet

Answer: 12 feet

The better estimate to measure the length of a car is 12 feet.

Question 11.
amount of liquid a drinking glass holds
a. 8 ounces
b. 8 quarts

Answer: 8 ounces

The better estimate to measure the amount of liquid a drinking glass holds is 8 ounces.

Complete the sentence. Write more or less.

Question 12.
A camera has a length of _______ than one centimeter.

Answer: more

Explanation:

The length of a camera will greater than a centimeter. So, A camera has a length of more than one centimeter.

Question 13.
A bowling ball weighs _______ than one pound.

Answer: more

The unit of the pound is very less compared to the length of the ball.
So, A bowling ball weighs more than one pound.

Problem Solving

Question 14.
What is the better estimate for the mass of a textbook, 1 gram or 1 kilogram?
1 ________

Answer: 1 kilogram

The weight of a book will be more than a gram. So, the better estimate for the mass of a textbook is 1 kilogram.

Question 15.
What is the better estimate for the height of a desk, 1 meter or 1 kilometer?
1 ________

Answer: 1 meter

The kilometer is not suitable to measure the height of the desk. So, the better estimate for the height of a desk is 1 meter.

Common Core – New – Page No. 646

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Which is the best estimate for the weight of a stapler?
Options:
a. 4 ounces
b. 4 pounds
c. 4 inches
d. 4 feet

Answer: 4 ounces

The best estimate for the weight of a stapler is 4 ounces
So, the correct answer is option A.

Question 2.
Which is the best estimate for the length of a car?
Options:
a. 4 kilometers
b. 4 tons
c. 4 kilograms
d. 4 meters

Answer: 4 meters

The unit to measure the length of the car is meters.
Thus the answer is option D.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Bart practices his trumpet 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) hours each day. How many hours will he practice in 6 days?
Options:
a. 8 \(\frac{2}{4}\) hours
b. 7 \(\frac{2}{4}\) hours
c. 7 hours
d. 6 \(\frac{2}{4}\) hours

Answer: 7 \(\frac{2}{4}\) hours

Explanation:

Bart practices his trumpet 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) hours each day.
The normal fraction for 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{5}{4}\)
In order to calculate the number of hours for 6 days, we need to multiply the fraction with 6.
6 × \(\frac{5}{4}\) = \(\frac{30}{4}\)
The mixed fraction of \(\frac{30}{4}\) is 7 \(\frac{2}{4}\) hours
So, the correct answer is otpion D.

Question 4.
Millie collected 100 stamps from different countries. Thirty-two of the stamps are from countries in Africa. What is \(\frac{32}{100}\) written as a decimal?
Options:
a. 32
b. 3.2
c. 0.32
d. 0.032

Answer: 0.32

The decimal for the fraction is \(\frac{32}{100}\) = 0.32
Thus the answer is option C.

Question 5.
Diedre drew a quadrilateral with 4 right angles and 4 sides of the same length. What kind of polygon did Diedre draw?
Options:
a. square
b. trapezoid
c. hexagon
d. pentagon

Answer: square

Explanation:

A square has got 4 sides of equal length and 4 right angles (right angle = 90 degrees).
So, the correct answer is option A.

Question 6.
How many degrees are in an angle that turns through \(\frac{1}{2}\) of a circle?
Options:
a. 60°
b. 90°
c. 120°
d. 180°

Answer: 180°

Explanation:

\(\frac{1}{2}\) × 360°
360°/2 = 180°
So, the correct answer is option D.

Page No. 649

Question 1.
Compare the size of a yard to the size of a foot.
Use a model to help.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 3
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 4
1 yard is ____ times as long as ____ foot.
____              ____

Answer: 1 yard is three times as long as one feet.

Complete.

Question 2.
2 feet = ____ inches

Answer: 24 inches

Explanation:

1 foot = 12 inches
2 feets = 2 × 12 inches = 24 inches

Question 3.
3 yards = ____ feet

Answer: 9 feets

Explanation:

1 yard = 3 feets
3 yards = 3 × 3 = 9 feets

Question 4.
7 yards = ____ feet

Answer: 21 feets

Explanation:

1 yard = 3 feets
7 yards = 3 × 7 = 21 feets
Therefore 7 yards = 21 feets

Question 5.
4 yards = ____ feet

Answer: 12 feets

Explanation:

1 yard = 3 feet
4 yards = 4 × 3 feets = 12 feets
4 yards = 12 feets

Question 6.
10 yards = ____ feet

Answer: 30 feets

Explanation:

1 yard = 3 feets
10 yards = 10 × 3 feets = 30 feets
10 yards = 30 feets

Question 7.
7 feet = ____ inches

Answer: 84 inches

Explanation:

1 feet = 12 inches
7 feets = 7 × 12 = 84 inches

Use Symbols Algebra Compare using <, >, or =.

Question 8.
1 foot ____ 13 inches

Answer: 1 foot < 13 inches

Explanation:

We know that 1 foot = 12 inches
12 inches is less than 13 inches
So, 1 foot < 13 inches

Question 9.
2 yards ____ 6 feet

Answer: 2 yards = 6 feet

Explanation:

1 yard = 3 feets
2 yards = 2 × 3 feets = 6 feets
2 yards = 6 feet

Question 10.
6 feet ____ 60 inches

Answer: 6 feet > 60 inches

Explanation:

1 feet = 12 inches
6 feets = 6 × 12 inches = 72 inches
72 inches is greater than 60 inches
So, 6 feet > 60 inches

Question 11.
Joanna has 3 yards of fabric. She needs 100 inches of fabric to make curtains. Does she have enough fabric to make curtains? Explain. Make a table to help.
Type below:
________

Answer:

Given that, Joanna has 3 yards of fabric. She needs 100 inches of fabric to make curtains.
1 yard = 36 inches
3 yards = 36 × 3 = 108 inches
108 inches > 100 inches
So, she has enough fabric to make curtains.

Question 12.
Select the measures that are equal. Mark all that apply.
Options:
a. 4 feet
b. 12 yards
c. 36 feet
d. 480 inches
e. 15 feet
f. 432 inches

Answer: B = C = F

Explanation:

1 yard = 3 feet
12 yards = 12 × 3 = 36 feet
So, B = C

1 feet = 12 inches
36 feet = 12 × 36 inches = 432 inches
C = F
Therefore B = C = F

Page No. 650

Question 13.
Jasmine and Luke used fraction strips to compare the size of a foot to the size of an inch using fractions. They drew models to show their answers. Whose answer makes sense? Whose answer is nonsense? Explain your reasoning.
Jasmine’s Work
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 5
1 inch is \(\frac{1}{12}\) of a foot.
Luke’s Work
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 6
1 inch is \(\frac{1}{3}\) of a foot.
_______ ‘s answer makes sense

Answer: Jasmine’s answer makes sense

Question 13.
a. Apply For the answer that is nonsense, write an answer that makes sense.
Type below:
________

Answer: Luke’s answer is nonsense and Jasmine’s answer makes sense.
Because 1 foot = 12 inches. The fraction of 1 inch = \(\frac{1}{3}\) of a foot.

Question 13.
b. Look back at Luke’s model. Which two units could you compare using his model? Explain.
Type below:
________

Answer: Luke’s model will be suitable to compare the size of a foot to the size of a yard using fractions.

1 feet = 12 inches
3 feet = 36 inches
36 inches = 1 yard
So, 1 yard = \(\frac{12}{36}\)
1 yard = \(\frac{1}{3}\) feet

Common Core – New – Page No. 651

Customary Units of Length

Complete.

Question 1.
3 feet = 36 inches
Think: 1 foot = 12 inches,
so 3 feet = 3 × 12 inches, or 36 inches

Question 2.
2 yards = ____ feet

Answer: 6

Explanation:

1 yard = 3 feet
2 yards = 2 × 3 = 6 feets

Question 3.
8 feet = ____ inches

Answer: 96 inches

Explanation:

1 foot = 12 inches
8 feet = 12 × 8 = 96 inches
So, 8 feet = 96 inches

Question 4.
7 yards = ____ feet

Answer:21 feets

Explanation:

1 yard = 3 feet
7 yards = 7 × 3 feet = 21 feets
So, 7 yards = 21 feets

Question 5.
4 feet = ____ inches

Answer: 48 inches

Explanation:

1 foot = 12 inches
4 feet = 4 × 12 inches = 48 inches
So, 4 feet = 48 inches

Question 6.
15 yards = ____ feet

Answer: 45 feet

Explanation:

1 yard = 3 feet
15 yards = 15 × 3 feet = 45 feet
So, 15 yards = 45 feet

Question 7.
10 feet = ____ inches

Answer: 120 inches

Explanation:

1 foot = 12 inches
10 feet = 10 × 12 inches
10 feet = 120 inches

Compare using <, >, or =.

Question 8.
3 yards ____ 10 feet

Answer: 3 yards < 10 feet

Explanation:

1 yard = 3 feet
3 yards = 3 × 3 feet = 9 feet
9 feet is less than 10 feet
So, 3 yards < 10 feet

Question 9.
5 feet ____ 60 inches

Answer: 5 feet = 60 inches

Explanation:

1 foot = 12 inches
5 feet = 5 × 12 inches = 60 inches
So, 5 feet = 60 inches

Question 10.
8 yards ____ 20 feet

Answer: 8 yards > 20 feet

Explanation:

1 yard = 3 feet
8 yards = 8 × 3 feet = 24 feet
24 feet is greater than 20 feet
So, 8 yards > 20 feet

Question 11.
3 feet ____ 10 inches

Answer: 3 feet > 10 inches

Explanation:

1 foot = 12 inches
3 feet = 3 × 12 inches = 36 inches
36 inches is greater than 10 inches
So, 3 feet > 10 inches

Question 12.
3 yards ____ 21 feet

Answer: 3 yards < 21 feet

Explanation:

1 yard = 3 feet
3 yards = 3 × 3 feet = 9 feet
9 feet is less than 21 feet
So, 3 yards < 21 feet

Question 13.
6 feet ____ 72 inches

Answer: 6 feet = 72 inches

Explanation:

1 foot = 12 inches
6 feet = 6 × 12 inches = 72 inches
6 feet = 72 inches

Problem Solving

Question 14.
Carla has two lengths of ribbon. One ribbon is 2 feet long. The other ribbon is 30 inches long. Which length of the ribbon is longer?
2 feet ____ 30 inches

Answer: 2 feet < 30 inches

Explanation:

Carla has two lengths of ribbon. One ribbon is 2 feet long. The other ribbon is 30 inches long.
1 feet = 12 inches
2 feet = 2 × 12 inches = 24 inches
24 inches is less than 30 inches
30 inches is greater than 2 feet.
2 feet < 30 inches

Question 15.
A football player gained 2 yards on one play. On the next play, he gained 5 feet. Was his gain greater on the first play or the second play?
2 yards ____ 5 feet

Answer: 2 yards > 5 feet

Explanation:

A football player gained 2 yards on one play.
On the next play, he gained 5 feet.
1 yard = 3 feet
2 yards = 2 × 3 feet = 6 feet
The first play > The second play

Common Core – New – Page No. 652

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Marta has 14 feet of wire to use to make necklaces. She needs to know the length in inches so she can determine how many necklaces to make. How many inches of wire does Marta have?
Options:
a. 42 inches
b. 84 inches
c. 168 inches
d. 504 inches

Answer: 168 inches

Explanation:

Marta has 14 feet of wire to use to make necklaces.
1 feet = 12 inches
14 feet = 14 × 12 inches
14 feet = 168 inches
So, the correct answer is option C.

Question 2.
Jarod bought 8 yards of ribbon. He needs 200 inches to use to make curtains. How many inches of ribbon does he have?
Options:
a. 8 inches
b. 80 inches
c. 96 inches
d. 288 inches

Answer: 288 inches

Explanation:

Jarod bought 8 yards of ribbon. He needs 200 inches to use to make curtains.
1 yard = 36 inches
8 yards = 288 inches
Thus he has 288 inches of ribbon.
So, the correct answer is option D.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Which describes the turn shown below?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 7
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{4}\) turn counterclockwise
b. \(\frac{1}{4}\) turn clockwise
c. \(\frac{1}{2}\) turn clockwise
d. \(\frac{3}{4}\) turn counterclockwise

Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}\) turn counterclockwise

By seeing the above figure we can say that the circle turn \(\frac{1}{4}\) in counterclockwise direction.

Question 4.
Which decimal represents the shaded part of the model below?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 8
Options:
a. 0.03
b. 0.3
c. 0.33
d. 0.7

Answer: 0.3

Explanation:

The square is divided into 10 parts. Among them, 3 parts are shaded.
The fraction of the shaded part is \(\frac{3}{10}\)
The decimal that represents the above figure is 0.3
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 5.
Three sisters shared $3.60 equally. How much did each sister get?
Options:
a. $1.00
b. $1.20
c. $1.80
d. $10.80

Answer: $1.20

Explanation:

Three sisters shared $3.60 equally.
The amount that each sister get = x
x × 3 = $3.60
x = $3.60/3 = $1.20
So, the correct answer is option B.

Question 6.
Which is the best estimate for the width of your index finger?
Options:
a. 1 millimeter
b. 1 gram
c. 1 centimeter
d. 1 liter

Answer: 1 centimeter

The unit to measure the width of your index finger is 1 centimeter
The answer is option C.

Page No. 655

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 9
Question 1.
4 tons = ______ pounds

Answer: 8000 pounds

Explanation:

1 ton = 2000 pounds
4 tons = 4 × 2000 pounds = 8000 pounds
4 tons = 8000 pounds

Complete.

Question 2.
5 tons = ______ pounds

Answer: 10,000 pounds

1 ton = 2000 pounds
5 tons = 5 × 2000 pounds
5 tons = 10,000 pounds

Question 3.
6 pounds = ______ ounces

Answer: 96 ounces

1 pound = 16 ounces
6 pounds = 6 × 16 ounces
6 pounds = 96 ounces

Question 4.
7 pounds = ______ ounces

Answer: 112 ounces

1 pound = 16 ounces
7 pounds = 7 × 16 ounces
7 pounds = 112 ounces

Question 5.
6 tons = ______ pounds

Answer:

1 ton = 2000 pounds
6 tons = 6 × 2000 pounds
6 tons = 12,000 pounds

Use Symbols Algebra Compare using >, <, or =.

Question 6.
1 pound ______ 15 pounds

Answer: 1 pound < 15 pounds
1 is greater than 15.
So, 1 pound < 15 pounds

Question 7.
2 tons ______ 2 pounds

Answer: 2 tons > 2 pounds
1 ton is greater than 1 pound.
So, 2 tons > 2 pounds

Question 8.
A landscaping company ordered 8 tons of gravel. It sells the gravel in 50-pound bags. How many pounds of gravel did the company order?
______ 50-pound bags.

Answer: 16000 pounds

A landscaping company ordered 8 tons of gravel. It sells the gravel in 50-pound bags.
1 ton = 2000 pounds
8 tons = 8 × 2000 pounds = 16000 pounds

Question 9.
If you could draw a number line that shows the relationship between tons and pounds, what would it look like? Explain.

Answer:
Since 1 ton = 2000 pounds, the number line would show tick marks for every whole number from 0 to 2000. Each tick mark from 0 to 2000 would represent 1 pound. The tick mark in 2000 would represent 1 ton.

Question 10.
Write the symbol that compares the weights correctly.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 10
160 ounces ______ 10 pounds

Answer: 160 ounces = 10 pounds
1 pound = 16 ounces
16 pounds = 10 × 16 ounces = 160 ounces
160 ounces = 10 pounds

Question 10.
600 pounds ______ 1 ton

Answer: 600 pounds < 1 ton
1 ton = 2000 pounds
600 pounds is less than 2000 pounds
600 pounds < 1 ton

Page No. 656

Question 11.
Alexis bought \(\frac{1}{2}\) pound of grapes. How many ounces of grapes did she buy?
Dan drew the number line below to solve the problem. He says his model shows that there are 5 ounces in \(\frac{1}{2}\) pound. What is his error?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 11
Look at the way Dan solved the problem.
Draw a correct number line and solve the problem.
Find and describe his error.
So, Alexis bought ______ ounces of grapes.
Type below:
________

1 pound = 16 ounces
\(\frac{1}{2}\) pound = 8 ounces
The error of Dan is he must draw the mark till 8 but he drew till 5 ounces.

Question 11.
Look back at the number line you drew. How many ounces are in \(\frac{1}{4}\) pound? Explain.
Type below:
________

Answer: There are 4 ounces in \(\frac{1}{4}\) pound.

Common Core – New – Page No. 657

Customary Units of Weight

Complete.

Question 1.
5 pounds = 80 ounces
Think: 1 pound = 16 ounces, so
5 pounds = 5 × 16 ounces, or 80 ounces

Question 2.
7 tons = _____ pounds

Answer: 14,000 pounds

Explanation:

1 ton = 2000 pounds
7 tons = 7 × 2000 pounds = 14000 pounds
7 tons = 14000 pounds

Question 3.
2 pounds = _____ ounces

Answer: 32 ounces

Explanation:

1 pound = 16 ounces
2 pounds = 2 × 16 ounces = 32 ounces
2 pounds = 32 ounces

Question 4.
3 tons = _____ pounds

Answer: 6,000 pounds

Explanation:

1 ton = 2000 pounds
3 tons = 3 × 2000 pounds = 6000 pounds
3 tons = 6000 pounds

Question 5.
10 pounds = _____ ounces

Answer: 160 ounces

Explanation:

1 pound = 16 ounces
10 pounds = 10 × 16 ounces = 160 ounces
10 pounds = 160 ounces

Question 6.
5 tons = _____ pounds

Answer: 10,000 pounds

Explanation:

1 ton = 2000 pounds
5 tons = 5 × 2000 pounds = 10000 pounds
5 tons = 10000 pounds

Question 7.
7 pounds = _____ ounces

Answer: 112 ounces

Explanation:

1 pound = 16 ounces
7 pounds = 7 × 16 ounces = 112 ounces
7 pounds = 112 ounces

Compare using <, >, or =.

Question 8.
8 pounds _____ 80 ounces

Answer: 8 pounds > 80 ounces

Explanation:

1 pound = 16 ounces
8 pounds = 128 ounces
128 ounces is greater than 80 ounces
So, the answer is 8 pounds > 80 ounces

Question 9.
1 ton _____ 100 pounds

Answer: 1 ton > 100 pounds

Explanation:

1 ton = 2000 pounds
2000 pounds is greater than 100 pounds
1 ton > 100 pounds

Question 10.
3 pounds _____ 50 ounces

Answer: 3 pounds < 50 ounces

Explanation:

1 pound = 16 ounces
3 pounds = 3 × 16 ounces = 48 ounces
3 pounds = 48 ounces
3 pounds < 50 ounces

Question 11.
5 tons _____ 1,000 pounds

Answer: 5 tons > 1,000 pounds

Explanation:

1 ton = 2000 pounds
5 tons = 5 × 2000 pounds = 10000 pounds
10000 pounds is greater than 1000 pounds
5 tons > 1,000 pounds

Question 12.
16 pounds _____ 256 ounces

Answer: 16 pounds = 256 ounces

Explanation:

1 pound = 16 ounces
16 pounds = 16 × 16 ounces = 256 ounces
16 pounds = 256 ounces

Question 13.
8 tons _____ 16,000 pounds

Answer: 8 tons = 16,000 pounds

Explanation:

1 ton = 2000 pounds
8 tons = 8 × 2000 pounds = 16,000 pounds
8 tons = 16,000 pounds

Problem Solving

Question 14.
A company that makes steel girders can produce 6 tons of girders in one day. How many pounds is this?
6 tons = _____ pounds

Answer: 12,000 pounds

Explanation:

A company that makes steel girders can produce 6 tons of girders in one day.
1 ton = 2000 pounds
6 tons = 6 × 2000 pounds = 12000 pounds
6 tons = 12000 pounds

Question 15.
Larry’s baby sister weighed 6 pounds at birth. How many ounces did the baby weigh?
6 pounds = _____ ounces

Answer: 96 ounces

Explanation:

Larry’s baby sister weighed 6 pounds at birth.
1 pound = 16 ounces
6 pounds = 6 × 16 ounces = 96 ounces

Common Core – New – Page No. 658

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Ann bought 2 pounds of cheese to make lasagna. The recipe gives the amount of cheese needed in ounces. How many ounces of cheese did she buy?
Options:
a. 20 ounces
b. 32 ounces
c. 40 ounces
d. 64 ounces

Answer: 32 ounces

Explanation:

Ann bought 2 pounds of cheese to make lasagna.
1 pound = 16 ounces
2 pounds = 2 × 16 ounces = 32 ounces
So, the answer is option is option B.

Question 2.
A school bus weighs 7 tons. The weight limit for a bridge is given in pounds. What is this weight of the bus in pounds?
Options:
a. 700 pounds
b. 1,400 pounds
c. 7,000 pounds
d. 14,000 pounds

Answer: 14,000 pounds

Explanation:

A school bus weighs 7 tons. The weight limit for a bridge is given in pounds.
1 ton = 2000 pounds
7 tons = 7 × 2000 pounds
7 tons = 14000 pounds
So, the correct answer is option D.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
What is the measure of m∠EHG?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 12
Options:
a. 60°
b. 100°
c. 120°
d. 130°

Answer: 120°

Explanation:

m∠EHG = m∠EHF + m∠FHG
m∠EHG = 90° + 30° = 120°
m∠EHG = 120°
The correct answer is option C.

Question 4.
How many lines of symmetry does the square below have?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 13
Options:
a. 0
b. 2
c. 4
d. 6

Answer: 4

Explanation:

A square contains 4 right angles.
So, the answer is option C.

Question 5.
To make dough, Reba needs 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of flour. How much flour does she need to make 5 batches of dough?
Options:
a. 14 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups
b. 12 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups
c. 11 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups
d. 10 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups

Answer: 12 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups

Explanation:

To make dough, Reba needs 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of flour.
5 × 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= 12 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups
She need 12 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of flour to make dough.
So, the correct answer is option B.

Question 6.
Judi’s father is 6 feet tall. The minimum height to ride a rollercoaster is given in inches. How many inches tall is Judi’s father?
Options:
a. 60 inches
b. 66 inches
c. 72 inches
d. 216 inches

Answer: 72 inches

Explanation:

Judi’s father is 6 feet tall. The minimum height to ride a rollercoaster is given in inches.
1 feet = 12 inches
6 feet = 6 × 12 inches = 72 inches
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Page No. 661

Question 1.
Compare the size of a quart to the size of a pint.
Use a model to help.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 14
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 15
1 quart is ____ times as much as _____ pint.

Answer: 1 quart is 2 times as much as 1 pint.

Complete.

Question 2.
2 pints = _____ cups

Answer: 4 cups

Explanation:

1 pint = 2 cups
2 pints = 2 × 2 cups = 4 cups
2 pints = 4 cups

Question 3.
3 gallons = _____ quarts

Answer: 12 quarts

Explanation:

1 gallon = 4 quarts
3 gallons = 3 × 4 quarts = 12 quarts
3 gallons = 12 quarts

Question 4.
6 quarts = _____ cups

Answer: 24 cups

Explanation:

1 quart = 4 cups
6 quarts = 6 × 4 cups = 24 cups
6 quarts = 24 cups

Use a model or Tools to complete.

Question 5.
4 gallons = _____ pints

Answer: 32 pints

Explanation:

1 gallon = 8 pints
4 gallons = 4 × 8 pints = 32 pints
4 gallons = 32 pints

Question 6.
5 cups = _____ fluid ounces

Answer:

1 cup = 8 fluid ounces
5 cups = 5 × 8 fluid ounces = 40 fluid ounces
5 cups = 40 fluid ounces

Use Symbols Algebra Compare using >, <, or =.

Question 7.
2 gallons _____ 32 cups

Answer: 2 gallons = 32 cups

Explanation:

1 gallon = 16 cups
2 gallons = 2 × 16 cups = 32 cups
2 gallons = 32 cups

Question 8.
4 pints _____ 6 cups

Answer: 4 pints > 6 cups

Explanation:

1 pint = 2 cups
4 pints = 4 × 2 cups = 8 cups
So, 4 pints > 6 cups

Question 9.
5 quarts _____ 11 pints

Answer: 5 quarts < 11 pints

Explanation:

1 quart = 2 pints
5 quarts = 5 × 2 pints = 10 pints
10 is less than 11 pints
So, 5 quarts < 11 pints

Question 10.
A soccer team has 25 players. The team’s thermos holds 4 gallons of water. If the thermos is full, is there enough water for each player to have 2 cups? Explain. Make a table to help.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 16
________

Answer: Enough water

Gallons Cups
1 16
2 32
3 48
4 64

Page No. 662

Question 11.
Verify the Reasoning of Others Whose statement makes sense? Whose statement is nonsense? Explain your reasoning.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 17
_______ ’s statement makes sense.

Answer: Angela’s Statement is true. A gallon is 8 times as much as a pint, so 1 pint is 1/8 of a gallon.
Zach’s statement is nonsense. There are 8 pints in a gallon, not 4, so a pint cannot be 1/4 of a gallon.

Question 12.
Peter’s glasses each hold 8 fluid ounces. How many glasses of juice can Peter pour from a bottle that holds 2 quarts?
_____ glasses

Answer: 8 glasses

Explanation:

Peter’s glasses each hold 8 fluid ounces.
There is 32oz per quart. 8 goes into 32 a total of four times. So since there are two quarts, Peter can pour 8 glasses.

Question 13.
A pitcher contains 5 quarts of water. Josy says the pitcher contains 10 cups of water. Explain Josy’s error. Then find the correct number of cups the pitcher contains.
Type below:
________

Answer: 20 cups

Explanation:

Josy multiplied the number of quarts by 2.
There are 4 cups in each quart.
She should have multiplied the number of quarts by 4
5 × 4 = 20
Therefore there are 20 cups in the pitcher.

Common Core – New – Page No. 663

Customary Units of Liquid Volume

Complete.

Question 1.
6 gallons = 24 quarts
Think: 1 gallon = 4 quarts,
so 6 gallons = 6 × 4 quarts, or 24 quarts

Question 2.
12 quarts = _____ pints

Answer: 24 pints

Explanation:

1 quart = 2 pints
12 quarts = 12 × 2 pints
12 pints = 24 pints

Question 3.
6 cups = _____ fluid ounces

Answer: 48 fluid ounces

Explanation:

1 cup = 8 fluid ounces
6 cups = 6 × 8 fluid ounces = 48 fluid ounces
So, 6 cups = 48 fluid ounces

Question 4.
9 pints = _____ cups

Answer: 18 cups

Explanation:

1 pint = 2 cups
9 pints = 9 × 2 cups = 18 cups
9 pints = 18 cups

Question 5.
10 quarts = _____ cups

Answer: 40 cups

Explanation:

1 quart = 4 cups
10 quarts = 10 × 4 cups = 40 cups
10 quarts = 40 cups

Question 6.
5 gallons = _____ pints

Answer: 40 pints

Explanation:

1 gallon = 8 pints
5 gallons = 5 × 8 pints = 40 pints
5 gallons = 40 pints

Question 7.
3 gallons = _____ cups

Answer: 48 cups

Explanation:

1 gallon = 16 cups
3 gallons = 3 × 16 cups = 48 cups
Therefore 3 gallons = 48 cups

Compare using <, >, or =.

Question 8.
6 pints _____ 60 fluid ounces

Answer: 6 pints > 60 fluid ounces

Explanation:

1 pint = 16 fluid ounces
6 pints = 6 × 16 fluid ounces = 96 fluid ounces
96 fluid ounces is greater than 60 fluid ounces
So, 6 pints > 60 fluid ounces

Question 9.
3 gallons _____ 30 quarts

Answer: 3 gallons < 30 quarts

Explanation:

1 gallon = 4 quarts
3 gallons = 3 × 4 quarts = 12 quarts
12 is less than 30
So, 3 gallons < 30 quarts

Question 10.
5 quarts _____ 20 cups

Answer: 5 quarts = 20 cups

Explanation:

1 quart = 4 cups
5 quarts = 5 × 4 cups = 20 cups
5 quarts = 20 cups

Question 11.
6 cups _____ 12 pints

Answer: 6 cups < 12 pints

Explanation:

1 cup = \(\frac{1}{2}\) pint
6 cups = 6 × \(\frac{1}{2}\) pint = 3 pints
3 is less than 12.
So, 6 cups < 12 pints

Question 12.
8 quarts _____ 16 pints

Answer: 8 quarts = 16 pints

Explanation:

1 quart = 2 pints
8 quarts = 8 × 2 pints = 16 pints
8 quarts = 16 pints

Question 13.
6 gallons _____ 96 pints

Answer: 6 gallons < 96 pints

Explanation:

1 gallon = 8 pints
6 gallons = 6 × 8 pints = 48 pints
48 is less than 96 pints
So, 6 gallons < 96 pints

Problem Solving

Question 14.
A chef makes 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\) gallons of soup in a large pot. How many 1-cup servings can the chef get from this large pot of soup?
_____ 1-cup servings

Answer: 24 1-cup servings

Explanation:

A chef makes 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\) gallons of soup in a large pot.
1 gallon = 16 cups
We have to convert a mixed fraction into a proper fraction.
1 \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{3}{2}\)
\(\frac{3}{2}\) × 16 cups = 24 cups
Thus the chef get 24 1-cup servings from this large pot of soup.

Question 15.
Kendra’s water bottle contains 2 quarts of water. She wants to add a drink mix to it, but the directions for the drink mix give the amount of water in fluid ounces. How many fluid ounces are in her bottle?
_____ fluid ounces

Answer: 64 fluid ounces

Explanation:

Kendra’s water bottle contains 2 quarts of water.
She wants to add a drink mix to it, but the directions for the drink mix give the amount of water in fluid ounces.
1 quart = 4 cups
1 cup = 8 fluid ounces
4 cups = 4 × 8 fluid ounces = 32 fluid ounces
2 quarts = 2 × 32 fluid ounces = 64 fluid ounces
Thus 64 fluid ounces are in her bottle.

Common Core – New – Page No. 664

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Joshua drinks 8 cups of water a day. The recommended daily amount is given in fluid ounces. How many fluid ounces of water does he drink each day?
Options:
a. 16 fluid ounces
b. 32 fluid ounces
c. 64 fluid ounces
d. 128 fluid ounces

Answer: 64 fluid ounces

Explanation:

1 cup = 8 fluid ounces
8 cups = 8 × 8 fluid ounces = 64 fluid ounces
8 cups = 64 fluid ounces
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 2.
A cafeteria used 5 gallons of milk in preparing lunch. How many 1-quart containers of milk did the cafeteria use?
Options:
a. 10
b. 20
c. 40
d. 80

Answer: 20

Explanation:

A cafeteria used 5 gallons of milk in preparing lunch.
1 gallon = 4 quarts
5 gallons = 5 × 4 quarts = 20 quarts
5 gallons = 20 quarts
So, the correct answer is option B.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Roy uses \(\frac{1}{4}\) cup of batter for each muffin. Which list shows the amounts of batter he will use depending on the number of muffins he makes?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{4}, \frac{1}{5}, \frac{1}{6}, \frac{1}{7}, \frac{1}{8}\)
b. \(\frac{1}{4}, \frac{2}{4}, \frac{3}{4}, \frac{4}{4}, \frac{5}{4}\)
c. \(\frac{1}{4}, \frac{2}{8}, \frac{3}{12}, \frac{4}{16}, \frac{5}{20}\)
d. \(\frac{1}{4}, \frac{2}{8}, \frac{4}{16}, \frac{6}{24}, \frac{8}{32}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}, \frac{2}{4}, \frac{3}{4}, \frac{4}{4}, \frac{5}{4}\)

Explanation:

Given that, Roy uses \(\frac{1}{4}\) cup of batter for each muffin.
The amounts of batter he will use depending on the number of muffins he makes is \(\frac{1}{4}, \frac{2}{4}, \frac{3}{4}, \frac{4}{4}, \frac{5}{4}\)
The correct answer is option B.

Question 4.
Beth has \(\frac{7}{100}\) of a dollar. Which shows the amount of money Beth has?
Options:
a. $7.00
b. $0.70
c. $0.07
d. $0.007

Answer: $0.07

Explanation:

Beth has \(\frac{7}{100}\) of a dollar.
The decimal of \(\frac{7}{100}\) = 0.07
The amount of money Beth has is $0.07
So, the answer is option C.

Question 5.
Name the figure that Enrico drew below.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 18
Options:
a. a ray
b. a line
c. a line segment
d. an octagon

Answer: a ray

Explanation:

A part of a line with a start point but no endpoint is called a ray.
The above figure has no endpoint.
So, the answer is option A.

Question 6.
A hippopotamus weighs 4 tons. Feeding instructions are given for weights in pounds. How many pounds does the hippopotamus weigh?
Options:
a. 4,000 pounds
b. 6,000 pounds
c. 8,000 pounds
d. 12,000 pounds

Answer: 8,000 pounds

Explanation:

A hippopotamus weighs 4 tons. Feeding instructions are given for weights in pounds.
We know that 1 ton = 2000 pounds
4 tons = 4 × 2000 pounds = 8000 pounds
Thus the answer is option C.

Page No. 667

Question 1.
A food critic collected data on the lengths of time customers waited for their food. Order the data from least to greatest time. Make a tally table and a line plot to show the data.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 19
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 20
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 21
Type below:
________

Answer:

Tally Table:

Time Customers waited for Food
Time (in hour) Tally
\(\frac{1}{2}\) ||
\(\frac{1}{4}\) |||
\(\frac{3}{4}\) |
1 |

Line plot:

Go Math Solution Key Grade 4 Chapter 12 solution image_2

Use your line plot for 2 and 3.

Question 2.
On how many customers did the food critic collect data?
________

Answer: 7

Explanation:

Number of customers waited for half an hour = 2
Number of customers waited for an hour = 1
Number of customers waited for \(\frac{3}{4}\) of an hour = 1
Number of customers waited for \(\frac{1}{4}\) of an hour = 3
Total number of customers = 2 + 1 + 1 + 3 = 7
The food critic collects data from 7 customers.

Question 3.
What is the difference between the longest time and the shortest time that customers waited?
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{4}\)

The longest time is 1 hour
And the shortest time is \(\frac{1}{4}\)
1 – \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Question 4.
Use Models The data show the lengths of the ribbons Mia used to wrap packages. Make a tally table and a line plot to show the data.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 22
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 23
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 24
Type below:
________

Answer:

Ribbon used to Wrap Packages
Length (in yards) Tally
\(\frac{1}{6}\) |
\(\frac{2}{6}\) |||
\(\frac{5}{6}\) |
\(\frac{6}{6}\) |
\(\frac{3}{6}\) ||

Line plot:

Go math Grade 4 Solution Key Chapter 12 solution image_3

Question 5.
What is the difference in length between the longest ribbon and the shortest ribbon Mia used?
\(\frac{□}{□}\) yard

Answer: \(\frac{5}{6}\) yard

Explanation:

The longest ribbon is \(\frac{6}{6}\) yard
The shortest ribbon is \(\frac{1}{6}\) yard
To find the difference of both the ribbons we have to subtract the shortest ribbon from the longest ribbon
\(\frac{6}{6}\) – \(\frac{1}{6}\) = \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Page No. 668

Question 6.
The line plot shows the distances the students in Mr. Boren’s class ran at the track in miles. Altogether, did the students run more or less than 5 miles?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 25
a. What are you asked to find?
Type below:
________

Answer: If the students ran more or less than 5 miles together.

Question 6.
b. What information do you need to use?
Type below:
________

Answer: I need the information about the distance each student ran.

Question 6.
c. How will the line plot help you solve the problem?
Type below:
________

Answer: With the help of the line plot I can know how far each student ran.

Question 6.
d. What operation will you use to solve the problem?
Type below:
________

Answer: I use addition to solve the problem.

Question 6.
e. Show the steps to solve the problem.
Type below:
________

Answer: \(\frac{1}{5}\) + \(\frac{1}{5}\) + \(\frac{2}{5}\) + \(\frac{2}{5}\) + \(\frac{3}{5}\) + \(\frac{4}{5}\) + \(\frac{4}{5}\) + \(\frac{5}{5}\) = \(\frac{22}{5}\)
The mixed fraction of \(\frac{22}{5}\) is 4 \(\frac{2}{5}\).

Question 6.
Complete the sentences.
The students ran a total of ____ miles.
The distance is ____ than 5 miles. Altogether the students ran ____ than 5 miles.
Type below:
________

Answer: he students ran a total of 4 \(\frac{2}{5}\) miles.
The distance is less than 5 miles. Altogether the students ran less than 5 miles.

Question 7.
Lena collects antique spoons. The line plot shows the lengths of the spoons in her collection. If she lines up all of her spoons in order of size, what is the size of the middle spoon? Explain.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 26
\(\frac{□}{□}\) feet spoon

Answer: \(\frac{4}{4}\) feet
I ordered the data from the least to the greatest value and found the middle value.

Question 8.
A hiking group recorded the distances they hiked. Complete the line plot to show the data.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 27
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 28
Type below:
________

Answer:

Go Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 12 solution image_6

Common Core – New – Page No. 669

Line Plots

Question 1.
Some students compared the time they spend riding the school bus. Complete the tally table and line plot to show the data.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 29
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 30

Time Spent on School Bus
Time (in hour) Tally
\(\frac{1}{6}\) ||
\(\frac{2}{6}\) |
\(\frac{3}{6}\) ||||
\(\frac{4}{6}\) |

Answer:

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 solution image_1

Use your line plot for 2 and 3.

Question 2.
How many students compared times?
______ students

Answer: 8

Explanation:

Number of students spent \(\frac{1}{6}\) of an hour on school bus = 2
Number of students spent \(\frac{2}{6}\) of an hour on school bus = 1
Number of students spent \(\frac{3}{6}\) of an hour on school bus = 4
Number of students spent \(\frac{4}{6}\) of an hour on school bus = 1
Total number of students = 2 + 1 + 4 + 1 = 8 students

Question 3.
What is the difference between the longest time and shortest time students spent riding the bus?
\(\frac{□}{□}\) hour

Answer: \(\frac{3}{6}\)

Explanation:

Longest time is \(\frac{4}{6}\) and shortest time is \(\frac{1}{6}\)
\(\frac{4}{6}\) – \(\frac{1}{6}\) = \(\frac{3}{6}\)
Thus the difference between the longest time and shortest time students spent riding the bus is \(\frac{3}{6}\)

Problem Solving

For 4–5, make a tally table on a separate sheet of paper.
Make a line plot in the space below the problem.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 31
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 32

Answer:

HMH Go Math Key Grade 4 Chapter 12 solution image_4

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 33
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 34

Answer:

Go Math 4th Grade Answer Key for chapter 12 solution image_5

Common Core – New – Page No. 670

Lesson Check

Use the line plot for 1 and 2.

Question 1.
How many students were reading during study time?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 35
Options:
a. 5
b. 6
c. 7
d. 8

Answer: 8

Explanation:

By seeing the above line plot we can say that the number of students was reading during study time is 8.
So, the correct answer is option D.

Question 2.
What is the difference between the longest time and shortest time spent reading?
Options:
a. \(\frac{4}{8}\) hour
b. \(\frac{3}{8}\) hour
c. \(\frac{2}{8}\) hour
d. \(\frac{1}{8}\) hour

Answer: \(\frac{3}{8}\) hour

Explanation:

The line plot shows that the shortest time is \(\frac{1}{8}\) hour and the longest time is \(\frac{4}{8}\) hour.
The difference of between the longest time and shortest time spent reading is \(\frac{4}{8}\) – \(\frac{1}{8}\) = \(\frac{3}{8}\) hour
So, the correct answer is option B.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Bridget is allowed to play on-line games for \(\frac{75}{100}\) of an hour each day. Which shows that fraction as a decimal?
Options:
a. 75.0
b. 7.50
c. 0.75
d. 0.075

Answer: 0.75

Explanation:

The decimal form of the fraction \(\frac{75}{100}\) is 0.75.
So, the answer is option C.

Question 4.
Bobby’s collection of sports cards has \(\frac{3}{10}\) baseball cards and \(\frac{39}{100}\) football cards. The rest are soccer cards. What fraction of Bobby’s sports cards are baseball or football cards?
Options:
a. \(\frac{9}{100}\)
b. \(\frac{42}{100}\)
c. \(\frac{52}{100}\)
d. \(\frac{69}{100}\)

Answer: \(\frac{69}{100}\)

Explanation:

The way the question is written, there are other possibilities, but it seems to me the simplest possibility is that Bobby has 100 sports cards. If 3/10 are baseball, that’s 30. He has 39 football cards. So for baseball and football together it’s 69 cards.
So, the fraction is of Bobby’s sports cards are baseball or football cards is \(\frac{69}{100}\)
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 5.
Jeremy gives his horse 12 gallons of water each day. How many 1-quart pails of water is that?
Options:
a. 24
b. 48
c. 72
d. 96

Answer: 48

Explanation:

Jeremy gives his horse 12 gallons of water each day.
For 1 quart he needs 12 × 4 = 48 gallons of water
So, the answer is option B.

Question 6.
An iguana at a pet store is 5 feet long. Measurements for iguana cages are given in inches. How many inches long is the iguana?
Options:
a. 45 inches
b. 50 inches
c. 60 inches
d. 72 inches

Answer: 60 inches

Explanation:

An iguana at a pet store is 5 feet long. Measurements for iguana cages are given in inches.
1 feet = 12 inches
5 feet = 5 × 12 inches = 60 inches
Thus the answer is option C.

Page No. 671

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 36

Question 1.
A _______ is a customary unit used to measure weight.
_______

Answer: Pound

Question 2.
The cup and the _____ are both customary units for measuring liquid volume.
_______

Answer: Pint

Complete the sentence. Write more or less.

Question 3.
A cat weighs _______ than one ounce
____

Answer: more

Explanation:
Pound, unit of avoirdupois weight, equal to 16 ounces
The weigh of the cat is measured in pounds. So, the cat weighs more than one ounce

Question 4.
Serena’s shoe is ______ than one yard long.
____

Answer: Less

The length of the shoe is less when compared to the yard.
So, Serena’s shoe is less than one yard long.

Complete.

Question 5.
5 feet = ____ inches

Answer: 60 inches

Explanation:

1 feet = 12 inches
5 feets = 5 × 12 inches = 60 inches
5 feets = 60 inches

Question 6.
4 tons = ____ pounds

Answer: 8000 pounds

Explanation:

1 ton = 2000 pounds
4 tons = 4 × 2000 pounds = 8000 pounds
The answer is 4 tons = 8000 pounds

Question 7.
4 cups = ____ pints

Answer: 2 pints

Explanation:

1 pint = 2 cups
4 cups = 4 × 1/2 pint = 2 pints
Thus 4 cups = 2 pints

Question 8.
Mrs. Byrne’s class went raspberry picking. The data show the weights of the cartons of raspberries the students picked. Make a tally table and a line plot to show the data.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 37
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 38
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 39
Type below:
_________

Line plot:

Go Math Grade 4 Chapter 12 Answer Key image_6

Tally Marks:

Cartons of Raspberries picked
Weight (in pounds) Tally
\(\frac{1}{4}\) |||
\(\frac{2}{4}\) ||
\(\frac{3}{4}\) |||
\(\frac{4}{4}\) |

Use your line plot for 9 and 10.

Question 9.
What is the difference in weight between the heaviest carton and the lightest carton of raspberries?
\(\frac{□}{□}\) pound

Answer: \(\frac{3}{4}\) pound

Explanation:

The heaviest carton of raspberries is \(\frac{4}{4}\)
The lightest carton of raspberries is \(\frac{1}{4}\)
The difference in weight between the heaviest carton and a lightest carton of raspberries = \(\frac{4}{4}\) – \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{3}{4}\) pounds.

Question 10.
How many pounds of raspberries did Mrs. Byrne’s class pick in all?
______ pounds

Answer: 5 pounds

Explanation:

Add total weight of carton of raspberries picked
= \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{2}{4}\) + \(\frac{2}{4}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\) + \(\frac{4}{4}\) = 5
Therefore Mrs. Byrne’s class picked 5 pounds of raspberries in all.

Page No. 672

Question 11.
A jug contains 2 gallons of water. How many quarts of water does the jug contain?
______ quarts

Answer: 8 quarts

Explanation:

A jug contains 2 gallons of water
Now we have to gallons into quarts.
We know that 1 gallon = 4 quarts
2 gallons = 2 × 4 quarts = 8 quarts
Thus the jug contain 8 quarts of water.

Question 12.
Serena bought 4 pounds of dough to make pizzas. The recipe gives the amount of dough needed for a pizza in ounces. How many ounces of dough did she buy?
______ ounces

Answer: 64 ounces

Explanation:

Serena bought 4 pounds of dough to make pizzas.
The recipe gives the amount of dough needed for a pizza in ounces.
We know that,
1 pound = 16 ounces
4 pounds = 4 × 16 ounces = 64 ounces
Thus Serena bought 64 ounces of dough.

Question 13.
Vicki has a 50 inch roll of ribbon. She used 3 feet of the ribbon to wrap a gift. How many inches of ribbon does she have left?
______ inches

Answer: 14 inches

Explanation:

Vicki has a 50 inch roll of ribbon. She used 3 feet of the ribbon to wrap a gift.
1 feet = 12 inches
3 feet = 3 × 12 inches = 36 inches
Now subtract 36 inches from 50 inches
50 inches – 36 inches = 14 inches
Therefore 14 inches of ribbon is left.

Question 14.
The watering can that Carlos uses in his vegetable garden holds 5 of a certain unit of liquid volume. When full, how much water is in the watering can?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 40
5 ______ of water

Answer: 5 gallons of water
The unit to measure the liquid volume is the gallon. So, the watering can holds 5 gallons of water.

Page No. 675

Complete.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 41

Question 1.
2 meters = _____ centimeters

Answer: 200 centimeters

Explanation:

Convert meters into centimeters
1 meter = 100 centimeters
2 meters = 2 × 100 centimeters = 200 centimeters

Question 2.
3 centimeters = _____ millimeters

Answer: 30 millimeters

Explanation:

Convert the centimeters into millimeters
1 centimeter = 10 millimeters
3 centimeters = 3 × 10 millimeters = 30 millimeters
3 centimeters = 30 millimeters

Question 3.
5 decimeters = _____ centimeters

Answer: 50 centimeters

Explanation:

1 decimeter = 10 centimeters
5 decimeters = 5 × 10 centimeters = 50 centimeters
5 decimeters = 50 centimeters

Use Symbols Algebra Compare using <, >, or =.

Question 4.
4 meters _____ 40 decimeters

Answer: 4 meters = 40 decimeters

Explanation:

1 meter = 10 decimeters
4 meters = 4 × 10 decimeters = 40 decimeters
4 meters = 40 decimeters

Question 5.
5 centimeters _____ 5 millimeters

Answer: 5 centimeters > 5 millimeters

Explanation:

1 centimeter = 10 millimeters
5 centimeters = 50 millimeters
50 millimeters is greater than 5 millimeters
Thus 5 centimeters > 5 millimeters

Question 6.
6 decimeters _____ 65 centimeters

Answer: 6 decimeters < 65 centimeters

Explanation:

1 decimeter = 10 centimeters
6 decimeters = 6 × 10 centimeters = 60 centimeters
60 is less than 65 centimeters
6 decimeters < 65 centimeters

Question 7.
7 meters _____ 700 millimeters

Answer: 7 meters > 700 millimeters

Explanation:

1 meter = 1000 millimeters
7 meters = 7 × 1000 millimeters = 7000 millimeters
7000 is greater than 700
So, 7 meters > 700 millimeters

Describe the length in meters. Write your answer as a fraction and as a decimal.

Question 8.
65 centimeters = ______ or ______ meter
Type below:
_________

Answer: \(\frac{65}{100}\) or 0.65 meter

Explanation:

The fraction for 65 centimeters is \(\frac{65}{100}\) and the decimal form of the fraction is 0.65 meter

Question 9.
47 centimeters = ______ or ______ meter
Type below:
_________

Answer: \(\frac{47}{100}\) or 0.47 meter

Explanation:

The fraction for 47 centimeters is \(\frac{47}{100}\) and the decimal is 0.47 meter.

Question 10.
9 decimeters = ______ or ______ meter
Type below:
_________

Answer: \(\frac{9}{10}\) or 0.9 meter

Explanation:

The fraction for 9 decimeters is \(\frac{9}{10}\) and the decimal for the fraction is 0.9 meter.

Question 11.
2 decimeters = ______ or ______ meter
Type below:
_________

Answer: \(\frac{2}{10}\) or 0.2 meter

Explanation:

The fraction for 2 decimeters is \(\frac{2}{10}\) and the decimal for the fraction is 0.2 meter.

Question 12.
A new building is 25 meters tall. How many decimeters tall is the building?
______ decimeters

Answer: 250 decimeters

Explanation:

A new building is 25 meters tall.
Now we have to convert the meters into decimeters
1 meter = 10 decimeters
25 meters = 25 × 10 decimeters = 250 decimeters
The height of the building is 250 decimeters.

Question 13.
Alexis is knitting a blanket 2 meters long. Every 2 decimeters, she changes the color of the yarn to make stripes. How many stripes will the blanket have? Explain.
______ stripes

Answer: 10 stripes

Explanation:

Given that, Alexis is knitting a blanket 2 meters long. Every 2 decimeters, she changes the color of the yarn to make stripes.
First of all, convert the meters into the decimeters
1 meter = 10 decimeters
2 meters = 20 decimeters
If she changes the color of the yarn for every 2 decimeters then the blanket will have 10 stripes.

Page No. 676

Question 14.
Julianne’s desk is 75 centimeters long. She says her desk is 7.5 meters long. Describe her error.
Type below:
_________

Answer: \(\frac{75}{100}\) or 0.75 meter

The fraction form of 75 centimeters is \(\frac{75}{100}\). The decimation for the fraction is 0.75 meter

Question 15.
Write the equivalent measurements in each column.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 42
Type below:
_________

Answer:

5 meters 55 centimeters 50 millimeters
5000 millimeters 55/100 meter 500/1000 meter
500 centimeters 0.55 meter 0.500 meter
50 decimeters 550 millimeters 50 centimeters

Question 16.
Aruna was writing a report on pecan trees. She made the table of information to the right. Write a problem that can be solved by using the data.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 43
Type below:
_________

Answer: The height of the tree is 21m to 30m. How many centimeters is the height of the tree?

Question 16.
Describe how you could change the problem by changing a unit in the problem. Then solve the problem.
Type below:
_________

Answer:

Convert meters into centimeters.
Given that the height of the height is 21 to 30m
1 meter = 100 centimeters
21 meters = 2100 centimeters, 30 meters = 3000 centimeters
So, the height of the tree in centimeters is 2100 to 3000 centimeters.

Common Core – New – Page No. 677

Metric Units of Length

Complete.

Question 1.
4 meters = 400 centimeters
Think: 1 meter = 100 centimeters,
so 4 meters = 4 × 100 centimeters, or 400 centimeters

Question 2.
8 centimeters = ______ millimeters

Answer: 80 millimeters

Explanation:

1 centimeter = 10 millimeters
8 centimeters = 8 × 10 millimeters = 80 millimeters
8 centimeters = 80 millimeters

Question 3.
5 meters = ______ decimeters

Answer: 50 decimeters

Explanation:

We have to convert meters into decimeters
1 meter = 10 decimeters
5 meters = 5 × 10 decimeters = 50 decimeters
5 meters = 50 decimeters

Question 4.
9 meters = ______ millimeters

Answer: 9000 millimeters

Explanation:

You need to convert meters into millimeters
1 meter = 1000 millimeters
9 meters = 9 × 1000 millimeters = 9000 millimeters
9 meters = 9000 millimeters

Question 5.
7 meters = ______ centimeters

Answer: 700 centimeters

Explanation:

Convert meters into centimeters
1 meter = 100 centimeters
7 meters = 7 × 100 centimeters = 700 centimeters
7 meters = 700 centimeters

Compare using <, >, or =.

Question 6.
8 meters ______ 80 centimeters

Answer: 8 meters > 80 centimeters

Explanation:

1 meter = 100 centimeters
8 meters = 800 centimeters
800 centimeters is greater than 80 centimeters
8 meters > 80 centimeters

Question 7.
3 decimeters ______ 30 centimeters

Answer: 3 decimeters = 30 centimeters

Explanation:

1 decimeter = 10 centimeters
3 decimeters = 3 × 10 centimeters = 30 centimeters
So, 3 decimeters = 30 centimeters

Question 8.
4 meters ______ 450 centimeters

Answer: 4 meters < 450 centimeters

Explanation:

1 meter = 100 centimeters
4 meters = 400 centimeters
400 centimeters < 450 centimeters
So, 4 meters < 450 centimeters

Question 9.
90 centimeters ______ 9 millimeters

Answer: 90 centimeters > 9 millimeters

Explanation:

1 millimeter = 1/10 centimeters
9 millimeters = 1/90 centimeters
So, 90 centimeters > 9 millimeters

Describe the length in meters. Write your answer as a fraction and as a decimal.

Question 10.
43 centimeters =
Type below:
________

Answer: \(\frac{43}{100}\), 0.43

Explanation:

The fraction of 43 centimeters is \(\frac{43}{100}\). the decimal form of \(\frac{43}{100}\) is 0.43

Question 11.
6 decimeters =
Type below:
________

Answer: \(\frac{6}{10}\), 0.6

Explanation:

The fraction form of 6 decimeters is \(\frac{6}{10}\) and the decimal for the fraction is 0.6

Question 12.
8 centimeters =
Type below:
________

Answer: \(\frac{8}{100}\), 0.08

Explanation:

The fraction form of 8 centimeters is \(\frac{8}{100}\). The decimal for the fraction of \(\frac{8}{100}\) is 0.08

Question 13.
3 decimeters =
Type below:
________

Answer: \(\frac{3}{10}\), 0.3

Explanation:

The fraction of 3 decimeters is \(\frac{3}{10}\) and the decimal for the 3 decimeters is 0.3

Problem Solving

Question 14.
A flagpole is 4 meters tall. How many centimeters tall is the flagpole?
_____ centimeters

Answer: 400 centimeters

Explanation:

A flagpole is 4 meters tall.
Now we have to convert the meters into centimeters.
We know that
1 meter = 100 centimeters
4 meters = 4 × 100 centimeters = 400 centimeters
Thus the height of the flagpole is 400 centimeters

Question 15.
A new building is 25 meters tall. How many decimeters tall is the building?
_____ decimeters

Answer: 250 decimeters

Explanation:

A new building is 25 meters tall.
We know that 1 meter = 10 decimeters
25 meters = 25 × 10 decimeters = 250 decimeters
The height of the building is 250 decimeters.

Common Core – New – Page No. 678

Lesson Check

Question 1.
A pencil is 15 centimeters long. How many millimeters long is that pencil?
Options:
a. 1.5 millimeters
b. 15 millimeters
c. 150 millimeters
d. 1,500 millimeters

Answer: 150 millimeters

Explanation:

A pencil is 15 centimeters long
1 centimeter = 10 millimeters
15 centimeters = 15 × 10 millimeters = 150 millimeters
15 centimeters = 150 millimeters
So, the correct answer is option C.

Question 2.
John’s father is 2 meters tall. How many centimeters tall is John’s father?
Options:
a. 2,000 centimeters
b. 200 centimeters
c. 20 centimeters
d. 2 centimeters

Answer: 200 centimeters

Explanation:

John’s father is 2 meters tall.
Convert meters to centimeters.
1 meter = 100 centimeters
2 meters = 2 × 100 centimeters = 200 centimeters
The correct answer is option B.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Bruce reads for \(\frac{3}{4}\) hour each night. How long will he read in 4 nights?
Options:
a. \(\frac{3}{16}\)hours
b. \(\frac{7}{4}\) hours
c. \(\frac{9}{4}\) hours
d. \(\frac{12}{4}\) hours

Answer: \(\frac{12}{4}\) hours

Explanation:

Bruce reads for \(\frac{3}{4}\) hour each night.
Multiply latex]\frac{3}{4}[/latex] hour with 4 = latex]\frac{3}{4}[/latex] × 4 = \(\frac{12}{4}\) hours
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 4.
Mark jogged 0.6 mile. Caroline jogged 0.49 mile. Which inequality correctly compares the distances they jogged?
Options:
a. 0.6 = 0.49
b. 0.6 > 0.49
c. 0.6 < 0.49
d. 0.6 + 0.49 = 1.09

Answer: 0.6 > 0.49

Explanation:

Mark jogged 0.6 mile. Caroline jogged 0.49 mile.
0.49 miles is less than 0.6 miles
So, the correct answer is option B.

Use the line plot for 5 and 6.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 44

Question 5.
How many lawns were mowed?
Options:
a. 8
b. 9
c. 10
d. 11

Answer: 11

Explanation:

The line plot shows that the total number lawns = 11
The correct answer is option D.

Question 6.
What is the difference between the greatest amount and the least amount of gasoline used to mow lawns?
Options:
a. \(\frac{6}{8}\) gallon
b. \(\frac{5}{8}\) gallon
c. \(\frac{4}{8}\) gallon
d. \(\frac{3}{8}\) gallon

Answer: \(\frac{4}{8}\) gallon

Explanation:

The greatest amount of gasoline used to mow lawns = \(\frac{5}{8}\)
The least amount of gasoline used to mow lawns = \(\frac{1}{8}\)
\(\frac{5}{8}\) – \(\frac{1}{8}\) = \(\frac{4}{8}\) gallon
The correct answer is option C.

Page No. 680

Question 1.
There are 3 liters of water in a pitcher. How many milliliters of water are in the pitcher?
There are _____ milliliters in 1 liter. Since I am changing from a larger unit to a smaller unit, I can _____ 3 by 1,000 to find the number of milliliters in 3 liters.
So, there are _____ milliliters of water in the pitcher.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 45

Answer: There are 1000 milliliters in 1 liter. Since I am changing from a larger unit to a smaller unit, I can multiply 3 by 1,000 to find the number of milliliters in 3 liters.
So, there are 3000 milliliters of water in the pitcher.

Complete.

Question 2.
4 liters = _____ milliliters

Answer: 4000 milliliters

Explanation:

1 liter = 1000 milliliters
4 liters = 4 × 1000 milliliters = 4000 milliliters
4 liters = 4000 milliliters

Question 3.
6 kilograms = _____ grams

Answer: 6000 grams

Explanation:

1 kilogram = 1000 grams
6 kilograms = 6 × 1000 grams = 6000 grams
6 kilograms = 6000 grams

Complete.

Question 4.
8 kilograms = _____ grams

Answer: 8000 grams

Explanation:

1 kilogram = 1000 grams
8 kilograms = 8 × 1000 grams = 8000 grams
8 kilograms = 8000 grams

Question 5.
7 liters = _____ milliliters

Answer: 7000 milliliters

Explanation:

1 liter = 1000 milliliters
7 liters = 7 × 1000 milliliters = 7000 milliliters
7 liters = 7000 milliliters

Use Symbols Algebra Compare using <, >, or =.

Question 6.
1 kilogram _____ 900 grams

Answer: 1 kilogram < 900 grams

Explanation:

1 kilogram = 1000 grams
1000 grams is less than 900 grams
1 kilogram < 900 grams

Question 7.
2 liters _____ 2,000 milliliters

Answer: 2 liters = 2,000 milliliters

Explanation:

1 liter = 1000 milliliters
2 liters = 2 × 1000 milliliters = 2000 liters
2 liters = 2,000 milliliters

Look for a Pattern Algebra Complete.

Question 8.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 46
Type below:
_________

Answer:

Liters Milliters
1 1,000
2 2 × 1,000 = 2,000
3 3 × 1,000 = 3,000
4 4 × 1,000 = 4,000
5 5 × 1,000 = 5,000
6 6 × 1,000 = 6,000
7 7 × 1,000 = 7,000
8 8 × 1,000 = 8,000
9 9 × 1,000 = 9,000
10 10 × 1,000 = 10,000

Question 9.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 47
Type below:
_________

Answer:

Kilograms Grams
1 1,000
2 2 × 1,000 = 2,000
3 3 × 1,000 = 3,000
4 4 × 1,000 = 4,000
5 5 × 1,000 = 5,000
6 6 × 1,000 = 6,000
7 7 × 1,000 = 7,000
8 8 × 1,000 = 8,000
9 9 × 1,000 = 9,000
10 10 × 1,000 = 10,000

Page No. 681

Question 10.
Frank wants to fill a fish tank with 8 liters of water. How many milliliters is that?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 48
_____ milliliters

Answer: 8000 milliliters

Explanation:

Frank wants to fill a fish tank with 8 liters of water.
Convert liters into milliliters.
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
8 liters = 8 × 1000 milliliters = 8000 milliliters

Question 11.
Kim has 3 water bottles. She fills each bottle with 1 liter of water. How many milliliters of water does she have?
_____ milliliters

Answer: 3000 milliliters

Explanation:

Kim has 3 water bottles. She fills each bottle with 1 liter of water.
Convert liters into milliliters.
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
3 liters = 3 × 1000 milliliters = 3,000 milliliters
She has 3000 milliliters of water.

Question 12.
Jared’s empty backpack has a mass of 3 kilograms. He doesn’t want to carry more than 7 kilograms on a trip. How many grams of equipment can Jared pack?
_____ grams

Answer: 4000 grams

Explanation:

Jared’s empty backpack has a mass of 3 kilograms.
He doesn’t want to carry more than 7 kilograms on a trip.
7 kilograms – 3 kilograms = 4 kilograms
Convert kilogram into grams
1 kilogram = 1000 grams
4 kilograms = 4 × 1000 grams = 4000 grams.
Jared can pack 4000 grams of equipment.

Question 13.
A large cooler contains 20 liters of iced tea and a small cooler contains 5 liters of iced tea. How many more milliliters of iced tea does the large cooler contain than the small cooler?
_____ milliliters

Answer: 15000 milliliters

Explanation:

A large cooler contains 20 liters of iced tea and a small cooler contains 5 liters of iced tea.
20 liters – 5 liters = 15 liters
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
15 liters = 15 × 1000 milliliters = 15,000 milliliters
The large cooler contain 15,000 milliliters than the small cooler.

Question 14.
A 500-gram bag of granola costs $4, and a 2-kilogram bag of granola costs $15. What is the least expensive way to buy 2,000 grams of granola? Explain.
Type below:
_________

Answer:
A 500-gram bag of granola costs $4, and a 2-kilogram bag of granola costs $15.
500-gram bag of granola costs $4
2000 grams = 4 × $4 = $16
2-kilogram bag of granola costs $15.
The Least expensive way to buy 2,000 grams of granola is $15.

Question 15.
Verify the Reasoning of Others The world’s largest apple had a mass of 1,849 grams. Sue said the mass was greater than 2 kilograms. Does Sue’s statement make sense? Explain.
Type below:
_________

Answer:

The world’s largest apple had a mass of 1,849 grams.
Sue said the mass was greater than 2 kilograms.
The statement of Sue doesn’t make sense. Because 1,849 grams is less than 2 kilograms.

Page No. 682

Question 16.
Lori bought 600 grams of cayenne pepper and 2 kilograms of black pepper. How many grams of pepper did she buy in all?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 49
a. What are you asked to find?
Type below:
_________

Answer: I am asked to find How many grams of pepper did Lori buy in all.

Question 16.
b. What information will you use?
Type below:
_________

Answer: Number of grams of black pepper and cayenne pepper.

Question 16.
c. Tell how you might solve the problem.
Type below:
_________

Answer: I will solve by adding the weight of both the peppers.

Question 16.
d. Show how you solved the problem.
Type below:
_________

Answer: I solved the problem by converting the kilograms into grams and then add the weight of both the peppers.

Question 16.
e. Complete the sentences.
Lori bought ______ grams of cayenne pepper.
She bought ______ grams of black pepper.
______ + ______ = ______ grams
So, Lori bought ______ grams of pepper in all.
Type below:
_________

Answer:

Lori bought 600 grams of cayenne pepper.
She bought 2000 grams of black pepper.
600 + 2000 = 2600
So, Lori bought 2600 grams of the pepper in all.

Question 17.
Jill has two rocks. One has a mass of 20 grams and the other has a mass of 20 kilograms. Which rock has the greater mass? Explain.
Type below:
_________

Answer:

Jill has two rocks. One has a mass of 20 grams and the other has a mass of 20 kilograms.
To find the greater mass of both the rocks. We have to compare the mass of two rocks.
20 grams is less than 20 kilograms.
The rock of 20 kilograms is having the greater mass.

Question 18.
For numbers 18a–18c, choose Yes or No to tell whether the measurements are equivalent.
a. 5,000 grams and 5 kilograms
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: Yes

Explanation:

1 kilogram = 1000 grams
5 kilograms = 5 × 1000 grams = 5000 grams
So, the above statement is true.

Question 18.
b. 300 milliliters and 3 liters
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: No

Explanation:

1 liter = 1000 milliliters
3 liters = 3000 milliliters
So, the above statement is false.

Question 18.
c. 8 grams and 8,000 kilograms
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: Yes

Explanation:

1 kilogram = 1000 grams
8 kilograms = 8 × 1000 grams = 8000 grams
So, the above statement is true.

Common Core – New – Page No. 683

Metric Units of Mass and Liquid Volume

Complete.

Question 1.
5 liters = 5,000 milliliters
Think: 1 liter 5 1,000 milliliters,
so 5 liters 5 5 × 1,000 milliliters, or 5,000 milliliters

Question 2.
3 kilograms = _____ grams

Answer: 3000 grams

Explanation:

Convert kilograms into grams
1 kilogram = 1000 grams
3 kilograms = 3 × 1000 grams = 3000 grams
3 kilograms = 3000 grams

Question 3.
8 liters = _____ milliliters

Answer: 8000 milliliters

Explanation:

Convert liters to milliliters
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
8 liters = 8 × 1000 milliliters = 8000 milliliters
8 liters = 8000 milliliters

Question 4.
7 kilograms = _____ grams

Answer: 7000 grams

Explanation:

Convert kilograms into grams
1 kilogram = 1000 grams
7 kilograms = 7 × 1000 grams = 7000 grams
7 kilograms = 7000 grams

Question 5.
9 liters = _____ milliliters

Answer: 9000 milliliters

Explanation:

Convert liters to milliliters
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
9 liters = 9 × 1000 milliliters = 9000 milliliters
9 liters = 9000 milliliters

Question 6.
2 liters = _____ milliliters

Answer: 2000 milliliters

Explanation:

Convert liters to milliliters
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
2 liters = 2 × 1000 milliliters = 2000 milliliters
2 liters = 2000 milliliters

Question 7.
6 kilograms = _____ grams

Answer: 6000 grams

Explanation:

Convert kilograms into grams
1 kilogram = 1000 grams
6 kilograms = 6 × 1000 grams = 6000 grams
6 kilograms = 6000 grams

Compare using <, >, or =.

Question 8.
8 kilograms _____ 850 grams

Answer: 8 kilograms > 850 grams

Explanation:

1 kilogram = 1000 grams
8 kilograms = 8 × 1000 grams = 8000 grams
8000 grams is greater than 850 grams
So, 8 kilograms > 850 grams

Question 9.
3 liters _____ 3,500 milliliters

Answer: 3 liters < 3,500 milliliters

Explanation:

Convert liters to milliliters
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
3 liters = 3 × 1000 milliliters = 3000 milliliters
3000 milliliters is less than 3,500 milliliters
Thus, 3 liters < 3,500 milliliters

Question 10.
1 kilogram _____ 1,000 grams

Answer: 1 kilogram = 1,000 grams

Explanation:

1 kilogram = 1000 grams
The symbol the above statement is 1 kilogram = 1,000 grams

Question 11.
5 liters _____ 520 milliliters

Answer: 5 liters > 520 milliliters

Explanation:

Convert liters to milliliters
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
5 liters = 5 × 1000 milliliters = 5000 milliliters
5000 milliliters is greater than 520 milliliters
5 liters > 520 milliliters

Problem Solving

Question 12.
Kenny buys four 1-liter bottles of water. How many milliliters of water does Kenny buy?
_____ milliliters

Answer: 4000 milliliters

Explanation:

Kenny buys four 1-liter bottles of water.
4 × 1-liter = 4 liters
Kenny buys 4-liter bottles
Now convert liters into milliliters
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
4 liters = 4 × 1000 milliliters = 4000 milliliters
Kenny bought 4000 milliliters of water.

Question 13.
Mrs. Jones bought three 2-kilogram packages of flour. How many grams of flour did she buy?
_____ grams

Answer: 6000 grams

Explanation:

Mrs. Jones bought three 2-kilogram packages of flour.
That means she buys 6 kilograms of flour.
1 kilogram = 1000 grams
6 kilograms = 6 × 1000 grams = 6000 grams
Mrs. Jones bought 6000 grams of flour.

Question 14.
Colleen bought 8 kilograms of apples and 2.5 kilograms of pears. How many more grams of apples than pears did she buy?
_____ grams

Answer: 5500 grams

Explanation:

Colleen bought 8 kilograms of apples and 2.5 kilograms of pears.
1 kilogram = 1000 grams
8 kilograms = 8 × 1000 grams = 8000 grams
2.5 kilograms = 2.5 × 1000 grams = 2500 grams
8000 grams – 2500 grams = 5500 grams
That means Collen bought 5500 grams of apples than pears.

Question 15.
Dave uses 500 milliliters of juice for a punch recipe. He mixes it with 2 liters of ginger ale. How many milliliters of punch does he make?
_____ milliliters

Answer: 2500 milliliters

Explanation:

Dave uses 500 milliliters of juice for a punch recipe. He mixes it with 2 liters of ginger ale.
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
2 liters = 2 × 1000 milliliters = 2000 milliliters
Add 2000 milliliters from 500 milliliters
2000 milliliters + 500 milliliters = 2500 milliliters
Dave made 2500 milliliters of punch.

Common Core – New – Page No. 684

Lesson Check

Question 1.
During his hike, Milt drank 1 liter of water and 1 liter of sports drink. How many milliliters of liquid did he drink in all?
Options:
a. 20 milliliters
b. 200 milliliters
c. 2,000 milliliters
d. 20,000 milliliters

Answer: 2,000 milliliters

Explanation:

Given,
During his hike, Milt drank 1 liter of water and 1 liter of sports drink.
we have to convert liters into milliliters.
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
2 liters = 2 × 1000 milliliters = 2000 milliliters.
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 2.
Larinda cooked a 4-kilogram roast. The roast left over after the meal weighed 3 kilograms. How many grams of roast were eaten during that meal?
Options:
a. 7,000 grams
b. 1,000 grams
c. 700 grams
d. 100 grams

Answer: 1,000 grams

Explanation:

Given that,
Larinda cooked a 4-kilogram roast.
The roast leftover after the meal weighed 3 kilograms.
4 kilogram – 3 kilogram = 1kilogram
Convert kilograms into grams.
1 kilogram = 1000 grams
So, the correct answer is option B.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Use a protractor to find the angle measure.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 50
Options:
a. 15°
b. 35°
c. 135°
d. 145°

Answer: 145°

Explanation:

By using the protractor we can measure the unknown angle for the above figure.
The angle for the above figure is 145°
The correct answer is option D.

Question 4.
Which of the following shows parallel lines?
Options:
a. Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 51
b. Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 52
c. Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 53
d.Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 54

Answer: Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 53

Non-intersecting lines are known as parallel lines. From the above figures, we can that option c has non intersecting lines.
So, the correct answer is option C.

Question 5.
Carly bought 3 pounds of birdseed. How many ounces of birdseed did she buy?
Options:
a. 30 ounces
b. 36 ounces
c. 42 ounces
d. 48 ounces

Answer: 48 ounces

Explanation:

Carly bought 3 pounds of birdseed.
Convert the pounds into ounces.
1 pound = 16 ounces
3 pounds = 3 × 16 ounces = 48 ounces.
Thus Carly bought 48 ounces of birdseed.
The correct answer is option D.

Question 6.
A door is 8 decimeters wide. How wide is the door in centimeters?
Options:
a. 8 centimeters
b. 80 centimeters
c. 800 centimeters
d. 8,000 centimeters

Answer: 80 centimeters

Explanation:

A door is 8 decimeters wide.
1 decimeter = 10 centimeters
8 decimeters = 8 × 10 centimeters = 80 centimeters
The door is 80 centimeters wide.
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Page No. 687

Question 1.
Compare the length of a year to the length of a month.
Use a model to help.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 55
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 56
1 year is _____ times as long as _____ month.
Type below:
_______

Answer: 1 year is 12 times as long as 1 month.

Complete.

Question 2.
2 minutes = _____ seconds

Answer: 120 seconds

Explanation:

Convert minutes to seconds.
1 minute = 60 seconds
2 minutes = 2 × 60 seconds = 120 seconds
2 minutes = 120 seconds

Question 3.
4 years = _____ months

Answer: 48 months

Explanation:

Convert year to months
1 year = 12 months
4 years = 4 × 12 months = 48 months
So, 4 years = 48 months

Complete.

Question 4.
3 minutes = _____ seconds

Answer: 180 seconds

Explanation:

Convert minutes to seconds.
1 minute = 60 seconds
3 minutes = 3 × 60 seconds = 180 seconds
So, 3 minutes = 180 seconds

Question 5.
4 hours = _____ minutes

Answer: 240 minutes

Explanation:

Convert hours to minutes
1 hour = 60 minutes
4 hours = 4 × 60 minutes = 240 minutes
4 hours = 240 minutes

Use Symbols Algebra Compare using >, <, or =.

Question 6.
3 years _____ 35 months

Answer: 3 years > 35 months

Explanation:

First of all, you need to convert years to minutes
1 year = 12 months
3 years = 3 × 12 months = 36 months
36 months is greater than 35 months
Thus 3 years > 35 months

Question 7.
2 days _____ 40 hours

Answer: 2 days > 40 hours

Explanation:

Convert days to hours
1 day = 24 hours
2 days = 2 × 24 hours = 48 hours
48 is greater than 40.
So, 2 days > 40 hours

Question 8.
Damien has lived in the apartment building for 5 years. Ken has lived there for 250 weeks. Who has lived in the building longer? Explain. Make a table to help.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 57
_____

Answer:

Given that, Damien has lived in the apartment building for 5 years. Ken has lived there for 250 weeks.

Year Weeks
1 52
2 104
3 156
4 208
5 260

Damien has lived in the building longer.

Question 9.
How many hours are in a week? Explain.
_____ hours

Answer: 168 hours

Explanation:

Convert week to hours
1 day = 24 hours
1 week = 7 days
7 days = 7 × 24 hours = 168 hours
Therefore there are 168 hours in a week.

Page No. 688

Question 10.
Communicate Explain how you know that 9 minutes is less than 600 seconds.
Type below:
________

Answer:

First, convert minutes to seconds
We know that,
1 minute = 60 seconds
9 minutes = 9 × 60 seconds = 540 seconds.
540 is less than 600 seconds.
Therefore 9 minutes is less than 600 seconds.

Question 11.
Draw lines to match equivalent time intervals. Some intervals might not have a match.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 58
Type below:
________

Answer:

Go-Math-Grade-4-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Relative-Sizes-of-Measurement-Units-img-58

One day is the length of time it takes Earth to make one complete rotation. One year is the time it takes Earth to revolve around the sun. To make the calendar match Earth’s orbit time, there are leap years. Leap years add one extra day to the year. A leap day, February 29, is added to the calendar every four years.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 59
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 60

Question 12.
How many days are there in 4 years, if the fourth year is a leap year? Explain. Make a table to help.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 61
_____ days

Answer:

Year Days
1 365
2 730
3 1095
4 1460
5 1825

Question 13.
Parker was born on February 29, 2008. The second time he is able to celebrate on his actual birthday is in 2016. How many days old will Parker be on February 29, 2016?
_____ days

Answer: 2922 days

Explanation:

Parker was born on February 29, 2008.
The second time he is able to celebrate on his actual birthday is in 2016.
Parker was 8 years old.
There are 2 leap years out of 8 years. There are 366 days in a leap year = 366 × 2 = 732
And multiply 6 years with 365 = 365 × 6 = 2190
2190+ 732 = 2920 days.
Parker will be 2920 days old on February 29, 2016.

Common Core – New – Page No. 689

Units of Time

Complete.

Question 1.
6 minutes = 360 seconds
Think: 1 minute = 60 seconds,
so 6 minutes = 6 × 60 seconds, or 360 seconds

Question 2.
5 weeks = ____ days

Answer: 35 days

Explanation:

1 week = 7 days
5 weeks = 5 × 7 days = 35 days
5 weeks = 35 days

Question 3.
3 years = ____ weeks

Answer: 156 weeks

Explanation:

Convert years to weeks.
1 year = 52 weeks
3 years = 3 × 52 weeks = 156 weeks
3 years = 156 weeks.

Question 4.
9 hours = ____ minutes

Answer: 540 minutes

Explanation:

Convert hours into minutes.
1 hour = 60 minutes
9 hours = 9 × 60 minutes = 540 minutes
9 hours = 540 minutes

Question 5.
9 minutes = ____ seconds

Answer: 540 seconds

Explanation:

Convert minutes to seconds.
1 minute = 60 seconds
9 minutes = 9 × 60 seconds = 540 seconds
9 minutes = 540 seconds

Question 6.
5 years = ____ months

Answer: 60 months

Explanation:

Convert years to months
1 year = 12 months
5 years = 5 × 12 months = 60 months
5 years = 60 months

Question 7.
7 days = ____ hours

Answer: 168 hours

Explanation:

Convert days to hours.
1 day = 24 hours
7 days = 7 × 24 hours = 168 hours
7 days = 168 hours

Compare using <, >, or =.

Question 8.
2 years ____ 14 months

Answer: 2 years > 14 months

Explanation:

Convert years to months
1 year = 12 months
2 years = 2 × 12 months = 24 months
24 months is greater than 14 months.
So, 2 years > 14 months

Question 9.
3 hours ____ 300 minutes

Answer: 3 hours < 300 minutes

Explanation:

1 hour = 60 minutes
3 hours = 3 × 60 minutes = 180 minutes.
180 is less than 300 minutes.
So, 3 hours < 300 minutes

Question 10.
2 days ____ 48 hours

Answer: 2 days = 48 hours

Explanation:

Convert days to hours
1 day = 24 hours
2 days = 2 × 24 hours = 48 hours
So, 2 days = 48 hours

Question 11.
6 years ____ 300 weeks

Answer: 6 years > 300 weeks

Explanation:

Convert years to weeks.
1 year = 52 weeks
6 years = 6 × 52 weeks = 312 weeks
312 weeks is greater than 300 weeks.
So, 6 years > 300 weeks.

Question 12.
4 hours ____ 400 minutes

Answer: 4 hours < 400 minutes

Explanation:

Convert hours to minutes
1 hour = 60 minutes
4 hours = 4 × 60 minutes = 240 minutes
240 minutes is less than 400 minutes
4 hours < 400 minutes

Question 13.
5 minutes ____ 300 seconds

Answer: 5 minutes = 300 seconds

Explanation:

Convert minutes to seconds.
1 minute = 60 seconds
5 minutes = 5 × 60 seconds = 300 seconds
5 minutes = 300 seconds

Problem Solving

Question 14.
Jody practiced a piano piece for 500 seconds. Bill practiced a piano piece for 8 minutes. Who practiced longer?
_________

Answer: Jody

Explanation:

Jody practiced a piano piece for 500 seconds.
Bill practiced a piano piece for 8 minutes.
First, convert minutes to seconds.
8 × 60 seconds = 480 seconds
480 seconds is less than 500 seconds.
So, Jody practiced for a longer time.

Question 15.
Yvette’s younger brother just turned 3 years old. Fred’s brother is now 30 months old. Whose brother is older?
_________ ‘s brother

Answer: Yvette’s

Explanation:

Yvette’s younger brother just turned 3 years old.
Fred’s brother is now 30 months old.
Convert years to months.
1 year = 12 months
3 years = 3 × 12 months = 36 months
36 months is more than 30 months.
So, Yvette’s brother is older than Fred’s brother.

Common Core – New – Page No. 690

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Glen rode his bike for 2 hours. For how many minutes did Glen ride his bike?
Options:
a. 60 minutes
b. 100 minutes
c. 120 minutes
d. 150 minutes

Answer: 120 minutes

Explanation:

Glen rode his bike for 2 hours.
Convert hours to minutes.
1 hour = 60 minutes
2 hours = 2 × 60 minutes = 120 minutes.
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 2.
Tina says that vacation starts in exactly 4 weeks. In how many days does vacation start?
Options:
a. 28 days
b. 35 days
c. 42 days
d. 48 days

Answer: 28 days

Explanation:

Tina says that vacation starts in exactly 4 weeks.
Convert weeks to days.
1 week = 7 days
4 weeks = 4 × 7 days = 28 days
So, the correct answer is option A.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Kayla bought \(\frac{9}{4}\) pounds of apples. What is that weight as a mixed number?
Options:
a. 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) pounds
b. 1 \(\frac{4}{9}\) pounds
c. 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) pounds
d. 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\) pounds

Answer: 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) pounds

Explanation:

Kayla bought \(\frac{9}{4}\) pounds of apples.
The mixed fraction of \(\frac{9}{4}\) is 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) pounds.
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 4.
Judy, Jeff, and Jim each earned $5.40 raking leaves. How much did they earn in all?
Options:
a. $1.60
b. $10.80
c. $15.20
d. $16.20

Answer: $16.20

Explanation:

Judy, Jeff, and Jim each earned $5.40 raking leaves.
= 3 × $5.40 = $16.20
They earned $16.20 in all.
The correct answer is option D.

Question 5.
Melinda rode her bike \(\frac{54}{100}\) mile to the library. Then she rode \(\frac{4}{10}\) mile to the store. How far did Melinda ride her bike in all?
Options:
a. 0.14 mile
b. 0.58 mile
c. 0.94 mile
d. 1.04 miles

Answer: 0.94 mile

Explanation:

Melinda rode her bike \(\frac{54}{100}\) mile to the library.
Then she rode \(\frac{4}{10}\)mile to the store.
The decimal form of \(\frac{54}{100}\) is 0.54 mile
The decimal form of \(\frac{4}{10}\) is 0.40 mile
0.54 + 0.40 = 0.94 mile
Thus the answer is option C.

Question 6.
One day, the students drank 60 quarts of milk at lunch. How many pints of milk did the students drink?
Options:
a. 30 pints
b. 120 pints
c. 240 pints
d. 480 pints

Answer: 120 pints

Explanation:

One day, the students drank 60 quarts of milk at lunch.
1 quart = 2 pints
60 quarts = 60 × 2 pints = 120 pints
The correct answer is option B.

Page No. 693

Question 1.
Evelyn has dance class every Saturday. It lasts 1 hour and 15 minutes and is over at 12:45 p.m. At what time does Evelyn’s dance class begin?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 62
First, write the problem you need to solve.
Type below:
________

Answer: I need to find when Evelyn’s dance class begins.

Question 1.
Next, draw a time line to show the end time and the elapsed time.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 63
Type below:
________

Answer:

Question 1.
Finally, find the start time.
Evelyn’s dance class begins at _________ .
______ A.M.

Answer: 11:30 A.M.

Explanation:

Evelyn has dance class every Saturday. It lasts 1 hour and 15 minutes and is over at 12:45 p.m.
12 hr 45 minutes
-1 hr 15 minutes
11 hr 30 minutes

Thus Evelyn dance class starts at 11:30 A.M.

Question 2.
What if Evelyn’s dance class started at 11:00 a.m. and lasted 1 hour and 25 minutes? At what time would her class end? Describe how this problem is different from Problem 1.
Type below:
________

Answer: 12:25 P.M.

Explanation:

If Evelyn’s dance class started at 11:00 a.m. and lasted 1 hour and 25 minutes.
Then the class ends at 12:25 P.M.
11 hours 0 minutes
+1 hour 25 minutes
12 hour 25 minutes

Question 3.
Beth got on the bus at 8:06 a.m. Thirty-five minutes later, she arrived at school. At what time did Beth arrive at school?
______ a.m.

Answer: 8:41 A.M.

Explanation:

Beth got on the bus at 8:06 a.m.
Thirty-five minutes later, she arrived at school.
8 hour 06 minutes
+ 0 hour 35 minutes
8 hour 41 minutes

Beth arrived to school at 8:41 A.M.

Question 4.
Lyle went fishing for 1 hour and 30 minutes until he ran out of bait at 6:40 p.m. At what time did Lyle start fishing?
______ p.m.

Answer: 5:10 P.M.

Explanation:

Lyle went fishing for 1 hour and 30 minutes until he ran out of bait at 6:40 p.m.
Subtract 1 hour and 30 minutes from 6:40 p.m.
6 hour 40 minutes
-1 hour 30 minutes
5 hour 10 minutes

Lyle starts fishing at 5:10 P.M.

Page No. 694

Question 5.
Mike and Jed went skiing at 10:30 a.m. They skied for 1 hour and 55 minutes before stopping for lunch. At what time did Mike and Jed stop for lunch?
______ p.m

Answer: 12:25 P.M.

Explanation:

Mike and Jed went skiing at 10:30 a.m.
They skied for 1 hour and 55 minutes before stopping for lunch.
Add 1 hour and 55 minutes to 10:30 a.m
10 hour 30 minutes
+1 hour 55 minutes
12 hour 25 minutes
= 12:25 P.M.
Mike and Jed stop for lunch at 12:25 P.M.

Question 6.
Mike can run a mile in 12 minutes. He starts his run at 11:30 am. and runs 4 miles. What time does Mike finish his run?
_____ : _____  _____

Answer: 12:18 P.M

Explanation:

Mike can run a mile in 12 minutes. He starts his run at 11:30 am. and runs 4 miles.
1 mile = 12 minutes
4 miles = 4 × 12 minutes = 48 minutes
Add 48 minutes to 11:30 A.M.
11 hour 30 minutes
0 hour 48 minutes
12 hour 18 minutes

Mike finish his run at 12:18 P.M.

Question 7.
Communicate Explain how you can use a diagram to determine the start time when the end time is 9:00 a.m. and the elapsed time is 26 minutes. What is the start time?
______ a.m.

Answer: 8:34 A.M.

Explanation:

End time = 9:00 A.M.
Elapsed time = 26 minutes
Subtract 26 minutes from 9 hours.
9 hour 00 minutes
-0 hour 26 minutes
8 hour 34 minutes
So, the start time is 8:34 A.M.

Question 8.
Bethany finished her math homework at 4:20 p.m. She did 25 multiplication problems in all. If each problem took her 3 minutes to do, at what time did Bethany start her math homework?
______ p.m.

Answer: 3:05 P.M.

Explanation:

Bethany finished her math homework at 4:20 p.m. She did 25 multiplication problems in all.
If she took 3 minutes to solve each problem then multiply 25 with 3
25 × 3 = 75 minutes = 1 hour 15 minutes
Subtract 1 hour 15 minutes from 4:20 P.M.
4 hour 20 minutes
-1 hour 15 minutes
3 hour 05 minutes

Therefore Bethany started her math homework at 3:05 P.M.

Question 9.
Vincent began his weekly chores on Saturday morning at 11:20 a.m. He finished 1 hour and 10 minutes later. Draw a time line to show the end time.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 64
Vincent finished his chores at _______ p.m.
______ p.m.

Answer: 12:30 P.M.

Explanation:

Vincent began his weekly chores on Saturday morning at 11:20 a.m. He finished 1 hour and 10 minutes later.
Add 1 hour 10 minutes to 11:20 A.M.
11 hour 20 minutes
+1 hour 10 minutes
12 hour 30 minutes
Thus the Endtime is 12:30 P.M.

Common Core – New – Page No. 695

Problem Solving Elapsed Time

Read each problem and solve.

Question 1.
Molly started her piano lesson at 3:45 P.M. The lesson lasted 20 minutes. What time did the piano lesson end?
Think: What do I need to find?
How can I draw a diagram to help?
4:05 P.M.

Question 2.
Brendan spent 24 minutes playing a computer game. He stopped playing at 3:55 P.M and went outside to ride his bike. What time did he start playing the computer game?
______ P.M.

Answer: 3:31 P.M

Explanation:

Brendan spent 24 minutes playing a computer game.
He stopped playing at 3:55 P.M and went outside to ride his bike.
You need to subtract 24 minutes from 3:55 P.M. = 3:31 P.M.

Question 3.
Aimee’s karate class lasts 1 hour and 15 minutes and is over at 5:00 P.M. What time does Aimee’s karate class start?
______ P.M.

Answer: 3:45 P.M

Explanation:

Aimee’s karate class lasts 1 hour and 15 minutes and is over at 5:00 P.M.
You need to subtract 1 hour 15 minutes from 5:00 P.M = 5:00 – 1:15 = 3:45 P.M.
Aimee’s karate class started at 3:45 P.M.

Question 4.
Mr. Giarmo left for work at 7:15 A.M. Twenty-five minutes later, he arrived at his work. What time did Mr. Giarmo arrive at his work?
______ A.M.

Answer: 7:40 A.M.

Explanation:

Mr. Giarmo left for work at 7:15 A.M.
Twenty-five minutes later, he arrived at his work.
Add 25 minutes to 7:15 A.M. = 7:40 A.M.
Mr. Giarmo arrived at his work at 7:40 A.M.

Question 5.
Ms. Brown’s flight left at 9:20 A.M. Her plane landed 1 hour and 23 minutes later. What time did her plane land?
______ A.M.

Answer: 10:43 A.M.

Explanation:

Ms. Brown’s flight left at 9:20 A.M.
Her plane landed 1 hour and 23 minutes later.
Add 1 hour and 23 minutes to 9:20 A.M = 10:43 A.M.
Her plane landed at 10:43 A.M.

Common Core – New – Page No. 696

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Bobbie went snowboarding with friends at 10:10 A.M. They snowboarded for 1 hour and 43 minutes, and then stopped to eat lunch. What time did they stop for lunch?
Options:
a. 8:27 A.M.
b. 10:53 A.M.
c. 11:53 A.M.
d. 12:53 A.M.

Answer: 11:53 A.M.

Explanation:

Bobbie went snowboarding with friends at 10:10 A.M.
They snowboarded for 1 hour and 43 minutes and then stopped to eat lunch.
Add 1 hour and 43 minutes to 10:10 A.M. = 11:53 A.M.
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 2.
The Cain family drove for 1 hour and 15 minutes and arrived at their camping spot at 3:44 P.M. What time did the Cain family start driving?
Options:
a. 4:59 P.M.
b. 2:44 P.M.
c. 2:39 P.M.
d. 2:29 P.M.

Answer: 2:29 P.M.

Explanation:

The Cain family drove for 1 hour and 15 minutes and arrived at their camping spot at 3:44 P.M.
Subtract 1 hour and 15 minutes from 3:44 P.M
3:44 P.M. – 1:15 = 2:29 P.M.
The correct answer is option D.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
A praying mantis can grow up to 15 centimeters long. How long is this in millimeters?
Options:
a. 15 millimeters
b. 150 millimeters
c. 1,500 millimeters
d. 15,000 millimeters

Answer: 150 millimeters

Explanation:

A praying mantis can grow up to 15 centimeters long.
Convert centimeters to millimeters
1 centimeter = 10 millimeters
15 centimeters = 15 × 10 millimeters = 150 millimeters
The correct answer is option B.

Question 4.
Thom’s minestrone soup recipe makes 3 liters of soup. How many milliliters of soup is this?
Options:
a. 30 milliliters
b. 300 milliliters
c. 3,000 milliliters
d. 30,000 milliliters

Answer: 3,000 milliliters

Explanation:

Thom’s minestrone soup recipe makes 3 liters of soup.
Convert liters to milliliters.
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
3 liters = 3 × 1000 milliliters = 3,000 milliliters
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 5.
Stewart walks \(\frac{2}{3}\) mile each day. Which is a multiple of \(\frac{2}{3}\) ?
Options:
a. \(\frac{4}{3}\)
b. \(\frac{4}{6}\)
c. \(\frac{8}{10}\)
d. \(\frac{2}{12}\)

Answer: \(\frac{4}{6}\)

Explanation:

Stewart walks \(\frac{2}{3}\) mile each day.
\(\frac{2}{3}\) × \(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{4}{6}\)
The correct answer is option B.

Question 6.
Angelica colored in 0.60 of the squares on her grid. Which of the following expresses 0.60 as tenths in fraction form?
Options:
a. \(\frac{60}{100}\)
b. \(\frac{60}{10}\)
c. \(\frac{6}{100}\)
d. \(\frac{6}{10}\)

Answer: \(\frac{6}{10}\)

Explanation:

Angelica colored in 0.60 of the squares on her grid.
The fraction of 0.60 is \(\frac{6}{10}\)
The correct answer is option D.

Page No. 699

Question 1.
A truck is carrying 2 tons 500 pounds of steel. How many pounds of steel is the truck carrying?
Think of 2 tons 500 pounds as 2 tons + 500 pounds.
Write tons as pounds.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 65
So, the truck is carrying _____ pounds of steel.
______ pounds

Answer: 4,500 pounds

Explanation:

A truck is carrying 2 tons 500 pounds of steel.
Before you add convert tons to pounds.
1 ton = 2000 pounds
2 tons = 2 × 2000 pounds = 4000 pounds
4000 pounds
+500 pounds
4500 pounds
So, the truck is carrying 4500 pounds of steel.

Rewrite each measure in the given unit.

Question 2.
1 yard 2 feet
______ feet

Answer: 5 feet

Explanation:

Convert yard to feet
1 yard = 3 feet
3 feet + 2 feet = 5 feet

Question 3.
3 pints 1 cup
______ cups

Answer: 7 cups

Explanation:

1 pint = 2 cups
3 pints = 3 × 2 cups = 6 cups
6 cups + 1 cup = 7 cups

Question 4.
3 weeks 1 day
______ days

Answer: 22 days

Explanation:

Convert weeks to days.
1 week = 7 days
3 weeks = 21 days
21 days + 1 day = 22 days.

Add or subtract.

Question 5.
2 lb 4 oz
+ 1 lb 6 oz
————–
_____ lb _____ oz

Answer: 3 lb 10 oz

Explanation:

Add 2 lb 4 oz and 1 lb 6 oz

2 lb 4 oz
+ 1 lb 6 oz
3 lb 10 oz

Question 6.
3 gal 2 qt
− 1 gal 3 qt
————–
_____ gal _____ qt

Answer: 1 gal 3 qt

Explanation:

Subtract 1 gal 3 qt from 3 gal 2 qt
Convert gallon to a quart and then borrow to 2 quarts = 6 quarts

3 gal 2 qt
− 1 gal 3 qt
1 gal 3 qt

Question 7.
5 hr 20 min
− 3 hr 15 min
—————–
_____ hr _____ min

Answer: 2 hr 5 min

Explanation:

Subtract 3 hr 15 min from 5 hr 20 min

5 hr 20 min
− 3 hr 15 min
2 hr 5 min

Rewrite each measure in the given unit.

Question 8.
1 hour 15 minutes
_____ minutes

Answer: 75 minutes

Explanation:

Convert hours to minutes.
1 hour = 60 minutes
60 minutes + 15 minutes = 75 minutes

Question 9.
4 quarts 2 pints
_____ pints

Answer: 10 pints

Explanation:

Convert quart to pints
1 quart = 2 pints
4 quarts = 8 pints
8 pints + 2 pints = 10 pints

Question 10.
10 feet 10 inches
_____ inches

Answer: 130 inches

Explanation:

Convert feet to inches
1 feet = 12 inches
10 feet = 10 × 12 inches = 120 inches
120 inches + 10 inches = 130 inches

Add or subtract.

Question 11.
2 tons 300 lb
– 1 ton 300 lb
—————–
_____ ton(s) _____ lb

Answer: 1ton

Explanation:

Subtract 1 ton 300 lb from 2 tons 300 lb

2 tons 300 lb
– 1 ton 300 lb
1ton 0 lb

Question 12.
10 gal 8 c
+ 8 gal 9 c
—————–
_____ gal _____ c

Answer: 19 gal 1 c

Explanation:

Add 10 gal 8 c and 8 gal 9 c
Convert cups to gallon
17 cups = 1 gal 1 cup

10 gal 8 c
+ 8 gal 9 c
18 gal 17 c = 19 gal 1 c

Question 13.
7 lb 6 oz
− 2 lb 12 oz
—————–
_____ lb _____ oz

Answer: 4 lb 10 oz

Explanation:

Subtract 2 lb 12 oz from 7 lb 6 oz
1 lb = 16 oz
Borrow 16 oz to ones place.
7 lb 6 oz

6 lb 22 oz
− 2 lb 12 oz
4 lb 10 oz

Question 14.
Apply Ahmed fills 6 pitchers with juice. Each pitcher contains 2 quarts 1 pint. How many pints of juice does he have in all?
_____ pints of juice

Answer: 30 pints of juice

Explanation:

Apply Ahmed fills 6 pitchers with juice. Each pitcher contains 2 quarts 1 pint.
Convert quarts to pints.
1 quart = 2 pint
2 quarts = 2 × 2 pint = 4 pints
2 quarts 1 pint = 4 pints + 1 pint = 5 pints
5 pints × 6 pitchers = 30 pints of juice.

Question 15.
Sense or Nonsense? Sam and Dave each solve the problem at the right. Sam says the sum is 4 feet 18 inches. Dave says the sum is 5 feet 6 inches. Whose answer makes sense? Whose answer is nonsense? Explain.
2 ft 10 in.
+ 2 ft 8 in.
—————-
Type below:
_________

Answer: The answer of Dave and Sam makes sense. Because 4 feet 18 inches and 5 feet 6 inches are the same.
Convert feet to inches
1 feet = 12 inches
4 feet 18 inches = 5 feet 6 inches.

Question 16.
Jackson has a rope 1 foot 8 inches long. He cuts it into 4 equal pieces. How many inches long is each piece?
______ inches

Answer: 5 inches

Explanation:

Jackson has a rope 1 foot 8 inches long. He cuts it into 4 equal pieces.
Convert feet to inches
1 feet = 12 inches
12 inches + 8 inches = 20 inches
20 ÷ 4 = 5 inches.
Therefore there are 5 inches in each piece.

Page No. 700

Question 17.
Theo is practicing for a 5-kilometer race. He runs 5 kilometers every day and records his time. His normal time is 25 minutes 15 seconds. Yesterday it took him only 23 minutes 49 seconds. How much faster was his time yesterday than his normal time?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 66
a. What are you asked to find?
Type below:
_________

Answer: I am asked to find how much faster was his time yesterday than his normal time.

Question 17.
b. What information do you know?
Type below:
_________

Answer: I know the information about his normal time and the time he took to run yesterday.

Question 17.
c. How will you solve the problem?
Type below:
_________

Answer: I will solve this problem by subtracting the time taken by him yesterday from normal time.
25 minutes 15 seconds
-23 minutes 49 seconds

Question 17.
d. Solve the problem.
Type below:
_________

Answer:

25 minutes 15 seconds
-23 minutes 49 seconds
1 minute 26 seconds     

Question 17.
e. Fill in the sentence.
Yesterday, Theo ran 5 kilometers in a time that was ______ faster than his normal time.
_____ min _____ sec

Answer: 1 min 26 sec

Question 18.
Don has 5 pieces of pipe. Each piece is 3 feet 6 inches long. If Don joins the pieces end to end to make one long pipe, how long will the new pipe be?
_____ ft _____ in

Answer: 17 ft 6 in.

Explanation:

Don has 5 pieces of pipe. Each piece is 3 feet 6 inches long.
5 pieces = 5 × 3 feet 6 inches
= 15 feet 30 inches
1 feet = 12 inches
30 inches = 2 feet 6 inches
15 feet 30 inches = 17 feet 6 inches
The new pipe will be 17 feet 6 inches long.

Question 19.
Ana mixes 2 quarts 1 pint of apple juice and 1 quart 3 cups of cranberry juice. Will her mixture be able to fit in a 1 gallon pitcher? Explain.
Type below:
_________

Answer: Yes

Ana mixes 2 quarts 1 pint of apple juice and 1 quart 3 cups of cranberry juice.
We should convert it into gallons.
Before that convert pint to cups.
1 pint = 2 cups
2 quarts 1 pint = 2 quarts 2 cups

2 quarts 2 cups
1 quart 3 cups
3 quart 5 cups

1 quart = 4 cups
5 cups = 1 quart 1 cup
3 quart 5 cups = 4 quart 1 cup
Now we can convert 4 quarts 1 cup into gallons.
1 gallon = 4 quarts
1 gallon 1 cup.

Common Core – New – Page No. 701

Mixed Measures

Complete.

Question 1.
8 pounds 4 ounces = 132 ounces
Think: 8 pounds = 8 × 16 ounces, or 128 ounces.
128 ounces + 4 ounces = 132 ounces

Question 2.
5 weeks 3 days = _____ days

Answer: 38 days

Explanation:

Convert weeks to days
1 week = 7 days
5 weeks = 5 × 7 days = 35 days
35 days + 3 days = 38 days

Question 3.
4 minutes 45 seconds = _____ seconds

Answer: 285 seconds

Explanation:

Convert minutes to seconds
1 minute = 60 seconds
4 minutes = 4 × 60 seconds = 240 seconds
240 seconds + 45 seconds = 285 seconds

Question 4.
4 hours 30 minutes = _____ minutes

Answer: 270 minutes

Explanation:

Convert hours to minutes
1 hour = 60 minutes
4 hours = 4 × 60 minutes = 240 minutes
240 minutes + 30 minutes = 270 minutes

Question 5.
3 tons 600 pounds = _____ pounds

Answer: 6600 pounds

Explanation:

Convert tons to pounds
1 ton = 2,000 pounds
3 tons = 3 × 2000 pounds = 6,000 pounds
6,000 pounds + 600 pounds = 6,600 pounds

Question 6.
6 pints 1 cup = _____ cups

Answer: 13 cups

Explanation:

Convert pints to cups.
1 pint = 2 cups
6 pints = 6 × 2 cups = 12 cups
12 cups + 1 cup = 13 cups

Question 7.
7 pounds 12 ounces = _____ ounces

Answer: 124 ounces

Explanation:

Convert pounds to ounces
1 pound = 16 ounces
7 pounds = 7 × 16 ounces = 112 ounces
112 ounces + 12 ounces = 124 ounces

Add or subtract.

Question 8.
9 gal 1 qt
+ 6 gal 1 qt
—————
______ gal ______ qt

Answer: 15 gal 2 qt

Explanation:

9 gal + 6 gal = 15 gal
1 qt + 1 qt = 2qt

9 gal 1 qt
+ 6 gal 1 qt
15 gal 2 qt

Question 9.
12 lb 5 oz
– 7 lb 10 oz
—————
______ lb ______ oz

Answer: 4 lb 11 oz

Explanation:

21 oz – 10 oz = 11 oz
11 lb – 7 lb = 4 lb

12 lb 5 oz
– 7 lb 10 oz
4 lb 11 oz

Question 10.
8 hr 3 min
+ 4 hr 12 min
—————
______ hr ______ min

Answer: 12 hr 15 min

Explanation:

8 hr + 4 hr = 12 hr
3 min + 12 min = 15 min

8 hr 3 min
+ 4 hr 12 min
12 hr 15 min

Problem Solving

Question 11.
Michael’s basketball team practiced for 2 hours 40 minutes yesterday and 3 hours 15 minutes today. How much longer did the team practice today than yesterday?
______ minutes

Answer: 35 minutes

Explanation:

Michael’s basketball team practiced for 2 hours 40 minutes yesterday and 3 hours 15 minutes today.
3 hours 15 minutes
– 2 hours 40 minutes
0 hours 35 minutes

Question 12.
Rhonda had a piece of ribbon that was 5 feet 3 inches long. She removed a 5-inch piece to use in her art project. What is the length of the piece of ribbon now?
______ feet ______ inches

Answer: 4 feet 10 inches

Explanation:

Rhonda had a piece of ribbon that was 5 feet 3 inches long. She removed a 5-inch piece to use in her art project.
5 feet 3 inches
– 0 feet 5-inch

1 feet = 12 inches
12 inches – 5 inches = 7 inches
5 feet 3 inches
– 0 feet 5-inch
4 feet 10 inches

Common Core – New – Page No. 702

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Marsha bought 1 pound 11 ounces of roast beef and 2 pounds 5 ounces of corned beef. How much more corned beef did she buy than roast beef?
Options:
a. 16 ounces
b. 10 ounces
c. 7 ounces
d. 6 ounces

Answer: 10 ounces

Explanation:

Marsha bought 1 pound 11 ounces of roast beef and 2 pounds 5 ounces of corned beef.
Subtract 1 pound 11 ounces of roast beef from 2 pounds 5 ounces of corned beef.
2 pounds 5 ounces
1 pound 11 ounces
0 pound 10 ounces
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 2.
Theodore says there are 2 weeks 5 days left in the year. How many days are left in the year?
Options:
a. 14 days
b. 15 days
c. 19 days
d. 25 days

Answer: 19 days

Explanation:

Theodore says there are 2 weeks 5 days left in the year.
Convert weeks to days.
1 week = 7 days
2 weeks = 14 days
14 days + 5 days = 19 days.
So, the correct answer is option C.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
On one grid, 0.5 of the squares are shaded. On another grid, 0.05 of the squares are shaded. Which statement is true?
Options:
a. 0.05 > 0.5
b. 0.05 = 0.5
c. 0.05 < 0.5
d. 0.05 + 0.5 = 1.0

Answer: 0.05 < 0.5

Explanation:

Given,
On one grid, 0.5 of the squares are shaded.
On another grid, 0.05 of the squares are shaded.
0.5 is greater than 0.05
So, the answer is option C.

Question 4.
Classify the triangle shown below.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 67
Options:
a. right
b. acute
c. equilateral
d. obtuse

Answer: right

Explanation:

The above figure is the right angle triangle.
So, the correct answer is option A.

Question 5.
Sahil’s brother is 3 years old. How many weeks old is his brother?
Options:
a. 30 weeks
b. 36 weeks
c. 90 weeks
d. 156 weeks

Answer: 156 weeks

Explanation:

Sahil’s brother is 3 years old.
Convert years to weeks.
1 year = 52 weeks
3 years = 3 × 52 = 156 weeks.
Therefore the correct answer is option D.

Question 6.
Sierra’s swimming lessons last 1 hour 20 minutes. She finished her lesson at 10:50 A.M. At what time did her lesson start?
Options:
a. 9:30 A.M.
b. 9:50 A.M.
c. 10:30 A.M.
d. 12:10 A.M.

Answer: 9:30 A.M.

Explanation:

Sierra’s swimming lessons last 1 hour 20 minutes. She finished her lesson at 10:50 A.M.
10 hour 50 minutes
– 1 hour 20 minutes
9 hours 30 minutes
9:30 A.M.
So, the correct answer is option A.

Page No. 705

Question 1.
The table shows a pattern for two units of time. Label the columns of the table with the units of time.
Think: What unit of time is 24 times as great as another unit?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 68
Type below:
________

Answer: Days, Hours
The conversion of the day to hours is
1 day = 24 hours.

Day Hours
1 24
2 48
3 72
4 96

Each table shows a pattern for two customary units. Label the columns of the table.

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 69
Type below:
________

Answer: Pint, Cups
1 pint = 2 Cups
So, the label for the above table is:

Pint Cups
1 2
2 4
3 6
4 8
5 10

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 70
Type below:
________

Answer: Pound, Ounces
Conversion of pounds to ounces is 1 pound = 16 ounces

Pound Ounces
1 16
2 32
3 48
4 64
5 80

Each table shows a pattern for two customary units. Label the columns of the table.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 71
Type below:
________

Answer: Yard, Inches
1 yard = 36 inches

Yard Inches
1 36
2 72
3 108
4 144
5 180

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 72
Type below:
________

Answer: Feet, Inches
1 Feet = 12 inches

Feet Inches
1 12
2 24
3 36
4 48
5 60

Each table shows a pattern for two metric units of length. Label the columns of the table.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 73
Type below:
________

Answer: Decimeter, Centimeter, and Centimeter, Millimeter

1 decimeter = 10 centimeters
1 centimeter = 10 millimeters

Label for Decimeter and Centimeter:

Decimeter Centimeter
1 10
2 20
3 30
4 40
5 50

Label for Centimeter and Millimeter:

Centimeter Millimeter
1 10
2 20
3 30
4 40
5 50

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 74
Type below:
________

Answer: Meter, Centimeter

1 meter = 100 centimeters,

Label for Meter and Centimeter is:

Meter Centimeter
1 100
2 200
3 300
4 400
5 500

Question 8.
List the number pairs for the table in Exercise 6. Describe the relationship between the numbers in each pair.

Answer: There are 8 pairs for the table.
The relationship for the first pair is Day, Hour.
The relationship for the second pair is Pound, Ounces.
The relationship for the third pair is Yard, Inches.
The relationship for the fourth pair is Feet, inches.
The relationship for the fifth pair is Decimeter, Centimeter.
The relationship for the sixth pair is Centimeter, Millimeter.
The relationship for the seventh pair is Meter, Centimeter.

Page No. 706

Question 9.
What’s the Error? Maria wrote Weeks as the label for the first column of the table and Years as the label for the second column. Describe her error.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 75
Type below:
________

Answer: The error of Maria is she didn’t write the name for the pair of table.

Year Weeks
1 52
2 104
3 156
4 208
5 260

Question 10.
Verify the Reasoning of Others The table shows a pattern for two metric units. Lou labels the columns Meters and Millimeters. Zayna labels them Liters and Milliliters. Whose answer makes sense? Whose answer is nonsense? Explain.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 76
Type below:
________

Answer: Both Lou and Zayna labels are correct but they didn’t name the pair of units.

Meters Millimeters
1 1000
2 2000
3 3000
4 4000
5 5000
Liters Milliliters
1 1000
2 2000
3 3000
4 4000
5 5000

Question 11.
Look at the following number pairs: 1 and 365, 2 and 730, 3 and 1,095. The number pairs describe the relationship between which two units of time? Explain.
____ ____

Answer:

Year  Days
1 12
2 24
3 36

Question 12.
The tables show patterns for some units of measurement. Write the correct labels in each table.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 77
Type below:
________

Answer:

The suitable units the first table is

Feet Inches
1 12
2 24
3 36
4 48

The suitable units the second table is

Day Hours
1 24
2 48
3 72
4 96

The suitable units the third table is

Gallon Quarts
1 4
2 8
3 12
4 16

Common Core – New – Page No. 707

Patterns in Measurement Units

Each table shows a pattern for two customary units of time or volume. Label the columns of the table.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 78

Question 2.

__________ __________
1 12
2 24
3 36
4 48
5 60

Answer:

Years Months
1 12
2 24
3 36
4 48
5 60

Question 3.

__________ __________
1 2
2 4
3 6
4 8
5 10

Answer:

Pints Cups
1 2
2 4
3 6
4 8
5 10

Question 4.

__________ __________
1 7
2 14
3 21
4 28
5 35

Answer:

Weeks Days
1 7
2 14
3 21
4 28
5 35

Problem Solving

Use the table for 5 and 6.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Common Core - New img 79

Question 5.
Marguerite made the table to compare two metric measures of length. Name a pair of units Marguerite could be comparing.
1 _________
= 10 _________

Answer: The pair of units for the above table is Centimeters, Millimeters.

Question 6.
Name another pair of metric units of length that have the same relationship.
1 _________
= 10 _________

Answer: Another pair of metric units of length are Meters, Decimeters.

Common Core – New – Page No. 708

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Joanne made a table to relate two units of measure. The number pairs in her table are 1 and 16, 2 and 32, 3 and 48, 4 and 64. Which are the best labels for
Joanne’s table?
Options:
a. Cups, Fluid Ounces
b. Gallons, Quarts
c. Pounds, Ounces
d. Yards, Inches

Answer: Pounds, Ounces

Explanation:

Joanne made a table to relate two units of measure. The number pairs in her table are 1 and 16, 2 and 32, 3 and 48, 4 and 64.
The label for Joanna’s table is pounds and ounces.
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 2.
Cade made a table to relate two units of time. The number pairs in his table are 1 and 24, 2 and 48, 3 and 72, 4 and 96. Which are the best labels for Cade’s table?
Options:
a. Days, Hours
b. Days, Weeks
c. Years, Months
d. Years, Weeks

Answer: Days, Hours

Explanation:

Cade made a table to relate two units of time. The number pairs in his table are 1 and 24, 2 and 48, 3 and 72, 4 and 96.
The label for Joanna’s table is Days and Hours.
The correct answer is option B.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Anita has 2 quarters, 1 nickel, and 4 pennies. Write Anita’s total amount as a fraction of a dollar
Options:
a. \(\frac{39}{100}\)
b. \(\frac{54}{100}\)
c. \(\frac{59}{100}\)
d. \(\frac{84}{100}\)

Answer: \(\frac{59}{100}\)

Question 4.
The minute hand of a clock moves from 12 to 6. Which describes the turn the minute hand makes?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{4}\) turn
b. \(\frac{1}{2}\) turn
c. \(\frac{3}{4}\) turn
d. 1 full turn

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\) turn

Explanation:

The minute hand of a clock moves from 12 to 6.
If the minute hand move from 12 to 6 then the fraction of the turn is \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 5.
Roderick has a dog that has a mass of 9 kilograms. What is the mass of the dog in grams?
Options:
a. 9 grams
b. 900 grams
c. 9,000 grams
d. 90,000 grams

Answer: 9,000 grams

Explanation:

Roderick has a dog that has a mass of 9 kilograms.
Convert kilograms to grams.
1 kilogram = 1000 grams
9 kilograms = 9 × 1000 grams = 9000 grams
Therefore the correct answer is option C.

Question 6.
Kari mixed 3 gallons 2 quarts of lemon lime drink with 2 gallons 3 quarts of pink lemonade to make punch. How much more lemon-lime drink did Kari use than pink lemonade?
Options:
a. 3 quarts
b. 4 quarts
c. 1 gallon 1 quart
d. 1 gallon 2 quarts

Answer: 3 quarts

Explanation:

Kari mixed 3 gallons 2 quarts of lemon-lime drink with 2 gallons 3 quarts of pink lemonade to make punch.
Kari used 3 quarts of pink lemonade more to make punch.
The correct answer is option A.

Common Core – New – Page No. 709

Question 1.
Mrs. Miller wants to estimate the width of the steps in front of her house. Select the best benchmark for her to use.
Options:
a. her fingertip
b. the thickness of a dime
c. the width of a license plate
d. how far she can walk in 20 minutes

Answer: the thickness of a dime

Question 2.
Franco played computer chess for 3 hours. Lian played computer chess for 150 minutes. Compare the times spent playing computer chess. Complete the sentence.
_____ played for _____ minutes longer than _____.

Answer: Franco played for 30 minutes longer than Lian.

Question 3.
Select the measures that are equal. Mark all that apply.
Options:
a. 6 feet
b. 15 yards
c. 45 feet
d. 600 inches
e. 12 feet
f. 540 inches

Answer: B, F; C, F

The measure of 15 yards = 45 feet = 540 inches

Question 4.
Jackie made 6 quarts of lemonade. Jackie says she made 3 pints of lemonade. Explain Jackie’s error. Then find the correct number of pints of lemonade.
Type below:
_________

Answer: The error of Jackie is that she made 12 pints of lemonade but she noted 3 pints of lemonade.
1 quart = 2 pints
6 quarts = 6 × 2 pints = 12 pints

Page No. 710

Question 5.
Josh practices gymnastics each day after school. The data shows the lengths of time Josh practiced gymnastics for 2 weeks.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 80
Part A
Make a tally table and line plot to show the data.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 81
Type below:
_________

Answer:

Time Practicing Gymnastics
Time (in hours) Tally
\(\frac{1}{2}\) |
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ||
\(\frac{3}{4}\) |||
1 ||||

Line Plot:

Go Math 4th Grade Chapter 12 Key Review test solution image_2

Question 5.
Part B
Explain how you used the tally table to label the numbers and plot the Xs.
Type below:
_________

Answer: By using the tally marks table I have plotted the X’s on the line plot. Based on the tally of each fraction I have plotted X on the point.

Question 5.
Part C
What is the difference between the longest time and shortest time Josh spent practicing gymnastics?
\(\frac{□}{□}\) hour

Answer:

The longest time is 1
The shortest time is \(\frac{1}{4}\)
1 – \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{3}{4}\)
Thus the difference between the longest time and shortest time Josh spent practicing gymnastics is \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Question 6.
Select the correct word to complete the sentence.
Juan brings a water bottle with him to soccer practice.
A full water bottle holds Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 82 of water.
_________

Answer: A full water bottle holds 1 liter of water

Page No. 711

Question 7.
Write the symbol that compares the weights correctly.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 83
128 ounces ____ 8 pounds
8,000 pounds ____ 3 tons

Answer:

i. 128 ounces ____ 8 pounds

1 pound = 16ounces
8 pounds = 8 × 16 ounces = 128 ounces
Thus 128 ounces = 8 pounds

ii. 8,000 pounds ____ 3 tons

1 ton = 2000 pounds
4 tons = 4 × 2000 pounds = 8000 pounds
8000 pounds is greater than 6000 pounds
So, 8,000 pounds > 3 tons

Question 8.
Dwayne bought 5 yards of wrapping paper. How many inches of wrapping paper did he buy?
____ inches

Answer: 180 inches

Convert yards to inches
1 yard = 36 inches
5 yards = 5 × 36 inches = 180 inches
Therefore he bought 180 inches of wrapping paper.

Question 9.
A sack of potatoes weighs 14 pounds 9 ounces. After Wendy makes potato salad for a picnic, the sack weighs 9 pounds 14 ounces. What is the weight of the potatoes Wendy used for the potato salad? Write the numbers to show the correct subtraction.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 84
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 85
____ pounds ____ ounces

Answer: 4 pounds 11 ounces

14 pounds 9 ounces
-9 pounds 14 ounces
Borrow 1 pound to ones place to subtract 11 ounces
1 pound = 16 ounces
16 + 9 = 25 ounces

13 pounds 25 ounces
-9 pounds 14 ounces
4 pounds 11 ounces

Question 10.
Sabita made this table to relate two customary units of liquid volume.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 86
Part A
List the number pairs for the table. Then describe the relationship between the numbers in each pair.
Type below:
________

Answer: The relationship between the numbers in each pair is Pint, Cups.

Question 10.
Part B
Label the columns of the table. Explain your answer.
Type below:
________

Answer:

Pint Cups
1 2
2 4
3 6
4 8
5 10

Page No. 712

Question 11.
The table shows the distances some students swam in miles. Complete the line plot to show the data.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 87
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 88

Answer:

Go Math 4th Grade Answer Key Chapter 12 Review solution image_3

What is the difference between the longest distance and the shortest distance the students swam?
\(\frac{□}{□}\) mile

Answer: \(\frac{4}{8}\) mile

Explanation:

The longest distance = \(\frac{5}{8}\) mile
The shortest distance = \(\frac{1}{8}\) mile
\(\frac{5}{8}\) – \(\frac{1}{8}\) = \(\frac{4}{8}\) mile
The difference between the longest distance and the shortest distance the students swam is \(\frac{4}{8}\) mile.

Question 12.
An elephant living in a wildlife park weighs 4 tons. How many pounds does the elephant weigh?
______ pounds

Answer: 8000 pounds

Explanation:

An elephant living in a wildlife park weighs 4 tons.
1 ton = 2000 pounds
4 tons = 4 × 2000 pounds = 8000 pounds
The elephant weighs 8000 pounds.

Question 13.
Katia bought two melons. She says the difference in mass between the melons is 5,000 grams. Which two melons that did Katia buy?
Options:
a. watermelon: 8 kilograms
b. cantaloupe: 5 kilograms
c. honeydew: 3 kilograms
d. casaba melon: 2 kilograms
e. crenshaw melon: 1 kilogram

Answer: cantaloupe: 5 kilograms

Katia bought two melons. She says the difference in mass between the melons is 5,000 grams.
She bought cantaloupe: 5 kilograms.
The correct answer is option B.

Question 14.
Write the equivalent measurements in each column.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 89
Type below:
________

Answer:

3 meters 35 centimeters 300 millimeters
3,000 millimeters 35/100 meter 300/1000 meter
300 centimeters 0.35 meter 0.300 meter
30 decimeters 350 millimeters 30 centimeters

Page No. 713

Question 15.
Cheryl is making a mixed fruit drink for a party. She mixes 7 pints each of apple juice and cranberry juice. How many fluid ounces of mixed fruit drink does Cheryl make?
______ fluid ounces

Answer: 224 fluid ounces

Explanation:

Cheryl is making a mixed fruit drink for a party. She mixes 7 pints each of apple juice and cranberry juice.
We need to convert pints into fluid ounces
We know that, 1 pint = 32 fluid ounces
7 pints = 7 × 32 fluid ounces = 224 fluid ounces.
Therefore Cheryl makes 224 fluid ounces of mixed fruit drink.

Question 16.
Hamid’s soccer game will start at 11:00 a.m., but the players must arrive at the field three-quarters of an hour early to warm up. The game must end by 1:15 p.m.
Part A
Hamid says he has to be at the field at 9:45 a.m. is Hamid correct? Explain your answer.
______

Answer: No

Explanation:

The statement of Hamid is wrong. Because Hamid’s soccer game starts at 10:15 A.M.

Question 16.
Part B
The park closes at 6:30 p.m. There is a 15-minute break between each game played at the park, and each game takes the same amount of time as Hamid’s soccer game. How many more games can be played before the park closes? Explain your answer.
______ more games

Answer: 2 more games

Explanation:

Given that,
The park closes at 6:30 p.m.
There is a 15-minute break between each game played at the park, and each game takes the same amount of time as Hamid’s soccer game.
The game starts at 11:00 A.M and ends at 1:15 P.M.
After completion of the game, they will take a break for 15 minutes.
So, game starts at 1:30 P.M or 2:00 P.M. and ends at 4:15 P.M.
By this, we can say that 2 more games can be played before the park closes.

Question 17.
For numbers 17a–17e, select Yes or No to tell whether the measurements are equivalent.
a. 7,000 grams and 7 kilograms
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: Yes

Explanation:

1 kilogram = 1000 grams
7 kilograms = 7 × 1000 grams = 7000 grams.
Thus the above statement is true.

Question 17.
b. 200 milliliters and 2 liters
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: No

Explanation:

1 liter = 1000 milliliters
2 liters = 2000 milliliters
So, the above statement is not correct.

Question 17.
c. 6 grams and 6,000 kilograms
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: No

Explanation:

1 kilogram = 1000 grams
6 kilograms = 6 × 1000 grams = 6000 grams.
Thus the above statement is true.

Question 17.
d. 5 liters and 5,000 milliliters
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: Yes

Explanation:

1 liter = 1000 milliliters
5 liters = 5000 milliliters
Thus the above statement is true.

Question 17.
e. 2 milliliters and 2,000 liters
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: No

Explanation:

1 liter = 1000 milliliters
2 liters = 2000 milliliters
the above statement is false.

Page No. 714

Question 18.
Draw lines to match equivalent time intervals.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 90

Answer:

Go-Math-Grade-4-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Relative-Sizes-of-Measurement-Units-img-90-1

Question 19.
Anya arrived at the library on Saturday morning at 11:10 a.m. She left the library 1 hour 20 minutes later. Draw a time line to show the end time.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 91
Anya left the library at _____ P. M.

Question 20.
The tables show patterns for some units of measurement. Write the correct labels in each table.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 92

Answer: Yard, Feet; Week, days; Quart, Cups.

The label for the first table is:

Yard Feet
1 3
2 6
3 9
4 12

The label for the second table is:

Week Days
1 7
2 14
3 21
4 28

The label for the third table is:

Quart Cups
1 4
2 8
3 12
4 16

Question 21.
An Olympic swimming pool is 25 meters wide. How many decimeters wide is an Olympic swimming pool?
_____ decimeters wide

Answer: 250 decimeter

Explanation:

An Olympic swimming pool is 25 meters wide.
Convert meters to decimeters.
1 meter = 10 decimeter
25 meters = 25 × 10 decimeter = 250 decimeters
Thus the Olympic swimming pool is 250 decimeters wide.

Question 22.
Frankie is practicing for a 5-kilometer race. His normal time is 31 minutes 21 seconds. Yesterday it took him only 29 minutes 38 seconds.
How much faster was Frankie yesterday than his normal time?
Type below:
________

Answer: 1 minute 43 seconds

Explanation:

Frankie is practicing for a 5-kilometer race.
His normal time is 31 minutes 21 seconds. Yesterday it took him only 29 minutes 38 seconds.
Subtract 29 minutes 38 seconds from 31 minutes 21 seconds
31 minutes 21 seconds
29 minutes 38 seconds
1 minute 43 seconds

Page No. 719

Question 1.
Find the perimeter of the rectangle.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 93
The perimeter is _______ feet.
_____ ft

Answer: 24 ft.

Explanation:

The length of the rectangle = 8 ft.
The width of the rectangle = 4 ft.
The formula for the perimeter of the rectangle is 2 (l + w)
= 2 (8 ft. + 4 ft.) = 2(12 ft.) = 24 ft.
The perimeter of the rectangle = 24 ft.

Find the perimeter of the rectangle or square.

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 94
P = _____ yards

Answer: 40 yards

Explanation:

The length of the rectangle = 16 yards
The width of the rectangle = 4 yards
The formula for the perimeter of the rectangle is 2 (l + w)
= 2 (16 yards + 4 yards) = 2(20 yards) = 40 yards
The perimeter of the rectangle is 40 yards.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 95
P = _____ meters

Answer: 304 meters

Explanation:

The length of the rectangle = 110 m
The width of the rectangle = 42 m
The formula for the perimeter of the rectangle is 2 (l + w)
= 2 (110 m + 42 m) = 2(152 m)
= 304 meters
Therefore the perimeter of the rectangle is 304 meters.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 96
P = _____ meters

Answer: 16 meters

Explanation:

The side of the square is 4 meters
The perimeter of the square = 4a
= 4 × 4 = 16 meters.
Therefore the perimeter of the square is 16 meters.

Find the perimeter of the rectangle or square.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 97
P = _____ inches

Answer: 108 in.

Explanation:
Length = 34 in.
Width = 20 in.
The formula for the perimeter of the rectangle is 2 (l + w)
= 2 (34 in. + 20 in.)
= 108 in.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 98
P = _____ feet

Answer: 464 feet

Explanation:

The side of the square is 116 feet
The perimeter of the square = 4a
= 4 × 116 feet = 464 feet.
Thus the perimeter of the square is 464 feet.

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 99
P = _____ meters

Answer: 126 meters

Explanation:

The length of the rectangle = 42 meters
The width of the rectangle = 21 meters
The formula for the perimeter of the rectangle is 2 (l + w)
= 2 (42 m + 21 m) = 2 (63 m) = 126 meters
Therefore the perimeter of the above rectangle is 126 meters.

Question 8.
Robert wants to put lights around the edge of his yard. The yard is 40 feet long and 23 feet wide. How many yards of lights does he need?
_____ feet

Answer: 126 feet

Explanation:

Given that, Robert wants to put lights around the edge of his yard. The yard is 40 feet long and 23 feet wide.
The length = 40 ft.
The width = 23 ft.
The formula for the perimeter of the rectangle is 2 (l + w)
= 2 (40 ft. + 23 ft.) = 2 (63 feet) = 126 feets
Thus Robert need 126 feet to put lights.

Question 9.
Analyze What is the side length of a square with a perimeter of 60 meters?
l = _____ meters

Answer: 15 meters

Explanation:

The perimeter of the square = 60 meters
We know that, the perimeter of the square = 4a
4a = 60 meters
a = 60/4 = 15 meters
Thus the length of a square is 15 meters.

Page No. 720

Question 10.
Alejandra plans to sew fringe on a scarf. The scarf is shaped like a rectangle. The length of the scarf is 48 inches. The width is one half the length. How much fringe does Alejandra need?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units img 100
a. Draw a picture of the scarf, and label the given measurements on your drawing.
Type below:
________

Answer:

Go Math Grade 4 Solution Key Chapter 12 Review Test solution image_1

Question 10.
b. What do you need to find?
Type below:
___9 _____

Answer: I need to find how much fringe does Alejandra need?

Question 10.
c. What formula will you use?
Type below:
________

Answer: I will use the perimeter of the rectangle formula = 2 (l + w).

Question 10.

d. Show the steps you use to solve the problem.
Type below:
________

Answer:

First I will calculate the width of the rectangle.
After that, I will use the formula of perimeter of the rectangle.
I will substitute the value of the length and width of the rectangle.

Question 10.
e. Complete.
The length of the scarf is ____ inches.
The width is one half the length, or
____ ÷ 2 = ____ inches.
So, the perimeter is
(____ × ____) + (____ × ____) = ____ inches.
Type below:
________

Answer:

The length of the scarf is 48 inches.

The width is one half the length, or 48 ÷ 2 = 24 inches.

So, the perimeter is

(2 × 24) + (2 × 48) = 144 inches

Question 10.
f. Alejandra needs _____ of fringe.
____ inches of fringe

Answer: 144 inches of fringe

Question 11.
Marcia will make a frame for her picture. The picture frame will be three times as long as it is wide. The width of the frame will be 5 inches. How much wood does Marcia need for the frame?
____ inches

Answer: 40 inches

Explanation:

Given that, Marcia will make a frame for her picture.
The picture frame will be three times as long as it is wide.
The width of the frame will be 5 inches.
Length = 3 × 5 inches = 15 inches
Perimeter of the rectangle = 2 (l + w)
= 2 (15 + 5) = 2 × 20 = 40 inches
Marcia needs 40 inches of wood for the frame.

Question 12.
Maya is building a sandbox that is 36 inches wide. The length is four times the width. What is the perimeter of the sandbox? Show your work. Explain.
____ inches

Answer: 360 inches

Explanation:

Maya is building a sandbox that is 36 inches wide. The length is four times the width.
Width = 36 inches
length = 4 × 36 inches = 144 inches
The perimeter of the rectangle = 2 (l + w)
= 2 (144 in. + 36 in.) = 2 × 180 inches = 360 inches
Therefore, the perimeter of the sandbox is 360 inches.

Conclusion:

The questions covered in the review test and mid-chapter checkpoint can also be verified using the Go Math grade 4 answer key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Pdf. So, you can practice well and score good grades in the standard tests and exams. Also, it clarifies all your subject doubts within no time. Hence, download and prepare more on a daily basis.

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations

go-math-grade-6-chapter-8-solutions-of-equations-answer-key

Are you searching for the Go Math Grade 6 Solution Key for Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations? If my guess is correct then you are on the right page. We provide the solutions to all the questions in pdf format. So, Download Go Math 6th Grade Answer Key Chapter 6 Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations pdf for free. Our Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations is helpful for quick and easy learning.

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations

Enhance your performance in practice tests or assignments with the help of HMH Go Math 6th Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations. Get the solutions of Review Test and Mid Chapter Checkpoint in Go Math 6th Grade Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations. Scroll down this page to know the topics covered in this chapter. Make use of the links and Download Grade 6 Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations.

Lesson 1: Solutions of Equations

Lesson 2: Write Equations

Lesson 3: Investigate • Model and Solve Addition Equations

Lesson 4: Solve Addition and Subtraction Equations

Lesson 5: Investigate • Model and Solve Multiplication Equations

Lesson 6: Solve Multiplication and Division Equations

Lesson 7: Problem Solving • Equations with Fractions

Mid-Chapter Checkpoint

Lesson 8: Solutions of Inequalities

Lesson 9: Write Inequalities

Lesson 10: Graph Inequalities

Chapter 8 Review/Test

Share and Show – Page No. 423

Determine whether the given value of the variable is a solution of the equation.

Question 1.
x + 12 = 29; x = 7
The variable is __________

Answer: not a solution

Explanation:
Substitute the value in the given equation
x + 12 = 29
If x = 7
7 + 12 = 29
19 ≠ 29
Thus the variable is not a solution.

Question 2.
n − 13 = 2; n = 15
The variable is __________

Answer: a solution

Explanation:
Substitute the value in the given equation
n = 15
n − 13 = 2
15 – 13 = 2
The variable is a solution.

Question 3.
\(\frac{1}{2}\)c = 14; c = 28
The variable is __________

Answer: a solution

Explanation:
Substitute the value in the given equation
c = 28
\(\frac{1}{2}\)c = 14
\(\frac{1}{2}\) × 28 = 14
14 = 14
Thus the variable is a solution.

Question 4.
m + 2.5 = 4.6; m = 2.9
The variable is __________

Answer: not a solution

Explanation:
Substitute the value in the given equation
m + 2.5 = 4.6
m = 2.9
2.9 + 2.5 = 4.6
5.4 ≠ 4.6
Thus the variable is not a solution.

Question 5.
d − 8.7 = 6; d = 14.7
The variable is __________

Answer: a solution

Explanation:
Substitute the value in the given equation
d = 14.7
d − 8.7 = 6
14.7 – 8.7 = 6
6 = 6
Thus the variable is a solution.

Question 6.
k − \(\frac{3}{5}\) = \(\frac{1}{10}\); k = \(\frac{7}{10}\)
The variable is __________

Answer: a solution

Explanation:
Substitute the value in the given equation
k = \(\frac{7}{10}\)
k − \(\frac{3}{5}\) = \(\frac{1}{10}\)
\(\frac{7}{10}\) – \(\frac{3}{5}\) = \(\frac{1}{10}\)
\(\frac{7}{10}\) – \(\frac{6}{10}\) = \(\frac{1}{10}\)
\(\frac{1}{10}\) = \(\frac{1}{10}\)
Thus the variable is a solution.

On Your Own

Determine whether the given value of the variable is a solution of the equation.

Question 7.
17.9 + v = 35.8; v = 17.9
The variable is __________

Answer: a solution

Explanation:
Substitute the value in the given equation
17.9 + v = 35.8
v = 17.9
17.9 + 17.9 = 35.8
35.8 = 35.8
Thus the variable is a solution.

Question 8.
c + 35 = 57; c = 32
The variable is __________

Answer: not a solution

Explanation:
Substitute the value in the given equation
c + 35 = 57
c = 32
32 + 35 = 57
67 ≠ 57
Thus the variable is not a solution.

Question 9.
18 = \(\frac{2}{3}\)h; h= 12
The variable is __________

Answer: not a solution

Explanation:
Substitute the value in the given equation
18 = \(\frac{2}{3}\)h
h = 12
\(\frac{2}{3}\) × 12 = 8
18 ≠ 8
Thus the variable is not a solution.

Question 10.
In the equation t + 2.5 = 7, determine whether t = 4.5, t = 5, or t = 5.5 is a solution of the equation.
The solution is ________.

Answer: t = 4.5

Explanation:
Substitute the value in the given equation
t = 4.5
t + 2.5 = 7
4.5 + 2.5 = 7
7 = 7
t = 5
t + 2.5 = 7
5 + 2.5 = 7
7.5 ≠ 7
Not a solution
t = 5.5
t + 2.5 = 7
5.5 + 2.5 = 7
8 ≠ 7
Not a solution

Question 11.
Antonio ran a total of 9 miles in two days. The first day he ran 5 \(\frac{1}{4}\) miles. The equation 9 – d = 5 \(\frac{1}{4}\) can be used to find the distance d in miles Antonio ran the second day. Determine whether d = 4 \(\frac{3}{4}\), d = 4, or d = 3 \(\frac{3}{4}\) is a solution of the equation, and tell what the solution means.
The solution is ________ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 3 \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Explanation:
9 – d = 5 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Substitute d = 4 \(\frac{3}{4}\) in the above equation
9 – 4 \(\frac{3}{4}\) = 5 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
4 \(\frac{1}{4}\) ≠ 5 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Not a solution
Substitute d = 4
9 – 4 = 5 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
5 ≠ 5 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Not a solution
Substitute d = 3 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
9 – 3 \(\frac{3}{4}\) = 5 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
5 \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 5 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
9 – d = 5 \(\frac{1}{4}\); d = 3 \(\frac{3}{4}\) is a solution.

Problem Solving + Applications – Page No. 424

Use the table for 12–14.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations img 1

Question 12.
Connect Symbols and Words The length of a day on Saturn is 14 hours less than a day on Mars. The equation 24.7 − s = 14 can be used to find the length in hours s of a day on Saturn. Determine whether s = 9.3 or s = 10.7 is a solution of the equation, and tell what the solution means.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: s = 10.7

Explanation:
The length of a day on Saturn is 14 hours less than a day on Mars.
The equation 24.7 − s = 14 can be used to find the length in hours s of a day on Saturn.
24.7 − s = 14
Substitute s = 9.3 in the equation
24.7 – 9.3 = 14
15.4 ≠ 14
Not a solution
Substitute s = 10.7 in the equation
24.7 – 10.7 = 14
14 = 14
Therefore s = 10.7 is a solution to the equation.

Question 13.
A storm on one of the planets listed in the table lasted for 60 hours, or 2.5 of the planet’s days. The equation 2.5h = 60 can be used to find the length in hours h of a day on the planet. Is the planet Earth, Mars, or Jupiter? Explain.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: Earth

Explanation:
A storm on one of the planets listed in the table lasted for 60 hours, or 2.5 of the planet’s days.
2.5h = 60
h = 60/2.5
h = 24 hours
By seeing the above table we can say that Earth is the answer.

Question 14.
A day on Pluto is 143.4 hours longer than a day on one of the planets listed in the table. The equation 153.3 − p = 143.4 can be used to find the length in hours p of a day on the planet. What is the length of a storm that lasts \(\frac{1}{3}\) of a day on this planet?
________ hours

Answer: 3.3 hours

Explanation:
A day on Pluto is 143.4 hours longer than a day on one of the planets listed in the table.
153.3 − p = 143.4
153.3 – 143.4 = p
p = 153.3 – 143.4
p = 9.9
Now p with \(\frac{1}{3}\) to find the length of a storm that lasts of a day on this planet
9.9 × \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 3.3 hours

Question 15.
What’s the Error? Jason said that the solution of the equation 2m = 4 is m = 8. Describe Jason’s error, and give the correct solution.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: m = 2

Explanation:
Jason said that the solution of the equation 2m = 4 is m = 8.
2m = 4
m = 4/2 = 2
The error of Jason is he multiplied 2 and 4 but he should divide 4 by 2.

Question 16.
The marking period is 45 school days long. Today is the twenty-first day of the marking period. The equation x + 21 = 45 can be used to find the number of days x left in the marking period. Using substitution, Rachel determines there are _____ days left in the marking period.
Rachel determines there are _____________ days left.

Answer: 24

Explanation:
The marking period is 45 school days long. Today is the twenty-first day of the marking period.
The equation x + 21 = 45
x = 45 – 21 = 24 days
Using substitution, Rachel determines there are 24 days left in the marking period.
Thus Rachel determines there are 24 days left.

Solutions of Equations – Page No. 425

Determine whether the given value of the variable is a solution of the equation.

Question 1.
x − 7 = 15; x = 8
The variable is __________

Answer: not a solution

Explanation:
Substitute the value in the given equation.
x = 8
8 – 7 = 15
1 ≠ 15
Therefore the variable is not a solution.

Question 2.
c + 11 = 20; c = 9
The variable is __________

Answer: a solution

Explanation:
Substitute the value in the given equation.
c = 9
9 + 11 = 20
20 = 20
Therefore the variable is a solution.

Question 3.
\(\frac{1}{3}\)h = 6; h = 2
The variable is __________

Answer: not a solution

Explanation:
Substitute the value in the given equation.
\(\frac{1}{3}\)h = 6
h = 2
\(\frac{1}{3}\) × 2 = 6
\(\frac{2}{3}\) ≠ 6
Therefore the variable is not a solution.

Question 4.
16.1 + d = 22; d = 6.1
The variable is __________

Answer: not a solution

Explanation:
Substitute the value in the given equation.
16.1 + d = 22
d = 6.1
16.1 + 6.1 = 22
22.2 ≠ 22
Therefore the variable is not a solution.

Question 5.
9 = \(\frac{3}{4}\)e; e = 12
The variable is __________

Answer: a solution

Explanation:
Substitute the value in the given equation.
9 = \(\frac{3}{4}\)e
e = 12
9 = \(\frac{3}{4}\)(12)
9 = 3 × 3
9 = 9
Therefore the variable is a solution.

Question 6.
15.5 – y = 7.9; y = 8.4
The variable is __________

Answer: not a solution

Explanation:
Substitute the value in the given equation.
15.5 – y = 7.9
y = 8.4
15.5 – 8.4 = 7.9
7.1 ≠ 7.9
Therefore the variable is not a solution.

Problem Solving

Question 7.
Terrance needs to score 25 points to win a game. He has already scored 18 points. The equation 18 + p = 25 can be used to find the number of points p that Terrance still needs to score. Determine whether p = 7 or p = 13 is a solution of the equation, and tell what the solution means.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: p = 7

Explanation:
Terrance needs to score 25 points to win a game. He has already scored 18 points.
The equation is 18 + p = 25
Substitute p = 7 in the above equation.
18 + 7 = 25
25 = 25
The variable is a solution.
Substitute p = 13
18 + p = 25
18 + 13 = 25
31 ≠ 25
The variable is not a solution.
Therefore p = 7 is a solution for the equation.

Question 8.
Madeline has used 50 sheets of a roll of paper towels, which is \(\frac{5}{8}\) of the entire roll. The equation \(\frac{5}{8}\)s = 50 can be used to find the number of sheets s in a full roll. Determine whether s = 32 or s = 80 is a solution of the equation, and tell what the solution means.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Madeline has used 50 sheets of a roll of paper towels, which is \(\frac{5}{8}\) of the entire roll.
\(\frac{5}{8}\)s = 50
s = 50 × \(\frac{8}{5}\)
s = 80 because 80 × 5 = 400
400 ÷ 8 = 50

Question 9.
Use mental math to find the solution to 4x = 36. Then use substitution to check your answer.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: x = 9

Explanation:
4x = 36
x = 36/4
x = 9

Lesson Check – Page No. 426

Question 1.
Sheena received a gift card for $50. She has already used it to buy a lamp for $39.99. The equation 39.99 + x = 50 can be used to find the amount x that is left on the gift card. What is the solution of the equation?
_____

Answer: 10.01

Explanation:
Given:
Sheena received a gift card for $50. She has already used it to buy a lamp for $39.99.
The equation 39.99 + x = 50
39.99 + x = 50
x = 50 – 39.99
x = 50.00 – 39.99
x = 10.01
Thus $10.01 is left on the gift card.

Question 2.
When Pete had a fever, his temperature was 101.4°F. After taking some medicine, his temperature was 99.2°F. The equation 101.4 – d = 99.2 can be used to find the number of degrees d that Pete’s temperature decreased. What is the solution of the equation?
_____

Answer: 2.2

Explanation:
Given,
When Pete had a fever, his temperature was 101.4°F.
After taking some medicine, his temperature was 99.2°F.
The equation 101.4 – d = 99.2
104.4 – 99.2 = d
d = 104.4 – 99.2
d = 2.2

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Melanie has saved $60 so far to buy a lawn mower. This is 20% of the price of the lawn mower. What is the full price of the lawn mower that she wants to buy?
$ _____

Answer: 300

Explanation:
Melanie has saved $60 so far to buy a lawn mower. This is 20% of the price of the lawn mower.
60 ÷ 20%
60 ÷ 20/100
60 × 100/20 = 6000/20 = 300
She wants to buy a $300 price of the lawn mower.

Question 4.
A team of scientists is digging for fossils. The amount of soil in cubic feet that they remove is equal to 6³. How many cubic feet of soil do the scientists remove?
_____ cubic feet

Answer: 216

Explanation:
A team of scientists is digging for fossils. The amount of soil in cubic feet that they remove is equal to 6³.
6 × 6 × 6 = 216
Thus the scientists remove 216 cubic feet of soil.

Question 5.
Andrew made p picture frames. He sold 2 of them at a craft fair. Write an expression that could be used to find the number of picture frames Andrew has left.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: p – 2

Explanation:
Andrew made p picture frames. He sold 2 of them at a craft fair.
The expression is the difference of 9 and 2
The equation is p – 2

Question 6.
Write an expression that is equivalent to 4 + 3(5 + x).
Type below:
_____________

Answer: 4 + 15 + 3x

Explanation:
4 + 3(5 + x) = 4 + 15 + 3x
3x + 19
Thus the expression 4 + 3(5 + x) is equivalent to 4 + 15 + 3x or 3x + 19

Share and Show – Page No. 429

Question 1.
Write an equation for the word sentence “25 is 13 more than a number.”
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Let n represents the unknown number. The phrase ‘more than’ indicates addition operation.
Thus the equation is 25 = 13 + n.

Write an equation for the word sentence.

Question 2.
The difference of a number and 2 is 3 \(\frac{1}{3}\).
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Let n represents the unknown number.
The phrase “difference” indicates the subtraction operation.
The equation is n – 2 = 3 \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Question 3.
Ten times the number of balloons is 120.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Let n represents the unknown number.
The phrase “times” indicates multiplication operation.
The equation is 10 × n = 120

Write a word sentence for the equation.

Question 4.
x − 0.3 = 1.7
Type below:
_____________

Answer: The difference of x and 0.3 is 1.7

Question 5.
25 = \(\frac{1}{4}\)n
Type below:
_____________

Answer: 25 is n times \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Write an equation for the word sentence.

Question 6.
The quotient of a number and 20.7 is 9.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Let n represents the unknown number.
The phrase “quotient” indicates the division operation.
Thus the equation is n ÷ 20.7 = 9.

Question 7.
24 less than the number of snakes is 35.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Let n represents the unknown number.
The phrase “less than” indicates subtraction operation.
Thus the equation is n – 24 = 35

Question 8.
75 is 18 \(\frac{1}{2}\) more than a number.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Let n represents the unknown number.
The phrase “more than” indicates addition operation.
75 = 18 \(\frac{1}{2}\) + n

Question 9.
d degrees warmer than 50 degrees is 78 degrees.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Let n represents the unknown number.
The phrase “warmer than” indicates addition operation.
The equation is d + 50 = 78 degrees

Write a word sentence for the equation.

Question 10.
15g = 135
Type below:
_____________

Answer: g times 15 is 135

Question 11.
w ÷ 3.3 = 0.6
Type below:
_____________

Answer: The quotient of w and 3.3 is 0.6

Problem Solving + Applications – Page No. 430

To find out how far a car can travel on a certain amount of gas, multiply the car’s fuel efficiency in miles per gallon by the gas used in gallons. Use this information and the table for 12–13.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations img 2

Question 12.
Write an equation that could be used to find how many miles a hybrid SUV can travel in the city on 20 gallons of gas.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
From table 36 miles per gallon in the city.
A hybrid SUV uses 36 miles per gallon in the city.
So, no. of miles = y
x = no. of gallons
So, y = 36 × x
x = 20 gallons
Thus y = 36 × 20

Question 13.
A sedan traveled 504 miles on the highway on a full tank of gas. Write an equation that could be used to find the number of gallons the tank holds.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
A sedan uses 28 miles per gallon on the highway.
The equation that could be used to find the number of gallons the tank holds is
504 = 28g

Question 14.
Connect Symbols to Words Sonya was born in 1998. Carmen was born 11 years after Sonya. If you wrote an equation to find the year in which Carmen was born, what operation would you use in your equation?
Type below:
_____________

Answer: In this equation, I would use addition or subtraction operation.

Question 15.
A magazine has 110 pages. There are 23 full-page ads and 14 half-page ads. The rest of the magazine consists of articles. Write an equation that can be used to find the number of pages of articles in the magazine.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
The equation that can be used to find the number of pages of articles in the magazine is
23 + 14/2 + a = 110
where a represents the number of articles.

Question 16.
What’s the Error? Tony is traveling 560 miles to visit his cousins. He travels 313 miles the first day. He says that he can use the equation m − 313 = 560 to find the number of miles m he has left on his trip. Describe and correct Tony’s error.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Tony subtracted the number of miles traveled from the number of miles left.
Tony should have written m + 313 = 560

Question 17.
Jamie is making cookies for a bake sale. She triples the recipe in order to have enough cookies to sell. Jamie uses 12 cups of flour to make the triple batch. Write an equation that can be used to find out how much flour f is needed for one batch of cookies.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
The equation that can be used to find out how much flour f is needed for one batch of cookies is 3f = 12

Write Equations – Page No. 431

Write an equation for the word sentence.

Question 1.
18 is 4.5 times a number.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Let n represents the unknown number.
The phrase “times” indicates the multiplication operation.
The equation is 18 = 4.5n

Question 2.
Eight more than the number of children is 24.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Let c represents the number of children.
The phrase “more than” indicates addition operation.
Thus the equation is 8 + c = 24.

Question 3.
The difference of a number and \(\frac{2}{3}\) is \(\frac{3}{8}\).
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Let n represents the unknown number.
The phrase “difference” indicates a subtraction operation.
The equation is n – \(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{3}{8}\)

Question 4.
A number divided by 0.5 is 29.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Let n represents the unknown number.
The phrase divided by indicates division operation.
The equation is n ÷ 0.5 = 29

Write a word sentence for the equation.

Question 5.
x − 14 = 52
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
14 less than x is 52
the difference of x and 14 is 52
14 fewer than a number is 52.

Question 6.
2.3m = 0.46
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
The product of 2.3 and m is 0.46
2.3 times m is .46
2.3 of m is 0.46

Question 7.
25 = k ÷ 5
Type below:
_____________

Answer: 25 is the quotient of k and 5.

Question 8.
\(4 \frac{1}{3}+q=5 \frac{1}{6}\)
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
The sum of \(4 \frac{1}{3}\) and q is [/latex]5 \frac{1}{6}[/latex]
q is more than \(4 \frac{1}{3}\) and [/latex]5 \frac{1}{6}[/latex]
\(4 \frac{1}{3}\) increased by a number is [/latex]5 \frac{1}{6}[/latex]

Question 9.
An ostrich egg weighs 2.9 pounds. The difference between the weight of this egg and the weight of an emu egg is 1.6 pounds. Write an equation that could be used to find the weight w, in pounds, of the emu egg.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: 2.9 – w = 1.6

Explanation:
An ostrich egg weighs 2.9 pounds.
The difference between the weight of this egg and the weight of an emu egg is 1.6 pounds.
The phrase “difference” indicates the subtraction operation.
The equation will be 2.9 – w = 1.6

Question 10.
In one week, the number of bowls a potter made was 6 times the number of plates. He made 90 bowls during the week. Write an equation that could be used to find the number of plates p that the potter made.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: 6p = 90

Explanation:
Given,
In one week, the number of bowls a potter made was 6 times the number of plates.
He made 90 bowls during the week.
The phrase “times” indicates the multiplication operation.
The equation to find the number of plates p that the potter made will be 6p = 90

Question 11.
When writing a word sentence as an equation, explain when to use a variable.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
In a word sentence, a variable represents “a number.”
The sum of a number and three = n + 3
The difference of five times a number and four = 5n – 4

Lesson Check – Page No. 432

Question 1.
Three friends are sharing the cost of a bucket of popcorn. The total cost of the popcorn is $5.70. Write an equation that could be used to find the amount a in dollars that each friend should pay.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: 3a = 5.70

Explanation:
Three friends are sharing the cost of a bucket of popcorn.
The total cost of the popcorn is $5.70.
The expression will be “5.70 is the product of 3 and a.
The equation is 3a = 5.70

Question 2.
Salimah had 42 photos on her phone. After she deleted some of them, she had 23 photos left. What equation could be used to find the number of photos p that Salimah deleted?
Type below:
_____________

Answer: p + 23 = 42

Explanation:
Salimah had 42 photos on her phone. After she deleted some of them, she had 23 photos left.
The expression is the sum of p and 23 is 42.
Thus the equation is p + 23 = 42

Question 3.
A rope is 72 feet long. What is the length of the rope in yards?
______ yards

Answer: 24 yard

Explanation:
A rope is 72 feet long.
Convert from feet to yards.
1 yard = 3 feet
1 foot = 1/3 yards
72 feet = 72 × 1/3 = 24 yards
Thus the length of the rope is 24 yards.

Question 4.
Julia evaluated the expression 33 + 20 ÷ 22. What value should she get as her answer?
______

Answer: 32

Explanation:
The equation is 33 + 20 ÷ 22.
33 = 3 × 3 × 3 = 27
22 = 2 × 2 = 4
27 + (20 ÷ 4)
27 + 5 = 32
The answer for the above equation is 32.

Question 5.
The sides of a triangle have lengths s, s + 4, and 3s. Write an expression in the simplest form that represents the perimeter of the triangle.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: 5s + 4

Explanation:
The perimeter of the triangle is a + b + c
P = a + b + c
P = s + s + 4 + 3s
P = 5s + 4
Thus the perimeter of the triangle is 5s + 4

Question 6.
Gary knows that p = 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) is a solution to one of the following equations. Which one has p = 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) as its solution?
\(p+2 \frac{1}{2}=5\)        \(p-2 \frac{1}{2}=5\)
\(2+p=2 \frac{1}{2}\)       4 – p = 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Type below:
_____________

Answer: p + 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 5

Explanation:
\(p+2 \frac{1}{2}=5\)
p + 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 5
p = 5 – 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
p = 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
\(p-2 \frac{1}{2}=5\)
p – 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 5
p = 5 + 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
p = 7 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
\(2+p=2 \frac{1}{2}\)
2 + p = 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
p = 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) – 2
p = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
4 – p = 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
p = 4 – 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
p = 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Share and Show – Page No. 435

Model and solve the equation by using algebra tiles or iTools.

Question 1.
x + 5 = 7
x = ______

Answer: 2

Explanation:

  • Draw 2 rectangles on your MathBoard to represent the two sides of the equation.
  • Use algebra tiles to model the equation. Model x + 5 in the left rectangle, and model 7 in the right rectangle.
  • To solve the equation, get the x tile by itself on one side. If you remove a tile from one side, you can keep the two sides equal by removing the same type of tile from the other side.
  • Remove five 1 tiles on the left side and five 1 tiles on the right side.
  • The remaining titles will be two 1 tiles on the right sides.

Question 2.
8 = x + 1
x = ______

Answer: 7

Explanation:

  • Draw 2 rectangles on your MathBoard to represent the two sides of the equation.
  • Use algebra tiles to model the equation. Model x + 1 in the left rectangle, and model 8 in the right rectangle.
  • To solve the equation, get the x tile by itself on one side. If you remove a tile from one side, you can keep the two sides equal by removing the same type of tile from the other side.
  • Remove one 1 tiles on the left side and one 1 tiles on the right side.
  • The remaining titles will be seven 1 tiles on the right sides.

Question 3.
x + 2 = 5
x = ______

Answer: 3

Explanation:

  • Draw 2 rectangles on your MathBoard to represent the two sides of the equation.
  • Use algebra tiles to model the equation. Model x + 2 in the left rectangle, and model 5 in the right rectangle.
  • To solve the equation, get the x tile by itself on one side. If you remove a tile from one side, you can keep the two sides equal by removing the same type of tile from the other side.
  • Remove two 1 tiles on the left side and five 1 tiles on the right side.
  • The remaining titles will be three 1 tiles on the right sides.

Question 4.
x + 6 = 8
x = ______

Answer: 2

Explanation:

  • Draw 2 rectangles on your MathBoard to represent the two sides of the equation.
  • Use algebra tiles to model the equation. Model x + 6 in the left rectangle, and model 8 in the right rectangle.
  • To solve the equation, get the x tile by itself on one side. If you remove a tile from one side, you can keep the two sides equal by removing the same type of tile from the other side.
  • Remove six 1 tiles on the left side and six 1 tiles on the right side.
  • The remaining titles will be two 1 tiles on the right sides.

Question 5.
5 + x = 9
x = ______

Answer: 4

Explanation:

  • Draw 2 rectangles on your MathBoard to represent the two sides of the equation.
  • Use algebra tiles to model the equation. Model x + 5 in the left rectangle, and model 9 in the right rectangle.
  • To solve the equation, get the x tile by itself on one side. If you remove a tile from one side, you can keep the two sides equal by removing the same type of tile from the other side.
  • Remove five 1 tiles on the left side and five 1 tiles on the right side.
  • The remaining titles will be four 1 tiles on the right sides.

Question 6.
5 = 4 + x
x = ______

Answer: 1

Explanation:

  • Draw 2 rectangles on your MathBoard to represent the two sides of the equation.
  • Use algebra tiles to model the equation. Model x + 4 in the left rectangle, and model 5 in the right rectangle.
  • To solve the equation, get the x tile by itself on one side. If you remove a tile from one side, you can keep the two sides equal by removing the same type of tile from the other side.
  • Remove four 1 tiles on the left side and four 1 tiles on the right side.
  • The remaining titles will be one 1 tiles on the right sides.

Solve the equation by drawing a model.

Question 7.
x + 1 = 5
x = ______

Answer: 4

Explanation:

  • Draw 2 rectangles on your MathBoard to represent the two sides of the equation.
  • Use algebra tiles to model the equation. Model x + 1 in the left rectangle, and model 5 in the right rectangle.
  • To solve the equation, get the x tile by itself on one side. If you remove a tile from one side, you can keep the two sides equal by removing the same type of tile from the other side.
  • Remove one 1 tiles on the left side and one 1 tiles on the right side.
  • The remaining titles will be four 1 tiles on the right sides.

Go Math Grade 6 Key Chapter 8 solution img-6

Question 8.
3 + x = 4
x = ______

Answer: 1

Explanation:

  • Draw 2 rectangles on your MathBoard to represent the two sides of the equation.
  • Use algebra tiles to model the equation. Model x + 3 in the left rectangle, and model 4 in the right rectangle.
  • To solve the equation, get the x tile by itself on one side. If you remove a tile from one side, you can keep the two sides equal by removing the same type of tile from the other side.
  • Remove three 1 tiles on the left side and three 1 tiles on the right side.
  • The remaining titles will be one 1 tiles on the right sides.

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key 8th chapter solution img-7

Question 9.
6 = x + 4
x = ______

Answer: 2

Explanation:

  • Draw 2 rectangles on your MathBoard to represent the two sides of the equation.
  • Use algebra tiles to model the equation. Model x + 4 in the left rectangle, and model 6 in the right rectangle.
  • To solve the equation, get the x tile by itself on one side. If you remove a tile from one side, you can keep the two sides equal by removing the same type of tile from the other side.
  • Remove four 1 tiles on the left side and four 1 tiles on the right side.
  • The remaining titles will be two 1 tiles on the right sides.

HMH 6th Grade Go Math Answer Key solution img-8

Question 10.
8 = 2 + x
x = ______

Answer: 6

Explanation:

  • Draw 2 rectangles on your MathBoard to represent the two sides of the equation.
  • Use algebra tiles to model the equation. Model x + 2 in the left rectangle, and model 8 in the right rectangle.
  • To solve the equation, get the x tile by itself on one side. If you remove a tile from one side, you can keep the two sides equal by removing the same type of tile from the other side.
  • Remove two 1 tiles on the left side and two 1 tiles on the right side.
  • The remaining titles will be six 1 tiles on the right sides.

6th Grade Go Math key solution img-9

Question 11.
Describe a Method Describe how you would draw a model to solve the equation x + 5 = 10.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: x = 5

Explanation:

  • Draw 2 rectangles on your MathBoard to represent the two sides of the equation.
  • Use algebra tiles to model the equation. Model x + 5 in the left rectangle, and model 10 in the right rectangle.
  • To solve the equation, get the x tile by itself on one side. If you remove a tile from one side, you can keep the two sides equal by removing the same type of tile from the other side.
  • Remove five 1 tiles on the left side and five 1 tiles on the right side.
  • The remaining titles will be five 1 tiles on the right sides.

Go Math Answer Key Chapter 6th Grade solution img-10

Problem Solving + Applications – Page No. 436

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations img 3

Question 12.
Interpret a Result The table shows how long several animals have lived at a zoo. The giraffe has lived at the zoo 4 years longer than the mountain lion. The equation 5 = 4 + y can be used to find the number of years y the mountain lion has lived at the zoo. Solve the equation. Then tell what the solution means.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
The table shows how long several animals have lived in a zoo.
The giraffe has lived at the zoo 4 years longer than the mountain lion.
5 = 4 + y
y = 5 – 4
y = 1
The solution is y = 1
The solution means that the mountain lion has lived at the zoo for 1 year.

Question 13.
Carlos walked 2 miles on Monday and 5 miles on Saturday. The number of miles he walked on those two days is 3 miles more than the number of miles he walked on Friday. Write and solve an addition equation to find the number of miles Carlos walked on Friday
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Given that,
Carlos walked 2 miles on Monday and 5 miles on Saturday.
The number of miles he walked on those two days is 3 miles more than the number of miles he walked on Friday.
The equation is f + 3 = 2 + 5
f + 3 = 7
f = 7 – 3
f = 4
The solution is f = 4
The solution means that Carlos walked 4 miles on Friday.

Question 14.
Sense or Nonsense? Gabriela is solving the equation x + 1 = 6. She says that the solution must be less than 6. Is Gabriela’s statement sense or nonsense? Explain.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: Gabriela’s statement makes sense.
x + 1 = 6
x = 6 – 1
x = 5
Thus the solution is less than 6.

Question 15.
The Hawks beat the Tigers by 5 points in a football game. The Hawks scored a total of 12 points.
Use numbers and words to explain how this model can be used to solve the equation x + 5 = 12.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations img 4
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Remove 5 squares from each side. The rectangle is by itself on the left and 7 squares are on the right side.
So, the solution is x = 7

Model and Solve Addition Equations – Page No. 437

Model and solve the equation by using algebra tiles.

Question 1.
x + 6 = 9
x = ________

Answer: 3

Explanation:

  • Draw 2 rectangles on your MathBoard to represent the two sides of the equation.
  • Use algebra tiles to model the equation. Model x + 6 in the left rectangle, and model 9 in the right rectangle.
  • To solve the equation, get the x tile by itself on one side. If you remove a tile from one side, you can keep the two sides equal by removing the same type of tile from the other side.
  • Remove six 1 tiles on the left side and six 1 tiles on the right side.
  • The remaining titles will be three 1 tiles on the right sides.

Thus x = 3

Question 2.
8 + x = 10
x = ________

Answer: 2

Explanation:

  • Draw 2 rectangles on your MathBoard to represent the two sides of the equation.
  • Use algebra tiles to model the equation. Model x + 8 in the left rectangle, and model 10 in the right rectangle.
  • To solve the equation, get the x tile by itself on one side. If you remove a tile from one side, you can keep the two sides equal by removing the same type of tile from the other side.
  • Remove eight 1 tiles on the left side and eight 1 tiles on the right side.
  • The remaining titles will be two 1 tiles on the right sides.

8 + x = 10
x = 10 – 8 = 2
x = 2

Question 3.
9 = x + 1
x = ________

Answer: 8

Explanation:

  • Draw 2 rectangles on your MathBoard to represent the two sides of the equation.
  • Use algebra tiles to model the equation. Model x + 1 in the left rectangle, and model 9 in the right rectangle.
  • To solve the equation, get the x tile by itself on one side. If you remove a tile from one side, you can keep the two sides equal by removing the same type of tile from the other side.
  • Remove 1 tile on the left side and 1 tile on the right side.
  • The remaining titles will be eight 1 tiles on the right sides.

Thus x = 8

Solve the equation by drawing a model.

Question 4.
x + 4 = 7
x = ________

Answer: 3

Go Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 solution img-1

Question 5.
x + 6 = 10
x = ________

Answer: 4
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 8 solution img-2

Problem Solving

Question 6.
The temperature at 10:00 was 10°F. This is 3°F warmer than the temperature at 8:00. Model and solve the equation x + 3 = 10 to find the temperature x in degrees Fahrenheit at 8:00.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: x = 7

Explanation:
The temperature at 10:00 was 10°F. This is 3°F warmer than the temperature at 8:00.
The equation is x + 3 = 10
x = 10 – 3 = 7

Question 7.
Jaspar has 7 more checkers left than Karen does. Jaspar has 9 checkers left. Write and solve an addition equation to find out how many checkers Karen has left.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: c = 2

Explanation:
Jaspar has 7 more checkers left than Karen does. Jaspar has 9 checkers left.
The expression is c + 7 = 9
The equation to find out how many checkers Karen has left is c + 7 = 9.

Question 8.
Explain how to use a drawing to solve an addition equation such as x + 8 = 40.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: 32

Explanation:

  • Draw 2 rectangles on your MathBoard to represent the two sides of the equation.
  • Use algebra tiles to model the equation. Model x + 8 in the left rectangle, and model 40 in the right rectangle.
  • To solve the equation, get the x tile by itself on one side. If you remove a tile from one side, you can keep the two sides equal by removing the same type of tile from the other side.
  • Remove eight 1 tile on the left side and eight 1 tile on the right side.
  • The remaining titles will be 32 1 tiles on the right side.

x + 8 = 40
x = 40 – 8
x = 32

Lesson Check – Page No. 438

Question 1.
What is the solution of the equation that is modeled by the algebra tiles?
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations img 5
x = ________

Answer: 1

The equation is x + 6 = 7
x = 7 – 6
x = 1

Question 2.
Alice has played soccer for 8 more years than Sanjay has. Alice has played for 12 years. The equation y + 8 = 12 can be used to find the number of years y Sanjay has played. How long has Sanjay played soccer?
________ years

Answer: 4 years

Explanation:
Alice has played soccer for 8 more years than Sanjay has. Alice has played for 12 years.
the equation is y + 8 = 12
y = 12 – 8
y = 4 years
Sanjay played soccer games for 4 years.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
A car’s gas tank has a capacity of 16 gallons. What is the capacity of the tank in pints?
________ pints

Answer: 128 pints

Explanation:
A car’s gas tank has a capacity of 16 gallons.
Convert from gallons to pints.
1 gallon = 8 pints
16 gallons = 16 × 8 = 128 pints
Thus the capacity of the tank is 128 pints.

Question 4.
Craig scored p points in a game. Marla scored twice as many points as Craig but 5 fewer than Nelson scored. How many points did Nelson score?
Type below:
_____________

Answer: 2p + 5

Explanation:
Craig scored p points in a game.
Marla scored twice as many points as Craig but 5 fewer than Nelson score.
The equation will be 2p + 5.

Question 5.
Simplify 3x + 2(4y + x).
Type below:
_____________

Answer: 5x + 8y

Explanation:
The expression is 3x + 2(4y + x)
3x + 2 × 4y + 2 × x
3x + 8y + 2x
Combine the like terms.
5x + 8y
3x + 2(4y + x) = 5x + 8y

Question 6.
The Empire State Building in New York City is 443.2 meters tall. This is 119.2 meters taller than the Eiffel Tower in Paris. Write an equation that can be used to find the height h in meters of the Eiffel Tower.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: 119.2 + h = 443.2

Explanation:
The Empire State Building in New York City is 443.2 meters tall.
This is 119.2 meters taller than the Eiffel Tower in Paris.
Here we have to use the addition operation.
The equation is 119.2 + h = 443.2

Share and Show – Page No. 441

Question 1.
Solve the equation n + 35 = 80.
n = ________

Answer: 45

Explanation:
The given equation is
n + 35 = 80
n = 80 – 35
n = 45

Solve the equation, and check the solution.

Question 2.
16 + x = 42
x = ________

Answer: 26

Explanation:
Given the equation 16 + x = 42
x + 16 = 42
x = 42 – 16
x = 26

Question 3.
y + 6.2 = 9.1
y = ________

Answer: 2.9

Explanation:
The given equation is
y + 6.2 = 9.1
y = 9.1 – 6.2
y = 2.9

Question 4.
m + \(\frac{3}{10}=\frac{7}{10}\)
m = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{4}{10}\)

Explanation:
The given equation is
m + \(\frac{3}{10}=\frac{7}{10}\)
m = \(\frac{7}{10}\) – \(\frac{3}{10}\)
The denominators are common so subtract the numerators
m = \(\frac{4}{10}\)

Question 5.
z – \(\frac{1}{3}=1 \frac{2}{3}\)
z = ________

Answer: 2

Explanation:
The given equation is
z – \(\frac{1}{3}=1 \frac{2}{3}\)
z = \(\frac{1}{3}\) + 1 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
z = 1 + \(\frac{1}{3}\) + \(\frac{2}{3}\)
z = 1 + \(\frac{3}{3}\)
z = 1 + 1 = 2
Thus the value of z is 2.

Question 6.
12 = x − 24
x = ________

Answer: 36

Explanation:
The given equation is
12 = x − 24
x – 24 = 12
x = 12 + 24
x = 36
Thus the value of x is 36.

Question 7.
25.3 = w − 14.9
w = ________

Answer: 40.2

Explanation:
The given equation is
25.3 = w − 14.9
w – 14.9 = 25.3
w = 25.3 + 14.9
w = 40.2
The value of w is 40.2

On Your Own

Practice: Copy and Solve Solve the equation, and check the solution.

Question 8.
y − \(\frac{3}{4}=\frac{1}{2}\)
y = _______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:
The given equation is
y − \(\frac{3}{4}=\frac{1}{2}\)
y = \(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\)
y = 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Therefore the value of y is 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\).

Question 9.
75 = n + 12
n = ________

Answer: 63

Explanation:
The given equation is
75 = n + 12
n + 12 = 75
n = 75 – 12
n = 63
The value of n is 63.

Question 10.
m + 16.8 = 40
m = ________

Answer: 23.2

Explanation:
The given equation is
m + 16.8 = 40
m = 40 – 16.8
m = 23.2
The value of m is 23.2

Question 11.
w − 36 = 56
w = ________

Answer: 92

Explanation:
The given equation is
w − 36 = 56
w = 56 + 36
w = 92
The value of  is 92.

Question 12.
8 \(\frac{2}{5}\) = d + 2\(\frac{2}{5}\)
d = ________

Answer: 6

Explanation:
The given equation is
8 \(\frac{2}{5}\) = d + 2\(\frac{2}{5}\)
d + 2\(\frac{2}{5}\) = 8 \(\frac{2}{5}\)
d = 8 \(\frac{2}{5}\) – 2\(\frac{2}{5}\)
d = 8 + \(\frac{2}{5}\) – 2 – \(\frac{2}{5}\)
d = 8 – 2 = 6
Thus the value of d is 6.

Question 13.
8.7 = r − 1.4
r = ________

Answer: 10.1

Explanation:
The given equation is
8.7 = r − 1.4
r − 1.4 = 8.7
r = 8.7 + 1.4
r = 10.1
The value of r is 10.1

Question 14.
The temperature dropped 8 degrees between 6:00 p.m. and midnight. The temperature at midnight was 26ºF. Write and solve an equation to find the temperature at 6:00 p.m.
________ ºF

Answer: 34ºF

Explanation:
The temperature dropped 8 degrees between 6:00 p.m. and midnight.
The temperature at midnight was 26ºF.
26ºF + 8ºF = 34ºF
The equation to find the temperature at 6:00 p.m is 34ºF

Question 15.
Reason Abstractly Write an addition equation that has the solution x = 9.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: x + 4 = 13

Explanation:
Let the equation be x + 4 = 13
x = 13 – 4
x = 9

Unlock the Problem – Page No. 442

Question 16.
In July, Kimberly made two deposits into her bank account. She made no withdrawals. At the end of July, her account balance was $120.62. Write and solve an equation to find Kimberly’s balance at the beginning of July.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations img 6
a. What do you need to find?
Type below:
_____________

Answer: We need to find Kimberly’s balance at the beginning of July.

Question 16.
b. What information do you need from the bank statement?
Type below:
_____________

Answer: We need the information about the deposit on July 12 and July 25 from the bank statement.

Question 16.
c. Write an equation you can use to solve the problem. Explain what the variable represents.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
x = bank account balance
y = deposit 1
z = deposit 2
x = y + z

Question 16.
d. Solve the equation. Show your work and describe each step.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: 120.62 = y + z
Where y is the deposit 1 and z represents the deposit 2.
y = $45.50, z = $43.24
45.50 + 43.24 = 88.74
x + 88.74 = 120.62

Question 16.
e. Write Kimberly’s balance at the beginning of July.
$ _______

Answer: 31.88

Explanation:
x + 88.74 = 120.62
x = 120.62 – 88.74
x = $31.88
Kimberly’s balance at the beginning of July is $31.88

Question 17.
If x + 6 = 35, what is the value of x + 4? Explain how to find the value without solving the equation.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
x + 6 = 35
x + 4 + 2 = 35
x  + 4 = 35 – 2
x + 4 = 33
Thus the value of x + 4 = 33

Question 18.
Select the equations that have the solution n = 23. Mark all that apply.
Options:
a. 16 + n = 39
b. n – 4 = 19
c. 25 = n – 2
d. 12 = n – 11

Answer: A, B, D

Explanation:
a. 16 + n = 39
n = 23
16 + 23 = 39
39 = 39
The variable is a solution.
b. n – 4 = 19
n = 23
23 – 4 = 19
19 = 19
The variable is a solution.
c. 25 = n – 2
25 = 23 – 2
25 ≠ 21
The variable is not a solution.
d. 12 = n – 11
n = 23
12 = 23 – 11
12 = 12
The variable is a solution.
Thus the correct answers are options A, B, D.

Solve Addition and Subtraction Equations – Page No. 443

Solve the equation, and check the solution.

Question 1.
y − 14 = 23
y = _______

Answer: 37

Explanation:
y − 14 = 23
y = 23 + 14
y = 37
Thus the solution is 37.

Question 2.
x + 3 = 15
x = _______

Answer: 12

Explanation:
The equation is x + 3 = 15
x = 15 – 3
x = 12
The solution is 12.

Question 3.
n + \(\frac{2}{5}=\frac{4}{5}\)
n = _______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{5}\)

Explanation:
The equation is n + \(\frac{2}{5}=\frac{4}{5}\)
n + \(\frac{2}{5}\) = \(\frac{4}{5}\)
n = \(\frac{4}{5}\) – \(\frac{2}{5}\)
n = (4 – 2)/5
n = \(\frac{2}{5}\)
Thus the solution is \(\frac{2}{5}\)

Question 4.
16 = m − 14
m = _______

Answer: 30

Explanation:
The equation is 16 = m − 14
m – 14 = 16
m = 16 + 14
m = 30
The solution is m = 30

Question 5.
w − 13.7 = 22.8
w = _______

Answer: 36.5

Explanation:
The equation is w − 13.7 = 22.8
w = 22.8 + 13.7
w = 36.5
The solution is w = 36.5

Question 6.
s + 55 = 55
s = _______

Answer: 0

Explanation:
The equation is s + 55 = 55
s = 55 – 55
s = 0
The solution is s = 0

Question 7.
23 = x − 12
x = _______

Answer: 35

Explanation:
The given equation is 23 = x – 12
x – 12 = 23
x = 23 + 12
x = 35
The solution is x = 35.

Question 8.
p − 14 = 14
p = _______

Answer: 28

Explanation:
The given equation is p − 14 = 14
p = 14 + 14
p = 28
The solution is p = 28.

Question 9.
m − \(2 \frac{3}{4}=6 \frac{1}{2}\)
m = _______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 9 \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:
The given equation is m − \(2 \frac{3}{4}=6 \frac{1}{2}\)
m – 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\) = 6 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
m = 6 \(\frac{1}{2}\) + 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
m = 6 + 2 + \(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\)
m = 8 + 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
m = 9 \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Problem Solving

Question 10.
A recipe calls for 5 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of flour. Lorenzo only has 3 \(\frac{3}{4}\) cups of flour. Write and solve an equation to find the additional amount of flour Lorenzo needs to make the recipe.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: 1 \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Explanation:
A recipe calls for 5 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of flour.
Lorenzo only has 3 \(\frac{3}{4}\) cups of flour.
x + 3 \(\frac{3}{4}\) = 5 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
x = 5 \(\frac{1}{2}\) – 3 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
x =  1 \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Question 11.
Jan used 22.5 gallons of water in the shower. This amount is 7.5 gallons less than the amount she used for washing clothes. Write and solve an equation to find the amount of water Jan used to wash clothes.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: 30

Explanation:
Jan used 22.5 gallons of water in the shower.
This amount is 7.5 gallons less than the amount she used for washing clothes.
Let the amount of water Jan used to wash clothes be x
x – 7.5 = 22.5
x = 22.5 + 7.5
x = 30
Therefore the amount of water Jan used to wash clothes is 30 gallons.

Question 12.
Explain how to check if your solution to an equation is correct.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
i. Evaluate the left-hand side expression at the given value to get a number.
ii. Evaluate the right-hand side expression at the given value to get a number.
iii. See if the numbers match.

Lesson Check – Page No. 444

Question 1.
The price tag on a shirt says $21.50. The final cost of the shirt, including sales tax, is $23.22. The equation 21.50 + t = 23.22 can be used to find the amount of sales tax t in dollars. What is the sales tax?
$ _______

Answer: 1.72

Explanation:
The price tag on a shirt says $21.50.
The final cost of the shirt, including sales tax, is $23.22.
The equation is 21.50 + t = 23.22
t = 23.22 – 21.50
t = 1.72
Therefore the sales tax is $1.72 dollars.

Question 2.
The equation l – 12.5 = 48.6 can be used to find the original length l in centimeters of a wire before it was cut. What was the original length of the wire?
_______ centimeters

Answer: 61.1 centimeters

Explanation:
The equation l – 12.5 = 48.6 can be used to find the original length l in centimeters of a wire before it was cut.
l – 12.5 = 48.6
l = 48.6 + 12.5
l = 61.1 centimeters
Thus the original length of the wire is 61.1 centimeters.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
How would you convert a mass in centigrams to a mass in milligrams?
Type below:
_____________

Answer: The conversion factor is 10; so 1 centigram = 10 milligrams. In other words, the value in cg multiplies by 10 to get a value in mg.

Question 4.
In the expression 4 + 3x + 5y, what is the coefficient of x?
The coefficient is _______

Answer:
A numerical or constant quantity placed before and multiplying the variable in an algebraic expression.
Thus the coefficient of 3x is 3.

Question 5.
Write an expression that is equivalent to 10c.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
-2(-5c) expand the brackets
-2 × -5c
= 10c

Question 6.
Miranda bought a $7-movie ticket and popcorn for a total of $10. The equation 7 + x = 10 can be used to find the cost x in dollars of the popcorn. How much did the popcorn cost?
$ _______

Answer: 3

Explanation:
Miranda bought a $7-movie ticket and popcorn for a total of $10.
The equation is 7 + x = 10
x = 10 – 7
x = 3
Therefore the cost of the popcorn is $3.

Share and Show – Page No. 447

Model and solve the equation by using algebra tiles.

Question 1.
4x = 16
x = _______

Answer: 4

Explanation:

  • Draw 2 rectangles on your Mathboard to represent the two sides of the equation.
  • Use algebra tiles to model the equation. Model 4x in the left rectangle, and model 16 in the right rectangle.
  • There are four x tiles on the left side of your model. To solve the equation by using the model, you need to find the value of one x tile.
  • To do this, divide each side of your model into 4 equal groups.

Question 2.
3x = 12
x = _______

Answer: 4

Explanation:

  • Draw 2 rectangles on your Mathboard to represent the two sides of the equation.
  • Use algebra tiles to model the equation. Model 3x in the left rectangle, and model 12 in the right rectangle.
  • There are three x tiles on the left side of your model. To solve the equation by using the model, you need to find the value of one x tile.
  • To do this, divide each side of your model into 3 equal groups.

Question 3.
4 = 4x
x = _______

Answer: 1

Explanation:

  • Draw 2 rectangles on your Mathboard to represent the two sides of the equation.
  • Use algebra tiles to model the equation. Model 4x in the left rectangle, and model 4 in the right rectangle.
  • There are four x tiles on the left side of your model. To solve the equation by using the model, you need to find the value of one x tile.
  • To do this, divide each side of your model into 4 equal groups.

Question 4.
3x = 9
x = _______

Answer: 3

Explanation:

  • Draw 2 rectangles on your Mathboard to represent the two sides of the equation.
  • Use algebra tiles to model the equation. Model 3x in the left rectangle, and model 9 in the right rectangle.
  • There are three x tiles on the left side of your model. To solve the equation by using the model, you need to find the value of one x tile.
  • To do this, divide each side of your model into 3 equal groups.

Question 5.
2x = 10
x = _______

Answer: 5

Explanation:

  • Draw 2 rectangles on your Mathboard to represent the two sides of the equation.
  • Use algebra tiles to model the equation. Model 2x in the left rectangle, and model 10 in the right rectangle.
  • There are two x tiles on the left side of your model. To solve the equation by using the model, you need to find the value of one x tile.
  • To do this, divide each side of your model into two equal groups.

Question 6.
15 = 5x
x = _______

Answer: 3

Explanation:

  • Draw 2 rectangles on your Mathboard to represent the two sides of the equation.
  • Use algebra tiles to model the equation. Model 5x in the left rectangle, and model 15 in the right rectangle.
  • There are five x tiles on the left side of your model. To solve the equation by using the model, you need to find the value of one x tile.
  • To do this, divide each side of your model into five equal groups.

Solve the equation by drawing a model.

Question 7.
4x = 8
x = _______

Answer: 2
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key 8th chapter solution img-11

Question 8.
3x = 18
x = _______

Answer: 6
6th Grade Go Math Solution Key solution img-12

Problem Solving + Applications

Question 9.
Communicate Explain the steps you use to solve a multiplication equation with algebra tiles.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
To solve an equation, model the terms of the equation on both sides of an equals sign.
Isolate the variable on one side by adding opposites and creating zero pairs.
To remove a factor from the variable, divide the sides into rows equal to the factor, and distribute the terms equally among all the rows.

Page No. 448

The bar graph shows the number of countries that competed in the first four modern Olympic Games. Use the bar graph for 10–11.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations img 7

Question 10.
Naomi is doing a report about the 1900 and 1904 Olympic Games. Each page will contain info7rmation about 4 of the countries that competed each year. Write and solve an equation to find the number of pages Naomi will need.
_______ pages

Answer: 9 pages

Explanation:
By seeing the above table we can say that the equation is 4x = 36
The number of countries that competed in the 1900 summer Olympic games is 24.
The number of countries that competed in the 1904 summer Olympic games is 12.
The total number of countries competed in total is 36.
Each page of Naomi’s report contains information about 4 of the countries that competed each year.
4x = 36
x = 36/4
x = 9
Thus Naomi would require 9 pages to complete her report.

Question 11.
Pose a Problem Use the information in the bar graph to write and solve a problem involving a multiplication equation.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
By seeing the above table we can say that the equation is 4x = 72
The number of countries that competed in the 1900 summer Olympic games is 24.
The number of countries that competed in the 1904 summer Olympic games is 12.
The number of countries that competed in the 1896 summer Olympic games is 14.
The number of countries that competed in the 1908 summer Olympic games is 22.
The total number of countries competed in total is 72.
4x = 72
x = 72/4
x = 18

Question 12.
The equation 7s = 21 can be used to find the number of snakes s in each cage at a zoo. Solve the equation. Then tell what the solution means.
s = _______

Answer: 3

Explanation:
The equation 7s = 21 can be used to find the number of snakes s in each cage at a zoo. Solve the equation.
7 × s = 21
s = 21/7 = 3
The solution s is 3.

Question 13.
A choir is made up of 6 vocal groups. Each group has an equal number of singers. There are 18 singers in the choir. Solve the equation 6p = 18 to find the number of singers in each group. Use a model.
_______ singers

Answer: 3 singers

Explanation:
A choir is made up of 6 vocal groups. Each group has an equal number of singers.
There are 18 singers in the choir.
The equation 6p = 18
p = 18/6 = 3
p = 3
The solution p is 3.

Model and Solve Multiplication Equations – Page No. 449

Model and solve the equation by using algebra tiles.

Question 1.
2x = 8
x = _______

Answer: 4

Explanation:

  • Draw 2 rectangles on your Mathboard to represent the two sides of the equation.
  • Use algebra tiles to model the equation. Model 2x in the left rectangle, and model 8 in the right rectangle.
  • There are two x tiles on the left side of your model. To solve the equation by using the model, you need to find the value of one x tile.
  • To do this, divide each side of your model into two equal groups.

Question 2.
5x = 10
x = _______

Answer: 2

Explanation:

  • Draw 2 rectangles on your Mathboard to represent the two sides of the equation.
  • Use algebra tiles to model the equation. Model 5x in the left rectangle, and model 10 in the right rectangle.
  • There are five x tiles on the left side of your model. To solve the equation by using the model, you need to find the value of one x tile.
  • To do this, divide each side of your model into five equal groups.

Question 3.
21 = 3x
x = _______

Answer: 7

Explanation:

  • Draw 2 rectangles on your Mathboard to represent the two sides of the equation.
  • Use algebra tiles to model the equation. Model 3x in the left rectangle, and model 21 in the right rectangle.
  • There are three x tiles on the left side of your model. To solve the equation by using the model, you need to find the value of one x tile.
  • To do this, divide each side of your model into three equal groups.

Solve the equation by drawing a model.

Question 4.
6 = 3x

Answer: 2
HMH Go Math Grade 6 Key Chapter 8 solution img-13

Question 5.
4x = 12
x = _______

Answer: 3
Go Math 6th Grade Answer Key chapter 8 solution img-14

Problem Solving

Question 6.
A chef used 20 eggs to make 5 omelets. Model and solve the equation 5x = 20 to find the number of eggs x in each omelet.
_______ eggs

Answer: 4

Explanation:
A chef used 20 eggs to make 5 omelets.
The equation is 5x = 20
x = 50/5 = 4
Thus there are 4 eggs in each omelet.

Question 7.
Last month, Julio played 3 times as many video games as Scott did. Julio played 18 video games. Write and solve an equation to find the number of video games Scott played.
_______ video games

Answer: 6

Explanation:
Last month, Julio played 3 times as many video games as Scott did. Julio played 18 video games.
The equation will be 3x = 18
x = 18/3 = 6
x = 6
The number of video games Scott played is 6.

Question 8.
Write a multiplication equation, and explain how you can solve it by using a model.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
15 = 5x
Explanation:

  • Draw 2 rectangles on your Mathboard to represent the two sides of the equation.
  • Use algebra tiles to model the equation. Model 5x in the left rectangle, and model 15 in the right rectangle.
  • There are five x tiles on the left side of your model. To solve the equation by using the model, you need to find the value of one x tile.
  • To do this, divide each side of your model into five equal groups.

Lesson Check – Page No. 450

Question 1.
What is the solution of the equation that is modeled by the algebra tiles?
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations img 8
x = 1 _______

Answer: 1

Explanation:
The equation for the above figure is 3x = 3
Substitute x = 1
3(1) = 3
3/3 = 1
Thus the solution is 1.

Question 2.
Carlos bought 5 tickets to a play for a total of $20. The equation 5c = 20 can be used to find the cost c in dollars of each ticket. How much does each ticket cost?
$ _______

Answer: 4

Explanation:
Carlos bought 5 tickets to a play for a total of $20.
The equation is 5c = 20
c = 20/5 = 4
c = 4
The cost of each ticket is $4.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
A rectangle is 12 feet wide and 96 inches long. What is the area of the rectangle?
_______ square feet

Answer: 1152

Explanation:
A rectangle is 12 feet wide and 96 inches long.
Area of rectangle is l × w
A = 12 × 96
A = 1152 square feet.
Thus the area of the rectangle is 1152 square feet.

Question 4.
Evaluate the algebraic expression 24 – x ÷ y for x = 8 and y = 2.
_______

Answer: 20

Explanation:
24 – x ÷ y for x = 8 and y = 2.
Substitute the value of x and y in the equation.
24 – (8 ÷ 2)
24 – 4 = 20

Question 5.
Ana bought a 15.5-pound turkey at the grocery store this month. The equation p – 15.5 = 2.5 can be used to find the weight p, in pounds, of the turkey she bought last month. What is the solution of the equation?
p = _______

Answer: 18

Explanation:
Ana bought a 15.5-pound turkey at the grocery store this month.
The equation is p – 15.5 = 2.5
p = 2.5 + 15.5
p = 18
The solution for the equation is 18.

Question 6.
A pet store usually keeps 12 birds per cage, and there are 7 birds in the cage now. The equation 7 + x = 12 can be used to find the remaining number of birds x that can be placed in the cage. What is the solution of the equation?
x = _______

Answer: 5

Explanation:
A pet store usually keeps 12 birds per cage, and there are 7 birds in the cage now.
The equation is 7 + x = 12
x = 12 – 7
x = 5
Thus the solution of the equation is 5.

Share and Show – Page No. 453

Question 1.
Solve the equation 2.5m = 10.
m = _______

Answer: 4

Explanation:
2.5m = 10
m = 10/2.5
m = 4

Solve the equation, and check the solution.

Question 2.
3x = 210
x = _______

Answer: 70

Explanation:
3x = 210
x = 210/3
x = 70

Question 3.
2.8 = 4t
t = _______

Answer: 0.7

Explanation:
2.8 = 4t
4t = 2.8
t = 2.8/4
t = 0.7

Question 4.
\(\frac{1}{3}\)n = 15
n = _______

Answer: 45

Explanation:
\(\frac{1}{3}\)n = 15
n = 15 × 3
n = 45

Question 5.
\(\frac{1}{2}\)y = \(\frac{1}{10}\)
y = _______

Answer: \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{1}{2}\)y = \(\frac{1}{10}\)
y = \(\frac{1}{10}\) × 2
y = \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Question 6.
25 = \(\frac{a}{5}\)
a = _______

Answer: 125

Explanation:
25 = \(\frac{a}{5}\)
a = 25 × 5
a = 125

Question 7.
1.3 = \(\frac{c}{4}\)
c = _______

Answer: 5.2

Explanation:
1.3 = \(\frac{c}{4}\)
c = 1.3 × 4
c = 5.2

On Your Own

Practice: Copy and Solve Solve the equation, and check the solution.

Question 8.
150 = 6m
m = _______

Answer: 25

Explanation:
6m = 150
m = 150/6
m = 25

Question 9.
14.7 = \(\frac{b}{7}\)
b = _______

Answer: 102.9

Explanation:
14.7 = \(\frac{b}{7}\)
b = 14.7 × 7
b = 102.9

Question 10.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{3}{5}\)s
s = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{5}{12}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{3}{5}\)s
\(\frac{1}{4}\) × \(\frac{5}{3}\) = s
s = \(\frac{5}{12}\)

Question 11.
There are 100 calories in 8 fluid ounces of orange juice and 140 calories in 8 fluid ounces of pineapple juice. Tia mixed 4 fluid ounces of each juice. Write and solve an equation to find the number of calories in each fluid ounce of Tia’s juice mixture.
_______ calories

Answer: 15 calories

Explanation:
Number of calories in 8 ounces of orange juice = 100
Number of calories in 1 ounce of juice = 100/8
Number of calories in 4 ounces of juice 100/8 × 4 = 50 calories
Number of calories in 8 ounces of pineapple juice = 140
Number of calories in 1 ounce of juice = 140/8
Number of calories in 4 ounces of pineapple juice = 140/8 × 4 =70 calories
Now the mixture has 50 + 70 calories = 120 calories in 8 ounces
So, 1 ounce of the mixture has 120/8 = 15 calories.

Question 12.
Write a division equation that has the solution x = 16.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
2x = 32
x = 32/2
x = 16
Thus the equation is x = 16.

Problem Solving + Applications – Page No. 454

What’s the Error?

Question 13.
Melinda has a block of clay that weighs 14.4 ounces. She divides the clay into 6 equal pieces. To find the weight w in ounces of each piece, Melinda solved the equation 6w = 14.4.
Look at how Melinda solved the equation. Find her error.
6w = 14.4
\(\frac{6 w}{6}\) = 6 × 14.4
w = 86.4
Correct the error. Solve the equation, and explain your steps.
Describe the error that Melinda made
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Melinda has a block of clay that weighs 14.4 ounces. She divides the clay into 6 equal pieces.
The equation is 6w = 14.4
The error of Melinda is she used the multiplication equation to solve the equation.
She must have used the division equation to get the solution.
6w = 14.4
w = 14.4/6
w = 2.4

Question 14.
For numbers 14a−14d, choose Yes or No to indicate whether the equation has the solution x = 15.
14a. 15x = 30
14b. 4x = 60
14c. \(\frac{x}{5}\) = 3
14d. \(\frac{x}{3}\) = 5
14a. _____________
14b. _____________
14c. _____________
14d. _____________

Answer:
Given the value of x is 15
14a. 15x = 30
15 × 15 = 30
225 ≠ 30
The answer is No.
14b. 4x = 60
4 × 15 = 60
60 = 60
The answer is yes.
14c. \(\frac{x}{5}\) = 3
x/5 = 3
15/5 = 3
3 = 3
The answer is yes.
14d. \(\frac{x}{3}\) = 5
x/3 = 5
15/3 = 5
5 = 5
The answer is yes.

Solve Multiplication and Division Equations – Page No. 455

Solve the equation, and check the solution.

Question 1.
8p = 96
p = ________

Answer: 12

Explanation:
8p = 96
8 × p = 96
p = 96/8
p = 12
The solution is 12

Question 2.
\(\frac{z}{16}\) = 8
z = ________

Answer: 128

Explanation:
The given equation is
\(\frac{z}{16}\) = 8
z = 8 × 16
z = 128
The solution is 128.

Question 3.
3.5x = 14.7
x = ________

Answer: 4.2

Explanation:
The given equation is
3.5x = 14.7
x = 14.7/3.5
x = 4.2
The solution x is 4.2

Question 4.
32 = 3.2c
c = ________

Answer: 10

Explanation:
The given equation is
32 = 3.2c
3.2 × c = 32
c = 32/3.2
c = 1/0.1 = 10
The solution c is 10.

Question 5.
\(\frac{2}{5}\)w = 40
w = ________

Answer: 100

Explanation:
The given equation is
\(\frac{2}{5}\)w = 40
\(\frac{2}{5}\) × w = 40
w = 40 × 5/2
w = 200/2
w = 100

Question 6.
\(\frac{a}{14}\) = 6.8
a = ________

Answer: 95.2

Explanation:
The given equation is
\(\frac{a}{14}\) = 6.8
a = 6.8 × 14
a = 95.2

Question 7.
1.6x = 1.6
x = ________

Answer: 1

Explanation:
The given equation is
1.6x = 1.6
x = 1.6/1.6
x = 1
The solution x is 1

Question 8.
23.8 = 3.5b
b = ________

Answer: 6.8

Explanation:
The given equation is
23.8 = 3.5b
3.5b = 23.8
b = 23.8/3.5
b = 6.8
Thus the solution of the variable b is 6.8

Question 9.
\(\frac{3}{5}\) = \(\frac{2}{3}\)t
t = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{9}{10}\)

Explanation:
The given equation is
\(\frac{3}{5}\) = \(\frac{2}{3}\)t
t = \(\frac{3}{5}\) × \(\frac{3}{2}\)
t = \(\frac{9}{10}\)
Thus the solution of the variable t is \(\frac{9}{10}\)

Problem Solving

Question 10.
Anne runs 6 laps on a track. She runs a total of 1 mile, or 5,280 feet. Write and solve an equation to find the distance, in feet, that she runs in each lap.
________ feet

Answer: 880

Explanation:
Anne runs 6 laps on a track. She runs a total of 1 mile, or 5,280 feet.
Let the l represents the runs in each lap.
6 × l = 5280 feet
l = 5280/6
l = 880 feet
Therefore Anne runs 880 feets in each lap.

Question 11.
In a serving of 8 fluid ounces of pomegranate juice, there are 32.8 grams of carbohydrates. Write and solve an equation to find the amount of carbohydrates in each fluid ounce of the juice.
________ grams

Answer: 4.1

Explanation:
Given, In a serving of 8 fluid ounces of pomegranate juice, there are 32.8 grams of carbohydrates.
Let c represents the amount of carbohydrates in each fluid ounce of the juice
8 × c = 32.8 grams
c = 32.8/8
c = 4.1 grams

Question 12.
Write and solve a word problem that can be solved by solving a multiplication equation.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
The quotient of 6 and p is 12
6 ÷ p = 12
p = 6/12
p = 1/2

Lesson Check – Page No. 456

Question 1.
Estella buys 1.8 pounds of walnuts for a total of $5.04. She solves the equation 1.8p = 5.04 to find the price p in dollars of one pound of walnuts. What does one pound of walnuts cost?
$ ________

Answer: 2.8

Explanation:
Given that, Estella buys 1.8 pounds of walnuts for a total of $5.04.
p represents the price in dollars of one pound of walnuts.
The equation to find one pound of walnuts cost is 1.8p = 5.04
1.8p = 5.04
p = 5.04/1.8
p = 2.8
Therefore the cost of one pound of walnuts is $2.8

Question 2.
Gabriel wants to solve the equation \(\frac{5}{8}\)m = 25. What step should he do to get m by itself on one side of the equation?
Type below:
_____________

Answer: 40

Explanation:
Gabriel wants to solve the equation \(\frac{5}{8}\)m = 25.
\(\frac{5}{8}\)m = 25
5m = 25 × 8
5 × m = 200
m = 200/5 = 40
Thus m = 40

Spiral Review

Question 3.
At top speed, a coyote can run at a speed of 44 miles per hour. If a coyote could maintain its top speed, how far could it run in 15 minutes?
________ miles

Answer: 11

Explanation:
At top speed, a coyote can run at a speed of 44 miles per hour.
Convert from minutes to hour.
60 minutes = 1 hour
15 minutes = 15 × 1/60 = 0.25 = 1/4
44 × 1/4 = 11 miles
A coyote can run at a speed of 11 miles for 15 minutes.

Question 4.
An online store sells DVDs for $10 each. The shipping charge for an entire order is $5.50. Frank orders d DVDs. Write an expression that represents the total cost of Frank’s DVDs.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: 10d + $5.50

Explanation:
An online store sells DVDs for $10 each.
The shipping charge for an entire order is $5.50. Frank orders d DVDs.
The expression will be the product of 10 and d more than 5.50
The expression is 10d + $5.50

Question 5.
A ring costs $27 more than a pair of earrings. The ring costs $90. Write an equation that can be used to find the cost c in dollars of the earrings.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: $90 – $27 = c

Explanation:
A ring costs $27 more than a pair of earrings.
The ring costs $90.
c represents the cost in dollars of the earrings.
Thus the equation is c + $27 = $90
c = $90 – $27.

Question 6.
The equation 3s = 21 can be used to find the number of students s in each van on a field trip. How many students are in each van?
________ students

Answer: 7 students

Explanation:
The equation 3s = 21 can be used to find the number of students s in each van on a field trip.
3s = 21
s = 21/3 = 7
s = 7
Thus there are 7 students in each van.

Share and Show – Page No. 459

Question 1.
Connor ran 3 kilometers in a relay race. His distance represents \(\frac{3}{10}\) of the total distance of the race. The equation \(\frac{3}{10}\)d = 3 can be used to find the total distance d of the race in kilometers. What was the total distance of the race?
________ kilometers

Answer: 10

Explanation:
Connor ran 3 kilometers in a relay race.
His distance represents \(\frac{3}{10}\) of the total distance of the race.
\(\frac{3}{10}\)d = 3
3 × d = 3 × 10
3 × d = 30
d = 30/3 = 10 kilometers
Therefore the total distance of the race is 10 kilometers.

Question 2.
What if Connor’s distance of 3 kilometers represented only \(\frac{2}{10}\) of the total distance of the race. What would the total distance of the race have been?
________ kilometers

Answer: 15

Explanation:
Connor’s distance of 3 kilometers represented only \(\frac{2}{10}\) of the total distance of the race.
\(\frac{2}{10}\) × d = 3
2 × d = 3 × 10
d = 30/2
d = 15 kilometers
Therefore the total distance of the race has been 15 kilometers.

Question 3.
The lightest puppy in a litter weighs 9 ounces, which is \(\frac{3}{4}\) of the weight of the heaviest puppy. The equation \(\frac{3}{4}\)w = 9 can be used to find the weight w in ounces of the heaviest puppy. How much does the heaviest puppy weigh?
________ ounces

Answer: 12

Explanation:
The lightest puppy in a litter weighs 9 ounces, which is \(\frac{3}{4}\) of the weight of the heaviest puppy.
\(\frac{3}{4}\)w = 9
3 × w = 9 × 4
3 × w = 36
w = 36/3
w = 12
The heaviest puppy weighs 12 ounces.

Question 4.
Sophia took home \(\frac{2}{5}\) of the pizza that was left over from a party. The amount she took represents \(\frac{1}{2}\) of a whole pizza. The equation \(\frac{2}{5}\)p = \(\frac{1}{2}\) can be used to find the number of pizzas p left over from the party. How many pizzas were left over?
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\) pizzas

Answer: 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) pizzas

Explanation:
Sophia took home \(\frac{2}{5}\) of the pizza that was left over from a party.
The amount she took represents \(\frac{1}{2}\) of a whole pizza.
\(\frac{2}{5}\)p = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
p = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × \(\frac{5}{2}\)
p = \(\frac{5}{4}\)
p = 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) pizzas
1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) pizzas were leftover.

Question 5.
A city received \(\frac{3}{4}\) inch of rain on July 31. This represents \(\frac{3}{10}\) of the total amount of rain the city received in July. The equation \(\frac{3}{10}\)r = \(\frac{3}{4}\) can be used to find the amount of rain r in inches the city received in July. How much rain did the city receive in July?
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\) inches of rain

Answer: 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) inches of rain

Explanation:
A city received \(\frac{3}{4}\) inch of rain on July 31.
This represents \(\frac{3}{10}\) of the total amount of rain the city received in July.
\(\frac{3}{10}\)r = \(\frac{3}{4}\)
r = \(\frac{3}{4}\) × \(\frac{10}{3}\)
r = \(\frac{30}{12}\)
r = \(\frac{5}{2}\)
r = 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
The city received 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) inches of rain in July.

On Your Own – Page No. 460

Question 6.
Carole ordered 4 dresses for $80 each, a $25 sweater, and a coat. The cost of the items without sales tax was $430. What was the cost of the coat?
$ _______

Answer: 85

Explanation:
Carole ordered 4 dresses for $80 each, a $25 sweater, and a coat.
The cost of the items without sales tax was $430.
Cost of 4 dresses is 4 × 80 = $320
$320 + $25 = $345
c + 345 = 430
c = 430 – 345
c = 85
Therefore the cost of the coat is $85

Question 7.
A dog sled race is 25 miles long. The equation \(\frac{5}{8}\)k = 25 can be used to estimate the race’s length k in kilometers. Approximately how many hours will it take a dog sled team to finish the race if it travels at an average speed of 30 kilometers per hour?
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\) hours

Answer: 1 \(\frac{1}{3}\) hours

Explanation:
A dog sled race is 25 miles long.
The equation \(\frac{5}{8}\)k = 25
k represents race length in kilometers.
\(\frac{5}{8}\)k = 25
5 × k = 25 × 8
5k = 200
k = 200/5 = 40
k = 40
Average speed is k/30
40/30 = 4/3
The average speed of 30 kilometers per hour is 1 \(\frac{1}{3}\) hours.

Question 8.
Explain a Method Explain how you could use the strategy solve a simpler problem to solve the equation \(\frac{3}{4}\)x = \(\frac{3}{10}\).
Type below:
_____________

Answer: x = \(\frac{2}{5}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{3}{4}\)x = \(\frac{3}{10}\)
x = \(\frac{3}{10}\) × \(\frac{4}{3}\)
x = \(\frac{12}{30}\)
x = \(\frac{2}{5}\)

Question 9.
In a basket of fruit, \(\frac{5}{6}\) of the pieces of fruit are apples. There are 20 apples in the display. The equation \(\frac{5}{6}\)f = 20 can be used to find how many pieces of fruit f are in the basket. Use words and numbers to explain how to solve the equation to find how many pieces of fruit are in the basket.
_______ pieces of fruit

Answer: 24

Explanation:
In a basket of fruit, \(\frac{5}{6}\) of the pieces of fruit are apples.
There are 20 apples in the display.
\(\frac{5}{6}\)f = 20
5 × f = 20 × 6
5 × f = 120
f = 120/5
f = 24
There are 24 pieces of friut in the basket.

Problem Solving Equations with Fractions – Page No. 461

Read each problem and solve.

Question 1.
Stu is 4 feet tall. This height represents \(\frac{6}{7}\) of his brother’s height. The equation \(\frac{6}{7}\)h = 4 can be used to find the height h, in feet, of Stu’s brother. How tall is Stu’s brother?
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\) feet

Answer: 4 \(\frac{2}{3}\) feet

Explanation:
Stu is 4 feet tall. This height represents \(\frac{6}{7}\) of his brother’s height.
The equation \(\frac{6}{7}\)h = 4
6/7 × h = 4
6 × h = 4 × 7
6 × h =28
h = 28/6
h = 14/3
h = 4 \(\frac{2}{3}\) feet
Thus the height of Stu’s brother in feet is 4 \(\frac{2}{3}\) feet.

Question 2.
Bryce bought a bag of cashews. He served \(\frac{7}{8}\) pound of cashews at a party. This amount represents \(\frac{2}{3}\) of the entire bag. The equation \(\frac{2}{3}\)n = \(\frac{7}{8}\) can be used to find the number of pounds n in a full bag. How many pounds of cashews were in the bag that Bryce bought?
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\) pounds

Answer: 1 \(\frac{5}{16}\)

Explanation:
Bryce bought a bag of cashews.
He served \(\frac{7}{8}\) pound of cashews at a party.
This amount represents \(\frac{2}{3}\) of the entire bag.
\(\frac{2}{3}\)n = \(\frac{7}{8}\)
n = \(\frac{7}{8}\) × \(\frac{3}{2}\)
n = \(\frac{21}{16}\)
n = 1 \(\frac{5}{16}\)
Bryce bought 1 \(\frac{5}{16}\) pounds of cashews were in the bag.

Question 3.
In Jaime’s math class, 9 students chose soccer as their favorite sport. This amount represents \(\frac{3}{8}\) of the entire class. The equation \(\frac{3}{8}\)s = 9 can be used to find the total number of students s in Jaime’s class. How many students are in Jaime’s math class?
______ students

Answer: 24 students

Explanation:
In Jaime’s math class, 9 students chose soccer as their favorite sport.
This amount represents \(\frac{3}{8}\) of the entire class.
\(\frac{3}{8}\)s = 9
3 × s = 9 × 8
3 × s = 72
s = 72/3
s = 24 students
24 students are in Jaime’s math class.

Question 4.
Write a math problem for the equation \(\frac{3}{4}\)n = \(\frac{5}{6}\). Then solve a simpler problem to find the solution.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: 1 \(\frac{1}{9}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{3}{4}\)n = \(\frac{5}{6}\)
n = \(\frac{5}{6}\) × \(\frac{4}{3}\)
n = \(\frac{20}{18}\)
n = \(\frac{10}{9}\)
n = 1 \(\frac{1}{9}\)

Lesson Check – Page No. 462

Question 1.
Roger served \(\frac{5}{8}\) pound of crackers, which was \(\frac{2}{3}\) of the entire box. What was the weight of the crackers originally in the box?
\(\frac{□}{□}\) pounds

Answer: \(\frac{15}{16}\) pounds

Explanation:
Roger served \(\frac{5}{8}\) pound of crackers, which was \(\frac{2}{3}\)
\(\frac{2}{3}\) × p = \(\frac{5}{8}\)
p = \(\frac{5}{8}\) × \(\frac{3}{2}\)
p = \(\frac{15}{16}\) pounds
\(\frac{15}{16}\) was the weight of the crackers originally in the box.

Question 2.
Bowser ate 4 \(\frac{1}{2}\) pounds of dog food. That amount is \(\frac{3}{4}\) of the entire bag of dog food. How many pounds of dog food were originally in the bag?
______ pounds

Answer 6 pounds

Explanation:
Bowser ate 4 \(\frac{1}{2}\) pounds of dog food.
That amount is \(\frac{3}{4}\) of the entire bag of dog food.
4 \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{9}{2}\)
\(\frac{3}{4}\) p = \(\frac{9}{2}\)
p = \(\frac{9}{2}\) × \(\frac{4}{3}\)
p = 6 pounds
6 pounds of dog food were originally in the bag.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
What is the quotient 4 \(\frac{2}{3}\) ÷ 4 \(\frac{1}{5}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 1 \(\frac{1}{9}\)

Explanation:
4 \(\frac{2}{3}\) ÷ 4 \(\frac{1}{5}\)
\(\frac{14}{3}\) ÷ \(\frac{21}{5}\)
= \(\frac{70}{63}\)
The mixed fraction of \(\frac{70}{63}\) is 1 \(\frac{1}{9}\)
4 \(\frac{2}{3}\) ÷ 4 \(\frac{1}{5}\) = 1 \(\frac{1}{9}\)

Question 4.
Miranda had 4 pounds, 6 ounces of clay. She divided it into 10 equal parts. How heavy was each part?
_______ ounces

Answer: 7 ounces

Explanation:
Miranda had 4 pounds, 6 ounces of clay.
She divided it into 10 equal parts.
Convert from pounds to ounces
We know that
1 pound = 16 ounces
4 pounds = 4 × 16 ounces = 64 ounces
64 ounces + 6 ounces = 70 ounces
Now divide 70 ounces into 10 equal parts.
70 ÷ 10 = 7 ounces.
Thus each part was 7 ounces.

Question 5.
The amount Denise charges to repair computers is $50 an hour plus a $25 service fee. Write an expression to show how much she will charge for h hours of work.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: 50h + 25

Explanation:
The amount Denise charges to repair computers is $50 an hour plus a $25 service fee.
The expression will be product of 50 and h more than 25.
The expression is 50h + 25.

Question 6.
Luis has saved $14 for a skateboard that costs $52. He can use the equation 14 + m = 52 to find how much more money m he needs. How much more does he need?
$ _______

Answer: 38

Explanation:
Luis has saved $14 for a skateboard that costs $52. He can use the equation 14 + m = 52
14 + m = 52
m = 52 – 14
m = 38
He needs $38 more.

Mid-Chapter Checkpoint – Vocabulary – Page No. 463

Choose the best term from the box to complete the sentence.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations img 9

Question 1.
A(n) _____ is a statement that two mathematical expressions are equal.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: An equation is a mathematical statement that two expressions are equal.

Question 2.
Adding 5 and subtracting 5 are _____.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: Solution of an equation.

Concepts and Skills

Write an equation for the word sentence.

Question 3.
The sum of a number and 4.5 is 8.2.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
The phrase “sum” indicates an addition operation.
So, the equation is n + 4.5 = 8.2

Question 4.
Three times the cost is $24.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
The phrase “times” indicates multiplication.
Multiply 3 with c.
3c = 24

Determine whether the given value of the variable is a solution of the equation.

Question 5.
x − 24 = 58; x = 82
The variable is _____________

Answer: a solution

Explanation:
82 – 24 = 58
58 = 58
Thus the variable is a solution.

Question 6.
\(\frac{1}{3}\)c = \(\frac{3}{8}\), c = \(\frac{3}{4}\)
The variable is _____________

Answer: not a solution

Explanation:
\(\frac{1}{3}\)c = \(\frac{3}{8}\)
c = \(\frac{3}{4}\)
\(\frac{1}{3}\) × \(\frac{3}{4}\) = \(\frac{3}{8}\)
\(\frac{3}{12}\) ≠ \(\frac{3}{8}\)

Solve the equation, and check the solution.

Question 7.
a + 2.4 = 7.8
a = _____

Answer: 5.4

Explanation:
Given the equation is a + 2.4 = 7.8
a + 2.4 = 7.8
a = 7.8 – 2.4
a = 5.4

Question 8.
\(b-\frac{1}{4}=3 \frac{1}{2}\)
b = _______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 3 \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Explanation:
Given the equation is \(b-\frac{1}{4}=3 \frac{1}{2}\)
b – \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 3 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
b = 3 \(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\)
b = 3 + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\)
b = 3 \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Question 9.
3x = 27
x = _______

Answer: 9

Explanation:
Given the equation is 3x = 27
x = 27/3
x = 9

Question 10.
\(\frac{1}{3} s=\frac{1}{5}\)
s = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Explanation:
Given the equation is \(\frac{1}{3} s=\frac{1}{5}\)
\(\frac{1}{3}\)s = \(\frac{1}{5}\)
s = \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Question 11.
\(\frac{t}{4}\) = 16
t = _______

Answer: 64

Explanation:
Given the equation is \(\frac{t}{4}\) = 16
t = 16 × 4
t = 64

Question 12.
\(\frac{w}{7}\) = 0.3
w = _______

Answer: 2.1

Explanation:
\(\frac{w}{7}\) = 0.3
w/7 = 0.3
w = 0.3 × 7
w = 2.1

Page No. 464

Question 13.
A stadium has a total of 18,000 seats. Of these, 7,500 are field seats, and the rest are grandstand seats. Write an equation that could be used to find the number of grandstand seats s.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: s + 7500 = 18000

Explanation:
A stadium has a total of 18,000 seats.
Of these, 7,500 are field seats, and the rest are grandstand seats.
Let s be the number of grandstand seats.
s + 7,500 = 18,000

Question 14.
Aaron wants to buy a bicycle that costs $128. So far, he has saved $56. The equation a + 56 = 128 can be used to find the amount a in dollars that Aaron still needs to save. What is the solution of the equation?
The solution is _______

Answer: 72

Explanation:
Aaron wants to buy a bicycle that costs $128. So far, he has saved $56.
The equation a + 56 = 128
a = 128 – 56
a = 72
The solution of the equation a + 56 = 128 is 72.

Question 15.
Ms. McNeil buys 2.4 gallons of gasoline. The total cost is $7.56. Write and solve an equation to find the price p in dollars of one gallon of gasoline.
$ _______

Answer: $3.15

Explanation:
Ms. McNeil buys 2.4 gallons of gasoline.
The total cost is $7.56.
2.4p = 7.56
p = 7.56/2.4
p = $3.15
The price of one gallon of gasoline is $3.15

Question 16.
Crystal is picking blueberries. So far, she has filled \(\frac{2}{3}\) of her basket, and the blueberries weigh \(\frac{3}{4}\) pound. The equation \(\frac{2}{3}\)w = \(\frac{3}{4}\) can be used to estimate the weight w in pounds of the blueberries when the basket is full. About how much will the blueberries in Crystal’s basket weigh when it is full?
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\) pounds

Answer: 1 \(\frac{1}{8}\) pounds

Explanation:
Crystal is picking blueberries. So far, she has filled \(\frac{2}{3}\) of her basket, and the blueberries weigh \(\frac{3}{4}\) pound.
The equation \(\frac{2}{3}\)w = \(\frac{3}{4}\)
w = \(\frac{3}{4}\) × \(\frac{3}{2}\)
w = \(\frac{9}{8}\)
The mixed fraction of \(\frac{9}{8}\) is 1 \(\frac{1}{8}\) pounds

Share and Show – Page No. 467

Determine whether the given value of the variable is a solution of the inequality.

Question 1.
a ≥ −6, a = −3
The variable is _____________

Answer: a solution

Explanation:
Substitute the solution a in the inequality.
a = -3
-3 ≥ -6
-3 is greater than -6
Thus the variable is a solution.

Question 2.
y < 7.8, y = 8 The variable is _____________

Answer: not a solution

Explanation:
Substitute the solution y in the inequality.
y = 8
8 is less than 7.8
8<7.8
The variable is not the solution.

Question 3.
c > \(\frac{1}{4}\), c = \(\frac{1}{5}\)
The variable is _____________

Answer: not a solution

Explanation:
Substitute the solution c in the inequality.
c = \(\frac{1}{5}\)
\(\frac{1}{5}\) > \(\frac{1}{4}\)
\(\frac{1}{5}\) is greater than \(\frac{1}{4}\)
\(\frac{1}{5}\) > \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Thus the variable is a solution.

Question 4.
x ≤ 3, x = 3
The variable is _____________

Answer: a solution

Explanation:
Substitute the solution x in the inequality.
x = 3
3 ≤ 3
3 is less than or equal to 3.
Thus the variable is a solution.

Question 5.
d < 0.52, d = 0.51
The variable is _____________

Answer: not a solution

Explanation:
Substitute the solution d in the inequality.
-0.51 < -0.52
-0.51 is greater than -0.52
The variable is not the solution.

Question 6.
t ≥ \(\frac{2}{3}\), t = \(\frac{3}{4}\)
The variable is _____________

Answer: a solution

Explanation:
Substitute the solution t in the inequality.
t = \(\frac{3}{4}\)
\(\frac{3}{4}\) ≥ \(\frac{2}{3}\)
\(\frac{3}{4}\) is greater than \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Thus the variable is a solution.

On Your Own

Practice: Copy and Solve Determine whether s = \(\frac{3}{5}\), s = 0, or s = 1.75 are solutions of the inequality.

Question 7.
s > 1
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
s > 1
s = \(\frac{3}{5}\)
\(\frac{3}{5}\) > -1
\(\frac{3}{5}\) is greater than -1.
The variable is the solution.
s = 0
0 > -1
0 is greater than -1
Thus the variable is a solution.
s = 1.75
1.75 > -1
1.75 is greater than -1
s > -1
Thus the variable is a solution.

Question 8.
s ≤ 1 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
s ≤ 1 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
s = \(\frac{3}{5}\)
\(\frac{3}{5}\) ≤ 1 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
\(\frac{3}{5}\) is less than but not equal to 1 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
The variable is not the solution.
s ≤ 1 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
s = 0
0 ≤ 1 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
The variable is not the solution.
s = 1.75
1.75 ≤ 1 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
The variable is not the solution.

Question 9.
s < 0.43
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
s < 0.43
\(\frac{3}{5}\) < 0.43
\(\frac{3}{5}\) = 0.6
0.6 is not less than 0.43
Thus the variable is not the solution.
s = 0
0 < 0.43
0 is less than 0.43
Thus the variable is the solution.
s = 1.75
1.75 < 0.43
1.75 is greater than 0.43
Thus the variable is not the solution.

Give two solutions of the inequality.

Question 10.
e < 3
Type below: _____________

Answer:
The solution to the inequality must be whole numbers less than 3.
e = 1 and 2 are the solutions because 1 and 2 are less than 3.
Thus the 2 solutions are 1 and 2.

Question 11.
p > 12
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
The solution to the inequality must be whole numbers greater than -12
p = 0 and -5 are the solutions because 0 and -5 are greater than -12.
Thus the 2 solutions are 0 and -5.

Question 12.
y ≥ 5.8
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
The solution to the inequality must be whole numbers greater than or equal to 5.8
y = 5.8 and 5.9 are the solutions because 5.8 and 5.9 greater than or equal to 5.8
Thus the 2 solutions are 5.8 and 5.9

Question 13.
Connect Symbols and Words A person must be at least 18 years old to vote. The inequality a ≥ 18 represents the possible ages a in years at which a person can vote. Determine whether a = 18, a = 17\(\frac{1}{2}\), and a = 91.5 are solutions of the inequality, and tell what the solutions mean.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
a ≥ 18
Substitute the values of a in the inequality
a = 18
18 ≥ 18
Thus the variable is the solution.
a = 17\(\frac{1}{2}\)
17\(\frac{1}{2}\) ≥ 18
17\(\frac{1}{2}\) is less than 18.
The variable is not the solution.
a = 91.5
91.5 > 18
The solution is mean.

Problem Solving + Applcations – Page No. 468

The table shows ticket and popcorn prices at five movie theater chains. Use the table for 14–15.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations img 10

Question 14.
The inequality p < 4.75 represents the prices p in dollars that Paige is willing to pay for popcorn. The inequality p < 8.00 represents the prices p in dollars that Paige is willing to pay for a movie ticket. At how many theaters would Paige be willing to buy a ticket and popcorn? ______ theater

Answer: 1

Explanation:
The inequality p < 4.75 represents the prices p in dollars that Paige is willing to pay for popcorn. The inequality p < 8.00 represents the prices p in dollars that Paige is willing to pay for a movie ticket.
From the above table, we can see that there is the only theatre with 8.00 and 4.75
So, Paige is willing to buy a ticket and popcorn from 1 theatre.

Question 15.
Sense or Nonsense? Edward says that inequality d ≥ 4.00 represents the popcorn prices in the table, where d is the price of popcorn in dollars. Is Edward’s statement sense or nonsense? Explain. Type below: _____________

Answer: Edward’s statement makes sense because all of the popcorn prices in the table are greater than or equal to $4.00.

Question 16.
Use Math Vocabulary Explain why the statement t > 13 is an inequality.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: The statement is equality because it compares two amounts t and 13 using an inequality symbol.

Question 17.
The minimum wind speed for a storm to be considered a hurricane is 74 miles per hour. The inequality w ≥ 74 represents the possible wind speeds of a hurricane.
Two possible solutions for the inequality w ≥ 74 are _____ and _____.
Two possible solutions for the inequality w ≥ 74 are _____ and _____

Answer: 75 and 80

Explanation:
Given that w is greater than or equal to 74.
The two possible solutions for the inequality w ≥ 74 are 75 and 80.

Solutions of Inequalities – Page No. 469

Determine whether the given value of the variable is a solution of the inequality.

Question 1.
s ≥ 1, s = 1
The variable is _____________

Answer: a solution

Explanation:
The inequality is s ≥ 1
s = 1
1 ≥ 1
1 is a positive number so 1 will be greater than or equal to -1
Thus the variable is a solution.

Question 2.
p < 0, p = 4
The variable is _____________

Answer: not a solution

Explanation:
The inequality is p < 0
Given p = 4
Substitute p = 4 in the inequality.
4 < 0
4 is not less than 0
Thus the variable is not a solution.

Question 3.
y ≤ 3, y = 1
The variable is _____________

Answer: not a solution

Explanation:
The inequality is y ≤ 3
y = -1
-1 ≤ 3
– 1 is greater than -3
Thus the variable is not a solution.

Question 4.
u > \(\frac{-1}{2}\), u = 0
The variable is _____________

Answer: a solution

Explanation:
The inequality is u > \(\frac{-1}{2}\)
u = 0
0 > \(\frac{-1}{2}\)
0 is greater than \(\frac{-1}{2}\)
Thus the variable is a solution.

Question 5.
q ≥ 0.6, q = 0.23
The variable is _____________

Answer: not a solution

Explanation:
The inequality is q ≥ 0.6
q = 0.23
0.23 is less than 0.6
Thus the variable is a solution.

Question 6.
b < 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\), b = \(\frac{2}{3}\)
The variable is _____________

Answer: a solution

Explanation:
The inequality is b < 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
b = \(\frac{2}{3}\)
\(\frac{2}{3}\) < 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
\(\frac{2}{3}\) is less than 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
Thus the variable is a solution.

Give two solutions of the inequality.

Question 7.
k < 2
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
k = 0 and 1 because they are less than 2.
Thus the two possible inequalities for k < 2 are 0 and 1.

Question 8.
z ≥ 3
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
z = -3 and -2 because -3 and -2 are greater than or equal to -3
Thus the two solutions of the inequality are -3 and -2

Question 9.
f ≤ 5
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
f = -5 and -6 because -5 and -6 are less than or equal to -5
Thus the two solutions of the inequality are -5 and -6.

Problem Solving

Question 10.
The inequality s ≥ 92 represents the score s that Jared must earn on his next test to get an A on his report card. Give two possible scores that Jared could earn to get the A.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: Two possible scores that Jared could earn to get the A are 92 and 100.

Question 11.
The inequality m ≤ $20 represents the amount of money that Sheila is allowed to spend on a new hat. Give two possible money amounts that Sheila could spend on the hat.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: Two possible money amounts that Sheilla could spend on the hat are $15 or $10.

Question 12.
Describe a situation and write an inequality to represent the situation. Give a number that is a solution and another number that is not a solution of the inequality.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
In the United States, the minimum age required to run for president is 35. This can be represented by the inequality a ≥ 35.
A number that is a solution is 55 and a number that is not a solution is 29.

Lesson Check – Page No. 470

Question 1.
Three of the following are solutions of g < 1\(\frac{1}{2}\). Which one is not a solution?
g = 4     g = 7\(\frac{1}{2}\)   g = 0    g = 2\(\frac{1}{2}\)
Type below:
_____________

Answer: g = 0

Explanation:
g < 1\(\frac{1}{2}\).
g = 4
-4 < 1\(\frac{1}{2}\)
g = 7\(\frac{1}{2}\)
7\(\frac{1}{2}\) < 1\(\frac{1}{2}\).
g = 2\(\frac{1}{2}\)
2\(\frac{1}{2}\) < 1\(\frac{1}{2}\)
g = 0
0 < 1\(\frac{1}{2}\)
Thus 0 is not the solution.

Question 2.
The inequality w ≥ 3.2 represents the weight of each pumpkin, in pounds, that is allowed to be picked to be sold. The weights of pumpkins are listed. How many pumpkins can be sold? Which pumpkins can be sold?
3.18 lb, 4 lb, 3.2 lb, 3.4 lb, 3.15 lb
Type below:
_____________

Answer: 3.2 lb, 3.4 lb

Explanation:
The inequality w ≥ 3.2 represents the weight of each pumpkin, in pounds, that is allowed to be picked to be sold.
Substitute the solutions in the inequality.
w = 3.18
3.18 ≥ 3.2
3.18 is less than 3.2
3.18 < 3.2 lb
w = 4 lb
4 ≥ 3.2
4 is greater than 3.2
4 > 3.2
w = 3.2 lb
3.2 ≥ 3.2
3.2 lb is greater than 3.2 lb
w = 3.4 lb
3.4 ≥ 3.2
3.4 lb is greater than 3.2 lb
w = 3.15 lb
3.15 < 3.2
Thus 3.2 lb, 3.4 lb pumpkins can be sold.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
What is the value of 8 + (27 ÷ 9)2?
_______

Answer: 17

Explanation:
8 + (27 ÷ 9)2?
8 + (3)2
8 + 9 = 17

Question 4.
Write an expression that is equivalent to 5(3x + 2z).
Type below:
_____________

Answer: 15x + 10z

Explanation:
5(3x + 2z)
5 × 3x + 5 × 2z
15x + 10z
The expression equivalent to 5(3x + 2z) is 15x + 10z

Question 5.
Tina bought a t-shirt and sandals. The total cost was $41.50. The t-shirt cost $8.95. The equation 8.95 + c = 41.50 can be used to find the cost c in dollars of the sandals. How much did the sandals cost?
$ _______

Answer: $32.55

Explanation:
Tina bought a t-shirt and sandals. The total cost was $41.50. The t-shirt cost $8.95.
The equation is 8.95 + c = 41.50
c = 41.50 – 8.95
c = $32.55
The cost of the sandal is 32.55

Question 6.
Two-thirds of a number is equal to 20. What is the number?
_______

Answer: 30

Explanation:
2/3 × n = 20
n = 3/2 × 20
n =  3 × 10
n = 30
The number is 30.

Share and Show – Page No. 473

Write an inequality for the word sentence. Tell what type of numbers the variable in the inequality can represent.

Question 1.
The elevation e is greater than or equal to 15 meters.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
The phrase greater than or equal to represents “≥”
Thus the inequality is e ≥ 15

Question 2.
A passenger’s age a must be more than 4 years.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
The phrase more than represents the greater than symbol “>”
Thus the inequality is a > 4

Write a word sentence for the inequality.

Question 3.
b < \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
By seeing the above inequality we can write the word sentence for inequality as,
b is less than \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 4.
m ≥ 55
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
By seeing the above inequality we can write the word sentence for inequality as,
m is greater than or equal to 55.

On Your Own

Question 5.
Compare Explain the difference between t ≤ 4 and t < 4.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
t ≤ 4 is t is less than or equal to 4 which means t is equal to 4 or 3.9.
t < 4 is t is less than 4 which means t is equal to 3, 2, or 1 or 0.

Question 6.
A children’s roller coaster is limited to riders whose height is at least 30 inches and at most 48 inches. Write two inequalities that represent the height h of riders for the roller coaster.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
h represents the height of riders for the roller coaster.
A children’s roller coaster is limited to riders whose height is at least 30 inches and at most 48 inches.
ar least 30 inches means h must be greater than or equal to 30 inches.
i.e., h ≥ 30 inches
at most 48 inches means h must be less than 48 inches.
i.e., h < 48 inches

Question 7.
Match the inequality with the word sentence it represents.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations img 11
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Go-Math-Grade-6-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Solutions-of-Equations-img-11

Make Generalizations – Page No. 474

The reading skill make generalizations can help you write inequalities to represent situations. A generalization is a statement that is true about a group of facts.

Sea otters spend almost their entire lives in the ocean. Their thick fur helps them to stay warm in cold water. Sea otters often float together in groups called rafts. A team of biologists weighed the female sea otters in one raft off the coast of Alaska. The chart shows their results.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations img 12

Question 8.
Write two inequalities that represent generalizations about the sea otter weights.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
First, list the weights in pounds in order from least to greatest.
50, 51, 54, 58, 61, 61, 62, 62, 66, 68, 69, 71
Next, write an inequality to describe the weights by using the least weight on the list. Let w represent weights of the otters in the pounds.
The least weight is 50 pounds, so all of the weights are greater than or equal to 50 pounds.
w ≥ 50
Now write an inequality to describe the weights by using the greatest weights in the list.
The greatest weight is 71 pounds, so all of the weights are less than or equal to 71 pounds.
w ≤ 71

Question 9.
Use the chart at the right to write two inequalities that represent generalizations about the number of sea otter pups per raft.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations img 13
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
First, list the number of pups in order from least to greatest.
6, 6, 7, 10, 15, 16, 20, 23
Next, write an inequality to describe the number of pups by using the least number of pups on the list. Let n represent the number of pups.
The least weight is 6 pups. So all of the pups will be greater than or equal to 6.
n ≥ 6
Now write an inequality to describe the number of pups by using the greatest weights in the list.
The greatest weight is 23 pups so all of the weights are less than or equal to 23 pups.
n ≤ 23 pups

Write Inequalities – Page No. 475

Write an inequality for the word sentence. Tell what type of numbers the variable in the inequality can represent.

Question 1.
The width w is greater than 4 centimeters.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
The inequality symbol for “greater than” is >. w > 4, where w is the width in centimeters. w is a positive number.

Question 2.
The score s in a basketball game is greater than or equal to 10 points
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
The inequality symbol for “greater than or equal to” is ≥. s ≥ 10, where s is the score in the basketball game. s is a positive number.

Question 3.
The mass m is less than 5 kilograms
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
The inequality symbol for “less than” is <. m < 5, where m is the mass in kilograms. m is a positive number.

Question 4.
The height h is greater than 2.5 meters
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
The inequality symbol for “greater than” is >. h > 2.5, where h is the height in meters. h is a positive number.

Question 5.
The temperature t is less than or equal to −3°.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
The inequality symbol for “less than or equal to” is ≤. t ≤  −3° where t is the temperature in degrees. t is a negative number.

Write a word sentence for the inequality.

Question 6.4
k < 7
Type below:
_____________

Answer: The word sentence for the inequality is k is less than -7.

Question 7.
z ≥ 2 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
Type below:
_____________

Answer: The word sentence for the inequality is z is greater than or equal to 2 \(\frac{3}{5}\).

Problem Solving

Question 8.
Tabby’s mom says that she must read for at least 30 minutes each night. If m represents the number of minutes reading, what inequality can represent this situation?
Type below:
_____________

Answer: m ≥ 30

Explanation:
Tabby’s mom says that she must read for at least 30 minutes each night.
m represents the number of minutes of reading.
m is greater than or equal to 30.
Thus the inequality is m ≥ 30.

Question 9.
Phillip has a $25 gift card to his favorite restaurant. He wants to use the gift card to buy lunch. If c represents the cost of his lunch, what inequality can describe all of the possible amounts of money, in dollars, that Phillip can spend on lunch?
Type below:
_____________

Answer: c ≤ 25

Explanation:
Phillip has a $25 gift card to his favorite restaurant.
He wants to use the gift card to buy lunch.
c represents the cost of his lunch
c is less than or equal to 25.
Thus the inequality is c ≤ 25.

Question 10.
Write a short paragraph explaining to a new student how to write an inequality.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Inequality is a statement that two quantities are not equal.
To know which direction to shade a graph, I write inequalities with the variable on the left side of the inequality symbol. I know that the symbol has to point to the same number after I rewrite the inequality.
For example, I write 4 < y as y > 4
Now the inequality symbol points in the direction that I should draw the shaded arrow on my graph.

Lesson Check – Page No. 476

Question 1.
At the end of the first round in a quiz show, Jeremy has at most −20 points. Write an inequality that means “at most −20”.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
The phrase at most refers to less than or equal to.
Thus the inequality is J ≤ -20

Question 2.
Describe the meaning of y ≥ 7.9 in words.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: y ≥ 7.9 means y is greater than or equal to 7.9

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Let y represent Jaron’s age in years. If Dawn were 5 years older, she would be Jaron’s age. Which expression represents Dawn’s age?
Type below:
_____________

Answer: y – 5

Explanation:
Let y represent Jaron’s age in years.
If Dawn were 5 years older, she would be Jaron’s age.
We have to subtract 5 years to know the age of Jaron.
Thus the expression is y – 5.

Question 4.
Simplify the expression 7 × 3g.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: 21g

Question 5.
What is the solution of the equation 8 = 8f?
f = ________

Answer:
8 = 8f
f = 8/8 = 1
f = 1
The solution for the equation 8 = 8f is 1.

Question 6.
Which of the following are solutions of the inequality k ≤ 2?
k = 0   k = 2   k = 4   k = 1   k = 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Type below:
_____________

Answer: k = -2 k = -4

Explanation:
k = 0 in the inequality
k ≤ 2
0 ≤ 2
0 is less than but not equal to -2
Thus 0 is not the solution.
k = 2
k ≤ 2
-2 ≤ 2
Thus -2 is the solution.
k = 4
k ≤ 2
-4 ≤ 2
Thus -4 is the solution.
k = 1
1 ≤ 2
1 ≤ 2
1 is greater than but not equal to -2
Thus 1 is not the solution.
k = 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
1 \(\frac{1}{2}\) ≤ 2
1 \(\frac{1}{2}\) ≤ 2
1 \(\frac{1}{2}\) is less than but not equal to -2
Thus 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\) is not the solution.

Share and Show – Page No. 479

Graph the inequality.

Question 1.
m < 15
Type below:
_____________

Answer:

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Grap the inequality solution img-1

Question 2.
c ≥ 1.5
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Go Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Graph the inequalities img-2

Question 3.
b ≤ \(\frac{5}{8}\)
Type below:
_____________

Answer:

Go Math Solution Key for Grade 6 Chapter 8 Graph the inequalities img-3

On Your Own

Practice: Copy and Solve Graph the inequality.

Question 4.
a < \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
HMH Go Math Grade 6 Chapter 8 Graph the inequalities img-4

Question 5.
x > 4
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
HMH Go Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 graph inequalities img-5

Question 6.
k ≥ 0.3
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Go math grade 6 chapter 8 answer key graph inequalities img-6

Question 7.
t ≤ 6
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Go math key grade 6 chapter 8 graph inequalities img-7

Write the inequality represented by the graph.

Question 8.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations img 14
Type below:
_____________

Answer: m < 6

Question 9.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations img 15
Type below:
_____________

Answer: n ≥ -7

Question 10.
Model Mathematics The inequality w ≥ 60 represents the wind speed w in miles per hour of a tornado. Graph the solutions of the inequality on the number line.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:

Go Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Graph inequalities img-8

Question 11.
Graph the solutions of the inequality c < 12 ÷ 3 on the number line
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
c < 12 ÷ 3
c < 4
Go Math Grade 6 Chapter 8 Answer Key Graph inequalities img-9

Problem Solving + Applications – Page No. 480

The table shows the height requirements for rides at an amusement park. Use the table for 12–16
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations img 16

Question 12.
Write an inequality representing t, the heights in inches of people who can go on Twirl & Whirl.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
The minimum height of people who can go on Twirl and Whirl is 48 inches.
So, inequality is t ≥ 48.

Question 13.
Graph your inequality from Exercise 12.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Draw a full circle at 48 to show that 48 is a solution.
Shade to the right of 48 to show that values greater than or equal to 48 are solutions.

Question 14.
Write an inequality representing r, the heights in inches of people who can go on Race Track.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
The minimum height of people who can go on Race track is 24 inches.
So, the inequality is r ≥ 42.

Question 15.
Graph your inequality from Exercise 14.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Draw a full circle at 42 to show that 42 is a solution.
Shade to the right of 42 to show that values greater than or equal to 48 are solutions.

Question 16.
Write an inequality representing b, the heights in inches of people who can go on both River Rapids and Mighty Mountain. Explain how you determined your answer.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
You need to be at least 38 inches tall to go on River Rapids and at least 44 inches tall to go on Mighty mountain.
So, you need to be at least 44 inches tall to go on both rides.
The inequality is b ≥ 44.

Question 17.
Alena graphed the inequality c ≤ 25. Darius said that 25 is not part of the solution of the inequality. Do you agree or disagree with Darius? Use numbers and words to support your answer
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations img 17
Type below:
_____________

Answer: Yes I agree with Darius.
That dark circle and the arrow to the left indicates that c ≤ 25

Graph Inequalities – Page No. 481

Graph the inequality.

Question 1.
h ≥ 3
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Go Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 Graph inequalities image-1

Question 2.
x < \(\frac{-4}{5}\)
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
HMH Go Math Grade 6 Chapter 8 Key Graph Inequalities image-2

Question 3.
y > 2
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
HMH Go Math Solution Key for Grade 6 Chapter 8 Graph inequalities image-3

Question 4.
n ≥ 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Go Math Key for Grade 6 Chapter 8 Graoh inequalities image-4

Question 5.
c ≤ 0.4
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key chapter 8 graph inequalities image-5

Write the inequality represented by the graph.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations img 18
Type below:
_____________

Answer: n > 3

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations img 19
Type below:
_____________

Answer: n > -5

Problem Solving

Question 8.
The inequality x ≤ 2 represents the elevation x of a certain object found at a dig site. Graph the solutions of the inequality on the number line.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
The inequality x ≤ 2 represents the elevation x of a certain object found at a dig site.
Go math answer key grade 6 chapter 8 graph inequalities image-6

Question 9.
The inequality x ≥ 144 represents the possible scores x needed to pass a certain test. Graph the solutions of the inequality on the number line.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Go Math Grade 6 Chapter 8 Answer Key Graph inequalities image-7

Question 10.
Write an inequality and graph the solutions on a number line.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
The inequality is n ≥ -7
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations img 15

Lesson Check – Page No. 482

Question 1.
Write the inequality that is shown by the graph.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations img 20
Type below:
_____________

Answer: x ≥ -2
The number line at right shows the solutions of the inequality x ≥ -2

Question 2.
Describe the graph of g < 0.6.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Go Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 8 solution img-5

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Write an expression that shows the product of 5 and the difference of 12 and 9.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
The equation for the product of 5 and the difference of 12 and 9
5 × 12 – 9
The equation is 5(12 – 9).

Question 4.
What is the solution of the equation 8.7 + n = 15.1?
n = ________

Answer: 6.4

Explanation:
The equation is 8.7 + n = 15.1
n + 8.7 = 15.1
n = 15.1 – 8.7
n = 6.4

Question 5.
The equation 12x = 96 gives the number of egg cartons x needed to package 96 eggs. Solve the equation to find the number of cartons needed.
________ cartons

Answer: 8

Explanation:
Given,
The equation 12x = 96 gives the number of egg cartons x needed to package 96 eggs.
12x = 96
x = 96/12 = 8
Thus 8 number of cartons are needed.

Question 6.
The lowest price on an MP3 song is $0.35. Write an inequality that represents the cost c of an MP3 song.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Given that,
The lowest price on an MP3 song is $0.35.
c ≥ 0.35
That is an inequality to represent the cost of an MP3 song.

Chapter 8 Review/Test – Page No. 483

Question 1.
For numbers 1a–1c, choose Yes or No to indicate whether the given value of the variable is a solution of the equation.
1a. \(\frac{2}{5}\)v=10; v = 25
1b. n + 5 = 15; n = 5
1c. 5z = 25; z = 5
1a. _____________
1b. _____________
1c. _____________

Answer:
1a. \(\frac{2}{5}\)v=10; v = 25
\(\frac{2}{5}\) × 25=10
2 × 5 = 10
10 = 10
The variable is a solution.
Thus the answer is yes.
1b. n + 5 = 15; n = 5
Substitute n = 5
5 + 5 = 15
10 ≠ 15
The variable is not a solution.
The answer is no.
1c. 5z = 25; z = 5
Substitute z = 5
5 × 5 = 25
25 = 25
The variable is a solution.
Thus the answer is yes.

Question 2.
The distance from third base to home plate is 88.9 feet. Romeo was 22.1 feet away from third base when he was tagged out. The equation 88.9 − t = 22.1 can be used to determine how far he needed to run to get to home plate. Using substitution, the coach determines that Romeo needed to run _____ feet to get to home plate.
Using substitution, the coach determines that Romeo needed to run _____________ feet to get to home plate

Answer: 66.8 feet

Explanation:
The distance from third base to home plate is 88.9 feet.
Romeo was 22.1 feet away from third base when he was tagged out.
The equation is 88.9 − t = 22.1
88.9 − t = 22.1
88.9 – 22.1 = t
t = 66.8 feet
Thus Using substitution, the coach determines that Romeo needed to run 66.8 feet to get to the home plate.

Question 3.
There are 84 grapes in a bag. Four friends are sharing the grapes. Write an equation that can be used to find out how many grapes g each friend will get if each friend gets the same number of grapes.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
84 = 4g
84 is the total amount of grapes
4 is the number of friends
g = how many grapes each friend will get

Question 4.
Match each scenario with the equation that can be used to solve it.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations img 21
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Go-Math-Grade-6-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Solutions-of-Equations-img-21

Chapter 8 Review/Test Page No. 484

Question 5.
Frank’s hockey team attempted 15 more goals than Spencer’s team. Frank’s team attempted 23 goals. Write and solve an equation that can be used to find how many goals Spencer’s team attempted.
______ goals

Answer: 8 goals

Explanation:
Frank’s hockey team attempted 15 more goals than Spencer’s team.
Frank’s team attempted 23 goals.
Let x be the Spencer’s team
The phrase more than indicates addition operation.
x + 15 = 23
x = 23 – 15
x = 8 goals

Question 6.
Ryan solved the equation 10 + y = 17 by drawing a model. Use numbers and words to explain how Ryan’s model can be used to find the solution
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations img 22
Type below:
_____________

Answer: y = 7

Explanation:

  • Draw 11 rectangles on your MathBoard to represent the two sides of the equation.
  • Use algebra tiles to model the equation. Model y + 10 in the left rectangle, and model 17 in the right rectangle.
  • To solve the equation, get the y tile by itself on one side. If you remove a tile from one side, you can keep the two sides equal by removing the same type of tile from the other side.
  • Remove ten 1 tiles on the left side and ten 1 tiles on the right side.
  • The remaining titles will be seven 1 tiles on the right sides.

Thus 10 + y = 17
y = 17 – 10 = 7
y = 7

Question 7.
Gabriella and Max worked on their math project for a total of 6 hours. Max worked on the project for 2 hours by himself. Solve the equation x + 2 = 6 to find out how many hours Gabriella worked on the project.
______ hours

Answer: 4 hours

Explanation:
Gabriella and Max worked on their math project for a total of 6 hours.
Max worked on the project for 2 hours by himself.
x + 2 = 6
x = 6 – 2
x = 4
Gabriella worked 4 hours on the project.

Question 8.
Select the equations that have the solution m = 17. Mark all that apply.
Options:
a. 3 + m = 21
b. m − 2 = 15
c. 14 = m − 3
d. 2 = m − 15

Answer: B, C, D

Explanation:
a. 3 + m = 21
3 + 17 = 21
20 ≠ 21
b. m − 2 = 15
17 – 2 = 15
15 = 15
c. 14 = m − 3
14 = 17 – 3
14 = 14
d. 2 = m − 15
2 = 17 – 15
2 = 2
Thus the correct answers are B, C and D.

Chapter 8 Review/Test Page No. 485

Question 9.
Describe how you could use algebra tiles to model the equation 4x = 20.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
4x = 20
x = 20/4 = 5
x = 5
Go Math Grade 6 Solution Key Chapter 8 solution img-3

Question 10.
For numbers 10a–10d, choose Yes or No to indicate whether the equation has the solution x = 12.
10a. \(\frac{3}{4}\)x = 9
10b. 3x = 36
10c. 5x = 70
10d. \(\frac{x}{3}\) = 4
10a. _____________
10b. _____________
10c. _____________
10d. _____________

Answer:
10a. Yes
10b. Yes
10c. No
10d. Yes

Explanation:
10a. \(\frac{3}{4}\)x = 9
\(\frac{3}{4}\) × 12 = 9
3 × 3 = 9
9 = 9
Thus the answer is yes.
10b. 3x = 36
x = 12
3 × 12 = 36
36 = 36
Thus the answer is yes.
10c. 5x = 70
x = 12
5 × 12 = 70
60 ≠ 70
Thus the answer is no.
10d. \(\frac{x}{3}\) = 4
x/3 = 4
x = 4 × 3
x = 12
Thus the answer is yes.

Question 11.
Bryan rides the bus to and from work on the days he works at the library. In one month, he rode the bus 24 times. Solve the equation 2x = 24 to find the number of days Bryan worked at the library. Use a model.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
2x = 24
x = 24/2 = 12
Thus x = 12
Go Math Grade 6 Key chapter 8 solution img-4

Chapter 8 Review/Test – Page No. 486

Question 12.
Betty needs \(\frac{3}{4}\) of a yard of fabric to make a skirt. She bought 9 yards of fabric.
Part A
Write and solve an equation to find how many skirts x she can make from 9 yards of fabric.
________ skirts

Answer: 12 skirts

Explanation:
Betty needs \(\frac{3}{4}\) of a yard of fabric to make a skirt.
She bought 9 yards of fabric.
x × \(\frac{3}{4}\) = 9
x = 9 × \(\frac{4}{3}\)
x = 3 × 4 = 12
x = 12
she can make 12 skirts from 9 yards of fabric.

Question 12.
Part B
Explain how you determined which operation was needed to write the equation
Type below:
_____________

Answer: Division operation is needed to write the equation to know how many x skirts she can make from 9 yards of fabric.

Question 13.
Karen is working on her math homework. She solves the equation \(\frac{b}{8}\) = 56 and says that the solution is b = 7. Do you agree or disagree with Karen? Use words and numbers to support your answer. If her answer is incorrect, find the correct answer.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Karen is working on her math homework.
She solves the equation \(\frac{b}{8}\) = 56 and says that the solution is b = 7.
I Disagree with Karen.
b/8 = 56; multiply both sides by 8 to solve for b, and you get b = 448

Chapter 8 Review/Test Page No. 487

Question 14.
There are 70 historical fiction books in the school library. Historical fiction books make up \(\frac{1}{10}\) of the library’s collection. The equation \(\frac{1}{10}\)b = 70 can be used to find out how many books the library has. Solve the equation to find the total number of books in the library’s collection. Use numbers and words to explain how to solve \(\frac{1}{10}\)b = 70.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Given
Number of historical books = 70
The equation used to find the totals number of books in the library collection.
\(\frac{1}{10}\)b = 70
b = 70 × 10
b = 700
Hence there are 700 books in the library collection.

Question 15.
Andy drove 33 miles on Monday morning. This was \(\frac{3}{7}\) of the total number of miles he drove on Monday. Solve the equation \(\frac{3}{7}\)m = 33 to find the total number of miles Andy drove on Monday.
______ miles

Answer: 77 miles

Explanation:
Andy drove 33 miles on Monday morning.
This was \(\frac{3}{7}\) of the total number of miles he drove on Monday.
\(\frac{3}{7}\)m = 33
3 × m = 33 × 7
3 × m = 231
m = 231/3
m = 77 miles
Therefore the total number of miles Andy drove on Monday is 77 miles.

Question 16.
The maximum number of players allowed on a lacrosse team is 23. The inequality t≤23 represents the total number of players t allowed on the team.
Two possible solutions for the inequality are _____ and _____.
Two possible solutions for the inequality are _____ and _____

Answer:
The maximum number of players allowed on a lacrosse team is 23.
t ≤ 23
Thus the two possible solutions for the inequality are 22 and 23.

Question 17.
Mr. Charles needs to have at least 10 students sign up for homework help in order to use the computer lab. The inequality h ≥ 10 represents the number of students h who must sign up. Select possible solutions of the inequality. Mark all that apply.
Options:
a. 7
b. 8
c. 9
d. 10
e. 11
f. 12

Answer: D, E

Explanation:
Mr. Charles needs to have at least 10 students sign up for homework help in order to use the computer lab.
h ≥ 10
The number near to 10 is 10 and 11
Thus the correct answers are options D and E.

Chapter 8 Review/Test Page No. 488

Question 18.
The maximum capacity of the school auditorium is 420 people. Write an inequality for the situation. Tell what type of numbers the variable in the inequality can represent.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
The maximum capacity of the school auditorium is 420 people
Let x be the maximum people
The inequality is x is less than or equal to 420.
x ≤ 420

Question 19.
Match the inequality to the word sentence it represents
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations img 23
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Go-Math-Grade-6-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Solutions-of-Equations-img-23

Question 20.
Cydney graphed the inequality d ≤ 14.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations img 24
Part A
Dylan said that 14 is not a solution of the inequality. Do you agree or disagree with Dylan? Use numbers and words to support your answer
Type below:
_____________

Answer: Agree with Dylan. Because the dark circle shows that it is not the solution.

Question 20.
Part B
Suppose Cydney’s graph had an empty circle at 14. Write the inequality represented by this graph.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: y < 14
HMH Go Math Grade 6 Chapter Key solution img-10

Conclusion:

I believe the information provided in the above article regarding the Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 8 Solutions of Equations is satisfactory for all the students. Get all the answer keys of all the chapters on ccssmathanswers.com For any queries you can post your comments in the below comment section.

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data

go-math-grade-3-chapter-2-represent-and-interpret-data-answer-key

Are you looking everywhere to find Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data? You have come the right way and we have covered different questions on the topic Represent and Interpret Data. Enhance your subject knowledge by taking the help of the 3rd Grade Go Math Chapter 2 Answer Key. Practice HMH Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data and answer the questions from the chapter with confidence. The detailed explanation provided helps you understand the topics easily.

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data

We advise you to go through the topics in the Chapter Represent and Interpret Data. You need to work hard right from the beginning in order to have strong fundamentals. Become champ in the subject by referring to our Go Math 3rd Grade Solution Key. Assess your preparation standard by solving the 3rd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data on your own and then verify with the solutions.

Lesson 1: Problem Solving • Organize Data

Lesson 2: Use Picture Graphs

Lesson 3: Make Picture Graphs

Mid-Chapter Checkpoint

Lesson 4: Use Bar Graphs

Lesson 5: Make Bar Graphs

Lesson 6: Solve Problems Using Data

Lesson 7: Use and Make Line Plots

Chapter 2 Review/Test

Organize Data Page No 91

Problem Solving Organize Data

Use the Favorite School Subject tables for 1–4.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Organize Data img 1

Question 1.
The students in two third-grade classes recorded their favorite school subject. The data are in the tally table. How many fewer students chose science than chose social studies as their favorite school subject?
Think: Use the data in the tally table to record the data in the frequency table. Then solve the problem.
social studies: 12 students
science: 5 students
12 – 5 = 7
So, 7 fewer students chose science.

Subject Number
Math ____________
Science 5
Language Arts ____________
Reading ____________
Social Studies 12

Answer:

Subject Number
Math 11
Science 5
Language Arts 7
Reading 9
Social Studies 12

Question 2.
What subject did the least number of students choose?
___________

Answer: Science

Explanation:

We can answer the question by using the above tally table. The table shows the least number of students is 5. Thus the answer is Science.

Question 3.
How many more students chose math than language arts as their favorite subject?
_______ more students

Answer: 4

Explanation:

If we look at the above table, there are 11 students who chose Math and 7 students who chose the language arts

To know the students who chose math than language arts we have to subtract 11 and 7
= 11 – 7
= 4
Thus the students chose math than language arts as their favorite subject are 4

Question 4.
Suppose 3 students changed their vote from math to science. Describe how the frequency table would change.

Type below:
__________

Answer: There would be an equal number of students who chose math and who chose science

Explanation:

If we look at the graph there are 11 students who voted for Math and 5 students who voted for Science
If 3 students changed their vote from math to science then the new graph will be

11- 3= 8
i.e., Actual No. of Science Students + New Students who changed from Math to Science
= 5 + 3
= 8

Organize Data Lesson Check Page No 92

Question 1.
The tally table shows the cards in Kyle’s sports card collection.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Organize Data img 2
How many hockey and football cards does Kyle have combined?
Options:
a. 5
b. 8
c. 12
d. 13

Answer: 13

Explanation:

Given,
Kyle has 5 hockey cards and 8 football cards
To know total no. of hockey and football cards does Kyle have combined
We have to add 5 + 8 = 13
Therefore the total no. of cards that Kyle have combined is 13

Spiral Review

Question 2.
There are 472 people in the concert hall. What is 472 rounded to the nearest hundred?
Options:
a. 400
b. 470
c. 500
d. 600

Answer: 500

If the digit to the right is more or greater than 5, then the digit in the rounding place will be increased to 1.
472 is greater than 450
So, 472 rounded to the nearest hundred is 500
So the answer is option c.

Question 3.
Max and Anna played a video game as a team. Max scored 463 points and Anna scored 329 points. How many points did they score in all?
Options:
a. 892
b. 792
c. 782
d. 134

Answer: 792

Explanation:

Given that,
Max scored 463 points and,
Anna scored 329 points
To know the total points they scored
We need to add both Max and Anna points
i.e., 436 + 329 = 792

Question 4.
Judy has 573 baseball cards in her collection. Todd has 489 baseball cards in his collection. How many fewer cards does Todd have than Judy?
Options:
a. 84
b. 94
c. 116
d. 184

Answer: 84

Explanation:

Given,
Judy has 573 baseball cards in her collection
Todd has 489 baseball cards in his collection
To find how many fewer cards does Todd have than Judy
We have to find the difference between Judy and Todd baseball cards
= 573 – 489 = 84

Question 5.
Ms. Westin drove 542 miles last week and 378 miles this week on business. How many miles in all did she drive on business during the two weeks?
Options:
a. 810 miles
b. 820 miles
c. 910 miles
d. 920 miles

Answer: 920 miles

Explanation:

We observe that Ms. Westin drove 542 miles last week and 378 miles this week on business
Total number of miles in all did she drive on business during the two weeks is?
542 + 378 = 920 miles
Thus the answer to the above question is option d.

Use Picture Graphs Page No 97

Use the Math Test Scores picture graph for 1–7.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Use Picture Graph img 3

Question 1.
How many students scored 100? How can you find the answer?

Answer: To find the number of students who scored 100, count each star as 4 students. So, 20 students scored 100.

Question 2.
What does Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Use Picture Graph img 4 stand for?
________ students

Answer: It represents 2 students.

Explanation:

The full star stands for 4 students
That means the half star is equal to two stars.

Question 3.
How many students in all scored 100 or 95?
________ students

Answer: 32 Students

Explanation:

No. of students who scored 100 = 5 stars
Each star = 4 students
i.e., 5 × 4 = 20 students
No. of students who scored 95 = 3
Each star = 4 students
That means 3 × 4 = 12
Total No. of students in all scored 100 or 95
12 + 20 = 32
Thus the answer is 32 students

Question 4.
How many more students scored 90 than 85?
________ students

Answer: 10 more students

Explanation:

Students who scored 90 = 3 and a half star = 4 + 4 + 4 + 2
Students who score 85 = 1 star = 4
That means students scored 90 than 85 are
14 – 4 = 10 students

Question 5.
How many students in all took the test?
________ students

Answer: 50 Students

Explanation:

Students who scored 100 (5 stars) = 4 + 4 + 4 + 4 + 4 = 20 student
Students who scored 95 (3 stars) = 4 + 4 + 4 = 12 students
Students who scored 90 (3 and a half star) = 4 + 4 + 4 + 2 = 14 students
Students who score 85 (1 star) = 4 students
Total No. of students who took test = 20 + 12 + 14 + 4 = 50 students

Problem Solving

Question 6.
Suppose the students who scored 85 and 90 on the math test take the test again and score 95. How many stars would you have to add to the picture graph next to 95?
Type below:
__________

Answer: 4 Stars and half of a star

Explanation:

Students who scored 90 = 3 and a half star
Students who score 85 = 1 star
That means students scored 90 than 85 = 4 and a half star
Thus 4 and a half star stars would you have to add to the picture graph next to 95

Question 7.
If 2 more students took the math test and both made a score of 80, what would the picture graph look like?
Type below:
__________

Answer: There would be another row below 85. There would be half of a star next to 80.

Explanation:

There would be 5 lines and the 5th line will contain a half star

Use Picture Graphs Lesson Check Page No 98

Question 1.
Karen asked her friends to name their favorite type of dog.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Use Picture Graph img 5
How many people chose poodles?
Options:
a. 10
b. 6
c. 4
d. 3

Answer: 6

Explanation:

If we look at the graph, there are three bones for poodles.
Each bone represents 2 people, which means 3 bones represent 6 people.
2 + 2 + 2 = 6 people chose poodles

Question 2.
Henry made a picture graph to show what topping people like on their pizza. This is his key.
Each Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Use Picture Graph img 6 = 6 people.
What does Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Use Picture Graph img 7 stand for?
Options:
a. 2 people
b. 6 people
c. 9 people
d. 12 people

Answer: 12 people

Explanation:

By seeing the picture graph we can say that
Each pizza = 6 people
Then 2 pizzas = 6 + 6
= 12 people
S, the correct answer is option D

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Estimate the sum.
5 2 3
+ 2 9 5
———
Options:
a. 900
b. 800
c. 700
d. 600

Answer: 800

Explanation:

Sum of 523 and 295
= 818
As 818 is 850 the estimated sum of 523 and 295 is 800

Thus the correct answer is 800

Question 4.
Estimate the difference.
6 1 0
– 1 8 7
——-
Options:
a. 800
b. 600
c. 500
d. 400

Answer: 400

Explanation:

Subtract 610 and 187
We get 413
413 is less than 450 and is nearer to 400
So, the estimated difference of 610 and 187 is 400

Question 5.
What is 871 rounded to the nearest ten?
Options:
a. 900
b. 880
c. 870
d. 800

Answer: 870

Explanation:

If the digit is less than 5 then the number will be decreased by 1
So, the number 871 rounded to the nearest ten is 870

Question 6.
What is 473 rounded to the nearest hundred?
Options:
a. 400
b. 470
c. 500
d. 570

Answer: 500

Explanation:

473 is greater than 450 so it must be increased
473 rounded to the nearest hundred is 500
So, the correct answer is an option (C)

Make Picture Graphs Page No 103

Ben asked his classmates about their favorite kind of TV show. He recorded their responses in a frequency table. Use the data in the table to make a picture graph.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Make Picture Graph img 8
Follow the steps to make a picture graph.
Step 1 Write the title at the top of the graph.
Step 2 Look at the numbers in the table. Tell how many students each picture represents for the key.
Step 3 Draw the correct number of pictures for each type of show.
Use your picture graph for 1–5.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Make Picture Graph img 9

Question 1.
What title did you give the graph?
Type below:
_________

Answer: Favorite TV Show

Question 2.
What key did you use?
________

Answer: Each ■ = 3 students

Question 3.
How many pictures did you use to represent sports?
_______ pictures

Answer: 2 pictures

Problem Solving

Question 4.
How many pictures would you draw if 12 students chose game shows as their favorite kind of TV show?
________ pictures

Answer: 4 pictures

Question 5.
What key would you use if 10 students chose cartoons?
■ = ______ students

Answer: ■ = 2 students

Explanation:

If 10 student chose cartoons, we can use a key that is a factor of 10
■■■■■ = 10
and each ■ = 2 students

Make Picture Graphs Lesson Check Page No 104

Question 1.
Sandy made a picture graph to show the sports her classmates like o play. How many fewer students chose baseball than chose soccer?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Make Picture Graph img 10
Options:
a. 3
b. 4
c. 7
d. 8

Answer: 7

Explanation:

Students chose Soccer = 9 and a half ball
Students chose Baseball = 6 balls
Given each ball = 2 students
So, students chose soccer = 2+2+2+2+2+2+2+2+2+1
=19 students
Students chose baseball = 2+2+2+2+2+2
= 12 students
students chose baseball than chose soccer = 19 – 12
= 7 students

Question 2.
Tommy is making a picture graph to show his friends’ favorite kind of music. He plans to use one musical note to represent 2 people. How many notes will he use to represent that 4 people chose country music?
Options:
a. 2
b. 4
c. 6
d. 8

Answer: 2

Explanation:

Given, Tommy is making a picture graph to show his friends’ favorite kind of music
One musical note = 2 people
For 4 people =?
2 + 2 people = 2 musical notes

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Find the sum.
4 9 0
+ 2 3 4
———
Options:
a. 256
b. 624
c. 664
d. 724

Answer: 724

Addition of 490 and 234 = 724

Question 4.
Sophie wrote odd numbers on her paper. Which number was NOT a number that Sophie wrote?
Options:
a. 5
b. 11
c. 13
d. 20

Answer: 20

Explanation:

Examples of odd numbers are 1,3,5,7,9,11,13,15….
20 is an even number
So, the number was NOT a number that Sophie wrote is 20
Thus the correct answer is 20

Question 5.
Miles ordered 126 books to give away at the store opening. What is 126 rounded to the nearest hundred?
Options:
a. 230
b. 200
c. 130
d. 100

Answer: 100

Explanation:

126 here 1 is rounded which is in hundred place
If the number is greater than 150 then it would equal to 200
But it is less than 150, so, 126 rounded to the nearest hundred is 100
Thus the correct option is D

Question 6.
Estimate the difference.
4 2 2
– 2 8 4
——–
Options:
a. 100
b. 180
c. 200
d. 700

Answer: 100

Explanation:

The subtraction of 422 and 284 is 138
138 is less than 150, so the estimated difference of 422 and 284 is 100.
Thus the correct answer is option (A)

Mid-Chapter Checkpoint Page No 105

Vocabulary

Choose the best term from the box.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Mid-Chapter Checkpoint img 11

Question 1.
A __________ uses numbers to record data.
_________

Answer: Frequency table

Question 2.
A __________ uses small pictures or symbols to show and compare information.
_________

Answer: Picture Graph

Concepts and Skills

Use the Favorite Season table for 3-6.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Mid-Chapter Checkpoint img 12

Question 3.
Which season got the most votes?
_________

Answer: Summer

From the above table, we can say that the highest number of votes is for Summer i.e., 28

Question 4.
Which season got 3 fewer votes than winter?
_________

Answer: Spring

Explanation:

Number of votes for Winter = 22
Number of votes for Spring = 19
22 – 19 = 3
So, Spring season got 3 fewer votes than winter

Question 5.
How many more students chose summer than fall?
________ students

Answer: 14 Students

Explanation:

Number of students chose summer = 28
Number students chose fall = 14
To know the students chose summer than fall
We have to subtract votes for summer and fall
28 – 14 = 14
Therefore 14 more students chose summer than fall

Question 6.
How many students chose a favorite season?
________ students

Answer: 83 students

Explanation:

Number of students chose summer =  28
Number of students chose winter = 22
Number of students chose spring = 19
Number of students chose fall = 14
Total Number of students chose favorite season = 28+22+19+14 = 83
The correct answer is 83 students

Use the Our Pets picture graph for 7-9.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Mid-Chapter Checkpoint img 13

Question 7.
How many students have cats as pets?
________ students

Answer: 10 students

Explanation:

Number of paws for cats = 5
Each paw = 2 students
2+2+2+2+2 = 10 students

Question 8.
Five more students have dogs than which other pet?
__________

Answer: Bird

Explanation:

Number of paws for dogs = 6 and a half paw
Each paw = 2 students
2+2+2+2+2+2+1 = 13 students
Number of paws for bird = 4
2+2+2+2 = 8 students
13 – 8 = 5 students
Thus the answer is bird

Question 9.
How many pets in all do students have?
_________ students

Answer: 37 students

Explanation:

Number of paws for dogs = 6 and a half paw = 2+2+2+2+2+2+1 = 13 students
Number of paws for bird = 4 = 2+2+2+2 = 8 students
Number of paws for cats = 5 = 2+2+2+2+2 = 10 students
Number of paws for fish = 3 = 2+2+2 = 6 students
Total pets in all do students have = 13+8+10+6
= 37 students

Mid-Chapter Checkpoint Lesson Check Page No 106

Use the Favorite Summer Activity picture graph for 10-14.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Mid-Chapter Checkpoint img 14

Question 10.
Some students in Brooke’s school chose their favorite summer activity. The results are in the picture graph at the right. How many students chose camping?
________ students

Answer: 50 students

Explanation:

Total students chose camping = 5
Each Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Mid-Chapter Checkpoint img 15 = 10 students
10+10+10+10+10 = 50

Question 11.
How many more students chose swimming than canoeing?
_______ students

Answer: 30 students

Explanation:

Total students chose swimming = 6 Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Mid-Chapter Checkpoint img 15
Each Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Mid-Chapter Checkpoint img 15 = 10 students
= 10+10+10+10+10+10 = 60 students
Total students chose canoeing = 3 Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Mid-Chapter Checkpoint img 15
= 10+10+10 = 30 students
Total students chose swimming than canoeing = 60 – 30
= 30 students

Question 12.
Which activity did 15 fewer students choose than camping?
__________

Answer: Biking

Explanation:

Total students chose camping = 5
10+10+10+10+10 = 50 students
Total students chose biking = 3 and a half picture
10+10+10+5 = 35
Biking is the activity did 15 fewer students choose than camping

Question 13.
How many pictures would you draw for biking if each Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Mid-Chapter Checkpoint img 15 = 5 students?
_______

Answer: 7 pictures

Explanation:

You would draw 7 pictures
If you look at the graph there are 35 students who chose biking
So, to represent 35 students when each picture represents 5 students, we will need 7 pictures
i.e., 5+5+5+5+5+5+5 = 35 students

Question 14.
How many more students choose swimming and camping combined than biking and canoeing?
_________ students

Answer: 45 students

Explanation:

First of all, we need to find how many students chose swimming and camping combined
Total students chose swimming = 6 Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Mid-Chapter Checkpoint img 15
Each Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Mid-Chapter Checkpoint img 15 = 10 students
= 10+10+10+10+10+10 = 60 students
Total students chose camping = 5
10+10+10+10+10 = 50 students
60+50 = 110 students
Next, we need to find how many students chose biking and canoeing
Total students chose canoeing = 3 Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Mid-Chapter Checkpoint img 15
= 10+10+10 = 30 students
Total students chose biking = 3 and a half picture
10+10+10+5 = 35
Add both, we get
30+35 = 65 students
Then, we need to subtract
110 – 65 = 45 students
Therefore the students choose swimming and camping combined than biking and canoeing = 45 students

Use Bar Graphs Page No 111

Use the After-Dinner Activities bar graph for 1–6.

The third-grade students at Case Elementary School were asked what they spent the most time doing last week after dinner. The results are shown in the bar graph at the right.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Use Bar Graphs img 16

Question 1.
How many students spent the most time watching TV after dinner?
3 students

Answer: 3 students

Explanation:

From the above bar graph, we can see the activities of the students after dinner
Students spent the most time watching TV after dinner is between 2 and 4 i.e., 3 students

Question 2.
How many students in all answered the survey?
_________ students

Answer: 29 students

Explanation:

Total students who spent the most time reading after dinner = 6
Students who spent the most time doing homework after dinner = 12
Students who spent the most time watching TV after dinner = 3
Students who spent the most time playing a game after dinner = 8
Total students in all answered the survey = 6 + 12 + 3 + 8
= 29 students

Question 3.
How many students in all played a game or read?
__________ students

Answer: 14 students

Explanation:

Students who spent the most time reading after dinner = 6
Students who spent the most time playing a game after dinner = 8
Total students in all played a game or read = 6 + 8
= 14 students

Question 4.
How many fewer students read than did homework?
__________ students

Answer: 6 fewer students

Explanation:

Students who spent the most time reading after dinner = 6
Students who spent the most time doing homework after dinner = 12
To find the students read than did homework = 12 – 6
= 6 students

Question 5.
How many more students read than watched TV?
________ students

Answer: 3 more students

Explanation:

Students who spent the most time reading after dinner = 6
Students who spent the most time watching TV after dinner = 3
To find the students read than watched TV = 6 – 3
= 3 students

Problem Solving

Question 6.
Suppose 3 students changed their answers to reading instead of doing homework. Where would the bar for reading end?
It would end at _________

Answer: Halfway between 8 and 10

Grade 3 Go Math Answer key Chapter 2 bar graph solution image_1

Explanation:

According to the graph, Students who spent the most time reading after dinner = 6
If 3 more students changed their answers to reading instead of doing homework, the total students would be 9 i.e., 6 + 3

Use Bar Graphs Lesson Check Page No 112

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Use Bar Graphs img 17
The bar graph shows the number of sandwiches sold at Lisa’s sandwich cart yesterday. How many tuna sandwiches were sold?
Options:
a. 12
b. 16
c. 18
d. 20

Answer: 18

Explanation:

According to the bar graph, tuna sandwiches sold at Lisa’s sandwich cart are between 16 to 20
The no. of tuna sandwiches were sold at Lisa’s sandwich cart = 18
So, the correct answer is option (C)

Spiral Review

Question 2.
What is 582 rounded to the nearest ten?
Options:
a. 500
b. 580
c. 590
d. 600

Answer: 580

Explanation:

If the digit is less than 5 then the digit will be increased by 1.
582, 8 is rounded here.
2 < 5 so 582 rounded to the nearest ten is 580

Question 3.
Savannah read 178 minutes last week. What is 178 rounded to the nearest hundred?
Options:
a. 400
b. 280
c. 200
d. 180

Answer: 200

Explanation:

Savannah read 178 minutes last week
178 is greater than 150, so the number 178 rounded to the nearest hundred is 200

Question 4.
Estimate the difference.
3 7 1
– 9 9
——-
Options:
a. 500
b. 400
c. 300
d. 200

Answer: 300

Explanation:

The difference between 371 and 99 is 272
272 is near to 300. Because 272 is greater than 250.
So, the estimated difference between 371 and 99 is 300

Question 5.
Estimate the difference.
6 2 5
– 2 4 8
———
Options:
a. 800
b. 500
c. 400
d. 300

Answer: 400

Explanation:

The difference between 625 and 248 is 377
377 rounded to the nearest hundred is 400
Therefore the estimated difference between 625 and 248 is 400.

Make Bar Graphs Page No 117

Ben asked some friends to name their favorite breakfast food. He recorded their choices in the frequency table at the right.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Make Bar Graphs img 18

Question 1.
Complete the bar graph by using Ben’s data.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Make Bar Graphs img 19

Answer:

Pancakes = 12 votes
Oatmeal = 4

Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 2 Solution Key Bar Graph image_1

Use your bar graph for 2–5.

Question 2.
Which food did the most people choose as their favorite breakfast food?
__________

Answer: Cereal

Explanation:

From the above bar graph, we can say that most of the people chose Cereals as their favorite food.
Number of votes for cereals = 14

Question 3.
How many people chose waffles as their favorite breakfast food?
_________ people

Answer: 8 people

Explanation:

The bar graph shows that the number of people who chose Waffles as their favorite breakfast food is 8.

Question 4.
How did you know how high to draw the bar for pancakes?
Type below:
__________

Answer:

Since 12 people chose pancakes, I made the top of the bar end at the line for 12

Question 5.
Suppose 6 people chose oatmeal as their favorite breakfast food. How would you change the bar graph?
Type below:
___________

Answer: I would make the bar for oatmeal end halfway between 4 and 8.

Solution key for Go math Grade 3 Chapter 2 bar graph img_2

Make Bar Graphs Lesson Check Page No 118

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Make Bar Graphs img 20

Question 1.
Gary asked his friends to name their favorite pizza topping. He recorded the results in a bar graph. How many people chose pepperoni?
Options:
a. 6
b. 5
c. 4
d. 1

Answer: 6

Explanation:

The bar graph shows that the number of people who chose pepperoni is 6
So, the correct answer is option (a)

Question 2.
Suppose 3 more friends chose mushrooms. Where would the bar for mushrooms end?
Options:
a. 2
b. 4
c. 6
d. 8

Answer: 4

Explanation:

We notice that the vertical bar for mushrooms ends at 1
1 person chose mushrooms
If 3 more friends chose mushrooms, the bar would end at 4
Then the answer is 1 + 3 = 4

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Estimate the sum.
4 5 8
+ 2 1 4
———
Options:
a. 700
b. 600
c. 300
d. 200

Answer: 700

Explanation:

Round 458 up to 500
Round 214 down to 200
Now, the estimated sum will be 500 + 200 = 700
So, the correct answer is option A

Question 4.
Matt added 14 + 0. What is the correct sum?
Options:
a. 140
b. 14
c. 1
d. 0

Answer: 14

Explanation:

Any number added by 0 is itself. So the sum of 14 + 0 = 14
The correct answer is Option B

Question 5.
There are 682 runners registered for an upcoming race. What is 682 rounded to the nearest hundred?
Options:
a. 600
b. 680
c. 700
d. 780

Answer: 700

Explanation:

If the digit to the right is more or equal than 5, then the digit in the rounding place increases by one
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
So, 682 rounded to the nearest hundred 700

The correct answer is option C

Question 6.
There are 187 new students this year at Maple Elementary. What is 187 rounded to the nearest ten?
Options:
a. 100
b. 180
c. 190
d. 200

Answer: 190

Explanation:

If the digit to the right is more or equal than 5, then the digit in the rounding place increases by one
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
So, the number 187 rounded to the nearest ten is 190
Thus the correct answer is Option C

Solve Problems Using Data Page No 123

Use the Favorite Hot Lunch bar graph for 1–3.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Solve Problems Using Data img 21

Question 1.
How many more students chose pizza than chose grilled cheese?
Think: Subtract the number of students who chose grilled cheese, 2, from the number of students who chose pizza, 11.
11 – 2 = 9

Answer: 9 more students

Question 2.
How many students did not choose chicken patty?
__________ students

Answer: 21 students

Explanation:

Number of students who chose hot dog = 8
Number of students who chose Pizza = 11
Number of students who chose grilled cheese = 2
Number of students who chose Chicken Patty = 5
Total Number of students who did not choose the chicken patty = 8 + 11 + 2 = 21

Question 3.
How many fewer students chose grilled cheese than chose hot dogs?
__________ fewer students

Answer: 6 fewer students

Explanation:

Number of students who chose hot dog = 8
Number of students who chose grilled cheese = 2
Subtract the number of students who chose grilled cheese from the number of students who chose a hot dog
= 8 – 2 = 6
Therefore, 6 fewer students chose grilled cheese than chose hot dogs

Use the Ways to Get to School bar graph for 4–7.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Solve Problems Using Data img 22
Question 4.
How many more students walk than ride in a car to get to school?
________ more students

Answer: 3 more students

Explanation:

No. of students walk to get to school = 7
No. of students ride in a car to get to school = 4
Now, subtract the no. of students walk from no. of students ride in a car
We get, 7 – 4 = 3

Question 5.
How many students walk and ride a bike combined?
________ students

Answer: 10 students

Explanation:

Number of students walk to get to school = 7
Number of students ride a bike to get to school = 3
To know how many students walk and ride a bike combined
We have to add Number of students walk and ride a bike
= 7 + 3 = 10

Problem Solving

Question 6.
Is the number of students who get to school by car and bus greater than or less than the number of students who get to school by walking and biking? Explain.
Options:
a. greater
b. less

Answer: Greater than

Explanation:

4 + 12 = 16; 7 + 3 = 10; 16 > 10.

Question 7.
What if 5 more students respond that they get to school by biking? Would more students walk or ride a bike to school? Explain.
________

Answer: Bike

Explanation:

7 students walk; 3 + 5 = 8 students bike

7 < 8

Solve Problems Using Data Lesson Check Page No 124

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Solve Problems Using Data img 23

Question 1.
How many fewer votes were for bench repair than for food drive?
Options:
a. 9
b. 10
c. 16
d. 11

Answer: 10

Explanation:

Number of votes for food drive = 13
Number of votes for bench repair = 3
To find votes were for bench repair than for food drive
We need to subtract Number of votes for bench repair from Number of votes for food drive
i.e., 13 – 3 = 10

Question 2.
How many votes were there in all?
Options:
a. 14
b. 4
c. 32
d. 34

Answer: 32

Explanation:

Number of votes for food drive = 13
Number of votes for bench repair = 3
Number of votes for Wall Mural = 10
Number of votes for Park Pick up = 6
Total no. of votes = 13 + 10 + 3 + 6 = 32

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Find the difference.
6 5 0
– 1 8 9
——–
Options:
a. 461
b. 479
c. 539
d. 571

Answer: 461

Explanation:

Here we have to subtract 650 from 189
650 – 189 = 461

Question 4.
Greyson has 75 basketball cards. What is 75 rounded to the nearest ten?
Options:
a. 60
b. 70
c. 80
d. 90

Answer: 80

Explanation:

If the digit to the right is more or equal than 5, then the digit in the rounding place increases by one
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
So, 75 rounded to the nearest ten is 80

Question 5.
Sue spent $18 on a shirt, $39 on a jacket, and $12 on a hat. How much did she spend in all?
Options:
a. $79
b. $69
c. $57
d. $51

Answer: $69

Explanation:

Given
Sue spent $18 on a shirt
Sue spent $39 on a jacket and $12 on a hat
Total amount she spent in all = 18 + 39 + 12
= $69
Thus the correct answer is option B

Question 6.
There are 219 adults and 174 children at a ballet. How many people are at the ballet in all?
Options:
a. 45
b. 293
c. 383
d. 393

Answer: 393

Explanation:

Given that there are 219 adults and 174 children in a ballet
To know how many people are at the ballet
We have to add no. of adults with no. of children
That means 219 + 174 = 393
Thus the correct answer is Option D

Use and Make Line Plots Page No 129

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Use and Make Line Plots img 24

Question 1.
How many shirts sold for $12?
4 shirts

Answer: 4 shirts

Explanation:

From the above table, we can say that the no. of shirts sold for $12 is 4

Question 2.
At which price were the most shirts sold?
$ ________

Answer: $13

Explanation:

The table shows that the most number of shirts sold for $13

Question 3.
How many shirts in all were sold?
_________ shirts

Answer: 17 shirts

Explanation:

Number of shirts for $11 = 1
Number of shirts for $12 = 4
Number of shirts for $13 = 6
Number of shirts for $14 = 4
Number of shirts for $15 = 0
Number of shirts for $16 =  2
Total no. of shirts sold in all = 1 + 4 + 6 + 4 + 2 = 17

Question 4.
How many shirts were sold for $13 or more?
_________ shirts

Answer: 12 shirts

Explanation:

Number of shirts for $13 = 6
Number of shirts for $14 = 4
Number of shirts for $15 = 0
Number of shirts for $16 =  2
Total no. of shirts sold for $13 or more = 6 + 4 + 2
= 12 shirts

Problem Solving

Use the line plot above for 5–6.

Question 5.
Were more shirts sold for less than $13 or more than $13? Explain.
________

Answer: more than $13; 6 > 5

Explanation:

No. of shirts sold for less than $13 = 5
No. of shirts sold for more than $13 = 6
More shirts are sold for more than $13

Question 6.
Is there any price for which there are no data? Explain.
$ ________

Answer: Yes

Explanation:

There are no Xs above $15, there were no shirts sold for $15

Use and Make Line Plots Lesson Check Page No 130

Question 1.
Pedro made a line plot to show the heights of the plants in his garden. How many plants are less than 3 inches tall?
Options:
a. 4
b. 5
c. 10
d. 16

Answer: 10

Explanation:

Number of plants of 1 inch = 6
Number of plants of 2 inches = 4
So, the number of plants less than 3 inches tall = 6 + 4
= 10 plants
So, the correct answer is option C

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Use and Make Line Plots img 25

Question 2.
Find the sum.
6 4 2
+ 2 5 9
———
Options:
a. 383
b. 801
c. 891
d. 901

Answer: 901

Explanation:

Sum of 642 and 259 is 901
Thus the correct answer is option D

Question 3.
Find the difference.
4 6 0
– 3 0 9
———
Options:
a. 61
b. 151
c. 161
d. 169

Answer: 151

Explanation:

To get the answer we have to subtract 309 from 460
460 – 309 = 151
Thus the correct answer is option B

Question 4.
There were 262 hamburgers cooked for the school fair. What is 262 rounded to the nearest hundred?
Options:
a. 200
b. 260
c. 270
d. 300

Answer: 300

Explanation:

If the digit to the right is more or equal than 5, then the digit in the rounding place increases by one
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
262 rounded to the nearest hundred is 300

Question 5.
Makenzie has 517 stickers in her collection. What is 517 rounded to the nearest ten?
Options:
a. 500
b. 510
c. 520
d. 600

Answer: 520

Explanation:

Makenzie has 517 stickers in her collection
If the digit to the right is more or equal than 5, then the digit in the rounding place increases by one
517 rounded to the nearest ten is 520

Review/Test Page No 131

Question 1.
Mia made a tally table to record the different types of birds she saw at the bird feeder in the garden.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Review/Test img 26
For numbers 1a–1c, select True or False for each statement.
a. Mia saw twice as many sparrows as blackbirds.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Explanation:

Use the tally provided in the above table
No. of Sparrows = 12
No. of Blackbird = 6
By this, we can say that the sparrows are twice as blackbirds
So, the answer is true

Question 1.
b. Mia saw 8 finches.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Explanation:

The above tally table shows that the number of finches = 8
So, the answer is true

Question 1.
c. Mia saw 4 fewer jays than blackbirds.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: False

Explanation:

No. of Blackbirds = 6
No. of Jays = 4
To know whether the question is true or false
We have to subtract 4 from 6
6 – 4 = 2
So, the answer is false

Question 2.
Jake asked 25 students in his class how close they live to school. The frequency table shows the results.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Review/Test img 27
Part A
Complete the table and explain how you found the answer.

Answer: 7 boys

Explanation:

Total Number of students = 25
Now we have to add the number of students from the table
4 + 5 + 4 + 3 + 2 = 18 students
Next, subtract 18 from the total number of students, 25, to find x
25 – 18 = 7
Therefore, the missing number x is 7

Question 2.
Part B
How many more students live about 2 miles or less from school than students who live about 3 miles from school? Show your work.
________ students

Answer: 13 students

Explanation:

Number of students who live about 1 mile = 4 boys + 5 girls = 9 students
Students who live about 2  miles = 4 students
Students who live about 3 miles = 3 boys + 2 girls = 5 students
Next, we have to add total students who live about 2 miles or less = 9 + 4 = 13 students

Review/Test Page No 132

Use the picture graph for 3–6.

Students at Barnes School are performing in a play. The picture graph shows the number of tickets each class has sold so far.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Review/Test img 28

Question 3.
How many tickets were sold altogether? Explain how you found the total.
________ tickets

Answer: 100 tickets

Explanation:

Number of tickets sold in Ms. Brown’s Class = 9 ✓
Each tick = 5 tickets
5+5+5+5+5+5+5+5+5 = 45 tickets
Number of tickets sold in Mrs. Gold’s Class = 5 ✓
5+5+5+5+5 = 25 tickets
Number of ticks sold in Mr. Castro’s Class = 6 ✓
Each tick = 5 tickets
5+5+5+5+5+5 = 30
Now, we have to add the total number of tickets sold = 45 + 25 + 30 = 100 tickets

Question 4.
Choose the name from each box that makes the sentence true.
Five fewer tickets were sold by Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Review/Test img 29 class than Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Review/Test img 30 class.
Type below:
________

Answer: Mrs. Gold’s Class than Mr. Castro’s Class

Explanation:

Number of tickets sold in Mrs. Gold’s Class = 5 ✓
5+5+5+5+5 = 25 tickets
Number of ticks sold in Mr. Castro’s Class = 6 ✓
Each tick = 5 tickets
5+5+5+5+5+5 = 30
Subtract Number of tickets sold in Mrs. Gold’s from Mr. Castro’s Class
We get 30 – 25 = 5 tickets

Question 5.
How many more tickets were sold by Ms. Brown’s class than Mr. Castro’s class?
_______ tickets

Answer: 15 tickets

Explanation:

Each tick = 5 tickets
Number of tickets sold in Ms. Brown’s Class = 9 ✓
5+5+5+5+5+5+5+5+5 = 45 tickets
Number of ticks sold in Mr. Castro’s Class = 6 ✓
5+5+5+5+5+5 = 30
Now subtract Number of ticks sold in Mr. Castro’s from Ms. Brown’s Class
45 – 30 = 15 tickets

Question 6.
What if Mrs. Gold’s class sold 20 more tickets? Draw a picture to show how the graph would change.
Type below:
_________

Answer: 20 tickets mean 5 + 5 + 5 + 5, or 4 ✓

Chapter 2 Answer Key for Go Math Grade 3 Review solution image_1

So we would add 4 more ticks to Mrs. Gold’s Class

Review/Test Page No 133

Use the frequency table for 7–8.

Question 7.
The Pet Shop keeps track of the number of fish it has for sale. The frequency table shows how many fish are in three tanks.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Review/Test img 31
Part A
Use the data in the table to complete the picture graph.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Review/Test img 32
Type below:
_________

Answer:

Given each circle= 2 fishes
Tank 1:
Tank 1 contains 16 fishes
That means 2+2+2+2+2+2+2+2 = 8 circle
Tank 2:
Tank 2 contains 9 fishes
= 2+2+2+2+1 = 4 and a half circle
Tank 3:
Tank 3 contains 12 fishes = 2+2+2+2+2+2 = 6 circle

Solution key for Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 2 Review solution image_2

Question 7.
Part B
How many pictures did you draw for Tank 2? Explain.
Type below:
________

Answer: 4 and a half circle

Explanation:

Tank 2 contains 9 fishes
Each circulet= 2 fishes
2+2+2+2+1
Therefore the answer is 4 and a half circle

Question 8.
Each tank can hold up to 20 fish. How many more fish can the Pet Shop put in the three tanks?
Options:
a. 60 fish
b. 23 fish
c. 20 fish
d. 33 fish

Answer: 23 fishes

Explanation:

Given that each tank can hold up to 20 fishes
Total number of tanks = 3
20+20+20 = 60 fishes
From the above table, we observe that
Tank 1 contains 16 fishes
Tank 2 contains 9 fishes
Tank 3 contains 12 fishes
Total number of fishes that all tanks contain = 12+16+9 = 37 fishes
Now, we have to subtract the number of fishes that all tanks contain from the number of fishes pet shop put in the three tanks
= 60 – 37 = 23 fishes

Review/Test Page No 134

Use the bar graph for 9–12.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Review/Test img 33

Question 9.
Three more students play the piano than which other instrument?
__________

Answer: Flute

Explanation:

The above bar graph shows the number of students who play musical instruments
From the graph, we observe that the number of students who play the flute is 6
And the number of students who play the piano is 9
Subtract Number of students play flute from piano
We get,
9 – 6 = 3
Thus the answer is Flute

Question 10.
The same number of students play which two instruments?
__________
__________

Answer: Drums and Guitar

Explanation:

The graphs the students who play drums and guitar are the same
Because the no. of students who play guitar = 10
And the no. of students who play drums = 10

Question 11.
For numbers 11a–11d, select True or False for each statement.
a. Ten more students play guitar than play flute.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: False

Explanation:

No. of students who play guitar = 10
No. of students who play flute = 6
The statement is not correct
So, the answer is false

Question 11.
b. Nine students play piano.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Explanation:

The bar graph given in the above shows that the number of students who play piano is 9. So, the answer is true.

Question 11.
c. Six fewer students play flute and piano combined than play drums and guitar combined.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: False

Explanation:

No. of students who play guitar = 10
No. of students who play drums = 10
No. of students who play flute = 6
No. of students who play piano = 9
Now, add the number of students who play flute and piano = 6+9 = 15
Next, add the No. of students who play drums and guitar = 10+10 = 20
The difference between them is 5, not 6
So, the answer is false

Question 11.
d. Nine more students play piano and guitar combined than play drums.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Explanation:

No. of students who play piano = 9
No. of students who play guitar = 10
Total = 10+9 = 19 students
No. of students who play drums = 10
Subtract No. of students who play drums from total students who play piano and guitar combined
That means 19 – 10 = 9
Therefore the  answer is true

Question 12.
There are more students who play the trumpet than play the flute, but fewer students than play the guitar. Explain how you would change the bar graph to show the number of students who play the trumpet.
Type below:
________

Answer:

There are 6 students who play the flute and 10 students who play guitar
The no. of students who play trumpet must be between 6 and 10 i.e., 7, 8, or 9 students.

Key for Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 2 Review solution image_5

In the above example, we show the number of students who play the trumpet is 8

Review/Test Page No 135

Use the frequency table for 13–14.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Review/Test img 34

Question 13.
Part A
Use the data in the table to complete the bar graph.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Review/Test img 35

Answer:

Chapter 2 Key for Go Math Grade 3 Review image_3

Question 13.
Part B
How do you know how long to make the bars on your graph? How did you show 15 votes for broccoli? Explain.
Type below:
_________

Answer:

By reading Karen’s frequency table we can see that the number of votes for each favorite vegetable.
15 lies between 10 and 20. So, the bar should be drawn all the way to the midpoint between 10 and 20.

Question 14.
How many more votes did the two most popular vegetables get than the two least popular vegetables? Explain how you solved the problem.
________ votes

Answer: 35 votes

Explanation:

The two most popular vegetables are carrots and corn
And the number of votes for carrots and corn are 40 and 20
40+20 = 60 votes
The two least popular vegetables are broccoli and green beans
And the number of votes for broccoli and green beans are 15 and 10
15+10 = 25 votes
Now, Subtract the number of votes for broccoli and green beans from a number of votes for carrots and corn
60-25 = 35 students

Review/Test Page No 136

Use the line plot for 15–16.

The line plot shows the number of goals the players on Scot’s team scored.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Review/Test img 36

Question 15.
For numbers 15a–15d, select True or False for each statement.
a. Three players scored 2 goals.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Explanation:

One player scored 2 goals, one player scored 4 goals and one player scored 3 goals
So, the answer is true

Question 15.
b. Six players scored fewer than 2 goals.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Explanation:

From the figure, we can say that 4 players scored 1 goal and 2 players scored 0
4+2 =6
So, the answer is true

Question 15 (request help)
c. There are 8 players on the team.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: False

Explanation:

We need to count all X = 11

Question 15
d. Five players scored more than 1 goal.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Explanation:

More than 1 goal means 2, 3 or 4 goals
We observe that 3 players who scored 2 goals, 1 player who scored 3 goals, 1 player who scored 4 goals
Now we have to add the players who scored more than 1 goal
3+1+1 = 5
Therefore 5 players scored more than 1 goal

Question 16.
What if two more people played and each scored 3 goals? Describe what the line plot would look like.
Type below:
__________

Answer: We have to add two more X on the line plot 3

Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 2 Solution Key Review solution Image_4

Use the line plot for 17–18.

Robin collected shells during her vacation. She measured the length of each shell to the nearest inch and recorded the data in a line plot.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data Review/Test img 37

Question 17.
How many shells were 6 inches long or longer?
_________ shells

Answer: 11 shells

Explanation:

5 shells were 6 inches long
2 shells were 7 inches long
1 shell was 8 inches long
3 shells were 9 inches long
Total = 5+2+1+3 = shells
Thus the answer is 11 shells

Question 18.
How many more shells did Robin collect that were 5 inches long than 8 inches long?
________ shells

Answer: 2 shells

Explanation:

Robin collects 3 shells which were 5 inches long and 1 shell was 8 inches long.
To know how many shells did Robin collect that were 5 inches long than 8 inches long
We have to subtract the number of shells was 8 inches long from the number of shells were 5 inches long
i.e., 3 – 1 = 2 shells

In this chapter, you can the bar graphs, picture graphs, and line plots. These are graphs that are the most interesting and easiest part of this chapter. A brief explanation of the topics is discussed in the Solution Key of Grade 3 Go Math Chapter 2 Represent and Interpret Data.

Here we have provided the exercise questions along with the answers to help in practicing the chapter. You can find the different and simple methods of solving the problems in Go Math 3rd Grade Answer Key Chapter 2 Extra Practice. Hence make use of all the links and score well in the exams. If you any queries you can leave comments in the comment section below and we will respond as early as possible.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles: Having proper knowledge of math concepts is the basic thing to score high marks in the exams and helps for higher studies. To make it possible we have compiled the best study material called Go math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL. Download Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles and learn all standard math concepts in an understandable way.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles

By preparing Angle concepts in a proper way, you can secure maximum marks in the exam. So, avail of these pdf formatted chapterwise solutions to go math grade 4 answers of chapter 11 angles and make you practice well for -your exams. Utilize the chapter-wise pdf links to download Go Math 4th Grade Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles & practice well for standard assessments and homework.

Lesson: 1 – Angles and Fractional Parts of a Circle

Lesson: 2 – Degrees

Lesson: 3 – Measure and Draw Angles

Lesson: 4 – Join and Separate Angles

Lesson: 5 – Problem Solving Unknown Angle Measures

Lesson: 11.1 

Common Core – Angles – Page No. 207

Angles and Fractional Parts of a Circle

Tell what fraction of the circle the shaded angle represents.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 1
Explanation:
By seeing the above figure we can say that the fraction of the shaded part is \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 2
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
Half of the circle is shaded in the above figure. The fraction of the shaded part is \(\frac{1}{2}\).

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 3
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{1}\)

Explanation:
The above circle is completely shaded. So, the fraction of the shaded part is \(\frac{1}{1}\).

Tell whether the angle on the circle shows a \(\frac{1}{4}, \frac{1}{2}, \frac{3}{4}\), or 1 full turn clockwise or counterclockwise.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 4
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
By seeing the above figure we can say that the circle turns \(\frac{1}{2}\) counterclockwise.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 5
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Explanation:
By seeing the above figure we can say that the circle turns \(\frac{3}{4}\) counterclockwise.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 6
__________

Answer: \(\frac{1}{1}\)

Explanation:
The above circle turns \(\frac{1}{1}\) counterclockwise.

Problem Solving

Question 7.
Shelley exercised for 15 minutes. Describe the turn the minute hand made.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 7
Type below:
__________

Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}\) Clockwise
The minute hand is on 3 which means the minute hand made \(\frac{1}{4}\) Clockwise.

Question 8.
Mark took 30 minutes to finish lunch. Describe the turn the minute hand made.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 8
Type below:
__________

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\) Clockwise
The minute hand is on 6 which means the minute hand made \(\frac{1}{2}\) Clockwise.

Common Core – Angles – Page No. 208

Lesson Check

Question 1.
What fraction of the circle does the shaded angle represent
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 9
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{1}\) or 1
b. \(\frac{3}{4}\)
c. \(\frac{1}{2}\)
d. \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:
The above figure shows that the fraction of the shaded part is \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 2.
Which describes the turn shown below?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 10
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{4}\) turn clockwise
b. \(\frac{1}{2}\) turn clockwise
c. \(\frac{1}{4}\) turn counterclockwise
d. \(\frac{1}{2}\) turn counterclockwise

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\) turn clockwise

Explanation:
The circle made half turn. The fraction of the circle is \(\frac{1}{2}\) turn clockwise.
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Which shows \(\frac{2}{3}\) and \(\frac{3}{4}\) written as a pair of fractions with a common denominator?
Options:
a. \(\frac{2}{3} \text { and } \frac{4}{3}\)
b. \(\frac{6}{9} \text { and } \frac{6}{8}\)
c. \(\frac{2}{12} \text { and } \frac{3}{12}\)
d. \(\frac{8}{12} \text { and } \frac{9}{12}\)

Answer: \(\frac{8}{12} \text { and } \frac{9}{12}\)

Explanation:
Given the fraction \(\frac{2}{3}\) and \(\frac{3}{4}\)
LCM of 3 and 4 is 12
\(\frac{2}{3}\) × \(\frac{4}{4}\) = \(\frac{8}{12}\)
\(\frac{3}{4}\) × \(\frac{3}{3}\) = \(\frac{9}{12}\)
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 4.
Raymond bought \(\frac{3}{4}\) of a dozen rolls. How many rolls did he buy?
Options:
a. 3
b. 6
c. 7
d. 9

Answer: 9

Explanation:
Given that,
Raymond bought \(\frac{3}{4}\) of a dozen rolls.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) × 12 = 3 × 3 = 9
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 5.
Which of the following lists all the factors of 18?
Options:
a. 1, 2, 4, 9, 18
b. 1, 2, 3, 6, 9, 18
c. 2, 3, 6, 9
d. 1, 3, 5, 9, 18

Answer: 1, 2, 3, 6, 9, 18

Explanation:
The factors of 18 are
1 × 18 = 18
2 × 9 = 18
3 × 6 = 18
6 × 3 = 18
9 × 2 = 18
18 × 1 = 18
The factors are 1, 2, 3, 6, 9, 18.
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 6.
Jonathan rode 1.05 miles on Friday, 1.5 miles on Saturday, 1.25 miles on Monday, and 1.1 miles on Tuesday. On which day did he ride the shortest distance?
Options:
a. Monday
b. Tuesday
c. Friday
d. Saturday

Answer: Friday

Explanation:
Given that,
Jonathan rode 1.05 miles on Friday, 1.5 miles on Saturday, 1.25 miles on Monday, and 1.1 miles on Tuesday.
1.05 < 1.1 < 1.5
Thus the shortest distance is 1.05 miles that is on Friday.
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Common Core – Angles – Page No. 209

Degrees

Tell the measure of the angle in degrees.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 11
60°

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 12
_____°

Answer: 180°

Explanation:
The complete angle of the circle is 360°
The above circle made half turn
1/2 × 360° = 180°

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 13
_____°

Answer: 90°

Explanation:
The complete angle of the circle is 360°
The above circle made 1/4 turn.
1/4 × 360° = 90°

Classify the angle. Write acute, obtuse, right, or straight.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 14
__________

Answer: acute

Explanation:
The acute angle is the small angle which is less than 90°. The above angle is 25° which is less than 90°. Thus the above angle is an acute angle.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 15
__________

Answer: obtuse

Explanation:
An obtuse angle has a measurement greater than 90 degrees but less than 180 degrees. The above angle is 110° which is greater than 90° and less than 180°. Thus the angle of the above figure is an obtuse angle.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 16
__________

Answer: acute

Explanation:
The acute angle is the small angle which is less than 90°. The above angle is 60° which is less than 90°. Thus the above angle is an acute angle.

Classify the triangle. Write acute, obtuse, or right.

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 17
__________

Answer: right

Explanation:
In geometry and trigonometry, a right angle is an angle of exactly 90°, corresponding to a quarter turn.

Question 8.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 18
__________

Answer: obtuse

Explanation:
An obtuse angle has a measurement greater than 90 degrees but less than 180 degrees. The above angle is 110° which is greater than 90° and less than 180°. Thus the angle of the above figure is an obtuse angle.

Question 9.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 19
__________

Answer: acute

Explanation:
The acute angle is the small angle which is less than 90°. The above triangle is less than 90 degrees. Thus the above triangle is acute.

Problem Solving

Ann started reading at 4:00 P.M. and finished at 4:20 P.M.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 20

Question 10.
Through what fraction of a circle did the minute hand turn?
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Explanation:
The complete angle of the circle is 360°.
The minute hand is on 4. That means the clock turn 1/3 clockwise.

Question 11.
How many degrees did the minute hand turn?
_____°

Answer: 120°

Explanation:
1/3 × 360° = 120°
Thus the minute hand turn 120°.

Common Core – Angles – Page No. 210

Lesson Check

Question 1.
What kind of angle is shown?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 21
Options:
a. acute
b. obtuse
c. right
d. straight

Answer: straight

Explanation:
180° is nothing but a straight angle.
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 2.
How many degrees are in an angle that turns through \(\frac{1}{4}\) of a circle?
Options:
a. 45°
b. 90°
c. 180°
d. 270°

Answer: 90°

Explanation:
The complete angle of the circle is 360°.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) × 360° = 90°
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Mae bought 15 football cards and 18 baseball cards. She separated them into 3 equal groups. How many sports cards are in each group?
Options:
a. 5
b. 6
c. 11
d. 12

Answer: 11

Explanation:
Given that,
Mae bought 15 football cards and 18 baseball cards. She separated them into 3 equal groups.
The total cards = 15 + 18 = 33 cards
Divide 33 cards into 3 equal groups
33/3 = 11
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 4.
Each part of a race is \(\frac{1}{10}\) mile long. Marsha finished 5 parts of the race. How far did Marsha race?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{10}\) mile
b. \(\frac{5}{12}\) mile
c. \(\frac{1}{2}\) mile
d. 5 \(\frac{1}{10}\) miles

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\) mile

Explanation:
Each part of a race is \(\frac{1}{10}\) mile long. Marsha finished 5 parts of the race.
We have to divide \(\frac{1}{10}\) into 5 parts.
\(\frac{1}{10}\) ÷ 5 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mile
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 5.
Jeff said his city got \(\frac{11}{3}\) inches of snow. Which shows this fraction written as a mixed number?
Options:
a. 3 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
b. 3 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
c. 2 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
d. 1 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Answer: 3 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:
Jeff said his city got \(\frac{11}{3}\) inches of snow.
Convert from improper fraction into the mixed fraction.
\(\frac{11}{3}\) = 3 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 6.
Amy ran \(\frac{3}{4}\) mile. Which decimal shows how many miles she ran?
Options:
a. 0.25 mile
b. 0.34 mile
c. 0.5 mile
d. 0.75 mile

Answer: 0.75 mile

Explanation:
Given,
Amy ran \(\frac{3}{4}\) mile.
The decimal form of \(\frac{3}{4}\) is 0.75
She ran 0.75 miles.
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Common Core – Angles – Page No. 211

Measure and Draw Angles

Use a protractor to find the angle measure.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles img 22
m∠ABC= 120°

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 23
m∠MNP = _____°

Answer: 90°
By using the protractor we can measure the angle. m∠MNP = 90°

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 24
m∠RST = _____°

Answer: 55°
By using the protractor we can measure the angle m∠RST is 55°

Use a protractor to draw the angle.

Question 4.
40°

Answer:

Question 5.
170°

Answer:

Draw an example of each. Label the angle with its measure.

Question 6.
a right angle

Answer:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 23

Question 7.
an acute angle

Answer:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 14

Problem Solving

The drawing shows the angles a stair tread makes with a support board along a wall. Use your protractor to measure the angles.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 25

Question 8.
What is the measure of ∠A?
_____°

Answer: 45°
By using the protractor we can measure the angle ∠A = 45°

Question 9.
What is the measure of ∠B?
_____°

Answer: 135°
By using the protractor we can measure the angle ∠B = 135°

Common Core – Angles – Page No. 212

Lesson Check

Question 1.
What is the measure of ∠ABC?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 26
Options:
a. 15°
b. 25°
c. 155°
d. 165°

Answer: 15°
With the help of the protractor, we can measure the ∠ABC = 15°
The correct answer is option A.

Question 2.
What is the measure of ∠XYZ?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 27
Options:
a. 20°
b. 30°
c. 150°
d. 160°

Answer: 150°
With the help of the protractor, we can measure the ∠XYZ = 150°
The correct answer is option C.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Derrick earned $1,472 during the 4 weeks he had his summer job. If he earned the same amount each week, how much did he earn each week?
Options:
a. $360
b. $368
c. $3,680
d. $5,888

Answer: $368

Explanation:
Derrick earned $1,472 during the 4 weeks he had his summer job.
Divide 1472 by 4
1472/4 = $368
Therefore he earned $368 each week.
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 4.
Arthur baked 1 \(\frac{7}{12}\) dozen muffins. Nina baked 1 \(\frac{1}{12}\) dozen muffins. How many dozen muffins did they bake in all?
Options:
a. 3 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
b. 2 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
c. 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
d. \(\frac{6}{12}\)

Answer: 2 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:
Arthur baked 1 \(\frac{7}{12}\) dozen muffins.
Nina baked 1 \(\frac{1}{12}\) dozen muffins.
Add both the fraction
1 \(\frac{7}{12}\) + 1 \(\frac{1}{12}\)
First add the whole numbers
1 + 1 = 2
\(\frac{7}{12}\) + \(\frac{1}{12}\) = \(\frac{8}{12}\)
2 \(\frac{8}{12}\) = 2 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 5.
Trisha drew the figure below. What figure did she draw?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 28
Options:
a. line segment ST
b. ray ST
c. ray TS
d. line TS

Answer: ray TS
The name of the figure Trisha drew is ray TS.
The correct answer is option C.

Question 6.
Which describes the turn shown by the angle?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 29
Options:
a. 1 full turn clockwise
b. \(\frac{3}{4}\) turn clockwise
c. \(\frac{1}{2}\) turn clockwise
d. \(\frac{1}{4}\) turn clockwise

Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}\) turn clockwise

Explanation:
The circle made a turn clockwise with a fraction \(\frac{1}{4}\).
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Common Core – Angles – Page No. 213

Join and Separate Angles

Add to find the measure of the angle. Write an equation to record your work.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 30
50°+75°=125°
m∠ABD=125°

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 31
_____° + _____° = _____° ; m∠FGJ = _____°

Answer: 160°

Explanation:
m∠FGH = 140°
m∠HGJ = 20°
m∠FGJ = 140° + 20° = 160°

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 32
_____° + _____° + _____° = _____° ; m∠KLN = _____°

Answer: 165°

Explanation:
m∠KLM = 30°
m∠MLP = 90°
m∠PLN = 45°
m∠KLN = 30° + 90° + 45° = 165°

Use a protractor to find the measure of each angle in the circle.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 33

Question 4.
m∠ABC = _____°

Answer: 115°
By using the protractor we can measure m∠ABC = 115°

Question 5.
m∠DBE = _____°

Answer: 90°
By using the protractor we can measure m∠DBE = 90°

Question 6.
m∠CBD = _____°

Answer: 75°
By using the protractor we can measure m∠CBD = 75°

Question 7.
m∠EBA = _____°

Answer: 80°
By using the protractor we can measure m∠EBA = 80°

Question 8.
Write the sum of the angle measures as an equation.
_____° + _____° + _____° + _____° = _____°

Answer: 115° + 75° + 90° + 80° = 360°

Explanation:
m∠ABC + m∠DBE + m∠CBD + m∠EBA
115° + 75° + 90° + 80° = 360°

Problem Solving
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 34

Question 9.
Ned made the design at the right. Use a protractor. Find and write the measure of each of the 3 angles.
_____° ; _____° ; _____° ;

Answer: 50°; 60°; 70°
By using the protractor we can measure each of the 3 angles i.e, 50°; 60°; 70°

Question 10.
Write an equation to find the measure of the total angle.
_____° + _____° + _____° = _____°

Answer: 50° + 60° + 70° =180°

Explanation:
Add all the three angles = 50° + 60° + 70° =180°

Common Core – Angles – Page No. 214

Lesson Check

Question 1.
What is the measure of m∠WXZ?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 35
Options:
a. 32°
b. 83°
c. 88°
d. 97°

Answer: 83°

Explanation:
m∠WXY = 58°
m∠ZXY = 25°
m∠WXZ = m∠WXY + m∠ZXY
m∠WXZ = 58° + 25°
m∠WXZ = 83°
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 2.
Which equation can you use to find the m∠MNQ?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 36
Options:
a. 148° – 24° = ■
b. 148° × 24° = ■
c. 148° ÷ 24° = ■
d. 148° + 24° = ■

Answer: 148° + 24° = ■

Explanation:
m∠MNQ = m∠MNP + m∠PNQ
m∠MNP + m∠PNQ = 148° + 24°
m∠MNQ = ■
148° + 24° = ■
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Joe bought 6 packages of envelopes. Each package contains 125 envelopes. How many envelopes did he buy?
Options:
a. 750
b. 723
c. 720
d. 650

Answer: 750

Explanation:
Given,
Joe bought 6 packages of envelopes. Each package contains 125 envelopes.
Multiply the number of packages and number of envelopes
= 6 × 125 = 750
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 4.
The Lake Trail is \(\frac{3}{10}\) mile long and the Rock Trail is \(\frac{5}{10}\) long. Bill hiked each trail once. How many miles did he hike in all?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{5}\) mile
b. \(\frac{4}{10}\) mile
c. \(\frac{1}{2}\) mile
d. \(\frac{8}{10}\) mile

Answer: \(\frac{8}{10}\) mile

Explanation:
The Lake Trail is \(\frac{3}{10}\) mile long and the Rock Trail is \(\frac{5}{10}\) long.
\(\frac{3}{10}\) + \(\frac{5}{10}\) = \(\frac{8}{10}\) mile
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 5.
Ron drew a quadrilateral with 4 right angles and 4 sides with the same length. Which best describes the figure he drew?
Options:
a. square
b. rhombus
c. trapezoid
d. parallelogram

Answer: square

Explanation:
A quadrilateral with 4 right angles and 4 sides with the same length is known as a square.

Question 6.
How many degrees are in an angle that turns through \(\frac{3}{4}\) of a circle?
Options:
a. 45°
b. 90°
c. 180°
d. 270°

Answer: 270°

Explanation:
\(\frac{3}{4}\) of a circle is 3/4 × 360° = 3 × 90° = 270°
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Common Core – Angles – Page No. 215

Problem Solving Unknown Angle Measures
Solve each problem. Draw a diagram to help.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 37

Question 2.
An artist is cutting a piece of metal as shown. What is the angle measure of the piece left over?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 38
x = _____°

Answer: 95°

Explanation:
x  + 130° = 225
x = 225° – 130°
x = 95°

Question 3.
Joan has a piece of material for making a costume. She needs to cut it as shown. What is the angle measure of the piece left over?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 39
x = _____°

Answer: 50°

Explanation:
x + 40° = 90°
x = 90° – 40°
x = 50°

Common Core – Angles – Page No. 216

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Angelo cuts a triangle from a sheet of paper as shown. What is the measure of ∠x in the triangle?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 40
Options:
a. 15°
b. 25°
c. 75°
d. 105°

Answer: 15°

Explanation:
The above figure is a right triangle.
x + 75° = 90°
x = 90° – 75°
x = 15°
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 2.
Cindy cuts a piece of wood as shown. What is the angle measure of the piece left over?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 41
Options:
a. 30°
b. 90°
c. 120°
d. 150°

Answer: 120°

Explanation:
x + 90° = 210°
x = 210° – 90
x = 120°
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Tyronne worked 21 days last month. He earned $79 each day. How much did Tyronne earn last month?
Options:
a. $869
b. $948
c. $1,659
d. $2,169

Answer: $1,659

Explanation:
Given that,
Tyronne worked 21 days last month. He earned $79 each day.
21 × $79 = $1659
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 4.
Meg inline skated for \(\frac{7}{10}\) mile. Which shows this distance written as a decimal?
Options:
a. 0.07 mile
b. 0.1 mile
c. 0.7 mile
d. 7.1 miles

Answer: 0.7 mile

Explanation:
Meg inline skated for \(\frac{7}{10}\) mile.
The decimal form of \(\frac{7}{10}\) is 0.7 mile.
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 5.
Kerry ran \(\frac{3}{4}\) mile. Sherrie ran \(\frac{1}{2}\) mile. Marcie ran \(\frac{2}{3}\) mile. Which list orders the friends from least to greatest distance
run?
Options:
a. Kerry, Sherrie, Marcie
b. Kerry, Marcie, Sherrie
c. Sherrie, Kerry, Marcie
d. Sherrie, Marcie, Kerry

Answer: Sherrie, Marcie, Kerry

Explanation:
Kerry ran \(\frac{3}{4}\) mile. Sherrie ran \(\frac{1}{2}\) mile. Marcie ran \(\frac{2}{3}\) mile.
Put the fractions from least to greatest.
\(\frac{1}{2}\), \(\frac{2}{3}\), \(\frac{3}{4}\)
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 6.
What is the measure of m∠ABC?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 42
Options:
a. 32°
b. 84°
c. 88°
d. 94°

Answer: 84°

Explanation:
m∠ABC = m∠ABD + m∠DBC
m∠ABC = 58° + 26°
m∠ABC = 84°
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Common Core – Angles – Page No. 217

Lesson 11.1

Tell whether the angle on the circle shows \(\frac{1}{4}, \frac{1}{2}, \frac{3}{4}\), or 1 full turn clockwise or counterclockwise.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 43
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:
The angle on the above circle shows \(\frac{1}{4}\) turn counterclockwise.

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 44
_____

Answer: 1
The angle on the above circle shows 1 full turn clockwise.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 45
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\)
The angle on the above circle shows \(\frac{1}{2}\) turn clockwise.

Lesson 11.2

Tell the measure of the angle in degrees.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 46
_____

Answer: 90°
The complete angle of the circle = 360°
The fraction of the shaded part is 1/4
1/4 × 360° = 90°

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 47
_____

Answer: 130°
The complete angle of the circle = 360°
The fraction of the shaded part is 130/360
130/360 × 360 = 130°

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 48
_____

Answer: 270°

Explanation:
The complete angle of the circle = 360°
The fraction of the shaded part is 3/4
3/4 × 360° = 270°

Classify the triangle. Write acute, obtuse, or right.

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 49
_____

Answer: Obtuse

Explanation:
An obtuse angle has a measurement greater than 90 degrees but less than 180 degrees. The above angle is 110° which is greater than 90° and less than 180°. Thus the angle of the above figure is an obtuse angle.

Question 8.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 50
_____

Answer: Acute

Explanation:
The acute angle is the small angle which is less than 90°. The above angle is 60° which is less than 90°. Thus the above angle is an acute angle.

Question 9.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 51
_____

Answer: Right

Explanation:
In geometry and trigonometry, a right angle is an angle of exactly 90°, corresponding to a quarter turn.

Common Core – Angles – Page No. 218

Lesson 11.3

Question 1.
Use a protractor to find the angle measure.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 52
m ∠PQR = _____°

Answer: 15°
By using the protractor we can measure the angle m ∠PQR = 15°

Question 2.
Use a protractor to draw an angle with the measure 72º.

Answer:

Lesson 11.4

Add to find the measure of the angle. Write an equation to record your work.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 53
m ∠NML = _____°

Answer: 140°

Explanation:
m ∠NML = m ∠LMX + m ∠NMX
m ∠NML = 50° + 90°
m ∠NML = 140°

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 54
m ∠UTS = _____°

Answer: 55°

Explanation:
m ∠UTS = m ∠STX + m ∠UTX
m ∠UTS = 25° + 30°
m ∠UTS = 55°

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 55
m ∠HGF = _____°

Answer: 165°

Explanation:
m ∠HGF = m ∠HGX + m ∠HGY + m ∠FGY
m ∠HGF = 45° + 50° + 70° = 165°
m ∠HGF = 165°

Lesson 11.5

Use the diagram for 1–2.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles Common Core - Angles img 56

Question 6.
Luke is cutting a board to make a trapezoid for a project. What is the angle measure of the piece left over after Cut A?
x = _____°

Answer: 35°

Explanation:
By seeing the above figure we can find Cut A.
x + 55° = 90°
x = 90° – 55°
x = 35°

Question 7.
What is the angle measure of the piece left over after Cut B?
y = _____°

Answer: 60°

Explanation:
By seeing the above figure we can find Cut B.
70° + y = 130°
y = 130° – 70°
y = 60°

Conclusion:

We wish the data given about Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles helps you a lot. These detailed solutions can explain the concepts more in a simple and concise way. Hence, practicing from the Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles will make students find out the related questions of angles and score the highest marks in the exams.

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 5 Use Multiplication Facts Extra Practice

go-math-grade-3-chapter-5-use-multiplication-facts-answer-key

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 5 Use Multiplication Facts Extra Practice gives your preparation a head start. Thus, students who wish to prepare different questions of Chapter 5 Extra Practice can refer to HMH Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 5 Use Multiplication Facts Extra Practice. Resolve all your doubts on the concepts by checking the step by step solutions provided for the 3rd Grade Go Math Answer Key Ch 5 Use Multiplication Facts Extra Practice.

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 5 Use Multiplication Facts Extra Practice

Learn all basics regarding Multiplication taking the help of the Go Math Answer Key Chapter 5 Extra Practice. You will have the basics of multiplication using the line plot, number line, and graphs. Get acquainted with tips and tricks to solve various problems on Multiplication easily by referring to Examples over here. You will achieve better grades after practicing 3rd Grade Go Math Answer Key Ch 5 Use Multiplication Facts Extra Practice only a daily basis.

Common Core – Page No. 101000

Lesson 5.1

Describe a pattern for the table. Then complete the table.

Question 1.

Teams 2 3 4 5 6
Players 12 18 24 _________ _________

Answer:

Teams 2 3 4 5 6
Players 12 18 24 30 36

Explanation:

Multiply 6 with a number of tables.
Multiply 6 with 5 teams = 6 × 5 = 30
Multiply 6 with 6 teams = 6 × 6 = 36

Question 2.

Tables 4 5 6 7 8
Chairs 16 20 _________ 28 _________

Answer:

Tables 4 5 6 7 8
Chairs 16 20 24 28 32

Explanation:

Multiply 4 with number of tables.
Number of chairs for 6 tables = x
Number of chairs for 8 tables = y
Now multiply number of tables with 4 = 6 × 4 = 24
And then multiply 8 tables with 4 = 8 × 4 = 32
Therefore the missing numbers in the table are 24 and 32

Lesson 5.2

Find the unknown factor.

Question 3.
72 = 9 × t
t = _______

Answer: 8

Explanation:

t × 9 = 72
t = 72/9 = 8
The unknown factor t is 8.

Question 4.
4 × ★ = 28
★ = _______

Answer: 7

Explanation:

4 × ★ = 28
★ = 28/4 = 7
★ = 7

Question 5.
b × 5 = 30
b = _______

Answer: 6

Explanation:

b × 5 = 30
b = 30/5 = 6
Thus the unknown factor b is 6.

Question 6.
d × 3 = 24
d = _______

Answer: 8

Explanation:

d × 3 = 24
d = 24/3 = 8
Therefore the unknown factor d is 8.

Question 7.
48 = 8 × p
p = _______

Answer: 6

Explanation:

8 × p = 48
p = 48/8
p = 6
Thus the unknown factor p is 6.

Question 8.
6 × ▲ = 24
▲= _______

Answer: 4

6 × ▲= 24
▲= 24/6
▲= 4
So the unknown factor▲is 4.

Question 9.
56 = 7 × ■
■ = _______

Answer: 8

Explanation:

7 × ■ = 56
■ = 56/7
7 divides 56 eight times.
So the unknown factor ■ is 8.

Question 10.
2 × g = 20
g = _______

Answer: 10

Explanation:

2 × g = 20
g = 20/2 = 10
Therefore the unknown factor g is 10.

Question 11.
h × 7 = 35
h = _______

Answer: 5

Explanation:

h × 7 = 35
h = 35/7
h = 5
Thus the unknown factor h is 5.

Question 12.
9 = 9 × a
a = _______

Answer: 1

Explanation:

9 × a = 9
a = 9/9
a = 1
So the unknown factor a is 1.

Question 13.
c × 4 = 36
c = _______

Answer: 9

Explanation:

c × 4 = 36
c = 36/4
4 divides 36 nine times.
c = 9
Therefore the unknown factor is 9.

Question 14.
5 × y = 40
y = _______

Answer: 8

Explanation:

5 × y = 40
y = 40/5
y = 8
Thus the unknown factor is 8.

Common Core – Page No. 102000

Lesson 5.3

Solve.

Question 1.
Hailey plants 6 rows of marigolds. Each row has 20 marigolds. How many marigolds does Hailey plant in all?
_______ marigolds

Answer: 120

Explanation:

Given that, Hailey plants 6 rows of marigolds.
Each row contains 20 marigolds.
Total number of marigolds that Hailey planted in all = x
x = 20 × 6 = 120
Therefore Hailey planted 120 marigolds.

Question 2.
A meeting room has 8 rows of chairs. Each row has 10 chairs. The first people to arrive fill 2 rows. How many chairs are not filled?
_______ chairs

Answer: 60

Explanation:

Given, A meeting room has 8 rows of chairs.
Each row has 10 chairs.
Total number of chairs = 8 × 10 = 80 chairs
The first people to arrive fill 2 rows.
That means 2 × 10 = 20 chairs
Number of chairs that are not filled = total number of chairs – number of filled chairs
= 80 – 20 = 60 chairs.

Lesson 5.4

Question 3.
1. Use a number line to find the product.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 5 Use Multiplication Facts Extra Practice Common Core img 1
4 × 30 = _______

Answer: 120

Step 1:

Starts at 0.

Step 2:

Make a jump of 30s until you reach 120.

Step 3:

Count the number of jumps till you reach 120.
Number of jumps = 4
4 × 30 = 120

Use place value to find the product.

Question 4.
40 × 8 = _______ tens × 8
= _______ tens = _______

Answer:

i. 4
ii. 32
iii. 320

Explanation:

4 × tens = 4 tens = 40
4 tens × 8 = 32 tens
32 tens = 32 × 10 = 320

Question 5.
5 × 60 = 5 × _______ tens
= _______ tens = _______

Answer:

i. 6
ii. 30 tens
iii. 300

Explanation:

60 = 6 × tens = 6 tens
5 × 6 tens = 30 tens
30 tens = 30 × 10 = 300

Lesson 5.5

Find the product.

Question 6.
9 0
× 3
——
_______

Answer: 270

Explanation:

First multiply 3 with ones = 3 × 0 = 0
Next multiply 3 with tens = 3 × 90 = 270
So the product of 90 and 3 is 270.

Question 7.
5 0
× 8
——
_______

Answer: 400

Explanation:

First multiply 8 with ones = 8 × 0 = 0
Now multiply 8 with tens = 8 × 50 = 400
The product of 50 and 8 is 400.

Question 8.
7 0
× 9
——
_______

Answer: 630

Explanation:

Multiply 9 with ones = 9 × 0 = 0
Multiply 9 with tens = 9 × 70 = 630
The product of 9 and 70 is 630.

Question 9.
8 0
× 7
——
_______

Answer: 560

Explanation:

Multiply 7 with ones = 7 × 0 = 0
And then multiply 7 with tens = 7 × 80 = 560
Thus the product of 80 and 7 is 560.

Solve.

Question 10.
During the summer, Jayden volunteers at the library for 20 hours each week for 7 weeks. How many hours does Jayden volunteer in all?
_______ hours

Answer: 140 hours

Explanation:

During the summer, Jayden volunteers at the library for 20 hours each week for 7 weeks.
For each week he worked 20 hours
Number of hours he worked for 7 weeks = y
y = 7 × 20 = 140 hours
Therefore Jayden volunteers at the library for 20 hours.

Question 11.
Trisha teaches 8 different cooking classes. There are 20 students in each class. How many students in all are in Trisha’s cooking classes?
_______ students

Answer: 160 students

Explanation:

Given,
Trisha teaches 8 different cooking classes.
There are 20 students in each class.
Total number of students = number of classes × number of students in each class
= 8 × 20 = 160 students.
Therefore the total number of students in all the cooking classes area 120.

Extra Practice will pave a way for enhancing your knowledge of the concept of Multiplication. Tap on the links available and learn whichever topic you want to prepare. Check out Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 5 Use Multiplication Facts and learn related topics.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions

go-math-grade-5-chapter-8-divide-fractions-answer-key

Gain Complete Knowledge required on the Concept Divide Fractions by accessing our Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8. You will have Questions belonging to practice problems, mid-chapter, and review tests along with detailed explanations. Those, who are in search of Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key can download them free of cost.

We have compiled HMH 5th Grade Go Math Answer Key Ch 8 Dividing Fractions with Step by Step Solutions making it easy to grab the concepts within easily. Tap on the direct links available for Lessons of Ch 8 Dividing Fractions to get the problems related to them instantly.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions

Score better grades in your exams by practicing from the HMH Go Math 5th Grade Solution Key. Firstly, solve the problems on your own and later cross-check them with the Solutions Provided and improve your Math Skills. You will have topics like Divide Fractions and Whole Numbers, Interpret Division with Fractions and Fraction, Connect Fractions to Division, and Whole-Number Division.

Lesson 1: Investigate • Divide Fractions and Whole Numbers

Lesson 2: Problem Solving • Use Multiplication

Lesson 3: Connect Fractions to Division

Mid-Chapter Checkpoint

Lesson 4: Fraction and Whole-Number Division

Lesson 5: Interpret Division with Fractions

Chapter 8: Review/Test

Share and Show – Page No. 341

Divide and check the quotient.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions img 1
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = _____ because _____ × \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 3

Answer: 3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 9 because 9 × \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 3

Explanation:
Step 1: Place a \(\frac{1}{3}\) strip under a three 1 whole strip to show the \(\frac{1}{3}\).
Step 2: Find 9 fraction strips, all with the same denominator, that fit exactly under the \(\frac{1}{3}\) strip.
Each piece is \(\frac{1}{3}\) of the whole.
Step 3: Record and check the quotient.
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 9 because 9 × \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 3

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions img 2
Think: What label should I write for each tick mark?
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{6}\) = _____ because _____ × \(\frac{1}{6}\) = 3

Answer: 18, 18

Explanation:
Step 1: Skip count by sixths from 0 to 3 find 3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{6}\).
Step 2: There are 18 one-sixths in 3 wholes.
You can use the relationship between multiplication and division to explain and check your solution.
Step 3: Now record and check the quotient.
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{6}\) = 18 because 18 × \(\frac{1}{6}\) = 3

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions img 3
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 2 = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Explanation:
Step 1: Place a \(\frac{1}{4}\) strip under a 1 whole strip to show the \(\frac{1}{4}\) on the strip.
Step 2: Find 2 \(\frac{1}{8}\) fraction strips, all with the same denominator, that fit exactly under the \(\frac{1}{4}\) strip.
Step 3: Record and check the quotient.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 2 = \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Divide. Draw a number line or use fraction strips.

Question 4.
1 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = _____

Answer: 3

Explanation:
Step 1: Skip count by thirds from 0 to 1 find 1 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\).
Step 2: There are 3 \(\frac{1}{3}\) in 1 whole.
You can use the relationship between multiplication and division to explain and check your solution.
Step 3: Now record and check the quotient.
1 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 3

Question 5.
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\) = _____

Answer: 12

Explanation:
Step 1: Skip count by fourths from 0 to 3 find 3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\).
Step 2: There are 12 one-fourths in 3 wholes.
You can use the relationship between multiplication and division to explain and check your solution.
Step 3: Now record and check the quotient.
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 12 because 12 × \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 3

Question 6.
\(\frac{1}{5}\) ÷ 2 = _____

Answer: \(\frac{1}{10}\)

Explanation:
Step 1: Place a \(\frac{1}{5}\) strip under a 2 whole strip to show the \(\frac{1}{5}\) on the strip.
Step 2: Find 2 \(\frac{1}{10}\) fraction strips, all with the same denominator, that fit exactly under the \(\frac{1}{5}\) strip.
Step 3: Record and check the quotient.
\(\frac{1}{5}\) ÷ 2 = \(\frac{1}{10}\)

Question 7.
2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\) = _____

Answer: 4

Explanation:
Step 1: Skip count by halves from 0 to 2 find 2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\).
Step 2: There are 4 halves in 2 wholes.
You can use the relationship between multiplication and division to explain and check your solution.
Step 3: Record and check the quotient.
2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 4 because 4 × \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 2

Question 8.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 3 = _____

Answer: \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Explanation:
Step 1: Place a \(\frac{1}{4}\) strip under a 3 whole strip to show the \(\frac{1}{4}\) on the strip.
Step 2: Find 3 \(\frac{1}{12}\) fraction strips, all with the same denominator, that fit exactly under the \(\frac{1}{4}\) strip.
Step 3: Record and check the quotient.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 3 = \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Question 9.
5 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\) = _____

Answer: 10

Explanation:
Step 1: Skip count by halves from 0 to 5 find 5 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\).
Step 2: There are 10 halves in 5 wholes.
You can use the relationship between multiplication and division to explain and check your solution.
Step 3: Record and check the quotient.
5 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 10 because 10 × \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 5

Question 10.
4 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\) = _____

Answer: 8

Explanation:
Step 1: Skip count by halves from 0 to 4 find 4 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\).
Step 2: There are 8 halves in 4 wholes.
You can use the relationship between multiplication and division to explain and check your solution.
Step 3: Record and check the quotient.
4 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 8 because 8 × \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 4

Question 11.
\(\frac{1}{6}\) ÷ 2 = _____

Answer: \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Explanation:
Step 1: Place a \(\frac{1}{6}\) strip under a 2 whole strip to show the \(\frac{1}{6}\) on the strip.
Step 2: Find 2 \(\frac{1}{12}\) fraction strips, all with the same denominator, that fit exactly under the \(\frac{1}{6}\) strip.
Step 3: Record and check the quotient.
\(\frac{1}{6}\) ÷ 2 = \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Question 12.
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\) = _____

Answer: 15

Explanation:
Step 1: Skip count by fifths from 0 to 3 find 3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\).
Step 2: There are 15 one fifths in 3 wholes.
You can use the relationship between multiplication and division to explain and check your solution.
Step 3: Record and check the quotient.
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\) = 15 because 15 × \(\frac{1}{5}\) = 3

Problem Solving – Page No. 342

Sense or Nonsense?

Question 13.
Emilio and Julia used different ways to find \(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 4. Emilio used a model to find the quotient. Julia used a related multiplication equation to find the quotient. Whose answer makes sense? Whose answer is nonsense? Explain your reasoning.
Emilio’s Work
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions img 4
\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 4

Julia’s Work
If \(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 4 = ■, then ■ × 4 = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
I know that \(\frac{1}{8}\) ÷ 4 = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
So, \(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 4 = \(\frac{1}{8}\) because \(\frac{1}{8}\) × 4 = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Type below:
____________

Answer:
Julia’s Work is sense.
Emilio’s work is nonsense.

Question 13.
• For the answer that is nonsense, describe how to find the correct answer.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
Emilio’s work is nonsense becuase she divided \(\frac{1}{2}\) into two parts i.e., \(\frac{1}{4}\) and \(\frac{1}{4}\).
\(\frac{1}{2}\)/4 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Emilio must multiply the whole number with the denominator.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) × \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Question 13.
If you were going to find \(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 5, explain how you would find the quotient using fraction strips.
Type below:
____________

Answer: \(\frac{1}{10}\)

Explanation:
Step 1: Place a \(\frac{1}{2}\) strip under a 5 whole strip to show the \(\frac{1}{2}\) on the strip.
Step 2: Find 2 \(\frac{1}{10}\) fraction strips, all with the same denominator, that fit exactly under the \(\frac{1}{2}\) strip.
Step 3: Record and check the quotient.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 5 = \(\frac{1}{10}\)

Share and Show – Page No. 345

Question 1.
A chef has 5 blocks of butter. Each block weighs 1 pound.
She cuts each block into fourths. How many \(\frac{1}{4}\)-pound pieces of butter does the chef have?
First, draw rectangles to represent the blocks of butter.
Then, divide each rectangle into fourths.
Finally, multiply the number of fourths in each block by the number of blocks.
So, the chef has ______ one-fourth-pound pieces of butter.
______ one-fourth-pound

Answer: 20

Explanation:
Step 1: First form 5 rectangles to represent the blocks of butter. And then divide each rectangle into fourths.
Step 2: Now we will multiply the number of fourths in each block by the number of blocks.
Multiply the fourths with the whole number.
4 × 5 = 20
Thus the chef has 20 one fourth pound pieces of butter.

Question 2.
What if the chef had 3 blocks of butter and cut the blocks into thirds? How many \(\frac{1}{3}\)-pound pieces of butter would the chef have?
______ \(\frac{1}{3}\)-pound

Answer: 9

Explanation:
Multiply the number of thirds in each block with the number of blocks.
3 × thirds = 3 × 3 = 9
Thus the chef has 9 one third pound pieces of butter.

Question 3.
Jason has 2 pizzas that he cuts into fourths. How many \(\frac{1}{4}\)-size pizza slices does he have?
______ \(\frac{1}{4}\)-size pizza slices

Answer: 8

Explanation:
Step 1: First, draw 2 circles to represent pizzas. Then divide each circle into fourths.
Step 2: Now multiply the number of fourths in each circle by the number of circles.
4 × 2 = 8
So, Jason has 8 one fourth size pizza slices.

Question 4.
Thomas makes 5 sandwiches that he cuts into thirds. How many \(\frac{1}{3}\)-size sandwich pieces does he have?
______ \(\frac{1}{3}\)-size sandwich pieces

Answer: 15

Explanation:
Step 1: First, draw 5 rectangles to represent sandwiches. Then divide each rectangle into thirds.
Step 2: Multiply one third with the number of sandwiches.
3 × 5 = 15
Thomas has 15 one-third sandwich pieces.

Question 5.
Holly cuts 3 pans of brownies into eighths. How many \(\frac{1}{8}\)-size brownie pieces does she have?
______ \(\frac{1}{8}\)-size brownie pieces

Answer: 24

Explanation:
Step 1: First draw 3 rectangles to represent the ribbons. Then divide each rectangle into the pieces.
Step 2: Now multiply the Number of eights with the number of ribbons.
8 × 3 = 24
Thus Holy has 24 one eighths pieces of ribbon.

On Your Own – Page No. 346

Question 6.
Julie wants to make a drawing that is \(\frac{1}{4}\) the size of the original. If a tree in the original drawing is 8 inches tall, how tall will the tree in Julie’s drawing be?
______ inches

Answer: 2

Explanation:
Given, Julie wants to make a drawing that is \(\frac{1}{4}\) the size of the original.
The tree is 8 inches tall.
8 × \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 2
The height of the tree in Julie’s drawing is 2 inches.

Question 7.
Three friends go to a book fair. Allen spends $2.60. Maria spends 4 times as much as Allen. Akio spends $3.45 less than Maria. How much does Akio spend?
$ ______

Answer: $ 6.95

Explanation:
To find how much Akio spends for first we will find how much Maria spends, and then subtract 3.45 dollars from that value.
Allen spends 2.60 dollars.
Maris spends 4 times as much as Allen.
4 × 2.60 = 10.4
So, Maria spends 10.4 dollars.
Akio spends for 3.45 dollars less than Maria.
10.4 – 3.45 = 6.95
So, Akio spends 6.95 dollars.

Question 8.
Brianna has a sheet of paper that is 6 feet long. She cuts the length of paper into sixths and then cuts the length of each of these \(\frac{1}{6}\) pieces into thirds. How many pieces does she have? How many inches long is each piece?
______ pieces , each ______ inches long

Answer: 18 pieces, each 0.33 inches long

Explanation:
Brianna has a sheet of paper that is 6 feet long.
She cuts the length of paper into sixths and then cuts the length of each of these \(\frac{1}{6}\) pieces into thirds.
Then we will count the one-third pieces to find how many pieces she has.
6 feet ÷18 = 0.33 feet
So, each piece is 0.33 feet long.

Question 9.
Pose a Problem Look back at Problem 8. Write a similar problem by changing the length of the paper and the size of the pieces.
Type below:
____________

Answer:

Explanation:
John has a tree that is 10 feet long. She cuts the length of the tree into tenth and then cuts the length of each of these 1/10 pieces into fourth. How many pieces does he have? How many feet long is each piece?
Answer:
First, draw one rectangle to represent the tree. Then divide this rectangle into tenths, and then we will divide each 1/10 piece into fourths.
Then we will count the one-fourth pieces to find how many pieces he has.
1 tree = 10 feet
10 feet ÷ 40 = 0.4 feet
So, each piece is 0.4 feet long.

Question 10.
Test Prep Adrian made 3 carrot cakes. He cut each cake into fourths. How many \(\frac{1}{4}\)-size cake pieces does he have?
Options:
a. 16
b. 12
c. 1 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
d. 1

Answer: 12

Explanation:
Test Prep Adrian made 3 carrot cakes.
He cut each cake into fourths.
Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions image_1
By seeing the above figure we can say that Adrian has 12 one-quarter-size pieces of a granola bar.

Share and Show – Page No. 349

Draw lines on the model to complete the number sentence.

Question 1.
Six friends share 4 pizzas equally.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions img 5
4 ÷ 6 =
Each friend’s share is _____ of a pizza.
\(\frac{□}{□}\) of a pizza.

Answer: \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:
Draw lines to divide each pizza into 4 equal pieces.
Each friend gets \(\frac{2}{3}\) of a pizza.
4 ÷ 6 = \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Each friend’s share is \(\frac{2}{3}\) of a pizza.

Question 2.
Four brothers share 5 sandwiches equally.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions img 6
5 ÷ 4 =
Each brother’s share is ____ sandwiches.
\(\frac{□}{□}\) sandwiches

Answer: \(\frac{5}{4}\)

Explanation:
Draw lines to divide each sandwich into 4 equal pieces.
Divide the number of brothers by the total number of sandwiches.
5 ÷ 4 = \(\frac{5}{4}\)
Each brother’s share is \(\frac{5}{4}\) sandwiches.

Complete the number sentence to solve.

Question 3.
Twelve friends share 3 pies equally. What fraction of a pie does each friend get?
3 ÷ 12 =
Each friend’s share is _____ of a pie.
\(\frac{□}{□}\) of a pie

Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:
Twelve friends share 3 pies equally.
3 ÷ 12 = \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Each friend’s share is \(\frac{1}{4}\) of a pie.

Question 4.
Three students share 8 blocks of clay equally. How much clay does each student get?
8 ÷ 3 =
Each student’s share is ____ blocks of clay.
\(\frac{□}{□}\) blocks of clay

Answer: 2 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:
Three students share 8 blocks of clay equally.
Divide the number of blocks by three students.
8 ÷ 3 = \(\frac{8}{3}\)
\(\frac{8}{3}\) = 2 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Each student’s share is 2 \(\frac{2}{3}\) blocks of clay.

On Your Own

Complete the number sentence to solve.

Question 5.
Four students share 7 oranges equally. How many oranges does each student get?
7 ÷ 4 =
Each student’s share is _____ oranges.
_____ \(\frac{□}{□}\) oranges

Answer: 1 \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Explanation:
Four students share 7 oranges equally.
Draw lines to divide each orange into 4 equal pieces.
7 ÷ 4 = \(\frac{7}{4}\)
Convert the improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
\(\frac{7}{4}\) = 1 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
Each student’s share is 1 \(\frac{3}{4}\) oranges.

Question 6.
Eight girls share 5 fruit bars equally. What fraction of a fruit bar does each girl get?
5 ÷ 8 =
Each girl’s share is _____ of a fruit bar.
\(\frac{□}{□}\) of a fruit bar

Answer: \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Explanation:
Given that,
Eight girls share 5 fruit bars equally.
5 ÷ 8 = \(\frac{5}{8}\)
Thus the fraction of the fruit bar each friend gets is \(\frac{5}{8}\).

Question 7.
Nine friends share 6 pizzas equally. What fraction of a pizza does each friend get?
6 ÷ 9 =
Each friend’s share is _ of a pizza.
\(\frac{□}{□}\) of a pizza

Answer: \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:
Nine friends share 6 pizzas equally.
Draw lines to divide each pizza into 9 pieces.
6 ÷ 9 = \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Thus each friend’s share is \(\frac{2}{3}\) of a pizza.

Question 8.
Two boys share 9 feet of rope equally. How many feet of rope does each boy get?
9 ÷ 2 =
Each boy’s share is ____ feet of rope.
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\) feet of rope

Answer: 4 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
Two boys share 9 feet of rope equally.
Divide nine into halves.
9 ÷ 2 = \(\frac{9}{2}\)
\(\frac{9}{2}\) = 4 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Problem Solving – Page No. 350

Question 9.
Shawna has 3 adults and 2 children coming over for dessert. She is going to serve 2 small apple pies. If she plans to give each person, including herself, an equal amount of pie, how much pie will each person get?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions img 7
\(\frac{□}{□}\) pie

Answer: \(\frac{1}{3}\) pie

Explanation:
To find how much pie each person will get, we will find when 2 small apple pies we will divide by 6 persons.
2 ÷ 6 = \(\frac{2}{6}\) = \(\frac{1}{3}\)
Therefore each person will get \(\frac{1}{3}\) pie.

Question 10.
There are 36 members in the math club. Addison brought 81 brownies to share with all the members. How many brownies does each member get?
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\) brownies

Answer: 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:
Given that, There are 36 members in the math club.
Addison brought 81 brownies to share with all the members.
Dividing the number of brownies by members in the math club.
81 ÷ 36 = \(\frac{81}{36}\) = \(\frac{9}{4}\)
The mixed fraction of \(\frac{9}{4}\) is 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Thus each member gets 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) brownies.

Question 11.
Eight students share 12 oatmeal muffins equally and 6 students share 15 apple muffins equally. Carmine is in both groups of students. What is the total number of muffins Carmine gets?
______ muffins

Answer: 4 muffins

Explanation:
Since Carmine is in both groups of students, for first we will find out how many each student of each group gets.
Now we will find how many oatmeal muffins each of the 8 students get, we will divide the 12 oatmeal muffins by the 8 students.
12 ÷ 8 = \(\frac{12}{8}\) = \(\frac{3}{2}\)
\(\frac{3}{2}\) = 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
So, each student shares 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\) oatmeal muffins.
To find how many apple muffins each of the 6 students get we will divide the 15 apple muffins by the 6 students.
15 ÷ 6 = \(\frac{15}{6}\) = \(\frac{5}{2}\)
\(\frac{5}{2}\) = 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
As Carmine is in both groups we need to add the total number of muffins
1 \(\frac{1}{2}\)  + 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 4
Therefore the total number of muffins Carmine gets is 4.

Question 12.
Nine friends order 4 large pizzas. Four of the friends share 2 pizzas equally and the other 5 friends share 2 pizzas equally. In which group does each member get a greater amount of pizza? Explain your reasoning.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
To find in which group each member get a greater amount of pizza, for first, we will find how many each of the friends gets.
Given that 4 friends share 2 pizzas equally, so to find how many pizzas each of the 4 students get, we will find when dividing the 2 pizzas among 4 friends.
2 ÷ 4 = 2/4 = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
In this group, each student’s share is \(\frac{1}{2}\) of the pizza.
The other 5 friends share 2 pizzas equally, so to find out how many pizzas each of the 5 students get, we will find when we divide the 2 pizza among 5 friends.
2 ÷ 5 = \(\frac{2}{5}\)
In this group, each student’s share is \(\frac{2}{5}\) of the pizza.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) > \(\frac{2}{5}\) so as a group with four members get a greater amount of pizza.

Question 13.
Test Prep Jason baked 5 cherry pies. He wants to share them equally among 3 of his neighbors. How many pies will each neighbor get?
Options:
a. \(\frac{3}{8}\)
b. \(\frac{3}{5}\)
c. 1 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
d. 2 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Answer: 1 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:
To find how many pies each neighbor we have to divide number of cherry pies by number of neighbor.
5 ÷ 3 = \(\frac{5}{3}\)
Convert the improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
\(\frac{5}{3}\) = 1 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Mid-Chapter Checkpoint – Page No. 351

Concepts and Skills

Question 1.
Explain how you can tell, without computing, whether the quotient \(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 6 is greater than 1 or less than 1.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 6 = \(\frac{1}{12}\)
\(\frac{1}{12}\) is less than 1.

Divide. Draw a number line or use fraction strips.

Question 2.
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\)
______

Answer: 6

Explanation:
Step 1: Draw a number line from 0 to 3. Label each half on your number line.
Step 2: Skip count by halves from 0 to 3 to find 3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\).
You can use the relationship between multiplication and division to explain and check your solution.
Step 3: Record and check the quotient.
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 6 because 6 × \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 3

Question 3.
1 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\)
______

Answer: 4

Explanation:
Step 1: Draw a number line from 0 to 1. Label each fourth on your number line.
Step 2: Skip count by fourths from 0 to 1 to find 1 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\).
You can use the relationship between multiplication and division to explain and check your solution.
Step 3: Record and check the quotient.
1 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 4 because 4 × \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 1

Question 4.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 2
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:
Step 1: Place a \(\frac{1}{2}\) strip under a 2 whole strip to show the \(\frac{1}{2}\) on the strip.
Step 2: Find 4 \(\frac{1}{2}\) fraction strips, all with the same denominator, that fit exactly under the \(\frac{1}{2}\) strip.
Step 3: Record and check the quotient.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 2 = \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Question 5.
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 4
_____ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Explanation:
Step 1: Place a \(\frac{1}{3}\) strip under a 4 whole strip to show the \(\frac{1}{3}\) on the strip.
Step 2: Find 12 \(\frac{1}{3}\) fraction strips, all with the same denominator, that fit exactly under the \(\frac{1}{3}\) strip.
Step 3: Record and check the quotient.
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 4 = \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Question 6.
2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{6}\)
______

Answer: 12

Explanation:
Step 1: Draw a number line from 0 to 2. Label each sixth on your number line.
Step 2: Skip count by fourths from 0 to 2 to find 2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{6}\).
You can use the relationship between multiplication and division to explain and check your solution.
Step 3: Record and check the quotient.
2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{6}\) = 12 because 12 × \(\frac{1}{6}\) = 2

Question 7.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 3
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Explanation:
Step 1: Place a \(\frac{1}{4}\) strip under a 3 whole strip to show the \(\frac{1}{4}\) on the strip.
Step 2: Find 12 \(\frac{1}{4}\) fraction strips, all with the same denominator, that fit exactly under the \(\frac{1}{4}\) strip.
Step 3: Record and check the quotient.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 3 = \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Complete the number sentence to solve.

Question 8.
Two students share 3 granola bars equally. How many granola bars does each student get?
3 ÷ 2 = ______
Each student’s share is ______ granola bars.
_____ \(\frac{□}{□}\) granola bars

Answer: 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
Given that Two students share 3 granola bars equally.
Divide the number of granola bars by 2.
3 ÷ 2 = \(\frac{3}{2}\)
Convert the improper fraction into the mixed fraction.
\(\frac{3}{2}\) = 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Thus each student’s share is 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\) granola bars.

Question 9.
Five girls share 4 sandwiches equally. What fraction of a sandwich does each girl get?
4 ÷ 5 = _____
Each girl’s share is ______ of a sandwich.
\(\frac{□}{□}\) of a sandwich

Answer: \(\frac{4}{5}\)

Explanation:
Given that, Five girls share 4 sandwiches equally.
Dividing the number of sandwiches by five girls.
4 ÷ 5 = \(\frac{4}{5}\)
Each girl’s share is \(\frac{4}{5}\) of a sandwich.

Question 10.
Nine boys share 4 pizzas equally. What fraction of a pizza does each boy get?
4 ÷ 9 = _____
Each boy’s share is _____ of a pizza.
\(\frac{□}{□}\) of a pizza

Answer: \(\frac{4}{9}\)

Explanation:
Given, Nine boys share 4 pizzas equally.
Dividing 4 pizzas by number of nine boys
4 ÷ 9 = \(\frac{4}{9}\)
Each boy’s share is \(\frac{4}{9}\) of a pizza.

Question 11.
Four friends share 10 fruit bars equally. How many fruit bars does each friend get?
10 ÷ 4 = _____
Each friend’s share is _____ fruit bars.
_____ \(\frac{□}{□}\) fruit bars

Answer: 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
Given, Four friends share 10 fruit bars equally.
Dividing the number of fruit bars by the number of friends.
10 ÷ 4 = \(\frac{10}{4}\) = \(\frac{5}{2}\)
Convert the improper fraction into the mixed fraction.
\(\frac{5}{2}\) = 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Mid-Chapter Checkpoint – Page No. 352

Question 12.
Mateo has 8 liters of punch for a party. Each glass holds \(\frac{1}{5}\) liter of punch. How many glasses can Mateo fill with punch?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions Mid-Chapter Checkpoint img 8
______ glasses

Answer: 40

Explanation:
Draw the rectangle that represents the number of liters.
Each rectangle is equal to 1 liter.
Each rectangle contains a one-fifth liter of punch.
Now multiply the fifths with the number of liters.
8 × 5 = 40
40 glasses can Mateo fill with a punch.

Question 13.
Four friends share 3 sheets of construction paper equally. What fraction of a sheet of paper does each friend get?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions Mid-Chapter Checkpoint img 9
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Explanation:
The rectangle represents the sheet of the construction paper.
Divide each rectangle into fourths.
3 × \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{3}{4}\)
Each friend gets \(\frac{3}{4}\) sheet of paper.

Question 14.
Caleb and 2 friends are sharing \(\frac{1}{2}\) quart of milk equally. What fraction of a quart of milk does each of the 3 friends get?
\(\frac{□}{□}\) quart of milk

Answer: \(\frac{1}{6}\) quart of milk

Explanation:
Caleb and 2 friends are sharing \(\frac{1}{2}\) quart of milk equally.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 3 = \(\frac{1}{6}\)
Therefore each of 3 friend gets \(\frac{1}{6}\) quart of milk.

Question 15.
Toni and Makayla are working on a craft project. Makayla has 3 yards of ribbon and Toni has 4 yards of ribbon. They cut all the ribbon into pieces that are \(\frac{1}{4}\) yard long. How many pieces of ribbon do they have?
Makayla: __________ pieces of ribbon
Toni: __________ pieces of ribbon

Answer:
Makayla: 12 pieces of ribbon
Toni: 16 pieces of ribbon

Explanation:
Toni and Makayla are working on a craft project.
Makayla has 3 yards of ribbon and Toni has 4 yards of ribbon.
They cut all the ribbon into pieces that are \(\frac{1}{4}\) yard long.
Now multiply the number of yards of ribbon that Makayla has with \(\frac{1}{4}\)
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 12 pieces of ribbon
Multiply the number of yards of ribbon that Toni has with \(\frac{1}{4}\)
4 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 16 pieces of ribbon

Share and Show – Page No. 355

Question 1.
Use the model to complete the number sentence.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions img 10
2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 2 × ______ = ______

Answer: 2 × 4 = 8

Explanation:

  • Draw 2 rectangles and divide each rectangle into fourths.
  • When you divide 1 rectangle into fourths you are finding the number of fourths in 2 rectangles.
  • There are 2 groups of rectangles. There are 8 fourths
  • Complete the number sentence.

Question 2.
Use the model to complete the number sentence.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions img 11
\(\frac{1}{6}\) ÷ 2 = _ × \(\frac{1}{6}\) = _
Type below:
__________

Answer: \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Explanation:

  • Draw the rectangle and divide the rectangle into sixths.
  • The rectangle is divided into 2 equal parts. You can find 12 sixths.
  • In the figure, you can see one shaded part in the rectangle.
  • Complete the number sentence.

\(\frac{1}{6}\) × \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Write a related multiplication sentence to solve.

Question 3.
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\)
______

Answer: 12

Explanation:

  • Draw 3 rectangles and divide each rectangle into fourths.
  • When you divide 1 rectangle into fourths you are finding the number of fourths in 3 rectangles.
  • There are 3 groups of rectangles. There are 12 fourths
  • Complete the number sentence.

3 × 4 = 12
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 12

Question 4.
\(\frac{1}{5}\) ÷ 4
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{20}\)

Explanation:

  • Draw the rectangle and divide the rectangle into fifths.
  • The rectangle is divided into 4 equal parts. You can find 20 fifths.
  • Complete the number sentence.

\(\frac{1}{5}\) × \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{1}{20}\)
\(\frac{1}{5}\) ÷ 4 = \(\frac{1}{20}\)

Question 5.
\(\frac{1}{9}\) ÷ 3
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{27}\)

Explanation:

  • Draw 3 rectangle and divide the rectangle into ninths.
  • The rectangle is divided into 3 equal parts. You can find 27 ninths.
  • Complete the number sentence.

\(\frac{1}{9}\) × \(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{1}{27}\)
\(\frac{1}{9}\) ÷ 3 = \(\frac{1}{27}\)

Question 6.
7 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\)
______

Answer: 14

Explanation:

  • Draw 7 rectangles and divide each rectangle into halves.
  • When you divide 7 rectangles into halves you are finding the number of halves in 7 rectangles.
  • There are 7 groups of rectangles. There are 14 halves.
  • Complete the number sentence.

7 × 2 = 14
7 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 14

On Your Own

Write a related multiplication sentence to solve.

Question 7.
5 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\)
______

Answer: 15

Explanation:

  • Draw 5 rectangles and divide each rectangle into thirds.
  • When you divide 5 rectangles into halves you are finding the number of thirds in 5 rectangles.
  • There are 5 groups of rectangles. There are 15 thirds.
  • Complete the number sentence.

5 × 3 = 15
5 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 15

Question 8.
8 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\)
______

Answer: 16

Explanation:

  • Draw 8 rectangles and divide each rectangle into halves.
  • When you divide 8 rectangles into halves you are finding the number of thirds in 8 rectangles.
  • There are 8 groups of rectangles. There are 16 halves.
  • Complete the number sentence.

8 × 2 = 16
8 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 16

Question 9.
\(\frac{1}{7}\) ÷ 4
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{28}\)

Explanation:

\(\frac{1}{7}\) ÷ 4

  • Draw 4 rectangles and divide the rectangle into sevenths.
  • The rectangle is divided into 4 equal parts. You can find 28 sevenths.
  • Complete the number sentence.

\(\frac{1}{7}\) × \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{1}{28}\)
Thus, \(\frac{1}{7}\) ÷ 4 = \(\frac{1}{28}\)

Question 10.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 9
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{18}\)

Explanation:

\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 9

  • Draw 9 rectangles and divide the rectangle into halves.
  • The rectangle is divided into 9 equal parts. You can find 18 halves.
  • Complete the number sentence.

\(\frac{1}{2}\) × \(\frac{1}{9}\) = \(\frac{1}{18}\)
\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 9 = \(\frac{1}{18}\)

Question 11.
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 4
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 4

  • Draw 4 rectangles and divide the rectangle into thirds.
  • The rectangle is divided into 4 equal parts. You can find 12 thirds.
  • Complete the number sentence.

\(\frac{1}{3}\) × \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{1}{12}\)
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 4 = \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Question 12.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 12
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{48}\)

Explanation:

  • Draw 12 rectangles and divide the rectangle into fourths.
  • The rectangle is divided into 12 equal parts. You can find 48 thirds.
  • Complete the number sentence.
    \(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 12 = \(\frac{1}{4}\) × \(\frac{1}{12}\) = \(\frac{1}{48}\)

Question 13.
6 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\)
______

Answer: 30

Explanation:

  • Draw 6 rectangles and divide each rectangle into fifths.
  • When you divide 6 rectangles into fifths you are finding the number of fifths in 6 rectangles.
  • There are 6 groups of rectangles. There are 30 fifths.
  • Complete the number sentence.
    6 × 5 = 30
    6 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\) = 30

Question 14.
\(\frac{2}{3}\) ÷ 3
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{9}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{2}{3}\) ÷ 3

  • Draw 3 rectangles and divide the rectangle into two thirds.
  • The rectangle is divided into 3 equal parts.
  • Complete the number sentence.
    \(\frac{2}{3}\) ÷ 3 = \(\frac{2}{3}\) × \(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{2}{9}\)

UNLOCK the Problem – Page No. 356

Question 15.
The slowest mammal is the three-toed sloth. The top speed of a three-toed sloth on the ground is about \(\frac{1}{4}\) foot per second. The top speed of a giant tortoise on the ground is about \(\frac{1}{3}\) foot per second. How much longer would it take a three-toed sloth than a giant tortoise to travel 10 feet on the ground?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions img 12
a. What do you need to find?
Type below:
__________

Answer: We Need to find How much longer would it take a three-toed sloth than a giant tortoise to travel 10 feet on the ground.

Question 15.
b. What operations will you use to solve the problem?
Type below:
__________

Answer:
The operations which we will use is:
Multiplication to find how many seconds three-toed sloth tortoise need to travel 10 feet.
Subtraction to finds how second longer need three-toed to travel 10 feet.

Question 15.
c. Show the steps you used to solve the problem.
Type below:
__________

Answer:
To find how much longer would it take a three-toed sloth than a giant tortoise to travel 10 feet on the ground, for first we will find how much seconds a three-toed sloth and giant tortoise need to travel 10 feet.
The top speed of a three-toed sloth on the ground is about 1/4 foot per second, so to find how much seconds need a three-toed sloth to travel 10 feet we will find as:
10 feet ÷ 1/4 foot per second = 10 × 4 = 40 seconds
The top speed of a giant tortoise on the ground is about 1/3 foot per second, so to find how much seconds need a giant tortoise to travel 10 feet we will find as:
10 feet ÷ 1/3 foot per second = 10 × 3 = 30 seconds

Question 15.
d. Complete the sentences.
A three-toed sloth would travel 10 feet in _____ seconds.
A giant tortoise would travel 10 feet in _____ seconds.
Since _____ – _____ = _____, it would take a three-toed sloth _____ seconds longer to travel 10 feet.
Type below:
__________

Answer:
A three-toed sloth would travel 10 feet in 40 seconds.
A giant tortoise would travel 10 feet in 30 seconds.
Since 4030 = 10, it would take a three-toed sloth 10 seconds longer to travel 10 feet.

Question 15.
e. Fill in the bubble for the correct answer choice.
Options:
a. 10 seconds
b. 30 seconds
c. 40 seconds
d. 70 seconds

Answer: 10 seconds

Explanation:
A three-toed sloth would travel 10 feet in 40 seconds.
A giant tortoise would travel 10 feet in 30 seconds.
Since 40 – 30 = 10, it would take a three-toed sloth 10 seconds longer to travel 10 feet.
The correct answer is option A.

Question 16.
Robert divides 8 cups of almonds into \(\frac{1}{8}\)-cup servings. How many servings does he have?
Options:
a. 1
b. 16
c. 8
d. 64

Answer: 64

Explanation:
Robert divides 8 cups of almonds into \(\frac{1}{8}\)-cup servings.
8 × \(\frac{1}{8}\)
8 × 8 = 64
Thus robert has 64 servings.
The correct answer is option D.

Question 17.
Tina cuts \(\frac{1}{3}\) yard of fabric into 4 equal parts. What is the length of each part?
Options:
a. 12 yards
b. 1 \(\frac{1}{3}\) yards
c. \(\frac{3}{4}\) yards
d. \(\frac{1}{12}\) yards

Answer: \(\frac{1}{12}\) yards

Explanation:
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 4
\(\frac{1}{3}\) × \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{1}{12}\) yards
The correct answer is option D.

Share and Show – Page No. 359

Question 1.
Complete the story problem to represent 3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\).
Carmen has a roll of paper that is ______ feet long. She cuts the paper into pieces that are each ______ foot long. How many pieces of paper does Carmen have?
Type below:
__________

Answer:
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\)
3 × 4 = 12
Carmen has a roll of paper that is 3 feet long.
She cuts the paper into pieces that are each \(\frac{1}{4}\) foot long.

Question 2.
Draw a diagram to represent the problem. Then solve. April has 6 fruit bars. She cuts the bars into halves. How many \(\frac{1}{2}\)-size bar pieces does she have?
_____ \(\frac{1}{2}\)-size bar pieces

Answer:
First, draw 6 rectangles that represent fruit bars.
Now divide each fruit bar into halves.
Dividing 6 fruit bards by halves.
6 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 12
Thus she has 12 \(\frac{1}{2}\)-size bar pieces

Question 3.
Write an equation to represent the problem. Then solve. Two friends share \(\frac{1}{4}\) of a large peach pie. What fraction of the whole pie does each friend get?
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Explanation:
Given that, Two friends share \(\frac{1}{4}\) of a large peach pie.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 2 = \(\frac{1}{8}\)
Thus the fraction of the whole pie each friend gets is \(\frac{1}{8}\).

On Your Own

Question 4.
Write an equation to represent the problem. Then solve.
Benito has \(\frac{1}{3}\) -kilogram of grapes. He divides the grapes equally into 3 bags. What fraction of a kilogram of grapes is in each bag?
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{9}\)

Explanation:
Given:
Benito has \(\frac{1}{3}\) -kilogram of grapes. He divides the grapes equally into 3 bags.
The equation for the division is,
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 3 = \(\frac{1}{9}\)
\(\frac{1}{9}\) of a kilogram of grapes is in each bag.

Question 5.
Draw a diagram to represent the problem. Then solve.
Sonya has 5 sandwiches. She cuts each sandwich into fourths. How many \(\frac{1}{4}\)-size sandwich pieces does she have?
_____ \(\frac{1}{4}\)-size sandwich pieces

Answer: 20

Explanation:
Given,
Sonya has 5 sandwiches. She cuts each sandwich into fourths.
Dividing the number of sandwiches by fourths.
5 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 5 × 4 = 20
Thus she has 20 \(\frac{1}{4}\)-size sandwich pieces.

Question 6.
Write a story problem to represent 2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{8}\). Then solve.
Type below:
__________

Answer:
Erica makes 2 sandwiches and cuts each sandwich into eighths. How many \(\frac{1}{8}\) size sandwich pieces does she have?
Answer: 2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{8}\)
2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{8}\) = 16 because 16 × \(\frac{1}{8}\) = 2

Problem Solving – Page No. 360

Pose a Problem

Question 7.
Amy wrote the following problem to represent 4 ÷ \(\frac{1}{6}\) .
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions img 13
Jacob has a board that is 4 feet long. He cuts the board into pieces that are each \(\frac{1}{6}\) foot long. How many pieces does Jacob have now?
Then Amy drew this diagram to solve her problem.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions img 14
So, Jacob has 24 pieces.
Write a new problem using a different item to be divided and different fractional pieces. Then draw a diagram to solve your problem.
Pose a problem.                           Draw a diagram to solve your problem.
Type below:
__________

Question 8.
Test Prep Melvin has \(\frac{1}{4}\) of a gallon of fruit punch. He shares the punch equally with each of 2 friends and himself. Which equation represents the fraction of a gallon of punch that each of the friends get?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = n
b. \(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 3 = n
c. 3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\) = n
d. 3 ÷ 4 = n

Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 3 = n

Explanation:
Melvin has \(\frac{1}{4}\) of a gallon of fruit punch.
He shares the punch equally with each of 2 friends and himself.
The expressions which represents this are \(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 3 or \(\frac{1}{4}\) × \(\frac{1}{3}\).
So, the correct answers \(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 3 = n i.e., option B.

Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 361

Concepts and Skills

Divide. Draw a number line or use fraction strips.

Question 1.
2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = ______

Answer: 6

Explanation:
Step 1: Draw a number line from 0 to 2. Divide the number line into thirds. Label each third on your number line.
Step 2: Skip count by thirds from 0 to 2 to find 2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\).
There are 6 thirds in 2 wholes.
You can use the relationship between multiplication and division to explain and check your solution.
Step 3: Record and check the quotient.
2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 6 because 6 × \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 2

Question 2.
1 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\) = ______

Answer: 5

Explanation:
Step 1: Draw a number line from 0 to 1. Divide the number line into fifths. Label each fifth on your number line.
Step 2: Skip count by fifths from 0 to 1 to find 1 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\).
You can use the relationship between multiplication and division to explain and check your solution.
Step 3: Record and check the quotient.
1 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\) = 5 because 5 × \(\frac{1}{5}\) = 1

Question 3.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 3 = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Explanation:
Step 1: Draw a number line from 0 to 3. Divide the number line into fourths. Label each fourth on your number line.
Step 2: Skip count by fourth from 0 to 3 to find 3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\).
You can use the relationship between multiplication and division to explain and check your solution.
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{1}{12}\)
Thus \(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 3 = \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Complete the number sentence to solve.

Question 4.
Three students share 4 sandwiches equally. How many sandwiches does each student get?
4 ÷ 3 = ______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 1 \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Explanation:
To find what fraction of sandwich each student gets we have to divide the number of sandwiches by the number of students.
4 ÷ 3 = \(\frac{4}{3}\)
Now convert the improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
\(\frac{4}{3}\) = 1 \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Question 5.
Six girls share 5 pints of milk equally. What fraction of a pint of milk does each girl get?
5 ÷ 6 = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Explanation:
Given that, Six girls share 5 pints of milk equally.
To find the fraction of a pint of milk each girl gets, we have to divide the pints of milk by the number of girls.
5 ÷ 6 = \(\frac{5}{6}\)
Thus each girl get \(\frac{5}{6}\) pint of milk.

Write a related multiplication sentence to solve.

Question 6.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 5
Type below:
__________

Answer: \(\frac{1}{20}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 5
\(\frac{1}{4}\) × \(\frac{1}{5}\) = \(\frac{1}{20}\)
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 5 = \(\frac{1}{20}\)

Question 7.
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 9
Type below:
__________

Answer: \(\frac{1}{27}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 9
\(\frac{1}{3}\) × \(\frac{1}{9}\) = \(\frac{1}{27}\)
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 9 = \(\frac{1}{27}\)

Question 8.
8 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Type below:
__________

Answer: 16

Explanation:
8 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\)
8 × 2 = 16

Question 9.
5 ÷ \(\frac{1}{6}\)
Type below:
__________

Answer: 30

Explanation:
5 ÷ \(\frac{1}{6}\)
5 × 6 = 30

Question 10.
Write a story problem to represent \(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 3. Then solve.
Type below:
__________

Answer: \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 3
\(\frac{1}{2}\) × \(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Question 11.
Write a story problem to represent 3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\). Then solve.
Type below:
__________

Answer: 6

Explanation:
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\)
3 × 2 = 6

Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 362

Fill in the bubble completely to show your answer.

Question 12.
Michelle cuts \(\frac{1}{4}\) yard of ribbon into 4 equal pieces. What is the length of each piece?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{16}\) yard
b. \(\frac{1}{8}\) yard
c. 1 yard
d. 16 yard

Answer: \(\frac{1}{16}\) yard

Explanation:
Michelle cuts \(\frac{1}{4}\) yard of ribbon into 4 equal pieces.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 4
\(\frac{1}{4}\) × \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{1}{16}\)
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 13.
Ashton picked 6 pounds of pecans. He wants to share the pecans equally among 5 of his neighbors. How many pounds of pecans will each neighbor get?
Options:
a. \(\frac{5}{11}\) pound
b. \(\frac{5}{6}\) pound
c. 1 \(\frac{1}{5}\) pounds
d. 2 \(\frac{1}{5}\) pounds

Answer: 1 \(\frac{1}{5}\) pounds

Explanation:
Ashton picked 6 pounds of pecans.
He wants to share the pecans equally among 5 of his neighbors.
Divide the number of pounds by the number of neighbors.
= \(\frac{6}{5}\)
Now convert the improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
\(\frac{6}{5}\) = 1 \(\frac{1}{5}\) pounds
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 14.
Isabella has 5 pounds of trail mix. She divides the mix into \(\frac{1}{4}\)-pound servings. How many \(\frac{1}{4}\)-pound servings does she have?
Options:
a. 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
b. 9
c. 16
d. 20

Answer: 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:
Given,
Isabella has 5 pounds of trail mix.
She divides the mix into \(\frac{1}{4}\)-pound servings.
5 × \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{5}{4}\)
Now convert the improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
\(\frac{5}{4}\) = 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 15.
Melvin has \(\frac{1}{2}\) of a cake. He shares the cake equally with each of 2 friends and himself. Which equation represents the fraction of the whole cake that each of the friends get?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = n
b. \(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 3 = n
c. 2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = n
d. 2 ÷ 3 = n

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 3 = n

Explanation:
Melvin has \(\frac{1}{2}\) of a cake.
He shares the cake equally with each of 2 friends and himself.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) divided by 3.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 3 = n
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 363

Fill in the bubble completely to show your answer.

Question 16.
Camille has 8 feet of rope. She cuts the rope into \(\frac{1}{3}\)-foot pieces for a science project. How many \(\frac{1}{3}\)-foot pieces of rope does she have?
Options:
a. 24
b. 8
c. 3
d. 2 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Answer: 24

Explanation:
Given,
Camille has 8 feet of rope.
She cuts the rope into \(\frac{1}{3}\)-foot pieces for a science project.
8 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 8 × 3 = 24
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 17.
Awan makes 3 sandwiches and cuts each sandwich into sixths. How many \(\frac{1}{6}\)-size sandwich pieces does he have?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{2}\)
b. 2
c. 9
d. 18

Answer: 18

Explanation:
Given that, Awan makes 3 sandwiches and cuts each sandwich into sixths.
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{6}\)
3/ \(\frac{1}{6}\) = 3 × 6 = 18
The correct answer is option D.

Question 18.
Eight students share 5 blocks of modeling clay equally. What fraction of one block of modeling clay does each student get?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{40}\)
b. \(\frac{1}{8}\)
c. \(\frac{5}{8}\)
d. 1 \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Answer: 1 \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Explanation:
Eight students share 5 blocks of modeling clay equally.
Divide number of students by the number of blocks.
8 ÷ 5 = \(\frac{8}{5}\)
Convert the fraction to the mixed fraction.
\(\frac{8}{5}\) = 1 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
So, the correct answer is option D.

Question 19.
The diagram below represents which division problem?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 8 Divide Fractions hapter Review/Test img 15
Options:
a. 5 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\)
b. \(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 5
c. 5 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\)
d. \(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 5

Answer: 5 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Explanation:
The figure above shows that there are 5 rectangles. Each rectangle is divided into three parts.
So, the fraction is one third.
Divide number of blocks by the number of thirds.
5 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\)
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 364

Constructed Response

Question 20.
Dora buys one package each of the 1-pound, 2-pound, and 4-pound packages of ground beef to make hamburgers. How many \(\frac{1}{4}\)-pound hamburgers can she make? Show your work using words, pictures, or numbers.
Explain how you found your answer.
______ hamburgers

Answer: 28 hamburgers

Explanation:
Given:
Dora buys one package each of the 1-pound, 2-pound, and 4-pound packages of ground beef to make hamburgers.
Total number of pounds = 1 + 2 + 4 = 7 pounds
Now divide number of pounds by \(\frac{1}{4}\)
7 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 28
Thus Dora can make 28 Hamburgers.

Performance Task

Question 21.
Suppose your teacher gives you the division problem 6 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\).
A). In the space below, draw a diagram to represent 6 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\).
Type below:
__________

Answer:
Draw 6 rectangles and divide each whole by one-fifths fractions.

Question 21.
B). Write a story problem to represent 6 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\).
Type below:
__________

Answer:
Kyra has 6 feet of rope. If she cuts the rope into \(\frac{1}{5}\) foot pieces for a project. How many \(\frac{1}{5}\)-foot pieces of rope does she have?

Question 21.
C). Use a related multiplication expression to solve your story problem.
Show your work.
Type below:
__________

Answer:
The multiplication expression to solve the above problem is
6 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\) = 6/\(\frac{1}{5}\) = 6 × 5 = 30

Question 21.
D). Write a division problem that shows a unit fraction divided by a whole number. Write a story problem to represent your division problem. Then solve.
Type below:
__________

Answer:
Isabella has 7 pounds of trail mix. She divides the mix into \(\frac{1}{4}\)-pound servings. How many \(\frac{1}{4}\)-pound servings does she have?

Conclusion

Hoping that Go Math Grade 5 Answer Chapter 8 Divide Fractions has helped you to resolve your queries on time. Get a good hold of the concepts and attempt the final exams with confidence. To know more about such related concepts stay connected to our site on a regular basis.

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

go-math-grade-6-chapter-12-data-displays-and-measures-of-center-answer-key

Students who are unable to solve the textbook problems can go through the Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center. Refer to HMH Go Math 6th Grade Solution Key of Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center to understand the problem-solving methods in depth. Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key was explained by the experts in a unique and simple way.

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

I know it is difficult for parents to explain the homework problems. So, in order to help them, we are providing the solutions for Go Math 6th Grade Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center. Make use of the HMH Go Math Grade Solution Key Pdf and make your child completer their homework in time. Hence Download Grade 6 Go Math Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center.

Lesson 1: Recognize Statistical Questions

Lesson 2: Describe Data Collection

Lesson 3: Dot Plots and Frequency Tables

Lesson 4: Histograms

Mid-Chapter Checkpoint

Lesson 5: Investigate • Mean as Fair Share and Balance Point

Lesson 6: Measures of Center

Lesson 7: Effects of Outliers

Lesson 8: Problem-Solving • Data Displays

Chapter 12 Review/Test

Share and Show – Page No. 651

Identify the statistical question. Explain your reasoning.

Question 1.
A. What was the low temperature in Chicago each day in March?
B. What was the low temperature in Chicago on March 7?

Answer: A is the statistical question.

Explanation: As in A temperature was asked for each day and in B temperature was asked for only one day.

Question 2.
A. How long did it take you to get to school this morning?
B. How long did it take you to get to school each morning this week?

Answer: B is the statistical question.

Explanation: In B it was asked for each morning in a week and in A It was asked for only for this morning.

Write a statistical question you could ask in the situation.

Question 3.
A student recorded the number of pets in the households of 50 sixth-graders.

Answer: How many households have one or more pets?

On Your Own

Identify the statistical question. Explain your reasoning.

Question 4.
A. How many gold medals has Finland won at each of the last 10 Winter Olympics?
B. How many gold medals did Finland win at the 2008 Winter Olympics?

Answer: A is the statistical question.

Explanation: A asks about the no.of medals won at 10 different times and in B asks about no.of medals won at 1 time.

Write a statistical question you could ask in the situation.

Question 5.
A wildlife biologist measured the length of time that 17 grizzly bears hibernated.

Answer: What was the least amount of time grizzly bears hibernated?

Question 6.
A doctor recorded the birth weights of 48 babies.

Answer: What was the highest birth weight recorded?

Problem Solving + Applications – Page No. 652

Use the table for 7 and 8.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 1

Question 7.
Give a statistical question that you could ask about the data recorded in the table.

Answer: Which Roller coaster reaches the maximum height?

Question 8.
What statistical question could “92 mi/hr” be the answer to?

Answer: What is the maximum speed of Roller Coasters?

Question 9.
Explain A video game company will make a new game. The manager must choose between a roleplaying game and an action game. He asks his sales staff which of the last 10 released games sold the most copies. Explain why this is a statistical question.

Answer: As the manager asks his sales staff about the last 10 released games and most sold-out copies, so it is a statistical question.

Question 10.
Think of a topic. Record a set of data for the topic. Write a statistical question that you could ask about your data.

Answer: John spend 10 hours to watch TV in each week.

Explanation: What was the time spent by the John to watch TV in each week?

Question 11.
For numbers 11a–11d, choose Yes or No to indicate whether the question is a statistical question.
11a. How many minutes did it take Ethan to complete his homework last night?
11b. How many minutes did it take Madison to complete her homework each night this week?
11c. How many more minutes did Andrew spend on homework on Tuesday than on Thursday?
11d. What was the longest amount of time Abigail spent on homework this week?
11a. ____________
11b. ____________
11c. ____________
11d. ____________

Answer:
11a. No.

Explanation: The question asked only about last night’s homework, so it is not a statistical question.

11b. Yes

Explanation: As the question was asked for each night in a week, so it is a statistical question.

11c. No

Explanation: The question is about the differences in the duration of homework at a time, so it is not a statistical question.

11d. Yes

Explanation: As the question is on the longest amount of time on homework, so it is a statistical question.

Recognize Statistical Questions – Page No. 653

Identify the statistical question. Explain your reasoning.

Question 1.
A. How many touchdowns did the quarterback throw during the last game of the season?
B. How many touchdowns did the quarterback throw each game of the season?

Answer: B is the statistical question.

Explanation: In A asks for no.of touchdowns in the last game and in B asks for no.of touchdowns in each game.

Question 2.
A. What was the score in the first frame of a bowling game?
B. What are the scores in 10 frames of a bowling game?

Answer: B is the statistical question.

Explanation: In A, asks for only for the first frame, and in B asks for 10 frames and score in each frame.

Question 3.
A. How many hours of television did you watch each day this week?
B. How many hours of television did you watch on Saturday?

Answer: A is the statistical question.

Explanation: In A, the question was asked for no.of hour’s television for each day in a week. And in B the question was asked for only for Saturday.

Write a statistical question you could ask in the situation.

Question 4.
A teacher recorded the test scores of her students.

Answer: What was the highest test score recorded?

Question 5.
A car salesman knows how many of each model of a car was sold in a month.

Answer: What was the least sold model of the car?

Problem Solving

Question 6.
The city tracked the amount of waste that was recycled from 2000 to 2007. Write a statistical question about the situation.

Answer: What was the amount of waste that was recycled for each year from 2000 to 2007?

Question 7.
The daily low temperature is recorded for a week. Write a statistical question about the situation.

Answer: What was the daily low temperature recorded each day this week?

Question 8.
Write three statistical questions that you could use to gather data about your family. Explain why the questions are statistical.

Answer:
Which family member was oldest?
Which family member was tallest?
Which family member has the highest income?

Lesson Check – Page No. 654

Question 1.
Elise says that the question “Do you have any siblings?” is a statistical question. Mark says that “How many siblings do you have?” is a statistical question. Who is correct?

Answer: How many siblings do you have? is a statistical question. So Mark is correct.

Question 2.
Kate says that “What was the lowest amount of precipitation in one month last year?” is a statistical question. Mike says that “What is the speed limit?” is a statistical question. Who is correct?

Answer: What was the lowest amount of precipitation in one month last year?. Is a statistical question. So Kate is correct.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
A regular decagon has side lengths of 4 centimeters long. If the decagon is divided into 10 congruent triangles, each has an approximate height of 6.2 centimeters. What is the approximate area of the decagon?
_______ cm2

Answer: 124 cm2

Explanation: Area= ½ b×h
= ½ 46.2
= 26.2
= 12.4 cm2
So the area of the decagon is 1012.4= 124 cm2

Question 4.
Mikki uses the net shown to make a solid figure.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 2
What solid figure does Mikki make?

Answer: Triangular pyramid.

Explanation: Mikki makes a Triangular pyramid.

Question 5.
A prism is filled with 30 cubes with \(\frac{1}{2}\)-unit side lengths. What is the volume of the prism in cubic units?
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\) cubic units.

Answer: 3.75 cubic units.

Explanation: As it takes 8 cubes with a side length of ½ to form a unit cube, so the volume of the cube is 308= 3.75 cubic units.

Question 6.
A tank in the shape of a rectangular prism has a length of 22 inches, a width of 12 inches, and a height of 15 inches. If the tank is filled halfway with water, how much water is in the tank?
_______ in.3

Answer: 1980 in3

Explanation:
The volume of a rectangular prism= LWH
=  22×12×15
= 3960 in3
As the tank was filled halfway with water, so 3960÷2= 1980 in3

Share and Show – Page No. 657

Describe the data set by listing the attribute measured, the unit of measure, the likely means of measurement, and the number of observations.

Question 1.
Greg’s 100-meter race results.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 3

Answer:
The attribute is the Duration of run data.
The unit of measure is Seconds.
The likely means of measurement was taken on Stopwatch.
No.of observations are 7.

Question 2.
The Andrews family’s water use.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 4

Answer:
The attribute is the amount of water used daily.
The unit of measure is Gallons.
The likely means of measurement was taken on Water meter.
No.of observations are 14.

On Your Own

Question 3.
Practice: Copy and Solve Collect data on one of the topics listed below. You may wish to work with other students. Make a chart of your results. Then describe the data set.

  • Weights of cereal boxes, soup cans, or other items
  • Numbers of family members
  • Lengths of time to multiply two 2-digit numbers
  • Numbers of pets in families
  • Lengths of forearm (elbow to fingertip)
  • Numbers of pages in books

Answer:
The attribute is the Number of pages in books.
The unit of measure is Numbers.
The likely means of measurement were counting.
No.of observations are 6.

Question 4.
Describe the data set by writing the attribute measured, the unit of measure, the likely means of measurement, and the number of observations in the correct location on the chart.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 5
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 6

Answer:

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

Summarize – Page No. 658

When you summarize a reading passage, you restate the most important information in a shortened form. This allows you to understand more easily what you have read. Read the following passage:

A biologist is studying green anacondas. The green anaconda is the largest snake in the world. Finding the length of any snake is difficult because the snake can curl up or stretch out while being measured. Finding the length of a green anaconda is doubly difficult because of the animal’s great size and strength.

The standard method for measuring a green anaconda is to calm the snake, lay a piece of string along its entire length, and then measure the length of the string. The table at the right gives data collected by the biologist using the string method.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 7

Question 5.
Analyze Summarize the passage in your own words

Answer: The world’s largest snake in the world is green anacondas. Finding the length of these green anacondas is very difficult because of the animal’s great size and strength. So there is a standard method for measuring. Firstly calm the snake, then lay a piece of string along its entire length, and then measure the length of the string.

Question 6.
Use your summary to name the attribute the biologist was measuring. Describe how the biologist measured this attribute.

Answer:
The attribute the biologist was measuring green anacondas. And the biologist measured by lay a piece of string along its entire length, and then measure the length of the string.

Question 7.
Give any other information that is important for describing the data set.

Answer:
Unit of measure is Centimeters
No.of observations are 19

Question 8.
Write the greatest green anaconda length that the biologist measured in feet. Round your answer to the nearest foot. (Hint: 1 foot is equal to about 30 centimeters.)

Answer: 507.5 cm, 17 feet

Explanation: The greatest green anaconda length that the biologist measured was 507.5 cm. As 1 foot= 30 cm, so 507.5÷30= 16.9 feet round off to 17 feet.

Describe Data Collection – Page No. 659

Describe the data set by listing the attribute measured, the unit of measure, the likely means of measurement, and the number of observations.

Question 1.
Daily temperature
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 8

Answer:
The attribute is Daily Temperature.
The unit of measure is Fahrenheit.
The likely means of measurement is Thermometer
No.of observations are 25.

Question 2.
Plant heights
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 9

Answer:
The attribute is the Height of plants
The unit of measure in inches.
The likely means of measurement is the Ruler.
No.of observations are 10.

Question 3.
Cereal in boxes
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 10

Answer:
The attribute is the Amount of Cereal in Boxes
The unit of measure is Cup.
The likely means of measurement is measuring cup
No.of observations are 16.

Question 4.
Dog weights
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 11

Answer:
The attribute is Dog weights.
The unit of measure is Pounds.
The likely means of measurement is scale.
No.of observations are 8.

Problem Solving

Question 5.
The table below gives the amount of time Preston spends on homework. Name the likely means of measurement.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 12

Answer:
The likely means of measurement is Clock.

Question 6.
The table below shows the speed of cars on a highway. Name the unit of measure.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 13

Answer: The unit of measure is miles per hour.

Question 7.
Gather data about the heights of your family members or friends. Then describe how you collected the data set.

Answer:

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

Lesson Check – Page No. 660

Question 1.
What is the attribute of the data set shown in the table?
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 14

Answer: The attribute is the Mass of produce.

Question 2.
What is the number of observations of the data set shown below?
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 15

Answer:
No.of observation: 6

Spiral Review

Question 3.
What is the area of the figure shown below?
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 16
_______ cm2

Answer: 23 cm2

Explanation:
Area of the rectangle= Length×width
= 7×4.5
= 31.5 cm2
Area of trapezoid= 1/2 ×(b1+b2)×h
= 1/2 ×(7+4.5)×4
= 11.5×2
= 23 cm2

Question 4.
Each base of a triangular prism has an area of 43 square centimeters. Each lateral face has an area of 25 square centimeters. What is the surface area of the prism?
_______ cm2

Answer: 161 cm2

Explanation:
The surface area of the prism is 2×43+3×25
= 86+ 75
= 161 cm2

Question 5.
How much sand can this container hold?
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 17
_______ in.3

Answer: 225 in.3

Explanation:
Volume= Length×width×Height
= 5×10×4 1/2
= 5 × 10 × 5/2
= 5×5×9
= 225 in.3

Question 6.
Jay says that “How much does Rover weigh today?” is a statistical question. Kim says that “How long are the puppies’ tails in the pet store?” is a statistical question. Who is NOT correct?

Answer: “How much does Rover weigh today?” is not correct as it is not a statistical question.

Share and Show – Page No. 663

For 1−4, use the data at right.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 18

Question 1.
Complete the dot plot.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 19

Answer:

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

Question 2.
What was the most common distance Lionel biked? How do you know?

Answer: The most common distance Lionel biked is 6 km.

Question 3.
Make a frequency table. Use the intervals 1−3 km, 4−6 km, 7−9 km, and 10−12 km.

Answer:

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

Question 4.
Make a relative frequency table. Use the same intervals as in Exercise 3.

Answer:
As there are 25 data values, so
1-3 km 8÷25= 0.32= 32% relative frequency.
4-6 km 9÷25= 0.36= 36% relative frequency.
7-9 km 4÷25= 0.16= 16% relative frequency.
10-12 km 4÷25= 0.16= 16% relative frequency.

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

On Your Own

Practice: Copy and Solve For 5−9, use the table.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 20

Question 5.
Make a dot plot of the data.

Answer:

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

Question 6.
Make a frequency table of the data with three intervals.

Answer:

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

Question 7.
Make a relative frequency table of the data with three intervals.

Answer:
As there are 25 data values, so
3-7    3÷25= 0.12= 12% relative frequency.
8-12  7÷25= 0.28= 28% relative frequency.
13-17 15÷25= 0.6= 60% relative frequency.

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

Question 8.
Describe how you decided on the intervals for the frequency table.

Answer: As we found 3 intervals of equal size that cover the full range of data values.

Question 9.
Could someone use the information in the frequency table to make a dot plot? Explain.

Answer: No. Because the data is grouped in intervals, but a dot plot requires individual data values.

Unlock the Problem – Page No. 664

Question 10.
The manager of a fitness center asked members to rate the fitness center. The results of the survey are shown in the frequency table. What percent of members in the survey rated the center as excellent or good?
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 21
a. What do you need to find?

Answer: We need to find what percent of members in the survey rated the center as excellent or good.

Question 10.
b. How can you use relative frequency to help you solve the problem?

Answer: We can solve by adding the relative frequencies of excellent and good responses.

Question 10.
c. Show the steps you use to solve the problem.

Answer: 30%, 25%.

Explanation:
The total no.of responses are 18+15+21+6= 60. So the percent for excellent and good responses are
18÷60= 0.3= 30%
15÷60= 0.25= 25%

Question 10.
d. Complete the sentences.

Answer:
The percent of members who were rated excellent is 30%
The percent of members who were rated good is 25%
So total members rated excellent and good are 30%+25%= 55%

Question 11.
Use the table above. What is the difference in percent of the members in the survey that rated the fitness center as poor versus excellent?
_________ %

Answer: 20%.

Explanation: The percents for poor responses are 6÷60= 0.1= 10%, so the difference in the percent of the members in the survey that rated the fitness center as poor versus excellent is 30%-10%= 20%.

Question 12.
Julie kept a record of the number of minutes she spent reading for 20 days. Complete the frequency table by finding the frequency and the relative frequency (%).
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 22

Answer:
As there are 20 data values, so
30 mins 8÷20= 0.4= 40% relative frequency.
45 mins 4÷20= 0.2= 20% relative frequency.
60 mins 3÷20= 0.15= 15% relative frequency.

Dot Plots and Frequency Tables – Page No. 665

For 1–4, use the chart.

Question 1.
The chart shows the number of pages of a novel that Julia reads each day. Complete the dot plot using the data in the table.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 23
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 24

Answer:

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

Question 2.
What number of pages does Julia read most often? Explain.

Answer: Julia reads most often 15 pages because we can see in the dot plot as 15 was the highest.

Question 3.
Make a frequency table in the space below. Use the intervals 10–13, 14–17, and 18–21.

Answer:

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

Question 4.
Make a relative frequency table in the space below.

Answer:
As there are 20 data values, so
10-13  7÷20= 0.35= 35% relative frequency.
14-17  9÷20= 0.45= 45% relative frequency.
18-21  4÷20= 0.2=  20% relative frequency.

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

Problem Solving

Question 5.
The frequency table shows the ages of the actors in a youth theater group. What percent of the actors are 10 to 12 years old?
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 25
_______ %

Answer: 55%

Explanation:
As there are 8+22+10= 40 data values, so the percent of the actors are 10 to 12 years old is
22÷40= 0.55= 55%.

Question 6.
Explain how dot plots and frequency tables are alike and how they are different.

Answer: As the dot plot is similar to the frequency table and the frequencies are represented with dots instead of using numbers each dot represents a data point.

Lesson Check – Page No. 666

Question 1.
The dot plot shows the number of hours Mai babysat each week. How many hours is Mai most likely to babysit?
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 26
_______ hours

Answer: Mai is most likely to babysit for 9 hours.

Explanation: As we can see dot plot with the highest dots is 9 hours. So Mai is most likely to babysit for 9 hours.

Question 2.
The frequency table shows the ratings that a movie received from online reviewers. What percent of the reviewers gave the movie a 4-star rating?

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center
_______ %

Answer: 30%.

Explanation: The percent of reviewers gave the movie a 4-star rating are 6/20
= 0.30
= 30%

Spiral Review

Question 3.
The dimensions of a rectangular playground are 50 times the dimensions of a scale drawing of the playground. The area of the scale drawing is 6 square feet. What is the area of the actual playground?
_______ square feet

Answer: 15,000 square feet.

Explanation: The area of the actual playground is
= 6×50×50
= 15,000 square feet.

Question 4.
A square pyramid has a base side length of 8 feet. The height of each lateral face is 12 feet. What is the surface area of the pyramid?
_______ ft2

Answer: 256 ft2

Explanation:
The area of the base is 8×8= 64 ft2
The area of one face is 1/2 × 8 × 12
= 4×12
= 48 ft2
So the surface area of the pyramid is 64+ 4×48
= 64+192
= 256 ft2

Question 5.
A gift box is in the shape of a rectangular prism. The box has a length of 24 centimeters, a width of 10 centimeters, and a height of 13 centimeters. What is the volume of the box?
_______ cm3

Answer: 3,120 cm3

Explanation: Volume of the box= Length×width×height
= 24×10×13
= 3,120 cm3

Question 6.
For a science experiment, Juanita records the height of a plant every day in centimeters. What is the attribute measured in her experiment?

Answer: The attribute measured in her experiment was height.

Share and Show – Page No. 669

For 1–4, use the data at right.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 27

Question 1.
Complete the frequency table for the age data in the table at right.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 28

Answer:

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

Question 2.
Complete the histogram for the data.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 29

Answer:

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

Question 3.
Use your histogram to find the number of people at the health club who are 30 or older.
_______ people

Answer: 7 people.

Explanation: The people from 30-39 are 5 and from 40-49 are 2 people.

Question 4.
Use your histogram to determine the percent of the people at the health club who are 20–29 years old.
_______ %

Answer: 40%.

Explanation: The data value is 2+6+5+2= 15, so the percent of the people at the health club who are 20–29 years old are
6÷15= 0.4= 40%.

On Your Own

Practice: Copy and Solve For 5–7, use the table.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 30

Question 5.
Make a histogram of the data using the intervals 10–19, 20–29, and 30–39.

Answer:

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

Question 6.
Make a histogram of the data using the intervals 10–14, 15–19, 20–24, 25–29, 30–34, and 35–39.

Answer:

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

Question 7.
Compare Explain how using different intervals changed the appearance of your histogram.

Answer: In the histogram, smaller intervals shows that most of the data are clustered between 15 and 24. And larger intervals show that the data is evenly spread out.

Problem Solving + Applications – Page No. 670

The histogram shows the hourly salaries, to the nearest dollar, of the employees at a small company. Use the histogram to solve 8–11.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 31

Question 8.
How many employees make less than $20 per hour?
_______ employees

Answer: 7 employees.

Explanation: 7 employees make less than $20 per hour.

Question 9.
How many employees work at the company? Explain how you know.
_______ employees

Answer: 47 employees.

Explanation: As 2+5+10+12+9+6+3= 47 employees work at the company.

Question 10.
Pose a Problem Write and solve a new problem that uses the histogram.

Answer: How many employees make more than $40 per hour?

Explanation: 3 employees.

Question 11.
Analyze Describe the overall shape of the histogram. What does this tell you about the salaries at the company?

Answer: The histogram shows that the employees are high at the interval of $25-$29 and it tells us that there is the same number of employees with salaries less than $25 as there are with salaries greater than $29.

Question 12.
The frequency table shows the TV ratings for the show American Singer. Complete the histogram for the data.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 32
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 33

Answer:

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

Histograms – Page No. 671

For 1–4 use the data at right.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 34

Question 1.
Complete the histogram for the data.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 35

Answer:

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

Question 2.
What do the numbers on the y-axis represent?

Answer: The numbers on the y-axis represent the number of students.

Question 3.
How many students scored from 60 to 69?
_______ students

Answer: 3 students scored 60 to 69

Question 4.
Use your histogram to find the number of students who got a score of 80 or greater. Explain.
_______ students

Answer: 12 students.

Explanation: Students who scored 80-89 are 8 students and students who scored 90-99 are 4 students. So total students are
8+4= 12 students.

Problem Solving

For 5–6, use the histogram.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 36

Question 5.
For which two age groups are there the same number of customers?

Answer: The same number of customers is 10-19 and 50-59.

Question 6.
How many customers are in the restaurant? How do you know?
_______ customers

Answer: 63 customers

Explanation: Total number of customers are 6+9+13+11+15+9= 63 customers. By adding all frequencies we can get a number of customers.

Question 7.
Write a letter to another student that explains how to make a histogram and what type of data a histogram displays.

Answer: A histogram represents a bar graph with a vertical axis and a horizontal axis. The histogram displays the vertical axis with frequencies and the horizontal axis with a certain amount of intervals. We must place the intervals from lower to higher, and the height of each bar should be equal to the frequency of its corresponding intervals.

Lesson Check – Page No. 672

Question 1.
The histogram shows the amount, to the nearest dollar, that customers spent at a museum gift shop. How many customers spent less than $20?
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 37
_______ customers

Answer: 14 customers.

Explanation: The number of customers who spent less than $20 is 8+6=14 customers.

Question 2.
Use the histogram in Problem 1. How many customers bought something at the gift shop?
_______ customers

Answer: 27 customers.

Explanation: The number of customers who bought something at the gift shop is 8+6+7+4+2= 27 customers.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Marguerite drew a rectangle with vertices A(−2, −1), B(−2, −4), and C(1, −4). What are the coordinates of the fourth vertex?

Answer: As Marguerite draw a rectangle, so the fourth vertex is D(1,-1)

Explanation:

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

Question 4.
A rectangular swimming pool can hold 1,408 cubic feet of water. The pool is 22 feet long and has a depth of 4 feet. What is the width of the pool?
_______ feet

Answer: 16 feet

Explanation: Volume= LWH
1408= 22×W×4
W= 1408÷88
= 16 feet

Question 5.
DeShawn is using this frequency table to make a relative frequency table. What percent should he write in the Relative Frequency column for 5 to 9 push-ups?
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 38
_______ %

Answer: 35%

Explanation: Data Values are 3+7+8+2= 20

As there are 3+7+8+2= 20 data values, so
5-9  7÷20= 0.35= 35% relative frequency.

Mid-Chapter Checkpoint – Vocabulary – Page No. 673

Choose the best term from the box to complete the sentence.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 39

Question 1.
A _____ is a kind of bar graph that shows the frequency of data grouped into intervals.

Answer: A histogram is a kind of bar graph that shows the frequency of data grouped into intervals.

Question 2.
A question that asks about a set of data that varies is called a _____.

Answer: A question that asks about a set of data that varies is called a statistical question.

Concepts and Skills

Question 3.
A sports reporter records the number of touchdowns scored each week during the football season. What statistical question could the reporter ask about the data?

Answer: What was the greatest number of touchdowns scored in one week?

Question 4.
Flora records her pet hamster’s weight once every week for one year. How many observations does she make?
_______ observations

Answer: 52 observations.

Explanation: As there are 52 weeks in a year, so Flora makes 52 observations.

Question 5.
The number of runs scored by a baseball team in 20 games is given below. Draw a dot plot of the data and use it to find the most common number of runs scored in a game.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 40

Answer:

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

Page No. 674

Question 6.
Write a statistical question you could ask about a set of data that shows the times visitors arrived at an amusement park.

Answer: How many visitors arrived at an amusement park each hour?

Question 7.
A school principal is trying to decide how long the breaks should be between periods. He plans to time how long it takes several students to get from one classroom to another. Name a tool he could use to collect the data.

Answer: He could use to collect the data by stopwatch.

Question 8.
The U.S. Mint uses very strict standards when making coins. On a tour of the mint, Casey asks, “How much copper is in each penny?” Lenny asks, “What is the value of a nickel?” Who asked a statistical question?

Answer: Casey asked a statistical question.

Question 9.
Chen checks the temperature at dawn and at dusk every day for a week for a science project. How many observations does he make?
_______ observations

Answer: 14 observations.

Explanation: As there are 7 days in a week, so he makes 7×2= 14 observations.

Question 10.
The table shows the lengths of the songs played by a radio station during a 90-minute period. Alicia is making a histogram of the data. What frequency should she show for the interval 160–169 seconds?
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 41

Answer: 5.

Explanation: As there are 5 values in between 160-169, so Alicia makes a frequency of 5 for the interval 160-169 seconds.

Share and Show – Page No. 677

Use counters to find the mean of the data set.

Question 1.
On the first day of a school fundraiser, five students sell 1, 1, 2, 2, and 4 gift boxes of candy.
The mean of the data set is _______.

Answer: 2.

Explanation: The mean of the data set is
= \(\frac{1+1+2+2+4}{5}
=\frac{10}{5}\)
= 2.

Make a dot plot for the data set and use it to check whether the given value is a balance point for the data set.

Question 2.
Rosanna’s friends have 0, 1, 1, 2, 2, and 12 pets at home. Rosanna says the mean of the data is 3. Is Rosanna correct?

Answer:

Explanation: Yes, Rosanna is correct. As the mean is
= \(\frac{0+1+1+2+2+12}{6}
=\frac{18}{6}\)
= 3
So Rosanna is correct.

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

Problem Solving + Applications

Question 3.
Four people go to lunch, and the costs of their orders are $6, $9, $10, and $11. They want to split the bill evenly. Find each person’s fair share. Explain your work.
Each person’s fair share is $ _______ .

Answer: $9.

Explanation: Each person’s fair share is
= \(\frac{ $6+$9+$10+$11}{4}
=\frac{$36}{4}\)
= $9.

Page No. 678

Use the table for 4–6.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 42

Question 4.
A grocer is preparing fruit baskets to sell as holiday presents. If the grocer rearranges the apples in baskets A, B, and C so that each has the same number, how many apples will be in each basket? Use counters to find the fair share.
_______ apples

Answer: 3 apples.

Explanation: Mean for the apples are
= \(\frac{4+1+4}{3}
=\frac{9}{3}\)
= 3
So there will be 3 apples in each basket.

Question 5.
Make Arguments Can the pears be rearranged so that there is an equal whole number of pears in each basket? Explain why or why not.

Answer: No pears cannot rearrange, as three stacks of counters height are 2,1,5 so that there is an equal number in each stack, So we cannot rearrange.

Question 6.
Use counters to find the mean of the number of pears originally in baskets B and C. Draw a dot plot of the data set. Use your plot to explain why the mean you found is a balance point.

Answer: Mean= 3

Explanation: Mean= \(\frac{1+5}{2}
=\frac{6}{2}\)
= 3
As data point 1 is 2 times less than the mean and data point 5 is 2 times greater than the mean, so the points are the same distance from the mean and the mean is the balance point.

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

Question 7.
Four friends go to breakfast and the costs of their breakfasts are $5, $8, $9, and $10. Select True or False for each statement.
7a. The mean of the cost of the breakfasts can be found by adding each of the costs and dividing that total by 4.
7b. The mean cost of the four breakfasts is $10.
7c. The difference between the greatest cost and the mean is $2.
7d. The difference between the least cost and the mean is $2.

Answer:
7a. True

Explanation: As mean = (sum of the terms)/ (No.of terms)

7b. False

Explanation: The mean cost of the four breakfast is \(\frac{$5+$8+$9+$10}{4}
=\frac{$32}{4}\)
= $8.

7c. True

Explanation: The difference between the greatest cost and the mean is $10-$8= $2.

7d. False

Explanation: The difference between the least cost and the mean is $8-$5= $3

Mean as Fair Share and Balance Point – Page No. 679

Use counters to find the mean of the data set.

Question 1.
Six students count the number of buttons on their shirts. The students have 0, 4, 5, 2, 3, and 4 buttons.
The mean of the data set is _______ .

Answer: 3

Explanation: The mean of the data set is \(\frac{0+4+5+2+3+4}{6}
=\frac{18}{6}\)
= 3

Question 2.
Four students completed 1, 2, 2, and 3 chin-ups.
The mean of the data set is _______ .

Answer: 2

Explanation: The mean of the data set is \(\frac{1+2+2+3}{4}
=\frac{8}{4}\)
= 2.

Make a dot plot for the data set and use it to check whether the given value is a balance point for the data set.

Question 3.
Sandy’s friends ate 0, 2, 3, 4, 6, 6, and 7 pretzels. Sandy says the mean of the data is 4. Is Sandy correct?

Answer: Yes, Sandy is correct.

Explanation: The mean of the data set is \(\frac{0+2+3+4+6+6+7}{7}
=\frac{28}{7}\)
= 4.

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

Problem Solving

Question 4.
Three baskets contain 8, 8, and 11 soaps. Can the soaps be rearranged so that there is an equal whole number of soaps in each basket? Explain why or why not.

Answer: Yes, the soaps can be rearranged.

Explanation: As the mean is 9, the soaps can be rearranged so that there is an equal whole number of soaps in each basket. And we can fit 9 in each group.

Question 5.
Five pages contain 6, 6, 9, 10, and 11 stickers. Can the stickers be rearranged so that there is an equal whole number of stickers on each page? Explain why or why not.

Answer: No

Explanation: No, we cannot rearrange the stickers. As there is a 5 stack counter which is unable to fit in for 6, 6, 9, 10, and 11 stickers

Question 6.
Describe how to use counters to find the mean of a set of data. Give a data set and list the steps to find the mean.

Answer: We will start with an unequal stack then we will move a counter from the tallest stack to the shortest stack and we will repest it until the stacks have the same height.

Lesson Check – Page No. 680

Question 1.
What is the mean of 9, 12, and 15 stamps?
The mean is _______ stamps.

Answer: 12 stamps.

Explanation: The mean is \(\frac{9+12+15}{3}
=\frac{36}{3}\)
= 12.

Question 2.
Four friends spent $9, $11, $11, and $17 on dinner. If they split the bill equally, how much does each person owe?
$ _______

Answer: $12.

Explanation: The mean is \(\frac{$9+$11+$11+$17}{4}
=\frac{$48}{4}\)
= $12.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
What figure does the net below represent?
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 43

Answer: As the net has 6 equal square surfaces, it represents a cube.

Question 4.
Sarah paints the box below. She paints the whole box except for the front face. What area of the box does she paint?
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 44
_______ cm2

Answer: 586 cm2

Explanation: The area of the box is
= 2×20×7 + 2 ×9×7 + 9×20
= 280+126+180
= 586 cm2

Question 5.
Chloe collected data and then displayed her results in the table to the right. What is the unit of measure of the data?
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 45

Answer: The unit of measure is Fahrenheit.

Share and Show – Page No. 683

Question 1.
Terrence records the number of e-mails he receives per day. During one week, he receives 7, 3, 10, 5, 5, 6, and 6 e-mails. What are the mean, median, and mode of the data?

Answer:
Mean: 6
Median: 6
Mode: 5,6.

Explanation:
The mean is \(\frac{7+3+10+5+5+6+6}{7}
=\frac{42}{7}\)
= 6
First, we must set the data from smallest to greatest
3,5,5,6,6,7,10
so, the median is 6.
As 5 and 6 appears twice the mode is 5,6

Question 2.
Julie goes to several grocery stores and researches the price of a 12 oz bottle of juice. Find the mean, median, and mode of the prices shown.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 46

Answer:
The mean is $1.21
The Median is $2.08
The mode is $0.99

Explanation:
The mean is \(\frac{$0.95+$1.09+$0.99+$1.25+$0.99+$1.99}{6}
=\frac{$7.26}{6}\)
= $1.21.
First, we must set the data from smallest to greatest
$0.95,$0.99,$0.99,$1.09,$1.25,$1.99 as the count is even number we will add both middle numbers and will divide with 2
so, the median is $0.99+$1.09= $2.08÷2
= $1.04.
As $0.99 appears twice the mode is $0.99.

On Your Own

Question 3.
T.J. is training for the 200-meter dash event for his school’s track team. Find the mean, median, and mode of the times shown in the table.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 47

Answer:
The mean is $1.21
The Median is $2.08
The mode is $0.99

Explanation:
The mean is \(\frac{22.3+22.4+23.3+24.5+22.5}{5}
=\frac{115}{5}\)
= 23
First, we must set the data from smallest to greatest
22.3,22.4,22.5,23.3,24.5
so, the median is 22.5
As no value appear twice there is no mode.

Question 4.
Make Connections Algebra The values of a data set can be represented by the expressions x, 2x, 4x, and 5x. Write the data set for x = 3 and find the mean.
The mean is _______

Answer: The mean is 9.

Explanation: As x=3, the expression is 3,2(3),4(3),5(3)
3,6,12,15
So mean= \(\frac{3+6+12+15}{4}
=\frac{36}{4}\)
= 9.

Question 5.
In the last six months, Sonia’s family used 456, 398, 655, 508, 1,186, and 625 minutes on their cell phone plan. In an effort to spend less time on the phone each month, Sonia’s family wants to try and keep the mean cell phone usage at 600 minutes or less. Over the last 6 months, by how many minutes did the mean number of minutes exceed their goal?
They exceeded their goal by _______ minutes.

Answer: 38 minutes.

Explanation: First we must find the mean
= \(\frac{456+398+655+508+1186+625}{6}=\frac{3828}{6\)
= 638
so, they exceeded their goal by 638-600= 38 minutes.

Problem Solving + Applications – Page No. 684

Sense or Nonsense?

Question 6.
Jeremy scored 85, 90, 72, 88, and 92 on five math tests, for a mean of 85.4. On the sixth test he scored a 95. He calculates his mean score for all 6 tests as shown below, but Deronda says he is incorrect. Whose answer makes sense? Whose answer is nonsense? Explain your reasoning.

Jeremy’s Work:
The mean of my first 5 test scores was 85.4, so to find the mean of all 6 test scores, I just need to find the mean of 85.4 and 95.
Mean = \(\frac{85.4+95}{2}=\frac{180.4}{2}\) = 90.2.
So, my mean score for all 6 tests is 90.2.

Deronda’s Work:
To find the mean of all 6 test scores, you need to add up all 6 scores and divide by 6.
Mean = \(\frac{85+90+72+88+92+95}{6}=\frac{522}{6}\) = 87.
So, Jeremy’s mean score for all 6 tests is 87.

Answer: Jeremy’s answer is nonsense, Deronda’s answer makes sense.

Explanation: Jeremy should add all 6 test scores and then divide the sum by 6. And Deronda used the mean formula in the right way.

Question 7.
Alex took a standardized test 4 times. His test scores were 16, 28, 24, and 32.
The mean of the test scores is _____.
The median of the test scores is _____.
The mode of the test scores is _____.

Answer:
The mean of the test scores is 25.
The median of the test scores is 26.
The mode of the test scores is there is no mode.

Explanation:
The mean of the test scores is \(\frac{16+28+24+32}{4}
= \frac{100}{4}\)
= 25.
The median of the test scores is 16,24,28,32
= \(\frac{24+28}{2}
= \frac{52}{2}\)
= 26.
As there are no repeated values, so there is no mode.

Measures of Center – Page No. 685

Use the table for 1–4.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 48

Question 1.
What is the mean of the data?
The mean is _______ points.

Answer: 9.4 points.

Explanation: The mean is \(\frac{10+8+11+12+6}{5}
=\frac{47}{5}\)
= 9.4

Question 2.
What is the median of the data?
The median is _______ points.

Answer: 10 points.

Explanation: The median is 6,8,10,11,12
10.

Question 3.
What is the mode(s) of the data?

Answer: No mode.

Explanation: As there are no repeated values, so there is no mode.

Question 4.
Suppose Blaine played a sixth game and scored 10 points during the game. Find the new mean, median, and mode.

Answer:
Mean 9.5.
Median 10.
Mode 10.

Explanation:
The mean is \(\frac{10+8+11+12+6+10}{6}
= \frac{57}{6}\)
= 9.5.
The median is 6,8,10,10,11,12
= \(\frac{10+10}{2}
= \frac{20}{2}\)
= 10.
As 10 is repeated, so the mode is 10.

Problem Solving

Question 5.
An auto manufacturer wants their line of cars to have a median gas mileage of 25 miles per gallon or higher. The gas mileage for their five models are 23, 25, 26, 29, and 19. Do their cars meet their goal? Explain.

Answer: 25.

Explanation:
The median is 19,23,25,26,29
25.
So the car meets its goal.

Question 6.
A sporting goods store is featuring several new bicycles, priced at $300, $250, $325, $780, and $350. They advertise that the average price of their bicycles is under $400. Is their ad correct? Explain.

Answer: Their ad is incorrect.

Explanation: The mean is \(\frac{$300+$250+$325+$780+$350}{5}
= \frac{$2005}{5}\)
= $401
Their ad is incorrect. As the average price is more than $400.

Question 7.
Explain how to find the mean of a set of data.

Answer: By dividing the sum of data by the number of data we can find the mean.

Lesson Check – Page No. 686

Question 1.
The prices for a video game at 5 different stores are $39.99, $44.99, $29.99, $35.99, and $31.99. What is the mode(s) of the data?

Answer: As there are no repeated values, so there is no mode.

Question 2.
Manuel is keeping track of how long he practices the saxophone each day. The table gives his practice times for the past five days. What is the mean of his practice times?
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 49

Answer: 39.

Explanation: The mean is \(\frac{25+45+30+65+30}{5}
= \frac{195}{5}\)
= 39.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
What is the surface area of the triangular prism shown below?
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 50
_______ cm2

Answer: 1008 cm2

Explanation: The Surface area triangular prism= 25×9+25×12+25×15+2×12×9×12
= 225+300+375+108
= 1008 cm2

Question 4.
Kate records the number of miles that she bikes each day. She displayed the number of daily miles in the dot plot below. Each dot represents the number of miles she biked in one day. How many days did she bike 4–7 miles?
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 51

Answer: 7 days

Explanation: By counting dots from 4-7 we will get to know how many days did she bike. So it is for 7 days.

Question 5.
Six people eat breakfast together at a restaurant. The costs of their orders are $4, $5, $9, $8, $6, and $10. If they want to split the check evenly, how much should each person pay?

Answer: $7.

Explanation: The mean is \(\frac{$4+$5+$9+$8+$6+$10}{6}
= \frac{42}{6}\)
= $7.
So each should pay $7.

Share and Show – Page No. 689

Question 1.
Find the outlier by drawing a dot plot of the data.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 52
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 53

Answer: The outlier is 15.

Explanation:

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

Question 2.
The prices of the X-40 Laser Printer at five different stores are $99, $68, $98, $105, and $90. The mean price is $92, and the median price is $98. Identify the outlier and describe how the mean and median are affected by it.

Answer: The outlier is $68.

Explanation: Outliers are the data values which won’t fit the pattern. In this $68 is an outlier.
The mean price without outlier is \(\frac{$99+$98+$105+$90}{4}
= \frac{392}{4}\)
= $98.
The median is $90,$98,$99,$105
= \(\frac{$98+$99}{2}
= \frac{$197}{2}\)
= $98.5

Question 3.
Identify the outlier in the data set of melon weights. Then describe the effect the outlier has on the mean and median.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 54

Answer: The outlier is 14.

Explanation:
The mean with outlier is \(\frac{47+45+48+45+49+47+14+45+51+46+47}{11}
= \frac{$484}{11}\)
= 44 oz.
The mean without outlier is \(\frac{47+45+48+45+49+47+45+51+46+47}{10}
= \frac{$470}{10}\)
= 47 oz.
The outlier decreases mean from 47 to 44 oz.
The median is 14,45,45,45,46,47,47,47,48,49,51.
= 47
There is no change in the median with the outlier.

Question 4.
Use Reasoning In a set of Joanne’s test scores, there is an outlier. On the day of one of those tests, Joanne had the flu. Do you think the outlier is greater or less than the rest of her scores? Explain

Answer: The outlier is less than the rest of her score because if Joanne had the flu her test score from the day is probably lower thn her score.

Problem Solving + Applications – Page No. 690

Use the table for 5–7.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 55

Question 5.
Which player’s number of stolen bases is an outlier?

Answer: Rickey Henderson.

Explanation: The player is Rickey Henderson number 1,406 is an outlier.

Question 6.
What effect does the outlier have on the median of the data set?

Answer: The outlier increases from 905.5 to 914.

Explanation: The median with outlier is 914 and the median without outlier is \(\frac{897+914}{2}
= \frac{1811}{2}\)
=  905.5
The outlier increases from 905.5 to 914.

Question 7.
Miguel wrote that the mean of the data set is 992.6. Is this the mean with or without the outlier? Explain how you can tell without doing a calculation.

Answer: This is the mean is with outlier as the mean 992.6 is greater than the data values except for the outlier.

Question 8.
Does an outlier have any effect on the mode of a data set? Explain

Answer: The outlier will not effect the mode of a data set because an outlier must be greater or lesser than the data value, so it cannot be the same as any other data value.

Question 9.
The prices of mesh athletic shorts at five different stores are $9, $16, $18, $20, and $22. The mean price is $17 and the median price is $18. Identify the outlier and describe how the mean and median are affected by it.

Answer: The outlier is $9. The outlier decreases both the mean and the median.

Explanation: The mean without outlier is \(\frac{$16+$18+$20+$22}{4}
= \frac{$76}{4}\)
= $19.5.
The median without outlier is $16,$18,$20,$22
= \(\frac{$18+$20}{2}
= \frac{$38}{2}\)
= $19.
The outlier decreases both the mean and the median.

Effects of Outliers – Page No. 691

Question 1.
Identify the outlier in the data set of students in each class. Then describe the effect the outlier has on the mean and median.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 56

Answer: The outlier is 12. The outlier decreases both mean and median.

Explanation:
The mean with outlier is \(\frac{30+22+26+21+24+28+23+26+28+12}{10}
= \frac{240}{10}\)
= 24.
The mean without outlier is \(\frac{30+22+26+21+24+28+23+26+28}{9}
= \frac{228}{9}\)
= 25.3.
The outlier decreases mean from 24 to 25.3.
The median with outlier is 12,21,22,23,24,26,26,28,28,30.
= \(\frac{24+26}{2}
= \frac{50}{2}\)
= 25
The median without outlier is 21,22,23,24,26,26,28,28,30.
= 26
The outlier decreases both mean and median.

Question 2.
Identify the outlier in the data set of pledge amounts. Then describe the effect the outlier has on the mean and median.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 57

Answer: The outlier is $100. The outlier increases mean from $22 to $31.75 and no effect on median.

Explanation:
The mean with outlier is \(\frac{$100+$10+$15+$20+$17+$20+$32+$40}{8}
= \frac{$254}{8}\)
= $31.75.
The mean without outlier is \(\frac{$10+$15+$20+$17+$20+$32+$40}{7}
= \frac{$154}{7}\)
= 22.
The outlier increases mean from $22 to $31.75.
The median with outlier is $10,$15,$17,$20,$20,$32,$40,$100.
= \(\frac{$20+$20}{2}
= \frac{$40}{2}\)
= $20
The median without outlier is $10,$15,$17,$20,$20,$32,$40.
= $20.
The outlier has no effect on median.

Problem Solving

Question 3.
Duke’s science quiz scores are 99, 91, 60, 94, and 95. Describe the effect of the outlier on the mean and median.

Answer: The outlier is 60. The outlier decreases the mean from 94.75 to 87.8 and decreases the median from 94.5 to 94.

Explanation:
The mean with outlier is \(\frac{99+91+60+94+95}{5}
= \frac{439}{5}\)
= 87.8.
The mean without outlier is \(\frac{99+91+94+95}{4}
= \frac{379}{4}\)
= 94.75.
The outlier decreases mean from 94.75 to 87.8.
The median with outlier is 60,91,94,95,99.
= 94.
The median without outlier is 91,94,95,99.
= \(\frac{94+95}{2}
= \frac{189}{2}\)
= 94.5
The outlier decreases the median from 94.5 to 94.

Question 4.
The number of people who attended an art conference for five days was 42, 27, 35, 39, and 96. Describe the effect of the outlier on the mean and median.

Answer: The outlier is 96. The outlier increases the mean from 35.75 to 47.8 and increases the median from 37 to 39.

Explanation:
The mean with outlier is \(\frac{42+27+35+39+96}{5}
= \frac{239}{5}\)
=47.8 .
The mean without outlier is \(\frac{42+27+35+39}{4}
= \frac{143}{4}\)
= 35.75.
The outlier increases mean from 35.75 to 47.8.
The median with the outlier is 27,35,39,42,96.
= 39.
The median without outlier is 27,35,39,42.
= \(\frac{35+39}{2}
= \frac{74}{2}\)
= 37.
The outlier increases the median from 37 to 39.

Question 5.
Find or create a set of data that has an outlier. Find the mean and median with and without the outlier. Describe the effect of the outlier on the measures of center.

Answer:

Lesson Check – Page No. 692

Question 1.
What is the outlier for the data set?
19, 19, 27, 21, 77, 18, 23, 29

Answer: The outlier is 77.

Explanation: As 77 is not fit in the data set, so 77 is an outlier.

Question 2.
The number of counties in several states is 64, 15, 42, 55, 41, 60, and 52. How does the outlier change the median?

Answer: The outlier is 15. The outlier decreases the median from 52 to 53.5.

Explanation:
The median with the outlier is 15,41,42,52,55,60,64.
= 52.
The median without outlier is 41,42,52,55,60,64.
= \(\frac{52+55}{2}
= \frac{107}{2}\)
= 53.5
The outlier decreases the median from 52 to 53.5.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Hector covers each face of the pyramid below with construction paper. The area of the base of the pyramid is 28 square inches. What area will he cover with paper?
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 58
_______ in.2

Answer: 196 in.2

Explanation:
Area= 1/2 bh
= 1/2 × 8×14
= 4×14
= 56 in.2
The surface area is 28+3×56
= 28+168
= 196 in.2

Question 4.
Mr. Stevenson measured the heights of several students and recorded his findings in the chart below. How many observations did he complete?
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 59

Answer: No.of observations are 14.

Question 5.
Kendra is making a histogram for the data in the chart. She uses the intervals 0–4, 5–9, 10–14, and 15–19. What should be the height of the longest bar in her histogram?
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 60

Answer: So the height of the longest bar is 5.

Explanation:
The frequency of intervals from 0-4 is 2.
The frequency of intervals from 5-9 is 5.
The frequency of intervals from 10-14 is 4.
The frequency of intervals from 15-19 is 4.
So the height of the longest bar is 5.

Question 6.
Sharon has 6 photo files on her computer. The numbers below are the sizes of the files in kilobytes. What is the median number of kilobytes for the files?
69.7, 38.5, 106.3, 109.8, 75.6, 89.4
The median is _______ kilobytes.

Answer: 82.5 Kilobytes.

Explanation: The median is 38.5,69.7,75.6,89.4,106.3,109.8
= \(\frac{75.6+89.4}{2}
= \frac{165}{2}\)
= 82.5 Kilobytes.

Share and Show – Page No. 695

Question 1.
The table shows the number of goals scored by the Florida Panthers National Hockey League team in the last 20 games of the 2009 season. What was the most common number of goals the team scored?
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 61
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 62

Answer: The most common number of goals the team scored is 2.

Explanation: As 2 has appeared 6 times.

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

Question 2.
Draw a histogram of the hockey data. Use it to find the percent of the games in which the Panthers scored more than 3 goals.

Answer:

Explanation:

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

Question 3.
Use Appropriate Tools If you needed to find the mean of a data set, which data display—dot plot or histogram—would you choose? Explain your reasoning.

Answer: To find the mean data set the best tool is a dot plot because in a dot plot we can add all the data values to find the mean but in a histogram does not show individual values.

On Your Own – Page No. 696

Question 4.
Corey collected data on the ages of the parents of his classmates. Make a data display and use it to find the percent of parents at least 30 years old but under 50 years old.
42, 36, 35, 49, 52, 43, 41, 32, 45, 39, 50, 38, 27, 29, 37, 39

Answer: 75% of parents at least 30 years old but under 50 years old.

Explanation: Total parents are 16 and 12 parents who are at least 30 years old but under 50 years. So percent is 12/16= 0.75
= 75% of parents at least 30 years old but under 50 years old.

Question 5.
What is the mode of the data in Exercise 4?

Answer: 39

Explanation: As 39 appears two times, so the mode is 39.

Question 6.
Explain An online retail store sold 500 electronic devices in one week. Half of the devices were laptop computers and 20% were desktop computers. The remaining devices sold were tablets. How many tablets were sold? Explain how you found your answer.

Answer: 150 tablets.

Explanation:
Number of devices sold are
= 100%-50%-20%
= 100%-70%
= 30% of devices
So, number of tablets sold are 30/100 ×500
= 150 tablets.

Question 7.
A recipe for punch calls for apple juice and cranberry juice. The ratio of apple juice to cranberry juice is 3:2. Tyrone wants to make at least 20 cups of punch, but no more than 30 cups of punch. Describe two different ways he can use apple juice and cranberry juice to make the punch.

Answer: Tyrone can use 60:40 and 90:60.

Explanation: For 20 cups Tyrone can use 60:40 and for 30 cups he can use 90:60

Question 8.
The data set shows the total points scored by the middle school basketball team in the last 14 games. What is the most common number of points scored in a game? Explain how to find the answer using a dot plot.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 63

Answer: The most common number of points scored in a game is 39

Explanation:
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

Problem Solving Data Displays – Page No. 697

Read each problem and solve.

Question 1.
Josie collected data on the number of siblings her classmates have. Make a data display and determine the percent of Josie’s classmates that have more than 2 siblings.
5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 4, 3, 2, 2, 6
_______ %

Answer: 40%.

Explanation: Total number of classmates are 10 members and 4 of them have more than 2 siblings, so the percent of Josie’s classmates is 4÷10= 0.4= 40%.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

Question 2.
The following data show the number of field goals a kicker attempted each game. Make a data display and tell which number of field goals is the mode.
4, 6, 2, 1, 3, 1, 2, 1, 5, 2, 2, 3

Answer: The mode of data is 2.

Explanation: As 2 is repeated 4 times, so mode is 2.

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

Question 3.
The math exam scores for a class are shown below. Make a data display. What percent of the scores are 90 and greater?
91, 68, 83, 75, 81, 99, 97, 80, 85, 70, 89, 92, 77, 95, 100, 64, 88, 96, 76, 88

Answer: 35% of the scores are 90 and greater.

Explanation: Total data display is 20 scores and 7 of them are greater than 90. So the percent of scores is 7÷20= 0.35
= 35%.

Question 4.
The heights of students in a class are shown below in inches. Make a data display. What percent of the students are taller than 62 inches?
63, 57, 60, 64, 59, 62, 65, 58, 63, 65, 58, 61, 63, 64

Answer: 50% of the students are taller than 62 inches.

Explanation: Total data display is 14 scores and 7 of them are taller than 62 inches. So the percent of scores is 7÷14= 0.5
= 50%.

Question 5.
Write and solve a problem for which you would use a dot plot or histogram to answer questions about given data.

Answer:

Lesson Check – Page No. 698

Question 1.
The number of student absences is shown below. What is the mode of the absences?
2, 1, 3, 2, 1, 1, 3, 2, 2, 10, 4, 5, 1, 5, 1

Answer: 1

Explanation: The mode is the data value with the most dots, so the mode of absence is 1.

Question 2.
Kelly is making a histogram of the number of pets her classmates own. On the histogram, the intervals of the data are 0–1, 2–3, 4–5, 6–7. What is the range of the data?

Answer: 7

Explanation: The range of data is 7.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
The area of the base of the rectangular prism shown below is 45 square millimeters. The height is 5 \(\frac{1}{2}\) millimeters. What is the volume of the prism?
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 64
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\) mm3

Answer: 247 1/2 mm3

Explanation:
As l×w= 45 mm2
Area of the base is l×w
V= l×w×h
=  45×h
= 45 × 5 1/2
= 45 × 11/2
= 495/2
= 247 1/2 mm3

Question 4.
The frequency table shows the number of runs scored by the Cougars in 20 of their baseball games. In what percent of the games did they score 5 or fewer runs?
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 65
_______ %

Answer: 85%.

Explanation: The Cougars scores 5 or fewer runs in 17 of their 20 games. So the percent of the games did they score 5 or fewer runs is 17/20= 0.85 = 85%.

Question 5.
There are 5 plates of bagels. The numbers of bagels on the plates are 8, 10, 9, 10, and 8. Shane rearranges the bagels so that each plate has the same amount. How many bagels are now on each plate?

Answer: 9

Explanation: There are 9 bagels on each plate.

Question 6.
By how much does the median of the data set 12, 9, 9, 11, 14, 28 change if the outlier is removed?

Answer: The outlier is 28.

Explanation:
The median without outlier is 9,9,11,12,14
= 11
The median with outlier is 9,9,11,12,14,28
= (11+12)/2
= 11.5.
The median was decreased when the outlier is removed.

Chapter 12 Review/Test – Page No. 699

Question 1.
The data set shows the total number of sandwiches sold each day for 28 days. What is the most common number of sandwiches sold in a day?
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 66
______ sandwiches

Answer: 13 sandwiches.

Explanation: The most common number of sandwiches sold are 13.

Question 2.
Michael’s teacher asks, “How many items were sold on the first day of the fund raiser?” Explain why this is not a statistical question.

Answer: As there is no variability in the number of items sold on the first day of the fundraiser, so it is not a statistical question.

Question 3.
Describe the data set by writing the attribute measured, the unit of measure, the likely means of measurement, and the number of observations in the correct location on the chart.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 67
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 68

Answer:

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

Page No. 700

Question 4.
The numbers of points scored by a football team in 7 different games are 26, 38, 33, 20, 27, 3, and 28. For numbers 4a–4c, select True or False to indicate whether the statement is correct.
4a. The outlier in the data set is 3
4b. The difference between the outlier and the median is 24.
4c. The outlier in this set of data affects the mean by increasing it.

4a.
Answer:  True.

Explanation: The outlier is 3.

4b.
Answer: True.

Explanation: The median is 3,20,26,27,28,33,38
= 27
and outlier is 3, so difference between median and outlier is 27-3= 24.

4c.
Answer: False

Explanation: The mean with outlier is \(\frac{26+38+33+20+27+3+28}{7}
= \frac{175}{7}\)
= 25
The mean without outlier is \(\frac{26+38+33+20+27+28}{6}
= \frac{172}{6}\)
= 28.6
The mean increases without the outlier.

Question 5.
Mr. Jones gave a quiz to his math class. The students’ scores are listed in the table. Make a dot plot of the data.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 69

Answer:

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

Question 6.
Melanie scored 10, 10, 11, and 13 points in her last 4 basketball games.
The mean of the test scores is _____.
The median of the test scores is _____.
The mode of the test scores is _____.

Answer:
The mean of the test scores is 11.
The median of the test scores is 10.5
The mode of the test scores is 10.

Explanation:
The mean of the test scores is \(\frac{10+10+11+13}{4}
= \frac{44}{4}\)
= 11.
The median of the test scores is 10,10,11,13
= \(\frac{10+11}{2}
= \frac{21}{2}\)
= 10.5
The mode of the test scores is 10. As 10 is repeated twice.

Page No. 701

Question 7.
The Martin family goes out for frozen yogurt to celebrate the last day of school. The costs of their frozen yogurts are $1, $1, $2, and $4. Select True or False for each statement.
7a. The mean cost for the frozen yogurts can be found by adding each cost and dividing that total by 4.
7b. The mean cost of the four frozen yogurts is $2.
7c. The difference between the greatest cost and the mean is $1.
7d. The difference between the least cost and the mean is $1.

7a.
Answer: True.

Explanation: To find the mean we will add each cost and divide that total by 4.

7b.
Answer: True.

Explnation: The mean is \(\frac{$1+$1+$2+$4}{4}
= \frac{$8}{4}\)
= $2.

Answer:
7c. False.

Explanation: The difference between the greatest cost and the mean is $4-$2= $2.

Answer:
7d. True.

Explanation: The difference between the least cost and the mean is $2-$1= $1.

Question 8.
The histogram shows the amount of time students spent on homework for the week. For numbers 8a–8d, choose True or False to indicate whether the statement is correct.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 70
8a. The number of students that spent between 30 minutes and 59 minutes on homework is 2.
8b. The greatest number of students spent between 90 minutes and 119 minutes on homework.
8c. Five of the students spent less than 60 minutes on homework for the week.
8d. Six of the students spent 60 minutes or more on homework for the week.

8a.
Answer: True.

8b.
Answer: True.

8c.
Answer: False

Explanation: Three of the students spent less than 60 minutes.

8d.
Answer: True.

Page No. 702

Question 9.
The dot plot shows how many games of chess 8 different members of the chess club played in one month. If Jackson is a new member of the chess club, how many games of chess is he likely to play in one month? Explain how the dot plot helped you find the answer.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 71

Answer: Jackson played 5 games of chess in one month.

Explanation: As the tallest stack in this dot plot is 5 games.

Question 10.
Larry is training for a bicycle race. He records how far he rides each day. Find the mode of the data.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 72

Answer: 15

Explanation: As 15 repeated 3 times, so mode of the data is 15.

Question 11.
The amounts of money Connor earned each week from mowing lawns for 5 weeks are $12, $61, $71, $52, and $64. The mean amount earned is $52 and the median amount earned is $61. Identify the outlier and describe how the mean and median are affected by it.

Answer: The outliernis $12. The outlier decreases both mean and median.

Explanation: The mean without outlier is \(\frac{$61+$71+$52+$64}{4}
= \frac{248}{4}\)
= 62.
The median without outlier is $52,$61,$64,$71.
= \(\frac{$61+$64}{2}
= \frac{125}{2}\)
= 62.5
The outlier decreases both mean and median.

Question 12.
The frequency table shows the height, in inches, of 12 basketball players. What fraction of the players are 70 inches or taller?
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 73
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{4}\).

Explanation: The total number of players who are 70 inches or taller are 6+3= 9, so fraction is \(\frac{9}{12}\)
= \(\frac{3}{4}\).

Page No. 703

Question 13.
A teacher surveys her students to find out how much time the students spent eating lunch on Monday.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 74
She uses _____ as the unit of measure.
She uses ______ as the unit of measure.

Answer: She uses minutes as the unit of measure.

Question 14.
For numbers 14a–14d, choose Yes or No to indicate whether the question is a statistical question.
14a. What are the heights of the trees in the park?
14b. How old are the trees in the park?
14c. How tall is the cypress tree on the north side of the lake this morning?
14d. What are the diameters of the trees in the park?

14a.
Answer: Yes.

14b.
Answer: Yes.

14c.
Answer: No.

14d. Yes.

Question 15.
Five friends have 8, 6, 5, 2, and 4 baseball cards to divide equally among themselves.
Each friend will get _____ cards.
Each friend will get ______ cards.

Answer: 5 cards.

Explanation: Each friend will get \(\frac{8+6+5+2+4}{5}
= \frac{25}{5}\)
= 5

Question 16.
The data set shows the ages of the members of the cheerleading squad. What is the most common age of the members of the squad? Explain how to find the answer using a dot plot.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 75

Answer: 11 is the most common age of the members of the squad.

Explanation:

Page No. 704

Question 17.
The band director kept a record of the number of concert tickets sold by 20 band members. Complete the frequency table by finding the frequency and the relative frequency.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 76
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 77

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 18.
Gilbert is training for a marathon by running each week. The table shows the distances, in miles, that he ran each week during the first 7 weeks.
Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center img 78
Part A
Gilbert set a goal that the mean number of miles he runs in 7 weeks is at least 14 miles. Did Gilbert reach his goal? Use words and numbers to support your answer.

Answer: No, Gilbert did not reach his goal as 13 is less than 14.

Explanation: The mean number of miles he runs in 7 weeks \(\frac{8+10+9+10+15+18+21}{7}
= \frac{91}{7}\)
= 13

Question 18.
Part B
Suppose Gilbert had run 18 miles during week 5 and 22 miles during week 6. Would he have reached his goal? Use words and numbers to support your answer

Answer: As the mean is 14, Gilbert reached his goal.

Explanation: The mean is \(\frac{8+10+9+10+22+18+21}{7}
= \frac{98}{7}\)
= 14.

Final Words

Tap the above links and start your preparation from now itself. You can understand the concepts of Data Displays and Measures of Center in-depth here. Bookmark our ccssmathanswers.com to get the answers with explanations for all grade 6 chapters.

Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures

go-math-grade-7-chapter-8-modeling-geometric-figures-answer-key

Students of 7th grade can get a detailed explanation for all the problems in Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures. Redefine yourself by practicing problems from Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures. We have given the pdf to Download HMH Go Math Answer Key of Grade 7 Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures. So, refer to Go Math 7th Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures to secure the highest score in exams.

Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures

Get access to Download HMH Go Math Grade 7 Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures here. Start preparing for your exams by using the Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures pdf. In this article, you can check the answers to review questions in addition to the exercise and homework questions. So, make use of the below links and learn the problems according to the topics.

Chapter 8 – Modeling Geometric Figures – Lesson: 1

Chapter 8 – Modeling Geometric Figures – Lesson: 2

Chapter 8 – Modeling Geometric Figures – Lesson: 3

Chapter 8 – Modeling Geometric Figures – Lesson: 4

Chapter 8 – Modeling Geometric Figures

Guided Practice – Page No. 240

Question 1.
The scale of a room in a blueprint is 3 in : 5 ft. A wall in the same blueprint is 18 in. Complete the table.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures img 1
a. How long is the actual wall?
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures img 2
______ feet

Answer: 30 feet

Explanation:
We complete the table using the direct proportionality
3 in : 5 ft.
A wall in the same blueprint is 18 in. is 30 feet.

Question 1.
b. A window in the room has an actual width of 2.5 feet. Find the width of the window in the blueprint.
______ inches

Answer: 1.5 inches

Explanation:
We determine the number of inches corresponding to 1 foot on the actual window
3 in /5 in.
Multiply and divide by 5
(3 in ÷ 5)/(5 ft ÷ 5) = 0.6/1 ft
Thus 1 foot corresponds to 0.6 inches, so the width of the window in the table is
2.5 × 0.6 = 1.5 inches

Question 2.
The scale in the drawing is 2 in. : 4 ft. What are the length and width of the actual room? Find the area of the actual room.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures img 3
Width: _________ feet
Length: _________ feet
Area: _________ sq ft

Answer:
Width: 28 feet
Length: 14 feet
Area: 392 sq ft

Explanation:
We determine the number of feet corresponding to 1 inch in the drawing
2 in/4 in = (2 in. ÷ 2)/(4 in ÷ 2) = 1/2
Thus 1 inch corresponds to 2 feet on the actual dimensions of the room.
We determine the actual length of the room, labeled 14 inches in the drawing.
14 × 2 = 28 feet
We determine the actual width of the room, labeled 7 inches in the drawing.
7 × = 14 feet
We compute the area of the actual room:
28 × 14 = 392 square feet.

Question 3.
The scale in the drawing is 2 cm: 5 m. What are the length and width of the actual room? Find the area of the actual room.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures img 4
Width: _________ m
Length: _________ m
Area: _________ sq meters

Answer:
Width: 25 m
Length: 15 m
Area: 375 sq meters

Explanation:
We determine the number of meters corresponding to 1 centimeter in the drawing:
2 cm/5 cm = (2 cm ÷ 2)/(5 cm ÷ 2) = 1 cm/ 2.5 m
We determine the actual length of the room, labeled 10 cm in the drawing:
10 × 2.5 = 25 m
We determine the actual width of the room, labeled 6 cm in the drawing:
6 × 2.5 = 15 m
We compute the area of the room:
25 × 15 = 375 square feet.

Question 4.
A scale drawing of a cafeteria is drawn on centimeter grid paper as shown. The scale is 1 cm: 4 m.
a. Redraw the rectangle on centimeter grid paper using a scale of 1 cm:6 m.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures img 5
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Go Math Grade 7 Chapter 8 Answer Key solution img-1

Question 4.
b. What is the actual length and width of the cafeteria using the original scale? What are the actual dimensions of the cafeteria using the new scale?
Length: _________ m
Width: _________ m

Answer:
In the original scale, the dimensions on the drawing are
l1 = 9 cm
w1 = 6  cm
We determine the actual length using the original scale:
9 × 4 = 36
We determine the actual width using the original scale:
6 × 4 = 24
In the second scale, the dimensions on the drawing are
l2 = 6 cm
w1 = 4 cm
We determine the actual length using the original scale:
6 × 6 = 36
We determine the actual width using the original scale:
4 × 6 = 24
Thus the length is 36m
Width is 24 m

Essential Question Check-In

Question 5.
If you have an accurate, complete scale drawing and the scale, which measurements of the object of the drawing can you find?
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
If we have an accurate, complete scale drawing and scale, we can determine all measurements of the object because they are all proportional with the dimensions on the drawing the ratio being the scale.

Independent Practice – Page No. 241

Question 6.
Art
Marie has a small copy of Rene Magritte’s famous painting, The Schoolmaster. Her copy has dimensions 2 inches by 1.5 inches. The scale of the copy is 1 in.:40 cm.
a. Find the dimensions of the original painting.
Length: _________ cm
Width: _________ cm

Answer:
Length: 80 cm
Width: 60 cm

Explanation:
We are given the data
Scale: 1 in:40 cm
Copy l1 = 2 in.
w1 = 1.5 inches
We determine the length l of the original painting
l = 2 × 40 = 80cm
We determine the width w of the original painting
w = 1.5 × 40 = 60 cm

Question 6.
b. Find the area of the original painting.
_____________ sq cm

Answer: 4800 square cm

Explanation:
We determine the width w of the original painting
A = l.w
A = 80 × 60 = 4,800 square cm

Question 6.
c. Since 1 inch is 2.54 centimeters, find the dimensions of the original painting in inches.
Length: _________ inches
Width: _________ inches

Answer:
We determine the length l of the original painting in inches:
1 in. = 2.54 cm
l = 80/2.54 cm ≈ 31.5 inches
We determine the width w of the original painting in inches:
w = 60/2.54 ≈ 23.6 inches

Question 6.
d. Find the area of the original painting in square inches
_____________ sq inches

Answer: 743.4 square inches

Explanation:
We find the area of the original painting in the square inches:
l × w = 31.5 × 23.6 = 743.4 square inches
Thus the area of the original painting is 743.4 square inches.

Question 7.
A game room has a floor that is 120 feet by 75 feet. A scale drawing of the floor on grid paper uses a scale of 1 unit:5 feet. What are the dimensions of the scale drawing?
Length: _________ units
Width: _________ units

Answer:
Length: 24 units
Width: 15 units

Explanation:
We are given the data:
Scale: 1 unit: 5 feet
Actual dimensions: l = 120 feet, w = 75 feet
We determine the number of units on the drawing corresponding to 1 foot from the actual dimensions.
1 unit/ 5 feet
(1 unit ÷ 5)/(5 feet ÷ 5) = 0.2 units/1 feet
We determine the length of the scale drawing:
120 × 0.2 = 24 units
We determine the width of the scale drawing:
75 × 0.2 = 15 units

Question 8.
Multiple Representations
The length of a table is 6 feet. On a scale drawing, the length is 2 inches. Write three possible scales for the drawing.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
l = 6 feet
l1 = 2 inches
l = the actual length
l1 = the length on a scale drawing
2 inches:6 ft
1 in:3 ft
2/6×12 = 2/72 = 1/36
1 cm: 36 cm

Question 9.
Analyze Relationships
A scale for a scale drawing is 10 cm:1 mm. Which is larger, the actual object or the scale drawing? Explain.
_____________

Answer:
We are given the scale
10 cm: 1 mm
100 mm: 1 m
This means that the correspondent in actual dimension for 100 mm of drawing is 1mm, so to a greater on the drawing there is a smaller actual distance, therefore the scale drawing is larger.

Question 10.
Architecture
The scale model of a building is 5.4 feet tall.
a. If the original building is 810 meters tall, what was the scale used to make the model?
______ ft. : ______ m

Answer: 1 foot: 150 m

Explanation:
Let’s note:
h1 = the height on the scale model
h = the actual height
We are given the data
h1 = 5.4 feet
h = 810 meters
We determine the scale for the model
h1/h = 5.4 feet/810 m = (5.4 feet ÷ 5.4)/(810 ÷ 5.4)
1 foot/150 m
1 foot: 150 m

Question 10.
b. If the model is made out of tiny bricks each measuring 0.4 inch in height, how many bricks tall is the model?
___________ bricks

Answer: 14 bricks

Explanation:
We determine the scale for the model:
h1/0.4 = 5.4/0.4 = 13.5
The number of bricks: 14

Page No. 242

Question 11.
You have been asked to build a scale model of your school out of toothpicks. Imagine your school is 30 feet tall. Your scale is 1 ft:1.26 cm.
a. If a toothpick is 6.3 cm tall, how many toothpicks tall will your model be?
______ toothpicks

Answer: 6

Explanation:
Given that,
h = 30 feet
1 ft: 1.26 cm
h1 = the height on the scale model
h = the actual height
We determine the height h1 of the model:
h1 = 30 × 1.26 = 37.8 cm
h1/6.3 = 37.8/6.3 = 6
Thus the number of toothpicks = 6

Question 11.
b. Your mother is out of toothpicks, and suggests you use cotton swabs instead. You measure them, and they are 7.6 cm tall. How many cotton swabs tall will your model be?
______ cotton swabs

Answer: 5

Explanation:
We find the number of cotton wabs
h1/7.6 = 37.8/7.6 ≈ 5
Thus the number of cotton wabs = 5

H.O.T.

Focus on Higher Order Thinking

Question 12.
Draw Conclusions
The area of a square floor on a scale drawing is 100 square centimeters, and the scale of the drawing is 1 cm : 2 ft. What is the area of the actual floor? What is the ratio of the area in the drawing to the actual area?
Area = ______ sq. ft.

Answer: 400 sq. ft

Explanation:
A1 = the area of the drawing
A = the area of the actual floor
We are given the data:
A1 = 100 cm²
1 cm: 2 ft
1 cm corresponds to 2 ft
1 cm × 1 cm corresponds to 2 ft × 2 ft
1 cm² corresponds to 4 ft²
A = 100. 4 = 400 ft²
We determine the ratio of the area in the drawing to the actual area:
1 ft = 0.3048 m = 30.48 cm
A1/A = 100/400 × 30.48² ≈ 0.0003

Question 13.
Multiple Representations
Describe how to redraw a scale drawing with a new scale.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
In order to redraw a scale drawing with a new scale we perform 2 steps:
1. We find how many times the new scale us bigger or smaller than the old one.
2. We multiply this scale factor by the dimensions of the old scale drawing to get a new drawing.

Question 14.
Represent Real-World Problems
Describe how several jobs or professions might use scale drawings at work.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Scale drawings are extremely useful in jobs which need to represent bigger areas on smaller devices like
1. Architecture/ constructions
2. medicine
3. agriculture
4. tourism
5. transportation

Guided Practice – Page No. 245

Tell whether each figure creates the conditions to form a unique triangle, more than one triangle, or no triangle.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures img 6
Type below:
_____________

Answer: A unique triangle

Explanation:
We are given two angles and the included side, thus there is a unique triangle as the sides leaving from B and A intersect in a unique point.

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures img 7
Type below:
_____________

Answer: No triangle

Explanation:
We are given the three sides of the triangle. We check if the sum of any two sides is greater than the other.
4 + 11 = 15 > 3
11 + 3 = 14 > 4
3 + 4 = 7 is not greater than 11.
Because one inequality is not verified, the triangle doesn’t exist.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures img 8
Type below:
_____________

Answer: A unique triangle

Explanation:
We are given two angles and the included side, thus there is a unique triangle as the sides leaving from B and A intersect in a unique point.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures img 9
Type below:
_____________

Answer: A unique triangle

Explanation:
We are given the three sides of the triangle. We check if the sum of any two sides is greater than the other.
6 + 12 = 18 > 7
12 + 7 = 19 > 6
6 + 7 = 13 > 12
Since all inequalities are verified, there is a unique triangle.

Essential Question Check-In

Question 5.
Describe lengths of three segments that could not be used to form a triangle.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Find the lengths of three segments not to be the sides of a triangle, at least one sum of two sides should be smaller than the other side.
Let a, b, c be the lengths of the three segments.
a + b not > a + b + k = c

Independent Practice

Question 6.
On a separate piece of paper, try to draw a triangle with side lengths of 3 centimeters and 6 centimeters, and an included angle of 120°. Determine whether the given segments and angle produce a unique triangle, more than one triangle, or no triangle.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: A unique triangle

Explanation:
∠A = 120°
AB = 6
AC = 3
Go Math Grade 7 Chapter 8 Answer Key solution img-2
We draw the segment AB, the angle A and the segment AC, then we join B and C. The result is an unique triangle.

Question 7.
A landscape architect submitted a design for a triangle-shaped flower garden with side lengths of 21 feet, 37 feet, and 15 feet to a customer. Explain why the architect was not hired to create the flower garden.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
We are given the sides of a triangle
21 + 37 = 58 > 15
37 + 15 = 52 > 21
15 + 21 = 36 not > 37
We checked the three triangles inequalities
Thus the triangle does not exist, that is the reason why the architect was not hired to create the flower garden.

Page No. 246

Question 8.
Make a Conjecture
The angles in an actual triangle-shaped traffic sign all have measures of 60°. The angles in a scale drawing of the sign all have measures of 60°. Explain how you can use this information to decide whether three given angle measures can be used to form a unique triangle or more than one triangle.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures img 10
Type below:
_____________

Answer: Three given angle measures whose sum is 180° can be used to form an infinity of triangles, having the property that their corresponding sides are proportional.

H.O.T.

Focus on Higher Order Thinking

Question 9.
Communicate Mathematical Ideas
The figure on the left shows a line segment 2 inches long forming a 45° angle with a dashed line whose length is not given. The figure on the right shows a compass set at a width of 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\) inches with its point on the top end of the 2-inch segment. An arc is drawn intersecting the dashed line twice.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures img 11
Explain how you can use this figure to decide whether two sides and an angle not included between them can be used to form a unique triangle, more than one triangle, or no triangle.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
A trinagle does not exist because one side is shorter than the other two sides. The circle intersects the dashed line only once so that one angles is 45°, so there is only one solution. The circle with the center in B intersects the dashed line twice, thus there are two triangles formed.

Question 10.
Critical Thinking
Two sides of an isosceles triangle have lengths of 6 inches and 15 inches, respectively. Find the length of the third side. Explain your reasoning.
_______ inches

Answer: 15 inches

Explanation:
We are given the two sides of an isosceles triangle
a = 6
b = 15
There are two possibilities the third side is equal to a or b. Lets study both of them
Case 1: a = c = 6, b = 15
a + c = 6 + 6 = 12 not greater than 15 = b
We check the three triangle’s inequalities
a + b = 6 + 15 = 21 > 15 = c
a + c = 6 + 15 = 21 > 15 = b
b + c = 15 + 15 = 30 > 6 = a
Case 2: a = 6, b = c = 15
Thus the third side of the triangle is 15.

Guided Practice – Page No. 249

Describe each cross section.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures img 12
Type below:
_____________

Answer: Triangle/Quadrilateral triangle
The given cross-section in a cube is a triangle/equilateral triangle.

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures img 13
Type below:
_____________

Answer: Rectangle
The given cross-section in a cylinder is a rectangle.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures img 14
Type below:
_____________

Answer: Triangle

Explanation:
The given cross-section in the prism is the triangle.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures img 15
Type below:
_____________

Answer: Rainbow shaped curve
The given cross-section in the cone is a rainbow-shaped curve.

Essential Question Check-In

Question 5.
What is the first step in describing what figure results when a given plane intersects a given three-dimensional figure?
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
The first step in describing what figure results when a given plane intersects a given three-dimensional figure is to establish the number of sides the cross-section has.

Independent Practice

Question 6.
Describe different ways in which a plane might intersect the cylinder and the cross section that results.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures img 16
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
The cross-section can be:
1. a circle
2. an ellipse
3. a rectangle

Page No. 250

Question 7.
Make a Conjecture
What cross sections might you see when a plane intersects a cone that you would not see when a plane intersects a pyramid or a prism?
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
The cross-section can be:
1. a circle
2. an ellipse
3. a parabola
4. a hyperbola
5. a triangle

H.O.T.

Focus on Higher Order Thinking

Question 8.
Critical Thinking
The two figures on the left below show that you can form a cross section of a cube that is a pentagon. Think of a plane cutting the cube at an angle in such a way as to slice through five of the cube’s six faces. Draw dotted lines on the third cube to show how to form a cross section that is a hexagon.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures img 17
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
We draw a plane cutting the cube so that the cross-section is a hexagon: for this, we take the middle of 6 adjacent sides:

Question 9.
Analyze Relationships
A sphere has a radius of 12 inches. A horizontal plane passes through the center of the sphere.
a. Describe the cross section formed by the plane and the sphere
Type below:
_____________

Answer: Circle

Explanation:
We are given a sphere and a cross-section passing through the center of the sphere:
The cross section passing through the center of the sphere is a circle having the radius equal to the sphere’s radius.

Question 9.
b. Describe the cross sections formed as the plane intersects the interior of the sphere but moves away from the center.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:  The cross sections formed as a plane intersects the interior of the sphere outside the center are circles.

Question 10.
Communicate Mathematical Ideas
A right rectangular prism is intersected by a horizontal plane and a vertical plane. The cross section formed by the horizontal plane and the prism is a rectangle with dimensions 8 in. and 12 in. The cross section formed by the vertical plane and the prism is a rectangle with dimensions 5 in. and 8 in. Describe the faces of the prism, including their dimensions. Then find its volume.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: 480 cube inches

Explanation:
The horizontal cross section has the dimensions 8×12, while the vertical 5×8.
The prism has the dimensions:
5 inches, 8 inches, 12 inches
We find the volume of the prism:
5 × 8 × 12 = 480 cube inches

Question 11.
Represent Real-World Problems
Describe a real-world situation that could be represented by planes slicing a three-dimensional figure to form cross sections.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Examples of real-world situations that can be represented by planes slicing three-dimensional figures to form cross-sections:
– electrical wires
– water/gas pipes
– house design
– geology
– seismology

Guided Practice – Page No. 256

For 1–2, use the figure.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures img 18

Question 1.
Vocabulary
The sum of the measures of ∠UWV and ∠UWZ is 90°, so ∠UWV and ∠UWZ are _____ angles.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: Complementary angles

Explanation:
The sum of ∠UWV and ∠UWZ is 90°, so ∠UWV and ∠UWZ are complementary angles.

Question 2.
Vocabulary
∠UWV and ∠VWX share a vertex and one side. They do not overlap, so ∠UWV and ∠VWX are _____ angles.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: Adjacent angles

Explanation:
∠UWV and ∠VWX share a vertex and one side. They do not overlap, so ∠UWV and ∠VWX are adjacent angles.

For 3–4, use the figure.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures img 19

Question 3.
∠AGB and ∠DGE are _____ angles, so m∠DGE = _____.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: ∠AGB and ∠DGE are vertical angles, so m∠DGE = m∠AGB = 30°

Question 4.
Find the measure of ∠EGF.
_______ °

Answer: 100°

Explanation:
m∠CGD + m∠DGE + m∠EGF = 180°
50° + m∠AGB + m∠EGF = 180°
50° + 30° + 2x = 180°
2x = 180° – 80°
2x = 100°
mm∠EGF = 2x = 100°

Question 5.
Find the value of x and the measure of ∠MNQ.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures img 20
x = _______ °
mMNQ = _______ °

Answer:
∠MNQ + ∠QNP = 90°
3x – 13° + 58° = 90°
3x = 90° + 13° – 58°
3x = 45°
x = 15°
m∠MNQ = 3x – 13°
= 3×15° – 13°
= 45° – 13°
= 32°

Essential Question Check-In

Question 6.
Suppose that you know that ∠T and ∠S are supplementary and that m∠T = 3(m∠S). How can you find m∠T?
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
m∠T + m∠S = 180°
m∠T = 3(m∠S)
m∠S = m∠T/3
Form the second equation we write m∠S in terms of m∠T
m∠T + m∠T/3 = 3 × 180°
3m∠T + m∠T = 3 × 180°
4m∠T = 540°
m∠T = 540°/4
m∠T = 135°

Independent Practice – Page No. 257

For 7–11, use the figure.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures img 21

Question 7.
Name a pair of adjacent angles. Explain why they are adjacent.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
The pair of adjacent angles are:
∠SUR and ∠RUN (common vertex U and one common side – UR – without overlapping)
∠NUQ and ∠QUP (common vertex U and one common side – UQ – without overlapping)
∠PUT and ∠TUS (common vertex U and one common side – UT – without overlapping)

Question 8.
Name a pair of acute vertical angles.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
By seeing the above figure we can say that ∠SUR and ∠PUQ are the vertical angles.

Question 9.
Name a pair of supplementary angles.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
The above figure shows that ∠SUR and ∠RUQ are supplementary angles.

Question 10.
Justify Reasoning
Find m∠QUR. Justify your answer.
_______ °

Answer:
We have to find m∠QUR.
∠SUR and ∠QURare supplementary angles.
m∠SUR + m∠QUR = 180°
m∠QUR + 41° = 180°
m∠QUR = 180° – 41°
m∠QUR = 139°

Question 11.
Draw Conclusions
Which is greater, m∠TUR or m∠RUQ? Explain.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
m∠QUR = 139°
m∠TUR = m∠TUS + m∠SUR
90° + 41° = 131°
We find m∠TUR
139° > 131°
m∠QUR > m∠TUR

For 12–13, use the figure. A bike path crosses a road as shown. Solve for each indicated angle measure or variable.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures img 22

Question 12.
x = ?
_______ °

Answer: x = 21°

Explanation:
∠KMI and ∠HMG are vertical, thus congruent.
We determine x:
84° = 4x
4x = 84°
x = 84°/4
x = 21°

Question 13.
m∠KMH = ?
_______ °

Answer: 96°

Explanation:
∠KMI and ∠KMH are supplementary.
We determine m∠KMH:
m∠KMH + m∠KMI = 180°
m∠KMH + 84° = 180°
m∠KMH = 180° – 84°
m∠KMH = 96°

For 14–16, use the figure. Solve for each indicated angle measure.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures img 23

Question 14.
m∠CBE = ?
_______ °

Answer: 118°

Explanation:
We determine m∠CBE:
m∠CBE + m∠EBF = 180°
m∠CBE + 62°= 180°
m∠CBE = 180° – 62°
m∠CBE = 118°

Question 15.
m∠ABF = ?
_______ °

Answer: 28°

Explanation:
We determine m∠ABF
m∠ABF + m∠EBF = 90°
m∠ABF + 62° = 90°
m∠ABF = 90° – 62°
m∠ABF = 28°

Question 16.
m∠CBA = ?
_______ °

Answer: 152°

Explanation:
We determine m∠CBA
m∠CBA = m∠DBF = m∠DBE + m∠EBF
90° + 62° = 152°
m∠CBA = 152°

Question 17.
The measure of ∠A is 4° greater than the measure of ∠B. The two angles are complementary. Find the measure of each angle.
mA = __________ °
mB = __________ °

Answer:
mA = 47°
mB = 43°

Explanation:
We are given the data:
m∠A = m∠B + 4°
m∠A + m∠B = 90°
m∠B + 4° + m∠B = 90°
2m∠B = 90° – 4°
2m∠B = 86°
m∠B = 86°/2
m∠B = 43°
m∠A = m∠B + 4°
m∠A = 43° + 4°
m∠A = 47°

Question 18.
The measure of ∠D is 5 times the measure of ∠E. The two angles are supplementary. Find the measure of each angle.
mD = __________ °
mE = __________ °

Answer:
mD = 150°
mE = 30°

Explanation:
We are given the data
m∠D = 5(m∠E)
m∠D + m∠E = 180°
5(m∠E) + m∠E = 180°
6 m∠E = 180°
m∠E = 180°/6
m∠E = 30°
m∠D = 5(m∠E)
m∠D = 5 × 30°
m∠D = 150°

Page No. 258

Question 19.
Astronomy
Astronomers sometimes use angle measures divided into degrees, minutes, and seconds. One degree is equal to 60 minutes, and one minute is equal to 60 seconds. Suppose that ∠J and ∠K are complementary, and that the measure of ∠J is 48 degrees, 26 minutes, 8 seconds. What is the measure of ∠K?
_______ ° _______ ‘ _______ ”

Answer: 41° 33 ‘ 52″

Explanation:
We are given the data
m∠J + m∠K = 90°
m∠J = 48° 26 ‘ 8″
90° – 48° 26 ‘ 8″
89°60’ – 48° 26 ‘ 8″
89°59’60” – 48° 26 ‘ 8″ = 41° 33 ‘ 52″
Thus the measure of ∠K is 41° 33 ‘ 52″

H.O.T.

Focus on Higher Order Thinking

Question 20.
Represent Real-World Problems
The railroad tracks meet the road as shown. The town will allow a parking lot at angle K if the measure of angle K is greater than 38°. Can a parking lot be built at angle K ? Why or why not?
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures img 24
_______

Answer:
m∠K = 180° – 50° – 90° = 40°
Since m∠K = 40°> 38°, a parking lot can be built.

Question 21.
Justify Reasoning
Kendra says that she can draw ∠A and ∠B so that m∠A is 119° and ∠A and ∠B are complementary angles. Do you agree or disagree? Explain your reasoning.
_______

Answer:
We are given the data
m∠A = 119°
m∠A + m∠B = 90°
m∠B = 90° – m∠A
= 90° – 119° = -29°
Since m∠B < 0, Kendra is wrong, she cannnot draw the angles.

Question 22.
Draw Conclusions
If two angles are complementary, each angle is called a complement of the other. If two angles are supplementary, each angle is called a supplement of the other.
a. Suppose m∠A = 77°. What is the measure of a complement of a complement of ∠A? Explain.
_______ °

Answer: 77°

Explanation:
90° – (90° – m∠A) = 90° – (90° – 77°)
90° – 77° = 13°
77°

Question 22.
b. What conclusion can you draw about a complement of a complement of an angle? Explain.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
The complement of a complement of an angle is the angle itself:
90° – (90° – m∠A)
90° – 90° + m∠A

8.1 Similar Shapes and Scale Drawings – Page No. 259

Question 1.
A house blueprint has a scale of 1 in. : 4 ft. The length and width of each room in the actual house are shown in the table. Complete the table by finding the length and width of each room on the blueprint.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures img 25
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Go-Math-Grade-7-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Modeling-Geometric-Figures-img-25
Thus for each 4 ft in actual dimension, there is 1 inch in the blueprint.

8.2 Geometric Drawings

Question 2.
Can a triangle be formed with the side lengths of 8 cm, 4 cm, and 12 cm?
______

Answer:
We are given the side lengths
8 + 12 = 20 > 4
4 + 12 = 16 > 8
8 + 4 not > 12
Since one of the inequalities is not verified, the three given side lengths cannot form a triangle.

Question 3.
A triangle has side lengths of 11 cm and 9 cm. Which could be the value of the third side, 20 cm or 15 cm?
______

Answer: 15 cm

Explanation:
We are given the side lengths
11, 9
11 + 9 = 20 not > 20
We check the triangle’s inequalities if we add the third side of 20 cm
Since one of the inequalities is not verified, the three given side lengths cannot form a triangle.
11, 9, 15
11 + 9 = 20 > 15
11 + 15 = 26 > 9
15 + 9 = 24 > 11
We check the triangle’s inequalities are verified, 15 can be the value of the third side.

8.3 Cross Sections

Question 4.
Name one possible cross section of a sphere.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: Circle
One possible cross section of the sphere is a circle.

Question 5.
Name at least two shapes that are cross sections of a cylinder.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: Three possible cross-sections of a cylinder are a circle, an ellipse, and a rectangle.

Essential Question Check-In

Question 5.
How can you model geometry figures to solve real-world problems?
Type below:
_____________

Answer: You can model geometry for making buildings and sky scrapers, also stores.

8.4 Angle Relationships

Question 6.
∠BGC and ∠FGE are _____ angles, so m∠FGE = _____
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures img 26
_____ °

Answer: ∠BGC and ∠FGE are vertical angles, so m∠FGE = m∠BGC = 90° – 40° = 50°

Question 7.
Suppose you know that ∠S and ∠Y are complementary, and that m∠S = 2(m∠Y) – 30°. Find m∠Y.
m?Y = _____ °

Answer: 40°

Explanation:
m∠S + m∠Y = 90°
m∠S = 2(m∠Y) – 30°
We replace the expression of m∠S from the second equation into the first we can find m∠Y
2(m∠Y) – 30° + m∠Y = 90°
3m∠Y = 90° + 30°
3m∠Y = 120°
m∠Y = 120°/3
m∠Y = 40°

Selected Response – Page No. 260

Question 1.
Which number can you add to 15 to get a sum of 0?
Options:
a. -10
b. -15
c. 0
d. 15

Answer: -15

Explanation:
The number we add to a number in order to get a sum of zero is its opposite. In or case we should add -15 to 15.
15 + (-15) = 0
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 2.
Students are painting the backdrop for the school play. The backdrop is 15 feet wide and 10 feet high. Every 16 inches on the scale drawing represents 5 feet on the backdrop. What is the area of the scale drawing?
Options:
a. 150 in2
b. 6 in2
c. 3096
d. 1536 in2

Answer: 1536 in2

Explanation:
We are given the dimensions l and w of the backdrop and the drawing scale:
l = 15 ft
w = 10 ft
16 in: 5 ft
16 in./5 ft = (16 in. ÷ 5)/(5 ft ÷ 5) = 3.2 in/1 ft
l1 = 15 × 3.2 = 48 inches
w1 = 10 × 32 = 320 inches
l1 × w1 = 48 × 32 = 1536 square inches
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 3.
Two sides of a triangle measure 8 cm and 12 cm. Which of the following CANNOT be the measure of the third side?
Options:
a. 4
b. 12
c. 8
d. 16

Answer: 4 cm

Explanation:
We are given two sides of a triangle
a. 4
4 + 8 not > 12
b. 12
12 + 8 > 12
12 + 12 > 8
c. 8
8 + 8 > 12
8 + 12 > 12
d. 16
8 + 12 > 16
8 + 16 > 12
12 + 16 > 8
Thus the only dimension which cannot be the measure of the third side f the triangle is 4 cm.
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 4.
A cross section is the intersection of a three-dimensional figure and a _____ .
Options:
a. point
b. plane
c. line
d. set

Answer: Plane

Explanation:
A cross section is the interaction of a three-dimensional figure and a plane.
Thus the correct answer is option B.

For 5–6, use the diagram.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures img 27

Question 5.
What is the measure of ∠BFC?
Options:
a. 18
b. 108
c. 72
d. 144

Answer: 108°

Explanation:
∠BFC + ∠BFA = 180°
∠BFC + 72° = 180°
∠BFC = 180° – 72°
∠BFC = 108°
The angles ∠BFC and ∠BFA are supplementary. We determine ∠BFC.
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 6.
Which describes the relationship between ∠BFA and ∠CFD?
Options:
a. adjacent angles
b. complementary angles
c. supplementary angles
d. vertical angles

Answer: vertical angles

Explanation:
The angles ∠BFA and ∠CFD are vertical angles because they are opposite angles formed at the intersection of two lines.
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 7.
All clothing is being marked down 15%. Which expression represents the new retail price?
Options:
a. 0.85x
b. 1.15x
c. 1.85x
d. 0.15x

Answer: 0.85x

Explanation:
x = initial price
Since the price went down by 15%, the new price will be diminished by 15/100 x
x – 0.15x = 0.85x
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Mini-Tasks

Question 8.
Ira built a model of the Great Pyramid in Egypt for a school project. The Great Pyramid has a square base with sides of length 756 feet. The height of the Great Pyramid is 481 feet. Ira made his model pyramid using a scale of 1 inch : 20 feet.
a. What is the length of each side of the base of Ira’s pyramid?
_____ in

Answer: 37.8 inches
We compute the number of inches corresponding to 1 feet from the actual dimensions:
1 in./20 ft = (1 in. ÷ 20)/(20 ft ÷ 20) = 0.05 in/1 ft.
There are 0.05 inches for 1 feet.
We determine the length of Ira’s  pyramid base:
756 × 0.05 = 37.8 inches

Question 8.
b. What is the area of the base of Ira’s pyramid?
_____ square inches

Answer: 1428.84 square inches

Explanation:
We determine the area of Ira’s pyramid base:
37.8 × 37.8 = 1,428.84 square inches.

Question 8.
c. What is the height of Ira’s pyramid?
_____ in

Answer:
We determine the height of Ira’s pyramid:
481 × 0.05 = 24.05 inches

Question 8.
d. Ira built his model using cross sections that were cut parallel to the base. What shape was each cross section?
Type below:
____________

Answer: The cross sections parallel to the base have the shape of a square.

Final Words:

Hope the solutions provided in Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures is helpful for all the students. Get the answers for all the questions with the simple techniques for all chapters on Go Math Answer 7th grade Key Chapter 8 Modeling Geometric Figures. Stick to our Go Math Answer Key Page to get the latest information about the chapters.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers

go-math-grade-4-chapter-2-multiply-by-1-digit-numbers-pages-21-47-answer-key

Hello Kids! Here is Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers in pdf. Without wasting any time just refer to the Ch 2 Answer Key of Go Math Grade 4 and gain proper knowledge about the concept. Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key provided here will increase your Mathematical skills and support parents to understand the concept and educate their children effectively. So, get into these online chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers Go Math 4th Grade Solutions Key & get a good grip on the concepts.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers

There are various lessons & concepts included in the Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers such as Multiplication Comparisons, Multiply Tens, Hundreds, and Thousands, Estimate Products, Multiply Using the Distributive Property, and so on. So, move ahead and click on the respective topic to grasp the concept and then solve the sums easily. All these solutions will make you understand the concepts clearly and make you strong on basic fundamentals on your own.

Lesson: 1 – Multiplication Comparisons

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 23
Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 24

Lesson: 2 – Comparison Problems

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 25
Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 26

Lesson: 3 – Multiply Tens, Hundreds, and Thousands

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 27
Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 28

Lesson: 4 – Estimate Products

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 29
Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 30

Lesson: 5 – Multiply Using the Distributive Property

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 31
Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 32

Lesson: 6 – Multiply Using Expanded Form

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 33
Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 34

Lesson: 7 – Multiply Using Partial Products

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 35
Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 36

Lesson: 8 – Multiply Using Mental Math

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 37
Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 38

Lesson: 9 – Problem Solving Multistep Multiplication Problems

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 39
Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 40

Lesson: 10 – Multiply 2-Digit Numbers with Regrouping

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 41
Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 42

Lesson: 11 – Multiply 3-Digit and 4-Digit Numbers with Regrouping

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 43
Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 44

Lesson: 12 – Solve Multistep Problems Using Equations

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 45
Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 46

Lesson: 13 

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 47
Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 48

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 23

Multiplication Comparisons

Write a comparison sentence.

Question 1.
6 × 3 = 18
6 times as many as 3 is 18.

Question 2.
63 = 7 × 9
_____ is _____ times as many as _____.

Answer: 63 is 7 times as many as 9.

Explanation:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers

Question 3.
5 × 4 = 20
_____ times as many as _____ is _____.

Answer: 5 times as many as 4 is 20.

Explanation:

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers

Question 4.
48 = 8 × 6
_____ is _____ times as many as _____.

Answer: 48 is 6 times as many as 8.

Explanation:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers

Write an equation.

Question 5.
2 times as many as 8 is 16.
_____ × _____ = _____

Answer: 2 × 8 = 16

Explanation:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers

Question 6.
42 is 6 times as many as 7.
_____ = _____ × _____

Answer: 42 = 6 × 7

Explanation:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers

Question 7.
3 times as many as 5 is 15.
_____ × _____ = _____

Answer: 3 × 5 = 15

Explanation:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers

Question 8.
36 is 9 times as many as 4.
_____ = _____ × _____

Answer: 36 = 9 × 4

Explanation:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers

Question 9.
72 is 8 times as many as 9.
_____ = _____ × _____

Answer: 72 = 8 × 9

Explanation:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers

Question 10.
5 times as many as 6 is 30.
_____ × _____ = _____

Answer: 5 × 6 = 30

Explanation:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers

Problem Solving

Question 11.
Alan is 14 years old. This is twice as old as his brother James is. How old is James?
_____ years old

Answer: 7 years old.

Explanation:
Alan’s age is 14 years old and his brother is James is twice younger than Alan, So James’s age is 14÷2= 7.

Question 12.
There are 27 campers. This is nine times as many as the number of counselors. How many counselors are there?
_____ counselors

Answer: 3 counselors.

Explanation: 27 campers= 9× no.of counselors,
So no.of counselors are 27÷9= 3.

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 24

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Which equation best represents the comparison sentence?
24 is 4 times as many as 6.
Options:
a. 24 × 4 = 6
b. 24 = 4 × 6
c. 24 = 4 + 6
d. 4 + 6 = 24

Answer: 24 = 4 × 6

Explanation:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers
The correct answer is option b.

Question 2.
Which comparison sentence best represents the equation?
5 × 9 = 45
Options:
a. 5 more than 9 is 45.
b. 9 is 5 times as many as 45.
c. 5 is 9 times as many as 45.
d. 45 is 5 times as many as 9.

Answer: 45 is 5 times as many as 9.

Explanation:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers
The correct answer is option d.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Which of the following statements correctly compares the numbers?
Options:
a. 273,915 > 274,951
b. 134,605 < 143,605
c. 529,058 > 530,037
d. 452,731 > 452,819

Answer: 134,605 < 143,605

Explanation:
134,605 is lesser compared to 143,605.
The correct answer is option b.

Question 4.
What is the standard form for
200,000 + 80,000 + 700 + 6?
Options:
a. 2,876
b. 28,706
c. 208,706
d. 280,706

Answer: 280,706

Explanation:
200,000+80,000+700+6= 280,706.
The correct answer is option d.

Question 5.
Sean and Leah are playing a computer game. Sean scored 72,491 points. Leah scored 19,326 points more than Sean. How many points did Leah score?
Options:
a. 53,615
b. 91,717
c. 91,815
d. 91,817

Answer: 91,817

Explanation:
Sean’s score is 72,491 and Leah’s score is 19,326 more than Sean’s score. So Sean score is 72,491+19,326 = 91,817.
The correct answer is option d.

Question 6.
A baseball stadium has 38,496 seats. Rounded to the nearest thousand, how many seats is this?
Options:
a. 38,000
b. 38,500
c. 39,000
d. 40,000

Answer: 38,000

Explanation:
Round off to the nearest thousand is 38,000.
The correct answer is option a.

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 25

Comparison Problems

Draw a model. Write an equation and solve.

Question 1.
Stacey made a necklace using 4 times as many blue beads as red beads. She used a total of 40 beads. How many blue beads did Stacey use?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core - Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers img 1

Question 2.
At the zoo, there were 3 times as many monkeys as lions. Tom counted a total of 24 monkeys and lions. How many monkeys were there?
______ monkeys

Answer: 18 monkeys

Explanation:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers
Therefore there are 18 monkeys.

Question 3.
Fred’s frog jumped 7 times as far as Al’s frog. The two frogs jumped a total of 56 inches. How far did Fred’s frog jump?
______ inches

Answer: 49 inches

Explanation:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers
Therefore Fred’s frog jumps 49 inches.

Question 4.
Sheila has 5 times as many markers as Dave. Together, they have 18 markers. How many markers does Sheila have?
______ markers

Answer: 15 markers

Explanation:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers
Therefore Sheila has 15 markers.

Problem Solving

Question 5.
Rafael counted a total of 40 white cars and yellow cars. There were 9 times as many white cars as yellow cars. How many white cars did Rafael count?
______ white cars

Answer: 36 white cars

Explanation:
Let yellow cars be X, As white cars are 9 times as many as yellow cars, So white cars be 9X. Therefore 9X+X=40, X=4. So no.of white cars are 9×4= 36.
Therefore Rafael count 36 white cars.

Question 6.
Sue scored a total of 35 points in two games. She scored 6 times as many points in the second game as in the first. How many more points did she score in the second game?
______ more points

Answer: 30 more points

Explanation:
Let the first game points are X and second game points be 6X. Sue’s total score is 35 points in two games so 6X+X= 35 then X is 5.
Therefore the second game score is 6 × 5= 30.

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 26

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Sari has 3 times as many pencil erasers as Sam. Together, they have 28 erasers. How many erasers does Sari have?
Options:
a. 7
b. 14
c. 18
d. 21

Answer: 21

Explanation:
Let the X be pencil erasers of Sam and Sari erasers be 3X. As Sari and Sam together have 28 erasers.
So 3X+X= 28. And X is 7. Then Sari has 3×7= 21.
The correct answer is option d.

Question 2.
In Sean’s fish tank, there are 6 times as many goldfish as guppies. There are a total of 21 fish in the tank. How many more goldfish are there than guppies?
Options:
a. 5
b. 12
c. 15
d. 18

Answer: 18

Explanation:

Let Guppies be X and Goldfishes be 6X.
And the total fishes are 21, So X+6X= 21 then X= 3.
So Goldfishes are 6×3= 18.
The correct answer is option d.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Barbara has 9 stuffed animals. Trish has 3 times as many stuffed animals as Barbara. How many stuffed animals does Trish have?
Options:
a. 3
b. 12
c. 24
d. 27

Answer: 27

Explanation:
Barbara has 9 stuffed animals and Trish has 3 times as Barbara, So 9×3= 27.
The correct answer is option d.

Question 4.
There are 104 students in the fourth grade at Allison’s school. One day, 15 fourth-graders were absent. How many fourth-graders were at school that day?
Options:
a. 89
b. 91
c. 99
d. 119

Answer: 89

Explanation:
Total students in fourth grade are 104, as 15 students were absent 104-15= 89.
The correct answer is option a.

Question 5.
Joshua has 112 rocks. Jose has 98 rocks. Albert has 107 rocks. What is the correct order of the boys from the least to the greatest number of rocks owned?
Options:
a. Jose, Albert, Joshua
b. Jose, Joshua, Albert
c. Albert, Jose, Joshua
d. Joshua, Albert, Jose

Answer: Jose, Albert, Joshua

Explanation:

Given,
Joshua has 112 rocks. Jose has 98 rocks. Albert has 107 rocks.
As 98<107<112. So Jose, Albert, Joshua.
The correct answer is option a.

Question 6.
Alicia has 32 stickers. This is 4 times as many stickers as Benita has. How many stickers does Benita have?
Options:
a. 6
b. 8
c. 9
d. 28

Answer: 8

Explanation:
Given,
Alicia has 32 stickers. This is 4 times as many stickers as Benita has.
Let Benita stickers be S and Alicia has 32 stickers, So 4×S= 32. Therefore Benita stickers are 8.

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 27

Multiply Tens, Hundreds, and Thousands

Find the product.

Question 1.
4 × 7,000 = 28,000
Think: 4 × 7 = 28
So, 4 × 7,000 = 28,000

Question 2.
9 × 60 = ______

Answer: 540

Explanation: 9×6= 54.

Question 3.
8 × 200 = ______

Answer: 1600

Explanation: 8×2=16

Question 4.
5 × 6,000 = ______

Answer: 30,000

Explanation: 5×6=30.

Question 5.
7 × 800 = ______

Answer: 5600

Explanation: 7×8= 56.

Question 6.
8 × 90 = ______

Answer: 720

Explanation: 8×9=72.

Question 7.
6 × 3,000 = ______

Answer: 18,000

Explanation: 6×3= 18.

Question 8.
3 × 8,000 = ______

Answer: 24,000

Explanation: 3×8= 24.

Question 9.
5 × 500 = ______

Answer: 2500

Explanation: 5×5= 25.

Question 10.
9 × 4,000 = ______

Answer: 36,000

Explanation: 9×4= 36.

Question 11.
7 × 7,000 = ______

Answer: 49,000

Explanation: 7×7= 49.

Question 12.
3 × 40 = ______

Answer: 120

Explanation: 3×4= 12.

Question 13.
4 × 5,000 = ______

Answer: 20,000

Explanation: 4×5= 20.

Question 14.
2 × 9,000 = ______

Answer: 18,000

Explanation: 2×9= 18.

Problem Solving

Question 15.
A bank teller has 7 rolls of coins. Each roll has 40 coins. How many coins does the bank teller have?
______ coins

Answer: 280 coins

Explanation:
The bank teller has 7 rolls of coins.
As each roll has 40 coins, So total coins are 7×40= 280
Thus the bank teller has 280 coins.

Question 16.
Theo buys 5 packages of paper. There are 500 sheets of paper in each package. How many sheets of paper does Theo buy?
______ sheets.

Answer: 2,500

Explanation:
Total no.of sheets of papers in each package are 500, And Theo buys 5 packages of papers.
So total sheets of paper Theo bought are 500×5= 2,500.

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 28

Lesson Check

Question 1.
A plane is traveling at a speed of 400 miles per hour. How far will the plane travel in 5 hours?
Options:
a. 200 miles
b. 2,000 miles
c. 20,000 miles
d. 200,000 miles

Answer: 2,000 miles

Explanation:
The speed of the plane is 400 miles per hour.
In 5 hours plane can travel 400×5= 2,000 miles.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 2.
One week, a clothing factory made 2,000 shirts in each of 6 different colors. How many shirts did the factory make in all?
Options:
a. 2,000
b. 12,000
c. 120,000
d. 200,000

Answer: 12,000

Explanation:
The shirts made in one week are 2000 in 6 different colors.
So total shirts made in all are 2000×6= 12,000.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Which comparison sentence best represents the equation?
6 × 7 = 42
Options:
a. 7 is 6 times as many as 42.
b. 6 is 7 times as many as 42.
c. 42 is 6 times as many as 7.
d. more than 7 is 42.

Answer: 42 is 6 times as many as 7.

Explanation:
By comparing 42= 6×7 represents the equation.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 4.
The population of Middleton is six thousand, fifty-four people. Which of the following shows this number written in standard form?
Options:
a. 654
b. 6,054
c. 6,504
d. 6,540

Answer: 6,054

Explanation:
The standard form is Six thousand fifty-four is equal to 6,054.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 5.
In an election for mayor, 85,034 people voted for Carl Green and 67,952 people voted for Maria Lewis. By how many votes did Carl Green win the election?
Options:
a. 17,082
b. 17,182
c. 22,922
d. 152,986

Answer: 17,082

Explanation:
Total votes Carl Green has got are 85,034and Maria Lewis got are 67,952. By 85,034-67,952= 17,082 votes Carl Green won the election.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 6.
Meredith picked 4 times as many green peppers as red peppers. If she picked a total of 20 peppers, how many green peppers did she pick?
Options:
a. 4
b. 5
c. 16
d. 24

Answer: 16

Explanation:
Meredith picked 4 times as many green peppers as red peppers.
Let the red peppers be X and green peppers be 4X, And the total she picked is 20 peppers. So X+4X=20
Then X=4. Green peppers she picked are 4×4= 16.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 29

Estimate Products

Estimate the product by rounding.

Question 1.
4 × 472
4 × 472

4 × 500 = 2,000

Question 2.
2 × 6,254
Estimate: _______

Answer: 12,000

Explanation:
The nearest rounding off for 6,254 is 6,000.
So 2×6,000= 12,000.

Question 3.
9 × 54
Estimate: _______

Answer: 450

Explanation:
The nearest rounding off for 54 is 50. So 9×50= 450.

Question 4.
5 × 5,503
Estimate: _______

Answer: 30,000

Explanation:
The nearest rounding off for 5,503 is 6,000.
So 5×6,000= 30,000.

Question 5.
3 × 832
Estimate: _______

Answer: 2,400

Explanation:
The nearest rounding off for 832 is 800.
So 3×800= 2,400.

Question 6.
6 × 98
Estimate: _______

Answer: 600

Explanation:
The nearest rounding off for 98 is 100. So 6×100= 600.

Question 7.
8 × 3,250
Estimate: _______

Answer: 24,000

Explanation:
The nearest rounding off for 3,250 is 3,000.
So 8×3,000= 24,000.

Question 8.
7 × 777
Estimate: _______

Answer: 5,600

Explanation:
The nearest rounding off for 777 is 800.
So 7×800= 5,600.

Find two numbers the exact answer is between.

Question 9.
3 × 567
_____ and _____

Answer: 1500 and 1800

Explanation:
The rounding off for 567 is 500 and 600.
So 3×500= 1500 and 3×600= 1800.

Question 10.
6 × 7,381
_____ and _____

Answer: 42,000 and 48,000

Explanation:
The rounding off for 7,381 is 7,000 and 8,000.
So 6×7000= 42,000 and 6×8000= 48,000.

Question 11.
4 × 94
_____ and _____

Answer: 360 and 400

Explanation:
The rounding off for 94 is 90 and 100.
So 4×90= 360 and 4×100= 400.

Question 12.
8 × 684
_____ and _____

Answer: 3600 and 4200

Explanation:
The rounding off for 684 is 600 and 700.
So 6×600= 3600 and 6×700= 4200.

Problem Solving

Question 13.
Isaac drinks 8 glasses of water each day. He says he will drink 2,920 glasses of water in a year that has 365 days. Is the exact answer reasonable? Explain.
_____

Answer: Yes

Explanation:
As the round-off for 365 can be 300 or 400.
So 8×300= 2,400 and 8×400= 3,200.
The estimated answer can be between 2,400 to 3,200.
So the answer is Yes.

Question 14.
Most Americans throw away about 1,365 pounds of trash each year. Is it reasonable to estimate that Americans throw away over 10,000 pounds of trash in 5 years? Explain.
_____

Answer: No

Explanation:
As the round-off for 1,365 can be 1000 or 2000.
So 5×1000= 5,000 and 5×2000= 10,000.
The estimated answer can be between 5,000 to 10,000.

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 30

Lesson Check

Question 1.
A theater has 4,650 seats. If the theater sells all the tickets for each of its 5 shows, about how many tickets will the theater sell in all?
Options:
a. 2,500
b. 10,000
c. 25,000
d. 30,000

Answer: 25,000

Explanation:
A theater has 4,650 seats.
As the nearest round off for 4,650 is 5,000.
So 5,000×5= 25,000.
The correct answer is option c.

Question 2.
Washington Elementary has 4,358 students. Jefferson High School has 3 times as many students as Washington Elementary. About how many students does Jefferson High School have?
Options:
a. 16,000
b. 12,000
c. 10,000
d. 1,200

Answer: 12,000

Explanation:
Given,
Washington Elementary has 4,358 students.
Jefferson High School has 3 times as many students as Washington Elementary.
As the nearest round off for 4,358 is 4,000.
So 4,000×3= 12,000.
The correct answer is option b.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Diego has 4 times as many autographed baseballs as Melanie has. Diego has 24 autographed baseballs. How many autographed baseballs does Melanie have?
Options:
a. 28
b. 20
c. 8
d. 6

Answer: 6

Explanation:
Let the Melanie baseballs be S.
As Diego has 4 times as many as Melanie and Diego has a total of 24 baseballs.
So 4×S= 24, Then S= 24÷4 which is 6.
The correct answer is option d.

Question 4.
Mr. Turkowski bought 4 boxes of envelopes at the office supply store. Each box has 500 envelopes. How many envelopes did Mr. Turkowski buy?
Options:
a. 200
b. 504
c. 2,000
d. 20,000

Answer: 2,000

Explanation:
Turkowski has 4 boxes of envelopes and each box contains 500 envelopes.
So total envelopes did Turkowski bought are 4×500= 2,000.
The correct answer is option c.

Question 5.
Pennsylvania has a land area of 44,816 square miles. Which of the following shows the land area of Pennsylvania rounded to the nearest hundred?
Options:
a. 44,000 square miles
b. 44,800 square miles
c. 44,900 square miles
d. 45,000 square miles

Answer: 44,800 square miles

Explanation:
As the nearest round off for 44,816 is 44,800.
The correct answer is option b.

Question 6.
The table shows the types of DVDs customers rented from Sunshine Movie Rentals last year.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core - Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers img 2
Options:
How many comedy and action movies were rented in all last year?
a. 13,620
b. 13,000
c. 12,260
d. 10,752

Answer: 12,260

Explanation:
Comedy and action movies that are rented in last year are 6,720+5,540= 12,260.
The correct answer is option c.

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 31

Multiply Using the Distributive Property

Model the product on the grid. Record the product.

Question 1.
4 × 19 = 76
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core - Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers img 3
4 × 10 = 40 and 4 × 9 = 36
40 + 36 = 76

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core - Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers img 4
5 × 13 = _____

Answer: 65

Explanation:
5×10= 50 and 5×3= 15
50+15= 65.

Find the product.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core - Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers img 5
4 × 14 = _____

Answer: 56

Explanation:
4×10= 40 and 4×4= 16
40+16= 56.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core - Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers img 6
3 × 17 = _____

Answer: 51

Explanation:
3×10=30 and 3×7= 21
30+21= 51

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core - Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers img 7
6 × 15 = _____

Answer: 90

Explanation:
6×10= 60 and 6×5= 30
60+30= 90

Problem Solving

Question 6.
Michael arranged his pennies in the following display.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core - Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers img 8
How many pennies does Michael have in all?
_____ pennies

Answer: 91

Explanation: As there are 7 columns and 13 rows, So 13×7= 91.

Question 7.
A farmer has an apple orchard with the trees arranged as shown below.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core - Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers img 9
If the farmer wants to pick one apple from each tree, how many apples will he pick?
_____ apples

Answer: 70 apples

Explanation:
As there are 5 columns and 14 rows, So 5×14= 70.

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 32

Lesson Check

Question 1.
The model shows how Maya planted flowers in her garden.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core - Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers img 10
How many flowers did Maya plant?
Options:
a. 15
b. 18
c. 30
d. 45

Answer: 45

Explanation:
As 3×10= 30 and 3×5= 15
30+15= 45.
The correct answer is option d.

Question 2.
The model below represents the expression 5 × 18.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core - Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers img 11
How many tens will there be in the final product?
Options:
a. 5
b. 6
c. 8
d. 9

Answer: 9

Explanation:
As 5×18 is 90 and 90÷10= 9.
So the answer is 9.
The correct answer is option d.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Center City has a population of twenty one thousand, seventy people. Which of the following shows the population written in standard form?
Options:
a. 21,007
b. 21,070
c. 21,077
d. 21,700

Answer: 21,070

Explanation:
Center City has a population of twenty one thousand, seventy people.
Twenty-one thousand seventy is equal to 21,070.
The correct answer is option b.

Question 4.
Central School collected 12,516 pounds of newspaper to recycle. Eastland School collected 12,615 pounds of newspapers. How many more pounds of newspaper
did Eastland School collect than Central School?
Options:
a. 99 pounds
b. 101 pounds
c. 199 pounds
d. 1,099 pounds

Answer: 99 pounds

Explanation:
Central school has collected 12,516 pounds and Eastland school collected 12,615 pounds. So 12,615-12,516= 99.
The correct answer is option a.

Question 5.
Allison has 5 times as many baseball cards as football cards. In all, she has 120 baseball and football cards. How many baseball cards does Allison have?
Options:
a. 20
b. 24
c. 96
d. 100

Answer: 100

Explanation:
Let Football cards be X and baseball cards be 5X. So 5X+X= 120 in which X= 20.
As Allison has 5 times as many baseball cards as football cards.
So 5×20= 100.
The correct answer is option d.

Question 6.
A ruby-throated hummingbird beats its wings about 53 times each second. About how many times does a ruby-throated hummingbird beat its wings in 5 seconds?
Options:
a. 25
b. 58
c. 250
d. 300

Answer: 250

Explanation:
As the nearest round-off for 53 is 50, So 50×5= 250.
The correct answer is option c.

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 33

Multiply Using Expanded Form

Record the product. Use expanded form to help.

Question 1.
7 × 14 = 98
7 × 14 = 7 × (10 + 4)
= (7 × 10) + (7 × 4)
= 70 + 28
= 98

Question 2.
8 × 43 = ______

Answer: 344

Explanation:
8×(40+3)
= (8×40)+(8×3)
= 320+24
= 344.

Question 3.
6 × 532 = ______

Answer: 3192

Explanation:
6×(500+30+2)
= (6×500)+(6×30)+(6×2)
= 3000+180+12
= 3,192.

Question 4.
5 × 923 = ______

Answer: 4,615

Explanation:
5×923= 5×(900+20+3)
=(5×900)+(5×20)+(5×3)
=4500+100+15
=4,615.

Question 5.
4 × 2,371 = ______

Answer: 9,484

Explanation:
4×2,371= 4×(2000+300+70+1)
= (4×2,000)+(4×300)+(4×70)+(4×1)
=8000+1200+280+4
=9,484

Question 6.
7 × 1,829 = ______

Answer: 12,803

Explanation:
7×1,829= 7×(1,000+800+20+9)
=(7×1,000)+( 7×800)+( 7×20)+( 7×9)
=7,000+5600+140+63
=12,803

Problem Solving

Question 7.
The fourth-grade students at Riverside School are going on a field trip. There are 68 students on each of the 4 buses. How many students are going on the field trip?
______ students

Answer: 272 students

Explanation:
No. of buses are 4 and on each bus, there are 68 students.
So 68 × 4= 272.
Therefore 272 students are going on the field trip.

Question 8.
There are 5,280 feet in one mile. Hannah likes to walk 5 miles each week for exercise. How many feet does Hannah walk each week?
______ feet

Answer: 26,400 feet

Explanation:
There are 5,280 feet in one mile and Hannah walks 5 miles each week.
So 5,280 5= 26,400.
Hannah walk 26,400 feet each week.

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 34

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Which expression shows how to multiply 7 × 256 by using expanded form and the Distributive Property?
Options:
a. (7 × 2) + (7 × 5) + (7 × 6)
b. (7 × 200) + (7 × 500) + (7 × 600)
c. (7 × 2) + (7 × 50) + (7 × 600)
d. (7 × 200) + (7 × 50) + (7 × 6)

Answer: (7 × 200) + (7 × 50) + (7 × 6)

Explanation:
By Distributive property of multiplication 7×256=(7×200)+(7×50)+(7×6)
The correct answer is option d.

Question 2.
Sue uses the expression (8 × 3,000) + (8 × 200) + (8 × 9) to help solve a multiplication problem. Which is Sue’s multiplication problem?
Options:
a. 8 × 329
b. 8 × 3,029
c. 8 × 3,209
d. 8 × 3,290

Answer: 8 × 3,029

Explanation:
The expression (8×3,000)+(8×200)+(8×9) is written in the Distributive property of multiplication. So 8×3,029.
The correct answer is option b.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
What is another way to write 9 x 200?
Options:
a. 18 ones
b. 18 tens
c. 18 hundreds
d. 18 thousands

Answer: 18 hundreds

Explanation: 9×200= 1800
The correct answer is option c.

Question 4.
What is the value of the digit 4 in 46,000?
Options:
a. 4 ten thousands
b. 4 thousands
c. 4 hundreds
d. 4 tens

Answer: 4 ten thousand

Explanation:
The place value of 4 in 46,000 is 40,000.
The correct answer is option a.

Question 5.
Chris bought 6 packages of napkins for his restaurant. There were 200 napkins in each package. How many napkins did Chris buy?
Options:
a. 120
b. 1,200
c. 12,000
d. 120,000

Answer: 1,200

Explanation:
Total packages are 6 and each package contains 200 napkins.
So 6 × 200=1,200.
The correct answer is option b.

Question 6.
Which of the following lists the numbers in order from least to greatest?
Options:
a. 8,512; 8,251; 8,125
b. 8,251; 8,125; 8,512
c. 8,125; 8,512; 8,251
d. 8,125; 8,251; 8,512

Answer: 8,125; 8,251; 8,512

Explanation:
8,125>8,251>8,512.
The correct answer is option d.

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 35

Multiply Using Partial Products

Estimate. Then record the product.

Question 1.
Estimate: 1,200
2 4 3
×    6
———
1,200
2 4 0
+ 1 8
———
1,458

Question 2.
6 4 0
×    3
———
Estimate: ________
Product: _______

Answer:

Question 3.
$ 1 4 9
×       5
———
Estimate: $ ________
Product: $ _______

Answer:

Question 4.
7 2 1
×   8
———
Estimate: ________
Product: _______

Answer:

Question 5.
2 9 3
×    4
———
Estimate: ________
Product: _______

Answer:

Question 6.
$ 4 1 6
×       6
———
Estimate: $ ________
Product: $ _______

Answer:

Question 7.
9 6 1
×    2
———
Estimate: ________
Product: _______

Answer:

Question 8.
8 3 7
×    9
———
Estimate: ________
Product: _______

Answer:

Question 9.
6 5 2
×    4
———
Estimate: ________
Product: _______

Answer:

Question 10.
3 0 7
×    3
———
Estimate: ________
Product: _______

Answer:

Question 11.
5 4 3
×     7
———
Estimate: ________
Product: _______

Answer:

Question 12.
$ 8 2 2
×       5
———
Estimate: $ ________
Product: $ _______

Answer:

Problem Solving

Question 13.
A maze at a county fair is made from 275 bales of hay. The maze at the state fair is made from 4 times as many bales of hay. How many bales of hay are used for the maze at the state fair?
______ bales

Answer: 1100 bales

Explanation:
No. of country fair bales are 275 and state fair bales are 4 times as many as country fair bales.
So 275 × 4= 1100 bales.

Question 14.
Pedro gets 8 hours of sleep each night. How many hours does Pedro sleep in a year with 365 days?
______ hours

Answer: 2,920 hours

Explanation:
Given,
Pedro sleeps 8 hours each night and 365 days Pedro sleeps 365 × 8= 2,920 hours.

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 36

Lesson Check

Question 1.
A passenger jet flies at an average speed of 548 miles per hour. At that speed, how many miles does the plane travel in 4 hours?
Options:
a. 2,092 miles
b. 2,112 miles
c. 2,192 miles
d. 2,480 miles

Answer: 2,192 miles

Explanation:
The average speed of a passenger jet is 548 miles per hour.
And the plane travels in 4 hours is 548 × 4= 2,192 miles.
The correct answer is option c.

Question 2.
Use the model to find 3 × 157.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core - Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers img 12
Options:
a. 300,171
b. 300,157
c. 471
d. 451

Answer: 471

Explanation:
By distributive property of multiplication 3 x 157= 3 x(100+50+7)
= (3 x100)+(3×50)+(3×7)
= 300+150+21
= 471
The correct answer is option c.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
The school fun fair made $1,768 on games and $978 on food sales. How much money did the fun fair make on games and food sales?
Options
a. $2,636
b. $2,646
c. $2,736
d. $2,746

Answer: $2746

Explanation:
Money made on games is $1,768 and on food, sale is $978.
So total money make on games and food sales are 1768+978= 2746.
The correct answer is option d.

Question 4.
Use the table below.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core - Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers img 13
Which of the following lists the states from least to greatest population?
Options:
a. Alaska, North Dakota, Vermont
b. Vermont, Alaska, North Dakota
c. North Dakota, Vermont, Alaska
d. Vermont, North Dakota, Alaska

Answer: Vermont, North Dakota, Alaska

Explanation:
Vermont has 621,760, North Dakota has 646,844 and Alaska has 698,473.
So Vermont, North Dakota, Alaska.
The correct answer is option d.

Question 5.
A National Park covers 218,375 acres. What is this number written in expanded form?
Options:
a. 200,000 + 10,000 + 8,000 + 300 + 70 + 5
b. 20,000 + 1,000 + 800 + 30 + 75
c. 218 + 375
d. 218 thousand, 375

Answer: 200,000 + 10,000 + 8,000 + 300 + 70 + 5

Explanation:
218,375 is expanded as 200,000 + 10,000 + 8,000 + 300 + 70 + 5
The correct answer is option a.

Question 6.
Last year a business had profits of $8,000. This year its profits are 5 times as great. What are this year’s profits?
Options:
a. $4,000
b. $40,000
c. $44,000
d. $400,000

Answer: $40,000

Explanation:
Last year’s profit of $8,000 and this year 5 times more.
So this year profit is 8000 × 5= 40,000.
The correct answer is option b.

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 37

Multiply Using Mental Math

Find the product. Tell which strategy you used.

Question 1.
6 × 297
Think: 297 = 300 – 3
6 × 297 = 6 × (300 – 3)
= (6 × 300) – (6 × 3)
= 1,800 – 18
= 1,782;
use subtraction

Question 2.
8 × 25 × 23 = _____

Answer: 4,600, Associative property.

Explanation:
8×25×23=(8×25)× 23
=(200) ×23
4,600

Question 3.
8 × 604 = _____

Answer: 4,832, Use Addition.

Explanation:
604= 600+4
8×604= 8×(600+4)
=(8×600)+(8×4)
=4800+32
=4832.

Question 4.
50 × 28 = _____

Answer: 1400, Halving and doubling.

Explanation:
50×28= (25×28)+(50×14)
=700+700
=1400

Question 5.
9 × 199 = _____

Answer: 1,791

Explanation:
By Distributive property 9 × 199= 9 ×(100+90+9)
=(9×100)+(9×90)+(9×9)
=900+810+81
= 1791

Question 6.
20 × 72 × 5 = _____

Answer: 7,200.

Explanation:
The associative property states that the terms in an addition or multiplication problem can be grouped in different ways, and the answer remains the same.
20 × 72 × 5= (20×72) ×5
=1440×5
=7,200.

Question 7.
32 × 25 = _____

Answer: 800

Explanation:
Multiplication.
32×25= 800.

Problem Solving

Question 8.
Section J in an arena has 20 rows. Each row has 15 seats. All tickets cost $18 each. If all the seats are sold, how much money will the arena collect for Section J?
$ _____

Answer: $5400

Explanation:
Total rows in the arena are 20 rows and each row has 15 seats.
So total seats are 20×15= 300 seats.
And each ticket cost is $18, So the total ticket price is 300×15= 5400.

Question 9.
At a high-school gym, the bleachers are divided into 6 equal sections. Each section can seat 395 people. How many people can be seated in the gym?
_____ people

Answer: 2,370 people.

Explanation:
Total sections are 6 and each section contains 395 people.
So the total members can be seated in the gym are 395 × 6= 2,370 people.

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 38

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Pencils come in cartons of 24 boxes. A school bought 50 cartons of pencils for the start of school. Each box of pencils cost $2. How much did the school spend
on pencils?
Options:
a. $240
b. $1,200
c. $2,400
d. $4,800

Answer: $2,400

Explanation:
Given,
Total boxes of pencils are 24 and a school bought 50 cartons of pencils.
So the total no. of boxes are 24×50=1200 and each box of pencils cost $2.
So 1200×2= 2400 school has spent.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 2.
The school also bought 195 packages of markers. There are 6 markers in a package. How many markers did the school buy?
Options:
a. 1,170
b. 1,195
c. 1,200
d. 1,230

Answer: 1,170

Explanation:
The school also bought 195 packages of markers. There are 6 markers in a package.
Multiply the number of packages with the number of markers in the package.
So total markers are 195×6= 1170.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Alex has 175 baseball cards. Rodney has 3 times as many baseball cards as Alex. How many fewer cards does Alex have than Rodney?
Options:
a. 700
b. 525
c. 450
d. 350

Answer: 350

Explanation:
Alex has 175 baseball cards and Rodney has 3 times as many as Alex.
So the total no. of cards Rodney has is 175×3= 525. And Alex has 525-175= 350 fewer cards than Rodney.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 4.
A theater seats 1,860 people. The last 6 shows have been sold out. Which is the best estimate of the total number of people attending the last 6 shows?
Options:
a. fewer than 6,000
b. about 6,000
c. fewer than 12,000
d. more than 20,000

Answer: fewer than 12,000

Explanation:
Given,
A theater seats 1,860 people.
The last 6 shows have been sold out.
No. of seats in a theater are 1,860 people and the last 6 shows have been sold out.
So 1,860×6= 11,160 which are fewer than 12,000.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 5.
At one basketball game, there were 1,207 people watching. At the next game, there were 958 people. How many people in all were at the two games?
Options:
a. 2,155
b. 2,165
c. 2,265
d. 10,787

Answer: 2,165

Explanation:
There are 1207 people are watching a basketball game and in the next game, 958 people are there.
So the total no. of people is 1,207+958= 2165.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 6.
Bill bought 4 jigsaw puzzles. Each puzzle has 500 pieces. How many pieces are in all the puzzles altogether?
Options:
a. 200
b. 900
c. 2,000
d. 20,000

Answer: 2,000

Explanation:
Given,
Bill bought 4 jigsaw puzzle and each puzzle has 500 pieces.
So altogether pieces are 500×4= 2000.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 39

Problem Solving Multistep Multiplication Problems

Solve each problem.

Question 1.
A community park has 6 tables with a chessboard painted on top. Each board has 8 rows of 8 squares. When a game is set up, 4 rows of 8 squares on each board are covered with chess pieces. If a game is set up on each table, how many total squares are NOT covered by chess pieces?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core - Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers img 14
4 × 8 = 32
32 × 6 = 192 squares

Question 2.
Jonah and his friends go apple picking. Jonah fills 5 baskets. Each basket holds 15 apples. If 4 of Jonah’s friends pick the same amount as Jonah, how many apples do Jonah and his friends pick in all? Draw a diagram to solve the problem.
_____ apples

Answer: 375 apples

Explanation:
As Jonah fills 5 baskets which hold 15 apples, So Jonah picked 15×5= 75 apples.
And 4 of his friends pick the same amount of apples, which means 75×4=300.
So total apples Jonah and his friends picked up are 300+75= 375 apples.

Question 3.
There are 6 rows of 16 chairs set up for the third-grade play. In the first 4 rows, 2 chairs on each end are reserved for teachers. The rest of the chairs are for students. How many chairs are there for students?
_____ chairs

Answer: 80 chairs

Explanation:
As there are 6 rows of 16 chairs which means 16×6= 96 total chairs.
And the first 4 rows 2 chairs on each end are reserved for teachers, which means 4×4= 16 chairs are reserved for teachers.
So 96-16= 80 chairs are left for the students.
Therefore there are 80 chairs for students.

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 40

Lesson Check

Question 1.
At a tree farm, there are 9 rows of 36 spruce trees. In each row, 14 of the spruce trees are blue spruce. How many spruce trees are NOT blue spruce?
Options:
a. 126
b. 198
c. 310
d. 324

Answer: 198

Explanation:
There are 9 rows of 36 spruce trees which means 9×36= 324 spruce trees.
And in that, each row has 14 blue spruce trees which mean 14×9= 126.
So 324-126= 198 spruce trees are not blue.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 2.
Ron is tiling a countertop. He needs to place 54 square tiles in each of 8 rows to cover the counter. He wants to randomly place 8 groups of 4 blue tiles each and have the rest of the tiles be white. How many white tiles will Ron need?
Options:
a. 464
b. 432
c. 400
d. 32

Answer: 400

Explanation:
Ron places 54 square tiles in each of 8 rows which means 54×8=432 tiles.
And he randomly places 8 groups of 4 blue tiles which means 8×4= 32 blue tiles are placed.
So no. of white tiles are 432 – 32= 400.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 3.
Juan reads a book with 368 pages. Savannah reads a book with 172 fewer pages than Juan’s book. How many pages are in the book Savannah reads?
Options:
a. 196
b. 216
c. 296
d. 540

Answer: 196

Explanation:
Given,
Juan reads a book with 368 pages and Savannah reads a book with 172 fewer pages than Juan’s which means 368-172= 196 pages are in Savannah’s read.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 4.
Hailey has bottles that hold 678 pennies each. About how many pennies does she have if she has 6 bottles filled with pennies?
Options:
a. 3,600
b. 3,900
c. 4,200
d. 6,000

Answer: 4,200

Explanation:
Given,
Hailey has bottles that hold 678 pennies each.
Let’s round off 678 to 700 and Hailey has bottles that hold 700 pennies each and if she has 6 bottles filled with pennies which means 700×6= 4200.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 5.
Terrence plants a garden that has 8 rows of flowers, with 28 flowers in each row. How many flowers did Terrence plant?
Options:
a. 1,664
b. 224
c. 164
d. 36

Answer: 224

Explanation:
As the garden has 8 rows of flowers with 28 flowers in each row.
So no. of flowers is 28×8= 224.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 6.
Kevin has 5 fish in his fish tank. Jasmine has 4 times as many fish as Kevin has. How many fish does Jasmine have?
Options:
a. 15
b. 20
c. 25
d. 30

Answer: 20

Explanation:
Given that,
Kevin has 5 fishes and Jasmine has 4 times as many as Kevin which means 5×4= 20 fishes Jasmine has.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 41

Multiply 2-Digit Numbers with Regrouping

Estimate. Then record the product.

Question 1.
Estimate: 150
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core - Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers img 15

Question 2.
3 2
× 8
———-
Estimate: _________
Product: __________

Answer:
Estimate: 240
Product: 256

Explanation:
The number close to 32 is 30 and 30×8=240.
3 2
× 8
256
Thus the product is 256.

Question 3.
$ 5 5
×   2
———-
Estimate: $ _________
Product: $ __________

Answer:
Estimate: $120
Product: $110

Explanation:
Round off 55 to 60 and 60×2= 120.
$ 5 5
×   2
$110
Thus the product is $110.

Question 4.
6 1
× 8
———-
Estimate: _________
Product: __________

Answer:
Estimate: 480
Product: 488

Explanation:
Round off 61 to 60 and 60×8= 480.
6 1
× 8
488
Thus the product is 488.

Question 5.
3 7
× 9
———-
Estimate: _________
Product: __________

Answer:
Estimate: 360
Product: 333

Explanation:
Round off 37 to 40 and 40×6= 360.
3 7
× 9
333
Thus the product is 333.

Question 6.
$ 1 8
×    7
———-
Estimate: $ _________
Product: $ __________

Answer:
Estimate: $140
Product: $126

Explanation:
Round off 18 to 20 and 20×7= 140.
$ 1 8
×    7
$126
Thus the product is $126.

Question 7.
8 3
× 5
———-
Estimate: _________
Product: __________

Answer:
Estimate: 400
Product: 415

Explanation:
Round off 83 to 80 and 80×5= 400.
8 3
× 5
415
Thus the product is 415.

Question 8.
9 5
× 8
———-
Estimate: _________
Product: __________

Answer:

Estimate: 800
Product: 760

Explanation:
Round off 95 to 100 and 100×8= 800.
9 5
× 8
760
Thus the product is 760.

Question 9.
9 4
× 9
———-
Estimate: _________
Product: __________

Answer:
Estimate: 810
Product: 846

Explanation:
Round off 94 to 90 and 90×9= 810.
9 4
× 9
846
Thus the product is 846.

Question 10.
5 7
× 6
———-
Estimate: _________
Product: __________

Answer:
Estimate: 360
Product: 342

Explanation:
Round off 57 to 60 and 60×6= 360.
5 7
× 6
342
Thus the product is 342.

Question 11.
7 2
× 3
———-
Estimate: _________
Product: __________

Answer:
Estimate: 210
Product: 216

Explanation: Round off 72 to 70 and 70×3= 210.
7 2
× 3
216
Thus the product is 216.

Question 12.
$ 7 9
× 8
———-
Estimate: $ _________
Product: $ __________

Answer:
Estimate: $640
Product: $632

Explanation: Round off 79 to 80 and 80×8= 640.
$ 7 9
× 8
$632
Thus the product is $632.

Problem Solving

Question 13.
Sharon is 54 inches tall. A tree in her backyard is 5 times as tall as she is. The floor of her treehouse is at a height that is twice as tall as she is. What is the difference, in inches, between the top of the tree and the floor of the treehouse?
_______ inches

Answer: 162 inches

Explanation:
Given,
Sharon is 54 inches tall and a tree in her backyard is 5 times as tall as she is which means 54×5= 270.
And her treehouse is twice as tall as she is which means 54×2= 108 inches.
So the difference between the top of the tree and the floor of the treehouse is 270-108= 162 inches.

Question 14.
Mr. Diaz’s class is taking a field trip to the science museum. There are 23 students in the class, and a student admission ticket is $8. How much will the student
tickets cost?
$ _______

Answer: $184

Explanation:
Given,
Mr. Diaz’s class is taking a field trip to the science museum.
There are 23 students in the class, and a student admission ticket is $8.
Total no. of students are 23 and tickets cost is $8, So 23×8= $184.

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 42

Lesson Check

Question 1.
A ferryboat makes four trips to an island each day. The ferry can hold 88 people. If the ferry is full on each trip, how many passengers are carried by the ferry
each day?
Options:
a. 176
b. 322
c. 332
d. 352

Answer: 352

Explanation:
Total trips made by the ferryboat each day are 4 and it can hold 88 people.
So 88×4= 352 passengers are carried by ferryboat each day.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 2.
Julian counted the number of times he drove across the Seven Mile Bridge while vacationing in the Florida Keys. He crossed the bridge 34 times. How many miles in all did Julian drive crossing the bridge?
Options:
a. 328 miles
b. 248 miles
c. 238 miles
d. 218 miles

Answer: 238 miles

Explanation:
Given,
No. of times Julian drive across the bridge is 7 miles and he crossed the bridge 34 times.
So 34×7= 238 miles Julian drive crossing the bridge.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Sebastian wrote the population of his city as 300,000 + 40,000 + 60 + 7. Which of the following shows the population of Sebastian’s city written in standard form?
Options:
a. 346,700
b. 340,670
c. 340,607
d. 340,067

Answer: 340,067

Explanation:
300,000+40,000+60+7= 340,067.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 4.
A plane flew 2,190 kilometers from Chicago to Flagstaff. Another plane flew 2,910 kilometers from Chicago to Oakland. How much farther did the plane that flew to Oakland fly than the plane that flew to Flagstaff?
Options:
a. 720 kilometers
b. 820 kilometers
c. 5,000 kilometers
d. 5,100 kilometers

Answer: 720 kilometers

Explanation:
Given,
A plane flew from Chicago to Flagstaff is 2,190 km and another plane flew from Chicago to Oakland is 2,910.
So 2910-2190= 720 km.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 5.
Tori buys 27 packages of miniature racing cars. Each package contains 5 cars. About how many miniature racing cars does Tori buy?
Options:
a. 15
b. 32
c. 100
d. 150

Answer: 150

Explanation:
Given,
Tori buys 27 packages of miniature racing cars.
Each package contains 5 cars.
Let’s round off 27 packages to 30 and each package contains 5 cars, which means 30×5=150.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 6.
Which of the following equations represents the Distributive Property?
Options:
a. 3 × 4 = 4 × 3
b. 9 × 0 = 0
c. 5 × (3 + 4) = (5 × 3) + (5 × 4)
d. 6 × (3 × 2) = (6 × 3) × 2

Answer: 5 × (3 + 4) = (5 × 3) + (5 × 4)

Explanation:
Distributive property means if we multiply a sum by a number is the same as multiplying each addend by the number and adding the products.

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 43

Multiply 3-Digit and 4-Digit Numbers with Regrouping

Estimate. Then find the product.

Question 1.
Estimate: 4,000
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core - Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers img 16

Question 2.
5,339
×     6
———-
Estimate: ________
Product: _________

Answer:
Estimate: 30,000
Product: 32,034

Explanation:
Round off 5,339 to 5000 then 5000×6= 30,000.
5,339
×     6
32,034
Thus the product is 32,034.

Question 3.
$ 8 7 9
×       8
———-
Estimate: $ ________
Product: $ _________

Answer:
Estimate: $7,200.
Product: $7,032.

Explanation: Round off 879 to 900 then 900×8= 7,200.
$ 8 7 9
×       8
$7,032
Thus the product is $7,032

Question 4.
3,182
×    5
———-
Estimate: ________
Product: _________

Answer:
Estimate: 15,000
Product: 15,910

Explanation: Round off 3,182 to 3000 then 3000×5= 15,000.
3,182
×    5
15,910
Thus the product is 15,910.

Question 5.
4,616
×     3
———-
Estimate: ________
Product: _________

Answer:
Estimate: 15,000
Product: 13,848

Explanation: Round off 4,616 to 5,000 then 5000×3= 15,000.
4,616
×     3
13,848
Thus the product is 13,848.

Question 6.
2,854
× 9
———-
Estimate: $ ________
Product: $ _________

Answer:
Estimate: 27,000
Product: 25,686

Explanation: Round off 2,854 to 3000 then 3000×9= 27,000.
2,854
×      9
25,686
Thus the product is 25,686.

Question 7.
7,500
× 2
———-
Estimate: ________
Product: _________

Answer:
Estimate: 16,000
Product: 15,000

Explanation: Round off 7,500 to 8000 then 8000×2= 16,000.
7,500
×       2
15,000
Thus the product is 15,000.

Question 8.
9 4 2
×    7
———-
Estimate: ________
Product: _________

Answer:
Estimate: 6,300
Product: 6,594

Explanation: Round off 942 to 900 then 900×7= 6,300.
9 4 2
×    7
6,594
Thus the product is 6,594.

Question 9.
1,752
×     6
———-
Estimate: ________
Product: _________

Answer:
Estimate: 12,000.
Product: 10,512.

Explanation: Round off 1,752 to 2000 then 2000×6= 12,000.
1,752
×     6
10,512
Thus the product is 10,512.

Question 10.
5 5 0
×    9
———-
Estimate: ________
Product: _________

Answer:
Estimate: 5,400
Product: 4,950

Explanation: Round off 550 to 600 then 600×9= 5,400.
5 5 0
×    9
4,950
Thus the product is 4,950.

Question 11.
6,839
×     4
———-
Estimate: ________
Product: _________

Answer:
Estimate: 28,000
Product: 27,356

Explanation: Round off 6,839 to 7000 then 7000×4= 28,000.
6,839
×     4
27,356
Thus the product is 27,356.

Question 12.
$ 9,614
×        3
———-
Estimate: $ ________
Product: $ _________

Answer:
Estimate: 60,000.
Product: 57,684.

Explanation: Round off 9,614 to 10,000 then 10,000×6= 60,000.
$ 9,614
×      3
57,684
Thus the product is 57,684.

Problem Solving

Question 13.
Lafayette County has a population of 7,022 people. Columbia County’s population is 8 times as great as Lafayette County’s population. What is the population of Columbia County?
_____ people

Answer: 56,176 people

Explanation:
Lafayette County has a population of 7,022 people and Columbia County’s population is 8 times Lafayette County which means 7,022×8= 56,176.
Therefore the population of Columbia County is 56,176.

Question 14.
A seafood company sold 9,125 pounds of fish last month. If 6 seafood companies sold the same amount of fish, how much fish did the 6 companies sell last month in all?
_____ pounds

Answer: 54,750 pounds.

Explanation:
As the seafood company sold 9,125 pounds of fishes last month and 6 seafood companies also sold the same amount which means 9,125×6= 54,750 pounds.

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 44

Lesson Check

Question 1.
By recycling 1 ton of paper, 6,953 gallons of water are saved. How many gallons of water are saved by recycling 4 tons of paper?
Options:
a. 24,602 gallons
b. 27,612 gallons
c. 27,812 gallons
d. 28,000 gallons

Answer: 27,812 gallons

Explanation:
Given that,
By recycling 1 ton of paper, 6,953 gallons of water are saved.
So 4 tons of paper can save 6,953×4= 27,812.
The correct answer is option c.

Question 2.
Esteban counted the number of steps it took him to walk to school. He counted 1,138 steps. How many steps does he take walking to and from school each day?
Options:
a. 2,000
b. 2,266
c. 2,276
d. 22,616

Answer: 2,276

Explanation:
Given, Esteban counted the number of steps it took him to walk to school. He counted 1,138 steps.
As Esteban counted 1,138 steps to school and from school, it will be 1,138+1,138=2,276 steps
The correct answer is option c.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
A website has 13,406 people registered. What is the word form of this number?
Options:
a. thirty thousand, four hundred six
b. thirteen thousand, four hundred sixty
c. thirteen thousand, four hundred six
d. thirteen thousand, six hundred six

Answer: thirteen thousand, four hundred six

Explanation:
13,406 in words are thirteen thousand four hundred six.
The correct answer is option c.

Question 4.
In one year, the McAlister family drove their car 15,680 miles. To the nearest thousand, how many miles did they drive their car that year?
Options:
a. 15,000 miles
b. 15,700 miles
c. 16,000 miles
d. 20,000 miles

Answer: 16,000 miles

Explanation: 15,680 nearest thousand is 16,000.
The correct answer is option c.

Question 5.
Connor scored 14,370 points in a game. Amy scored 1,089 fewer points than Connor. How many points did Amy score?
Options:
a. 12,281
b. 13,281
c. 15,359
d. 15,459

Answer: 13,281

Explanation:
Connor scored 14,370 points and Amy scored 1,089 fewer points.
So Amy score is 14,370-1089= 13,281.
The correct answer is option b.

Question 6.
Lea buys 6 model cars that each cost $15. She also buys 4 bottles of paint that each cost $11. How much does Lea spend in all on model cars and paint?
Options:
a. $134
b. $90
c. $44
d. $36

Answer: $134

Explanation: Lea buys 6 model cars that each cost $15.
So the total cost for cars is $15×6= $90.
And 4 bottles of paint that each cost $11.
So the total cost of the paints is $11×4= $44. Then
$90+$44= $134.
The correct answer is option a.

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 45

Solve Multistep Problems Using Equations

Find the value of n.

Question 1.
4 × 27 + 5 × 34 – 94 = n
108 + 5 × 34 – 94 = n
108 + 170 – 94 = n
278 – 94 = n
184 = n

Question 2.
7 × 38 + 3 × 45 – 56 = n
_____ = n

Answer: 345

Explanation:
7 × 38 + 3 × 45 – 56 = n
n = 266 + 135 – 56
n = 401 – 56
n = 345

Question 3.
6 × 21 + 7 × 29 – 83 = n
_____ = n

Answer: 246

Explanation:
6 × 21 + 7 × 29 – 83 = n
n = 126 + 203 – 83
n = 329 – 83
n = 246

Question 4.
9 × 19 + 2 × 57 – 75 = n
_____ = n

Answer: 210

Explanation:
9 × 19 + 2 × 57 – 75 = n
n = 171 + 114 – 75
n = 285 – 75
n = 210.

Question 5.
5 × 62 + 6 × 33 – 68 = n
_____ = n

Answer: 440

Explanation:
5 × 62 + 6 × 33 – 68= n
n = 310 + 198 – 68
n = 508 – 68
n = 440

Question 6.
8 × 19 + 4 × 49 – 39 = n
_____ = n

Answer: 309

Explanation:
8 × 19 + 4 × 49 – 39 = n
n =152 + 196 – 39
n = 348 – 39
n = 309

Problem Solving

Question 7.
A bakery has 4 trays with 16 muffins on each tray. The bakery has 3 trays of cupcakes with 24 cupcakes on each tray. If 15 cupcakes are sold, how many muffins and cupcakes are left?
_____ muffins and cupcakes

Answer: 121 muffins and cupcakes.

Explanation:
Given,
A bakery has 4 trays with 16 muffins on each tray.
The bakery has 3 trays of cupcakes with 24 cupcakes on each tray.
4 × 16 + 3 × 24 – 15 = n
64 + 3 × 24 – 15 = n
64 + 72 – 15 = n
136 – 15 = n
121 = n
Thus 121 muffins and cupcakes are left.

Question 8.
Katy bought 5 packages of stickers with 25 stickers in each package. She also bought 3 boxes of markers with 12 markers in each box. If she receives 8 stickers from a friend, how many stickers and markers does Katy have now?
_____ stickers and markers

Answer: 69 stickers and markers

Explanation:
Given,
Katy bought 5 packages of stickers with 25 stickers in each package.
She also bought 3 boxes of markers with 12 markers in each box.
5 × 25 + 3 × 12 + 8 = n
125 + 3 × 12 + 8 = n
125 + 36 + 8 = n
169 = n
Thus Katy have 69 stickers and markers.

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 46

Lesson Check

Question 1.
What is the value of n?
9 × 23 + 3 × 39 – 28 = n
Options:
a. 240
b. 296
c. 2,310
d. 8,162

Answer: 296

Explanation:
Given the expression,
9 × 23 + 3 × 39 – 28 = n
n = 207 + 117 – 28
n = 324 – 28
n = 296
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 2.
Which expression has a value of 199?
Options:
a. 4 × 28 + 6 × 17 – 15
b. 4 × 17 + 6 × 28 – 38
c. 4 × 38 + 6 × 15 – 28
d. 4 × 15 + 6 × 38 – 88

Answer: 4 × 28 + 6 × 17 – 15

Explanation:
Given the expression,
4 × 28 + 6 × 17 – 15 = n
n = 112 + 102 – 15
n = 214 – 15
n = 199.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Which expression shows how you can multiply 9 × 475 using expanded form and the Distributive Property?
Options:
a. (9 × 4) + (9 × 7) + (9 × 5)
b. (9 × 4) + (9 × 70) + (9 × 700)
c. (9 × 400) + (9 × 70) + (9 × 5)
d. (9 × 400) + (9 × 700) + (9 × 500)

Answer: (9 × 400) + (9 × 70) + (9 × 5)

Explanation:
Distributive property means if we multiply a sum by a number is the same as multiplying each addend by the number and adding the products.
9 × 475= (9×400)+(9×70)+(9×5)
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 4.
Which equation best represents the comparison sentence?
32 is 8 times as many as 4
Options:
a. 32 = 8 × 4
b. 32 × 8 = 4
c. 32 = 8 + 4
d. 8 + 4 = 32

Answer: 32 = 8 × 4

Explanation:
The equation for the sentence 32 is 8 times as many as 4 is 32 = 8 × 4.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 5.
Between which pair of numbers is the exact product of 379 and 8?
Options:
a. between 2,400 and 2,500
b. between 2,400 and 2,800
c. between 2,400 and 3,000
d. between 2,400 and 3,200

Answer: between 2,400 and 3,200

Explanation:
379 × 8 = 3,032
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 6.
Which of the following statements shows the halving and doubling strategy to find 28 × 50?
Options:
a. 28 × 50 = 14 × 100
b. 28 × 50 = (14 × 25) × (14 × 25)
c. 28 × 50 = (20 × 50) × (8 × 50)
d. 28 × 50 = 2 × (14 × 25)

Answer: 28 × 50 = 14 × 100

Explanation:
28×50 = 14×100
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 47

Lesson 2.1

Write a comparison sentence.

Question 1.
27 = 3 × 9
____ is ____ times as many as ____

Answer: 27 is 3 times as many as 9.

Question 2.
7 × 8 = 56
____ times as many as ____ is ____

Answer: 7 times as many as 8 is 56.

Lessons 2.3, 2.5–2.6

Find the product.

Question 3.
2 × 700 = ____

Answer: 1400

Explanation:
2 × 7 = 14
2 × 700 = 1400

Question 4.
6 × 6,000 = ____

Answer: 36000

Explanation:
6 × 6 = 36
6 × 6,000 = 36,000

Question 5.
7 × 13 = ____

Answer: 91

Explanation:
The multiple of 7 and 13 is 91.
7 × 13 = 91

Question 6.
4 × 19 = ____

Answer: 76

Explanation:
The product of 4 and 19 is 76.

Question 7.
5 × 216 = ____

Answer: 1080

Explanation:
The product of 5 and 216 is 1080.

Question 8.
9 × 1,362 = ____

Answer: 12258

Explanation:
The product of 9 and 1,362 is 12,258.

Lessons 2.2, 2.9

Draw a diagram. Write an equation and solve.

Question 9.
Julia saw 5 times as many cars as trucks in a parking lot. If she saw 30 cars and trucks altogether in the parking lot, how many were trucks?
____ trucks

Answer: 5 trucks

Explanation:
Given,
Julia saw 5 times as many cars as trucks in a parking lot.
25 + 5 = 30
25/5 = 5
Thus there are 5 trucks altogether in the parking lot.

Question 10.
Ivan has 6 times as many blue beads as red beads. He has 49 red and blue beads in all. How many blue beads does Ivan have?
____ blue beads

Answer: 42 blue beads

Explanation:
Given that,
Ivan has 6 times as many blue beads as red beads.
He has 49 red and blue beads in all.
Let x be the number of blue beads
y be the number of red beads
We know that,
x + y = 49
x = 49 – y ——> eq. 1
x = 6y ———> eq. 2
Equate equation 1 and 2
49 – y = 6y
6y + y = 49
7y = 49
y = 49/7
y = 7
Now find the value of x
x = 6y
x = 6 × 7 = 42
Therefore the answer is 42 blue beads.

Question 11.
There are 6 rows with 18 chairs in each row. In the center of the chairs, 4 rows of 6 chairs are brown. The rest of the chairs are blue. How many chairs are blue?
____ blue chairs

Answer: 84 blue chairs

Explanation:
Given that,
There are 6 rows with 18 chairs in each row.
In the center of the chairs, 4 rows of 6 chairs are brown. The rest of the chairs are blue.
18 × 6 = 108
4 × 6 = 24
To find the number of chairs that are blue
We have to subtract 24 from 108.
108 – 24 = 84
Thus there are 84 blue chairs.

Common Core – Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 48

Lessons 2.7, 2.10–2.11

Estimate. Then record the product.

Question 1.
3 1 8
×   3
———-
Estimate: _______
Product: _________

Answer:
Estimate: 900
Product: 954

Explanation:
The number close to 318 is 300.
300 × 3 = 900.
The estimated product of 318 and 3 is 900.
3 1 8
×  3
954
The product of 318 and 3 is 954.

Question 2.
$ 5 2 2
×       9
———-
Estimate: _______
Product: _________

Answer:
Estimate: 4500
Product: 4698

Explanation:
The number close to 522 is 500.
500 × 9 = 4500
The estimated product of 522 and 9 is 4500.
$ 5 2 2
×      9
$4698

Question 3.
$ 3 6
×    6
———-
Estimate: _______
Product: _________

Answer:
Estimate: 240
Product: 216

Explanation:
The number close to 36 is 40.
40 × 6 = 240
The estimated product of 40 and 6 is 240.
$ 3 6
×  6
216

Question 4.
5 7
× 8
———-
Estimate: _______
Product: _________

Answer:
Estimate: 480
Product: 456

Explanation:
The number close to 57 is 60.
60 × 8 = 480.
The estimated product of 57 and 8 is 480.
5 7
× 8
456

Question 5.
3,600
×      8
———-
Estimate: _______
Product: _________

Answer:
Estimate: 32,000
Product: 28,800

Explanation:
The number close to 3600 is 4000.
4000 × 8 = 32,000
The estimated product of 3600 and 8 is 32,000.
3,600
×     8
28,800

Question 6.
$ 9,107
× 5
———-
Estimate: _______
Product: _________

Answer:
Estimate: 45,000
Product: 45,535

Explanation:
The number close to 9107 is 9000.
9000 × 5 = 45,000
The estimated product of 9107 and 5 is 45,000.
$ 9,107
×       5
45,535

Lesson 2.8

Find the product. Tell which strategy you used.

Question 7.
(4 × 10) × 10 = ______
Explain:
_________

Answer: 400, Associative property

Explanation:
(4 × 10) × 10 = 4 × 10 × 10
40 × 10 = 400

Question 8.
2 × 898 = ______
Explain:
_________

Answer: 1796, Distributive property

Explanation:
2 × 898 = (2 × 800) + (2 × 90) + (2 × 8)
1600 + 180 + 16 = 1796

Question 9.
______
Explain:
_________

Answer:

Lessons 2.4, 2.12

Question 10.
School pennants cost $18 each. Ms. Lee says she will pay $146 for 7 pennants. Is her answer reasonable? Explain.
______

Answer: No

Explanation:
Given,
School pennants cost $18 each. Ms. Lee says she will pay $146 for 7 pennants.
18 multiplied by 7 is equal to 126 when Ms. Lee is buying the pennants for 146.

Question 11.
Caleb draws 14 dogs on each of 4 posters. He draws 18 cats on each of 6 other posters. If he draws 5 more dogs on each poster with dogs, how many dogs and cats does he draw?
______ dogs and cats

Answer: 184 dogs and cats

Explanation:
Given,
Caleb draws 14 dogs on each of 4 posters. He draws 18 cats on each of 6 other posters.
14 × 4 = 56
18 × 6 = 108
5 × 4 =20
Total = 56 + 108 + 20 = 184
Thus he draw 184 dogs and cats.

Conclusion

Kids have a strong grip on the ch 2 concepts using Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers pdf and secure the highest marks in the exams. Moreover, you can also find other grades Go Math HMH Answer Keys on our site ie., Ccssmathanswers.com

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers

go-math-grade-4-chapter-4-divide-by-1-digit-numbers-pages-67-93-answer-key

Detailed and Step-by-step explanation of Chapter 5 concepts is provided in this Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers. Assure that you should practice with the help of Go math HMH grade 4 chapter 5 solution key and improve mathematical and logical skills. Learning & practicing the fundamentals of math chapter 5 concepts is very important to score more marks in the exams. So, download online Go Math Grade 4 Solution Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers pdf and overcome all the difficulties in math.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers

Consistent practice helps students to gain more knowledge and overcome their weak points. So, grab these Concept-wise Chapter 4 Go math Grade 4 Answer Key pdf and practice regularly for securing good scores in the exams. Some of the topics covered in Go Math Solution Key Grade 4 Homework Practice FL Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers are Estimate Quotients Using Multiples, Remainders, Divide Tens, Hundreds, and Thousands, etc. Solve the questions provided at the end of the page and test your subject knowledge.

Lesson: 1 – Estimate Quotients Using Multiples

Lesson: 2 – Remainders

Lesson: 3 – Interpret the Remainder

Lesson: 4 – Divide Tens, Hundreds, and Thousands

Lesson: 5 – Estimate Quotients Using Compatible Numbers

Lesson: 6 – Division and the Distributive Property

Lesson: 7 – Divide Using Repeated Subtraction

Lesson: 8 – Divide Using Partial Quotients

Lesson: 9 – Model Division with Regrouping

Lesson: 10 – Place the First Digit

Lesson: 11 – Divide by 1-Digit Numbers

Lesson: 12 – Problem Solving Multistep Division Problems

Lesson: 13

Common Core – Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 69

Estimate Quotients Using Multiples

Find two numbers the quotient is between. Then estimate the quotient.

Question 1.
175 ÷ 6
Think: 6 × 20 = 120 and 6 × 30 = 180. So, 175 ÷ 6 is between 20 and 30. Since 175 is closer to 180 than to 120, the quotient is about 30.
between 20 and 30
about 30

Question 2.
53 ÷ 3
between ____ and ____
about ____

Answer: About 18

Explanation:
17 × 3= 51 and 18 × 3 = 54. 53 is between 51 and 54. 53 ÷ 3 is closest to 17 and 18. So, 53 ÷ 3 is between 17 and 18. So, 53 ÷ 3 will be about 18.

Question 3.
75 ÷ 4
between ____ and ____
about ____

Answer: About 19

Explanation:
18 × 4= 72 and 19 × 4= 76. 75 is between 72 and 76. 75 ÷ 4 is closest to 18 and 19. So, 75÷ 4 is between 18 and 19. So, 75 ÷ 4 will be about 19.

Question 4.
215 ÷ 9
between ____ and ____
about ____

Answer: About 24

Explanation:
23 × 9= 207 and 24 × 9 = 216. 24 is between 207 and 216. 215 ÷ 9 is closest to 23 and 24. So, 215 ÷ 9 is between 23 and 24. So, 215 ÷ 9 will be about 24.

Question 5.
284 ÷ 5
between ____ and ____
about ____

Answer: About 57

Explanation:
56 × 5 = 280 and 57 × 5 = 285. 284 is between 280 and 285. 284 ÷ 5 is closest to 56 and 57. So, 284 ÷ 5 is between 56 and 57. So, 175 ÷ 6 will be about 57.

Question 6.
191 ÷ 3
between ____ and ____
about ____

Answer: About 64

Explanation:
63 × 3 = 189 and 64 × 3 = 192. 191 is between 189 and 192. 191 ÷ 3 is closest to 63 and 64. So, 191 ÷ 3 is between 63 and 64. So, 175 ÷ 6 will be about 64.

Question 7.
100 ÷ 7
between ____ and ____
about ____

Answer: About 14

Explanation:
14 × 7 = 98 and 15 × 7 = 105. 100 is between 98 and 105. 100 ÷ 7 is closest to 14 and 15.
So, 100 ÷ 7 is between 14 and 15. So, 100 ÷ 7 will be about 14.

Question 8.
438 ÷ 7
between ____ and ____
about ____

Answer: About 63

Explanation:
63 × 7 = 441 and 62 × 7 = 434. 438 is between 434 and 441. 438 ÷ 7 is closest to 62 and 63. So, 438 ÷ 7 is between 62 and 63. So, 438 ÷ 7 will be about 63.

Question 9.
103 ÷ 8
between ____ and ____
about ____

Answer: About 13

Explanation:
13 × 8 = 104 and 12 ×8 = 96. 103 is between 96 and 104. 103 ÷ 8 is closest to 12 and 13. So, 103 ÷ 8 is between 12 and 13. So, 103 ÷ 8 will be about 13.

Question 10.
255 ÷ 9
between ____ and ____
about ____

Answer: About 28

Explanation:
28 × 9 = 252 and 29 × 9 = 261. 255 is between 252 and 261. 255 ÷ 9 is closest to 28 and 29.
So, 255 ÷ 9 is between 28 and 29. So, 255 ÷ 9 will be about 28.

Problem Solving

Question 11
Joy collected 287 aluminum cans in 6 hours. About how many cans did she collect per hour?
about ____ cans

Answer: About 48 cans

Explanation:
47 × 6 = 282 and 48 × 6 = 288. 287 is between 282 and 288. 287 ÷ 6 is closest to 47 and 48. So, 287 ÷ 6 is between 47 and 48. So, 287 ÷6 will be about 48.

Question 12.
Paul sold 162 cups of lemonade in 5 hours. About how many cups of lemonade did he sell each hour?
about ____ cups

Answer: About 32 cups of lemonade he sold in each hour

Explanation:
32 × 5 = 160 and 33 × 5 = 165. 162 is between 160 and 165. 162 ÷ 5 is closest to 32 and 33. So, 162 ÷ 5 is between 32 and 33. So, 162 ÷ 5 will be about 32.

Common Core – Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 70

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Abby did 121 sit-ups in 8 minutes. Which is the best estimate of the number of sit-ups she did in 1 minute?
Options:
a. about 12
b. about 15
c. about 16
d. about 20

Answer: About 15

Explanation:
15 × 8 = 120 and 16 × 8 = 128. 121 is between 120 and 128. 121 ÷ 8 is closest to 120 and 128. So, 121 ÷ 8 is between 15 and 16.
So, 121 ÷ 8 will be about 15.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 2.
The Garibaldi family drove 400 miles in 7 hours. Which is the best estimate of the number of miles they drove in 1 hour?
Options:
a. about 40 miles
b. about 50 miles
c. about 60 miles
d. about 70 miles

Answer: about 60 miles

Explanation:
Given,
The Garibaldi family drove 400 miles in 7 hours.
57 × 7 = 399 and 58 × 7 = 406.
400 is between 399 and 406. 400 ÷ 7 is closest to 57 and 58.
So, 400 ÷ 7 is between 57 and 58.
So, 400 ÷ 7 will be about 57.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Twelve boys collected 16 aluminum cans each. Fifteen girls collected 14 aluminum cans each. How many more cans did the girls collect than the boys?
Options:
a. 8
b. 12
c. 14
d. 18

Answer: 18

Explanation:
Given that,
Twelve boys collected 16 aluminum cans each.
Fifteen girls collected 14 aluminum cans each.
Number of aluminium cans boys had= 12 × 16=192
Number of aluminium cans girls had = 15 × 14=210
Girls collected more cans compared to boys,
Number of more cans collected by girls= 210 – 192=18
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 4.
George bought 30 packs of football cards. There were 14 cards in each pack. How many cards did George buy?
Options:
a. 170
b. 320
c. 420
d. 520

Answer: 420

Explanation:
Given,
George bought 30 packs of football cards.
There were 14 cards in each pack.
Number of packs of football cards= 30
Number of cards in each pack= 14
Total number of cards George bought=30×14=420
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 5.
Sarah made a necklace using 5 times as many blue beads as white beads. She used a total of 30 beads. How many blue beads did Sarah use?
Options:
a. 5
b. 6
c. 24
d. 25

Answer: 25

Explanation:
Given,
Sarah made a necklace using 5 times as many blue beads as white beads.
She used a total of 30 beads.
Let the number of white beads be x while the number of blue beads are 5x.
Total number of beads in the necklace=30 beads
According to the problem,
5x+x=30
6x=30
x=30/6=5
Therefore the number of blue beads in the necklace are 5x= 5×5=25
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 6.
This year, Ms. Webster flew 145,000 miles on business. Last year, she flew 83,125 miles on business. How many more miles did Ms. Webster fly on business this year?
Options:
a. 61,125 miles
b. 61,875 miles
c. 61,985 miles
d. 62,125 miles

Answer: 61,875 miles

Explanation:
Given,
This year, Ms. Webster flew 145,000 miles on business.
Last year, she flew 83,125 miles on business.
Number of miles Ms Webster flew in this year = 145,000 miles
Number of miles Ms Webster flew in the last year = 83,125 miles
Number of more miles travelled by Ms Webster =145,000 – 83,125 = 61,875
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Common Core – Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 71

Remainders

Use counters to find the quotient and remainder.

Question 1.
13 ÷ 4
3 r1

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 13 counters to represent the 13 dominoes. Then draw 4 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 4 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 13 ÷ 4
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 4 counters, therefore, the quotient is 3.
Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 1
For 13 ÷ 4, the quotient is 3 and the remainder is 1, or 3 r1.

Question 2.
24 ÷ 7
_____ R _____

Answer: 3 r3

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 24 counters to represent the 24 dominoes. Then draw 7 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 7 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 24 ÷ 7
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 3 counters, therefore, the quotient is 3
Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 3
For 24 ÷ 7, the quotient is 3 and the remainder is 3, or 3 r3.

Question 3.
39 ÷ 5
_____ R _____

Answer: 7 r4

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 39 counters to represent the 39dominoes. Then draw 5 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 5 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient 39 ÷ 5
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 7 counters, therefore, the quotient is 7
Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 4
For 39 ÷ 5, the quotient is 7 and the remainder is 4, or 7 r4.

Question 4.
36 ÷ 8
_____ R _____

Answer: 4 r4

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 36 counters to represent the 36 dominoes. Then draw 8 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 8 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 36 ÷ 8
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 4 counters, therefore, the quotient is 4
Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 4
For 36 ÷ 8, the quotient is 4 and the remainder is 4, or 4 r4.

Question 5.
6)\(\overline { 27 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 4 r3

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 27 counters to represent the 27 dominoes. Then draw 6 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 6 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 27 ÷6
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 4 counters, therefore, the quotient is 4
Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 3
For 27 ÷ 6, the quotient is 4 and the remainder is 3, or 4 r3.

Question 6.
25 ÷ 9
_____ R _____

Answer: 2 r7

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 25 counters to represent the 25 dominoes. Then draw 9 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 9 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 25 ÷ 9
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 2 counters, therefore, the quotient is 2
Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 7
For 25 ÷ 7, the quotient is 2 and the remainder is 7, or 2 r7.

Question 7.
3)\(\overline { 17 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 5 r2

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 17 counters to represent the 17 dominoes. Then draw 3 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 3 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 17 ÷ 3
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 5 counters, therefore, the quotient is 5
Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 2
For 17 ÷ 3, the quotient is 5 and the remainder is 2, or 5 r2.

Question 8.
26 ÷ 4
_____ R _____

Answer: 6 r2

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 26 counters to represent the 26 dominoes. Then draw 4 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 4 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 26 ÷ 4
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 6 counters, therefore, the quotient is 6
Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 2
For 26 ÷ 4, the quotient is 6 and the remainder is 2, or 6 r2.

Divide. Draw a quick picture to help.

Question 9.
14 ÷ 3
_____ R _____

Answer: Quotient: 4 Remainder: 2

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 14 counters to represent the 14 dominoes. Then draw 3 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 3 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled= quotient of 14 ÷ 3 = 4
Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 2

Question 10.
5)\(\overline { 29 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: Quotient: 5 Remainder: 4

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 29 counters to represent the 29 dominoes. Then draw 5 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 5 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled= quotient of 29 ÷ 5 = 5
Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 4

Problem Solving

Question 11.
What is the quotient and remainder in the division problem modeled below?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core - Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 1
_____ R _____

Answer: quotient:6 remainder2

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 20 counters to represent the 20 dominoes. Then draw 3 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 3 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 20 ÷ 3
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 6 counters, therefore, the quotient is 6
Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 2
For 20 ÷ 3, the quotient is 6 and the remainder is 2, or 6 r2.

Question 12.
Mark drew the following model and said it represented the problem 21 ÷ 4. Is Mark’s model correct? If so, what is the quotient and remainder? If not, what is the correct quotient and remainder?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core - Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 2
_____ : _____ r _____

Answer: 4 r5

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 21 counters to represent the 21 dominoes. Then draw 4 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 4 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 21 ÷ 4
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 4 counters, therefore, the quotient is 4
Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 5
For 21 ÷ 4, the quotient is 4 and the remainder is 5, or 4 r5.

Common Core – Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 72

Lesson Check

Question 1.
What is the quotient and remainder for 32 ÷ 6?
Options:
a. 4 r3
b. 5 r1
c. 5 r2
d. 6 r1

Answer: 5 r2

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 32 counters to represent the 32 dominoes. Then draw 6 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 5 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 32 ÷ 6
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 5 counters, therefore, the quotient is 5
Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 2
For 32 ÷ 6, the quotient is 5 and the remainder is 2, or 5 r2.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 2.
What is the remainder in the division problem modeled below?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core - Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 3
Options:
a. 8
b. 4
c. 3
d. 1

Answer: 3

Explanation:
When a number cannot be divided evenly, the amount left over is called the remainder.
The number of counters that are left = remainder = 3
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Each kit to build a castle contains 235 parts. How many parts are in 4 of the kits?
Options:
a. 1,020
b. 940
c. 920
d. 840

Answer: 940

Explanation:
Number of parts used to build a castle in each kit=235 parts
Number of kits= 4
Total number of parts in 4 of the kits= 235 x 4=940 parts

Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 4.
In 2010, the population of Alaska was about 710,200. What is this number written in word form?
Options:
a. seven hundred ten thousand, two
b. seven hundred twelve thousand
c. seventy-one thousand, two
d. seven hundred ten thousand, two hundred

Answer: seven hundred ten thousand, two hundred

Explanation:
The ones and tens place of the number are zeroes, so the next place which is hundreds is considered and the value is 7 so, it can be written as seven hundred and in the thousands period, it can be written as seven hundred ten thousand.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 5.
At the theater, one section of seats has 8 rows with 12 seats in each row. In the center of the first 3 rows are 4 broken seats that cannot be used. How many seats can be used in the section?
Options:
a. 84
b. 88
c. 92
d. 96

Answer: 92

Explanation:
Given,
Number of rows at the theatre = 8
Number of seats in each row= 12
Number of seats broken and that cannot be used to sit= 4
Total number of seats that can be used= 12 × 8 – 4 = 96 – 4 = 92
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 6.
What partial products are shown by the model below?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core - Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 4
Options:
a. 300, 24
b. 300, 600, 40, 60
c. 300, 60, 40, 24
d. 300, 180, 40, 24

Answer: 300, 180, 40, 24

Explanation:
The whole rectangle is divided into four small rectangles the areas of these rectangles are:

Area of yellow rectangle= 30 x 10=300
Area of green rectangle= 4 x 10 = 40
Area of pink rectangle= 6 x 30= 180
Area of blue rectangle= 4 x 6= 24
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Common Core – Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 73

Interpret the Remainder

Interpret the remainder to solve.

Question 1.
Hakeem has 100 tomato plants. He wants to plant them in rows of 8. How many full rows will he have?
Think: 100 ÷ 8 is 12 with a remainder of 4. The question asks “how many full rows,” so use only the quotient.
12 full rows

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 100 counters to represent the 100 dominoes. Then draw 8 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 8 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 100 ÷ 8
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 12 counters, therefore, the quotient is 12
Therefore, the tomatoes placed in full rows are 12

Question 2.
A teacher has 27 students in her class. She asks the students to form as many groups of 4 as possible. How many students will not be in a group?
______ students

Answer: 3 students will not be in the group

Explanation:
Total number of students in the class= 27
Number of students who make a group=4
Number of groups that can be made =Quotient of 27÷ 4=6
Number of students who do not come under a group= Remainder of 27÷ 4=3

Question 3.
A sporting goods company can ship 6 footballs in each carton. How many cartons are needed to ship 75 footballs?
______ cartons

Answer: 12 full cartons and 0.5 or 1/2 carton to ship all the 75 footballs

Explanation:
Total number of footballs that should be shipped= 75
Number of footballs placed in each carton = 6
Number of cartons required=Quotient of 75÷ 6=12

Since each carton carries 6 balls, half carton contains 3 balls because 6÷3=2, therefore, each half of the carton contains 3 balls.

Question 4.
A carpenter has a board that is 10 feet long. He wants to make 6 table legs that are all the same length. What is the longest each leg can be?
______ foot

Answer: The length of the longest leg = 4 foot-long

Explanation:
According to the question,
Length of the board the carpenter has= 10 foot long
Number of table legs that are to be made = 6
Length of the 6 table legs are equal
then,
Length of each table leg = Quotient of 10 ÷ 6 =1 foot
Length of the longest table leg = Remainder of 10 ÷ 6 = 4 foot.

Question 5.
Allie wants to arrange her flower garden in 8 equal rows. She buys 60 plants. What is the greatest number of plants she can put in each row?
______ plants

Answer: 7

Explanation:
Total number of plants Allie bought = 60
Number of rows = 8
Number of plants in each row= Quotient of 60 ÷ 8 = 7
Thus the greatest number of plants she can put in a row is 7.

Problem Solving

Question 6.
Joanna has 70 beads. She uses 8 beads for each bracelet. She makes as many bracelets as possible. How many beads will Joanna have left over?
______ beads

Answer: 6 beads

Explanation:
Total number of beads Joanna has= 70 beads
Number beads used for each bracelet= 8 beads
Number of bracelets made with these beads= Quotient of 70÷8= 7 bracelets
then,
The number of beads leftover= Remainder of 70÷8= 6 beads

Question 7.
A teacher wants to give 3 markers to each of her 25 students. Markers come in packages of 8. How many packages of markers will the teacher need?
______ packages

Answer: 10 packages

Explanation:
Total number of students= 25
Number of markers each student got= 3
Total number of markers the teacher needs to distribute= 25 x 3= 75
Number of markers in each package= 8
Number of packages the teacher required= Quotient of 75÷8=9
While the remainder = 3
Therefore the total number of packages = 10

Common Core – Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 74

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Marcus sorts his 85 baseball cards into stacks of 9 cards each. How many stacks of 9 cards can Marcus make?
Options:
a. 4
b. 8
c. 9
d. 10

Answer: 10

Explanation:
Total number of baseball cards=85
Number of cards in each stack=9
Number of stacks sorted= Quotient of 85÷9=9
While the remainder=4
So the total number of stacks required= 10
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 2.
A minivan can hold up to 7 people. How many minivans are needed to take 45 people to a basketball game?
Options:
a. 3
b. 5
c. 6
d. 7

Answer: 7

Explanation:
A minivan can hold up to 7 people.
Total number of people who want to hire the minivan= 45 people
Number of minivans required= Quotient of 45÷7= 6 vans
While the remainder is 3.
Total number of minivans required to take the people to the baseball game= 7 minivans
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Mrs. Wilkerson cut some oranges into 20 equal pieces to be shared by 6 friends. How many pieces did each person get and how many pieces were left over?
Options:
a. 2 pieces with 4 pieces left over
b. 3 pieces with 2 pieces left over
c. 3 pieces with 4 pieces left over
d. 4 pieces with 2 pieces left over

Answer: 3 pieces with 2 pieces left over

Explanation:
Total number of orange pieces= 20
Number of friends= 6
Number of pieces each friend got= Quotient of 20÷6= 3 pieces
Number of pieces leftover= Remainder of 20÷6= 2 pieces
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 4.
A school bought 32 new desks. Each desk cost $24. Which is the best estimate of how much the school spent on the new desks?
Options:
a. $500
b. $750
c. $1,000
d. $1,200

Answer: $750

Explanation:
Total number of desks= 32
Cost of each desk= $24
Total cost spent on the desks= 32 x 24=$768

So the estimated value can be $768.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 5.
Kris has a box of 8 crayons. Sylvia’s box has 6 times as many crayons as Kris’s box. How many crayons are in Sylvia’s box?
Options:
a. 48
b. 42
c. 36
d. 4

Answer: 48

Explanation:
Number of crayons in Kris box=8
Number of crayons in Sylvia’s box= 6 times as many crayons as Kris’s box= 6 x 8=48
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 6.
Yesterday, 1,743 people visited the fair. Today, there are 576 more people at the fair than yesterday. How many people are at the fair today?
Options:
a. 1,167
b. 2,219
c. 2,319
d. 2,367

Answer: 2,319

Explanation:
Number of people in the fair yesterday= 1,743
Number of more people at the fair than yesterday= 576
Total number of people in the fair today=2,319

Thus the correct answer is option c.

Common Core – Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 75

Divide Tens, Hundreds, and Thousands

Use basic facts and place value to find the quotient.

Question 1.
3,600 ÷ 4 = 900
Think: 3,600 is 36 hundreds.
Use the basic fact 36 ÷ 4 = 9.
So, 36 hundreds ÷ 4 = 9 hundreds, or 900.

Question 2.
240 ÷ 6 = ______

Answer: 40

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 24 ÷ 6
STEP 2 Use place value. 240 = 24 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 24 tens ÷ 6 = 4 tens
240 ÷ 6 = 40

Question 3.
5,400 ÷ 9 = ______

Answer: 600

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 54 ÷ 9
STEP 2 Use place value. 5,400 = 54 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 54 hundreds ÷ 9 = 6 hundreds
5,400 ÷ 9 = 600

Question 4.
300 ÷ 5 = ______

Answer: 60

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 30 ÷ 5
STEP 2 Use place value. 300 = 30 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 30 tens ÷ 5 = 60 tens
300 ÷ 5 = 60

Question 5.
4,800 ÷ 6 = ______

Answer: 800

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 48 ÷ 6
STEP 2 Use place value. 4,800 = 48 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 48 hundreds ÷ 6 = 80 hundreds
4,800 ÷ 6 = 800

Question 6.
420 ÷ 7 = ______

Answer: 60

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 42 ÷ 7
STEP 2 Use place value. 420 = 42 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 42 tens ÷ 7 = 60 tens
420 ÷ 7 = 60

Question 7.
150 ÷ 3 = ______

Answer: 50

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 15 ÷ 3
STEP 2 Use place value. 150 = 15 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 15 tens ÷ 3 = 5 tens
150 ÷ 3 = 50

Question 8.
6,300 ÷ 7 = ______

Answer: 900

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 63 ÷ 7
STEP 2 Use place value. 6,300 = 63 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 63 hundreds ÷ 7 = 9 hundreds
6,300 ÷ 7 = 900

Question 9.
1,200 ÷ 4 = ______

Answer: 300

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 12 ÷ 4
STEP 2 Use place value. 1,200 = 12 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 12 hundreds ÷ 4 = 3 hundreds
1,200 ÷ 4 = 300

Question 10.
360 ÷ 6 = ______

Answer: 60

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 36 ÷ 6
STEP 2 Use place value. 360 = 36 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 36 tens ÷ 6 = 6 tens
360 ÷ 6 = 60

Find the quotient.

Question 11.
28 ÷ 4 = ______
280 ÷ 4 = ______
2,800 ÷ 4 = ______

Answer: 7, 70, 700

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 28 counters to represent the 28 dominoes. Then draw 4 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 4 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 28 ÷ 4
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 7 counters, therefore, the quotient is 7

STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 28 ÷ 4
STEP 2 Use place value. 280 = 28 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 28 tens ÷ 4 = 7 tens
280 ÷ 4 = 70

STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 28 ÷ 4
STEP 2 Use place value. 2,800 = 28 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 28 hundreds ÷ 4 = 7 hundreds
2,800 ÷ 4 = 700

Question 12.
18 ÷ 3 = ______
180 ÷ 3 = ______
1,800 ÷ 3 = ______

Answer: 6, 60, 600

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 18 counters to represent the 18 dominoes. Then draw 3 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 3 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 18 ÷ 3
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 6 counters, therefore, the quotient is 6

STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 18 ÷ 3
STEP 2 Use place value. 180 = 18 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 18 tens ÷ 3 = 6 tens
180 ÷ 6 = 60

STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 18 ÷ 3
STEP 2 Use place value. 1,800 = 18 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 18 hundreds ÷ 3 = 6 hundreds
1,800 ÷ 3 = 600

Question 13.
45 ÷ 9 = ______
450 ÷ 9 = ______
4,500 ÷ 9 = ______

Answer: 5, 50, 500

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 45 counters to represent the 45 dominoes. Then draw 9 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 9 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 45 ÷ 9
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 5 counters, therefore, the quotient is 5

STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 45 ÷ 9
STEP 2 Use place value. 450 = 45 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 45 tens ÷ 9 = 5 tens
450 ÷ 9 = 50

STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 45 ÷ 9
STEP 2 Use place value. 4,500 = 45 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 45 hundred ÷ 9 = 5 hundred
4,500 ÷ 9 = 500

Problem Solving

Question 14.
At an assembly, 180 students sit in 9 equal rows. How many students sit in each row?
______ students

Answer: 20

Explanation:
Total number of students= 180
Number of rows= 9
Number of students in each row= 180 ÷ 9 = 20

Question 15.
Hilary can read 560 words in 7 minutes. How many words can Hilary read in 1 minute?
______ words

Answer: 80

Explanation:
Total number of words Hilary can read in 7 minutes = 560
Number of words Hilary can read in 1 minute= 560 ÷ 7= 80
Therefore Hilary can read 80 words in 1 minute.

Question 16.
A company produces 7,200 gallons of bottled water each day. The company puts 8 one-gallon bottles in each carton. How many cartons are needed to hold all the one-gallon bottles produced in one day?
______ cartons

Answer: 900

Explanation:
Total number of gallons bottled in each day= 7,200
Number of gallons bottled in each carton= 8
Number of cartons used= 7,200 ÷ 8= 900

Question 17.
An airplane flew 2,400 miles in 4 hours. If the plane flew the same number of miles each hour, how many miles did it fly in 1 hour?
______ miles

Answer: 600

Explanation:
Total number of miles flew in 4 hours= 2,400
Number of miles flew in 1 hour= 2,400 ÷ 4 = 600

Common Core – Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 76

Lesson Check

Question 1.
A baseball player hits a ball 360 feet to the outfield. It takes the ball 4 seconds to travel this distance. How many feet does the ball travel in 1 second?
Options:
a. 9 feet
b. 40 feet
c. 90 feet
d. 900 feet

Answer: 90 feet

Explanation:
The height to which the player hits a ball=360 feet
Height to which the ball travels in 1 second= 360÷4= 90 feet
The correct answer is option c.

Question 2.
Sebastian rides his bike 2,000 meters in 5 minutes. How many meters does he bike in 1 minute?
Options:
a. 4 meters
b. 40 meters
c. 50 meters
d. 400 meters

Answer: 400 meters

Explanation:
Total number of meters travelled in 5 minutes= 2,000
Number of meters travelled in 1 minute= 2,000÷5= 400
The correct answer is option d.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
A full container of juice holds 64 ounces. How many 7-ounce servings of juice are in a full container?
Options:
a. 1
b. 8
c. 9
d. 10

Answer: 9

Explanation:
A full container of juice holds= 63 ounces
Quantity of servings of juice in one glass=7 ounce
The number of servings of the juice are= 63÷7=9
The correct answer is option c.

Question 4.
Paolo pays $244 for 5 identical calculators. Which is the best estimate of how much Paolo pays for one calculator?
Options:
a. $40
b. $50
c. $60
d. $245

Answer: $50

Explanation:
Amount Paolo pays for the identical calculators = $244
Number of identical calculators=5
The best-estimated value of each identical calculator=$244 ÷ 5is approximately $50.
The correct answer is option b.

Question 5.
A football team paid $28 per jersey. They bought 16 jerseys. How much money did the team spend on jerseys?
Options:
a. $44
b. $196
c. $408
d. $448

Answer: $448

Explanation:
Cost of each jersey=$28
Number of jerseys= 16
Total cost of the jerseys= $28 x 16= $448
The correct answer is option d.

Question 6.
Suzanne bought 50 apples at the apple orchard. She bought 4 times as many red apples as green apples. How many more red apples than green apples did Suzanne buy?
Options:
a. 10
b. 25
c. 30
d. 40

Answer: 40

Explanation:
Let the number of green apples be x and the number of red apples be 4x
4x + x = 50
x = 50 ÷ 5= 10
Number of red balls = 4x = 4 x 10 = 40
The correct answer is option d.

Common Core – Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 77

Estimate Quotients Using Compatible Numbers

Use compatible numbers to estimate the quotient.

Question 1.
389 ÷ 4
400 ÷ 4 = 100

Question 2.
358 ÷ 3
_____ ÷ 3 = _____

Answer: 120

Explanation:
What number close to358 is easy to divide by 3?
360 is close to 358. What basic fact can you use?
360 ÷ 3
Choose 360 because it is close to 358 and can easily be divided by 3.
36 ÷3 = 12
360 ÷ 3 =120
358 ÷ 3 is about 120

Question 3.
784 ÷ 8
_____ ÷ 8 = _____

Answer: 100

Explanation:
What number close to 784 is easy to divide by 8?
800 is close to 784. What basic fact can you use?
800 ÷ 8
Choose 800 because it is close to 784 and can easily be divided by 8.
80 ÷ 8 = 10
800 ÷ 8 = 100
784 ÷ 8 is about 100.

Question 4.
179 ÷ 9
_____ ÷ 9 = _____

Answer: 20

Explanation:
What number close to 179 is easy to divide by 9?
180 is close to 179. What basic fact can you use?
180 ÷ 9
Choose 180 because it is close to 179 and can easily be divided by 9.
18 ÷ 9 = 2
180 ÷ 9 = 20
179 ÷ 9 is about 20

Question 5.
315 ÷ 8
_____ ÷ 8 = _____

Answer: 40

Explanation:
What number close to 315 is easy to divide by 8?
320 is close to 315. What basic fact can you use?
320 ÷ 8
Choose 320 because it is close to 315 and can easily be divided by 8.
32 ÷ 8 = 4
320 ÷ 8 =40
315 ÷ 8 is about 40.

Question 6.
2,116 ÷ 7
_____ ÷ 7 = _____

Answer: 300

Explanation:
What number close to 2,116 is easy to divide by 7?
2,100 is close to 2,116. What basic fact can you use?
2,100 ÷ 7
Choose 2,100 because it is close to 2,116 and can easily be divided by 7.
21 ÷ 7= 3
2,100 ÷ 7 = 300
2,116 ÷ 7 is about 300

Question 7.
4,156 ÷ 7
_____ ÷ 7 = _____

Answer: 600

Explanation:
What number close to 4,156 is easy to divide by 7?
4,200 is close to 4,156. What basic fact can you use?
4,200 ÷7
Choose 4,200 because it is close to 4,156 and can easily be divided by 7.
42 ÷ 7 = 6
4,200 ÷ 7 = 600
4,156 ÷ 7 is about 600.

Question 8.
474 ÷ 9
_____ ÷ 9 = _____

Answer: 50

Explanation:
What number close to 474 is easy to divide by 9?
450 is close to 474. What basic fact can you use?
450 ÷ 9
Choose 450 because it is close to 474 and can easily be divided by 9.
45 ÷ 9 = 5
450 ÷ 9 = 50
474 ÷ 9 is about 50.

Use compatible numbers to find two estimates that the quotient is between.

Question 9.
1,624 ÷ 3
_____ ÷ 3 = _____
_____ ÷ 3 = _____

Answer: The quotient is between 500 and 600

Explanation:
What number close to 1,624 is easy to divide by 3?
1,500 is close to 1,624. What basic fact can you use?
1,500 ÷ 3
Choose 1,500 because it is close to 1,624 and can easily be divided by 3.
15 ÷ 3 = 5
1,500 ÷ 3 = 500
1,624 ÷ 3 is about 500

What number close to 1,624 is easy to divide by 3?
1,800 is close to 1,624. What basic fact can you use?
1,800 ÷ 3
Choose 1,800 because it is close to 1,624 and can easily be divided by 3.
18 ÷ 3 = 6
1,800 ÷ 3 = 600
1,624 ÷ 3 is about 600

Question 10.
2,593 ÷ 6
_____ ÷ 6 = _____
_____ ÷ 6 = _____

Answer: The quotient is between 400 and 500

Explanation:
What number close to 2,593 is easy to divide by 6?
2,400 is close to 2,593. What basic fact can you use?
2,400 ÷ 6
Choose 2,400 because it is close to 2,593 and can easily be divided by 6.
24 ÷ 6 = 4
2,400 ÷ 6 = 400
2,593 ÷ 6 is about 400

What number close to 2,593 is easy to divide by 6?
3,000 is close to 2,593. What basic fact can you use?
3000 ÷ 6
Choose 3,000 because it is close to 2,593 and can easily be divided by 6.
30 ÷ 6 = 5
3,000 ÷ 6 = 500
2,593 ÷ 6 is about 500

Question 11.
1,045 ÷ 2
_____ ÷ 2 = _____
_____ ÷ 2 = _____

Answer: The quotient is between 520 and 525

Explanation:
What number close to 1,045 is easy to divide by 2?
1,040 is close to 1,045. What basic fact can you use?
1,040 ÷ 2
Choose 1,040 because it is close to 1,045 and can easily be divided by 2.
1,04 ÷ 2 = 52
1,040 ÷ 2 = 520
1,045 ÷ 2 is about 520

What number close to 1,045 is easy to divide by 2?
1,050 is close to 1,045. What basic fact can you use?
1,050 ÷ 2
Choose 1,050 because it is close to 1,045 and can easily be divided by 2.
1,050 ÷ 2 = 525
1,045 ÷ 2 is about 525

Question 12.
1,754 ÷ 9
_____ ÷ 9 = _____
_____ ÷ 9 = _____

Answer: The quotient is between 195 and 200

Explanation:
What number close to 1,754 is easy to divide by 9?
1,755 is close to 1,754. What basic fact can you use?
1,755 ÷ 9
Choose 1,755 because it is close to 1,754 and can easily be divided by 9.
1,755 ÷ 9 = 195
1,754 ÷ 9 is about 195

What number close to 1,754 is easy to divide by 9?
1,800 is close to 1,754. What basic fact can you use?
1,800 ÷ 9
Choose 1,800 because it is close to 1,754 and can easily be divided by 9.
18 ÷ 9 = 2
1,800 ÷ 9 = 200
1,754 ÷ 9 is about 200

Question 13.
2,363 ÷ 8
_____ ÷ 8 = _____
_____ ÷ 8 = _____

Answer: The quotient is between 295 and 300

Explanation:
What number close to 2,363 is easy to divide by 8?
2,360 is close to 2,363. What basic fact can you use?
2,360 ÷ 8
Choose 2,360 because it is close to 2,363 and can easily be divided by 8.
2,360 ÷ 8 = 295
2,363 ÷ 8 is about 295

What number close to 2,363 is easy to divide by 8?
2,400 is close to 2,363. What basic fact can you use?
2,400 ÷ 8
Choose 2,400 because it is close to 2,363 and can easily be divided by 8.
24 ÷ 8 = 3
2,400 ÷ 8= 300
2,363 ÷ 8 is about 300.

Question 14.
1,649 ÷ 5
_____ ÷ 5 = _____
_____ ÷ 5 = _____

Answer: The quotient is between 329 and 330

Explanation:
What number close to 1,649 is easy to divide by 5?
1,645 is close to 1,649. What basic fact can you use?
1,645 ÷ 5
Choose 1,645 because it is close to 1,649 and can easily be divided by 5.
1,645 ÷ 5 = 329
1,649 ÷ 5 is about 329

What number close to 1,650 is easy to divide by 5?
1,650 is close to 1,649. What basic fact can you use?
1,650 ÷ 5
Choose 1,650 because it is close to 1,649 and can easily be divided by 5.
1,650 ÷ 5 = 330
1,649 ÷ 5 is about 330

Question 15.
5,535 ÷ 7
_____ ÷ 7 = _____
_____ ÷ 7 = _____

Answer: The quotient is between 790 and 791

Explanation:
What number close to 5,535 is easy to divide by 7?
5,530 is close to 5,535. What basic fact can you use?
5,530 ÷ 7
Choose 5,530 because it is close to 5,535 and can easily be divided by 7.
553 ÷ 7 = 79
5,530 ÷ 7 = 790
5,535 ÷ 7 is about 790

What number close to 5,535 is easy to divide by 7?
5,537 is close to 5,535. What basic fact can you use?
5,537 ÷ 7
Choose 5,537 because it is close to 5,535 and can easily be divided by 7.
553 ÷ 7 = 79
5,537 ÷ 7 = 791
5,535 ÷ 7 is about 791

Question 16.
3,640 ÷ 6
_____ ÷ 6 = _____
_____ ÷ 6 = _____

Answer: The quotient is between 606 and 607

Explanation:
What number close to 3,640 is easy to divide by 6?
3,636 is close to 3,640. What basic fact can you use?
3,636 ÷ 6
Choose 3,636 because it is close to 3,640 and can easily be divided by 6.
36 ÷ 6 = 6
3,636 ÷ 6 = 606
3,640 ÷ 6 is about 606

What number close to 3,640 is easy to divide by 6?
3,642 is close to 3,640. What basic fact can you use?
3,642 ÷ 6
Choose 3,642 because it is close to 3,640 and can easily be divided by 6.
3,642 ÷ 6 = 607
3,640 ÷ 6 is about 607

Problem Solving

Question 17.
A CD store sold 3,467 CDs in 7 days. About the same number of CDs were sold each day. About how many CDs did the store sell each day?
about _____ CDs

Answer: 495(approx)

Explanation:
Total number of CDs in the store= 3,467
Number of days= 7
Number of CDs sold on one day= 3,467 ÷ 7=495(approx)

Question 18.
Marcus has 731 books. He puts about the same number of books on each of 9 shelves in his a bookcase. About how many books are on each shelf?
about _____ books

Answer: 81 books(approx)

Explanation:
Total number of books Marcus has= 731
Number of shelves= 9
Number of books on each shelf= 731÷9= 81 (approx)

Common Core – Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 78

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Jamal is planting seeds for a garden nursery. He plants 9 seeds in each container. If Jamal has 296 seeds to plant, about how many containers will he use?
Options:
a. about 20
b. about 30
c. about 200
d. about 300

Answer: about 30

Explanation:
Total number of seeds Jamal has= 296
Number of seeds placed in each container= 9
Number of containers Jamal used= 296÷9= 32.8=33 (approx)
Therefore, the number of containers used is about 30
The correct answer is option b.

Question 2.
Winona purchased a set of vintage beads. There are 2,140 beads in the set. If she uses the beads to make bracelets that have 7 beads each, about how many bracelets can she make?
Options:
a. about 30
b. about 140
c. about 300
d. about 14,000

Answer: about 300

Explanation:
Total number of beads Winona has= 2,140
Number of beads in each bracelet= 7
Number of bracelets made= 2,140÷7=305.7=306(approx)
Therefore, the number of bracelets made are about 30
The correct answer is option c.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
A train traveled 360 miles in 6 hours. How many miles per hour did the train travel?
Options:
a. 60 miles per hour
b. 66 miles per hour
c. 70 miles per hour
d. 600 miles per hour

Answer: 60 miles per hour

Explanation:
Total number of miles traveled by train= 360
Time taken by the train to cover 360 miles= 6 hours
Number of miles traveled in each hour= 360÷6=60 miles
The correct answer is option a.

Question 4.
An orchard has 12 rows of pear trees. Each row has 15 pear trees. How many pear trees are there in the orchard?
Options:
a. 170
b. 180
c. 185
d. 190

Answer: 180

Explanation:
Number of rows of pear trees in an orchard= 12
Number of pear trees in each row=15
Total number of pear trees in the orchard= 12 x 15=180
The correct answer is option b.

Question 5.
Megan rounded 366,458 to 370,000. To which place did Megan round the number?
Options:
a. hundred thousands
b. ten thousands
c. thousands
d. hundreds

Answer: ten thousands

Explanation:
The given number is 366,458, the ten thousand place digit has 6 which while rounding off should be changed to the next consecutive number and the digits in the other places should be written as zeroes.
The correct answer is option b.

Question 6.
Mr. Jessup, an airline pilot, flies 1,350 miles a day. How many miles will he fly in 8 days?
Options:
a. 1,358 miles
b. 8,400 miles
c. 10,800 miles
d. 13,508 miles

Answer: 10,800 miles

Explanation:
Number of miles flew by Mr.Jessup in one day= 1,350 miles
Number of days=8
Total number of miles flew by Mr.Jessup in 8 days= 1,350 x 8= 10,800 miles.
The correct answer is option c.

Common Core – Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 79

Division and the Distributive Property

Find the quotient.

Question 1.
54 ÷ 3 = ( 30 ÷ 3) + ( 24 ÷ 3)
= 10 + 8
= 18
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core - Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 5

Question 2.
81 ÷ 3 = ______

Answer: 27

Explanation:
81 ÷ 3
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 81
STEP2 We can break the number 81 into 21 + 60
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (60 ÷ 3) + (21 ÷ 3)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 20 +7= 27

Question 3.
232 ÷ 4 = ______

Answer: 58

Explanation:
232 ÷ 4
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 232
STEP2 We can break the number 232 into 200 + 32
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (200 ÷ 4) + (32 ÷ 4)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 50 +8= 58

Question 4.
305 ÷ 5 = ______

Answer: 61

Explanation:
305 ÷ 5
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 305
STEP2 We can break the number 305 into 300 + 5
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (300 ÷ 5) + (5 ÷ 5)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 60 +1= 61

Question 5.
246 ÷ 6 = ______

Answer: 41

Explanation:
246 ÷ 6
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 246
STEP2 We can break the number 246 into 240 + 6
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (240 ÷ 6) + (6 ÷ 6)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 40 +1= 41

Question 6.
69 ÷ 3 = ______

Answer: 23

Explanation:
69 ÷ 3
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 69
STEP2 We can break the number 69 into 60 + 9
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (60 ÷ 3) + (9 ÷ 3)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 20 +3= 23

Question 7.
477 ÷ 9 = ______

Answer: 53

Explanation:
477 ÷ 9
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 477
STEP2 We can break the number 477 into 450 + 27
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (450 ÷ 9) + (27 ÷ 9)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 50 +3= 53

Question 8.
224 ÷ 7 = ______

Answer: 32

Explanation:
224 ÷ 7
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 224
STEP2 We can break the number 224 into 210 + 14
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (210 ÷ 7) + (14 ÷ 7)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 30 +2= 32

Question 9.
72 ÷ 4 = ______

Answer: 18

Explanation:
72 ÷ 4
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 72
STEP2 We can break the number 72 into 40 + 32
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (40 ÷ 4) + (32 ÷ 4)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 10 +8= 18

Question 10.
315 ÷ 3 = ______

Answer: 105

Explanation:
315 ÷ 3
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 315
STEP2 We can break the number 315 into 300 + 15
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (300 ÷ 3) + (15 ÷3)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 100 +5= 105

Problem Solving

Question 11.
Cecily picked 219 apples. She divided the apples equally into 3 baskets. How many apples are in each basket?
______ apples

Answer: 73 apples

Explanation:
The total number of apples Cecily picked= 219 apples
Number of parts into which she wanted to divide the apples= 3
Number of apples in each part = Quotient of 147 ÷ 7
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 219
STEP2 We can break the number 219 into 210 + 9
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (210 ÷ 3) + (9 ÷ 3)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 70 +3= 73

Question 12.
Jordan has 260 basketball cards. He divides them into 4 equal groups. How many cards are in each group?
______ cards

Answer: 65 cards

Explanation:
The total number of basketball cards Jordan has= 260 basketball cards
Number of parts into which he wanted to divide the cards= 4
Number of apples in each part = Quotient of 260 ÷ 4
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 260
STEP2 We can break the number 260 into 240 + 20
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (240 ÷ 4) + (20 ÷ 4)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 60 +5= 65

Question 13.
The Wilsons drove 324 miles in 6 hours. If they drove the same number of miles each hour, how many miles did they drive in 1 hour?
______ miles

Answer: 54 miles

Explanation:
The total number of miles drove by Wilson= 324 miles
Number of hours he drove = 6
Number of miles drove in each hour = Quotient of 324 ÷ 6
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 324
STEP2 We can break the number 324 into 300 + 24
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (300 ÷ 6) + (24 ÷ 6)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 50 +4= 54

Question 14.
Phil has 189 stamps to put into his stamp album. He puts the same number of stamps on each of 9 pages. How many stamps does Phil put on each page?
______ stamps

Answer: 21 stamps

Explanation:
The total number of stamps Phil has= 189 stamps
Number of pages= 9
Number of stamps put on each page = Quotient of 189 ÷ 9
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 189
STEP2 We can break the number 189 into 180 + 9
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (180 ÷ 9) + (9 ÷ 9)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 20 +1= 21

Common Core – Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 80

Lesson Check

Question 1.
A landscaping company planted 176 trees in 8 equal rows in the new park. How many trees did the company plant in each row?
Options:
a. 18
b. 20
c. 22
d. 24

Answer: 22

Explanation:
The total number of trees in the landscaping= 176 trees
Number of rows= 8
Number of trees in each row = Quotient of 176 ÷ 8
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 176
STEP2 We can break the number 176 into 160 + 16
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (160 ÷ 8) + (16 ÷ 8)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 20 +2= 22

Question 2.
Arnold can do 65 pushups in 5 minutes. How many pushups can he do in 1 minute?
Options:
a. 11
b. 13
c. 15
d. 17

Answer: 13

Explanation:
The total number of pushups done by Arnold = 65
Number of minutes spent on pushups= 5
Number of pushups done in each minute = Quotient of 65 ÷ 5
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 65
STEP2 We can break the number 65 into 60 + 5
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (60 ÷ 5) + (5 ÷ 5)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 12 +1= 13

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Last Saturday, there were 1,486 people at the Cineplex. There were about the same number of people in each of the 6 theaters. Which is the best estimate of the number of people in each theater?
Options:
a. between 20 and 30
b. between 80 and 90
c. between 100 and 200
d. between 200 and 300

Answer: between 200 and 300

Explanation:
Total number of people at the Cineplex= 1,486 people
Number of theatres = 6
Number of people at each theatre= estimate of the number of people 1,486 ÷ 6

What number close to 1,486 is easy to divide by 6?
1,488 is close to 1,486. What basic fact can you use?
1,488 ÷ 6
Choose 1,488 because it is close to 1,486 and can easily be divided by 6.
1,488 ÷ 6 = 248
1,486 ÷ 6 is about 248

What number close to 1,486 is easy to divide by 6?
1,482 is close to 1,486 . What basic fact can you use?
1,482 ÷ 6
Choose 1,482 because it is close to 1,486 and can easily be divided by 6.
1,482 ÷ 6 = 247
1,486 ÷ 6 is about 247

Question 4.
Nancy walked 50 minutes each day for 4 days last week. Gillian walked 35 minutes each day for 6 days last week. Which statement is true?
Options:
a. Gillian walked 10 minutes more than Nancy.
b. Gillian walked 20 minutes more than Nancy.
c. Nancy walked 10 minutes more than Gillian.
d. Nancy walked 15 minutes more than Gillian.

Answer: Nancy walked 15 minutes more than Gillian.

Explanation:
Time walked by Nancy= 50 minutes
Time walked by Gillian= 35 minutes
Nancy walked more time compared to Gillian
50-35=15 minutes
Therefore, Nancy walked 15 minutes more than Gillian.

Question 5.
Three boys share 28 toy cars equally. Which best describes how the cars are shared?
Options:
a. Each gets 3 cars with 1 left over.
b. Each gets 8 cars with 2 left over.
c. Each gets 9 cars with 1 left over.
d. Each gets 10 cars with 2 left over.

Answer: Each gets 9 cars with 1 left over.

Explanation:
Total number of toys three boys have= 28
Number of toys each boy got= 28 ÷3=9.33
Therefore we can say that each gets 9 cars with 1 leftover.

Question 6.
An airplane flies at a speed of 474 miles per hour. How many miles does the plane fly in 5 hours?
Options:
a. 2,070 miles
b. 2,140 miles
c. 2,370 miles
d. 2,730 miles

Answer: 2,370 miles

Explanation:
Number of miles flew by airplane in one hour= 474
Number of hours the airplane flew= 5 hours
Total number of miles flew in 5 hours= 474 x 5= 2,370 miles

Common Core – Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 81

Divide Using Repeated Subtraction

Use repeated subtraction to divide.

Question 1.
42 ÷ 3 = 14
3)\(\overline { 42 } \)
-30 ← 10 × 3 | 10
——-
12
-12 ← 4 × 3 | +4
——-             ———
0                     14

Question 2.
72 ÷ 4 = ______

Answer: 18

Explanation:
A. Begin with 72 counters. Subtract 4 counters.
B. Subtract 4 counters from 72 and repeat the processes until the remainder cannot be subtracted from the divisor.
C. Record the number of counters left and the number of times you subtracted.
D. The number of times you subtracted is the quotient is 18

Question 3.
93 ÷ 3 = ______

Answer: 31

Explanation:
A. Begin with 93 counters. Subtract 3 counters.
B. Subtract 3 counters from 93 and repeat the processes until the remainder cannot be subtracted from the divisor.
C. Record the number of counters left and the number of times you subtracted.
D. The number of times you subtracted is the quotient is 31

Question 4.
35 ÷ 4 = ______ r ______

Answer: 8r3

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 35 counters to represent the 35 dominoes. Then draw 4 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 4 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 35 ÷ 4
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 4 counters, therefore, the quotient is 8
Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 3
For 35 ÷ 4, the quotient is 8 and the remainder is 3, or 8 r3.

Question 5.
93 ÷ 10 = ______ r ______

Answer: 9r3

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 93 counters to represent the 93 dominoes. Then draw 10 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 10 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 93 ÷ 10
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 10 counters, therefore, the quotient is 9
Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 3
For 93 ÷ 10, the quotient is 9 and the remainder is 3, or 9 r3.

Question 6.
86 ÷ 9 = ______ r ______

Answer: 9r5

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 86 counters to represent the 86 dominoes. Then draw 9 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 9 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 86 ÷ 9
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 9 counters, therefore, the quotient is 9
Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 5
For 86 ÷ 9, the quotient is 9 and the remainder is 5, or 9 r5.

Draw a number line to divide.

Question 7.
70 ÷ 5 = ______

Answer: 14

Explanation:
A. Draw a number line with 5 as each interval.
B. Draw up to 70 and count the intervals, it gives the quotient.
C. The quotient is 14

Problem Solving

Question 8.
Gretchen has 48 small shells. She uses 2 shells to make one pair of earrings. How many pairs of earrings can she make?
______ pairs

Answer: 24 pairs

Explanation:
Total number of small shells= 48
Number of shells used to make one pair of earrings = 2
Number of pair of earrings made = 48 ÷ 2 =24

Question 9.
James wants to purchase a telescope for $54. If he saves $3 per week, in how many weeks will he have saved enough to purchase the telescope?
______ weeks

Answer: $18

Explanation:
Cost of the telescope=$54
Amount saved each week = $3
Number of weeks he has to save the money to purchase the telescope = $54 ÷ $3 = $18

Common Core – Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 82

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Randall collects postcards that his friends send him when they travel. He can put 6 cards on one scrapbook page. How many pages does Randall need to fit 42 postcards?
Options:
a. 3
b. 4
c. 6
d. 7

Answer: 7

Explanation:
Total number of postcards Randall has = 42 postcards
Number of postcards on one scrapbook page = 6 cards
Number of pages needed to fit the postcards = 42 ÷ 6=7
The correct answer is option d.

Question 2.
Ari stocks shelves at a grocery store. He puts 35 cans of juice on each shelf. The shelf has 4 equal rows and another row with only 3 cans. How many cans are in each of the equal rows?
Options:
a. 6
b. 7
c. 8
d. 9

Answer: 8

Explanation:
Total number of cans of juice on each shelf = 35
Number of rows = 4
Number of cans on the other shelf = 3
Number of cans placed on the first shelf = 35 – 3 = 32
Number of juice cans in the first row = 32 ÷ 4 = 8 cans
The correct answer is option c.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Fiona sorted her CDs into separate bins. She placed 4 CDs in each bin. If she has 160 CDs, how many bins did she fill?
Options:
a. 4
b. 16
c. 40
d. 156

Answer: 40

Explanation:
Total number of CD’s in Fiona has = 160 CD’s
Number of CD’s placed in each bin = 4
Number of bins required to place the CD’s = 160 ÷ 4 = 40
The correct answer is option c.

Question 4.
Eamon is arranging 39 books on 3 shelves. If he puts the same number of books on each shelf, how many books will there be on each shelf?
Options:
a. 11
b. 12
c. 13
d. 14

Answer: 13

Explanation:
Total number of books Eamon has = 39 books
Number of shelves = 3
Number of books in each shelf = 39 ÷ 3 = 13
The correct answer is option c.

Question 5.
A newborn boa constrictor measures 18 inches long. An adult boa constrictor measures 9 times the length of the newborn plus 2 inches. How long is the adult?
Options:
a. 142 inches
b. 162 inches
c. 164 inches
d. 172 inches

Answer: 164 inches

Explanation:
Length of newborn boa constrictor = 18 inches
Length of an adult boa constrictor = 9 x Length of newborn boa constrictor = 9 x 18 = 162
Total length of an adult boa constrictor = 162 + 2 = 164 inches
The correct answer is option c.

Question 6.
Madison has 6 rolls of coins. Each roll has 20 coins. How many coins does Madison have in all?
Options:
a. 110
b. 120
c. 125
d. 130

Answer: 120

Explanation:
Number of rolls of coins = 6
Number of coins in each roll = 20
Total number of coins Madison has = 20 x 6 = 120
The correct answer is option b.

Common Core – Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 83

Divide Using Partial Quotients

Divide. Use partial quotients.

Question 1.
8)\(\overline { 184 } \)
-80 ← 10 × 8 10
——-
104
-80 ← 10 × 8 +10
-24
-24 ← 3 × 8  +3
——-              ———
0                      23

Question 2.
6)\(\overline { 258 } \)
______

Answer: 43

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 40 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 6.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 3 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 40 x 6 = 240 : 258 – 240 = 18
3 x 6 = 18 : 18 – 18 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 43 ( 40 + 3)

Question 3.
5)\(\overline { 630 } \)
______

Answer: 126

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 5.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 20 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 5 = 500 : 630 – 500 = 130
5 x 20 = 100 : 130 – 100 = 30 : 5 x 6 = 30 : 30 – 30 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 126 ( 100 + 20 + 6)

Divide. Use rectangular models to record the partial quotients.

Question 4.
246 ÷ 3 = ____

Answer: 82

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 80 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 3.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 80 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 80 x 3 = 240 : 246 – 240 = 6
3 x 2 = 6 : 6 – 6 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 82 ( 80 + 2)
The rectangle models are given below :

Question 5.
126 ÷ 2 = ____

Answer: 63

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 60 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple,2.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 60 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 60 x 2 = 120 : 126 – 120 = 6
2 x 3 = 6 : 6 – 6 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 63 ( 60 +3)
The rectangle models are given below :

Question 6.
605 ÷ 5 = ____

Answer: 121

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 5.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 20 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 5 = 500 : 605 – 500 = 105
5 x 20 = 100 : 105 – 100 = 5 : 5 x 1 = 5 : 5 – 5 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 121 ( 100 + 20 + 1)
The rectangle models are given below :

Divide. Use either way to record the partial quotients.

Question 7.
492 ÷ 3 = ____

Answer: 164

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 3.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 50 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 3 = 300 : 492 – 300 = 192
50 x 3 = 150 : 192 – 150 = 42 : 3 x 14 = 42 : 42 – 42 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 164 ( 100 + 50 + 14)

Question 8.
224 ÷ 7 = ____

Answer: 32

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 30 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 7.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 30 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 30 x 7 = 210 : 224 – 210 = 14
7 x 2 = 14 : 14 – 14 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 32 ( 30 + 2)

Question 9.
692 ÷ 4 = ____

Answer: 173

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 4.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 100 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 4 = 400 : 692 – 400 = 392
4 x 50 = 200 : 392 – 200 = 192 : 4 x 48 = 192 : 192 – 192 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 198 ( 100 + 50 + 48)

Problem Solving

Question 10.
Allison took 112 photos on vacation. She wants to put them in a photo album that holds 4 photos on each page. How many pages can she fill?
____ pages

Answer: 28 pages

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 20 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 4.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 20 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 20 x 4 = 80 : 112 – 80 = 32
4 x 8 = 32 : 32 – 32 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 28 ( 20 + 8)

Question 11.
Hector saved $726 in 6 months. He saved the same amount each month. How much did Hector save each month?
$ ____

Answer: $121

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 6.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 100 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 6 = 600 : 726 – 600 = 126
6 x 20 = 120 : 126 – 120 = 6 : 6 x 1 = 6 : 6 – 6 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 121 ( 100 + 20 +1)

Common Core – Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 84

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Annaka used partial quotients to divide 145 ÷ 5. Which shows a possible sum of partial quotients?
Options:
a. 50 + 50 + 45
b. 100 + 40 + 5
c. 10 + 10 + 9
d. 10 + 4 + 5

Answer: 10 + 10 + 9

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 4.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 10 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 10 x 5 = 50 : 145 – 50 = 95
5 x 10 = 50 : 95 – 50 = 45 : 5 x 9 = 45 : 45 – 45 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 29 ( 10 + 10 +9)

Question 2.
Mel used partial quotients to find the quotient 378 ÷ 3. Which might show the partial quotients that Mel found?
Options:
a. 100, 10, 10, 9
b. 100, 10, 10, 6
c. 100, 30, 30, 6
d. 300, 70, 8

Answer: 100, 10, 10, 6

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 3.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 10 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 3 = 300 : 378 – 300 = 78
10 x 3 =30 : 78 – 30 = 48 : 3 x 16 = 48 : 48 – 48 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 126 ( 100 + 10 +10 + 6)

Spiral Review

Question 3.
What are the partial products of 42 × 5?
Options:
a. 9 and 7
b. 20 and 10
c. 200 and 7
d. 200 and 10

Answer: 200 and 10

Explanation:
STEP1
42 x 5
Start by multiplying the digit five with the units digit 2 = 5 x 2 =10
Multiply the digit 5 with 4 in the tens place = 4 x 5 = 20
Since 4 is in the tens place when we multiply 4 and 5 we must place it in the hundreds place by assuming the units digit to be zero.
Therefore, the partial product of 42 x 5 = 200

Question 4.
Mr. Watson buys 4 gallons of paint that cost $34 per gallon. How much does Mr. Watson spend on paint?
Options:
a. $38
b. $126
c. $136
d. $1,216

Answer: $136

Explanation:
Cost of each gallon of paint = $34
Number of gallons = 4
The total cost of the gallons = $ 34 x 4 = $136

Question 5.
Use the area model to find the product 28 × 32.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core - Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 6
Options:
a. 840
b. 856
c. 880
d. 896

Answer: 896

Explanation:
The whole rectangle is divided into four small rectangles the areas of these rectangles are:

Area of yellow rectangle= 30 x 20=600
Area of green rectangle= 2 x 20 = 40
Area of pink rectangle= 8 x 30= 240
Area of blue rectangle= 2 x 8= 16
Product of 32 and 28 = Area of yellow rectangle + Area of green rectangle + Area of pink rectangle + Area of the blue rectangle = 600+40+240+16 = 896

Question 6.
An adult male lion eats about 108 pounds of meat per week. About how much meat does an adult male lion eat in one day?
Options:
a. about 14 pounds
b. about 15 pounds
c. about 16 pounds
d. about 17 pounds

Answer: about 15 pounds

Explanation:
Mass of meat an adult lion eats in one week = 108
Number of days in a week = 7
Mass of meat ate by the lion in one day = 108 ÷ 7 = 15.4 pounds = about 15 pounds

Common Core – Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 85

Model Division with Regrouping

Divide. Use base-ten blocks.

Question 1.
63 ÷ 4 = 15 r3
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core - Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 7

Explanation:
A. draw 4 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 63. Show 63 as 6 tens and 3 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 4 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 4 groups.
D. There are 1 ten(s) and 5 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 15.
E. After grouping, there are 3 blocks that weren’t grouped. So, the remainder is 3

Question 2.
83 ÷ 3
_____ R _____

Answer: 27 r 2

Explanation:
A. Draw 3 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 83. Show 83 as 8 tens and 3 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 3 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 3 groups.
D. There are 2 ten(s) and 7 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 27.
E. After grouping, there are 2 blocks that weren’t grouped. So, the remainder is 2

Divide. Draw quick pictures. Record the steps.

Question 3.
85 ÷ 5
_____

Answer: 17

Explanation:
A. Draw 5 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 85. Show 85 as 8 tens and 5 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 5 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 5 groups.
D. There are 1 ten(s) and 7 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 17.

Question 4.
97 ÷ 4
_____ R _____

Answer: 24 r 1

Explanation:
A. Draw 4 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 97. Show 97 as 9 tens and 7 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 4 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 4 groups.
D. There are 2 ten(s) and 4 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 24.
E. After grouping, there is 1 block that wasn’t grouped. So, the remainder is 1.

Problem Solving

Question 5.
Tamara sold 92 cold drinks during her 2-hour shift at a festival food stand. If she sold the same number of drinks each hour, how many cold drinks did she sell each hour?
_____ cold drinks

Answer: 46 cold drinks

Explanation:
Total number of cold drinks Tamara sold = 92
The time in which she sold the drinks = 2 hours
Number of drinks she sold in each hour = 92 ÷ 2 = 46

Question 6.
In 3 days Donald earned $42 running errands. He earned the same amount each day. How much did Donald earn from running errands each day?
$ _____

Answer: $14

Explanation:
Total amount earned by Donald = $42
Number of days = 3
Amount earned on each day = $42 ÷ 3 = $14

Common Core – Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 86

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Gail bought 80 buttons to put on the shirts she makes. She uses 5 buttons for each shirt. How many shirts can Gail make with the buttons she bought?
Options:
a. 14
b. 16
c. 17
d. 18

Answer: 16

Explanation:
Total number of buttons = 80
Number of buttons used for each shirt = 5
Number of shirts she can make = 80 ÷ 5 =16
The correct answer is option b.

Question 2.
Marty counted how many breaths he took in 3 minutes. In that time, he took 51 breaths. He took the same number of breaths each minute. How many breaths did Marty take in one minute?
Options:
a. 15
b. 16
c. 17
d. 19

Answer: 17

Explanation:
Total number of breaths Marty counted = 51
Time in which the breath was counted = 3 minutes
Number of breaths in one minute = 51 ÷ 3 = 17
The correct answer is option c.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Kate is solving brain teasers. She solved 6 brain teasers in 72 minutes. How long did she spend on each brain teaser?
Options:
a. 12 minutes
b. 14 minutes
c. 18 minutes
d. 22 minutes

Answer: 12 minutes

Explanation:
Number of brain teasers solved = 6
Number of minutes spent on brain teasers = 72 minutes
Number of minutes spent on each problem = 72 ÷ 6 =12 minutes
The correct answer is option a.

Question 4.
Jenny works at a package delivery store. She puts mailing stickers on packages. Each package needs 5 stickers. How many stickers will Jenny use if she is mailing 105 packages?
Options:
a. 725
b. 625
c. 525
d. 21

Answer: 525

Explanation:
Number of packages = 105
Number of stickers on each package = 5
Total number of stickers on the packages = 105 x 5 = 525
The correct answer is option c.

Question 5.
The Puzzle Company packs standardized puzzles into boxes that hold 8 puzzles. How many boxes would it take to pack up 192 standard-sized puzzles?
Options:
a. 12
b. 16
c. 22
d. 24

Answer: 24

Explanation:
Total number of puzzles = 192
Number of puzzles in each box = 8
Number of boxes used = 192 ÷ 8 = 24 boxes
The correct answer is option d.

Question 6.
Mt. Whitney in California is 14,494 feet tall. Mt. McKinley in Alaska is 5,826 feet taller than Mt. Whitney. How tall is Mt. McKinley?
Options:
a. 21,310 feet
b. 20,320 feet
c. 20,230 feet
d. 19,310 feet

Answer: 20,320 feet

Explanation:
Height of Mt. Whitney in California = 14,494 feet
The height of Mt. McKinley in Alaska is 5,826 feet taller than Mt. Whitney.
Therefore the height of Mt. McKinley in Alaska = 14,494 feet + 5,826 feet = 20,320 feet
The correct answer is option b.

Common Core – Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 87

Place the First Digit

Divide.

Question 1.
62
3)\(\overline { 186 } \)
-18
——–
06
-6
——–
0

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 186. 180 hundred can be shared among 3 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 18 tens and 6 ones to share among 3 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the tens place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 180 ÷ 3
Multiply. 3 × 60 = 180
Subtract. 186 − 180 = 6 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 6 ones to share among 3 groups.
Divide. 6 ones ÷ 3
Multiply. 2×3 ones
Subtract. 6 ones − 2 ones =0 one
So, the quotient is 62 (60 + 2) and the remainder is 0

Question 2.
4)\(\overline { 298 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 298. 280 hundred can be shared among 4 groups
without regrouping.
Now there are 28 tens and 18 ones to share among 4 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 280 ÷ 4
Multiply. 4 × 70 = 280
Subtract. 280 − 280 = 0 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 18 ones to share among 4 groups.
Divide. 18 ones ÷ 4
Multiply. 4×4 ones
Subtract. 18 ones − 16 ones = 2 ones
So, the quotient is 74 (70 + 4) and the remainder is 2.

Question 3.
3)\(\overline { 461 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 153

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 461. 450 hundred can be shared among 3 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 45 tens and 11 ones to share among 3 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 450 ÷ 3
Multiply. 3 × 150 = 450
Subtract. 450 − 450 = 0 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 11 ones to share among 3 groups.
Divide. 11 ones ÷ 3
Multiply. 3×3 ones
Subtract. 11 ones − 9 ones = 2 ones
So, the quotient is 153 (150 + 3) and the remainder is 2

Question 4.
9)\(\overline { 315 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 35

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 315. 310 hundred can be shared among 9 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 31 tens and 5 ones to share among 9 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide.310 ÷ 9
Multiply. 9 × 30 = 270
Subtract. 310 − 270 = 40 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 40 + 5 = 45 ones to share among 9 groups.
Divide. 45 ones ÷ 9
Multiply. 5×9 ones
Subtract. 45 ones − 45 ones = 0 ones
So, the quotient is 35 (30 + 5) and the remainder is 0

Question 5.
2)\(\overline { 766 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 383

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 766. 760 hundred can be shared among 2 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 76 tens and 6 ones to share among 2 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 760 ÷ 2
Multiply. 2 × 380 = 760
Subtract. 760 − 760 = 0 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 6 ones to share among 2 groups.
Divide. 6 ones ÷ 2
Multiply. 2×3 ones
Subtract. 6 ones − 6 ones = 0 ones
So, the quotient is 383 (380 + 3) and the remainder is 0

Question 6.
4)\(\overline { 604 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 151

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 604. 600 hundred can be shared among 4 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 60 tens and 4 ones to share among 4 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 600 ÷ 4
Multiply. 4 × 150 = 600
Subtract. 600 − 600 = 0 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 4 ones to share among 4 groups.
Divide. 4 ones ÷ 4
Multiply. 4×1 ones
Subtract. 4 ones − 4 ones = 0 ones
So, the quotient is 151 (150 + 1) and the remainder is 0

Question 7.
6)\(\overline { 796 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 132

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 796. 790 hundred can be shared among 6 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 79 tens and 6 ones to share among 6 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 790 ÷ 6
Multiply. 6 × 131 = 786
Subtract. 790 − 786 = 4 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 4 + 6 = 10 ones to share among 6 groups.
Divide. 10 ones ÷ 6
Multiply. 6×1 ones
Subtract. 10 ones − 6 ones = 4 ones
So, the quotient is 132 (131 + 1) and the remainder is 4.

Question 8.
5)\(\overline { 449 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 89

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 449. 440 hundred can be shared among 5 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 44 tens and 9 ones to share among 5 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 440 ÷ 5
Multiply. 5 × 88 = 440
Subtract. 440 − 440 = 0 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 9 ones to share among 5 groups.
Divide. 9 ones ÷ 5
Multiply. 5×1 ones
Subtract. 9 ones − 5 ones = 4 ones
So, the quotient is 89 (88 + 1) and the remainder is 4

Question 9.
6)\(\overline { 756 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 126

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 756. 750 hundred can be shared among 6 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 75 tens and 6 ones to share among 6 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 750 ÷ 6
Multiply. 6 × 125 = 750
Subtract. 750 − 750 = 0 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 6 ones to share among 6 groups.
Divide. 6 ones ÷ 6
Multiply. 6×1 ones
Subtract. 6 ones − 6 ones = 0 ones
So, the quotient is 126 (125 + 1) and the remainder is 0

Question 10.
7)\(\overline { 521 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 74

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 521. 520 hundred can be shared among 7 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 52 tens and 1 one to share among 7 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 520 ÷ 7
Multiply. 7 × 74 = 518
Subtract. 520 − 518 = 2 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 2 + 1 = 3 ones to share among 7 groups.
Divide. 3 ones ÷ 7 (not possible)
So, the quotient is 74 and the remainder is 3

Question 11.
5)\(\overline { 675 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 135

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 675. 670 hundred can be shared among 5 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 67 tens and 5 ones to share among 5 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 670 ÷ 5
Multiply. 5 × 134 = 670
Subtract. 670 − 670 = 0 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 5 ones to share among 5 groups.
Divide. 5 ones ÷ 5
Multiply. 5×1 ones
Subtract. 5 ones − 5 ones = 0 ones
So, the quotient is 135 (134 + 1) and the remainder is 0.

Question 12.
8)\(\overline { 933 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 116

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 933. 930 hundred can be shared among 8 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 93 tens and 3 ones to share among 8 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 930 ÷ 8
Multiply. 8 × 116 = 928
Subtract. 930 − 928 = 2 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 2 + 3 = 5 ones to share among 8 groups.
Divide. 5 ones ÷ 8 (not possible)
So, the quotient is 116 (100 + 3) and the remainder is 5.

Problem Solving

Question 13.
There are 132 projects in the science fair. If 8 projects can fit in a row, how many full rows of projects can be made? How many projects are in the row that is not full?
_____ full rows
_____ projects in the non-full row

Answer: 16 full rows and 4 projects in the non-full row

Explanation:
Total number of projects = 132
Number of projects placed in full row = 8
Number of rows having full projects =Quotient of 132 ÷ 8 = 16
Number of projects in the non-full row = Remainder of 132 ÷ 8 = 4

Question 14.
There are 798 calories in six 10-ounce bottles of apple juice. How many calories are there in one 10-ounce bottle of apple juice?
_____ R _____ calories in one 10-ounce bottles of juice

Answer: 133 calories

Explanation:
Number of calories in 6 bottles of apple juice = 798
Number of calories in each bottle = 798 ÷6 = 133 calories

Common Core – Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 88

Lesson Check

Question 1.
To divide 572 ÷ 4, Stanley estimated to place the first digit of the quotient. In which place is the first digit of the quotient?
Options:
a. ones
b. tens
c. hundreds
d. thousands

Answer: hundreds

Explanation:
The quotient of 572÷ 4 is 143
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 572. 560 hundred can be shared among 4 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 1 ten to share among 4 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.

Question 2.
Onetta biked 325 miles in 5 days. If she biked the same number of miles each day, how far did she bike each day?
Options:
a. 1,625 miles
b. 320 miles
c. 65 miles
d. 61 miles

Answer: 65 miles

Explanation:
Total number of miles biked = 325 miles
Number of days biked = 5
Number of miles biked on each day = Quotient of 325 ÷ 5 = 65

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Mort makes beaded necklaces that he sells for $32 each. About how much will Mort make if he sells 36 necklaces at the local art fair?
Options:
a. $120
b. $900
c. $1,200
d. $1,600

Answer: $1,200

Explanation:
Cost of each beaded necklace = $32
Number of necklaces = 36
The total cost of the necklaces = $32 x 36 = $1,200 (approx)

Question 4.
Which is the best estimate of 54 × 68?
Options:
a. 4,200
b. 3,500
c. 3,000
d. 350

Answer: 3,500

Explanation:

Taking the terms nearest to the 54 x 68 as 54 x 65 = 3510 = 3500 (approx)

Question 5.
Ms. Eisner pays $888 for 6 nights in a hotel. How much does Ms. Eisner pay per night?
Options:
a. $5,328
b. $882
c. $148
d. $114

Answer: $148

Explanation:
Total pays of Ms Eisner in a hotel = $888
Number of nights = 6
Amount Ms Eisner pay per night = $888 ÷ 6 = $148

Question 6.
Which division problem does the model show?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core - Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 8
Options:
a. 42 ÷ 3
b. 44 ÷3
c. 51 ÷ 3
d. 54 ÷ 3

Answer: 54 ÷ 3

Explanation:
Number of counters in each model = 18
Number of models = 3
Total number of counters = 18 x 3 = 54
Therefore the model displays = 54 ÷ 3

Common Core – Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 89

Divide by 1-Digit Numbers

Divide and check.

Question 1.
318
\(\overline { 2)636 } \) 318
-6     × 2
———  ———
03 636
-2
———
16
-16
———
0

Question 2.
4)\(\overline { 631 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 3 Divide the tens.
STEP 4 Divide the ones.

Question 3.
8)\(\overline { 906 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 3 Divide the tens.
STEP 4 Divide the ones.

Question 4.
6)\(\overline { 6,739 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the thousands in 6,739. 6 thousand can be shared among 6 groups without regrouping. The first digit of the quotient will be in the thousands place.
STEP 2 Divide the thousands.
STEP 3 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 4 Divide the tens.
STEP 5 Divide the ones.

Question 5.
4)\(\overline { 2,328 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the thousands in 2,328. 2 thousand can be shared among 4 groups without regrouping. The first digit of the quotient will be in the thousands place.
STEP 2 Divide the thousands.
STEP 3 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 4 Divide the tens.
STEP 5 Divide the ones.

Question 6.
5)\(\overline { 7,549 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the thousands in 7,549. 7 thousand can be shared among 5 groups without regrouping. The first digit of the quotient will be in the thousands place.
STEP 2 Divide the thousands.
STEP 3 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 4 Divide the tens.
STEP 5 Divide the ones.

Problem Solving

Use the table for 7 and 8.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core - Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 9

Question 7.
The Briggs rented a car for 5 weeks. What was the cost of their rental car per week?
$ _____

Answer: $197

Explanation:
Cost of the car of Briggs = $985
Number of weeks = 5
Cost of rent per week = $985 ÷ 5 =$ 197

Question 8.
The Lees rented a car for 4 weeks. The Santos rented a car for 2 weeks. Whose weekly rental cost was lower? Explain.
The rental cost of _________

Answer: Weekly rental cost was lower for Lees compared to Santos

Explanation:
Cost of the car of Lees = $632
Number of weeks = 4
Cost of rent per week = $632 ÷ 4 =$ 158

Cost of the car of Santos = $328
Number of weeks = 2
Cost of rent per week = $328 ÷ 2 =$ 164
Therefore weekly rental cost was lower for Lees compared to Santos.

Common Core – Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 90

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Which expression can be used to check
the quotient 646 ÷ 3?
Options:
a. (251 × 3) + 1
b. (215 × 3) + 2
c. (215 × 3) + 1
d. 646 × 3

Answer: (215 × 3) + 1

Explanation:
Multiply 215 x 3 = 645
Then add 1 to 645
Then the dividend is 645 + 1 = 646
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 2.
There are 8 volunteers at the telethon. The goal for the evening is to raise $952. If each volunteer raises the same amount, what is the minimum amount each needs to raise to meet the goal?
Options:
a. $7,616
b. $944
c. $119
d. $106

Answer: $7,616

Explanation:
Number of volunteers = 8
Amount raised by each volunteer = $952
Total amount raised = $952 x 8 = $7,616

Thus the correct answer is option a.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Which product is shown by the model?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core - Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 10
Options:
a. 5 × 15 = 75
b. 5 × 16 = 80
c. 5 × 17 = 75
d. 5 × 17 = 85

Answer: 5 × 17 = 85

Explanation:
By counting the number of counters we can give the expression.
Number of counters in one row = 17
Number of rows = 5
Therefore the expression = 5 × 17 = 85
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 4.
The computer lab at a high school ordered 26 packages of CDs. There were 50 CDs in each package. How many CDs did the computer lab order?
Options:
a. 1,330
b. 1,300
c. 1,030
d. 130

Answer: 1,300

Explanation:
Number of packages = 26
Number of CDs in each pack = 50
Total number of CDs the computer lab ordered = 26 x 50 = 1,300
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 5.
Which of the following division problems has a quotient with the first digit in the hundreds place?
Options:
a. 892 ÷ 9
b. 644 ÷ 8
c. 429 ÷ 5
d. 306 ÷ 2

Answer: 306 ÷ 2

Explanation:
Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 306. 300 hundred can be shared among 2 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 30 tens and 6 ones to share among 2 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 6.
Sharon has 64 ounces of juice. She is going to use the juice to fill as many 6-ounce glasses as possible. She will drink the leftover juice. How much juice will Sharon drink?
Options:
a. 4 ounces
b. 6 ounces
c. 10 ounces
d. 12 ounces

Answer: 4 ounces

Explanation:
The total quantity of juice = 64 ounces
Quantity of juice she filled = 6 ounces
Quantity of juice she drank = Remainder of 64 ÷ 6 = 4

Thus the correct answer is option a.

Common Core – Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 91

Problem Solving Multistep Division Problems

Solve. Draw a diagram to help you.

Question 1.
There are 3 trays of eggs. Each tray holds 30 eggs. How many people can be served if each person eats 2 eggs?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core - Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 11
Think: What do I need to find? How can I draw a diagram to help?
45 people can be served

Question 2.
There are 8 pencils in a package. How many packages will be needed for 28 children if each child gets 4 pencils?
______ packages

Answer: 14 packages

Explanation:
Number of pencils in each package = 8

Number of children = 28

Number of pencils each child needs = 4
Total number of pencils = 28 x 4 =112
Number of packages = 112 ÷ 8 = 14

Question 3.
There are 3 boxes of tangerines. Each box has 93 tangerines. The tangerines will be divided equally among 9 classrooms. How many tangerines will each classroom get?
______ tangerines

Answer: 31

Explanation:
Number of boxes = 3
Number of tangerines in each box = 93
Total number of tangerines = 93 x 3 = 279

Number of classrooms = 9
Number of tangerines in each classroom = 279 ÷ 9 = 31

Question 4.
Misty has 84 photos from her vacation and 48 photos from a class outing. She wants to put all the photos in an album with 4 photos on each page. How many pages does she need?
______ pages

Answer: 33 pages

Explanation:
Number of photos from her vacation = 84

Number of photos from her class outing = 48

Total number of photos = 84 + 48 = 132
Number of photos in each page = 4
Number of pages required = 132 ÷ 4 = 33

Common Core – Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 93

Lessons 4.1, 4.5

Estimate the quotient.

Question 1.
67 ÷ 4
about ______

Answer: About 17

Explanation:
The number close to 67 is 70.
Divide 70 by 4 is 17.5
Thus the estimated quotient of 67 ÷ 4 is 17.

Question 2.
72 ÷ 5
about ______

Answer: About 14

Explanation:
The number close to 72 is 70.
Divide 70 by 5 is 14.
Thus the estimated quotient of 72 ÷ 5 is 14.

Question 3.

213 ÷ 3
about ______

Answer: About 70

Explanation:
The number close to 213 is 210.
Divide 210 by 3 is 70.
Thus the estimated quotient of 213 ÷ 3 is 70.

Question 4.
484 ÷ 6
about ______

Answer: About 80

Explanation:
The number close to 484 is 480.
Divide 480 by 6 is 80.
Thus the estimated quotient of 484 ÷ 6 is 80.

Question 5.
446 ÷ 7
about ______

Answer: About 60

Explanation:
The number close to 446 is 440.
Divide 440 by 7 is 60.
Thus the estimated quotient of 446 ÷ 7 is 60.

Question 6.
1,246 ÷ 4
about ______

Answer: About 300

Explanation:
The number close to 1246 is 1200.
Divide 1200 by 4 is 300.
Thus the estimated quotient of 1,246 ÷ 4 is 300.

Question 7.
708 ÷ 9
about ______

Answer: About 80

Explanation:
The number close to 708 is 700.
Divide 700 by 9 is 80 (approx).
Thus the estimated quotient of 708 ÷ 9 is 80.

Question 8.
2,657 ÷ 3
about ______

Answer: About 900

Explanation:
The number close to 2,657 is 2700.
Divide 2700 by 3 is 900.
Thus the estimated quotient of 2,657 ÷ 3 is 900.

Lesson 4.2

Use counters or quick pictures to find the quotient and remainder.

Question 9.
44 ÷ 5
______ R ______

Answer: 8R4

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 44 counters to represent the 44 dominoes. Then draw 5 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 5 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of groups of counters formed = quotient of 44 ÷ 5
D. Number of circles equally filled is8, therefore, the quotient is 8.
Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 4
For 44 ÷ 5, the quotient is 8 and the remainder is 4, or 8R4.

Question 10.
8)\(\overline { 21 } \)
______ R ______

Answer: 2R5

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 21 counters to represent the 21 dominoes. Then draw 8 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 8 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of groups of counters formed = quotient of 21 ÷ 8
D. Number of circles equally filled is 2, therefore, the quotient is 2.
Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 5
For 21 ÷ 8, the quotient is 2 and the remainder is 5, or 2R5.

Question 11.
4)\(\overline { 75 } \)
______ R ______

Answer: 18R3

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 75 counters to represent the 75 dominoes. Then draw 4 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 4 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of groups of counters formed = quotient of 75 ÷ 4
D. Number of circles equally filled is 18, therefore, the quotient is 18.
Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 3
For 21 ÷ 8, the quotient is 18 and the remainder is 3, or 18R3.

Question 12.
76 ÷ 6
______ R ______

Answer: 12R4

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 76 counters to represent the 76 dominoes. Then draw 6 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 6 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of groups of counters formed = quotient of 76 ÷ 6
D. Number of circles equally filled is 12, therefore, the quotient is 12.
Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 4
For 76 ÷ 6, the quotient is 12 and the remainder is 4, or 12R4.

Lesson 4.3

Interpret the remainder to solve.

Question 13.
Kelly divides 29 markers equally among 7 friends. If Kelly keeps the leftover markers, how many markers will she keep?
______ marker(s)

Answer: 1 marker

Explanation:
Given,
Kelly divides 29 markers equally among 7 friends.
1 because 4 markers for each friend (4 × 7) would be 28 and the last one would be leftover because it’s not enough for everyone.

Question 14.
Dave has a board that is 29 inches long. He cuts the board into 4 equal pieces. How long will each piece be?
______ inches

Answer: 7 inches

Explanation:
Dave has a board that is 29 inches long and want to cut it into 4 pieces.
You are asked the length of each piece.
To solve the question, you need to divide the total length of the board by the number of pieces Dave wants to make.
Then, the length of each piece would be: 29 inches/4= 7.25 inches

Question 15.
Eight students can ride in each van. How many vans are needed for 29 students?
______ vans

Answer: 4 vans

Explanation:
Given,
Eight students can ride in each van.
29/8 = 3.625 = 4(approx)
Therefore 4 vans are needed for 29 students.

Question 16.
Mac has 40 ounces of juice. He pours 6 ounces in each glass. How many glasses can he fill?
______ glasses

Answer: 6 glasses

Explanation:
Given,
Mac has 40 ounces of juice. He pours 6 ounces in each glass.
Divide 40 by 6
40/6 = 6.66 ≈ 6
Thus Mac can fill 6 glasses.

Lesson 4.4

Use basic facts and place value to find the quotient.

Question 17.
120 ÷ 4 = ______

Answer: 30

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 120 ÷ 4
STEP 2 Use place value. 120 = 12 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 12 tens ÷ 4 = 3 tens
120 ÷ 4 = 30

Question 18.
280 ÷ 7 = ______

Answer: 40

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 280 ÷ 7
STEP 2 Use place value. 280 = 28 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 28 tens ÷ 7 = 4 tens
280 ÷ 7 = 40

Question 19.
3,000 ÷ 5 = ______

Answer: 600

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 3000 ÷ 5
STEP 2 Use place value. 3000 = 300 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 300 tens ÷ 5 = 60 tens
3,000 ÷ 5 = 60 tens

Question 20.
4,800 ÷ 6 = ______

Answer: 800

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 4,800 ÷ 6
STEP 2 Use place value. 4800 = 480 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 480 tens ÷ 6 = 80 tens
4,800 ÷ 6 = 800

Question 21.
5,600 ÷ 8 = ______

Answer: 700

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 5,600 ÷ 8
STEP 2 Use place value. 5600 = 560 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 560 tens ÷ 8 = 70 tens
5,600 ÷ 8 = 700

Question 22.
6,300 ÷ 9 = ______

Answer: 700

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 6,300 ÷ 9
STEP 2 Use place value. 6300 = 630 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 630 tens ÷ 9 = 70 tens
6,300 ÷ 9 = 700

Common Core – Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Page No. 94

Lessons 4.6–4.7

Choose a method and divide.

Question 1.
68 ÷ 4 = ______

Answer: 17

Explanation:
The number close to 68 is 70.
Divide 70 by 4 is 17 (approx).
Thus the estimated quotient of 68 ÷ 4 is 17.

Question 2.
48 ÷ 3 = ______

Answer: 16

Explanation:
The number close to 48 is 50.
Divide 50 by 3 is 16  (approx).
Thus the estimated quotient of 48 ÷ 3 is 16.

Question 3.
108 ÷ 9 = ______

Answer: 12

Explanation:
The number close to 108 is 100.
Divide 100 by 9 is 12 (approx).
Thus the estimated quotient of 108 ÷ 9 is 12.

Question 4.
74 ÷ 2 = ______

Answer: 37

Explanation:
The number close to 74 is 70.
Divide 70 by 2 is 37 (approx).
Thus the estimated quotient of 74 ÷ 2 is 37.

Question 5.
122 ÷ 5 = ______ R ______

Answer: 24R2

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 122 counters to represent the 122 dominoes. Then draw 5 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 5 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of groups of counters formed = quotient of 122 ÷ 5
D. Number of circles equally filled are 24, therefore, the quotient is 24.
Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 2
For 122 ÷ 5, the quotient is 24 and the remainder is 2, or 24R2.

Question 6.
165 ÷ 6 = ______ R ______

Answer: 27R3

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 165 counters to represent the 165 dominoes. Then draw 6 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 6 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of groups of counters formed = quotient of 165 ÷ 6.
D. Number of circles equally filled are 27, therefore, the quotient is 27.
Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 3
For 165 ÷ 6, the quotient is 27 and the remainder is 3, or 27R3.

Lessons 4.8–4.9

Divide.

Question 7.
4)\(\overline { 848 } \)
______

Answer: 212

Go Math Grade 4 Chapter 4 Answer Key

Question 8.
7)\(\overline { 287 } \)
______

Answer: 41

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img-2

Question 9.
5)\(\overline { 405 } \)
______

Answer: 81
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img-3

Question 10.
3)\(\overline { 696 } \)
______

Answer: 232
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img-4

Question 11.
96 ÷ 6 = ______

Answer: 16
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img-5

Question 12.
76 ÷ 5 = ______ R ______

Answer: 15R1
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img-6

Question 13.
58 ÷ 4 = ______ R ______

Answer: 14R2
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img-7

Question 14.
85 ÷ 2 = ______ R ______

Answer: 42R1
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img-8

Lessons 4.10–4.11

Divide and check.

Question 15.
4)\(\overline { 896 } \)
______

Answer: 224

Explanation:
224
× 4
896

Question 16.
5)\(\overline { 833 } \)
______ R ______

Answer: 166r3

Explanation:
166
× 5
830
+ 3
833

Question 17.
6)\(\overline { 527 } \)
______ R ______

Answer: 87r5

Explanation:
87
×6
522
+ 5
527

Question 18.
3)\(\overline { 935 } \)
______ R ______

Answer: 311r2

Explanation:
311
× 3
933
+ 2
935

Question 19.
3)\(\overline { 1,976 } \)
______ R ______

Answer: 658R2

Explanation:
658
× 3
1974
+    2
1976

Question 20.
6)\(\overline { 1,042 } \)
______ R ______

Answer: 173r4

Explanation:
173
×   6
1038
+   4
1042

Lesson 4.12

Solve. Draw a diagram to help you.

Question 21.
Ellis has 2 dozen white baseballs and 4 dozen yellow baseballs. He needs to divide them into cartons that hold 6 each. How many cartons can he fill?
______ cartons

Answer: 6 cartons

Explanation:
Given,
Ellis has 2 dozen white baseballs and 4 dozen yellow baseballs.
He needs to divide them into cartons that hold 6 each.
6 2 Dozens and 4 Dozens are 12+24 = 36/6 = 6
Therefore he can fill 6 cartons.

Question 22.
A family of 2 adults and 3 children went out to dinner. The total bill was $42. Each child’s dinner cost $4. How much did each adult’s dinner cost?
$ ______

Answer: $15

Explanation:
Each child’s dinner – $4
3 child’s dinner – $4 x 3 = $12
$42 – 12 = $30
$30 divided by 2 = $15
Thus each adult’s dinner cost is $15.

Conclusion:

Find more questions for practice from here, Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers and develop your mathematical skills. Drop your queries and feedback by posting the comment below and we’ll update if anything requires as well as we’ll answer your doubts Asap.

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Extra Practice

go-math-grade-3-chapter-9-compare-fractions-extra-practice-answer-key

Access the Answer Key for Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Extra Practice and use them as a quick reference. Get the Homework Help Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Extra Practice and test your preparation standard. We provide the Step by Step Solution for all the Problems in 3rd Grade Go Math Ch 9 Extra Practice for better understanding.

Grade 3 Go Math Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Extra Practice

Before you begin your preparation make sure to check out the topics list in 3rd Grade Go Math Ch 9 Answer Key Compare Fractions. You have different methods for solving the Comparing Fractions. Avail the quick links and get to know the concepts better. Practice the Problems in 3rd Grade Go Math Ch 9 on your own and verify the solutions in the Go Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 9 Compare Fractions.

Common Core – Page No. 189000

Lesson 9.1

Solve. Show your work.

Question 1.
Nick finished \(\frac{4}{8}\) of his homework before dinner. Ed finished \(\frac{7}{8}\) of his homework before dinner. Who finished the greater part of his homework?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Extra Practice Common Core img 1
_____

Answer: Ed

Explanation:

Compare the fractions \(\frac{4}{8}\) and \(\frac{7}{8}\)
The denominator of both the fractions is the same. So, compare the numerators.
The numerator with the greatest number will be the greatest fraction.
7 is greater than 4.
\(\frac{7}{8}\) > \(\frac{4}{8}\)
Therefore Ed finished the greater part of his homework.

Question 2.
Rafael walked \(\frac{2}{3}\) mile and then rode his scooter \(\frac{2}{6}\) mile. Which distance is farther?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Extra Practice Common Core img 2
\(\frac{□} {□}\) mile is farther

Answer: \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:

Rafael walked \(\frac{2}{3}\) mile and then rode his scooter \(\frac{2}{6}\) mile.
The numerator of both the fractions is the same but the denominators are different.
The fraction is smaller if the denominator is greater.
Thus \(\frac{2}{3}\) > \(\frac{2}{6}\)
\(\frac{2}{3}\) mile is farther.

Lessons 9.2–9.3

Compare. Write <, >, or =.

Question 3.
\(\frac{2}{6}\) _____ \(\frac{3}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{6}\) < \(\frac{3}{6}\)

Explanation:

Compare the fractions \(\frac{2}{6}\) and \(\frac{3}{6}\)
The denominators are the same and the numerators are different.
So compare the numerators of two fractions.
2 is less than 3.
So, \(\frac{2}{6}\) < \(\frac{3}{6}\)

Question 4.
\(\frac{6}{8}\) _____ \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Answer: \(\frac{6}{8}\) > \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Explanation:

Compare \(\frac{6}{8}\) and \(\frac{1}{8}\)
The denominators are the same and the numerators are different.
6 is greater than 1.
\(\frac{6}{8}\) > \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Question 5.
\(\frac{3}{8}\) _____ \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{8}\) < \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Explanation:

Compare the fractions \(\frac{3}{8}\) and \(\frac{3}{4}\)
The numerators are the same and denominators are different.
Compare the denominators of two fractions.
The fraction with lesser number will be the greatest.
\(\frac{3}{8}\) < \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Question 6.
\(\frac{1}{6}\) _____ \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{6}\) > \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Explanation:

The numerator of both the fractions is the same.
The denominator with the greatest number will be the smallest fraction.
So, \(\frac{1}{6}\) > \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Question 7.
\(\frac{2}{3}\) _____ \(\frac{2}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{3}\) > \(\frac{2}{6}\)

Explanation:

The numerator of both the fractions is the same.
The denominator with the greatest number will be the smallest fraction.
\(\frac{2}{3}\) > \(\frac{2}{6}\)

Question 8.
\(\frac{1}{8}\) _____ \(\frac{3}{8}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{8}\) < \(\frac{3}{8}\)

Explanation:

The denominator of both the fractions is the same.
So, compare the numerators. The fraction with the small number will be the smallest fraction.
\(\frac{1}{8}\) < \(\frac{3}{8}\)

Lesson 9.4

Compare. Write <, >, or = . Write the strategy you used.

Question 9.
\(\frac{2}{8}\) _____ \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{8}\) < \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:

The numerator of both the fractions is the same.
Compare the denominators.
The denominator with the greatest number will be the smallest fraction.
\(\frac{2}{8}\) < \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Question 10.
\(\frac{5}{6}\) _____ \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{5}{6}\) > \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Explanation:

The denominator of both the fractions is the same.
The fraction with the small number will be the smallest fraction.
5 is greater than 1.
\(\frac{5}{6}\) > \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Question 11.
\(\frac{7}{8}\) _____ \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Answer: \(\frac{7}{8}\) > \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Explanation:

Compare \(\frac{7}{8}\) and \(\frac{3}{4}\)
Make the denominators equal to compare the fractions.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) × \(\frac{8}{8}\) = \(\frac{24}{32}\)
\(\frac{7}{8}\) × \(\frac{4}{4}\) = \(\frac{28}{32}\)
\(\frac{28}{32}\) > \(\frac{24}{32}\)
\(\frac{7}{8}\) > \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Common Core – Page No. 190000

Lesson 9.5

Write the fractions in order from greatest to least.

Question 1.
\(\frac{1}{2}, \frac{1}{4}, \frac{1}{3}\)
Type below:
__________

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}, \frac{1}{3}, \frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:

The numerator of the three fractions is the same.
So, the order from greatest to least is \(\frac{1}{2}, \frac{1}{3}, \frac{1}{4}\)

Question 2.
\(\frac{4}{6}, \frac{1}{6}, \frac{2}{6}\)
Type below:
__________

Answer: \(\frac{4}{6}, \frac{2}{6}, \frac{1}{6}\)

Explanation:

The denominator of the three fractions is the same.
Compare the numerator of the fraction.
4 > 2 > 1
\(\frac{4}{6}, \frac{2}{6}, \frac{1}{6}\)

Question 3.
\(\frac{3}{6}, \frac{3}{4}, \frac{3}{8}\)
Type below:
__________

Answer: \(\frac{3}{4}, \frac{3}{6}, \frac{3}{8}\)

Explanation:

The numerator of the three fractions is the same.
So, the order is \(\frac{3}{4}, \frac{3}{6}, \frac{3}{8}\)

Question 4.
\(\frac{6}{8}, \frac{3}{8}, \frac{5}{8}\)
Type below:
__________

Answer: \(\frac{6}{8}, \frac{5}{8}, \frac{3}{8}\)

Explanation:

The denominator of the three fractions is the same.
Compare the numerator and write the order from greatest to least fraction.
\(\frac{6}{8}, \frac{5}{8}, \frac{3}{8}\)

Lessons 9.6–9.7

Shade the model. Then divide the pieces to find the equivalent fraction.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Extra Practice Common Core img 3
\(\frac{1}{4}=\frac{■}{8}\)
\(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{□} {□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{2} {8}\)

Explanation:

Go Math Chapter 9 Key Grade 3 Extra Practice Solution image_1

\(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{2} {8}\)

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Extra Practice Common Core img 4
\(\frac{2}{3}=\frac{■}{6}\)
\(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{□} {□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{4} {6}\)

Explanation:

Chapter 9 Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Extra Practice solution image_2

\(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{4} {6}\)

Use the number line to find the equivalent fraction.

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Extra Practice Common Core img 5
\(\frac{1}{2}=\frac{■}{8}\)
\(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{□} {□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{4} {8}\)

Explanation:

Go math answer key grade 3 compare fractions extra practice solution image_5

Question 8.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Extra Practice Common Core img 6
\(\frac{2}{2}=\frac{■}{6}\)
\(\frac{2}{2}\) = \(\frac{□} {□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{2}\) = \(\frac{6} {6}\)

Explanation:

Go Math Chapter 9 Grade 3 Answer Key Extra Practice solution image_5

Each shape is 1 whole. Shade the model to find the equivalent fraction.

Question 9.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Extra Practice Common Core img 7
\(\frac{3}{4}=\frac{■}{8}\)
\(\frac{3}{4}\) = \(\frac{□} {□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{4}\) = \(\frac{6} {8}\)

Explanation:

Go Math Answer Key Grade 3 Compare Fractions Extra Practice solution image_4

\(\frac{3}{4}\) = \(\frac{6} {8}\)

Question 10.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Extra Practice Common Core img 8
\(\frac{1}{2}=\frac{■}{6}\)
\(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{□} {□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{3} {6}\)

Explanation:

HMH Go Math key Grade 3 Compare Fractions Extra Practice solution image_3

\(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{3} {6}\)

Conclusion

Learn the fundamentals right from the young age and become pro in the subject. To help you understand the concepts better we even drew pictures. Utilize Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Extra Practice and score better grades in the exams. To Clear all your queries check out Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions PDF.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume

go-math-grade-5-chapter-11-geometry-and-volume-answer-key

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume comes with Crystal Clear Solutions and makes it easy for you to grasp the topics in it. Get Acquainted with the Geometry and Volume of Rectangular Prisms in the later sections. We provide Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key by Subject experts and explained them clearly so that students will no longer feel the concepts of Geometry and Volume difficult anymore.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume

Anyone who wishes to know the Procedure on How to find the Geometry and Volume of different shapes can get them using the 5th Grade Go Math Answer Key for Ch 11 Geometry and Volume. You can access the Topics of 5th Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 11 through the direct links available out there. The Topics Covered in the Geometry and Volume Chapter include polygons, quadrilaterals, triangles, understand volume, estimate volume, the volume of the rectangular prism, etc.

Lesson 1: Polygons

Lesson 2: Triangles

Lesson 3: Quadrilaterals

Lesson 4: Properties of Two-Dimensional Figures

Mid-Chapter Checkpoint

Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures

Lesson 6: Understand Volume

Lesson 7: Estimate Volume

Lesson 8: Volume of Rectangular Prisms

Lesson 9: Algebra Apply Volume Formulas

Lesson 10: Problem Solving Compare Volumes

Lesson 11: Find Volume of Composed Figures

Chapter Review/Test

Share and Show – Lesson 1: Polygons – Page No. 639

Question 1.
Name the polygon. Then use the markings on the figure to tell whether it is a regular polygon or not a regular polygon.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 1
a. Name the polygon.
__________

Answer: Triangle

Explanation:
A polygon is a closed plane figure formed by three or more line segments that meet at points called vertices. It is named by the number of sides and angles it has. The above figure consists of three sides. So, the name of the polygon is a triangle.

Question 1.
b. Are all the sides and all the angles congruent?
_____

Answer: Yes

Explanation:
When line segments have the same length or when angles have the same measure, they are congruent. All sides are equal in the above figure.
Thus the above figure is congruent.

Question 1.
c. Is the polygon a regular polygon?
_____

Answer: Yes

Explanation:
In a regular polygon, all sides are congruent and all angles are congruent.
The above figure has the same sides and same angles. Thus the above figure is a regular polygon.

Name each polygon. Then tell whether it is a regular polygon or not a regular polygon.

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 2
Name: __________
Type: __________

Answer:
i. Hexagon
ii. Regular

Explanation:
A polygon is a closed plane figure formed by three or more line segments that meet at points called vertices. It is named by the number of sides and angles it has. The above figure consists of 6 sides. So, the name of the polygon is Hexagon.
In a regular polygon, all sides are congruent and all angles are congruent. The above figure has the same sides and same angles. Thus the above figure is a regular polygon.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 3
Name: __________
Type: __________

Answer:
i. Quadrilateral
ii. Not regular

Explanation:
A polygon is a closed plane figure formed by three or more line segments that meet at points called vertices. It is named by the number of sides and angles it has. The above figure consists of 4 sides. So, the name of the polygon is Quadrilateral.
The above figure doesn’t have the same sides thus the above figure is not a regular polygon.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 4
Name: __________
Type: __________

Answer:
i. Octagon
ii. Regular

Explanation:
A polygon is a closed plane figure formed by three or more line segments that meet at points called vertices. It is named by the number of sides and angles it has. The above figure consists of 8 sides. So, the name of the polygon is Octagon.
In a regular polygon, all sides are congruent and all angles are congruent. The above figure has the same sides and same angles. Thus the above Octagon is a regular polygon.

Name each polygon. Then tell whether it is a regular polygon or not a regular polygon.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 5
Name: __________
Type: __________

Answer:
i. Quadrilateral
ii. Regular

Explanation:
A polygon is a closed plane figure formed by three or more line segments that meet at points called vertices. It is named by the number of sides and angles it has. The above figure consists of 4 sides. So, the name of the polygon is Quadrilateral.
In a regular polygon, all sides are congruent and all angles are congruent. The above figure has the same sides and same angles. Thus the above Quadrilateral is a regular polygon.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 6
Name: __________
Type: __________

Answer:
i. Triangle
ii. Not regular

Explanation:
A polygon is a closed plane figure formed by three or more line segments that meet at points called vertices. It is named by the number of sides and angles it has. The above figure consists of three sides. So, the name of the polygon is a triangle.
The above figure doesn’t have the same sides thus the above figure is not a regular polygon.

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 7
Name: __________
Type: __________

Answer:
i. Heptagon
ii. Regular

Explanation:
A polygon is a closed plane figure formed by three or more line segments that meet at points called vertices. It is named by the number of sides and angles it has. The above figure consists of 7 sides. So, the name of the polygon is Heptagon.
In a regular polygon, all sides are congruent and all angles are congruent. The above figure has the same sides and same angles. Thus the above Heptagon is a regular polygon.

Question 8.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 8
Name: __________
Type: __________

Answer:
i. Hexagon
ii. Not regular

Explanation:
A polygon is a closed plane figure formed by three or more line segments that meet at points called vertices. It is named by the number of sides and angles it has. The above figure consists of six sides. So, the name of the polygon is a Hexagon.
The above figure doesn’t have the same sides and angles thus the above figure is not a regular polygon.

Question 9.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 9
Name: __________
Type: __________

Answer:
i. Pentagon
ii. Not regular

Explanation:
A polygon is a closed plane figure formed by three or more line segments that meet at points called vertices. It is named by the number of sides and angles it has. The above figure consists of five sides. So, the name of the polygon is a Pentagon.
The above figure doesn’t have the same sides and angles thus the above figure is not a regular polygon.

Question 10.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 10
Name: __________
Type: __________

Answer:
i. Pentagon
ii. Regular

Explanation:
A polygon is a closed plane figure formed by three or more line segments that meet at points called vertices. It is named by the number of sides and angles it has. The above figure consists of five sides. So, the name of the polygon is a Pentagon.
In a regular polygon, all sides are congruent and all angles are congruent. The above figure has the same sides and same angles. Thus the above Pentagon is a regular polygon.

Problem Solving – Lesson 1: Polygons – Page No. 640

For 11–12, use the Castel del Monte floor plan at the right.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 11

Question 11.
Which polygons in the floor plan have four equal sides and four congruent angles? How many of these polygons are there?
polygon: __________
The number of polygons: __________

Answer:
polygon: Quadrilateral
The number of polygons: 8

Explanation:
By seeing the above figure we can say that there are eight Quadrilaterals in the octagon. And the number of polygons is 8.

Question 12.
Is there a quadrilateral in the floor plan that is not a regular polygon? Name the quadrilateral and tell how many of the quadrilaterals are in the floor plan.
Name of quadrilateral: __________
The number of quadrilaterals: __________

Answer:
Name of quadrilateral: Trapezoid
The number of quadrilaterals: 8

Explanation:
The name of the Quadrilateral for the above figure is Trapezoid. There is 8 number of quadrilaterals in the floor plan.

Question 13.
Sketch eight points. Then connect the points to draw a closed plane figure.
What kind of polygon did you draw?
__________

Answer: Octagon

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 4

Question 14.
Look at the angles for all regular polygons. As the number of sides increases, do the measures of the angles increase or decrease? What pattern do you see?
angles measures __________

Answer: Increase

Explanation:
As the number of sides increases, the measures of the angles increase.
we know that
The measure of the interior angle in a regular polygon is equal to
x = (n-2)/n(180°)
where
n is the number of sides of the regular polygon.
x is the measure of the interior angle in a regular polygon.

Question 15.
Test Prep Which of the following is a regular hexagon?
Options:
a. Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 12
b. Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 13
c. Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 14
d. Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 15

Answer: Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 1: Polygons img 14

Share and Show – Lesson 2: Triangles – Page No. 645

Classify each triangle. Write isosceles, scalene, or equilateral.

Then write acute, obtuse, or right.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 2: Triangles img 16
△ __________
∠ __________

Answer:
△ – Scalene
∠ – Acute

Explanation:
The 3 sides of the triangle are unequal. If three sides of the triangle are different it is known as Scalene. The angles are less than 90° thus the angle is known as an acute angle.

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 2: Triangles img 17
△ __________
∠ __________

Answer:
△ – Equilateral
∠ – Acute

Explanation:
The 3 sides of the triangle are equal. If three sides of the triangle are equal it is known as the equilateral triangle. The angles are less than 90° thus the angle is known as an acute angle.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 2: Triangles img 18
△ __________
∠ __________

Answer:

△ – Isosceles
∠ – Acute

Explanation:
The 2 sides of the triangle are equal and the third side is not equal. If two sides of the triangle are different it is known as Isosceles.
The angles are less than 90° thus the angle is known as an acute angle.

On Your Own

Classify each triangle. Write isosceles, scalene, or equilateral.

Then write acute, obtuse, or right.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 2: Triangles img 19
△ __________
∠ __________

Answer:
△ – Scalene
∠ – Right

Explanation:
The 3 sides of the triangle are unequal. If three sides of the triangle are different it is known as Scalene. One of the angle is 90° thus the angle is known as a right angle.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 2: Triangles img 20
△ __________
∠ __________

Answer:
△ – Isosceles
∠ – Acute

Explanation:
The 2 sides of the triangle are equal and the third side is not equal. If two sides of the triangle are different it is known as Isosceles.
The angles are less than 90° thus the angle is known as an acute angle.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 2: Triangles img 21
△ __________
∠ __________

Answer:
△ – Scalene
∠ – Obtuse

Explanation:
The 3 sides of the triangle are unequal. If three sides of the triangle are different it is known as Scalene. The angles are more than 90° thus the angle is known as an obtuse angle.

A triangle has sides with the lengths and angle measures given.

Classify each triangle. Write isosceles, scalene, or equilateral.

Then write acute, obtuse, or right.

Question 7.
sides: 3.5 cm, 6.2 cm, 3.5 cm
angles: 27°, 126°, 27°
△ __________
∠ __________

Answer:
△ – Isosceles
∠ – Obtuse

Explanation:
The 2 sides of the triangle are equal and the third side is not equal. If two sides of the triangle are different it is known as Isosceles. One of the angle is more than 90° thus the angle is known as an obtuse angle.

Question 8.
sides: 2 in., 5 in., 3.8 in.
angles: 43°, 116°, 21°
△ __________
∠ __________

Answer:
△ – Scalene
∠ – Obtuse

Explanation:
The 3 sides of the triangle are unequal. If three sides of the triangle are different it is known as Scalene. One of the angle is more than 90° thus the angle is known as an obtuse angle.

Question 9.
Circle the figure that does not belong.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 2: Triangles img 22
Type below:
__________

Answer:
Go-Math-Grade-5-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Geometry-and-Volume-img-22

Problem Solving – Lesson 2: Triangles – Page No. 646

Question 10.
Draw 2 equilateral triangles that are congruent and share a side. What polygon is formed? Is it a regular polygon?
What polygon is formed? __________
Is it a regular polygon? __________

Answer:
The name for the polygon is Quadrilateral.
In a regular polygon, all sides are congruent and all angles are congruent.

Question 11.
What’s the Error? Shannon said that a triangle with exactly 2 congruent sides and an obtuse angle is an equilateral obtuse triangle. Describe her error.
Type below:
__________

Answer: All angles of an equilateral triangle are acute. You cannot have an obtuse angle in an equilateral angle. And all of the angles must be congruent.

Question 12.
Test Prep Which kind of triangle has exactly 2 congruent sides?
Options:
a. isosceles
b. equilateral
c. scalene
d. right

Answer: isosceles

Explanation:
An isosceles triangle, therefore, has both two equal sides and two equal angles.
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Connect to Science
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 2: Triangles img 23

Classify the triangles in the structures below. Write isosceles, scalene, or equilateral. Then write acute, obtuse, or right.

Question 13.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 2: Triangles img 24
△ __________
∠ __________

Answer:
△ – Equilateral triangle
∠ – Acute

Explanation:
From the figure, we can see an equilateral triangle. In an equilateral triangle, all sides will be less than 90°. So it is an acute angle.

Question 14.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 2: Triangles img 25
△ __________
∠ __________

Answer:
△ – Scalene triangle
∠ – Right

Explanation:
In the above figure, we can see a right-angle triangle. The three sides of the above triangle is different. So, it is known as the scalene triangle.

Share and Show – Lesson 3: Quadrilaterals – Page No. 651

Question 1.
Use quadrilateral ABCD to answer each question. Complete the sentence.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 3: Quadrilaterals img 26
a. Measure the sides. Are any of the sides congruent?
Mark any congruent sides.
_____

Answer: Yes

Explanation:
The above figure consists of same sides. Thus the above Quadrilateral is congruent.

Question 1.
b. How many right angles, if any, does the quadrilateral have?
_____

Answer: 0

The above figure doesn’t have any straight line. Thus the above figure has 0 right angles.

Question 1.
c. How many pairs of parallel sides, if any, does the quadrilateral have?
_____ pairs

Answer: 2

Explanation:
The above has two parallel sides. Yes, the Quadrilateral has the parallel sides.

Question 1.
So, quadrilateral ABCD is a ______________ .
_________

Answer: Parallelogram

Explanation:
A parallelogram is a special trapezoid with opposite sides are equal.

Classify the quadrilateral in as many ways as possible.

Write quadrilateral, parallelogram, rectangle, rhombus, square, or trapezoid.

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 3: Quadrilaterals img 27
1. _________
2. _________
3. _________

Answer:
The possible ways of Quadrilateral are:
1. Rectangle
2. Parallelogram
3. Quadrilateral

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 3: Quadrilaterals img 28
1. _________
2. _________

Answer:
The possible ways of Quadrilateral are:
1. Quadrilateral
2. Trapezoid

On Your Own

Classify the quadrilateral in as many ways as possible.

Write quadrilateral, parallelogram, rectangle, rhombus, square, or trapezoid.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 3: Quadrilaterals img 29
1. _________
2. _________
3. _________
4. _________
5. _________

Answer:
The possible ways of Quadrilateral for the above figure are:
1. Square
2. Quadrilateral
3. Parallelogram
4. Rectangle
5. Rhombus

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 3: Quadrilaterals img 30
1. _________
2. _________

Answer:
The possible ways of Quadrilateral for the above figure are:
1. Trapezoid
2. Parallelogram

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 3: Quadrilaterals img 31
1. _________
2. _________
3. _________

Answer:
The possible ways of Quadrilateral for the above figure are:
1. Rhombus
2. Parallelogram
3. Square

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 3: Quadrilaterals img 32
1. _________
2. _________

Answer:
The possible ways of Quadrilateral for the above figure are:
1. Rectangle
2. Parallelogram

Problem Solving – Lesson 3: Quadrilaterals – Page No. 652

Solve the problems.

Question 8.
A quadrilateral has exactly 2 congruent sides. Which quadrilateral types could it be? Which quadrilaterals could it not be?
Type below:
_________

Answer: A rectangle has 2 congruent sides.

Explanation:
The type of quadrilateral that has two congruent sides is a rectangle.

Question 9.
What’s the Error? A quadrilateral has exactly 3 congruent sides. Davis claims that the figure must be a rectangle. Why is his claim incorrect? Use a diagram to explain your answer.
Type below:
_________

Answer: Daviss’s claim is incorrect because a rectangle does not have three congruent sides.

Question 10.
The opposite corners of a quadrilateral are right angles. The quadrilateral is not a rhombus. What kind of quadrilateral is this figure? Explain how you know.
Type below:
_________

Answer:

It depends, is it just one set of opposite angles that are right angles? Then it could be just a quadrilateral, or it could be a kite, or it could be a rectangle. Because a Quadrilateral is the least restrictive, the best answer is. “It is a quadrilateral”.
Or is it both sets of opposite angles are right angles? Then it can only be a “rectangle, that is not a square”.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 solution img-1

Question 11.
I am a figure with four sides. I can be placed in the following categories: quadrilateral, parallelogram, rectangle, rhombus, and square. Draw me. Explain why I fit into each category.
Type below:
_________

Answer: Square
Go Math 5th Grade Solution Key Chapter 11 img-2

Question 12.
Test Prep A quadrilateral has exactly 1 pair of parallel sides and no congruent sides. What type of quadrilateral is it?
Options:
a. rectangle
b. rhombus
c. parallelogram
d. trapezoid

Answer: Trapezoid

Explanation:
A quadrilateral with one pair of parallel sides is a trapezoid.
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Share and Show – Lesson 4: Properties of Two-Dimensional Figures – Page No. 455

Question 1.
Erica thinks that triangle X Y Z, below, has two congruent sides, but she does not have a ruler to measure the sides. Are two sides congruent?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Properties of Two-Dimensional Figures img 33
First, trace the triangle and cut out the tracing.
Type below:
_________

Answer:
Go-Math-Grade-5-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Geometry-and-Volume-img-22 (1)

Question 1.
Then, fold the triangle to match each pair of sides to determine if at least two of the sides are congruent. As you test the sides, record or draw the results for each pair to make sure that you have checked all pairs of sides. Possible drawings are shown.
Type below:
_________

Question 1.
Finally, answer the question.
______

Answer: Yes

Question 2.
What if Erica also wants to show, without using a protractor, that the triangle has one right angle and two acute angles? Explain how she can show this.

Answer:
The sum of three angles = 180
If one of the angles is 90 then the other two angles will be acute angles.

Question 3.
December, January, and February were the coldest months in Kristen’s town last year. February was the warmest of these months. December was not the coldest. What is the order of these months from coldest to warmest?
Coldest: _________
_________
Warmest: _________
_________

Answer:
Coldest: January
December
Warmest: February

Explanation:
January and December are the coldest months of the year depending on the direction of the wind. February is the warmest month among these months.

Question 4.
Jan enters a 20-foot by 30-foot rectangular room. The long sides face north and south. Jan enters the exact center of the south side and walks 10 feet north. Then she walks 8 feet east. How far is she from the east side of the room?
______ ft

Answer: 7 feet

Explanation:
Given that,
Jan enters a 20-foot by 30-foot rectangular room.
The long sides face north and south.
Jan enters the exact center of the south side and walks 10 feet north.
Then she walks 8 feet east.
Jan is 7 feet from the east wall in the room.

On Your Own – Lesson 4: Properties of Two-Dimensional Figures – Page No. 456

Question 5.
Max drew a grid to divide a piece of paper into 18 congruent squares, as shown. What is the least number of lines Max can draw to divide the grid into 6 congruent rectangles?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Properties of Two-Dimensional Figures img 34
______ lines

Answer: 3 lines

Explanation:
From the above figure, we can see that there are 18 congruent squares.
To find the least number of lines Max can draw we have to divide number of squares by number of congruent rectangles
18 ÷ 6 = 3
Thus the least number of lines that Max can Draw is 3 lines.

Question 6.
Of the 95 fifth and sixth graders going on a field trip, there are 27 more fifth-graders than sixth graders. How many fifth graders are going on the field trip?
5th graders = ______

Answer: 61

Explanation:
Since we are not told how many 6th graders are going on the trip let’s use a variable, the letter x.
Now let’s understand the problem in the “math” language.
x= the number of 6th graders.
X+27= the number of 5th graders since there are 27 more fifth-graders than sixth graders.
x+x+27 = 95
2x+27=95
-27 -27
2x+ 0 =68
2x=68
divide by 2 on both sides.
x = 34
Now, remember how x+27 = the number of 5th graders going on the trip?
Since we know that x=34, substitute the x as 34+27 which = 61 fifth graders going on the trip.

Use the map to solve 7–8.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Properties of Two-Dimensional Figures img 35

Question 7.
Sam’s paper route begins and ends at the corner of Redwood Avenue and Oak Street. His route is made up of 4 streets, and he makes no 90° turns. What kind of polygon do the streets of Sam’s paper route form? Name the streets in Sam’s route.
_________

Answer: Parallelogram

Explanation:
Given that, Sam’s paper route begins and ends at the corner of Redwood Avenue and Oak Street. His route is made up of 4 streets, and he makes no 90° turns.
By following the route map we can say that the polygon is a parallelogram.

Question 8.
Sam’s paper route includes all 32 houses on two pairs of parallel streets. If each street has the same number of houses, how many houses are on each street?
Name the parallel streets.
______ houses on each street

Answer: 8

Explanation:
Given,
Sam’s paper route includes all 32 houses on two pairs of parallel streets.
If each street has same number of houses we have to divide 32 by 4
32 ÷ 4 = 8
Thus there are 8 houses on each street.

Question 8.
Test Prep Which figure below is a quadrilateral that has opposite sides that are congruent and parallel?
Options:
a. Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Properties of Two-Dimensional Figures img 36
b. Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Properties of Two-Dimensional Figures img 37
c. Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Properties of Two-Dimensional Figures img 38
d. Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Properties of Two-Dimensional Figures img 39

Answer: Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Properties of Two-Dimensional Figures img 37

Explanation:
Square is a type of quadrilateral that has opposite sides that are congruent and parallel.
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Share and Show – Lesson 4: Properties of Two-Dimensional Figures – Page No. 656

Classify the solid figure. Write prism, pyramid, cone, cylinder, or sphere.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 40
_________

Answer: Triangular prism

Explanation:
A triangular prism is a three-sided prism; it is a polyhedron made of a triangular base, a translated copy, and 3 faces joining corresponding sides. A right triangular prism has rectangular sides, otherwise, it is oblique.

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 41
_________

Answer: Sphere

Explanation:
A sphere has no bases and 1 curved surface.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 42
_________

Answer: Hexagonal Base Pyramid

Explanation:
A pyramid that has a hexagonal base, that is, base with six sides and 6 triangular lateral faces, then it is a hexagonal pyramid.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 43
_________

Answer: Pentagonal prism

Explanation:
A pentagonal prism is a prism that has two pentagonal bases like top and bottom and five rectangular sides. It is a type of heptahedron with 7 faces, 10 vertices, and 15 edges.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 44
_________

Answer: Pentagonal Base Pyramid

Explanation:
In geometry, a pentagonal pyramid is a pyramid with a pentagonal base upon which are erected five triangular faces that meet at a point.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 45
_________

Answer: Cylinder

Explanation:
A cylinder has 2 congruent circular bases and 1 curved surface.

On Your Own

Classify the solid figure. Write prism, pyramid, cone, cylinder, or sphere.

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 46
_________

Answer: Rectangular prism

Explanation:
A rectangular prism is a polyhedron with two congruent and parallel bases. It is also a cuboid. It has six faces, and all the faces are in a rectangle shape and have twelve edges. Because of its cross-section along the length, it is said to be a prism.

Question 8.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 47
_________

Answer: Cylinder

Explanation:
A cylinder has 2 congruent circular bases and 1 curved surface.

Question 9.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 48
_________

Answer: Cone

Explanation:
A cone has 1 circular base and 1 curved surface.

Question 10.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 49
_________

Answer: Triangle base pyramid

Explanation:
A triangle-based pyramid has four triangular sides. The base can be any shape or size of the triangle but usually, it is an equilateral triangle. This means the three sides of the pyramid are the same size as each other and the pyramid looks the same if you rotate it.

Question 11.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 50
_________

Answer: Rectangular prism

Explanation:
A rectangular prism is a polyhedron with two congruent and parallel bases. It is also a cuboid. It has six faces, and all the faces are in a rectangle shape and have twelve edges. Because of its cross-section along the length, it is said to be a prism.

Question 12.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 51
_________

Answer: Triangular prism

Explanation:
A prism’s base shape is used to name the solid figure. The base shape of this prism is a triangle. The prism is a triangular prism.

Question 13.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 52
_________

Answer: Hexagonal Prism

Explanation:
In geometry, the hexagonal prism is a prism with a hexagonal base. This polyhedron has 8 faces, 18 edges, and 12 vertices. Since it has 8 faces, it is an octahedron. However, the term octahedron is primarily used to refer to the regular octahedron, which has eight triangular faces.

Question 14.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 53
_________

Answer: Square Pyramid

Explanation:
In geometry, a square pyramid is a pyramid having a square base. If the apex is perpendicularly above the center of the square, it is a right square pyramid and has symmetry. If all edges are equal, it is an equilateral square pyramid.

Question 15.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 54
_________

Answer: Octogonal Prism

Explanation:
In geometry, the octagonal prism is the sixth in an infinite set of prisms, formed by square sides and two regular octagon caps. If faces are all regular, it is a semiregular polyhedron.

Problem Solving – Lesson 4: Properties of Two-Dimensional Figures – Page No. 657

Question 16.
Mario is making a sculpture out of stone. He starts by carving a base with five sides. He then carves five triangular lateral faces that all meet at a point at the top. What three-dimensional figure does Mario make?
_________

Answer: Pentagonal Pyramid

Explanation:
Given,
Mario is making a sculpture out of stone.
He starts by carving a base with five sides.
He then carves five triangular lateral faces that all meet at a point at the top.
The polygon which has 5 sides is a pentagon.
The three-dimensional figure which meets at the same point is the pyramid.
The 3-dimensional figure that Mario makes is Pentagonal Pyramid
So, the answer to the above question is Pentagonal Pyramid.

Question 17.
What is another name for a cube? Explain your reasoning.
Type below:
_________

Answer: The cube can also be called a regular hexahedron. It is one of the five regular polyhedrons, which are also sometimes referred to as the Platonic solids.

Connect to Reading

Example Read the description. Underline the details you need to identify the solid figure that will name the correct building.

This building is one of the most identifiable structures in its city’s skyline. It has a square foundation and 28 floors. The building has four triangular exterior faces that meet at a point at the top of the structure.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 55
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 56
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 4: Three-Dimensional Figures img 57

Identify the solid figure and name the correct building.

Question 18.
Solve the problem in the Example.
Solid figure: _________
Building: _________

Answer:
i. Pyramid
ii. Luxor Hotel-Las Vegas-Nevada

Explanation:
The 3rd figure is in the form of a pyramid. The name of the pyramid-shaped building is Luxor Hotel-Las Vegas-Nevada.

Question 19.
This building was completed in 1902. It has a triangular foundation and a triangular roof that are the same size and shape. The three sides of the building are rectangles.
Solid figure: _________
Building: _________

Answer:
i. prism
ii. Flatiron Building-New York City-New York

Explanation:
The triangle-shaped figure is in the form of a prism. The name of the triangular prism building is Flatiron Building-New York, City-New York.

Mid-Chapter Review – Vocabulary – Page No. 661

Choose the best term from the box.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Mid-Chapter Review img 58

Question 1.
A closed plane figure with all sides congruent and all angles congruent is called a ________ .
_________

Answer: Regular Polygon

Question 2.
Line segments that have the same length or angles that have the same measure are __________ .
_________

Answer: Congruent

Concepts and Skills

Name each polygon. Then tell whether it is a regular polygon or not a regular polygon.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Mid-Chapter Review img 59
Name: _________
Type: _________

Answer:
i. Hexagon
ii. Regular Polygon

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Mid-Chapter Review img 60
Name: _________
Type: _________

Answer:
i. Triangle
ii. Non-Regular

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Mid-Chapter Review img 61
Name: _________
Type: _________

Answer:
i. Pentagon
ii. Not Regular

Classify each triangle. Write isosceles, scalene, or equilateral.

Then write acute, obtuse, or right.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Mid-Chapter Review img 62
△ _________
∠ _________

Answer:
i. Equilateral
ii. Acute

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Mid-Chapter Review img 63
△ _________
∠ _________

Answer:
i. Isosceles
ii. Right

Question 8.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Mid-Chapter Review img 64
△ _________
∠ _________

Answer:
i. Isosceles
ii. Obtuse

Classify the quadrilateral in as many ways as possible. Write quadrilateral, parallelogram, rectangle, rhombus, square, or trapezoid.

Question 9.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Mid-Chapter Review img 65
1. _________
2. _________

Answer:
1. Quadrilateral
2. Trapezoid

Question 10.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Mid-Chapter Review img 66
1. _________
2. _________
3. _________

Answer:
1. Quadrilateral
2. Parallelogram
3. Rectangle

Question 11.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Mid-Chapter Review img 67
1. _________
2. _________
3. _________
4. _________
5. _________

Answer:
1. Quadrilateral
2. Parallelogram
3. Rhombus
4. Rectangle
5. Square

Mid-Chapter Review – Page No. 662

Fill in the bubble completely to show your answer.

Question 12.
What type of triangle is shown below?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Mid-Chapter Review img 68
Options:
a. right isosceles
b. right scalene
c. equilateral
d. obtuse scalene

Answer: right isosceles

Explanation:
The above figure is a right angle and the two sides of the triangle are equal. The above figure is a right isosceles.
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 13.
Classify the quadrilateral in as many ways as possible.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Mid-Chapter Review img 69
Options:
a. quadrilateral, parallelogram, rhombus
b. quadrilateral, parallelogram, rhombus, trapezoid
c. quadrilateral, parallelogram, rhombus, rectangle, trapezoid, square
d. quadrilateral, parallelogram, rhombus, rectangle, square

Answer: quadrilateral, parallelogram, rhombus, rectangle, square

Question 14.
Classify the following figure.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Mid-Chapter Review img 70
Options:
a. cone
b. cube
c. rectangular prism
d. rectangular pyramid

Answer: rectangular prism

Explanation:
The 3-dimensional figure of the above rectangle is a rectangular prism.
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Share and Show – Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures – Page No. 665

Count the number of cubes used to build each solid figure.

Question 1.
The rectangular prism is made up of _____ unit cubes.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 71
______

Answer: 3

Explanation:
By seeing the above figure we can say that the rectangular prism has 3 unit cubes.

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 72
______ unit cubes

Answer: 15

Explanation:
The above figure shows that there are 5 congruent squares of 3 lines.
5 × 3 = 15 unit cubes

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 73
______ unit cubes

Answer: 12

Explanation:
The above figure shows that there are 4 congruent squares of 3 lines.
4 × 3 = 12 unit cubes

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 74
______ unit cubes

Answer: 12

Explanation:
The above figure shows that there are 6 congruent squares of 2 lines.
6 × 2 = 12

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 75
______ unit cubes

Answer: 5

Explanation:
By seeing the above figure we can say that there are 5 unit cubes.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 76
______ unit cubes

Answer: 6

Explanation:
There are 6 congruent squares in the above figure.

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 77
______ unit cubes

Answer: 7

Explanation:
The figure shows that there are 7 unit cubes.

Question 8.
How are the rectangular prisms in Exercises 3–4 related? Can you show a different rectangular prism with the same relationship? Explain.
Type below:
_________

Answer:
Go Math Grade 5 key Chapter 11 solution img-3
A rectangular prism is a polyhedron with two congruent and parallel bases. It is also a cuboid. It has six faces, and all the faces are in a rectangle shape and have twelve edges. Because of its cross-section along the length, it is said to be a prism.

Compare the number of unit cubes in each solid figure. Use < , > or =.

Question 9.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 78 ______ Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 79

Answer: Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 78 = Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 79

Explanation:
There are 5 cubes in the first figure and there are 5 cubes in the second figure.
Thus the figures Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 78 is equal to Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 79

Question 10.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 80 ______ Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 81

Answer: Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 80 < Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 81

Explanation:
There are 4 cubes in the first figure and there are 5 cubes in the second figure.
4 is less than 5
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 80 is less than Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 81

Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures – Page No. 666

Use the information to answer the questions.

The Cube Houses of Rotterdam, Netherlands
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 82

The Nakagin Capsule Tower, Tokyo, Japan
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 5: Unit Cubes and Solid Figures img 83

Question 11.
There are 38 Cube Houses. Each house could hold 1,000 unit cubes that are 1 meter by 1 meter by 1 meter. Describe the dimensions of a cube house using unit cubes. Remember that the edges of a cube are all the same length.
Each dimension = ______ meters

Answer: 10 meters

Explanation:
So each house can hold 1000 cubes that are 1 meter in length.
The house is also shaped like a cube, so you need to cube-root 1000.
The cube-root of 1000 is 10. So the cube house has a length, width, and height of 10 meters.
V = lbh
V = 10 m × 10 m × 10 m = 1000 cu. meter
Thus Each dimension is 10 meters.

Question 12.
The Nakagin Capsule Tower has 140 modules and is 14 stories high. If all of the modules were divided evenly among the number of stories, how many modules would be on each floor? How many different rectangular prisms could be made from that number?
Type below:
_________

Answer: 10 modules on each floor

Explanation:
The Nakagin Capsule Tower has 140 modules and is 14 stories high.
Divide 140 modules by 14
140 ÷ 14 = 10
Thus 10 modules would be on each floor.
The factors of 10 are 1, 2, 5.
1 × 10 = 10
2 × 5 = 10
Thus 2 different rectangular prisms can be made from 10 unit cubes.

Share and Show – Lesson 6: Understand Volume – Page No. 671

Use the unit given. Find the volume.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 84
Each cube = 1 cu cm
Volume = ______ cu ______

Answer: 48 cu. cm

Explanation:
Given that,
L = 4cm
B = 4cm
H = 3 cm
We know that,
The volume of the cuboid is lbh
V = 4 cm × 4 cm × 3 cm = 48 cubic cm
Thus the volume for the above cube is 48 cubic cm.

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 85
Each cube = 1 cu in.
Volume = ______ cu ______

Answer: 24 cu. in.

Explanation:
Given that,
L = 3 in
B = 2 in
H = 4 in.
We know that,
The volume of the cuboid is lb
V = 3 in × 2 in × 4 in = 24 cubic inches
Therefore the volume for the above cube is 24 cubic inches.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 86
Each cube = 1 cu ft
Volume = ______ cu ______

Answer: 36 cu. ft

Explanation:
Given that,
L = 6 ft
B = 2 ft
H = 3 ft
We know that,
The volume of the cuboid is lbh
V = 6 ft × 2 ft × 3 ft = 36 cubic feet
V = 36 cu. ft
Therefore the volume for the above figure is 36 cu. ft

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 87
Each cube = 1 cu in.
Volume = ______ cu ______

Answer: 60 cu. in

Given that,
L = 5 in.
B = 4 in.
H = 3 in.
We know that,
The volume of the cuboid is lbh
V = 5 in × 4 in × 3 in = 60 cubic inches
Thus the volume for the above figure is 60 cu. in.

Compare the volumes. Write < , >, or =.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 88 ______ Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 89

Answer: Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 88Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 89

Explanation:
Figure 1:
L = 4 cm
B = 4 cm
H = 2 cm
V = 4 × 4 × 2 = 32 cu. cm
Figure 2:
L = 4 in
B = 4 in
H = 2 in
V = 4 × 4 × 2 = 32 cu. in
32 cu. cm is less than 32 cu. in
Thus Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 88Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 89

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 90 ______ Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 91

Answer: Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 90 > Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 91

Explanation:
Let us find the volume for both the figures,
Figure 1:
L = 9 ft
B = 4 ft
H = 3 ft
Volume of the cuboid = lbh
V = 9 × 4 × 3 = 108 cu. ft
Figure 2:
L = 8 ft
B = 5 ft
H = 2 ft
Volume of the cuboid = lbh
V = 8 ft × 5 ft × 3 ft = 120 cu. ft
By seeing the volume for both the figures we can say that 120 cu. ft is greater than 108 cu. ft
Thus, Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 90 > Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 91

Problem Solving – Lesson 6: Understand Volume – Page No. 672

Question 7.
What’s the Error? Jerry says that a cube with edges that measure 10 centimeters has a volume that is twice as much as a cube with sides that measure 5 centimeters. Explain and correct Jerry’s error.
Type below:
__________

Answer:
Let v1 equal the 10 cm sided cube’s volume.
Let v2 equal the 5 cm sided cube’s volume.
v1 = 10 × 10 10 = 1000 cu. cm
v2 = 5 × 5 × 5 = 125 cu. cm
To find the relationship between the two volumes, divide the first volume by the second.
r = v1 ÷ v2
r = 1000 ÷ 125 = 8
The volume differ by a factor of 8.
Thus the volume differs by a factor of 8, not by a factor of 2.

Question 8.
Pattie built a rectangular prism with cubes. The base of her prism has 12 centimeter cubes. If the prism was built with 108 centimeter cubes, how many layers does her prism have? What is the height of her prism?
layers: ______ the height of the prism: ______ cm

Answer: 9 layers, the height of the prism is 9 cm

Explanation:
Given:
Pattie built a rectangular prism with cubes.
The base of her prism has 12-centimeter cubes.
The prism was built with 108 cm cubes.
To find the layers divide the number of cubes by base of the prism
That means 108 ÷ 12
108/12 = 9
Thus the prism has 9 layers.
Now we have to find the base of the prism
108 = b × h
12 × h = 108
h = 108/12 = 9
Therefore the height of the prism = 9 cm

Question 9.
A packing company makes boxes with edges each measuring 3 feet. What is the volume of the boxes? If 10 boxes are put in a larger, rectangular shipping container and completely fill it with no gaps or overlaps, what is the volume of the shipping container?
volume of the boxes: __________ cu ft
volume of the shipping container = __________ cu ft

Answer:
the volume of the boxes: 27 cu ft
the volume of the shipping container = 27 cu ft

Explanation:
A packing company makes boxes with edges each measuring 3 feet.
Volume of the cube = lbh
V = 3 × 3 × 3 = 27 cubic feet
Thus the volume of the boxes is 27 feet.
The volume of the boxes for 10 boxes is 27 × 10 = 270 cubic feet
Therefore the volume of the shipping container is 27 cu ft

Question 10.
Test Prep Find the volume of the rectangular prism.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 6: Understand Volume img 92
Each cube = 1 cu cm
Options:
a. 25 cubic feet
b. 25 cubic meters
c. 75 cubic meters
d. 75 cubic centimeters

Answer: 75 cubic centimeters

Explanation:
L = 5 cm
B = 3 cm
H = 5 cm
Volume of the rectangular prism is lbh
V = 5 cm × 3 cm × 5 cm = 75 cubic centimeter
V = 75 cu. cm
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Share and Show – Lesson 7: Estimate Volume – Page No. 677

Estimate the volume.

Question 1.
Each tissue box has a volume of 125 cubic inches.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 7: Estimate Volume img 93
There are _______ tissue boxes in the larger box.
The estimated volume of the box holding the tissue
boxes is ______ × 125 = _____ cu in.
_____ tissue boxes _____ cu in.

Answer:
Given that the volume of each box is 125 cubic inches.
By seeing the above figure we can say that there are 9 boxes in the larger box.
Thus there are 9 tissue boxes in the larger box.
Now to find the volume of the tissue boxes.
We have to multiply the number of boxes with the volume of the box
V = 125 × 9 = 1125 cubic inches.
Therefore The estimated volume of the box holding the tissue boxes is 1125 cubic inches.

Question 2.
Volume of chalk box: 16 cu in.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 7: Estimate Volume img 94
Volume of large box: ______________ .
_____ cu in.

Answer:
Given that, the volume of the chalk box is 16 cubic inches.
From the figure, we can see that there are 24 boxes.
The volume of the large box is 24 × 16 = 384 cubic inches.
Therefore the estimated volume of the large box is 384 cu in.

Question 3.
Volume of small jewelry box: 30 cu cm
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 7: Estimate Volume img 95
Volume of large box: __________
_____ cu cm

Answer:
Given, the volume of the small jewelry box is 30 cu cm
There are 10 small jewelry boxes.
V = 30 × 10 = 300 cu. cm
Thus the estimated volume of large box is 300 cu. cm

On Your Own

Estimate the volume.

Question 4.
Volume of book: 80 cu in.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 7: Estimate Volume img 96
Volume of large box: __________
_____ cu in.

Answer:
Given that, the volume of the book is 80 cu. in
There are 12 books in the figure.
Multiply the number of books with the volume of each book
= 12 × 80 = 960 cu. inches
Thus the estimated volume of large books is 960 cu in.

Question 5.
Volume of spaghetti box: 750 cu cm
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 7: Estimate Volume img 97
Volume of large box: ________
_____ cu cm

Answer:
Volume of spaghetti box is 750 cu. cm
Volume = 2 × 5 × 4 = 40
Number of boxes = 40
Now multiply 40 with 750 cu. cm to find the volume of large box
V = 40 × 750 cu. cm
V = 30000 cubic cm
Therefore the estimated Volume of large box is 30000 cubic cm

Question 6.
Volume of cereal box: 324 cu in.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 7: Estimate Volume img 98
Volume of large box: __________
cu in.

Answer:
Given, Volume of a cereal box is 324 cu. in
Number of boxes is 2 × 3 × 3 = 18
The volume of large box is 18 × 324 cu. in
V = 18 × 324 cu. in = 5832 cubic inches
Thus the estimated Volume of large box is 5832 cubic inches.

Question 7.
Volume of pencil box: 4,500 cu cm
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 7: Estimate Volume img 99
Volume of large box: ________
_____ cu cm

Answer:
Volume of pencil box is 4500 cu cm
Number of pencil boxes = 2 × 5 = 10
The volume of large box is 4500 × 10 = 45000 cu cm
Thus the estimated volume of large box is 45000 cu cm

Problem Solving – Lesson 7: Estimate Volume – Page No. 678

Sense or Nonsense?

Question 8.
Marcelle estimated the volume of the two boxes below, using one of his books. His book has a volume of 48 cubic inches. Box 1 holds about 7 layers of books, and Box 2 holds about 14 layers of books. Marcelle says that the volume of either box is about the same.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 7: Estimate Volume img 100
Does Marcelle’s statement make sense or is it nonsense?
Explain your answer.
Type below:
_________

Answer:
Calculate the books in box 1
V = lbh
V1 = 2 × 4 × 7 = 56 books
Calculate the volume of books in box 2
V = lbh
V2 = 1 × 4 × 14 = 56 books
So, both boxes hold the same number of books.
Thus Marcelle’s statement make sense.

Share and Show – Lesson 8: Volume of Rectangular Prisms – Page No. 683

Find the volume.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 8: Volume of Rectangular Prisms img 101
The length of the rectangular prism is ______.
The width is ______. So, the area of the base is ______.
The height is ______. So, the volume of the prism is ______.
Type below:
_________

Answer: 120 cu. in

Explanation:
From the figure, we can say that the length of the rectangular prism is 4 in
The width of the rectangular prism is 5 in
The height of the rectangular prism is 6 in.
The volume of the rectangular prism is l × w × h
V = 4 in × 6 in × 5 in = 120 cu. in
So, the volume of the prism is 120 cu. in

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 8: Volume of Rectangular Prisms img 102
Volume: ______ cu cm

Answer: 18

Explanation:
From the figure, we can say that the length of the rectangular prism is 2 cm
The width of the rectangular prism is 3 cm
The height of the rectangular prism is 3 cm
The volume of the rectangular prism is l × w × h
V = 2 cm × 3 cm × 3 cm = 18 cu. cm
Thus the volume of the rectangular prism is 18 cu. cm

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 8: Volume of Rectangular Prisms img 103
Volume: ______ cu in.

Answer: 12

Explanation:
From the figure, we can say that the length of the rectangular prism is 2 in.
The width of the rectangular prism is 6 in.
The height of the rectangular prism is 1 in.
The volume of the rectangular prism is l × w × h
V = 2 in × 6 in × 1 in
V = 12 Cu in.
Thus the volume of the rectangular prism is 12 Cu in.

On Your Own

Find the volume.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 8: Volume of Rectangular Prisms img 104
Volume: ______ cu mm

Answer: 24

Explanation:
From the figure, we can say that the length of the rectangular prism is 1 mm
The width of the rectangular prism is 8 mm
The height of the rectangular prism is 3 mm
The volume of the rectangular prism is l × w × h
V = 1 mm × 8 mm × 3 mm
V = 24 Cu. mm
Thus the volume of the rectangular prism is 24 Cu. mm

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 8: Volume of Rectangular Prisms img 105
Volume: ______ cu cm

Answer: 160

Explanation:
From the figure, we can say that the length of the rectangular prism is 10 cm
The width of the rectangular prism is 4 cm
The height of the rectangular prism is 4 cm
The volume of the rectangular prism is l × w × h
V = 10 cm × 4 cm × 4 cm = 160 Cu. cm
Thus the volume of the rectangular prism is 160 Cu. cm

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 8: Volume of Rectangular Prisms img 106
Volume: ______ cu ft

Answer: 150

Explanation:
From the figure, we can say that the length of the rectangular prism is 5 ft
The width of the rectangular prism is 6 ft
The height of the rectangular prism is 5 ft
The volume of the rectangular prism is l × w × h
V = 5 ft × 6 ft × 5 ft
V = 150 Cu. ft
Thus the volume of the rectangular prism is 150 Cu. ft

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 8: Volume of Rectangular Prisms img 107
Volume: ______ cu in.

Answer: 196

Explanation:
From the figure, we can say that the length of the rectangular prism is 7 in.
The width of the rectangular prism is 7 in.
The height of the rectangular prism is 4 in.
The volume of the rectangular prism is l × w × h
V = 7 in × 7 in × 4 in = 196 Cu. in
Thus the volume of the rectangular prism is 196 Cu. in

UNLOCK the Problem – Lesson 8: Volume of Rectangular Prisms – Page No. 684

Question 8.
Rich is building a travel crate for his dog, Thomas, a beagle mix who is about 30 inches long, 12 inches wide, and 24 inches tall. For Thomas to travel safely, his crate needs to be a rectangular prism that is about 12 inches greater than his length and width, and 6 inches greater than his height. What is the volume of the travel crate that Rich should build?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 8: Volume of Rectangular Prisms img 108
a. What do you need to find to solve the problem?
Type below:
_________

Answer: We need to find the volume of the travel crate that Rich should build.

Question 8.
b. How can you use Thomas’s size to help you solve the problem?
Type below:
_________

Answer: Thomas’s size helps to find the length, width and height of the dog crate.

Question 8.
c. What steps can you use to find the size of Thomas’s crate?
Type below:
_________

Answer:
Rich is building a travel crate for his dog, Thomas, a beagle mix who is about 30 inches long, 12 inches wide, and 24 inches tall.
For Thomas to travel safely, his crate needs to be a rectangular prism that is about 12 inches greater than his length and width, and 6 inches greater than his height.
Length of the dog crate is 30 in + 12 in = 42 inches
Width of the dog crate is 12 inches more than width of Thomas crate = 12 in + 12 in = 24 inches
Height of the dog crate is 24 in + 6 in = 30 inches
V = 42 in × 24 in × 30 in
V = 30,240 cu in

Question 8.
d. Fill in the blanks for the dimensions of the dog crate.
length: _____
width: _____
height: _____
area of base: _____
Type below:
_________

Answer:
Crate length = 30 + 12 = 42 in
Crate width = 12 + 12 = 24 in
Crate height = 24 + 6 = 30 in
Area of base = l × w
A = 42 in × 24 in = 1008 sq in.

Question 8.
e. Find the volume of the crate by multiplying the base area and the height.
______ × ______ = ______
So, Rich should build a travel crate for Thomas that has a volume of ______ .
Type below:
_________

Answer:
Area of base = l × w
A = 42 in × 24 in = 1008 sq in.
Height = 30 in
V = 1008 sq in × 30 in = 30240 cu. in
So, Rich should build a travel crate for Thomas that has a volume of 30240 cu. in

Question 9.
What is the volume of the rectangular prism at the right?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 8: Volume of Rectangular Prisms img 109
Options:
a. 35 in.3
b. 125 in.3
c. 155 in.3
d. 175 in.3

Answer: 175 in.3

Explanation:
Length = 5 in
Width = 7 in
Height = 5 in
Volume of the rectangular prism is l × w × h
V = 5 in × 7 in × 5 in
V = 175 in.3
The volume of the rectangular prism is 175 in.3
Therefore the correct answer is option D.

Share and Show – Lesson 9: Algebra Apply Volume Formulas – Page No. 689

Find the volume.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 9: Algebra Apply Volume Formulas img 110
V =____ cu ft

Answer: 40

Explanation:
length = 2 ft
width = 4 ft
height = 5 ft
Volume of the rectangular prism is l × w × h
V = 2 ft × 4 ft × 5 ft
V = 40 cu ft
Volume of the rectangular prism is 40 cu. ft

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 9: Algebra Apply Volume Formulas img 111
V =____ cu cm

Answer: 144

Explanation:
length = 4 cm
width = 4 cm
height = 9 cm
Volume of the rectangular prism is l × w × h
V = 4 cm × 4 cm × 9 cm
V = 144 cu cm
Volume of the rectangular prism is 144 cu cm

On Your Own

Find the volume.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 9: Algebra Apply Volume Formulas img 112
V =____ cu in.

Answer: 216

Explanation:
length = 6 in
width = 6 in
height = 6 in
Volume of the prism is l × w × h
V = 6 in × 6 in × 6 in
V = 216 cu. in
Thus the Volume of the prism is 216 cu. in.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 9: Algebra Apply Volume Formulas img 113
V =____ cu ft

Answer: 192

Explanation:
length = 12 ft
width = 4 ft
height = 4 ft
Volume of the rectangular prism is l × w × h
V = 12 ft × 4 ft × 4 ft
V = 192 cu ft
Therefore, the Volume of the rectangular prism is 192 cu ft.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 9: Algebra Apply Volume Formulas img 114
V =____ cu cm

Answer: 240

Explanation:
length = 10 cm
width = 6 cm
height = 4 cm
Volume of the rectangular prism is l × w × h
V = 10 cm × 6 cm × 4 cm
V = 240 Cu. cm
Therefore, the Volume of the rectangular prism is 240 Cu. cm.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 9: Algebra Apply Volume Formulas img 115
V =____ cu in.

Answer: 1008

Explanation:
length = 14 in.
width = 6 in.
height = 12 in.
Volume of the rectangular prism is l × w × h
V = 14 in × 6 in × 12 in
V = 1008 cu. in
Thus the Volume of the rectangular prism is 1008 cu. in

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 9: Algebra Apply Volume Formulas img 116
V =420 cu ft
■ = ____ ft

Answer: 10

Explanation:
length = 7 ft
width = 6 ft
height = ■ ft
Volume of the rectangular prism is l × w × h
420 cu ft = 7 ft × 6 ft × ■
■ × 42 sq ft = 420 cu ft
■ = 420 cu ft ÷ 42 sq ft
■ = 10 ft

Question 8.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 9: Algebra Apply Volume Formulas img 117
V =900 cu cm
■ = ____ cm

Answer: 10

Explanation:
length = 6 cm
width = 15 cm
height = ■ cm
Volume of the rectangular prism is l × w × h
V = 900 cu cm
900 cu cm = 6 cm × 15 cm × ■ cm
900 cu cm = 90 sq cm × ■ cm
■ cm = 900 cu cm ÷ 90 sq cm
■ cm = 10 cm

Problem Solving – Lesson 9: Algebra Apply Volume Formulas – Page No. 690

Question 9.
The Jade Restaurant has a large aquarium on display in its lobby. The base of the aquarium is 5 feet by 2 feet. The height of the aquarium is 4 feet. How many cubic feet of water are needed to completely fill the aquarium?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 9: Algebra Apply Volume Formulas img 118
V =____ cu ft of water

Answer: 40 cu ft of water

Explanation:
The Jade Restaurant has a large aquarium on display in its lobby.
The base of the aquarium is 5 feet by 2 feet.
The height of the aquarium is 4 feet.
Volume = b × w × h
V = 5 feet × 2 feet× 4 feet
V = 40 Cu. ft
Therefore, the volume of the aquarium is 40 cu ft of water.

Question 10.
The Pearl Restaurant put a larger aquarium in its lobby. The base of their aquarium is 6 feet by 3 feet, and the height is 4 feet. How many more cubic feet of water does the Pearl Restaurant’s aquarium hold than the Jade Restaurant’s aquarium?
____ cu ft

Answer: 32 cu ft

Explanation:
The Pearl Restaurant put a larger aquarium in its lobby.
The base of their aquarium is 6 feet by 3 feet, and the height is 4 feet.
Volume = b × w × h
V = 6 feet × 3 feet × 4 feet = 72 cu. feet
Thus the Volume of Pearl Restaurant’s aquarium is 72 cu. feet
The volume of the Jade Restaurant’s aquarium is 40 cu ft of water
V = Vp – Vj
V = 72 – 40 = 32 cu feet

Question 11.
Eddie measured his aquarium using a small fish food box. The box has a base area of 6 inches and a height of 4 inches. Eddie found that the volume of his aquarium is 3,456 cubic inches. How many boxes of fish food could fit in the aquarium? Explain your answer.
____ boxes

Answer: 144 boxes

Explanation:
Volume = b × h
V = 6 in × 4 in = 24 cu in
To find out how many boxes will fit, divide the aquarium volume by the food box volume.
numfit = Vaq/Vbox
numfit = 3456/24 = 144
144 fish food boxes fir inside the aquarium.

Question 12.
Describe the difference between area and volume.
Type below:
_________

Answer: The surface area is the sum of the areas of all the faces of the solid figure. It is measured in square units. Volume is the number of cubic units that make up a solid figure.

Question 13.
Test Prep Adam stores his favorite CDs in a box like the one at the right. What is the volume of the box?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 9: Algebra Apply Volume Formulas img 119
Options:
a. 150 cubic centimeters
b. 750 cubic centimeters
c. 1,050 cubic centimeters
d. 1,150 cubic centimeters

Answer: 1,050 cubic centimeters

Explanation:
L = 15 cm
W = 10 cm
H = 7 cm
V = lwh
V = 15 cm × 10 cm × 7 cm = 1050 cubic centimeters
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Share and Show – Lesson 10: Problem Solving Compare Volumes – Page No. 695

Question 1.
Mr. Price makes cakes for special occasions. His most popular-sized cakes have a volume of 360 cubic inches. The cakes have a height, or thickness, of 3 inches, and have different whole number lengths and widths. No cakes have a length or width of 1 or 2 inches. How many different cakes, each with a different-size base, have a volume of 360 cubic inches?
First, think about what the problem is asking you to solve, and the information that you are given.
Next, make a table using the information from problem.
Finally, use the table to solve the problem.
Type below:
_________

Answer: There are total of 8 different possible combination of length and width

Explanation:
Volume = 360 cubic inches
Height = 3 inches
Volume = l x w x h
360 = l x w x 3
l x w = 120
The factors of 120 are,
1 x 120,
2x 60,
3 x 40,
4 x 30,
5 x 24,
6 x 20,
8 x 15,
10 x 12

Question 2.
What if the 360 cubic-inch cakes are 4 inches thick and any whole number length and width are possible? How many different cakes could be made? Suppose that the cost of a cake that size is $25, plus $1.99 for every 4 cubic inches of cake. How much would the cake cost?
Type below:
_________

Answer:
Since the store have a volume of 360 cu in and a height of 4 in.
We need to find the number of different stones which have a base of 90 sq in.
V = b × h
B = 360 cu in/4 in
B = 90 sq in.
Consider the factors of 90.
The factors of 90 are 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 9, 10, 15, 18, 30, 45, 90
Make a table with the base, height and volume for each pair of factors
Height = 4 in
1 × 90 × 4 = 360 cu in
2 × 45 × 4 = 360 cu in
3 × 30 × 4 = 360 cu in
5 × 18 × 4 = 360 cu in
6 × 15 × 4 = 360 cu in
9 × 10 × 4 = 360 cu in
6 different sized paving stones.
Remember that each store has a volume of 360 cu in.
Divide by 4 to find how many 4 cu in per stone
Concrete = $0.18 × (360/4)
= $0.18 × 90 = $18.70
The cost of the stone plus the concrete
cost = $2.50 + concrete
Cost = $2.50 + $16.20 = $18.70

Question 3.
One company makes inflatable swimming pools that come in four sizes of rectangular prisms. The length of each pool is twice the width and twice the depth. The depth of the pools are each a whole number from 2 to 5 feet. If the pools are filled all the way to the top, what is the volume of each pool?
Type below:
_________

Answer:
If the depth of the pool is 2 feet
then the length of the pool is twice the width and twice the depth
That means 2 feet × 2 × 2 = 8 feet
Width is twice the depth
W = 2 feet × 2 = 4 feet
The volume of the rectangular swimming pool is l × w × h
V = 8 ft × 4 feet × 2 ft
V = 64 cu ft
If the depth of the pool is 3 feet
then the length of the pool is twice the width and twice the depth
That means 3 feet × 2 × 2 = 12 feet
Width is twice the depth
W = 3 feet × 2 = 6 feet
The volume of the rectangular swimming pool is l × w × h
V = 12 ft × 6 feet × 2 ft
V = 144 cu ft
If the depth of the pool is 4 feet
then the length of the pool is twice the width and twice the depth
That means 4 feet × 2 × 2 = 16 feet
Width is twice the depth
W = 4 feet × 2 = 8 feet
The volume of the rectangular swimming pool is l × w × h
V = 16 ft × 8 feet × 2 ft
V = 256 cu ft
If the depth of the pool is 5 feet
then the length of the pool is twice the width and twice the depth
That means 5 feet × 2 × 2 = 20 feet
Width is twice the depth
W = 5 feet × 2 = 10 feet
The volume of the rectangular swimming pool is l × w × h
V = 20 ft × 10 feet × 2 ft
V = 400 cu ft

On Your Own – Lesson 10: Problem Solving Compare Volumes – Page No. 696

Question 4.
Ray wants to buy the larger of two aquariums. One aquarium has a base that is 20 inches by 20 inches and a height that is 18 inches. The other aquarium has a base that is 40 inches by 12 inches and a height that is 12 inches. Which aquarium has a greater volume? By how much?
Type below:
_________

Answer: 1440 cu. in

Explanation:
Volume = l × w × h
Volume of Aquarium 1 = 20 in × 20 in × 18 in
V = 7200 cu. in
Volume = l × w × h
Volume of Aquarium 2 is 40 in × 12 in × 12 in
V for A2 = 5760 cu in
A1 > A2
A1 has a greater volume.
Subtract A2 from A1
A1 – A2 = 7200 cu in – 5760 cu in
= 1440 cu in
The volume of Aquarium 1 is 1440 cu in more than Volume of Aquarium 2.

Question 5.
Ken owns 13 CDs. His brother Keith has 7 more CDs than he does. Their brother, George, has more CDs than either of the younger brothers. Together, the three brothers have 58 CDs. How many CDs does George have?
______ CDs

Answer: 25 CDs

Explanation:
Given that,
Ken owns 13 CDs.
His brother Keith has 7 more CDs than he does.
Their brother, George, has more CDs than either of the younger brothers.
Together, the three brothers have 58 CDs.
Keith has 7 more CDs than Ken
That means he has 7 + 13 = 20 CDs
Now subtract Ken’s CDs, Keith CDs from the total number of CDs.
= 58 – 20 – 13 = 25 CDs.
Thus George has 25 CDs.

Question 6.
Kathy has ribbons that have lengths of 7 inches, 10 inches, and 12 inches. Explain how she can use these ribbons to measure a length of 15 inches.
Type below:
_________

Answer: She could take the 10-inch ribbon and then use 5 inches from the 7-inch ribbon

Question 7.
A park has a rectangular playground area that has a length of 66 feet and a width of 42 feet. The park department has 75 yards of fencing material. Is there enough fencing material to enclose the playground area? Explain.
______

Answer: Yes

Explanation:
A park has a rectangular playground area that has a length of 66 feet and a width of 42 feet.
The park department has 75 yards of fencing material.
Area of the rectangular playground = l × w
A = 66 feet × 42 feet
A = 2772 sq. ft
Perimeter of the rectangular playground = 2l + 2w
P = 2 × 66 + 2 × 42
P = 216 ft
Now convert from feet to yard
We know that 1 yard = 3 feet
216 ft = 1/3 × 216 = 72 yard
72 yard is less than 75 yard
Thus the park department has enough fencing material.

Question 8.
Test Prep John is making a chest that will have a volume of 1,200 cubic inches. The length is 20 inches and the width is 12 inches. How many inches tall will his chest be?
Options:
a. 4 in.
b. 5 in.
c. 6 in.
d. 7 in.

Answer: 5 in

Explanation:
John is making a chest that will have a volume of 1,200 cubic inches.
The length is 20 inches and the width is 12 inches.
Volume = l × w × h
1200 cu in = 20 in × 12 in × h
240 sq in × h = 1200 cu in
h = 1200 cu in ÷ 240 sq in
h = 5 in
Thus John’s chest will be 5 inches tall.
The correct answer is option B.

Share and Show – Lesson 11: Find Volume of Composed Figures – Page No. 701

Find the volume of the composite figure.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 11: Find Volume of Composed Figures img 120
V = ______ cu in.

Answer: 88 cu in.

Explanation:
Split the figure into 2 parts
Volume of figure 1:
b = 2 in
h = 3 in
w = 4 in
V = 2 in × 4 in × 3 in
V = 24 cu. in
Volume of figure 2:
b = 8 in
w = 4 in
h = 2 in
V = 8 in × 4 in × 2 in
V = 64 in
Volume of the composite figure = 24 cu in + 64 cu. in = 88 cu. in

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 11: Find Volume of Composed Figures img 121
V = ______ cu cm

Answer: 48 cu cm

Explanation:
Split the figure into 2 parts
Volume of figure 1:
b = 3 cm
h = 1 cm
w = 2 cm
V = 3 cm × 2 cm × 1 cm
V = 6 cu. cm
Volume of figure 2:
b = 7 cm
w = 6 cm
h = 1 cm
V = 7 cm × 6 cm × 1 cm
V = 42 cu. cm
Volume of the composite figure = 42 cu. cm + 6 cu. cm = 48 cu cm

On Your Own

Find the volume of the composite figure.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 11: Find Volume of Composed Figures img 122
V = ______ cu ft

Answer: 52 cu ft

Explanation:
Split the figure into 2 parts
Volume of figure 1:
b = 6 ft
h = 2 ft
w = 3 ft
V = 6 ft × 3 ft × 2 ft
V = 36 cu. ft
Volume of figure 2:
b = 4 ft
w = 2 ft
h = 2 ft
V = 4 ft × 2 ft × 2 ft
V = 16 cu. ft
Volume of the composite figure = 36 cu. ft + 16 cu. ft = 52 cu ft

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 11: Find Volume of Composed Figures img 123
V = ______ cu cm

Answer: 108 cu. cm

Explanation:
Split the figure into 2 parts
Volume of figure 1:
b = 3 cm
w = 8 cm
h = 2 cm
V = 3 cm × 8 cm × 2 cm
V = 48 cu cm
Volume of figure 2:
b = 10 cm
w = 3 cm
h = 2 cm
V = 10 cm × 3 cm × 2 cm
V = 60 cu cm
Volume of the composite figure = 48 cu cm + 60 cu cm = 108 cu. cm

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 11: Find Volume of Composed Figures img 124
V = ______ cu in.

Answer: 204 cu. in

Explanation:
Split the figure into 2 parts
Volume of figure 1:
b = 3 in
h = 5 in
w = 4 in
V = 3 in × 4 in × 5 in
V = 60 cu. in
Volume of figure 2:
b = 12 in
w = 4 in
h = 3 in
V = 12 in × 4 in × 3 in
V = 144 cu. in
Volume of the composite figure = 60 cu in + 144 cu. in = 204 cu. in

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 11: Find Volume of Composed Figures img 125
V = ______ cu ft

Answer: 96 cu ft

Explanation:
Split the figure into 3 parts.
Figure 1:
V1 = 9 ft × 4 ft × 2 ft
V1 = 72 cu. ft
Figure 2:
V2 = 3 ft × 4 ft × 2 ft
V2 = 24 cu. ft
V = V1 + V2
V = 72 cu. ft + 24 cu. ft = 96 cu. ft
Thus the volume of the composite figure is 96 cu. ft

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 11: Find Volume of Composed Figures img 126
V = ______ cu ft

Answer: 300 cu. ft

Explanation:
Go-Math-Grade-5-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Geometry-and-Volume-img-126
Split the figure into 3 parts.
Figure 1:
V1 = 5 ft × 4 ft × 4 ft
V1 = 80 cu. ft
Figure 2:
V2 = 6 ft × 5 ft × 6 ft
V2 = 180 cu ft
Figure 3:
V3 = 4 ft × 5 ft × 2 ft
V3 = 40 cu. ft
V = V1 + V2 + V3
V = 80 cu. ft + 180 cu ft + 40 cu ft = 300 cu. ft

Question 8.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 11: Find Volume of Composed Figures img 127
V = ______ cu cm

Answer: 102 cu cm

Explanation:
Go-Math-Grade-5-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Geometry-and-Volume-img-127
Figure 1:
V1 = 10 cm × 3 cm × 2 cm = 60 cu cm
V1 = 60 cu. cm
Figure 2:
V2= 2 cm × 3 cm × 4 cm
V2 = 24 cu. cm
Figure 3:
V3 = 2 cm × 3 cm × 3 cm
V3 = 18 cu. cm
V = V1 + V2 + V3
V = 60 cu. cm + 24 cu. cm + 18 cu. cm = 102 cu. cm

Problem Solving – Lesson 11: Find Volume of Composed Figures – Page No. 702

Use the composite figure at the right for 9–11.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 11: Find Volume of Composed Figures img 128

Question 9.
As part of a wood-working project, Jordan made the figure at the right out of wooden building blocks. How much space does the figure he made take up?
______ cu in.

Answer: 784 cu. in

Explanation:
Split the figure into 2 parts
Figure 1:
V1 = 14 in × 4 in × 5 in
V1 = 280 cu. in
Figure 2:
V2 = 12 in × 14 in × 3 in
V2 = 504 cu. in
V = V1 + V2
V = 280 cu. in + 504 cu. in
V = 784 cu. in

Question 10.
What are the dimensions of the two rectangular prisms you used to find the volume of the figure? What other rectangular prisms could you have used?
Type below:
________

Answer:
Dimensions for figure 1:
Base = 14 in
Width = 4 in
Height = 5 in
Dimensions for figure 2:
Base = 12 in
Width = 14 in
Height = 3 in

Question 11.
If the volume is found using subtraction, what is the volume of the empty space that is subtracted? Explain.
______ cu in.

Answer: 560 cu. in

Explanation:
B = 8 in
H = 5 in
W = 14 in
V = 8 in × 14 in × 5 in
V = 560 cu. in
Thus the volume of the empty space is 560 cu. in

Question 12.
Explain how you can find the volume of composite figures that are made by combining rectangular prisms.
Type below:
________

Answer:

Split the figure into 2 parts
Figure 1:
V1 = 14 in × 4 in × 5 in
V1 = 280 cu. in
Figure 2:
V2 = 12 in × 14 in × 3 in
V2 = 504 cu. in
V = V1 + V2
V = 280 cu. in + 504 cu. in
V = 784 cu. in

Question 13.
Test Prep What is the volume of the composite figure?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Lesson 11: Find Volume of Composed Figures img 129
Options:
a. 126 cubic centimeters
b. 350 cubic centimeters
c. 450 cubic centimeters
d. 476 cubic centimeters

Answer: 476 cubic centimeters

Explanation:
Split the figure into 2 parts
Figure 1:
V1 = 10 cm × 7 cm × 5 cm
V1 = 350 cu. cm
Figure 2:
V2 = 3 cm × 7 cm × 6 cm
V2 = 126 cu. cm
V = V1 + V2
V = 350 cu. cm + 126 cu. cm
V = 476 cu. cm

Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 705

Question 1.
Fran drew a triangle with no congruent sides and 1 right angle. Which term accurately describes the triangle? Mark all that apply.
Options:
a. isosceles
b. scalene
c. acute
d. right

Answer: Right

Explanation:
A right triangle is a type of triangle that has one angle that measures 90°. Right triangles, and the relationships between their sides and angles, are the basis of trigonometry.
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 2.
Jose stores his baseball cards in a box like the one shown.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 130
Use the numbers and symbols on the tiles to write a formula that represents the volume of the box. Symbols may be used more than once or not at all.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 131
What is the volume of the box?
V = ______ cubic inches

Answer:
Volume of the box is l × w × h
V = 8 in × 10 in × 3 in
V = 240 cu. in
Thus the volume of the box is 240 cu. in

Question 3.
Mr. Delgado sees this sign while he is driving. For 3a–3b, choose the values and term that correctly describes the shape Mr. Delgado saw.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 132
3a. The figure has Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 133 sides and Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 134angles.
Type below:
________

Answer: The figure has 3 sides and 3 angles.

Explanation:
From the above figure we can say that there are three sides and three angles.

Question 3.
3b. All of the sides are congruent, so the figure is Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 135
________

Answer: a regular polygon
If all the sides are congruent then the polygon is a regular polygon.

Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 706

Question 4.
What is the volume of the composite figure?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 136
______ cubic feet

Answer: 36 cubic feet

Explanation:
Figure 1:
length = 2 ft
width = 3 ft
height = 1 ft
Volume of 1st figure = l × w × h
V = 2 ft × 3 ft × 1 ft = 6 cu. ft
Figure 2:
length = 4 ft
width = 3 ft
height = 1 ft
Volume of 1st figure = l × w × h
V = 4 ft × 3 ft × 1 ft = 12 cu. ft
Figure 3:
length = 6 ft
width = 3 ft
height = 1 ft
Volume of 1st figure = l × w × h
V = 6 ft × 3 ft × 1 ft = 18 cu. ft
Add all the volumes = 6 cu. ft + 12 cu. ft + 18 cu. ft
Volume = 36 cu. ft

Question 5.
Match the figure with the number of unit cubes that would be needed to build each figure. Not every number of unit cubes will be used.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 137

Answer:
Go-Math-Grade-5-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Geometry-and-Volume-img-137

Explanation:
Count the number of unit cubes in the first figure.
There are 10 unit cubes in figure 1 so match the figure 1 to 10 unit cubes.
Count the number of unit cubes in the second figure.
There are 12 unit cubes in figure 2 so match figure 2 to 12 unit cubes.
Count the number of unit cubes in the third figure.
There are 9 unit cubes in figure 3 so match figure 3 to 9 unit cubes.

Question 6.
Chuck is making a poster about polyhedrons for his math class. He will draw figures and organize them in different sections of the poster.
Part A
Chuck wants to draw three-dimensional figures whose lateral faces are rectangles. He says he can draw prisms and pyramids. Do you agree?
Explain your answer.
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: No

Explanation:
The lateral faces of a pyramid are triangles.
The lateral faces of a prism are rectangles.

Question 6.
Part B
Chuck says that he can draw a cylinder on his polyhedron poster because it has a pair of bases that are congruent. Is Chuck correct?
Explain your reasoning.
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: No

Explanation:
A cylinder does have 2 congruent bases, but a cylinder is not a polyhedron.
A cylinder has 1 curved surface, while a polyhedron has faces that are polygons

Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 707

Question 7.
Javier drew the shape shown. For 7a–7b, choose the values and term that correctly describe the shape Javier drew.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 138
7a. The figure has Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 139 sides and Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 140 angles.
Type below:
_________

Answer: 8, 8
The above figure has 8 sides and 8 angles.

Question 7.
7b. The figure is a Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 141
Type below:
_________

Answer: The polygon with 8 sides is known as the octagon. The above figure is congruent thus it is a regular octagon.

Question 8.
Victoria used 1-inch cubes to build the rectangular prism shown. Find the volume of the rectangular prism Victoria built.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 142
______ cubic inches

Answer: 72

Explanation:
Given,
l = 6 in
w = 3 in
h = 4 in
The volume of the rectangular prism is l × w × h
V = 6 in × 3 in × 4in
V = 72 cu in.
Hence, the volume of the rectangular prism Victoria built is 72 cu. in.

Question 9.
Nathan drew a scalene, obtuse triangle. For 9a–9c, choose Yes or No to indicate whether the figure shown could be the triangle that Nathan drew.
a. Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 143
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: Yes

Explanation:
The above different have different sizes thus the triangle is scalene. The angle for the above triangle is more than 90° thus the angle is an obtuse angle. So, the answer is yes.

Question 9.
b. Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 144
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: No

Explanation:
The above different have different sizes thus the triangle is scalene. It has one right angle thus the statement is not correct.

Question 9.
c. Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 145

Answer: No

Explanation:
The above different have different sizes thus the triangle is scalene. It has one right angle thus the statement is not correct.

Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 708

Question 10.
A shipping crate holds 20 shoeboxes. The dimensions of a shoebox are 6 inches by 4 inches by 12 inches. For 10a–10b, select True or False for each statement.
a. Each shoebox has a volume of 22 cubic inches.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: False

Explanation:
Shoebox volume:
V = 6 in × 4 in × 12 in
V = 288 cu. in
Thus the statement is false.

Question 10.
b. Each crate has a volume of about 440 cubic inches.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: False

Explanation:
Crate Volume:
V = 288 cu. in × 20
V = 5760 cu. in
Thus the statement is false.

Question 10.
c. If the crate could hold 27 shoeboxes the volume of the crate would be about 7,776 cubic inches.
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Explanation:
Crate Volume:
V = 288 cu. in × 27
V = 7776 cu. in
Thus the statement is true.

Question 11.
Mario is making a diagram that shows the relationship between different kinds of quadrilaterals. In the diagram, each quadrilateral on a lower level can also be described by the quadrilateral(s) above it on higher levels.
Part A
Complete the diagram by writing the name of one figure from the tiles in each box. Not every figure will be used.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 146

Answer:
Go-Math-Grade-5-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Geometry-and-Volume-img-146

Question 11.
Part B
Mario claims that a rhombus is sometimes a square, but a square is always a rhombus. Is he correct? Explain your answer.
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: Yes

Explanation:
A square is a quadrilateral with all sides equal in length and all interior angles right angles. A square however is a rhombus since all four of its sides are of the same length.

Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 709

Question 12.
Write the letter in the box that correctly describes the three-dimensional figure.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 147
Type below:
___________

Answer:
Go-Math-Grade-5-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Geometry-and-Volume-img-147

Explanation:
Prism: In geometry, a prism is a polyhedron comprising an n-sided polygonal base, a second base which is a translated copy of the first, and n other faces joining corresponding sides of the two bases.
Figure B and C are prisms
Pyramid: In geometry, a pyramid is a polyhedron formed by connecting a polygonal base and a point, called the apex. Each base edge and apex form a triangle called a lateral face. All the edges meet at the same point in the pyramid. Thus the figures A and D are pyramids.

Question 13.
Mark packed 1-inch cubes into a box with a volume of 120 cubic inches. How many layers of 1-inch cubes did Mark pack?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 148
______ layers

Answer: 5

Explanation:
Mark packed 1-inch cubes into a box with a volume of 120 cubic inches.
By seeing the figure we can say that there are 24 unit cubes.
To find the number of layers we need to divide 120 by 24
= 120 ÷ 24 = 5
There are 5 layers of 1-inch cubes.

Question 14.
A composite figure is shown. What is the volume of the composite figure?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 149
Volume = ______ cubic centimeters

Answer: 312

Explanation:
Split the figure into 2 parts.
Figure 1:
h = 3 cm
w = 6 cm
b = 4 cm
V = 4 cm × 6 cm × 3 cm = 72 cu. cm
Figure 2:
b = 10 cm
w = 6 cm
h = 4 cm
V = 10 cm × 6 cm × 4 cm = 240 cu. cm
Now add the volume of 2 figures
72 cu. cm + 240 cu. cm = 312 cu cm
Thus the volume of the composite figure is 312 cu. cm

Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 710

Question 15.
For 15a–15c, write the name of one quadrilateral from the tiles to complete a true statement. Use each quadrilateral once only.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 150
a. A Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 151 is always a parallelogram.
_________

Answer: rectangle

Explanation: Parallelograms are quadrilaterals with two sets of parallel sides. Since squares must be quadrilaterals with two sets of parallel sides, then all squares are parallelograms.

Question 15.
b. A Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 152 is always a rhombus.
_________

Answer: square

Explanation: A square is a quadrilateral with all sides equal in length and all interior angles right angles.

Question 15.
c. A Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 153 is sometimes a parallelogram.
_________

Answer: trapezoid

Explanation: A trapezoid has one pair of parallel sides and a parallelogram has two pairs of parallel sides. So a parallelogram is also a trapezoid.

Question 16.
Megan’s aquarium has a volume of 4,320 cubic inches. Which could be the dimensions of the aquarium? Mark all that apply.
Options:
a. 16 in. by 16 in. by 18 in.
b. 14 in. by 18 in. by 20 in.
c. 12 in. by 15 in. by 24 in.
d. 8 in. by 20 in. by 27 in.

Answer: C, D

Explanation:
The volume of a prism = l × w × h
1. V = 16 in × 16 in × 16 in
V = 4608 cu. in
2. V = 14 in × 18 in × 20 in = 5040 cu. in
3. V = 12 in × 15 in × 24 in = 4320 cu. in
4. V = 8 in × 20 in × 27 in = 4320 cu in
Thus the suitable answers are C and D.

Question 17.
Ken keeps paper clips in a box that is the shape of a cube. Each side of the cube is 3 inches. What is the volume of the box?
______ cubic inches

Answer: 27

Explanation:
Ken keeps paper clips in a box that is the shape of a cube.
Each side of the cube is 3 inches.
The volume of a cube = 3 in × 3 in × 3 in = 27 cu. in
Therefore the volume of the box is 27 cubic inches.

Question 18.
Monica used 1-inch cubes to make the rectangular prism shown. For 18a–18d, write the value that makes each statement true. Each value can be used more than once or not at all.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 154
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 155
a. Each cube has a volume of ____ cubic inch(es).

Answer: 1

Explanation:
Monica used 1-inch cubes to make the rectangular prism
Volume = 1 in × 1 in × 1 in = 1 cu. in.
Each cube has a volume of 1 cubic inch.

Question 18.
b. Each layer of the prism is made up of ____ cubes.
______ cubes

Answer: 20

Explanation:
We can calculate the layer by calculating the base and width
4 × 5 = 20 cubes
Each layer of the prism is made up of 20 cubes.

Question 18.
c. There are ____ layers of cubes.
______ layers

Answer: 3
By seeing the figure we can say that there are 3 layers of the cube.
You can also find the layers of the cube by calculating the height of the figure.

Question 18.
d. The volume of the prism is ____ cubic inches.
______ cubic inches

Answer: 60

Explanation:
The volume of a prism = l × w × h
V = 4 in × 5 in × 3 in
Volume = 60 cu. inches
Therefore, the volume of the prism is 60 cubic inches.

Chapter Review/Test – Vocabulary – Page No. 4910

Choose the best term from the box.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 156

Question 1.
A _____ has two congruent polygons as bases and rectangular lateral faces.
__________

Answer: prism
A prism has two congruent polygons as bases and rectangular lateral faces.

Question 2.
A _____ has only one base and triangular lateral faces.
__________

Answer: pyramid
A pyramid has only one base and triangular lateral faces.

Concepts and Skills

Name each polygon. Then tell whether it is a regular polygon or not a regular polygon.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 157
Name: __________
Type: __________

Answer:
i. hexagon
ii. regular

Explanation:
A polygon is a closed plane figure formed by three or more line segments that meet at points called vertices. It is named by the number of sides and angles it has.
The above figure has six sides and 6 angles. Thus the name of the polygon is hexagon.
Two polygons are congruent when they have the same size and the same shape. The above figure has same size and angles. Thus it is a regular polygon.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 158
Name: __________
Type: __________

Answer:
i. pentagon
ii. regular

Explanation:
A polygon is a closed plane figure formed by three or more line segments that meet at points called vertices. It is named by the number of sides and angles it has.
The above figure has five sides and 5 angles. Thus the name of the polygon is pentagon.
Two polygons are congruent when they have the same size and the same shape. The above figure has same size and angles. Thus it is a regular polygon.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 159
Name: __________
Type: __________

Answer:
i. pentagon
ii. not regular

Explanation:
A polygon is a closed plane figure formed by three or more line segments that meet at points called vertices. It is named by the number of sides and angles it has.
The above figure has five sides and 5 angles. Thus the name of the polygon is the pentagon.
Two polygons are congruent when they have the same size and the same shape. The above figure does not have the same size and angles. Thus it is not a regular polygon.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 160
Name: __________
Type: __________

Answer:
i. octagon
ii. not regular

Explanation:
A polygon is a closed plane figure formed by three or more line segments that meet at points called vertices. It is named by the number of sides and angles it has.
The above figure has 8 sides and 8 angles. Thus the name of the polygon is octagon.
Two polygons are congruent when they have the same size and the same shape. The above figure does not have same size and angles. Thus it is not a regular polygon.

Classify each figure in as many ways as possible.

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 161
1. __________
2. __________

Answer:
1. quadrilateral
2. trapezoid

Explanation:
1. A general quadrilateral has 4 sides and 4 angles.
2. A trapezoid is a 4-sided flat shape with straight sides that has a pair of opposite sides parallel.

Question 8.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 162
△ __________
∠ __________

Answer:
△ – scalene
∠ – right

Explanation:
The above triangle has different sides. Thus the triangle is a scalene triangle.
The triangle with one right angle is known as a right angled triangle.

Classify the solid figure. Write prism, pyramid, cone, cylinder, or sphere.

Question 9.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 163
__________

Answer: prism

Explanation:
In geometry, a triangular prism is a three-sided prism; it is a polyhedron made of a triangular base, a translated copy, and 3 faces joining corresponding sides.

Question 10.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 164
__________

Answer: pyramid

Explanation:
In geometry, a pentagonal pyramid is a pyramid with a pentagonal base upon which are erected five triangular faces that meet at a point (the vertex). Like any pyramid, it is self-dual.

Count the number of cubes used to build each solid figure.

Question 11.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 165
_____ unit cubes

Answer: 4

Explanation:
The figure shows that there are 4 unit cubes.

Question 12.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 166
_____ unit cubes

Answer: 7

Explanation:
By seeing the above figure we can say that there are 7 unit cubes.

Question 13.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 167
_____ unit cubes

Answer: 5

Explanation:
The figure above shows that there are 5 unit cubes.

Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 4920

Fill in the bubble completely to show your answer.

Question 14.
What type of triangle is shown below?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 168
Options:
a. acute; isosceles
b. acute; scalene
c. obtuse; scalene
d. obtuse; isosceles

Answer: obtuse; scalene

Explanation:
The sides of the triangle is different. Thus it is a scalene triangle. The angle of the triangle is an obtuse angle.
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 15.
Angela buys a paperweight at the local gift shop. The paperweight is in the shape of a hexagonal pyramid.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 169
Which of the following represents the correct number of faces, edges, and vertices in a hexagonal pyramid?
Options:
a. 6 faces, 12 edges, 18 vertices
b. 7 faces, 7 edges, 12 vertices
c. 7 faces, 12 edges, 7 vertices
d. 8 faces, 18 edges, 12 vertices

Answer: 7 faces, 12 edges, 7 vertices

Explanation:
In geometry, a hexagonal pyramid is a pyramid with a hexagonal base upon which are erected six isosceles triangular faces that meet at a point.
The hexagonal pyramid has 7 faces, 12 edges and 7 vertices.
Therefore the correct answer is option C.

Question 16.
A manufacturing company constructs a shipping box to hold its cereal boxes. Each cereal box has a volume of 40 cubic inches. If the shipping box holds 8 layers with 4 cereal boxes in each layer, what is the volume of the shipping box?
Options:
a. 160 cu in.
b. 320 cu in.
c. 480 cu in.
d. 1,280 cu in.

Answer: 1,280 cu in.

Explanation:
A manufacturing company constructs a shipping box to hold its cereal boxes.
Each cereal box has a volume of 40 cubic inches.
If the shipping box holds 8 layers with 4 cereal boxes in each layer
Multiply the number of layers with boxes
= 8 × 4 = 32
The volume of 8 layers is 40 × 32 = 1280 cubic inches
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 4930

Fill in the bubble completely to show your answer.

Question 17.
Sharri packed away her old summer clothes in a storage tote that had a length of 3 feet, a width of 4 feet, and a height of 3 feet. What was the volume of the tote that Sharri used?
Options:
a. 36 cu ft
b. 24 cu ft
c. 21 cu ft
d. 10 cu ft

Answer: 36 cu ft

Explanation:
Given,
Sharri packed away her old summer clothes in a storage tote that had a length of 3 feet, a width of 4 feet, and a height of 3 feet.
Volume = l × w × h
V = 3 ft × 4 ft × 3 ft
V = 36 cu. ft
Thus the volume of the tote that Sharri used is 36 cu. ft.
The correct answer is option A.

Question 18.
Which quadrilateral is NOT classified as a parallelogram?
Options:
a. Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 170
b. Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 171
c. Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 172
d. Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 173

Answer: Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 171

Explanation:
The opposite sides of figure b are not parallel. Thus the figure b quadrilateral is NOT classified as a parallelogram.

Question 19.
What is the volume of the composite figure below?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 174
Options:
a. 1,875 cm3
b. 480 cm3
c. 360 cm3
d. 150 cm3

Answer:
Volume of 1st cube is 5 cm × 4 cm × 5 cm = 100 cu. cm
Volume of 2nd cube is 5 cm × 4 cm × 8 cm = 160 cu. cm
Volume of 3rd cube is 5 cm × 4 cm × 5 cm = 100 cu. cm
Add all the volumes to find the volume of the composite figure
That means 100 cu. cm + 160 cu. cm + 100 cu. cm = 360 cu. cm
Therefore the volume of the composite figure is 360 cm3
The correct answer is option C.

Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 4940

Constructed Response

Question 20.
a. A video game store made a display of game console boxes shown at the right. The length, width, and height of each game console box is 2 feet.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume Chapter Review/Test img 175
What is the volume of the display of game console boxes? Show your work and explain your answer.
_____ cu ft.

Answer: 512 cu. ft

Explanation:
length = 2 ft
width = 2 ft
height = 2 ft
Volume of the display of game console boxes = 2 ft × 2 ft × 2 ft = 8 cu. ft
Number of console boxes = 64
64 × 8 cu. ft = 512 cu ft
The volume of the display of game console boxes = 512 cu ft

Question 20.
b. On a busy Saturday, the video game store sold 22 game consoles.
What is the volume of the game console boxes that are left?
_____ cu ft.

Answer: 336 cu. ft

length = 2 ft
width = 2 ft
height = 2 ft
The volume of the display of game console boxes = 2 ft × 2 ft × 2 ft = 8 cu. ft
Number of console boxes = 22
The volume of the game console boxes that are left
22 × 8 cu. ft = 176 cu. ft
The volume of the game console boxes that are left = 512 – 176 = 336 cu. ft

Performance Task

Question 21.
Look for two pictures of three-dimensional buildings in newspapers and magazines. The buildings should be rectangular prisms.
A. Paste the pictures on a large sheet of paper. Leave room to write information near the picture.
B. Label each building with their name and location.
C. Research the buildings, if the information is available. Find things that are interesting about the buildings or their location. Also find their length, width, and height to the nearest foot. If the information is not available, measure the buildings on the page in inches or centimeters, and make a good estimate of their width (such as 1/2 the height, rounded to the nearest whole number). Find their volumes.
D. Make a class presentation, choosing one of the buildings you found.

Conclusion

Hoping the knowledge shared about Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 11 Geometry and Volume has helped you clear your queries to the possible extent. Download the 5th Grade Go Math Ch 11 Geometry and Volume Answer Key free of cost and take your preparation to next level.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 9 Relate Fractions and Decimals Review/Test

go-math-grade-4-chapter-9-relate-fractions-and-decimals-review-test-answer-key

Are you looking for the best option to do self-study & score the highest marks in the exam? Then, Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 9 Relate Fractions and Decimals Review/Test is the one you need. You can ace up your preparation & perform practice tests by using the Go Math 4th Grade Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 9 Relate Fractions and Decimals Review/Test. Each and every question explained in a step-wise manner so that 4th-grade students can easily grasp the concepts and practice in an effective way.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 9 Relate Fractions and Decimals Review/Test

Is Go Math 4th Grade Solution Key Homework FL Chapter 9 Relate Fractions and Decimals Review/Test enough to practice & score high? What do you think? From our subject experts’ point of view, it is very helpful in securing max. marks. So, Download Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 9 Relate Fractions and Decimals Review/Test pdf and increase your math skills. This Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key aids the students to score the highest marks as well as gain more subject knowledge.

Review/Test – Page No. 373

Choose the best term from the box.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 9 Relate Fractions and Decimals Review Test img 1

Question 1.
One of ten equal parts is one __________.
_______

Answer: tenth
One of ten equal parts is one-tenth.

Question 2.
A __________ is a symbol used to separate dollars from cents in money amounts and to separate the ones and the tenths places in decimals.
_______

Answer: decimal point
A decimal point is a symbol used to separate dollars from cents in money amounts and to separate the ones and the tenths places in decimals.

Question 3.
A ________________ is a number with one or more digits to the right of the decimal point.
_______

Answer: decimal
A decimal  is a number with one or more digits to the right of the decimal point.

Write the fraction and the decimal shown by the model.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 9 Relate Fractions and Decimals Review Test img 2
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{7}{10}\)

Explanation:
We can see from the above figure that there are 10 blocks and among them, 7 are shaded. So, the fraction of the shaded part is \(\frac{7}{10}\)

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 9 Relate Fractions and Decimals Review Test img 3
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{52}{100}\)

Explanation:
We can see from the above figure that there are 100 boxes, in which 52 are shaded. So, the fraction of the shaded part is \(\frac{52}{100}\)

Write the number as hundredths in fraction form and decimal form.

Question 6.
\(\frac{9}{10}\)
Type below:
________

Answer: 0.9

Explanation:
The hundredth of the fraction \(\frac{9}{10}\) is \(\frac{90}{100}\). And the decimal form of the given fraction is 0.9

Question 7.
\(\frac{3}{10}\)
Type below:
________

Answer: 0.3

Explanation:
The hundredth of the fraction \(\frac{3}{10}\) is \(\frac{30}{100}\). And the decimal form of the given fraction is 0.3.

Question 8.
0.2
Type below:
________

Answer: \(\frac{2}{10}\)

Explanation:
The hundredth of the fraction \(\frac{2}{10}\) is \(\frac{20}{100}\). And the decimal form of the given fraction is 0.2

Find the sum.

Question 9.
\(\frac{5}{10}+\frac{30}{100}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{80}{100}\)

Explanation:
Given the fractions 5/10 and 30/100
The denominators of both the fractions are different. Make the denominators common.
\(\frac{5}{10}\) × \(\frac{10}{10}\) = \(\frac{50}{100}\)
\(\frac{50}{100}\) + \(\frac{30}{100}\) = \(\frac{80}{100}\)

Question 10.
\(\frac{6}{10}+\frac{4}{100}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{64}{100}\)

Explanation:
Given the fractions 6/10 and 4/100
The denominators of both the fractions are different. Make the denominators common.
\(\frac{6}{10}\) × \(\frac{10}{10}\) = \(\frac{60}{100}\)
\(\frac{60}{100}\) + \(\frac{4}{100}\) = \(\frac{64}{100}\)
\(\frac{6}{10}+\frac{4}{100}\) = \(\frac{64}{100}\)

Question 11.
0.24 + 0.1 = _____

Answer: 0.34

Explanation:
0.1 = 0.10
0.24 + 0.10 = 0.34

Compare. Write <, >, or =.

Question 12.
3.45 _____ 3.54

Answer: <

Explanation:
The decimal 3.45 is less than 3.54

Question 13.
1.7 _____ 1.70

Answer: =

Explanation:
The decimal 1.7 and 1.70 are same. Thus 1.7 = 1.70

Question 14.
8.1 _____ 8.01

Answer: >

Explanation:
8.1 is greater than 8.01

Question 15.
$4.25 _____ $3.75

Answer: >

Explanation:
$4.25 is greater than $3.75

Review/Test – Page No. 374

Fill in the bubble completely to show your answer.

Question 16.
Which fraction or mixed number and decimal is shown by the model?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 9 Relate Fractions and Decimals Review Test img 4
Options:
a. \(\frac{24}{100}\), 0.24
b. 1 \(\frac{24}{100}\), 1.24
c. 1 \(\frac{76}{100}\), 1.76
d. 1 \(\frac{24}{10}\), 1.24

Answer: 1 \(\frac{24}{100}\), 1.24

Explanation:
There are 100 blocks in each box. In that 124 blocks are shaded. So, the mixed fraction of the shaded part is 1 \(\frac{24}{100}\), 1.24
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 17.
Bethany collected 0.7 inch of rain in her rain gauge. How many hundredths of an inch did she collect?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 9 Relate Fractions and Decimals Review Test img 5
Options:
a. \(\frac{7}{100}\)
b. \(\frac{7}{10}\)
c. \(\frac{70}{100}\)
d. \(\frac{7}{1}\)

Answer: \(\frac{7}{10}\)

Explanation:
The fraction of the decimal 0.7 is \(\frac{7}{10}\)
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 18.
Pam paid for her lunch with the amount of money shown below.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 9 Relate Fractions and Decimals Review Test img 6
How much money did she spend?
Options:
a. 2 \(\frac{62}{100}\) dollars
b. 2 \(\frac{77}{100}\) dollars
c. 2 \(\frac{87}{100}\) dollars
d. 3 \(\frac{2}{100}\) dollars

Answer: 2 \(\frac{62}{100}\) dollars

Review/Test – Page No. 375

Fill in the bubble completely to show your answer.

Question 19.
Carson shaded a model to represent the part of his book he read this weekend. Which decimal represents the part of the book he read?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 9 Relate Fractions and Decimals Review Test img 7
Options:
a. 4.0
b. 0.44
c. 0.4
d. 0.04

Answer: 0.4

Explanation:
There are 10 blocks and among them, 4 are shaded. Thus the decimal form of the shaded part is 0.4.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 20.
Christelle is making a doll house. The doll house is \(\frac{6}{10}\) meter high without the roof. The roof is \(\frac{15}{100}\) meter high. What will the height of the doll house be, with the roof?
Options:
a. \(\frac{21}{100}\) meter
b. \(\frac{75}{100}\) meter
c. 1 \(\frac{6}{100}\) meter
d. \(\frac{60}{100}\) meter

Answer: \(\frac{75}{100}\) meter

Explanation:
Given,
Christelle is making a doll house. The doll house is \(\frac{6}{10}\) meter high without the roof.
The roof is \(\frac{15}{100}\) meter high.
\(\frac{6}{10}\) and \(\frac{15}{100}\) the denominators are different. So make the denominators equal first.
\(\frac{6}{10}\) × \(\frac{10}{10}\) = \(\frac{60}{100}\)
\(\frac{60}{100}\) + \(\frac{15}{100}\) = \(\frac{75}{100}\) meter
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 21.
Amie has three quarters and one nickel. If she and three girls share the money equally, what will each person get?
Options:
a. $0.10
b. $0.15
c. $0.20
d. $0.25

Answer: $0.25

Explanation:
1 quarter = $0.25
3 quarters = 3 × $0.25 = $0.75
1 nickel = $0.05
$0.75 + $0.05 = $0.80
If she and three girls share the money equally = $0.80/3 = $0.25
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Review/Test – Page No. 376

Question 22.
There is \(\frac{30}{100}\) of a liter of orange juice in one container and \(\frac{5}{10}\) of a liter of pineapple juice in another container. If Mrs. Morales combines the two juices, how much orange-pineapple juice will she have? Explain how you found your answer.
Type below:
________

Answer:
The total quantity was found by adding the quantities of individual kinds of juice. The addition was performed by expressing each fraction using the common denominator of 10, then reducing the final result.
\(\frac{30}{100}\) + \(\frac{5}{10}\)
= \(\frac{30}{100}\) + \(\frac{50}{100}\)
= \(\frac{80}{100}\)
= \(\frac{4}{5}\)

Question 23.
Write the amount of orange-pineapple juice as a decimal.
_____

Answer:
\(\frac{4}{5}\)
= 0.8
Thus the amount of orange-pineapple juice as a decimal is 0.8

Question 24.
Luke lives 0.4 kilometer from a skating rink. Mark lives 0.25 kilometer from the skating rink.
A. Who lives closer to the skating rink? Explain.
Type below:
________

Answer:
Let’s take a look at their decimal places.
For 0.4, the four is in the tenths place, therefore it’s 4/10
For 0.25, the number ends in the hundredths place, therefore it’s 25/100
To compare them, I can make the 4/10 out of 100 and we’ll see which has the larger denominator.
To do this, we multiply 4/10 by 10/10 to get 40/100.
40/100 is greater than 25/100, so Luke lives closer to the skating rink.

Question 24.
B. How can you write each distance as a fraction? Explain.
Type below:
________

Answer:
For 0.4, the four is in the tenths place, therefore it’s 4/10
For 0.25, the number ends in the hundredths place, therefore it’s 25/100

Question 24.
C. Luke is walking to the skating rink to pick up a practice schedule. Then he is walking to Mark’s house. Will he walk more than a kilometer or less than a kilometer? Explain.
Type below:
________

Answer: Less than a kilometer

Explanation:
4/10 < 5/10 or 1/2 and 25/100 < 50/100 or 1/2.
Therefore 4/10 + 25/100 < 1/2 + 1/2.
Since 1/2 + 1/2 = 1, you know that 4/10 + 25/100 < 1.

Conclusion:

If you want to do a review test, then go through the Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 9 Relate Fractions and Decimals pdf because you may know the concept of fractions and decimals precisely. In case you have any doubts about the questions and answers covered in the Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key, don’t hesitate to share with us. We the team of CCSSMathAnswer.com will work on it to clarify your dilemmas at the earliest possible. All the Best!!!